R&S ESW User Manual en 01
Uploaded by
João MendesR&S ESW User Manual en 01
Uploaded by
João MendesR&S®ESW
EMI Test Receiver
User Manual
(;ÛÌð2)
1177629802
Version 16
This manual describes the following R&S®ESW models:
● R&S®ESW8 (1328.4100K08)
● R&S®ESW8 (1328.4100K09)
● R&S®ESW26 (1328.4100K26)
● R&S®ESW26 (1328.4100K27)
● R&S®ESW44 (1328.4100K44)
● R&S®ESW44 (1328.4100K45)
The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 3.10 and higher.
© 2023 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Muenchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1177.6298.02 | Version 16 | R&S®ESW
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol , e.g. R&S®ESW is indicated as
R&S ESW.
R&S®ESW Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 15
1.1 About This Manual...................................................................................................... 15
1.2 Conventions used in the documentation..................................................................16
1.2.1 Typographical conventions............................................................................................16
1.2.2 Conventions for procedure descriptions........................................................................16
1.2.3 Notes on screenshots................................................................................................... 16
2 Safety and regulatory information......................................................18
2.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................18
2.2 Warning messages in the documentation................................................................ 21
2.3 Korea certification class B......................................................................................... 21
3 Documentation overview.....................................................................22
3.1 Getting started manual............................................................................................... 22
3.2 User manuals and help...............................................................................................22
3.3 Service manual............................................................................................................22
3.4 Instrument security procedures................................................................................ 23
3.5 Basic safety instructions............................................................................................23
3.6 Data sheets and brochures........................................................................................ 23
3.7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment (OSA).......................................23
3.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc......................................... 23
4 Preparing for use................................................................................. 24
4.1 Lifting and carrying.....................................................................................................24
4.2 Unpacking and checking............................................................................................24
4.3 Choosing the operating site.......................................................................................24
4.4 Setting up the product................................................................................................25
4.4.1 Placing the product on a bench top...............................................................................25
4.4.2 Mounting the R&S ESW in a rack................................................................................. 26
4.5 Connecting the AC power.......................................................................................... 27
4.6 Switching the instrument on and off.........................................................................27
4.7 Connecting to LAN......................................................................................................28
4.8 Connecting a keyboard.............................................................................................. 29
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 3
R&S®ESW Contents
4.9 Connecting an external monitor................................................................................ 30
4.10 Windows operating system........................................................................................31
4.11 Logging on...................................................................................................................33
4.12 Checking the supplied options..................................................................................34
4.13 Performing a self-alignment.......................................................................................34
4.14 Considerations for test setup.................................................................................... 35
4.15 Protecting data using the secure user mode........................................................... 36
5 Instrument tour.....................................................................................39
5.1 The front panel............................................................................................................ 39
5.1.1 Display (touchscreen)................................................................................................... 40
5.1.2 Power key..................................................................................................................... 41
5.1.3 System control keys...................................................................................................... 41
5.1.4 USB ports......................................................................................................................41
5.1.5 Probe power connector (3 and 5 pins).......................................................................... 42
5.1.6 Headphone jack and volume control.............................................................................42
5.1.7 Fast access knobs........................................................................................................ 42
5.1.8 RF inputs (50 Ω)............................................................................................................42
5.1.9 Trigger input and output................................................................................................ 43
5.1.10 Navigation controls........................................................................................................43
5.1.11 Keypad.......................................................................................................................... 45
5.1.12 The function keys.......................................................................................................... 45
5.2 The rear panel..............................................................................................................47
5.2.1 Removable hard disk.................................................................................................... 48
5.2.2 AC power supply connection and main power switch................................................... 48
5.2.3 Display port and DVI..................................................................................................... 48
5.2.4 LAN connector.............................................................................................................. 49
5.2.5 USB ports......................................................................................................................49
5.2.6 IF / video / demod output.............................................................................................. 49
5.2.7 Sync trigger input and output........................................................................................ 49
5.2.8 GPIB interface...............................................................................................................49
5.2.9 Aux. port........................................................................................................................50
5.2.10 External generator control option (R&S ESW-B10).......................................................50
5.2.11 OCXO (optional)............................................................................................................50
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 4
R&S®ESW Contents
5.2.12 REF INPUT / REF OUTPUT......................................................................................... 50
5.2.13 Labels on R&S ESW..................................................................................................... 51
5.2.14 Device ID.......................................................................................................................51
6 Operating the instrument.................................................................... 53
6.1 Understanding the display information.................................................................... 53
6.1.1 Channel bar...................................................................................................................54
6.1.2 Window title bar.............................................................................................................56
6.1.3 Marker information........................................................................................................ 57
6.1.4 Frequency and span information in diagram footer.......................................................58
6.1.5 Instrument and status information.................................................................................58
6.1.6 Error information........................................................................................................... 59
6.2 Accessing functions................................................................................................... 60
6.2.1 Toolbar.......................................................................................................................... 60
6.2.2 Softkeys........................................................................................................................ 62
6.2.3 Context menus.............................................................................................................. 63
6.2.4 On-screen keyboard......................................................................................................63
6.3 Changing the focus.....................................................................................................64
6.4 Entering data............................................................................................................... 64
6.4.1 Entering numeric parameters........................................................................................65
6.4.2 Entering alphanumeric parameters............................................................................... 65
6.5 Touchscreen gestures................................................................................................ 67
6.6 Displaying results....................................................................................................... 70
6.6.1 Activating and deactivating channels............................................................................ 70
6.6.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid............................................................ 71
6.6.3 Changing the size of windows.......................................................................................75
6.6.4 Switching between a split and maximized window display........................................... 76
6.6.5 Changing the display.....................................................................................................76
6.7 Getting help................................................................................................................. 77
6.8 Remote control............................................................................................................78
6.8.1 Remote desktop connection..........................................................................................78
6.8.2 Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface....................................................................... 78
7 Applications..........................................................................................79
7.1 R&S multiview............................................................................................................. 79
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 5
R&S®ESW Contents
7.2 Available Applications................................................................................................ 80
7.3 Starting an Application...............................................................................................82
7.4 Running a sequence of measurements.................................................................... 83
7.4.1 The sequencer concept.................................................................................................84
7.4.2 Sequencer settings....................................................................................................... 86
7.4.3 How to set up the sequencer........................................................................................ 86
8 Measurements and result displays.................................................... 88
8.1 Performing measurements.........................................................................................88
8.2 Bargraph configuration.............................................................................................. 90
8.3 Test automation...........................................................................................................95
8.3.1 Background information................................................................................................ 95
8.3.2 Selecting a test sequence........................................................................................... 104
8.3.3 Performing a scan....................................................................................................... 107
8.3.4 Performing a peak search........................................................................................... 116
8.3.5 Performing final measurements.................................................................................. 124
8.3.6 Configuring line impedance stabilization networks (LISN).......................................... 130
8.4 CISPR APD Measurements...................................................................................... 132
9 Common measurement settings...................................................... 135
9.1 Using the fast access knobs....................................................................................135
9.2 Using the fast access panel..................................................................................... 138
9.3 Using the user port panel.........................................................................................140
9.4 The notes display......................................................................................................141
9.5 Configuration overview............................................................................................ 142
9.6 Data input and output............................................................................................... 143
9.6.1 Configuring the input................................................................................................... 143
9.6.2 Configuring the preselector......................................................................................... 145
9.6.3 Optional external mixers............................................................................................. 147
9.6.4 External generator.......................................................................................................169
9.6.5 Configuring outputs (IF / video / demodulation).......................................................... 182
9.6.6 Configuring LISNs....................................................................................................... 186
9.6.7 Configuring additional outputs.....................................................................................186
9.7 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration..............................................................189
9.7.1 Increasing measurement sensitivity (or avoiding an input mixer overload).................189
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 6
R&S®ESW Contents
9.7.2 Amplitude settings.......................................................................................................192
9.7.3 Diagram scale............................................................................................................. 194
9.7.4 Preselector.................................................................................................................. 195
9.8 Frequency and span configuration......................................................................... 195
9.8.1 Impact of the frequency and span settings................................................................. 195
9.8.2 Frequency and span settings...................................................................................... 198
9.9 Bandwidth and filter configuration..........................................................................203
9.9.1 Impact of bandwidth and filter settings........................................................................203
9.9.2 Bandwidth and filter settings....................................................................................... 203
9.10 Trigger configuration................................................................................................ 204
9.10.1 Basics on triggered measurements.............................................................................204
9.10.2 Triggering measurements........................................................................................... 207
10 Common analysis and display functions........................................ 212
10.1 Result display configuration....................................................................................212
10.1.1 Basic evaluation methods........................................................................................... 212
10.1.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid.......................................................... 213
10.2 Zoomed displays.......................................................................................................217
10.2.1 Zoom functions............................................................................................................218
10.2.2 How to zoom into the diagram in receiver mode.........................................................220
10.3 Trace configuration...................................................................................................221
10.3.1 Basics on traces..........................................................................................................221
10.3.2 Trace configuration......................................................................................................233
10.3.3 Trace export................................................................................................................ 234
10.3.4 Copying traces............................................................................................................ 237
10.3.5 Trace mathematics......................................................................................................238
10.3.6 Spectrogram settings.................................................................................................. 239
10.3.7 How to configure traces.............................................................................................. 244
10.3.8 References..................................................................................................................248
10.4 Marker usage............................................................................................................. 250
10.4.1 Basics on markers.......................................................................................................251
10.4.2 Marker settings............................................................................................................255
10.4.3 Marker search settings and positioning functions....................................................... 259
10.5 Display and limit lines.............................................................................................. 264
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 7
R&S®ESW Contents
10.5.1 Display lines................................................................................................................ 264
10.5.2 Limit lines.................................................................................................................... 266
11 Data management.............................................................................. 282
11.1 Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset).......................................282
11.2 Protecting data using the secure user mode......................................................... 283
11.3 Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data...................... 285
11.3.1 Quick save/quick recall............................................................................................... 287
11.3.2 Configurable storage and recall.................................................................................. 290
11.3.3 How to save and load instrument settings.................................................................. 295
11.4 Import/export functions............................................................................................297
11.5 I/Q data import and export....................................................................................... 299
11.5.1 Import/export functions................................................................................................299
11.5.2 I/Q data file format (iq-tar)........................................................................................... 301
11.6 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings.................. 309
11.6.1 Print and screenshot settings......................................................................................309
11.6.2 How to store or print screenshots of the display......................................................... 319
11.6.3 Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file................................ 322
11.7 Working with test reports......................................................................................... 324
11.7.1 Designing a test report template................................................................................. 325
11.7.2 Creating a test report.................................................................................................. 329
12 General instrument setup..................................................................332
12.1 Alignment...................................................................................................................332
12.1.1 Basics on alignment.................................................................................................... 332
12.1.2 Alignment settings.......................................................................................................334
12.1.3 How to perform a self-test........................................................................................... 337
12.1.4 How to align the instrument.........................................................................................337
12.1.5 How to align the touchscreen......................................................................................338
12.2 Display settings.........................................................................................................338
12.2.1 Display settings........................................................................................................... 338
12.2.2 How to configure the colors for display and printing................................................... 349
12.2.3 How to work with the soft front panels........................................................................ 350
12.3 Toolbar configuration............................................................................................... 351
12.4 Transducers...............................................................................................................352
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 8
R&S®ESW Contents
12.4.1 Transducer.................................................................................................................. 352
12.4.2 Working with transducers............................................................................................ 353
12.4.3 Reference: transducer factor file format......................................................................363
12.4.4 How to configure the transducer................................................................................. 363
12.5 Reference frequency settings..................................................................................367
12.6 System configuration settings.................................................................................371
12.6.1 Hardware information..................................................................................................371
12.6.2 Information on versions and options........................................................................... 372
12.6.3 System messages.......................................................................................................373
12.6.4 Firmware updates....................................................................................................... 374
12.6.5 General configuration settings.................................................................................... 376
12.6.6 AC power loss behavior.............................................................................................. 378
12.7 Service functions...................................................................................................... 379
12.7.1 R&S support information............................................................................................. 379
12.7.2 Self-test settings and results....................................................................................... 380
12.7.3 Signal path check........................................................................................................381
12.7.4 Calibration signal display............................................................................................ 382
12.7.5 Service functions.........................................................................................................383
12.7.6 Hardware diagnostics..................................................................................................385
12.8 Synchronizing measurement channel configuration............................................ 386
12.8.1 General parameter coupling........................................................................................387
12.8.2 Using the custom coupling manager...........................................................................389
12.8.3 Example for a user-defined parameter coupling......................................................... 392
13 Network operation and remote control............................................ 395
13.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols............................................................... 395
13.1.1 LAN interface.............................................................................................................. 396
13.1.2 USB interface.............................................................................................................. 399
13.2 Status reporting system........................................................................................... 400
13.2.1 Hierarchy of status registers....................................................................................... 400
13.2.2 Contents of the status registers.................................................................................. 401
13.2.3 Reset values of the status reporting system............................................................... 413
13.3 GPIB languages.........................................................................................................414
13.4 The IECWIN tool........................................................................................................ 415
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 9
R&S®ESW Contents
13.5 Network and remote control settings......................................................................416
13.5.1 General network settings............................................................................................ 417
13.5.2 GPIB settings.............................................................................................................. 419
13.5.3 Compatibility settings.................................................................................................. 422
13.5.4 LAN settings................................................................................................................425
13.5.5 HUMS settings............................................................................................................ 427
13.5.6 Remote errors............................................................................................................. 433
13.5.7 Returning to manual mode ("local").............................................................................434
13.6 How to set up a network and remote control......................................................... 435
13.6.1 How to configure a network.........................................................................................435
13.6.2 How to operate the instrument without a network....................................................... 442
13.6.3 How to log on to the network.......................................................................................442
13.6.4 How to share directories (only with Microsoft networks)............................................. 445
13.6.5 How to control the R&S ESW via the web browser interface......................................445
13.6.6 How to deactivate the web browser interface............................................................. 447
13.6.7 How to set up remote desktop.................................................................................... 448
13.6.8 How to start a remote control session from a PC........................................................454
13.6.9 How to return to manual operation..............................................................................455
14 Remote commands in the receiver application...............................456
14.1 Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions............................................... 456
14.2 Common suffixes...................................................................................................... 457
14.3 Common commands.................................................................................................457
14.4 Application selection................................................................................................ 462
14.5 Measurements and result displays......................................................................... 466
14.5.1 Measurement control.................................................................................................. 466
14.5.2 Measurement sequences............................................................................................470
14.5.3 Result retrieval............................................................................................................ 472
14.5.4 Bargraph configuration................................................................................................477
14.5.5 Scan configuration...................................................................................................... 480
14.5.6 Scan table configuration..............................................................................................481
14.5.7 Peak search................................................................................................................ 489
14.5.8 Peak list.......................................................................................................................494
14.5.9 Final measurement (and trace) configuration............................................................. 499
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 10
R&S®ESW Contents
14.5.10 Final results.................................................................................................................503
14.5.11 LISN configuration.......................................................................................................507
14.5.12 CISPR APD measurement configuration.................................................................... 509
14.5.13 Preventing overlapping execution............................................................................... 510
14.5.14 Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements.............................511
14.6 Configuration.............................................................................................................513
14.6.1 Input configuration.......................................................................................................514
14.6.2 Output configuration....................................................................................................539
14.6.3 Frequency configuration..............................................................................................547
14.6.4 Amplitude configuration...............................................................................................551
14.6.5 Diagram scale............................................................................................................. 555
14.6.6 Bandwidth and filter configuration............................................................................... 555
14.6.7 Trigger configuration................................................................................................... 558
14.7 Analysis..................................................................................................................... 563
14.7.1 Result display configuration........................................................................................ 563
14.7.2 Zoomed displays......................................................................................................... 573
14.7.3 Trace configuration......................................................................................................576
14.7.4 Markers....................................................................................................................... 587
14.7.5 Display and limit line configuration.............................................................................. 611
14.8 Data management..................................................................................................... 630
14.8.1 File management........................................................................................................ 631
14.8.2 Items to store.............................................................................................................. 637
14.8.3 Instrument setting management..................................................................................640
14.8.4 Screenshots and printouts.......................................................................................... 644
14.8.5 Notes display...............................................................................................................655
14.8.6 Test reports................................................................................................................. 656
14.8.7 Measurement result export......................................................................................... 669
14.8.8 Examples: managing data...........................................................................................670
14.9 General instrument setup.........................................................................................673
14.9.1 Basic instrument setup................................................................................................673
14.9.2 Reference frequency configuration............................................................................. 675
14.9.3 Calibration and temperature check............................................................................. 678
14.9.4 Signal path check........................................................................................................684
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 11
R&S®ESW Contents
14.9.5 Transducers................................................................................................................ 686
14.9.6 Display layout and elements....................................................................................... 698
14.9.7 Measurement channel synchronization.......................................................................705
14.9.8 Network and remote control configuration.................................................................. 718
14.9.9 Configuring HUMS...................................................................................................... 725
14.9.10 System configuration check........................................................................................ 731
14.9.11 Service functions.........................................................................................................737
14.10 Using the status register.......................................................................................... 740
14.10.1 General status register commands............................................................................. 740
14.10.2 Reading out the CONDition part................................................................................. 741
14.10.3 Reading out the EVENt part........................................................................................741
14.10.4 Controlling the ENABle part........................................................................................ 742
14.10.5 Controlling the negative transition part........................................................................742
14.10.6 Controlling the positive transition part......................................................................... 743
14.11 Service request......................................................................................................... 744
14.11.1 Initiate service request................................................................................................ 744
14.11.2 Waiting for the arrival of a service request.................................................................. 746
14.11.3 Waiting without blocking the keyboard and mouse..................................................... 747
14.11.4 Service request routine............................................................................................... 748
14.11.5 Reading out the output buffer......................................................................................749
14.11.6 Reading error messages.............................................................................................749
14.11.7 Evaluation of SCPI status registers.............................................................................750
14.11.8 Evaluation of event status register.............................................................................. 751
14.12 Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models........................................... 752
14.12.1 Command set of models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A........................................... 752
14.12.2 Special features of the syntax parsing algorithms for 8566A and 8568A models....... 776
14.12.3 Special behavior of commands................................................................................... 777
14.12.4 Model-dependent default settings............................................................................... 778
14.12.5 Data output formats.....................................................................................................779
14.12.6 Trace data output formats........................................................................................... 779
14.12.7 Trace data input formats............................................................................................. 779
14.12.8 GPIB status reporting..................................................................................................779
14.13 Reference: command set of emulated PSA models.............................................. 780
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 12
R&S®ESW Contents
14.14 Reference: command set of emulated PXA models.............................................. 784
15 Maintenance, storage, transport and disposal................................787
15.1 Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 787
15.2 Storage.......................................................................................................................787
15.3 Transporting.............................................................................................................. 787
15.4 Disposal..................................................................................................................... 788
16 Troubleshooting................................................................................. 789
16.1 Error information.......................................................................................................789
16.2 Error messages in remote control mode................................................................ 791
16.3 Troubleshooting remote operation..........................................................................792
16.4 Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints......................................................................794
16.5 System recovery....................................................................................................... 796
16.6 Collecting information for support..........................................................................796
16.7 Contacting customer support..................................................................................798
List of commands.............................................................................. 800
Index....................................................................................................816
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 13
R&S®ESW Contents
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 14
R&S®ESW Preface
About This Manual
1 Preface
1.1 About This Manual
This user manual describes general instrument functions and settings common to all
applications and operating modes in the R&S ESW. Furthermore, it provides all the
information specific to EMI measurements in the receiver application.
All other operating modes and applications are described in the specific application
manuals.
The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to
obtain them. The following topics are included:
● Welcome to the R&S ESW
Introduction to and getting familiar with the instrument
● Operating modes and applications
The concept of using multiple operating modes
● Measurements
Descriptions of the individual measurements in the receiver application, including
result types and configuration settings.
● Common measurement settings
Description of the measurement settings common to all measurement types with
their corresponding remote control commands
● Common measurement analysis and display functions
Description of the settings and functions provided to analyze results independently
of the measurement type with their corresponding remote control commands
● Data management
Description of general functions to handle data files (configuration and result data,
not I/Q data)
● General instrument setup
Description of general instrument settings and functions that are independent of
the current operating mode
● Network and remote operation
Information on setting up the instrument in a network and operating it remotely.
● Remote commands
Remote commands required to configure and run measurements in a remote envi-
ronment, sorted by tasks
Remote commands required to set up the environment and to perform common
tasks on the instrument, sorted by tasks
Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually
be executed directly for test purposes
● Maintenance
Information on tasks required to maintain operability of the instrument
● Troubleshooting
Hints and tips on how to handle errors
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 15
R&S®ESW Preface
Conventions used in the documentation
● List of commands
Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual
● Index
1.2 Conventions used in the documentation
1.2.1 Typographical conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention Description
"Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as
ments" dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by
quotation marks.
[Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets.
Filenames, commands, Filenames, commands, coding samples and screen output are distin-
program code guished by their font.
Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota-
tion marks.
1.2.2 Conventions for procedure descriptions
When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per-
form the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen is described.
Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition-
ally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or
the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro-
cedures.
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the
touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a key-
board.
1.2.3 Notes on screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as many as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent
realistic usage scenarios.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 16
R&S®ESW Preface
Conventions used in the documentation
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options instal-
led. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par-
ticular product configuration.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 17
R&S®ESW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions
2 Safety and regulatory information
The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the
instructions provided here and in the following chapters.
Intended use
The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic
components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and
performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Where do I find safety information?
Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dan-
gers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by
dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
● In Chapter 2.1, "Safety instructions", on page 18. The same information is provi-
ded in many languages as printed "Safety Instructions". The printed "Safety
Instructions" are delivered with the product.
● Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation.
2.1 Safety instructions
Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according
to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions
provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation
nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended
use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the data sheet,
manuals and the printed "Safety Instructions". If you are unsure about the appropriate
use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also
need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces
and the product documentation are available.
Reconfigure or adjust the product only as described in the product documentation or
the data sheet. Any other modifications can affect safety and are not permitted.
Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by
Rohde & Schwarz are allowed to repair the product. If any part of the product is dam-
aged or broken, stop using the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service at
https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/support.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 18
R&S®ESW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions
Lifting and carrying the product
The product is heavy. Do not move or carry the product by yourself. A single person
can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical con-
dition. Look up the maximum weight in the data sheet. Use the product handles to
move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product.
Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product.
To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift
trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Choosing the operating site
Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters
can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock,
serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing. If Rohde & Schwarz provides
accessories designed for your product, e.g. a carrying bag, you can use the product
outdoors.
Unless otherwise specified, you can operate the product up to an altitude of 2000 m
above sea level. The product is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where
nonconductive contamination can occur. For more information on environmental condi-
tions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
Setting up the product
Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the prod-
uct facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so
that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure sta-
bility. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is
moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the prod-
uct, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause
injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and
stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the prod-
ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the
product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
Connecting to power
The product is an overvoltage category II product. Connect the product to a fixed
installation used to supply energy-consuming equipment such as household applian-
ces and similar loads. Keep in mind that electrically powered products have risks, such
as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Replace parts that are relevant to
safety only by original parts, e.g. power cables or fuses.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 19
R&S®ESW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions
Take the following measures for your safety:
● Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not
adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse.
● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe-
cific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conduc-
tor terminal.
● Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged.
Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure
that nobody can trip over loose cables.
● If you connect the product to an external power supply, use the one delivered with
the product or recommended in the product documentation. The external power
supply must conform to the country-specific regulations.
● Only connect the product to a power source with a fuse protection of maximum
20 A.
● Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time.
Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily
accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these
requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.
Using headphones
Take the following measures to prevent hearing damage. Before using headphones,
check the volume and reduce it if necessary. If you monitor varying signal levels, take
off the headphones and wait until the signal has settled. Then adjust the volume.
Cleaning the product
Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the
casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.
Meaning of safety labels
Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.
Potential hazard
Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.
Heavy product
Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires a suffi-
cient number of persons or transport equipment.
Electrical hazard
Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 20
R&S®ESW Safety and regulatory information
Korea certification class B
Hot surface
Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire.
Protective conductor terminal
Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This connec-
tion protects you against electric shock if an electric problem occurs.
2.2 Warning messages in the documentation
A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig-
nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do
not follow the safety precautions.
WARNING
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided.
NOTICE
Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other
property.
2.3 Korea certification class B
이 기기는 가정용(B급) 전자파 적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 하
며, 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 21
R&S®ESW Documentation overview
Service manual
3 Documentation overview
This section provides an overview of the R&S ESW user documentation. You find it on
the product page at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/esw
3.1 Getting started manual
Introduces the R&S ESW and describes how to set up and start working with the prod-
uct. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general informa-
tion, e.g. safety instructions, etc.
A printed version is delivered with the instrument. A PDF version is available for down-
load on the Internet.
3.2 User manuals and help
Separate user manuals are provided for the base unit and the firmware applications:
● Base unit manual
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control com-
mands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument
interfaces and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
● Manuals for (optional) firmware applications
Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application, includ-
ing remote control commands. Basic information on operating the R&S ESW is not
included.
The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the R&S ESW. The help
offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the base unit and
the firmware applications.
All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Inter-
net.
3.3 Service manual
Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace-
ment and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
The service manual is available for download for registered users on the global
Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS):
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 22
R&S®ESW Documentation overview
Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc.
https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com
3.4 Instrument security procedures
Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ESW in secure areas. It is avail-
able for download on the Internet.
3.5 Basic safety instructions
Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
The printed document is delivered with the instrument.
3.6 Data sheets and brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S ESW. It also lists the
options and their order numbers, and optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char-
acteristics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/esw
3.7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment
(OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
firmware version, and describe the firmware installation.
The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the
used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/esw
3.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers,
etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu-
lar topics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/esw
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 23
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Choosing the operating site
4 Preparing for use
Here, you can find basic information about setting up the product for the first time.
● Lifting and carrying..................................................................................................24
● Unpacking and checking.........................................................................................24
● Choosing the operating site.................................................................................... 24
● Setting up the product.............................................................................................25
● Connecting the AC power....................................................................................... 27
● Switching the instrument on and off........................................................................ 27
● Connecting to LAN..................................................................................................28
● Connecting a keyboard........................................................................................... 29
● Connecting an external monitor.............................................................................. 30
● Windows operating system..................................................................................... 31
● Logging on.............................................................................................................. 33
● Checking the supplied options................................................................................ 34
● Performing a self-alignment.................................................................................... 34
● Considerations for test setup.................................................................................. 35
● Protecting data using the secure user mode...........................................................36
4.1 Lifting and carrying
The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument. Do not apply exces-
sive external force to the handles.
See "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 19.
4.2 Unpacking and checking
1. Unpack the R&S ESW carefully.
2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the
R&S ESW later.
3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness.
4. Check the equipment for damage.
If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.
4.3 Choosing the operating site
Specific operating conditions ensure proper operation and avoid damage to the prod-
uct and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as ambi-
ent temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 24
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Setting up the product
See also "Choosing the operating site" on page 19.
Electromagnetic compatibility classes
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the
product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet.
● Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
– Residential environments
– Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that
supplies residential buildings
● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause
radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi-
ated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments.
If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to
eliminate them.
4.4 Setting up the product
See also:
● "Setting up the product" on page 19
● "Intended use" on page 18
4.4.1 Placing the product on a bench top
To place the product on a bench top
1. Place the product on a stable, flat and level surface. Ensure that the surface can
support the weight of the product. For information on the weight, see the data
sheet.
2. WARNING! A stack of products can fall over and cause injury. Never stack more
than two products. Otherwise, mount them in a rack.
Stack as follows:
● All products must have the same dimensions (width and length).
● Do not exceed a total load of 50 kg placed on the product at the bottom of the
stack.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 25
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Setting up the product
Left = Stacked correctly
Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products
3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product.
Prevent overheating as follows:
● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product
and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.
● Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators
or other products.
4.4.2 Mounting the R&S ESW in a rack
To prepare the rack
1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 19.
2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product.
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.
To mount the R&S ESW in a rack
1. Use an adapter kit to prepare the R&S ESW for rack mounting.
a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R&S ESW. For the order number,
see the data sheet.
b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the
adapter kit.
2. Lift the R&S ESW to shelf height.
3. Grab the handles and push the R&S ESW onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit
closely to the rack.
4. Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure
the R&S ESW in the rack.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 26
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Switching the instrument on and off
To unmount the R&S ESW from a rack
1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets.
2. Remove the R&S ESW from the rack.
3. If placing the R&S ESW on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the
R&S ESW. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.
4.5 Connecting the AC power
In the standard version, the R&S ESW is equipped with an AC power supply connec-
tor.
The R&S ESW can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself auto-
matically to it. Refer to the data sheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency.
For safety information, see "Connecting to power" on page 19.
To connect the AC power
1. Plug the AC power cable into the AC power connector on the rear panel of the
instrument. Only use the AC power cable delivered with the R&S ESW.
2. Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact.
The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data
sheet.
For details on the connector, refer to Chapter 5.2.2, "AC power supply connection and
main power switch", on page 48.
4.6 Switching the instrument on and off
Table 4-1: Overview of power states
Status LED on Power key Position of main power switch
Off gray [0]
Standby orange [I]
Ready green [I]
To switch on the R&S ESW
The R&S ESW is off but connected to power.
1. Set the switch on the power supply to position [I].
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 27
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Connecting to LAN
See Chapter 5.2.2, "AC power supply connection and main power switch",
on page 48.
The LED of the Power key is orange.
See Chapter 5.1.2, "Power key", on page 41.
2. Press the Power key.
See Chapter 5.1.2, "Power key", on page 41.
The LED changes to green.
The R&S ESW boots.
After booting, the instrument is ready for operation.
To shut down the product
The product is in the ready state.
► Press the [Power] key.
The operating system shuts down. The LED changes to orange.
If the instrument temperature exceeds the limit specified in the data sheet, the
R&S ESW automatically shuts down to protect the instrument from damage.
To disconnect from power
The R&S ESW is in the standby state.
1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in
the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first.
Set the switch on the power supply to position [0].
See Chapter 5.2.2, "AC power supply connection and main power switch",
on page 48.
The LED of the Power key is switched off.
2. Disconnect the R&S ESW from the power source.
4.7 Connecting to LAN
You can connect the instrument to a LAN for remote operation via a PC.
Provided the network administrator has assigned you the appropriate rights and adap-
ted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use the interface, for example:
● To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. to run a
remote control program
● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application (or a similar tool)
● To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
● To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 28
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Connecting a keyboard
Network environment
Before connecting the product to a local area network (LAN), consider the following:
● Install the latest firmware to reduce security risks.
● For internet or remote access, use secured connections, if applicable.
● Ensure that the network settings comply with the security policies of your company.
Contact your local system administrator or IT department before connecting your
product to your company LAN.
● When connected to the LAN, the product may potentially be accessed from the
internet, which may be a security risk. For example, attackers might misuse or
damage the product. For more information about IT security and how to operate
the product in a secure LAN environment, see the Rohde & Schwarz white paper
1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10.
► NOTICE! Risk of network failure.
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
● Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
Connect the R&S ESW to the LAN via the LAN interface on the rear panel of the
instrument.
Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required
drivers.
By default, the R&S ESW is configured to use DHCP and no static IP address is
configured.
The default instrument name is <Type><variant>-<serial_number>, for example,
ESW26-123456. For information on determining the serial number, see Chapter 5.2.14,
"Device ID", on page 51.
For more information on LAN configuration, see Chapter 13.6, "How to set up a net-
work and remote control", on page 435.
4.8 Connecting a keyboard
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan-
guage is English – US.
However, you can also connect foreign language keyboards; currently the following
languages are supported for the R&S ESW:
● German
● Swiss
● French
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 29
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Connecting an external monitor
● Russian
To configure the keyboard language
1. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the external
keyboard.
2. Select "Start > Settings > Time & language > Region & language > Add a lan-
guage" .
4.9 Connecting an external monitor
You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "Display port" con-
nector on the rear panel of the R&S ESW (see also Chapter 5.2.3, "Display port and
DVI", on page 48).
Screen resolution and format
The touchscreen of the R&S ESW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a
monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and
the screen does not react to your touch actions properly.
The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of
the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor.
If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows
configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the
monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the R&S ESW application window and
see even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the stan-
dard Windows configuration dialog box.
However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor
using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Res-
olution: Restore to default".
The R&S ESW supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels.
1. Connect the external monitor to the R&S ESW.
2. Press the [Setup] key.
3. Press the "Display" softkey.
4. Select the "Configure Monitor" tab in the "Display" dialog box.
The standard Windows "Screen Resolution" dialog box is displayed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 30
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Windows operating system
5. Select the instrument for display:
● "Display 1": internal monitor only
● "Display 2": external monitor only
● "Duplicate": both internal and external monitor
6. Tap "Apply" to try out the settings before they are accepted permanently, then you
can easily return to the previous settings, if necessary.
7. Select "OK" if the settings are suitable.
4.10 Windows operating system
The instrument contains the Microsoft Windows operating system which has been con-
figured according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup
are only required when peripherals like a keyboard or a printer are installed or if the
network configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the R&S ESW is
started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati-
cally.
Tested software
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Microsoft Windows are adap-
ted to the instrument. Only install update software released by Rohde & Schwarz to
modify existing instrument software.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 31
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Windows operating system
You can install additional software on the instrument; however, additional software can
impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has tested
for compatibility with the instrument software.
The following program packages have been tested:
● Symantec Endpoint Security – virus-protection software
● FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk
Service packs and updates
Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows-
based operating systems. They are released through the Microsoft Update website and
associated update server. Update instruments using Windows regularly, especially
instruments that connect to a network.
Firewall settings
A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access
to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends using the firewall on
your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall
enabled. All ports and connections for remote control are enabled.
Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.
Virus protection
Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection. Use strong firewall
settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde & Schwarz instru-
ment regularly. It is also recommended that you install anti-virus software on the instru-
ment. Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the
background ("on-access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially
degrading instrument performance. However, Rohde & Schwarz does recommend run-
ning it during non-critical hours.
For details and recommendations, see the following Rohde & Schwarz white paper:
● 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
To access the "Start" menu
The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Microsoft Windows functionality and
installed programs.
► Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar, or press the "Windows" key or the [CTRL
+ ESC] key combination on the (external) keyboard.
The "Start" menu and the Windows taskbar are displayed.
The Windows taskbar also provides quick access to commonly used programs, for
example Paint or WordPad. IECWIN, the auxiliary remote control tool provided free of
charge and installed by Rohde & Schwarz, is also available from the taskbar or "Start"
menu.
For details on the IECWIN tool, see Chapter 13.4, "The IECWIN tool", on page 415.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 32
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Logging on
All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Settings" menu.
For required settings, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation and to the hard-
ware description.
4.11 Logging on
Microsoft Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name
and password in a login window. By default, the R&S ESW provides the following user
accounts:
● "Instrument": an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/
domain
● "NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access
Some administrative tasks require administrator rights (e.g. the configuration of a LAN
network). Refer to the description of the basic instrument Setup ([Setup] menu) to find
out which functions are affected.
Passwords
For all default user accounts, the initial password is 894129. Note that this password is
very weak, and it is recommended that you change the password for all users after ini-
tial login. An administrator can change the password in Microsoft Windows for any user
at any time via "Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change".
Auto-login
When shipped, the instrument automatically logs on the default "Instrument" user to
Microsoft Windows (with full access) using the default password. This function is active
until an administrator explicitly deactivates it or changes the password.
Changing the password and use of auto-login function
Note that when you change the default password, the default auto-login function no
longer works!
In this case, you must enter the new password manually to log on.
Adapting the auto-login function to a new password
If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer
works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 32).
2. Open the C:\R_S\Instr\User\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.
Notepad).
3. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password
(894129) by the new password for automatic login.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 33
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Performing a self-alignment
4. Save the changes to the file.
5. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
6. Enter the command C:\R_S\Instr\User\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
7. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.
The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It is applied the
next time you switch on the instrument.
Switching users when using the auto-login function
Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login win-
dow is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when
the auto-login function is active.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 32).
2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.
For information on deactivating and reactivating the auto-login function, see "Deactivat-
ing the auto-login function" on page 444.
4.12 Checking the supplied options
The instrument can be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. To check
whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note,
proceed as follows.
1. Press the [SETUP] key.
2. Press the "System Config" softkey.
3. Switch to the "Versions + Options" tab in the "System Configuration" dialog box.
A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed.
4. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.
4.13 Performing a self-alignment
When temperature changes occur in the environment of the R&S ESW, or after updat-
ing the firmware, you have to perform a self-alignment to align the data to a reference
source.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 34
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Considerations for test setup
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a
self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement
results.
Performing a self-alignment
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
A message in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating
temperature has not yet been reached.
Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed after
installation. A dialog box is displayed indicating how much warm-up time is still
required before self-alignment can be performed.
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Press the "Alignment" softkey.
3. Select the "Start Self Alignment" button in the "Alignment" dialog box.
Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.
To display the alignment results again later
● Press the [SETUP] key.
● Press the "Alignment" softkey.
4.14 Considerations for test setup
Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation:
● Use high-quality shielded cables, for example, double-shielded RF and LAN
cables.
● Always terminate open cable ends.
● Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations.
Signal input and output levels
Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet and on the instrument, next to
the connector. Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to avoid damage to
the R&S ESW and connected devices.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 35
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Protecting data using the secure user mode
Measuring unknown signals
When measuring unknown signals, apply signal attenuation of at least 10 dB. Using a
0 dB attenuation when measuring unknown signals can damage or destroy the input
mixer.
4.15 Protecting data using the secure user mode
During normal operation, the R&S ESW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating
system, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data cre-
ated during operation.
Redirecting storage to volatile memory
Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the R&S ESW permanently, the
secure user mode was introduced (option R&S ESW-K33). In secure user mode, the
instrument’s solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to
memory permanently. Data that the R&S ESW normally stores on the solid-state drive
is redirected to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instru-
ment is switched off. This data includes:
● Windows operating system files
● Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state
● Self-alignment data
● General instrument settings such as the IP address
● Measurement settings
● User data created during operation
(see also Table 11-1)
● Any data created by other applications installed on the R&S ESW, for example, text
editors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation.
However, when the instrument’s power is switched off, all data in this memory is
cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed
state when switched on.
To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an exter-
nal storage device, such as a memory stick.
Limited storage space
The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB.
Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage
space is still available.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 36
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Protecting data using the secure user mode
Storing required data permanently
Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S ESW must be
stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This
includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.
Self-alignment data
Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature
changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new
self-alignment at the start of each new session on the R&S ESW.
Windows updates
In secure user mode, in rare cases, Windows updates trigger a reboot. We recommend
using secure user mode on R&S ESW-K33 only in private LAN without access to the
internet or disconnected to LAN to avoid unwanted Windows updates. In preparation
for Windows updates, disable secure user mode temporarily.
Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in
secure user mode:
● Firmware update
● Activating a new option key
Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have admin-
istrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general
instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument
setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
Activating and deactivating secure user mode
Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user
mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then log-
ged on to the R&S ESW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure
user mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Secure passwords
By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "Secure-
User" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after
installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to
improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the pass-
words, it is strongly recommended that you do so.
You can change the password in Microsoft Windows for any user at any time via:
"Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"
To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with
administrator rights must log on.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 37
R&S®ESW Preparing for use
Protecting data using the secure user mode
Switching users when using the auto-login function
In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account
name and password.
The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when
another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available.
For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the
general system configuration settings (see "SecureUser Mode" on page 377).
Remote control
Initially after installation of the R&S ESW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
(See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].)
Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 38
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
5 Instrument tour
On the instrument tour, you can learn about the different control elements and connec-
tors on the front and back panel of the R&S ESW.
5.1 The front panel
The front panel contains the main control elements of the R&S ESW in addition to vari-
ous connectors as shown in Figure 5-1.
1 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
Figure 5-1: Front panel of the R&S ESW
1 = Display (touchscreen)
2 = Configuration keys
3 = Navigation controls
4 = Trigger in- and outputs
5 = Radiofrequency (RF) input 1
6 = External Mixer in- and outputs
7 = Radiofrequency (RF) input 2
8 = Probe 2 power connector
9 = Fast access knobs
10 = Volume control
11 = Headphone jack
12 = Probe 1 power connector
13 = USB ports
14 = System control keys
15 = Power key
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 39
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
5.1.1 Display (touchscreen)
The touchscreen on the front panel of the R&S ESW displays the measurement
results. Additionally, the screen display provides status and setting information and
allows you to switch between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensi-
tive, offering an alternative means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the
instrument.
1 = Channel tabs: each tab contains a measurement channel.
2 = Window title bar: contains diagram-specific (trace) information.
3 = Channel bar: shows measurement settings and allows you to change those settings easily.
4 = Toolbar: contains general functionality of the firmware (print, save etc.).
5 = Input field.
6 = Softkeys: provide access to measurement functions.
7 = Result display: contains the measurement results.
8 = Status bar: contains system messages, progress bar and date and time.
9 = Diagram footer: contains diagram-specific information.
A touchscreen is a screen that is touch-sensitive, i.e. it reacts in a specified way when
a particular element on the screen is tapped by a finger or a pointing device, for exam-
ple. Any user interface elements that can be clicked on by a mouse pointer can also be
tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior, and vice versa.
Using the touchscreen, the following tasks (among others) can be performed by the tap
of your finger:
● Changing a setting
● Changing the display
● Moving a marker
● Zooming into a diagram
● Selecting a new evaluation method
● Scrolling through a result list
● Saving or printing results and settings
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 40
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
To imitate a right-click by mouse using the touchscreen, for example to open a context-
sensitive menu for a specific item, press the screen for about 1 second.
5.1.2 Power key
The power key is on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and shuts down
the instrument.
See also "Connecting to power" on page 19.
5.1.3 System control keys
System control keys provide access to the basic instrument configuration.
Refer to the User Manual for an extensive description of the system configuration func-
tionality.
Resets the instrument to its default configuration.
Selects a particular measurement application or operating mode.
Provides functionality to configure basic instrument characteristics, for example:
● the LAN connection
● the date and time
● the display configuration
● the reference frequency
● firmware update and application installation
● service functions
● transducer configuration
● configuration of the fast access panel
Provides access to the on-screen keyboard.
Turns full screen mode on and off.
Selects a window in split screen mode or browses through active windows in full
screen mode.
5.1.4 USB ports
The three USB ports on the front panel (type A) allow you to connect devices like key-
boards, mouses or memory sticks.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 41
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
The R&S ESW provides additional USB ports (including one type B port) on the rear
panel.
All USB ports support standard 2.0.
5.1.5 Probe power connector (3 and 5 pins)
The R&S ESW provides two connectors to supply accessories that require a power
supply (for example probes or transducers).
The probe power connector with five pins supports supply voltages of ±10 V and
ground. The maximum permissible current is 200 mA. This probe power connector is
suitable, for example, for transducers from Rohde & Schwarz.
The probe power connector with three pins supports supply voltages from +15 V to
-12.6 V and ground. The maximum permissible current is 150 mA. This probe power
connector is suitable, for example, for high-impedance probes from Agilent.
5.1.6 Headphone jack and volume control
The female headphone jack allows you to connect headphones (or external speakers)
with a miniature jack plug.
You can control the output voltage with the volume control next to the headphone jack.
If you connect headphones or external speakers, the R&S ESW automatically turns off
the internal speaker.
See also "Using headphones" on page 20.
Muting sound
You can turn the volume on and off easily by pressing the volume control.
5.1.7 Fast access knobs
The two knobs on the front panel are designed to provide fast access to a (predefined)
set of settings that you are using regularly, and change these settings without using the
user interface. Each knob can carry several different functions.
You can find a comprehensive description of the fast access knobs in the User Manual.
5.1.8 RF inputs (50 Ω)
The R&S ESW provides two RF inputs for connection of a device under test (DUT) to
the R&S ESW. The DUT is connected to the RF Input via cable and an approriate con-
nector (for example a male N connector).
Do not overload the RF inputs. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 42
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
For AC-coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V must never be exceeded. For DC-cou-
pling, DC voltage must not be applied at the input. In both cases, noncompliance will
destroy the input mixers.
The first RF Input supports a frequency range from 2 Hz to fmax and an attenuation
range from 0 dB to 75 dB. The second RF Input supports a frequency range from 2 Hz
to 1 GHz and an attenuation range from 10 dB to 75 dB. Attenuation levels smaller
than 10 dB at RF Input 2 are only possible when the pulse limiter is not active (refer to
the User Manual for more information).
Measuring unknown signals
When measuring unknown signals, do not use a 0 dB attenuation level. Otherwise, the
input mixer may be damaged or destroyed.
When measuring unknown signals on the second RF input, turn on the pulse limiter
feature. Otherwise, the input mixer may be damaged or destroyed in case of high
power signals.
5.1.9 Trigger input and output
The female BNC connector labeled "Trigger Input" allows you to receive an external
trigger signal.
The female BNC connector labeled "Trigger Input / Output" allows you to receive an
external trigger signal or send a trigger signal to another device.
When you are using the connector as a trigger input, you can apply voltages in the
range from 0.5 V to 3.5 V (the default value is 1.4 V). The typical input impedance is
10 kΩ.
When you are using the connector as a trigger output, the TTL compatible signal is
transmitted (0 V / 5 V).
Note that you can find another connector for trigger input and output on the rear panel.
For more information about controlling and configuring trigger input and output, refer to
the User Manual.
5.1.10 Navigation controls
The navigation controls include a rotary knob, navigation keys, and Undo / Redo keys.
They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes.
Navigating in tables
The easiest way to navigate within tables (both in result tables and configuration
tables) is to scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 43
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
5.1.10.1 Rotary knob
The rotary knob has several functions:
● For numeric entries: increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counter-
clockwise direction) the instrument parameter at a defined step width
● In lists: toggles between entries
● For markers, limit lines, and other graphical elements on the screen: moves their
position
● For active scroll bars: moves the scroll bar vertically
● For dialog boxes: Same effect as the Enter key when pressed
5.1.10.2 Navigation keys
The navigation keys can be used alternatively to the rotary knob to navigate through
dialog boxes, diagrams or tables.
Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys
The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following:
● For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the
instrument parameter at a defined step width
● In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries
● In a table: moves the selection bar vertically
● In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar: moves the scroll bar
Arrow Left/Arrow Right Keys
The <arrow left> or <arrow right> keys do the following:
● In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
● In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.
5.1.10.3 Undo/redo keys
● The [Undo] key reverts the previous action, i.e. the status before the previous
action is retrieved.
The Undo function is useful, for example, if you are performing a zero span mea-
surement with several markers and a limit line defined and accidentally select a dif-
ferent measurement. In this case, many settings would be lost. However, if you
press [Undo] immediately afterwards, the previous status is retrieved, i.e. the zero
span measurement and all settings.
● The [Redo] key repeats the previously reverted action, i.e. the most recent action is
repeated.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 44
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
The [Undo] function is not available after a [Preset] or "Recall" operation. When these
functions are used, the history of previous actions is deleted.
5.1.11 Keypad
The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding
units (see also Chapter 6.4.2, "Entering alphanumeric parameters", on page 65). It
contains the following keys:
Table 5-1: Keys on the keypad
Type of key Description
Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes.
Decimal point Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
Sign key Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. For an alphanumeric parame-
ter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
Unit keys (GHz/-dBm MHz/ Adds the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the
dBm, kHz/dB and Hz/dB) entry.
For level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the
value "1" as multiplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an
Enter key.
[Esc] key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit Mode is not active. Quits the
edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can-
cel" button it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used:
● If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and
closes the dialog box.
● If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes
the dialog box.
Backspace key If an alphanumeric entry has already been started, this key deletes the
character to the left of the cursor.
Enter key ● Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is
accepted.
● With other entries, this key can be used instead of the "Hz/dB" unit
key.
● In a dialog box, selects the default or focused element.
5.1.12 The function keys
Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func-
tions.
Refer to the user manual for an extensive description of the measurement settings and
functions.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 45
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The front panel
Provides functionality to define frequency parameters, for example:
● the receiver or center frequency
● the frequency offset
Provides functionality to configure the frequency span.
Provides functionality to configure amplitude or level characteristics, for example:
● the attenuation
● the input impedance
● the scale of the level axis
● the preamplifier
Provides functionality to automatically define various parameters like the level or fre-
quency.
Provides functionality to define various filter bandwidths.
Provides functionality to configure the measurement, for example:
● the measurement mode (single or continuous measurements)
● the number of measurement points
● the measurement time
Provides functionality to configure data acquisition and analyze measured data, for
example:
● the trace mode
● the detector
Provides functionality to configure triggered and gated measurements.
Provides functionality to activate and position absolute and relative markers (markers
and delta markers).
Performs a peak search for active markers.
If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated and the peak search is performed for it.
Spectrum application only: Provides additional analysis functions of the measure-
ment markers, for example:
● the frequency counter
● the noise measurement
● the phase noise measurement
● the AM/FM audio demodulator
Provides functionality to position and control markers, for example:
● to configure the marker search
● to configure the peak excursion
Provides the measurement functions, for example:
● the bargraph measurement (receiver application)
● the scan and final measurement (receiver application)
● the AF demodulation (receiver application)
● IF analysis
● the channel power and ACLR measurement (spectrum application)
● the occupied bandwidth measurement (spectrum application)
● the Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement (spectrum application)
● the spurious emission measurement (spectrum application)
● the signal statistics (spectrum application)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 46
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
Provides functionality to configure the measurement.
Provides functionality to control display and limit lines.
Provides functionality to configure inputs and outputs.
Starts a measurement in single measurement mode.
Starts a measurement in continuous measurement mode.
5.2 The rear panel
The rear panel contains various connectors as shown in Figure 5-2.
1 2 3 4 5 6
13 12 11 10 9
Figure 5-2: Rear panel of the R&S ESW
1 = DisplayPort connector
2 = DVI connector
3 = LAN connector
4 = Removable hard drive
5 = USB ports
6 = AC power supply and main power switch
7 = GPIB interface
8 = AUX port
9 = REF inputs and outputs
10 = Trigger in- and output
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 47
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
11 = IF / Video / Demod output
12 = Instrument Serial Number
13 = Ground connector
● Removable hard disk.............................................................................................. 48
● AC power supply connection and main power switch............................................. 48
● Display port and DVI............................................................................................... 48
● LAN connector........................................................................................................ 49
● USB ports................................................................................................................49
● IF / video / demod output........................................................................................ 49
● Sync trigger input and output.................................................................................. 49
● GPIB interface.........................................................................................................49
● Aux. port..................................................................................................................50
● External generator control option (R&S ESW-B10)................................................ 50
● OCXO (optional)......................................................................................................50
● REF INPUT / REF OUTPUT................................................................................... 50
● Labels on R&S ESW............................................................................................... 51
● Device ID.................................................................................................................51
5.2.1 Removable hard disk
The removable hard disk is accessible from the rear of the instrument.
In addition to the operating system and the firmware, the R&S ESW also stores mea-
surement data on that disk. When you remove the hard disk, you can store it and the
data on it somewhere secure.
5.2.2 AC power supply connection and main power switch
An AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the rear
panel of the instrument.
Main power switch function:
Position 1: The instrument can be started via the Power key on the front panel.
The (optional) OCXO reference frequency is warmed up.
Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply.
For details, refer to "Connecting to power" on page 19 and Chapter 4.5, "Connecting
the AC power", on page 27.
5.2.3 Display port and DVI
You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the R&S ESW to pro-
vide an enlarged display. Two different types of connectors are provided for this pur-
pose:
● Display Port
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 48
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
● DVI (digital visual interface)
For details, see Chapter 4.9, "Connecting an external monitor", on page 30.
5.2.4 LAN connector
The LAN interface allows you to connect the R&S ESW to a local network for remote
control, printouts or data transfer. The assignment of the RJ-45 connector supports
twisted-pair category 5 UTP/STP cables in a star configuration (UTP stands for
unshielded twisted pair, and STP for shielded twisted pair).
For details see Chapter 13, "Network operation and remote control", on page 395.
5.2.5 USB ports
The four USB ports on the rear panel (type A) allow you to connect devices like key-
boards, mouses or memory sticks.
The male USB connector (type B) allows you to connect the R&S ESW to a computer
and establish a remote control connection, for example.
All USB connectors support standard 2.0.
5.2.6 IF / video / demod output
The two female BNC connectors can be used for various outputs:
● Output of the intermediate frequency (IF)
● Output of the video signal
● Output of the demodulated signal (AM, FM)
Details about configuring the output type and characteristics are part of the user man-
ual.
5.2.7 Sync trigger input and output
The "Sync Trigger Input / Output" connectors allow you to synchronize several devices
(for example two R&S ESWs) with respect to the trigger signal, but also the reference
frequency. A 100 MHz signal can be output as a trigger or reference signal to another
device, and an external trigger or reference signal can be received at the input connec-
tor by the R&S ESW.
5.2.8 GPIB interface
The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote
control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable
is recommended.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 49
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
For more details, refer to Chapter 13, "Network operation and remote control",
on page 395.
5.2.9 Aux. port
A 9-pole SUB-D male connector used to provide low-voltage TTL control signals (max.
5 V). The output signals can be used to control external devices.
5.2.10 External generator control option (R&S ESW-B10)
The external generator control option provides an additional GPIB and an "AUX con-
trol" connector.
The GPIB connector can be used to connect the external generator to the R&S ESW.
The 9-pole SUB-D female "AUX control" connector is required for TTL synchronization,
if supported by the generator.
For details on connecting an external generator, see the "External Generator Control"
section of the R&S ESW User Manual.
5.2.11 OCXO (optional)
This optional OCXO generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise fre-
quency. If installed, and if no external signal is used, this signal is used as an internal
reference. It can also be used to synchronize other connected devices via the REF
OUTPUT 10 MHz connector.
Warm-up time for OCXO
When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet).
5.2.12 REF INPUT / REF OUTPUT
The REF INPUT connectors are used to provide an external reference signal to the
R&S ESW.
The REF OUTPUT connectors can be used to provide an external reference signal (or
the optional OCXO reference signal) from the R&S ESW to other devices that are con-
nected to this instrument.
Various connectors are provided for different reference signals:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 50
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
Connector Reference signal Usage
REF INPUT 1...20 MHz To provide an external reference signal on the
R&S ESW.
0...10 dBm
REF OUTPUT 1...20 MHz To provide the same external reference signal received
by the REF INPUT 1...20 MHz connector to another
0...10 dBm
device, when available.
REF OUTPUT 10 MHz To provide the internal reference signal from the
R&S ESW to another device continuously.
10 dBm
Also used to provide OCXO reference signal to another
device.
REF INPUT 100 MHz To provide an external reference signal on the
R&S ESW.
0...10 dBm
REF OUTPUT 100 MHz To provide a 100 MHz reference signal from the
R&S ESW to another device.
6 dBm
REF OUTPUT 640 MHz To provide a 640 MHz reference signal from the
R&S ESW to another device.
16 dBm
SYNC TRIGGER
The SYNC TRIGGER connector can also be used to synchronize the reference fre-
quency on several devices.
5.2.13 Labels on R&S ESW
Labels on the casing inform about:
● Personal safety, see "Meaning of safety labels" on page 20
● Product and environment safety, see Table 5-2
● Identification of the product, see Chapter 5.2.14, "Device ID", on page 51
Table 5-2: Labels regarding R&S ESW and environment safety
Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the prod-
uct has come to the end of its service life.
For more information, see "Disposing electrical and electronic equipment" on page 788.
5.2.14 Device ID
The unique device identifier is provided as a barcode sticker on the rear panel of the
R&S ESW.
It consists of the device order number and a serial number.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 51
R&S®ESW Instrument tour
The rear panel
The serial number is used to define the default instrument name, which is:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example, ESW26-123456.
The instrument name is required to establish a connection to the instrument in a LAN.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 52
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
6 Operating the instrument
The following topics provide an overview on how to work with the R&S ESW. They
describe what kind of information is displayed in the diagram area, how to interact with
the R&S ESW, and how to use the online help.
● Understanding the display information....................................................................53
● Accessing functions................................................................................................ 60
● Changing the focus................................................................................................. 64
● Entering data...........................................................................................................64
● Touchscreen gestures............................................................................................. 67
● Displaying results.................................................................................................... 70
● Getting help.............................................................................................................77
● Remote control........................................................................................................78
6.1 Understanding the display information
The following image shows the default display layout in the receiver application. All dif-
ferent information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following
sections.
1 2 3
5 4
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 53
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
1 = Channel bar: shows firmware and measurement settings
2 = Window title bar: shows diagram-specific (trace) information
3 = Diagram area: contains the measurement results and other information related to the measurement
(marker etc.)
4 = Diagram footer: shows diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application
5 = Instrument status bar: shows error messages, measurement progress, date/time etc.
Hiding elements in the display
You can hide some of the elements in the display, for example the status bar or chan-
nel bar, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup" > "Display" >
"Displayed Items").
For details, see the R&S ESW user manual.
● Channel bar.............................................................................................................54
● Window title bar.......................................................................................................56
● Marker information.................................................................................................. 57
● Frequency and span information in diagram footer.................................................58
● Instrument and status information...........................................................................58
● Error information..................................................................................................... 59
6.1.1 Channel bar
Using the R&S ESW you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels)
at the same time (although they can only be performed asynchronously). For each
channel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen. To switch from one channel display
to another, simply select the corresponding tab.
If many tabs are open, you can also select the tab selection list icon at the right end of
the channel bar and select the channel you want to see.
MultiView tab
An additional tab labeled "MultiView" provides an overview of all active channels at a
glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each individual window contains its own channel bar
with an additional button. Tap this button to switch to the corresponding channel dis-
play quickly.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 54
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
Icons in the channel bar
The star icon ( ) on the tab label indicates that the displayed trace no longer matches
the current instrument settings. This can be the case, for example, if a trace is frozen
and the instrument settings are changed. When a new measurement is performed, the
icon disappears.
The exclamation mark icon ( ) indicates that an error or warning is available for that
measurement channel. This is particularly useful if the MultiView tab is displayed.
The icon indicates the currently active channel during an automatic measurement
sequence (sequencer functionality).
Beneath the channel name, information about channel-specific settings for the mea-
surement is displayed in the channel bar. Channel information varies depending on
the active application.
The channel bar above the diagram also contains information about instrument set-
tings.
Table 6-1: Contents of the channel bar (receiver application)
Label Information
"Meas BW" Type and bandwidth of the currently selected resolu-
tion filter.
The filter type label either reads "6 dB" or "MIL". For
3 dB filters, the label is not displayed.
"Att(enuation)" Currently defined RF attenuation.
"Input" Currently used RF input, including the input coupling
(AC or DC).
"Meas Time" Currently defined measurement time.
For a scan count > 1, the measurement time is the
sum of all single measurements.
"Preamp(lifier)" Currently selected preamplifier state.
"PS" Current state of the preselector.
"Step" Currently selected scan type and frequency step
mode.
● "LIN": Stepped scan with linear frequency
steps. The frequency step size is a fix value in
Hz.
● "LOG": Stepped scan with logarithmic fre-
quency steps. The frequency step size is a per-
centage of the current frequency.
● "TD Scan": Time domain scan.
● "Fixed Freq": Fixed frequency scan.
"Notch" Current state of the notch filter.
"Out" Currently selected output type.
If phones output is on, a corresponding icon is dis-
played.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 55
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
Label Information
"LISN" Currently selected LISN and LISN phase.
For R&S ENV216, it also shows the state of the
highpass filter.
Only displayed when a LISN is included in the mea-
surement.
"SGL" Indicates the progress of single measurements.
The first number is the current measurement. The
second number is the total number of measure-
ments.
Only displayed for single measurements and if the
scan count is greater than 1.
"Frequency" Current receiver frequency.
"75 Ω" 75 Ω input impedance has been selected.
"TRG" Currently selected trigger source.
"TDF" Currently selected transducers, including the input
they have been assigned to.
Ext. Gen An external generator is being controlled by the
R&S ESW (requires optional hardware).
Icons for individual settings
In the receiver application, a bullet next to the setting indicates that automatic set-
tings are used, not user-defined settings.
In other applications, a bullet next to the setting indicates that user-defined settings
are used, not automatic settings. A green bullet indicates that this setting is valid and
the measurement is correct. A red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not pro-
vide useful results.
6.1.2 Window title bar
Each channel in the R&S ESW display can contain several windows. Each window can
display either a graph or a table as a result of the channel measurement. Which type of
result evaluation is displayed in which window is defined in the display configuration
(see Chapter 6.6, "Displaying results", on page 70). The window's title bar indicates
which type of evaluation is displayed.
Trace information in window title bar
Information on the displayed traces is indicated in the window title bar.
Trace number
Trace color Trace mode
Detector
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 56
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
Trace color Color of trace display in diagram
Trace no. Number of the trace (1 to 6)
Detector Abbreviation of the detector assigned to the trace:
● AP
Autopeak detector
● Av
Average detector
● CA
CISPR AV detector
● Mi
Min Peak / Negative Peak detector
● Pk
Max Peak / Positive Peak detector
● QP
Quasipeak detector
● RA
RMS Average detector
● Rm
RMS detector
● Sa
Sample detector
Trace Mode Abbreviation of the trace mode:
● Clrw
Clear Write: Shows the currently measured values.
● Max
Max Hold: Shows the maximum values that have been measured.
● Min
Min Hold: Shows the minimum values that have been measured.
● Average
Average: Shows the averaged values that have been measured.
● View
View: Shows a trace which remains the same when you perform another
measurement.
● Transducer
Transducer: Shows the correction values of active transducer factors.
Norm/NCor Correction data is not used.
6.1.3 Marker information
Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table,
depending on the configuration.
Marker information in diagram grid
Within the diagram grid, the x-axis and y-axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta
markers that were set are displayed, if available, as well as their index. The value in
the square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M2[1] defines marker 2 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram by default.
Marker information in marker table
In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate
marker table can be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 57
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
Label Information
"Wnd" Window type the marker is positioned in.
"Type" Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal)
"Ref" Reference (for delta markers)
"Trc" Trace to which the marker is assigned
"X-value" x-value of the marker
"Y-value" y-value of the marker
6.1.4 Frequency and span information in diagram footer
The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current
application.
The contents depend on the application and the result display.
Label Information
CF Center frequency
Span Frequency span (frequency domain display)
ms/ Time per division (time domain display)
Pts Number of measurement points or (rounded) number of currently displayed
points in zoom mode
Start Start frequency of the scan
Stop Stop frequency of the scan
6.1.5 Instrument and status information
Global instrument settings and functions, the instrument status and any irregularities
are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram.
In the MultiView tab, the status bar always displays the information for the currently
selected measurement.
The following information is displayed:
Instrument status
The R&S ESW is configured for operation with an external reference.
Selecting the "Ext Ref" icon opens a dialog box to configure the external refer-
ence.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 58
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Understanding the display information
Progress
The status of the current operation is displayed in the status bar.
In the MultiView tab, the progress bar indicates the status of the currently selected
measurement, not the measurement currently being performed by a sequencer, for
example.
Date and time
The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar.
Selecting the date and time icon opens a dialog box to configure the date and time.
Error messages and warnings
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,
are displayed in the status bar.
Knob configuration
Interfaces to configure the fast access knobs in the user interface and indicator of the
currently selected knob function.
6.1.6 Error information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,
are displayed in the status bar.
Depending on the type of message, the status message is indicated in varying colors.
Table 6-2: Status bar information - color coding
Color Type Description
Red Error An error occurred at the start or during a measurement, e.g. due to missing
data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be started or com-
pleted correctly.
Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement, e.g. the settings no lon-
ger match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was
interrupted temporarily.
Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 59
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Accessing functions
Color Type Description
No color No errors No message displayed - normal operation.
Green Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show-
successful ing a message.
If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed
next to the channel name ( ). This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is dis-
played, as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the
currently selected channel only.
For a description of possible errors, see the R&S ESW user manual.
6.2 Accessing functions
All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using the user inter-
face. Apart from instrument specific keys, all other keys that correspond to an external
keyboard (for example arrow keys, [Enter] key) operate conform to Microsoft.
For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them:
● Using the touchscreen
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, for example the keypad, rotary
knob, or arrow and position keys.
The measurement and instrument functions and settings can be accessed by selecting
one of the following elements:
● System and function keys on the front panel of the instrument
● Softkeys on the touchscreen
● Context menus for specific elements on the touchscreen
● Icons on the tool bar in the touchscreen
● Displayed setting on the touchscreen
● Toolbar.................................................................................................................... 60
● Softkeys.................................................................................................................. 62
● Context menus........................................................................................................63
● On-screen keyboard................................................................................................63
6.2.1 Toolbar
The icons in the toolbar provide access to general functions.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 60
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Accessing functions
You can hide the toolbar display, for example when using remote control, in order to
enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed
Items"). See the R&S ESW User Manual for details.
Windows: opens the Windows "Start" menu and task bar.
Open: opens a file from the instrument or an external device ("Save/Recall" menu).
Store: stores data on the instrument or an external device ("Save/Recall" menu).
Print: defines print settings ("Print" menu).
Report Generator: opens the softkey menu to configure a report.
Undo: reverts last operation
Redo: repeats previously reverted operation
Measurement zoom: applies to the next display you select;
Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom
area; the selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram with adapted measurement
settings which displays the selected extract of the trace.
Also provides a context menu to determine the firmware behavior for touch gestures:
● "Level Lock"
(Default:) The reference level (and thus the attenuation) remains unchanged
during touch gestures on the screen.
● "X-Lock"
The x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
● "Y-Lock"
The y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
● "Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)"
Automatically adapts the measurement settings to the currently zoomed display
Zoom mode: displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to
define the zoom area.
Multiple zoom mode: multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram.
Zoom off: displays the diagram in its original size.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 61
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Accessing functions
SmartGrid: activates "SmartGrid" mode to configure the screen layout.
Sequencer: opens the "Sequencer" menu to perform consecutive measurements.
Help (+ Select): allows you to select an element for which context-specific help is dis-
played.
Help: displays context-sensitive help topic for currently selected element.
Create report: creates a new measurement report and deletes previous report data.
Create report: creates a new measurement report without deleting previous report
data.
RF input off: Signal applied to the RF input is not measured (instead the signal path
of the calibration signal is used).
Note that this icon is only visible if you deliberately turn it on.
([SETUP] > "Display" > "Displayed Items" > "Input Terminator")
Frequency lock: Frequency does not change when you turn the rotary knob.
Only applies to the frequency. You can still change other parameters with the rotary
knob.
Print immediately: prints the current display (screenshot) as configured.
6.2.2 Softkeys
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument.
Softkeys are dynamic: depending on the selected function key, a different list of soft-
keys is displayed on the right side of the screen.
A list of softkeys for a certain function key is also called a menu. Softkeys can either
perform a specific function or open a dialog box.
Recognizing the softkey status by color
Color Meaning
orange associated dialog box is open
blue associated function is active; for toggle keys: currently active state
gray text instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 62
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Accessing functions
You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, in order to enlarge
the display area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items").
See the User Manual for details.
6.2.3 Context menus
Several items in the diagram area have context-sensitive menus (for example markers,
traces or the channel bar). If you right-click on one of these items (or tap it for about 1
second), a menu is displayed which contains the same functions as the corresponding
softkey. This is useful, for example, when the softkey display is hidden.
6.2.4 On-screen keyboard
The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with-
out having to connect an external keyboard.
The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On-
Screen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen.
When you press this key, the display switches between the following options:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 63
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Entering data
● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen
● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen
● No keyboard displayed
You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field
to another in dialog boxes.
6.3 Changing the focus
Any selected function is always performed on the currently focused element in the dis-
play, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focused is indicated by
a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey, marker etc.).
Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the touchscreen.
Alternatively, use the "Tab" key on the on-screen keyboard or the rotary knob to move
the focus from one element to the next on the display.
To move the focus between any displayed diagrams or tables in a window, press the
"Change focus" key on the front panel. The focus moves from the diagram to the first
table to the next table etc. and then back to the diagram, within the same window.
In fullscreen mode, where a single window is displayed in full size on the screen, this
key switches the focus (and the display) from one active window to the next.
6.4 Entering data
You can enter data in dialog boxes using any of the following methods:
● Using the touchscreen, via the on-screen keyboard
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
navigation keys
The rotary knob acts like the [ENTER] key when it is pressed.
● Using a connected external keyboard
Transparent dialog boxes
You can change the transparency of the dialog boxes to see the results in the windows
behind the dialog box. Thus, you can see the effects that the changes you make to the
settings have on the results immediately.
To change the transparency, select the transparency icon at the top of the dialog box.
A slider is displayed. To hide the slider, select the transparency icon again.
(The title bar of the dialog box is always slightly transparent and is not affected by the
slider.)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 64
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Entering data
Particularities in Windows dialog boxes
In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are
used. In these dialog boxes, the rotary knob and function keys do not work. Use the
touchscreen instead.
6.4.1 Entering numeric parameters
If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.
1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame-
ter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the [UP] or [DOWN] keys (large
steps).
2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
The unit is added to the entry.
3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
[ENTER] key or any of the unit keys.
The editing line is highlighted to confirm the entry.
6.4.2 Entering alphanumeric parameters
If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter
numbers and (special) characters (see Chapter 6.2.4, "On-screen keyboard",
on page 63).
Alternatively, you can use the keypad. Every alphanumeric key represents several
characters and one number. The decimal point key (.) represents special characters,
and the sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment,
refer to Table 6-3.
You can change the default behavior of the keypad for text input. This is useful if you
frequently enter numeric values in text fields, for example to define file names consist-
ing of numbers.
For details, see "Number block behavior" on page 378.
To enter numbers and (special) characters via the keypad
1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.
2. All characters available via this key are displayed.
3. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your
desired value is displayed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 65
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Entering data
4. With every key stroke, the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possi-
ble values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For
information on the series, refer to Table 6-3.
5. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).
6. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key
again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.
To enter a blank
► Press the "Space" bar, or press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds.
To correct an entry
1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.
2. Press the [BACKSPACE] key.
The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted.
3. Enter your correction.
To complete the entry
► Press the [ENTER] key or the rotary knob.
To abort the entry
► Press the [ESC] key.
The dialog box is closed without changing the settings.
Table 6-3: Keys for alphanumeric parameters
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided
(upper inscription)
7 7µΩ°€¥$¢
8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç
9 DEF9É
4 GHI4
5 JKL5
6 MNO6ŇÖ
1 PQRS1
2 TUV2Ü
3 WXYZ3
0 <blank> 0 – @ + / \ < > = % &
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 66
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Touchscreen gestures
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided
(upper inscription)
. .*:_,;"'?()#
– <toggles between capital and small letters>
6.5 Touchscreen gestures
A touchscreen allows you to interact with the software using various finger gestures on
the screen. The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are
described here. Further actions using the same gestures may be possible.
Tapping
Touch the screen quickly, usually on a specific element.
You can tap most elements on the screen; in particular, any elements you can also
click on with a mouse pointer.
Figure 6-1: Tapping
Double-tapping
Tap the screen twice, in quick succession.
Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to
restore the original size.
Dragging
Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on
the display the whole time.
By dragging your finger over a table or diagram you can pan the displayed area of the
table or diagram to show results that were previously out of view.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 67
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Touchscreen gestures
Figure 6-2: Dragging
Pinching and spreading two fingers
Move two fingers together on the display (pinch) or move two fingers apart on the dis-
play (spread).
When you pinch two fingers in the display, you decrease the size of the currently dis-
played area, showing the surrounding areas previously out of view.
When you spread two fingers in the display, you increase the size of the currently dis-
played area, showing more details.
You can pinch or spread your fingers vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. The direction
in which you move your fingers determines which dimension of the display is changed.
Figure 6-3: Pinching
Figure 6-4: Spreading
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 68
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Touchscreen gestures
Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings
When you change the display using touch gestures, the corresponding measurement
settings are adapted. This is different to selecting an area on the screen in zoom
mode, where merely the resolution of the displayed trace points is changed temporarily
(graphical zoom).
You can prevent the firmware from changing specific settings using the options in the
context menu for the measurement zoom icon. By default, the reference level is locked
and thus not changed automatically due to touch gestures.
Mouse vs. touch actions
Any user interface elements that react to actions by a mouse pointer also react to fin-
ger gestures on the screen, and vice versa. The following touch actions correspond to
mouse actions:
Table 6-4: Correlation of mouse and touch actions
Mouse operation Touch operation
Click Tap
Double-click Double-tap
Click and hold Touch and hold
Right-click Touch, hold for 1 second and release
Drag-&-drop (= click and hold, then drag and Touch, then drag and release
release)
Mouse wheel to scroll up or down Swipe
Dragging scrollbars to scroll up or down, left or right Swipe
In (graphical) Zoom mode only: dragging the bor- Touch, then drag and release
ders of the displayed rectangle to change its size
Example:
You can scroll through a long table in conventional mouse operation by clicking in the
table's scrollbar repeatedly. In touch operation, you would scroll through the table by
dragging the table up and down with your finger.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 69
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
6.6 Displaying results
The R&S ESW provides several instrument applications for different analysis tasks and
different types of signals, for example the Receiver application, the Spectrum applica-
tion or the I/Q Analyzer. For each application, a new measurement channel is created
and displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
The results of a measurement channel can be evaluated in many different ways, both
graphically and numerically. For each evaluation method the results are displayed in a
separate window in the tab.
The R&S ESW allows you to configure the display to suit your specific requirements
and optimize analysis.
6.6.1 Activating and deactivating channels
When you activate an application, a new measurement channel is created which deter-
mines the measurement settings for that application. The same application can be acti-
vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same
application. Whenever you switch channels, the corresponding measurement settings
are restored. Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
An additional tab ("MultiView") provides an overview of all currently active channels at
once.
Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently
active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecu-
tively, a Sequencer function is provided.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 70
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
To start a new channel
1. Select the [Mode] key.
2. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the required application on the "New Channel" tab.
A new tab is displayed for the new channel.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 463/ INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate
on page 463
To change the application in an active channel
1. Select the tab of the channel you want to change.
2. Select the [Mode] key.
3. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the new application to be displayed on the
"Replace Current Channel" tab.
The selected application is displayed in the current channel.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 463
To close a measurement channel
►
Select the "Close" icon on the tab of the measurement channel.
The tab is closed, any running measurements are aborted, and all results for that
channel are deleted.
Remote command:
INSTrument:DELete on page 464
6.6.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a
separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per
channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde &
Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the
SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different
layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
● Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 71
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
● Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns.
● Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well.
● All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons
than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same
evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously.
● New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to
the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval-
uation icon in relation to the existing windows.
● All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When Smart-
Grid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu dis-
play. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu
display is restored.
● Background information: the smartgrid principle.....................................................72
● How to activate smartgrid mode..............................................................................73
● How to add a new result window.............................................................................74
● How to close a result window..................................................................................74
● How to arrange the result windows......................................................................... 75
6.6.2.1 Background information: the smartgrid principle
SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors
and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where
you drop the window determines its position on the screen.
Figure 6-5: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 72
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which
the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win-
dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate
the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows:
above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 6-6). If an existing win-
dow would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.
Positioning the window
The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four
columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows
always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A
single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can
be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if
the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).
1
A
B 2 3 2 3 2
C
1
Figure 6-6: SmartGrid window positions
1 = Insert row above or below the existing row
2 = Create a new column in the existing row
3 = Replace a window in the existing row
SmartGrid functions
Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and
move functions.
The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the
size and position of the other displayed windows.
The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remain-
ing windows.
6.6.2.2 How to activate smartgrid mode
All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid
mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the Smart-
Grid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
► To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 73
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar.
● Select the "Display Config" button in the configuration "Overview".
● Select the "Display Config" softkey from the [Meas Config] menu.
The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.
To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the "Close"
icon in the right-hand corner of the toolbar, or press any key.
6.6.2.3 How to add a new result window
Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows
can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).
1. Activate SmartGrid mode.
All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar.
2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar.
If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the
screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons
and move it up or down until the required icon appears.
3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed
in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See Chapter 6.6.2.5,
"How to arrange the result windows", on page 75 for more information on position-
ing the window).
Remote command:
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 569
6.6.2.4 How to close a result window
► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the
window.
Remote command:
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 567 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
on page 570
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 74
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
6.6.2.5 How to arrange the result windows
1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation
window.
2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid.
A blue area shows where the window will be placed.
3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue.
4. Drop the window in the target area.
The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons
are displayed in each window.
5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.
Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 567 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace
on page 570
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 566
6.6.3 Changing the size of windows
Each channel tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results
using different methods. A "splitter" allows you to change the size of neighboring win-
dows.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 75
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Displaying results
The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode.
► To change the size of two neighboring windows, drag the splitter between the win-
dows in either direction.
6.6.4 Switching between a split and maximized window display
To get an overview of the results, displaying several windows at the same time may be
helpful. However, the individual windows may become rather small. In this case it is
useful to maximize an individual window to the entire screen temporarily in order to
analyze the results in more detail.
To switch between a split and a maximized display without having to close and re-open
windows, press the [SPLIT/MAXIMIZE] key on the front panel. In maximized display,
the currently focused window is maximized. In split display, all active windows are dis-
played.
Alternatively, double-tap the title bar of a window to maximize it.
6.6.5 Changing the display
The display can be optimized for your individual needs. The following display functions
are available and are described in detail in Chapter 12.2, "Display settings",
on page 338 and Chapter 10.1, "Result display configuration", on page 212.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 76
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Getting help
● Displaying a simulation of the entire front panel of the instrument on the screen
("Front Panel")
● Displaying the main function hardkeys in a separate window on the screen ("Mini
Front Panel")
● Hiding or showing various screen elements
● Selecting a display theme and colors
● Changing the display update rate
● Activating or deactivating the touch-sensitivity of the screen
● Zooming into the diagram
6.7 Getting help
If any questions or problems concerning the R&S ESW arise, an extensive online help
system is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time. The help sys-
tem is context-sensitive and provides information specifically for the current operation
or setting to be performed. In addition, general topics provide an overview on complete
tasks or function groups as well as background information.
The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the "Help" icons on the
toolbar or by pressing the [F1] key on an external or the on-screen keyboard.
To call context-sensitive help
► To display the "Help" dialog box for the currently focused screen element, e.g. a
softkey or a setting in an opened dialog box, select the "Help" icon on the toolbar.
The "Help" dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about
the focused screen element is displayed.
If no context-specific help topic is available, a more general topic or the "Content"
tab is displayed.
For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no context-
sensitive help is available.
To display a help topic for a screen element not currently focused
1. Select the "Help pointer" icon on the toolbar.
The pointer changes its shape to a "?" and an arrow.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 77
R&S®ESW Operating the instrument
Remote control
2. Select the screen element to change the focus.
A topic containing information about the selected (now focused) screen element is
displayed.
6.8 Remote control
In addition to working with the R&S ESW interactively, located directly at the instru-
ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods
for remote control are supported:
● Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network
(See the R&S ESW user manual.)
● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network
● Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the User Manual.
The R&S ESW is delivered with IECWIN installed, the auxiliary remote control tool pro-
vided free of charge by Rohde & Schwarz.
For details on the IECWIN tool, see the "Network and Remote Control" chapter of the
R&S ESW User Manual.
6.8.1 Remote desktop connection
Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control
the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instru-
ment is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote com-
puter. Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and network
resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the instrument is possible.
The Remote Desktop Client is part of the installed Windows operating system. For
other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on.
6.8.2 Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface
You can connect a PC to the R&S ESW via the GPIB interface to send remote com-
mands to control and operate the instrument. You can configure the GPIB address and
the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default but can be
changed to emulate other instruments.
A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 78
R&S®ESW Applications
R&S multiview
7 Applications
The R&S ESW provides several applications for different analysis tasks (for example
the Receiver application or the I/Q Analyzer). When you activate an application, the
R&S ESW creates a new measurement channel which in turn determines the mea-
surement settings for that application. You can use the same application with different
measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application. Each
channel is represented by a separate tab on the screen.
Note that the number of channels may be limited by the available memory of the
R&S ESW.
Switching between applications
When you enter another application for the first time, a set of selected parameters is
passed on from the current application to the other one, for example the measurement
frequency or the attenuation. Thus, you can switch between applications quickly and
easily.
You can also define a fix set of parameters that are synchronized between applica-
tions. For more information see Chapter 12.8, "Synchronizing measurement channel
configuration", on page 386.
● R&S multiview......................................................................................................... 79
● Available Applications............................................................................................. 80
● Starting an Application............................................................................................ 82
● Running a sequence of measurements.................................................................. 83
7.1 R&S multiview
Each application is displayed in a separate tab. An additional tab ("MultiView") provides
an overview of all currently active channels at a glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each
individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button. Select this
button to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 79
R&S®ESW Applications
Available Applications
Remote command:
DISPlay:FORMat on page 563
7.2 Available Applications
The R&S ESW provides several applications for specific measurement tasks.
Spectrogram application
Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application, but rather a trace evalua-
tion method, thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configu-
ration, not by creating a new channel. Spectrograms are configured and activated in
the "Trace" settings. See Chapter 10.3.1.3, "Working with spectrograms", on page 227
for details.
Receiver........................................................................................................................ 80
CISPR APD...................................................................................................................81
Spectrum.......................................................................................................................81
I/Q Analyzer.................................................................................................................. 81
Analog Demodulation....................................................................................................81
Real-Time Spectrum..................................................................................................... 81
Real-Time Spectrogram................................................................................................ 81
Receiver
The Receiver application provides measurement functions to perform EMC measure-
ments.
All functions of the Receiver application are described in this document.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 80
R&S®ESW Applications
Available Applications
Remote command:
INST:SEL REC, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
CISPR APD
The CISPR APD (Amplitude Probability Distribution) application provides measurement
functions to determine the likelihood of emissions being above a certain level.
For details see Chapter 8.4, "CISPR APD Measurements", on page 132.
Remote command:
INST:SEL APD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
Spectrum
In the Spectrum application the provided functions correspond to those of a conven-
tional spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the RF
input signal over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep
time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. This applica-
tion is used in the initial configuration.
For details refer to the Spectrum Analyzer User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL SAN, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
I/Q Analyzer
The I/Q Analyzer application provides measurement and display functions for I/Q data.
For details see the I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL IQ, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
Analog Demodulation
The Analog Demodulation application provides measurement functions for demodulat-
ing AM, FM, or PM signals.
For details see the Analog Demodulation User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL ADEM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
Real-Time Spectrum
The Real-Time Spectrum application requires an instrument equipped with the Real-
Time Spectrum option. This application provides real-time measurement functions.
For details see the R&S ESW Real-Time User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL RTIM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
Real-Time Spectrogram
The Real-Time Spectrogram application requires an instrument equipped with the
Real-Time Spectrogram option. This application provides real-time spectrogram mea-
surement functions.
For details see the R&S ESW Real-Time Spectrogram User Manual.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 81
R&S®ESW Applications
Starting an Application
Remote command:
INST:SEL RTSG, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
7.3 Starting an Application
Access
► [MODE] > "<application>"
The default application that is running when you start the R&S ESW is the Receiver
application.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 14.4,
"Application selection", on page 462.
The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name already
exists, a sequential number is added.
You can define a different channel name by selecting (double-click) the corresponding
label.
In remote control, the name of the measurement channel can also be changed. For
details and an overview of default names see INSTrument:LIST? on page 464.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 82
R&S®ESW Applications
Running a sequence of measurements
Switching between applications
When you enter a new application, a set of parameters is passed on from the current
application to the new one, for example the measurement frequency or the attenuation.
You can also define a fix set of parameters that are synchronized between applica-
tions. For more information see Chapter 12.8, "Synchronizing measurement channel
configuration", on page 386.
To deactivate a channel, simply close the corresponding tab.
New Channel.................................................................................................................83
Replace Current Channel..............................................................................................83
Duplicate Current Channel............................................................................................83
New Channel
The applications selected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel, i.e. a
new tab in the display.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 463
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
Replace Current Channel
The applications selected on this tab are started in the currently displayed measure-
ment channel, replacing the current application.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 463
Duplicate Current Channel
The currently active channel can be duplicated, i.e. a new channel of the same type
and with the identical measurement settings is started. The name of the new channel is
the same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g. "Spectrum" -
> "Spectrum 2").
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate on page 463
7.4 Running a sequence of measurements
Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently
active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecu-
tively, a Sequencer function is provided.
● The sequencer concept...........................................................................................84
● Sequencer settings................................................................................................. 86
● How to set up the sequencer.................................................................................. 86
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 83
R&S®ESW Applications
Running a sequence of measurements
7.4.1 The sequencer concept
The instrument can only activate one specific channel at any time. Thus, only one
measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active
channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a
Sequencer function is provided, which changes the channel of the instrument as
required. If activated, the measurements configured in the currently defined "Channel"s
are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs.
For each individual measurement, the sweep count is considered. Thus, each mea-
surement may consist of several sweeps. The currently active measurement is indica-
ted by a symbol in the tab label.
The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measure-
ments are performed. Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently dis-
played tab.
Sequencer modes
Three different Sequencer modes are available:
● Single Sequence
Similar to single sweep mode; each measurement is performed once, until all mea-
surements in all defined "Channel"s have been performed.
● Continuous Sequence
Similar to continuous sweep mode; the measurements in each defined "Channel"
are performed one after the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential
operation is stopped. This is the default Sequencer mode.
● Channel-defined Sequence
First, a single sequence is performed. Then, only "Channel"s in continuous sweep
mode are repeated continuously.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 84
R&S®ESW Applications
Running a sequence of measurements
Example: Sequencer procedure
Assume the following active channel definition:
Tab name Application Sweep mode Sweep count
Spectrum Spectrum Cont. Sweep 5
Spectrum 2 Spectrum Single Sweep 6
Spectrum 3 Spectrum Cont. Sweep 2
IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer Single Sweep 7
For Single Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer
For Continuous Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
...
For Channel-defined Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3,
5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3,
...
Run Single/Run Cont and Single Sweep/Sweep Continuous keys
While the Sequencer is active, the [Run Single] and [Run Cont] keys control the
Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [Run Single] starts the Sequencer in single mode,
while [Run Cont] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 85
R&S®ESW Applications
Running a sequence of measurements
The "Single Sweep" and "Continuous Sweep"softkeys control the sweep mode for the
currently selected channel only; the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the
Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this
case, a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer. A channel
in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly.
7.4.2 Sequencer settings
The "Sequencer" menu is available from the toolbar.
Functions of the Sequencer in the Receiver application described elsewhere:
● "Performing sequenced measurements" on page 89
Sequencer State........................................................................................................... 86
Sequencer Mode...........................................................................................................86
Sequencer State
Activates or deactivates the Sequencer. If activated, sequential operation according to
the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 471
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 470
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt on page 470
Sequencer Mode
Defines how often which measurements are performed. The currently selected mode
softkey is highlighted blue. During an active Sequencer process, the selected mode
softkey is highlighted orange.
"Single Sequence"
Each measurement is performed once, until all measurements in all
active channels have been performed.
"Continuous Sequence"
The measurements in each active channel are performed one after
the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential operation is
stopped.
This is the default Sequencer mode.
Remote command:
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE on page 471
7.4.3 How to set up the sequencer
In order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function
is provided.
1. Configure a channel for each measurement configuration as required, including the
sweep mode.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 86
R&S®ESW Applications
Running a sequence of measurements
2. In the toolbar, select the "Sequencer" icon.
The "Sequencer" menu is displayed.
3. Toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "On".
A continuous sequence is started immediately.
4. To change the Sequencer mode and start a new sequence immediately, select the
corresponding mode softkey, or press the [Run Single] or [Run Cont] key.
The measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one
after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped.
The result displays in the individual channels are updated as the measurements
are performed.
To stop the sequencer
► To stop the Sequencer temporarily, press the highlighted [Run Single] or [Run
Cont] key (not for a channel-defined sequence). To continue the Sequencer, press
the key again.
To stop the Sequencer permanently, select the "Sequencer" icon in the toolbar and
toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "Off".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 87
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Performing measurements
8 Measurements and result displays
The measurements and result displays available in the Receiver application allow you
to analyze the frequency spectrum for possible interferers and the characteristics of
those interferers.
● Performing measurements......................................................................................88
● Bargraph configuration............................................................................................90
● Test automation.......................................................................................................95
● CISPR APD Measurements.................................................................................. 132
8.1 Performing measurements
The R&S ESW provides several approaches to do measurements and acquire the sig-
nal data.
Access: [SWEEP]
Functions in the "Sweep" menu described elsewhere:
● "Measurement Time" on page 93
● "Selecting the scan type" on page 106
● "Select Frame" on page 241
● Chapter 8.3.3.1, "Designing a scan table", on page 108
Performing continuous measurements......................................................................... 88
Performing single measurements................................................................................. 89
Performing sequenced measurements......................................................................... 89
Performing continuous measurements
When you measure continuously, the measurement is repeated until you deliberately
stop it.
The duration of each individual measurement cycle (for example a single bargraph
measurement) depends on the measurement time you have set for the measurement
in question. After each measurement cycle, the data of the previous cycle is overwrit-
ten and replaced by the new data. Exception: When you are using a max or min hold
function, the application keeps the highest or lowest values and replaces old data only
if the current data contains a new maximum or minimum.
The R&S ESW allows you to select the measurement mode for the bargraph and the
scan separately. When you select a continuous bargraph measurement, IF analysis
(including the spectrogram) is also performed continuously. When you select a continu-
ous scan, the scan spectrogram is also updated continuously. Running a continuous
final measurement is not possible.
▶ To start a continuous scan, press either the [RUN CONT] key on the front panel or
the "Continuous Scan" softkey in the "Sweep" menu.
▶ To start a continuous bargraph measurement, press the "Continuous Bargraph" soft-
key in the "Sweep" menu.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 88
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Performing measurements
Note: Pressing the [RUN CONT] key again interrupts the scan (see Chapter 8.3.3.2,
"Interrupting a scan", on page 108) and does not stop it.
Continuous measurements are the default measurement mode.
Remote command:
Selection: INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 468
Initialization: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 469
Performing single measurements
When you run a single measurement, the measurement is performed once and then
stopped. The duration of the measurement depends on the measurement time.
Note that a single measurement does not necessarily consist of a single measurement.
A single measurement can consist of several measurements, whose number you can
define with the Scan Count. In that case, the measurement stops when all measure-
ments defined by the scan count or bargraph count are done.
The R&S ESW allows you to select the measurement mode for the bargraph and the
scan separately. When you select a single bargraph measurement, IF analysis also
stops when the bargraph measurement stops. Note, however, that the time defined for
a single bargraph measurement can result in more than one update of the IF analysis
trace (including the IF spectrogram). When you select a single scan, the spectrogram
update also stops when the scan stops, but it can consist of several new lines in the
spectrogram, depending on the configuration.
▶ To start a single scan, press either the [RUN SINGLE] key on the front panel or the
"Single Scan" softkey in the "Sweep" menu.
▶ To start a single bargraph measurement, press the "Single Bargraph" softkey in the
"Sweep" menu.
Note: Pressing the [RUN SINGLE] key again interrupts the scan (see Chapter 8.3.3.2,
"Interrupting a scan", on page 108) and does not stop it.
Note on performing continuous sequenced measurements:
When you are using the sequencer, you can select the measurement mode for each
measurement channel that is part of the sequence.
Thus, the "Single Scan" and "Single Bargraph" softkeys only control the measurement
mode for the currently selected measurement channel (for a channel defined
sequence). In addition, the [RUN SINGLE] key in that case controls the sequencer, not
a particular channel.
Remote command:
Selection: INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 468
Single scan or bargraph: INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 469
Single final measurement: INITiate<n>:FMEasurement on page 469
Single test sequence: INITiate<n>:EMITest on page 468
Performing sequenced measurements
When you run a sequenced measurement, you can combine measurements of several
applications into a sequence of measurements. This sequence of measurements is
either performed once (single sequence), indefinitely (continuous sequence) or a mix-
ture of both (channel defined sequence).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 89
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Bargraph configuration
For more information regarding the general functionality of the sequencer, see Chap-
ter 7.4, "Running a sequence of measurements", on page 83.
In the receiver application, you can select whether to:
● Run a bargraph measurement each time the receiver application has its turn.
● Run a scan each time the receiver application has its turn.
● Skip measurements in the receiver application.
When you include the bargraph measurement in the sequence, IF analysis (including
the spectrogram) is also done. When you include the scan in the sequence, spectro-
gram data is also collected (and a peak search and a final measurement are performed
when you have defined a test sequence that covers these measurements).
Note the following effects of performing a scan in a sequence of measurements.
● Stopping a scan or final measurement aborts that measurement and resumes the
measurement sequence in the next channel.
● Interrupting a scan is not possible.
● Interactive final measurements are not available.
Tip: Performing a continuous sequence with a single (bargraph or scan) measurement
resets max hold values every time the sequencer starts a measurement in that receiver
channel. To keep max hold values, use continuous measurements in the channel.
▶ To select the measurement to include in a sequence, select [SWEEP] > "Sequencer"
until the required measurement is highlighted blue.
If you want to include a bargraph measurement and a scan in the sequence of mea-
surements, you have to use two measurement channels.
Remote command:
See Chapter 14.5.2, "Measurement sequences", on page 470.
8.2 Bargraph configuration
Access: [MEAS CONFIG] > "Bargraph Config"
Alternatively, you can access the dialog box by clicking on the bargraph once.
The bargraph result display is designed for measurements on a single frequency. It is a
basic result display that shows the signal level at a particular frequency numerically
and graphically as a bargraph. The length of the bar depends on the signal level at the
current receiver frequency. If necessary, you can control the way the signal is evalu-
ated by selecting different detectors.
1 2 3
Figure 8-1: Overview of the bargraph result display
1 = detectors
2 = measured levels (numerically)
3 = measured levels (graphically)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 90
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Bargraph configuration
The results in the bargraph are shown as soon as you enter the receiver application
(for the frequency that is currently selected) and are updated continuously. The unit of
the displayed power level is variable and depends on the unit you have set (by default,
it is dBµV).
The bargraph range is always 100 dB, the minimum and maximum levels that are dis-
played are automatically adjusted, depending on the measurement configuration.
When auto ranging has been turned off, the range depends on settings like the attenu-
ation or gain. When auto ranging has been turned on, the range is adjusted to the sig-
nal level.
The R&S ESW supports the simultaneous use of up to four different detectors in the
bargraph result display. If you select an additional detector, the R&S ESW adds the
corresponding number of bargraphs to the result display. This way to display the signal
levels provides an easy way to compare the signal level with different weighting fac-
tors.
Meaning of small vertical lines in the bargraph
Depending on the configuration, the following small vertical lines can appear in the bar-
graph.
● A small vertical line with the same color as the bargraph shows the highest value
that has been measured on the currently selected frequency.
● A small red vertical line with an "SQ" label shows the squelch level that you have
defined for audio output over headphones.
Max hold bargraph
The max hold bargraph information, when it has been turned on, shows the highest
signal level that has been measured since the measurement has begun. The max hold
value remains effective, even if you change any receiver settings (for example the fre-
quency or the attenuation) and is only reset when you deliberately do so. One max
hold value is displayed for each of the active detectors.
When you turn on the max hold information, the diagram information is expanded by
the peak level that has been measured since the max hold has been last reset (as a
numerical value and including the frequency that value has been measured on). If a
new peak level has been detected, the max hold values are updated accordingly.
The live results and the highest signal level for a particular frequency are still shown in
the bargraph diagram as usual.
Min peak detector levels
Note that for the min peak detector, the peak level is not the highest level, but the low-
est level.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 91
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Bargraph configuration
1 2
Figure 8-2: Screen layout of the bargraph result display with the max hold information
1 = maximum levels
2 = frequency on which the maximum level has been measured; note that the minimum and RMS peaks
have been measured at frequency different to the current receiver frequency
The "Bargraph" dialog box contains a preview of the measurement and all settings that
you can apply to the bargraph.
Bargraph configuration
When you are performing a scan that is not based on a scan table, the R&S ESW
applies the bargraph settings (detector, measurement time etc.) to the scan.
The remote commands required to configure the bargraph are described in Chap-
ter 14.5.4, "Bargraph configuration", on page 477.
Functions to configure the bargraph described elsewhere:
● "Receiver Frequency" on page 199
● "Detector" on page 127
Couple to Scan Trace....................................................................................................93
Bargraph Max Hold....................................................................................................... 93
Measurement Time....................................................................................................... 93
Measurement Bandwidth.............................................................................................. 94
Filter Type..................................................................................................................... 94
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 92
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Bargraph configuration
Couple to Scan Trace
Couples or decouples the bargraph detector and scan detectors.
Turning on the feature has the following effects.
● Turns on a scan detector for every active bargraph.
If you add a new bargraph detector, the corresponding scan trace is automatically
turned on.
● Matches the scan trace number to the number of the bargraph.
If you couple bargraph and scan trace, the R&S ESW replaces the detectors of all
other active scan traces with the new detector type.
Remote command:
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe] on page 478
Bargraph Max Hold
Turns the display of the highest level that has been measured on any frequency since
the last "Max Hold Reset" on and off, regardless of the receiver settings.
When you turn on the max hold information, the R&S ESW shows the highest level that
has been measured for each active bargraph (detector), including the frequency where
it was measured.
Note: The little vertical line displayed in the bargraph does not represent the max hold
value. Instead it shows the highest level that has been measured for the current
receiver frequency.
You can reset the max hold bargraph with the "Reset Max Hold" button. After you have
reset the max hold bargraph, it starts collecting maximum values again.
More information
Remote command:
Bargraph state: DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe] on page 478
Bargraph reset: DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet on page 478
Measurement Time
Defines the measurement time used to analyze the signal.
In the Multi APD application (R&S ESW-K58), the measurement time is called acquisi-
tion time.
You can define a different measurement time for the bargraph, each scan range
defined in the scan table and the final measurement. If you perform a scan that is not
based on a scan table (Current parameters), the measurement time for the scan is the
same as for the bargraph.
In addition, you can define a separate measurement time for fixed frequency scans.
Tip: Make sure to select a measurement time that is appropriate for the analyzed sig-
nal and that allows the various filters and detectors in the signal path to settle.
Note that the measurement time for IF analysis is calculated automatically based on
the measurement time of the bargraph.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 93
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Bargraph configuration
Remote command:
Bargraph: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 479
Scan table: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TIME on page 488
Final measurement: [SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME on page 500
Fixed frequency scan: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TDOMain on page 480
CISPR APD: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 479
Measurement Bandwidth
Defines the measurement bandwidth (or resolution bandwidth) used for the measure-
ment.
You can define a different bandwidth for the bargraph and each scan range defined in
the scan table. The R&S ESW displays an exclamation mark if the selected measure-
ment bandwidth is not compatible to the bandwidth required by CISPR for the corre-
sponding frequency range.
If you perform a scan that is not based on a scan table, the bandwidth for the scan is
the same as for the bargraph.
The final measurement uses the bandwidths defined in the scan table, or, if the scan is
not based on a scan table (Current parameters), the bandwidth of the bargraph.
The R&S ESW supports a selected set of resolution bandwidths. If you enter a number
that is not supported, the R&S ESW rounds the value up to next available bandwidth.
More information
Remote command:
Bargraph: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue] on page 556
Scan table: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 483
Filter Type
Selects the type of resolution filter used in the measurement.
The available resolution bandwidths depend on the filter selection.
You can select from the following filter types.
● Normal (3 dB)
Gaussian filter with a 3 dB bandwidth.
● Gauss (6 dB)
Gaussian filter with a 6 bandwidth. 6 dB bandwidths that comply with CISPR and
MIL standards are available.
● CISPR (6 dB)
Gaussian filter with a 6 bandwidth. 6 dB bandwidths that comply with CISPR stand-
ards are available.
● MIL (6 dB)
Gaussian filter with a 6 bandwidth. 6 dB bandwidths that comply with military
standards are available.
6 dB bandwidths correspond approximately to the pulse bandwidth.
3 dB bandwidths correspond approximately to the noise bandwidth.
More information
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 557
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 94
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
8.3 Test automation
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation"
The "Test Automation" dialog box is a tool to configure and perform measurements in
the Receiver application. The dialog box contains a tab for each typical stage in an
EMC measurement (scan, peak search and final measurement). The dialog box also
summarizes the measurement results for these stages in separate tabs.
● Background information.......................................................................................... 95
● Selecting a test sequence.....................................................................................104
● Performing a scan................................................................................................. 107
● Performing a peak search..................................................................................... 116
● Performing final measurements............................................................................ 124
● Configuring line impedance stabilization networks (LISN).................................... 130
8.3.1 Background information
The following topics contains information that can be useful to configure automated
test sequences.
● Selecting the measurement bandwidth................................................................... 95
● Calculating the number of measurement points......................................................96
● Line impedance stabilization network (LISN) control.............................................. 98
● Overview of receiver measurements.....................................................................100
8.3.1.1 Selecting the measurement bandwidth
The measurement bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth of the resolution filter. The
RF signal is evaluated and displayed according to the bandpass characteristics of the
resolution filter.
The receiver application supports the following types of resolution filter.
● Filters with a 3 dB bandwidth
The R&S ESW provides bandwidths with a stepsize of 1-2-3-5-10-.... For details,
refer to the data sheet.
● Filters with a 6 dB bandwidth
The 6 dB bandwidths are designed and required for receiver tests and measure-
ments. The R&S ESW provides bandwidths that comply to commercial and military
standards. For details, refer to the data sheet.
Note that the available bandwidth is limited by the current receiver frequency. The
measurement bandwidth must be less than or equal to half of the current receiver fre-
quency:
BW ≤ fin / 2
The resolution filters are implemented as digital Gaussian bandpass filters. Concerning
the attenuation characteristic, the filters behave like analog filters, but their measure-
ment speed is much higher than the measurement speed of comparable analog filters.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 95
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
This is because the transient response can be compensated because the filters have
an accurately defined behavior.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth. If the bandwidth is
increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth.
Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx.
5 dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed
noise increases by a factor of 10 (= 10 dB).
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths leads to longer measurement
times at each frequency, because the measurement time has to allow the resolution fil-
ters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
For large measurement bandwidths, signal parts that are very far away (for example
from a different signal) are considered in the measurement and distort the results. The
displayed noise increases.
For small measurement bandwidths, the measurement time increases.
Bandwidths and detectors
If you use the Quasipeak, CISPR Average or RMS Average detector, the R&S ESW by
default couples the resolution bandwidth to the receiver frequency.
If you need a different bandwidth, you can decouple the bandwidth from the frequency.
When decoupled, you can select any of the supported CISPR bandwidths.
8.3.1.2 Calculating the number of measurement points
The number of measurement points (or sweep points in some applications) determines
the amount of data that is captured in one measurement. At each measurement point,
the R&S ESW collects one set of data, which contains, for example, the signal level at
a given frequency.
The effect of the number of measurement points on the measurement is that its num-
ber defines how much of the entire span is covered by a single data point.
Example:
Consider the following settings:
● Start frequency: 100 MHz
● Stop frequency: 900 MHz
● Number of measurement points: 1001
With said settings, each measurement point would cover a frequency range of about
800 kHz.
By increasing the number of measurement points, you can increase the reliability of the
individual data points and thus the accuracy of the analyzed results. All of these data
points are stored on the instrument, occupying a large amount of memory, and each
measurement point increases the overall measurement time.
For details on how the number of measurement points affect the trace results on the
screen, see Chapter 10.3.1.1, "Working with trace detectors", on page 221.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 96
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Measurement points in receiver application
In the receiver application, the number of measurement points considered in a scan is
determined by the frequency range and the selected frequency step size: the
R&S ESW runs a measurement every x Hz, so the actual number of measurement
points depends on frequency range you are scanning. The maximum number of mea-
surement points that a scan supports is 10,000,001 (this is only possible with two or
less active traces).
The frequency step size depends on the frequency step mode and the type of scan
you are using.
● Scans without a scan table:
The frequency step size depends on the measurement bandwidth.
Example:
Consider the following scan configuration:
● Start frequency: 150 kHz
● Stop frequency: 1 MHz
● Measurement bandwidth: 1 kHz
The measurement bandwidth of 1 kHz results in a frequency step size of 400 Hz. In
that case, the number of measurement points in this example would be about 2100.
● Scans with a scan table:
The frequency step size is either determined automatically (in which case it
depends on the measurement bandwidth) or manually (in which case you define
the required step size)
Example:
Consider the following scan table settings for a given scan range:
● Start frequency: 150 kHz
● Stop frequency: 30 MHz
● Step size mode: linear
● Step size: 4 kHz
With said settings, the R&S ESW collects a dataset every 4 kHz, so the number of
measurement points in this example would be about 7500.
Measurement points in spectrum application
In the spectrum application, a measurement point is called a sweep point. Instead of
determining the number of measurement points based on other settings, you can
select the number of measurement points manually. By default, the R&S ESW meas-
ures 1001 points in one measurement.
For spectrum measurements, you can also define a sweep count. The sweep count
defines the number of measurements a single sweep is made up out of. If the sweep
count is 0 or 1, the R&S ESW runs a single measurement from start to stop frequency.
If the sweep count is greater than 1, the R&S ESW repeats the measurement from
start to stop frequency a corresponding number of times.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 97
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
For more information on the effects of the sweep count on the measurement results,
see Chapter 10.3.1.2, "Analyzing several traces - trace mode", on page 226.
8.3.1.3 Line impedance stabilization network (LISN) control
When you do measurements on power lines, a Line Impedance Stabilization Network
(LISN) allows you to determine the interference caused by power supplies and cables.
The R&S ESW allows you to connect and control selected LISNs in such a test setup
and considers the characteristics of the LISN during measurements. In addition to
selecting a particular LISN Type, you can also select the Phase that you want to test
for interference.
Control of a LISN and its phases is possible during scans and during the final mea-
surement. You can control all available LISN phases as required and independently
from each other.
If you select more than one phase, the R&S ESW measures all phase combinations
and determines the maximum value.
Table 8-1: Supported networks and controllable phases
Network Controllable phases
Two-line V-networks
R&S ESH3-Z5 N, L1
R&S ENV216 N, L1
R&S AMN6500 N, L1
Four-line V-networks
R&S ESH2-Z5 N, L1, L2, L3
R&S ENV4200 N, L1, L2, L3
R&S ENV432 N, L1, L2, L3
When you are using the R&S ENV216 network, you can protect the input with a
150 kHz high-pass filter.
Connecting a LISN
A LISN is connected to the R&S ESW via its user port. To connect the LISN to the
R&S ESW, a control line and an adapter are required.
The control line (or cable) controls which phase of the LISN is to be tested and outputs
the information to the user port. Control lines for the supported LISNs are available as
accessories from Rohde & Schwarz.
Connecting the control line to the user port of the R&S ESW also requires adapter
R&S EZ-27 (order no. 1142.8271.02).
When you connect the LISN, make sure to use the correct pins on both sides of the
test setup. Otherwise, the automatic phase control of the LISN might not work. The fol-
lowing illustrations show the correct pin assignment.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 98
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ESH2-Z5
Pin (9-pol 25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 46 N
L1 6 15 21 L1
L2 7 16 22 L2
L3 4 17 23 L3
GND 8 12 50 GND
PE fl 3 18 47 PE fl
+5 V 1 13 48 +5 V
Figure 8-3: Connection from R&S ESW to R&S ESH2-Z5
R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ESH3-Z5
Pin (9-pol 25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 2 N
L 6 15 6 L
PE fl 3 18 3 PE flo
DGND 8 12 8 DGND
+5 V 1 13 1 +5 V
Figure 8-4: Connection from R&S ESW to R&S ESH3-Z5
R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ENV216
Pin (9-pol 25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 14 N
L 6 15 15 L
PE fl 3 18 18 PE flo
DGND 8 12 12 DGND
+5 V 1 13 13 +5 V
Figure 8-5: Connection from R&S ESW to R&S ENV216 or R&S AMN6500
R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ENV4200 / ENV432
Pin (9-pol 25-pol) Filter Pin
N 2 14 14 N
L1 6 15 15 L1
L2 7 16 16 L2
L3 4 17 17 L3
GND 8 12 12 GND
+5 V 1 13 13 +5 V
Figure 8-6: Connection from R&S ESW to R&S ENV4200 or R&S ENV432
To control the phase selection and PE simulating network of the V-Networks
R&S ESH2-Z5, R&S ESH3-Z5, R&S ENV4200 or R&S ENV432, the +5 V supply volt-
age and some control lines have to be routed through the wall of the shielded room.
You can also use a direct connection without a filter, e.g. when you use the R&S ESW
in a shielded room. In that case, you can use the following cables.
● R&S ESH2-Z5: EZ-5, EZ-13, EZ14
● R&S ESH3-Z5: EZ-6, EZ-14
● R&S ENV216 or R&S AMN6500: EZ14
● R&S ENV4200 or R&S ENV432: EZ-14, EZ-21
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 99
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
8.3.1.4 Overview of receiver measurements
The Receiver application provides several measurements and evaluation methods that
are typical for EMC measurements.
● Scan......................................................................................................................100
● Peak search.......................................................................................................... 101
● Final measurement............................................................................................... 103
● IF analysis............................................................................................................. 103
Scan
During a scan, the R&S ESW measures the signal strength of discrete frequencies
over a custom frequency range. The frequency step size and measurement time for
each frequency are arbitrary.
The scan parameters are either based on the current receiver settings or on the set-
tings defined in a Scan Table. You can take transducer factors or sets as well as limit
lines into account. They can be defined and displayed separately, but are not included
in the scan data record.
The scanned frequency range is defined by the start and stop frequency set independ-
ently of the scan table. A scan table can thus be defined for each measurement task.
You can either perform a continuous scan or a single scan. A single scan stops when it
reaches the stop frequency. A continuous scan repeats the scan until you interrupt or
abort it deliberately.
The maximal number of measured frequencies is limited to 4.000.000 per detector. The
data can be stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that more
than the possible values would be measured, a respective message is output upon the
scan start. Afterwards the scan is performed up to the maximum value.
Figure 8-7: Scan on selected frequencies showing gaps in the trace
The R&S ESW offers the following scan methods:
● Stepped scan in the frequency domain
In stepped scan mode, step width and frequency spacing (step mode) can be
selected.
● Time domain scan in the frequency domain
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 100
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
In time domain measurement systems, the spectrum at the receiver input is mea-
sured in parallel by using fast fourier transform (FFT) of frequency sections.
● Fixed frequency scan on a single frequency
This scan is carried out on a fixed frequency. It is used to examine the time charac-
teristics of interferences, e.g. click analysis.
ADC calibration required
ADC calibration can become necessary if you have started a time domain scan during
the warm-up period of the R&S ESW. If the message "ADC calibration required"
appears, stop and restart the scan.
Stepped scans in the frequency domain
In stepped scan mode, the step width and the frequency spacing (step mode) can be
selected. Linear, logarithmic or automatic frequency spacing is available. In automatic
mode, the step width is selected so that it is always smaller than the bandwidth.
Receiver measurements may involve much time. Time saving procedures are
explained in "Peak search" on page 101. They reduce the total measurement time by
reducing the number of measurements to a minimum.
Nevertheless, this time is still very long, often in the order of hours, especially for the
CISPR radiated emissions tests. A way out of this situation can be time-domain mea-
surements.
Peak search
The Peak Search function of the R&S ESW can be used to create a peak list contain-
ing only the measurement values of high interferers. In a fast prescan the signal is
measured against a limit line, and the level values above the set margin are written into
the peak list. The resulting peak list then is used for the final measurement where only
the frequencies in the peak list are measured with the required detector.
If the scan uses the detector stipulated by the specifications, the peak list already pro-
vides the final measurement data.
Data reduction using the peak list
EMI measurements may take some time because the time constants of up to 160 ms
prescribed by the standard for the quasipeak weighting lead to long measurement
times per each value. In addition, some standards stipulate procedures for finding local
EMI maxima such as shifting the absorbing clamp, variation of the test antenna height
and rotating the DUT. Measuring with quasipeak weighting at each frequency and for
each setting of the test configuration would lead to unacceptably long measurement
times. For this reason, a method is used which reduces the time-consuming measure-
ments to a minimum with an optimum reliability of detection.
Receiver measurements may take some time because of some specialties in the con-
text of those measurements like variations of the test antenna or high time constants
required by detectors or things like that. Because of this, the Receiver provides tools
that reduce the efforts to a minimum while still providing an optimum measurement reli-
ability.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 101
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
The interference spectrum is first pre-analyzed in a fast prescan to optimize the dura-
tion of the measurement. Data reduction follows so that the time-consuming final mea-
surement is performed only at critical frequencies.
Several data reduction methods are used:
● Generating subrange maxima (search method "Subranges").
The whole frequency range is divided into equidistant frequency subranges. A
selectable number of subrange maxima are determined for each subrange. In the
final measurement, the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies
with the highest interference level of a frequency subrange.
1 = Subrange
2 = Subrange maximum
3 = Limit line
● Determination of a specific number of peak values relative to the limit lines with the
level values being independent of their frequency spectral distribution (search
method "Peaks").
Determining the level maxima irrespective of their distribution in the frequency
spectrum is suitable for measurement regulations that demand determination of the
relatively highest level irrespective of the distribution in the measured frequency
range, e.g. FCC.
If the prescan is performed in parallel with several detectors, typically Peak and Aver-
age, the maxima are determined separately for the two detectors so that the distribu-
tion of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account.
For example, the frequency of the maximum determined with the average detector can
be used for the final measurement performed with the CISPR Avg detector and the fre-
quency found in the prescan carried out with the peak detector is taken for the final
measurement using the quasipeak detector.
Consideration of the limit lines ensures that the final measurement is not performed at
frequencies at which the inference level is far below the limit value. A margin below the
limit line can be defined (in dB). Peak values measured in the margin area are also
considered in the final measurement. The margin is valid for all limit lines. Each limit
line is allocated to a trace, i.e. different limit lines are taken for the different detectors.
If no limit lines are activated, the measurement procedure is as if all measured values
would exceed the limit line.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 102
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Data reduction by editing the peak list
As an alternative method, it is possible to preset a list of frequencies at which the final
measurements are performed. A typical application is, for example, the statistical
analysis of several units.
The peak list can be either edited manually or can be filled with desired values by
adopting the marker values.
Final measurement
A final measurement is performed after data reduction, thus reducing the overall mea-
surement time.
The final measurement analyzes only the data that still remains after the preliminary
measurement stages, in other words those frequencies that have been collected in the
peak list. Detectors defined for the final measurement replace those that have been
used during preliminary measurements.
Because the peak list contains a manageable set of frequencies only, the final mea-
surement is also usable in combination with a configuration that requires long mea-
surement times. It is then still possible to perform the measurement in a reasonable
time frame.
During the final measurement, the R&S ESW performs a measurement on each fre-
quency in the peak list. When done, it updates the preliminary results in the peak list
with those found during the final measurement.
Automatic vs interactive final measurements
The R&S ESW provides two methods to perform a final measurement: an automatic
and interactive final measurement.
An automatic final measurement measures all frequencies in the peak list automati-
cally. The measurement can be interrupted or aborted, or the measurement mode can
be switched to interactive. Measurement settings can not be changed. The advantage
is that the measurement runs on its own.
Control of the final measurement is possible in interactive final measurement mode.
In interactive final measurement mode, the R&S ESW stops on each frequency of the
peak list. If required, the frequency can be fine tuned, e.g. if the interferer has shifted.
For fine tuning, the bargraph display can be used to find the new peak value. The level
measurement is performed only after initialization by the user.
It is possible to start with an automatic measurement and later change into interactive
mode. Likewise, it is possible to start measuring in interactive mode and later change
into automatic mode.
IF analysis
The IF spectrum analysis is a very comfortable means for exact frequency tuning of the
receiver and for identification of signals and of their bandwidth.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 103
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
In IF spectrum analysis, the spectrum of the RF input signal is displayed in the vicinity
of the receiver frequency. The center frequency of the displayed spectrum is always
the current receiver frequency.
The IF analysis provides a fast overview of the assignment of the spectrum adjacent to
the measuring channel proper, or, with a large resolution bandwidth, the spectral distri-
bution of a modulated signal in the channel. Interference of the received useful signal
can also be detected quickly, whether it is CW interference appearing as unmodulated
carrier or pulse-like interference which is represented in the form of narrow horizontal
lines on the screen.
The accuracy of the frequency axis corresponds to the reference used (internal or
external).
In contrast to normal spectrum analyzer operation, the measured values are deter-
mined using FFT from samples recorded from the A/D-converter. Thus the receiver
stays tuned to the center frequency. It may continue to measure with the selected mea-
surement time and display the signal level with the bargraph.
(For example, the quasipeak level measured with one second measurement time may
be displayed in the upper half of the display while in the lower half the spectrum may
be refreshed every few milliseconds.)
The measurement time of the bargraph may be longer than the measurement time of
the IF analysis. If the measurement time of the bargraph is set to a smaller value then
the measurement time of the IF analysis, the bargraph will as often be refreshed as the
display of the IF analysis.
The level display of the IF analysis is unweighted. It is independent of the selected
detector for the bargraph measurement, e.g. average or quasi peak. A maximum of
three traces can be displayed in parallel. The display mode "Clear / Write", "Max Hold",
"Min Hold", "Average", "View" or "Blank" may be selected independent for each trace.
The displayed level values do have the full accuracy of the instrument only at the cen-
ter frequency. At all other frequencies, the level is typically lower due to the frequency
response of the IF filter and the preselector.
IF Analysis always applies resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth, while filters with a
3 dB bandwidth are not supported.
8.3.2 Selecting a test sequence
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Overview"
The first tab of the "Test Automation" dialog box ("Overview") represents the measure-
ment stages in an interactive diagram. You can add or remove certain stages from the
measurement as required: you can, for example, configure a measurement that con-
sists of a scan and a peak search, but no final measurement.
Possible combinations are:
● Perform a scan only.
● Perform a scan with a subsequent peak search and creation of the peak list.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 104
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
(Remote command: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO on page 491)
● Perform a scan with a subsequent peak search and a final measurement including
the creation of a final peak list.
(Remote command: CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement[:AUTO] on page 499)
Figure 8-8: Overview of the test automation process
For more information on the individual measurement stages, see:
● Scan
"Scan" on page 100
Chapter 8.3.3, "Performing a scan", on page 107
● Peak search
"Peak search" on page 101
Chapter 8.3.4, "Performing a peak search", on page 116
● Final measurement
"Final measurement" on page 103
Chapter 8.3.5, "Performing final measurements", on page 124
Starting a complete automated test sequence
► Press the [RUN SINGLE] key.
The R&S ESW starts the test sequence. It stops the test sequence at the point you
have defined (either after the scan, the peak search or the final measurement).
Note: If you start the test sequence with the [RUN CONT] key, the R&S ESW starts
a continuous scan. The test sequence is resumed only when you stop the scan
deliberately.
Starting an independent peak search
► Press the "Peak Search" button.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 105
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
The R&S ESW starts a peak search on the current trace(s) of the scan diagram.
When it is done, it opens the peak list.
If you have not yet performed a scan, the peak search button is unavailable.
Starting an independent final measurement
► Press the "Run Final Test" button.
The R&S ESW starts a final measurement based on the contents of the peak list.
When it is done, it opens the final peak list.
If you have not yet performed a scan and peak search, the final measurement but-
ton is unavailable.
Selecting the scan type............................................................................................... 106
Scan Count................................................................................................................. 106
Scan Parameter.......................................................................................................... 107
Selecting the mode for time domain scans................................................................. 107
Selecting the scan type
The R&S ESW provides several scan types. Depending on the selected scan type, the
R&S ESW applies different methods to evaluate the applied signal.
The following scan types are supported.
● Time Domain (FFT)
Simultaneous measurements based on FFT operations on all individual frequen-
cies in the frequency range you have defined. The frequency step size is variable
because it depends on the selected measurement bandwidth.
(➙ "Scan Type" > "TDomain")
● Stepped
Subsequent measurements on each individual frequency defined by the frequency
range and the frequency step size.
(➙ "Scan Type" > "Stepped")
● Fixed Frequency
Measurement on a single frequency and display of the results in the time domain.
This mode is designed for measurements where the signal has to be monitored
over time (for example click rate analysis).
(➙ "Scan Type" > "Fixed Frequency")
When you turn on fixed frequency scans, scans in the frequency domain are not
available.)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE on page 480
Scan Count
Defines the number of scans to be performed in a single measurement. The displayed
trace represents an average over the scan count.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 106
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
When you measure continuously, the R&S ESW calculates a moving average over the
scan count.
The scan count is always the same as the "Bargraph Count" (and vice versa). The
"Bargraph Count" defines the number of bargraph measurements performed in a single
sweep.
Note that a scan count = 0 is not possible. The same applies to the bargraph count.
A scan count is not possible for Fixed Frequency Scans.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 488
Scan Parameter
Turns the scan table on and off.
"Scan Table" The R&S ESW performs scans based on the configuration defined in
the scan table.
"Current" The R&S ESW performs scans on the general receiver configuration.
The scan table becomes unavailable.
Remote command:
not supported
Selecting the mode for time domain scans
The R&S ESW provides three time domain scan modes.
You can select the time domain scan mode with the "TDS Optimization" feature.
● Max Speed
The R&S ESW uses a large analysis bandwidth (FFT size) for the data capture in
favor of an increased measurement speed, regardless of the detector you are
using.
● Automatic
This mode ensures compliance with CISPR 16-1-1.
The effects of this mode depend on the detectors currently in use:
– When you are using one of the CISPR detectors, the R&S ESW optimizes the
measurement for high measurement speed as well as dynamic range.
– When you are using no CISPR detector, the "Automatic" mode is identical to
"Fast" mode.
● Max Dynamic
This mode ensures compliance with CISPR 16-1-1.
The R&S ESW always applies a small analysis bandwidth in favor of a high
dynamic range, regardless of the detector you are using.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:TDOPtim on page 481
8.3.3 Performing a scan
● Designing a scan table..........................................................................................108
● Interrupting a scan................................................................................................ 108
● Configuring the scan table.................................................................................... 109
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 107
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
8.3.3.1 Designing a scan table
The scan table is a tool that reduces the effort of performing a scan. It divides a given
frequency range into smaller portions.
In that way you are able to:
● keep the measurement times as low as possible by creating several frequency
ranges and configuring each one most effectively
● configure some frequency ranges differently than others if the test scenario
requires so and still run one measurement only
● skip parts of the spectrum that are of no interest for the measurement.
If you do not use the scan table (Current parameters), the R&S ESW uses the current
instrument settings for the scan.
You can define up to 100 scan subranges within the complete scan range. The size of
each subrange is arbitrary, depending on the measurement requirements. Just make
sure that the ranges are within the overall scan range defined by the general start and
stop frequencies. If the scan table defines a frequency range greater than the scan
range, frequencies outside the scan range are not considered in the measurement.
To avoid situations like this, you can align the start and stop frequency of the scan to
the frequency range defined by the scan ranges (see "Adjusting the frequency axis"
on page 111).
Example:
In the picture below, the frequency range highlighted in red is covered by the scan
table, but not by the overall scan range. Thus, it would not be considered in the scan.
Figure 8-9: Scan range vs subranges of a scan
There may be gaps between the stop frequency of one range and the start frequency
of the next, for example if parts of the spectrum are not necessary to be tested. Gaps
between ranges are not considered in the scan.
8.3.3.2 Interrupting a scan
Access: [RUN SGL] / [RUN CONT] > "Hold Scan"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 108
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
The R&S ESW allows you to hold a scan any time with the "Hold Scan" feature. If you
hold it, the scan is interrupted immediately. When held, you can change settings that
have a direct effect on the scan, for example the frequency.
When you are finished changing the configuration, you have several options on how to
proceed.
● Continue at the receiver frequency
Resumes the scan at the receiver frequency the R&S ESW is currently tuned to.
This is any frequency that is equal to or smaller than the hold frequency.
If you do not change the frequency, resuming the scan at the receiver frequency is
the same as resuming the scan at the hold frequency.
● Continue at the hold frequency
Resumes the scan at the frequency it has been interrupted at.
For example, when you interrupt the scan at 20 MHz, the scan would continue at
that frequency.
● Stop the scan
Aborts the scan altogether.
Changing channels while a scan is running
When you change the measurement channel while a scan is running (for example
switch to a spectrum channel), the R&S ESW holds the scan. When you change back
to the receiver channel in which the scan is running, you can resume the scan from the
hold frequency.
8.3.3.3 Configuring the scan table
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Scan Table"
By default, the scan table already contains two scan ranges with a typical configuration
for these frequency ranges.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 109
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Figure 8-10: Overview of the "Scan Table"
The remote commands required to design a scan table are described in Chap-
ter 14.5.6, "Scan table configuration", on page 481.
Functions in the "Scan Table" dialog box described elsewhere:
● Scan Type
● Filter Type
Adding and removing scan ranges..............................................................................110
Defining a frequency range for the scan......................................................................111
Adjusting the frequency axis........................................................................................111
Selecting the frequency step mode............................................................................. 111
Displaying range bars..................................................................................................112
Configuring scan ranges..............................................................................................112
└ Range Start and Range Stop........................................................................ 113
└ Step Size.......................................................................................................113
└ Measurement Bandwidth.............................................................................. 113
└ Measurement Time....................................................................................... 114
└ Auto Range................................................................................................... 114
└ Attenuation.................................................................................................... 115
└ Preamplifier................................................................................................... 115
└ Input Selection.............................................................................................. 116
Adding and removing scan ranges
The scan table splits the frequency range into several smaller ranges (up to 100
ranges).
By default, there are already two predefined scan ranges (labeled "Range 1" and
"Range 2"). If necessary, you can add additional scan ranges or delete scan ranges
that you no longer need.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 110
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
You have the following options when you design the scan table.
● Add a new range to the left of the currently selected range (➙ "Insert Range Before
Range <x>" button).
● Add a new range to the right of the currently selected range (➙ "Insert Range After
Range <x>" button).
● Delete the currently selected range (➙ "Delete Range <x>" button).
(The selected range is the range that is highlighted in orange. To select a range,
select the "Range x" button at the top of each column, or navigate through the
ranges with the "Prev Range" or "Next Range" buttons.)
Remote command:
Number of ranges: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:RANGes[:COUNt] on page 486
Tip: Selecting a range via SCPI is done with the suffix at SCAN<range>.
Delete a range: not supported by remote control
Defining a frequency range for the scan
The start and stop frequencies ("Scan Start" and "Scan Stop") define the global fre-
quency range considered during a scan.
The minimum and maximum frequencies supported by the R&S ESW depend on the
instrument model and are defined in the datasheet.
Note: Make sure that all scan ranges are within the global frequency range. Frequen-
cies outside the global frequency range will not be considered in the measurement.
Remote command:
Start frequency: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 482
Stop frequency: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 483
Adjusting the frequency axis
When you design a scan table, the frequency range of the scan ranges may not be the
same as the global frequency range you have defined for the scan.
The "Adjust Axis" button adjusts the global frequency range to the frequency range
covered by the scan ranges.
Example: the global frequency range defines a range from 150 kHz to 500 MHz, while
the scan ranges define a range from 150 kHz to 1 GHz. When you adjust the fre-
quency, the R&S ESW automatically expands the global frequency range to 1 GHz.
On the other hand, when the global frequency range is larger than the scan ranges,
adjusting the frequency contracts the global frequency range.
This feature is useful when the global frequency range is smaller than the scan ranges,
because frequencies outside the global range are not considered in a scan based on a
scan table.
Remote command:
not supported
Selecting the frequency step mode
The frequency step mode defines the way the measurement frequencies are selected
within a scan range.
Note that the frequency stepsize for time domain scans is always selected automati-
cally.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 111
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
"AUTO" Linear frequency steps: the Step Size is coupled to the current reso-
lution bandwidth and is about a third of the resolution bandwidth.
In this way, the probability to detect all signals in the scan range is
very high.
"LIN" Linear frequency steps: the Step Size is a fix value in Hz.
"LOG" Logarithmic frequency steps: the Step Size is a percentage of the
current frequency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing on page 489
Displaying range bars
The range bar is a green bar displayed at the bottom of the scan diagram. You can turn
it on or off as you like with the "Show Range Bars" toggle button.
The range bar carries various useful information.
● The shade of green shows the measurement progress.
– Dark green
Indicates that the scan of the corresponding scan range is done.
– Light green
Indicates that the scan of the corresponding scan range is currently in pro-
gress.
If you interrupt the scan, the bar remains light green. The bar of the last scan
range also remains light green when the scan is done completely.
● The bar contains the names of the corresponding scan ranges as defined in the
scan table (for example "Range 1", "Range 2", etc.).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BARS on page 483
Configuring scan ranges
The main part of the scan table contains the configuration for each scan range. Each
column of the table represents one scan range (labeled "Range 1", "Range 2", etc. by
default).
You can change the labels of the scan ranges and assign a custom name to each
range. When you select the pencil icon ( ), you can edit the range labels. To stop edit-
ing, select the pencil icon again.
For each scan range, you can customize the following parameters.
● "Range Start and Range Stop" on page 113
● "Step Size" on page 113
● "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94
● "Measurement Time" on page 93
● "Auto Range" on page 114
● "Attenuation" on page 115
● "Preamplifier" on page 115
● "Input Selection" on page 116
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:NAME on page 486
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 112
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Range Start and Range Stop ← Configuring scan ranges
Defines the frequency range of the selected scan range.
To avoid overlapping scan ranges, the start and stop frequencies of the next and previ-
ous ranges are adjusted if necessary.
Tip: Make sure that the start and stop frequencies of the scan ranges are within the
global frequency range.
Remote command:
Start frequency: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STARt on page 487
Stop frequency: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STOP on page 488
Step Size ← Configuring scan ranges
Defines the frequency step size of the selected scan range that is applied during a
scan.
In case of a stepped scan, the value depends on the selected step mode.
● When you have selected the automatic step mode, the step size is determined
automatically. It is not possible to change the step size manually (however, it is dis-
played in the corresponding table cell as a read-only value).
● When you have selected the linear step mode, the step size is a value in Hz (a
measurement is performed every x Hz).
Example: a step size of 4 kHz and a start frequency of 100 kHz does a measure-
ment at 100 kHz, 104 kHz, 108 kHz etc.
● When you have selected the logarithmic step mode, the step size is a value in %
(the next measurement frequency is a percentage of the last frequency).
Example: a step size of 10 % and a start frequency of 100 kHz does a measure-
ment at 100 kHz, 110 kHz, 121 kHz etc.
For a time domain scan, the step size depends on the measurement bandwidth. It is
displayed in the "Step Size" table cell as a read-only value.
For a time domain scan, the step size depends on the measurement bandwidth and
the time domain optimzation setting. It is displayed in the "Step Size" table cell as a
read-only value.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STEP on page 487
Measurement Bandwidth ← Configuring scan ranges
Defines the measurement bandwidth (or resolution bandwidth) used for the measure-
ment.
You can define a different bandwidth for the bargraph and each scan range defined in
the scan table. The R&S ESW displays an exclamation mark if the selected measure-
ment bandwidth is not compatible to the bandwidth required by CISPR for the corre-
sponding frequency range.
If you perform a scan that is not based on a scan table, the bandwidth for the scan is
the same as for the bargraph.
The final measurement uses the bandwidths defined in the scan table, or, if the scan is
not based on a scan table (Current parameters), the bandwidth of the bargraph.
The R&S ESW supports a selected set of resolution bandwidths. If you enter a number
that is not supported, the R&S ESW rounds the value up to next available bandwidth.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 113
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
More information
Remote command:
Bargraph: [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue] on page 556
Scan table: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 483
Measurement Time ← Configuring scan ranges
Defines the measurement time used to analyze the signal.
In the Multi APD application (R&S ESW-K58), the measurement time is called acquisi-
tion time.
You can define a different measurement time for the bargraph, each scan range
defined in the scan table and the final measurement. If you perform a scan that is not
based on a scan table (Current parameters), the measurement time for the scan is the
same as for the bargraph.
In addition, you can define a separate measurement time for fixed frequency scans.
Tip: Make sure to select a measurement time that is appropriate for the analyzed sig-
nal and that allows the various filters and detectors in the signal path to settle.
Note that the measurement time for IF analysis is calculated automatically based on
the measurement time of the bargraph.
Remote command:
Bargraph: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 479
Scan table: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TIME on page 488
Final measurement: [SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME on page 500
Fixed frequency scan: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TDOMain on page 480
CISPR APD: [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 479
Auto Range ← Configuring scan ranges
Turns automatic configuration of the attenuation and gain on and off.
When you turn on auto ranging ("State"), the R&S ESW automatically selects an
attenuation (and gain, if auto mode for the preamplifier is on) that allows for an ideal
analysis of the received signal (without overloading the RF input).
Depending on your measurement task, select one of the following auto range modes
("Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Auto Range Mode").
● Normal
The "Normal" mode selects an attenuation and gain that results in a good signal-to-
noise ratio.
Thus, it reduces the display of spurious products. It also leads to an increased dis-
play of the inherent noise (because of a higher attenuation).
● Low noise
The "Low Noise" mode selects an attenuation and gain that increases the sensitiv-
ity of the R&S ESW.
This mode gives a better impression of spurious products and is thus useful to ana-
lyze signals whose level is near the noise level. However, the signal-to-noise ratio
in general can deteriorate.
Both auto range modes are designed to maintain the best dynamic range possible.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 114
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
The auto ranging feature in the receiver remains active even if you change the attenua-
tion and preamplifier properties in other measurement channels and then return to the
receiver application.
Auto ranging is not available for fixed frequency scans.
Notice: For more information, see Chapter 9.7.1, "Increasing measurement sensitivity
(or avoiding an input mixer overload)", on page 189.
Remote command:
General: INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 553
Scan range: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 484
Auto range mode: INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AMODe on page 552
Attenuation ← Configuring scan ranges
Defines the attenuation of the signal.
You can attenuate the signal in 1 dB steps. The range is specified in the datasheet.
Attenuation of less than 10 dB is only possible if you turn off 10 dB Minimum Attenua-
tion.
If you are using the preamplifier in frequency ranges above 8 GHz, the available
attenuation can be reduced.
For more information, see Chapter 9.7.1.2, "Using the preamplifier", on page 191.
Notice: For more information, see Chapter 9.7.1, "Increasing measurement sensitivity
(or avoiding an input mixer overload)", on page 189.
The auto ranging feature in the receiver remains active even if you change the attenua-
tion and preamplifier properties in other measurement channels and then return to the
receiver application.
The R&S ESW also allows you to determine the best attenuation automatically.
● In the receiver application, turn on the "Auto Ranging" feature.
● In the other applications, select attenuation "Mode" ➙ "Auto"
Remote command:
Global: INPut<ip>:ATTenuation[:VALue] on page 552
Scan range: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation[:VALue] on page 484
Attenuation mode: INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 553
Preamplifier ← Configuring scan ranges
Configures the preamplifier.
In addition to the standard preamplifier, a low noise amplifier is available as an optional
hardware component.
You can configure the preamplifier manually (➙ "Value" menu) or, if you are using the
Auto Range functionality, let the R&S ESW pick the ideal configuration (➙ "Auto"
menu).
● "Auto Off"
Allows you to turn the preamplifier on and off manually as required. If you have the
optional low noise preamplifier, you can select the preamplifier you would like to
apply from the "Value" menu ("LN Amplifier" or "Preamp)", or turn it off completely.
● "Auto LN Amplifier"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 115
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Automatically turns the optional low noise amplifier on and off, depending on the
applied signal. This is only possible when the "Auto Range" feature has been
turned on.
● "Auto Preamp"
Automatically turns the preamplifier on and off, depending on the applied signal.
This is only possible when the "Auto Range" feature (and the preselector) have
been turned on.
Note that when you select a different setting in the "Value" menu while the "Auto"
configuration is on, automatic configuration is turned off.
Example: "Auto" = "Preamp". When you select "Value" = "Preamp", "Auto" turns to
"Off".
Using both preamplifiers at the same time is not possible.
Note that turning on one of the preamplifiers limits the lower frequency (see data-
sheet for details).
Note that if you want to use the standard preamplifier, you have to route the signal
through the preselector.
More information.
Remote command:
Preamplifier:
State (global): INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe on page 554
State (scan range): [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 485
Mode (global): INPut<ip>:GAIN:AUTO on page 553
Mode (scan range): [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO on page 484
Low noise preamplifier:
State (global): INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:STATe on page 554
State (scan range): [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:STATe on page 485
Mode (global): INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:AUTO on page 554
Mode (scan range): [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:AUTO on page 485
Input Selection ← Configuring scan ranges
Selects the RF input connector you would like to use for a measurement.
Note that you cannot use both RF inputs simultaneously.
Remote command:
Global: INPut<ip>:TYPE on page 515
Scan range: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:TYPE on page 486
8.3.4 Performing a peak search
A peak search is meant to find signal peaks in the spectrum that you are analyzing.
The results of the peak search are written into a peak list, which in turn is the basis for
a final measurement.
This approach reduces the efforts required for the final measurement in that you have
to test only a few selected frequencies that probably carry interfering signals.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 116
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Defining peak characteristics (or "When is a peak a peak?")
If a signal is, for example, very flat, contains a lot of noise or does not contain many
peaks, the R&S ESW might miss potential peaks or detect peaks that really are no
peaks.
To avoid such situations, you can define what a peak is according to the following crite-
ria.
● Peak excursion
The peak excursion is a relative threshold. The signal level must increase by the
threshold value before falling again before a peak is detected.
To avoid identifying noise peaks instead of a real signal peak, enter a peak excur-
sion that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value
measured for the displayed inherent noise.
● Limit lines (not mandatory)
The signal level must be above the limit line (= fail the limit check) to be considered
as a peak.
● Limit margin (only if a limit line is active)
The level margin defines the distance relative to a limit line that a signal may at
most have so that it will be identified as a peak.
Figure 8-11: Peak definition
1 = Limit line
2 = Peak excursion
3 = Limit margin
Thus, a potential peak is written into the peak list under the following conditions.
Measurements without limit lines:
● If a signal meets the condition defined by the peak excursion.
Measurements with limit lines:
● If a signal level fails a limit check and meets the condition defined by the peak
excursion.
● If a signal level passes a limit check, but is within the limit margin ("x dB below the
limit"), and still meets the peak excursion.
In the diagram, the peaks are labeled with a colored symbol. Color and type of symbol
depend on the trace the peak is on.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 117
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Selecting the search method (or "How the search is performed?")
The automatic peak search that is part of automated tests is an easy way to find
peaks: the R&S ESW searches for peaks after the scan is done based on the condi-
tions you have defined for the peak search (peak excursion and limit margin). It then
writes the peaks into the peak list.
Alternatively, the R&S ESW allows you to edit peak lists and manually add or delete
frequencies. To create a peak list manually, you can, for example, use markers to
search for peaks, or, if you already know where peaks occur, add each frequency indi-
vidually.
Controlling the size of the peak list
The size of the peak list is variable. The peak list can contain up to 500 entries (= fre-
quencies). By default, the peak search adds peaks until the maximum size of the peak
list has been reached and regardless of the distribution of the peaks. If there are more
peaks than the size of the peak list allows for, the R&S ESW removes the frequencies
with the smallest signal levels. If there are fewer peaks than the list allows for, the size
of the list is reduced accordingly.
The R&S ESW also provides the possibility to split the spectrum into several equidis-
tant subranges and look for a defined number of peaks in each subrange with the
result that peak list entries are distributed equally over the measurement range.
● Configuring a peak search.................................................................................... 118
● Modifying a peak list..............................................................................................121
● Modifying a peak list (alternate method)............................................................... 123
8.3.4.1 Configuring a peak search
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Peak Search"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 118
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Figure 8-12: Overview of the "Peak Search" configuration
The remote commands required to configure the peak search are described in Chap-
ter 14.5.7, "Peak search", on page 489.
Selecting the peak search method.............................................................................. 119
Controlling the size of the peak list..............................................................................119
Defining peak characteristics...................................................................................... 120
Selecting a limit line.................................................................................................... 120
Enabling and disabling limit checks............................................................................ 120
Selecting the peak search method
Selects the peak search mode.
More information.
"Peaks" Looks for a particular number of peaks over the complete scan range.
"Subranges" Divides the scan range into smaller, equidistant subranges and looks
for a particular number of peaks in each subrange.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:METHod on page 492
Controlling the size of the peak list
Defines the number of peaks that are transferred to the peak list.
The contents of the peak list depend on the selected search mode.
● "Peaks"
When you have selected the "Peaks" search mode, define the number of peaks
the R&S ESW looks for during a peak search.
The range is from 1 to 500 peaks.
● "Subranges"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 119
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
When you have selected the "Subranges" search mode, define the number of
subranges you want to split the frequency range into, and the number of peaks
the R&S ESW looks for in each subrange.
You can define up to 50 subranges, with each subrange containing a maximum
number of 10 peaks. All subranges span the same frequency range.
Remote command:
Number of peaks: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:VALue]
on page 493
Number of subranges: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:VALue]
on page 493
Peaks per subrange: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges:PCOunt
on page 492
Defining peak characteristics
Defines the characteristics of a signal that identify it as a peak.
The peak excursion defines the minimum level by which a signal must rise or fall so
that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum during the peak search.
The margin defines the distance relative to a limit line that a signal may at most have
so that it will be identified as a peak.
(Note: a limit line margin defined for the limit line itself (see Margin) is ignored for a
peak search.)
For more information, see "Defining peak characteristics (or "When is a peak a
peak?")" on page 117.
Remote command:
Peak excursion: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 490
Margin: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin on page 492
Selecting a limit line
Selects one or more limit lines to evaluate for a peak search.
The table shows all limit lines available on the R&S ESW that are compatible to the
current measurement configuration. You can activate the limit line by marking the cor-
responding checkbox and assigning the limit line to a trace.
For more information on designing, editing and managing limit lines in general, see
Chapter 10.5, "Display and limit lines", on page 264.
For more information on the effects of a limit line on the peak search, see "Defining
peak characteristics (or "When is a peak a peak?")" on page 117.
Remote command:
See Chapter 14.7.5.2, "Limit lines", on page 614.
Enabling and disabling limit checks
Turns limit checks for pre-measurement on and off.
By disabling limit checks, FAIL messages for limit line violations during premeasure-
ments will no longer be displayed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 120
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
8.3.4.2 Modifying a peak list
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Peak List"
The peak list contains the frequencies on which the peak search has identified peaks.
It can be used as the basis of the final measurement.
Modifying a peak list (alternate way)
The R&S ESW also provides an alternate way to modify a peak list.
More information.
Figure 8-13: Overview of the peak list
Reading the peak list
The table at the top of the dialog contains information when you measure with limit
lines. Each cell of the table represents a trace and shows the limit lines that are
assigned to that trace. In the screenshot above, for example, the limit line named
"Another One" is active and assigned to Trace 1.
The main table shows the following information for each peak in the peak list. The size
of the table depends on the number of peaks that have been found.
● Trace / Detector
Shows the number of the trace and the detector used for that trace.
● Frequency
Shows the frequency where the peak was found.
● Level
Shows the absolute level value of the peak. The unit depends on the unit you have
selected.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 121
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
● Delta Limit
Shows the distance of the peak to the nearest limit line that has been assigned to
the corresponding trace. The distance is a value in dB. Available if you are using
limit lines.
● Comment
Allows you to add a comment to each peak as required (only possible after a peak
search has been done).
●
Deletes the corresponding row from the peak list.
The remote commands required to edit the peak list are described in Chapter 14.5.7,
"Peak search", on page 489 and Chapter 14.5.8, "Peak list", on page 494.
Editing a peak list........................................................................................................ 122
└ Adding the current frequency to the peak list................................................122
Sorting the peak list.....................................................................................................123
Exporting a peak list....................................................................................................123
Displaying peaks as symbols...................................................................................... 123
Editing a peak list
The R&S ESW allows you to edit a peak list that has been created, or even create a
peak list that is not based on an automatic peak search.
● Add a new frequency
To add a new peak to the peak list, enter a frequency in the corresponding field
and add it to the list with the "Insert" button.
Tip: Alternatively, you can add the current receiver frequency including the mea-
sured level with the Add to Peak List softkey.
The new frequency is added to the list regardless if the level threshold conditions
have been fulfilled for that frequency.
Note that the frequency has to be in the displayed frequency range.
● Delete a frequency
To remove a peak from the peak list, select the corresponding peak list row and
delete it with the "Delete Peak Entry" button.
Alternatively, use the button in the peak list itself.
You can also delete the complete peak list with the "Clear All Entries" button.
Remote command:
Add frequency: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:ADD on page 490
Clear list: CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 491
Adding the current frequency to the peak list ← Editing a peak list
The receiver application allows you to add the current receiver frequency manually to
the peak list.
Use one of the following ways to add a frequency to the peak list.
● Use the "Add to Peak List" softkey available in the "Meas Config" softkey menu.
● Use the "Add to Peak List" softkey available in the "Marker Function" softkey menu.
● Use the "Add to Peak List" button available in the "Peak List" result display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:ADD on page 490
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 122
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Sorting the peak list
By default, the R&S ESW sorts the peaks by their "Frequency" in ascending order.
Alternatively, you can sort the peak list by the distance of a peak to the limit line (➙
"Delta Limit"). This is also done in ascending order.
Sorting by the delta limit is available when a limit line is active and evaluated.
Remote command:
not supported
Exporting a peak list
The peak list can be exported to a file with the "Peak List Export" button.
This button opens a dialog box to export and save the contents of the peak list in ASCII
format to a .dat file.
The file consists of a header and the results of the scan or the final measurement.
● The header is a list of general instrument settings and characteristics. It consists of
three columns, each column separated by a semicolon: <parame-
ter>;<value>;<unit>.
● The results are split into several data sections, one for each active trace. The data
section begins with the entry Trace <x> [Final]:, followed by the trace char-
acteristics and the peak list data itself.
For more information on exporting data, see Chapter 10.3.8.1, "Reference: ASCII file
export format", on page 248.
By default, decimal places are separated by a point in the exported list. If necessary,
you can use a comma instead of a point as the decimal separator.
Remote command:
Peak list of the scan: MMEMory:STORe:PLISt on page 494
Peak list of the final measurement: MMEMory:STORe:FINal on page 494
Decimal separator: FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 632
Displaying peaks as symbols
Turns the labels on the peak position in the diagram on and off.
The peak labels have a different color and shape depending on the trace they are on.
Trace 1, for example, has red crosses as the peak label. By default they are on.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol on page 493
8.3.4.3 Modifying a peak list (alternate method)
Access: > "Peak List"
In addition to the method described in Chapter 8.3.4.2, "Modifying a peak list",
on page 121, the Receiver application provides another approach to modify and edit a
peak list.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 123
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Reading the peak list
The peak list result display basically contains the same information as the "Peak List"
dialog box.
More information
Note that the "Comment" column is read-only in the peak list result display. If you
would like to add a comment to a peak, you have to do it in the "Peak List" dialog box.
Modifying the contents of the peak list
When the result display is active, you can modify the peak list directly from within the
result display with the corresponding buttons (only visible if the result display spans the
whole screen).
● Peak Search
Performs a single peak search based on the current scan data.
● Add to Peak List
➙ "Adding the current frequency to the peak list" on page 122
● Symbols
➙ "Displaying peaks as symbols" on page 123
● Sort by Freq and Sort by Delta
➙ "Sorting the peak list" on page 123
● Export and Separator
➙ "Exporting a peak list" on page 123
8.3.5 Performing final measurements
During the final measurement, the R&S ESW does a measurement on each frequency
in the peak list. When done, it updates the preliminary results in the peak list with those
found during the final measurement. To avoid several tests with different detectors, you
can use several detectors at the same time during the final measurement.
In case you are using a scan table in the test sequence, the final measurement is
based on the contents of the scan table. When the scan table has been turned off, the
final measurement is based on the current bargraph configuration.
Automatic vs interactive final measurements
The R&S ESW provides two methods to run a final measurement: an automatic final
measurement and an interactive one.
An automatic final measurement measures all frequencies in the peak list automatically
with limited means of interaction. During an automatic measurement, you can still inter-
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 124
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
rupt ("Hold Final Meas") and resume the measurement or abort it completely ("Stop
Final Meas"). But you will not be able to change the measurement configuration. The
advantage is that you can let the measurement run on its own and do not have to oper-
ate the R&S ESW.
If you want to be able to control the final measurement, for example to change the con-
figuration during the measurement, the R&S ESW also provides an interactive final
measurement (which you can select even after you have started an automatic final
measurement).
When you use the interactive final measurement, the R&S ESW interrupts the mea-
surement before it measures a frequency part of the peak list. In this way, you can cus-
tomize the measurement configuration for each frequency.
Availability of measurement parameters
When you interrupt the scan or the final measurement, you can change only parame-
ters that have an immediate effect on the measurement. All other parameters (e.g. trig-
ger settings) are unavailable.
Sequence for an interactive measurement
If you select the interactive final measurement, the R&S ESW initiates the following
sequence.
1. The R&S ESW tunes to the first frequency in the peak list. The measurement con-
figuration is as defined previously.
2. The R&S ESW positions a marker on that frequency and interrupts the measure-
ment.
3. While the measurement is interrupted, you can change any setting that is available.
In addition, you have several options on how to proceed.
● Skip the current frequency.
Positions the marker on the next frequency in the peak list without performing a
final measurement on the current frequency.
● Get max hold result for the current frequency.
Writes the highest level that was measured for that frequency during the scan
to the final peak list without performing a final measurement.
● Stop the final measurement.
● Perform a measurement on the current frequency.
4. When the final measurement for the current frequency is done, the R&S ESW
replaces the scan result in the peak list with the result of the final measurement. If
the frequency has drifted compared to the one of the scan, it also updates the fre-
quency in the peak list.
5. The R&S ESW continues with the next frequency in the peak list, positions the
marker on that frequency etc.
6. When all frequencies in the peak list are finished, the R&S ESW opens the "Final
Peak List", a table that contains the results for the final measurement.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 125
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Note that it is possible to start with an automatic measurement and later change into
interactive mode. Likewise, it is possible to start measuring in interactive mode and
later change into automatic mode.
● Configuring traces................................................................................................. 126
● Working with the final measurement results......................................................... 128
8.3.5.1 Configuring traces
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Trace / Final Meas"
Note that the dialog box to configure traces contains the same functions as the dialog
box to configure the final measurement, but with a slightly different layout.
Figure 8-14: Overview of the Final Meas configuration
The remote commands required to configure the final measurement are described in
Chapter 14.5.9, "Final measurement (and trace) configuration", on page 499.
Availability of detectors
When a time domain scan is performed, it is not possible to use "RMS" and "Average"
detectors at the same time.
Functions in the "Trace / Final Meas" dialog box described elsewhere:
● "Measurement Time" on page 93
Trace Mode................................................................................................................. 127
Detector.......................................................................................................................127
Interactive....................................................................................................................128
Average Mode.............................................................................................................128
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 126
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Trace Mode
Defines the update mode for subsequent traces.
For more information, see Chapter 10.3.1.2, "Analyzing several traces - trace mode",
on page 226.
"Clear Write" Displays the level that has been measured last at each trace point.
The old trace is overwritten.
"Max Hold" Displays and saves the highest level that has been measured over
several measurements at each trace point.
"Min Hold" Displays and saves the lowest level that has been measured over
several measurements at each trace point.
"Average" Displays and saves the average level that has been determined over
several measurements at each trace point.
The number of measurements depends on the Scan Count.
"View" Freezes the contents of the trace memory and displays the corre-
sponding trace. The trace is not updated when you start another
measurement.
"Blank" Removes the trace from the diagram.
"Transducer" Draws a trace that shows the correction values of all active trans-
ducer factors in the currently selected frequency range. In case trans-
ducer factors overlap each other, the correction values are aggrega-
ted.
Available for Trace 1 and in the receiver application only.
Note: When you select the "Transducer" trace, the application tempo-
rarily removes all other traces from the diagram. You can restore the
scan traces by selecting the original trace mode of trace 1 again.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 501
View transducer: [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW on page 499
Detector
Selects the trace detector.
Note: In the receiver application, you can apply different detectors to the bargraph, the
scan and the final measurement.
"Max Peak" Selects the Max or Positive Peak detector.
"Min Peak" Selects the Max or Positive Peak detector.
Not available in "Fast" mode.
"RMS" Selects the RMS detector.
"Average" Selects the Average detector.
"Quasipeak" Selects the Quasipeak detector.
"CISPR Aver- Selects the CISPR Average detector.
age"
"RMS Aver- Selects the RMS Average detector.
age"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 127
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
"None" Ignores the corresponding trace during the final measurement.
Available for the final measurement.
Remote command:
Bargraph: [SENSe:]DETector<t>:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] on page 478
Scan: [SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] on page 482
Final measurement: [SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement on page 500
Interactive
Turns interactive measurements on and off.
For more information, see "Automatic vs interactive final measurements" on page 124.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO on page 500
Average Mode
Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several measurements.
This setting is generally applicable if trace mode "Average" is selected.
"Linear" The power level values are converted into linear units before averag-
ing. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original
unit.
"Logarithmic" For logarithmic scaling, the values are averaged in dBm. For linear
scaling, the behavior is the same as with linear averaging.
"Power" Activates linear power averaging.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt before averaging.
After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 502
8.3.5.2 Working with the final measurement results
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "Final Result"
When the final measurement is done, the R&S ESW writes the results into a table that
looks and feels similar to the peak list. Editing entries is, however, not possible.
The list contains all frequencies that have been measured during the final measure-
ment.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 128
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Figure 8-15: Overview of the "Final Results" table
The functionality and information provided by the final results dialog box is similar to
that provided by the peak list.
Functions to manage final results described elsewhere:
● "Sorting the peak list" on page 123
● "Exporting a peak list" on page 123
● "Displaying peaks as symbols" on page 123
Alternate way to modify the final results
Like the peak list, you can also modify the final results directly via the "Final Meas"
result display.
More information.
▶ Select the "SmartGrid" icon ( ) and start the "Final Meas" result display.
The remote commands required to manage final results are described in Chap-
ter 14.5.9, "Final measurement (and trace) configuration", on page 499 and Chap-
ter 14.5.10, "Final results", on page 503.
Reading the peak list
The table at the top of the dialog contains information when you measure with limit
lines. Each cell of the table represents a trace and shows the limit lines that are
assigned to that trace.
The main table shows the following information for each frequency that has been mea-
sured. The size of the table depends on the number of peaks that have been found.
● Rows with no highlighting
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 129
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
Limit check for the corresponding frequency has passed.
● Rows in red highlighting
Limit check for the corresponding frequency has failed. This indicates a potential
interferer.
● Rows in blue highlighting
Indicates the currently selected row.
● Trace / Detector
Shows the number of the trace and the detector used for that trace.
● Frequency
Shows the frequency where the peak was found.
● Level
Shows the absolute level value of the peak. The unit depends on the unit you have
selected.
The result also contains information about the phase that was measured when you
are working with a LISN (L1, L2, L3, N).
● Delta Limit
Shows the distance of the peak to the nearest limit line that has been assigned to
the corresponding trace. The distance is a value in dB. Available if you are using
limit lines.
● Comment
Allows you to add a comment to each result as required.
8.3.6 Configuring line impedance stabilization networks (LISN)
Access: "Overview" > "Test Automation" > "LISN"
The R&S ESW supports several LISN models and provides functionality to control
these devices.
For more information about using a LISN, see Chapter 8.3.1.3, "Line impedance stabili-
zation network (LISN) control", on page 98.
Figure 8-16: Overview of the "LISN" configuration
Note: the "Scan" and "Final Test" blocks are available in the Receiver application.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 130
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
Test automation
The remote commands required to configure the LISN are described in Chap-
ter 14.5.11, "LISN configuration", on page 507.
LISN Type................................................................................................................... 131
Phase.......................................................................................................................... 131
High-Pass Filter 150 kHz............................................................................................ 132
LISN Type
Selects the LISN used for the measurement.
The following LISNs are supported by the R&S ESW:
● R&S ENV216
● R&S AMN6500
● R&S ENV432
● R&S ENV4200
● R&S ESH2-Z5
● R&S ESH3-Z5
Select "Off" when you are performing measurements without a LISN.
More information
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] on page 509
Phase
Selects the LISN phase to be measured.
Phases L2 and L3 are available when you are using the R&S ENV4200, R&S 432 or
R&S ESH2-Z5 (four-line networks).
In the spectrum application, the I/Q analyzer and the analog demodulator, you can
measure on one phase at a time (N, L1, L2 or L3).
In the receiver application, phase selection works as follows.
● You can measure more than one phase in a single measurement (N, L1, L2 and /
or L3).
Instead of selecting the phase in the "Phase" column of the dialog, select the pha-
ses you want to measure in the "Scan" or the "Final Test" column ("On" considers
the phase in the measurement, "Off" ignores the phase in the measurement).
If you are measuring more than one phase, the R&S ESW performs a measure-
ment for each of the selected phases.
● You can select different phase (combinations) for the scan and the final measure-
ment.
The selection in the "Scan" and "Final Test" blocks of the dialog box override the
selection in the "Phase" block of the dialog.
Example:
• Phase L1 is selected in the "Phase" block.
• Phase L1 and N are selected in the "Scan" block.
• Phase L1 is off in the "Final Test" block, but phase N is on.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 131
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
CISPR APD Measurements
➙ During the scan, the R&S ESW measures both selected phases.
➙ During the final measurement, the R&S ESW measures phase N, but not phase
L1.
➙ The phase selected in the "Phase" block is ignored for both the scan and the
final measurement.
When scan and final measurement are done, the general phase (here: L1)
becomes the selected phase again.
More information
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe on page 508
Scan: [SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:LISN:PHASe on page 507
Final measurement: [SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe on page 507
High-Pass Filter 150 kHz
Turns the high-pass filter on the LISN on and off.
The filter protects the receiver input from high signal levels below 150 kHz.
Available for measurements with R&S ENV216 and R&S AMN6500.
More information
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] on page 508
8.4 CISPR APD Measurements
Access: [MODE] > "CISPR APD"
The Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) is a statistical measurement that shows
the "cumulative distribution of the probability of time that the amplitude of disturbance
exceeds a specified level" (CISPR 16-1-1, Amendment 1:2005). So, basically, the mea-
surement determines the likelihood that a disturbance is above a specified level at a
particular frequency (the measurement is usually performed on a fixed frequency).
The amplitude of the disturbance is expressed in terms of the corresponding field
strength or voltage at the receiver input.
The APD is measured at the output of the envelope detector. Therefore, the APD
yields the probability information over the entire disturbance envelope within the mea-
surement bandwidth and a particular period of time.
The APD function has the following advantages.
● It provides an alternative way to present peak and average measurements (for
example for microwave ovens in accordance with CISPR 11).
● It is able to calculate true average values.
● It shows high sensitivity and allows you to measure, for example, a single impulse.
● It allows you to measure unsteady levels.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 132
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
CISPR APD Measurements
APD vs CISPR APD
Note that the R&S ESW also provides an APD measurement for general purposes in
the spectrum application.
This general APD function does not comply with CISPR 16-1-1 in various aspects and
cannot be used for CISPR APD measurements.
Remote command:
CALCulate:STATistics:CAPD[:STATe] on page 462
The result display is made up out of a diagram and a table.
● The diagram contains a graphical representation of the measurement results (the
probability with which a particular amplitude occurs).
The x-axis represents the amplitude, the y-axis the (cumulative) probability.
● The table ("Result Summary") contains the number of samples used in the calcula-
tion and, for each trace, the following values:
– Average amplitude
– Peak amplitude
Configuring CISPR APD measurements
Most of the settings available in the CISPR APD application are similar to settings
already available in the receiver application or the spectrum application.
All parameters specific to the CISPR APD application are described below.
● Frequency and span settings: are similar to those in the spectrum application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Amplitude settings: are similar to those in the spectrum application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Scale settings: are similar to those of the APD measurement available in the spec-
trum application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Preselector settings: are similar to those in the receiver application.
Refer to Chapter 9.6.2, "Configuring the preselector", on page 145 for a detailed
description of these parameters (including remote commands).
● Auto settings: are similar to those in the spectrum application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Bandwidth settings: are similar to those in the receiver application.
– "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94 (called "Analysis BW" in the CISPR
APD application, but it is the same)
– "Measurement Time" on page 93 (called "Acquisition Time" in the CISPR APD
application, but it is the same)
● Sweep settings: are similar to those in the receiver application.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 133
R&S®ESW Measurements and result displays
CISPR APD Measurements
– "Measurement Time" on page 93 (called "Acquisition Time" in the CISPR APD
application, but it is the same)
– "Scan Count" on page 106 (called "Sweep / Average Count" in the CISPR APD
application, but is the same)
● Trace settings: are similar to those in the spectrum application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Trigger settings: are similar to those in the spectrum application (gated measure-
ments are not supported).
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● General measurement settings: are similar to those in the receiver application.
– "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94 (called "Analysis BW" in the CISPR
APD application, but it is the same)
– "Measurement Time" on page 93 (called "Acquisition Time" in the CISPR APD
application, but it is the same)
– "Percent Marker" on page 134
● Lines settings: are not available in the CISPR APD application.
● Input source settings are similar to those in the receiver application.
See Chapter 9.6.1, "Configuring the input", on page 143 for a detailed description
of these parameters (including remote commands).
● External generator settings (optional): are similar to those available in the spectrum
application.
Refer to the documentation of the spectrum application for a detailed description of
these parameters (including remote commands).
● Output settings: are similar to those available in the receiver application.
– Chapter 9.6.5, "Configuring outputs (IF / video / demodulation)", on page 182
– Chapter 9.6.6, "Configuring LISNs", on page 186
– Chapter 9.6.7, "Configuring additional outputs", on page 186
● Marker settings: are similar to those in the receiver application.
See Chapter 10.4, "Marker usage", on page 250 for a detailed description of these
parameters (including remote commands).
● Marker functions: are not available in the CISPR APD application.
Percent Marker............................................................................................................134
Percent Marker
Defines a probability value. Thus, the power which is exceeded with a given probability
can be determined very easily. If marker 1 is deactivated, it is switched on automati-
cally.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent on page 509
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 134
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the fast access knobs
9 Common measurement settings
Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless
of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a spe-
cific measurement task, or an application other than the receiver application, be sure to
check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from
these common settings.
● Using the fast access knobs................................................................................. 135
● Using the fast access panel.................................................................................. 138
● Using the user port panel...................................................................................... 140
● The notes display..................................................................................................141
● Configuration overview..........................................................................................142
● Data input and output............................................................................................143
● Amplitude and vertical axis configuration..............................................................189
● Frequency and span configuration........................................................................195
● Bandwidth and filter configuration......................................................................... 203
● Trigger configuration............................................................................................. 204
9.1 Using the fast access knobs
The R&S ESW features two small knobs on its front panel labeled "Knob 1" and
"Knob 2".
These knobs are designed to provide fast access to a (predefined) set of settings that
you are using regularly, and change these settings without using the user interface.
Each knob can carry several different functions.
Basically, the knobs work like the rotary knob. When you have selected the "Attenua-
tion" parameter, for example, turning the rotary knob changes the attenuation by a cer-
tain amount. The same is possible with the fast access knobs: when you assign the
attenuation to one of the knobs, you can change the attenuation by turning the knobs.
The difference is, that you do not have to select the attenuation parameter in the user
interface first to change the attenuation, but simply turn the knob. In addition, you are
able to see the result diagrams the whole time, without dialog boxes blocking the view.
(When one knob carries more than one function, you have to first select the required
function by pressing the fast access knobs a couple of times, but you still do not have
to use the user interface to change settings.)
Example: Steps necessary to change the attenuation without the fast access
knobs
1. Press the [AMPT] key.
2. Press the "Ampt Config" softkey.
3. Select the "Attenuation" parameter.
4. Turn the rotary knob or enter the attenuation manually to change the attenuation.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 135
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the fast access knobs
When you want to change the attenuation again, you have to repeat that proce-
dure. Plus, almost the whole time, the result displays are blocked by a dialog box.
5. (...)
Example: Steps necessary to change the attenuation when you have assigned
that parameter to the fast access knobs
1. (If the knob carries more than one function:
Press the fast access knob repeatedly until "Att" appears in the interface to config-
ure knobs.)
2. Turn the fast access knob to increase or decrease the attenuation.
When you want to change the attenuation again, simply turn the knob. Plus, you
are able to see the results all the time.
Note: The parameter stepsize of the knobs is the same as if you were using the
rotary knob.
When you are using the R&S ESW for the first time, each knob carries a predefined
function. These predefined functions differ, depending on the application you are using.
For example, in the receiver application, one knob changes the attenuation and the
other changes the measurement bandwidth. However, you can substitute these prede-
fined functions. So basically, the fast access knobs do not carry a specific function.
If you want to have access to other functions, you can configure the knobs to do things
as you like and assign functions to them (more or less) arbitrarily.
Assigning functions to the fast access knobs
1. Tap one of the interfaces to configure knobs in the user interface (depending on the
knob you would like to configure).
The R&S ESW opens a dialog box with three tabs. Two tabs allow you to configure
each of the fast access knobs. The third tab allows you to configure the "Fast
Access" display which works similar to the fast access knobs.
(You can access the "Fast Access" display via the SmartGrid )
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 136
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the fast access knobs
Note: The contents of the menus depend on the application you are running cur-
rently (spectrum, receiver, I/Q analyzer, analog demodulation or real-time).
2. To assign an additional function to the knob, select one of the parameters in the left
menu and move it to the right menu with the right arrow key ( ). Alternatively, you
can move items via drag & drop.
When you add a function to the knobs, the interface to configure knobs shows an
additional dot.
Tip: The currently selected function is represented by a blue dot, the other func-
tions by a white dot. In addition, the interface to configure knobs contains a label
that describes the currently selected function (for example "Att" for attenuation).
3. To remove a function from the knob, select one of the parameters in the right menu
and move it to the left menu with the left arrow key ( ).
Note that the labels "H-Line" and "V-Line" are abbreviations for "Horizontal Line"
and "Vertical Line" and thus refer to display lines.
4. Save the configuration to a file and restore it later on.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you
can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
Selecting a knob function
By default, the first function (blue dot) on the interface to configure knobs is the active
one.
1. Push the knob (it also serves as a button) repeatedly until you have reached the
required function.
2. Turn the knob to change the parameter value.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 137
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the fast access panel
9.2 Using the fast access panel
Access: > "Fast Access"
The "Fast Access" panel is designed to provide fast access to a (predefined) set of set-
tings that you are using regularly, and change these settings without accessing dialog
boxes or softkey menus. The contents of the fast access panel are user-definable.
When you add the fast access panel to the user interface, it shows the settings that
you can control through the panel. Using the "Up" ( ) or "Down" ( ) feature
changes the value of the corresponding setting. The stepsize is the same as if you
were using the cursor keys on the front panel.
The advantage of the fast access panel is that it is easier and faster to change various
settings in a single panel without having to find and access dialog boxes or softkey
menus first. In addition, you can still view results while changing parameters, without
dialog boxes blocking the view.
Example: Steps necessary to change the attenuation without the fast access
panel
1. Press the [AMPT] key.
2. Press the "Ampt Config" softkey.
3. Select the "Attenuation" parameter.
4. Turn the rotary knob or enter the attenuation manually to change the attenuation.
When you want to change the attenuation again, you have to repeat that proce-
dure. Plus, almost the whole time, the result displays are blocked by a dialog box.
5. (...)
Example: Steps necessary to change the attenuation when you have assigned
that parameter to the fast access panel
1. Add the fast access panel to the user interface.
2. Use the cursor keys in the panel to increase or decrease the attenuation.
When you want to change the attenuation again, simply hit the "Up" or "Down" key.
Plus, you are able to see the results all the time.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 138
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the fast access panel
Note: The parameter stepsize of the knobs is the same as if you were using the
cursor keys.
The fast access panel carries a few predefined settings. However, you can substitute
the predefined settings, or add a few more, and thus define the contents of the fast
access panel as you like.
Assigning functions to the fast access panel
1. Tap one of the interfaces to configure knobs in the user interface.
The R&S ESW opens a dialog box with several tabs. One tab each to configure the
fast access knobs, one to configure the fast access display, and tabs to configure
multimedia controllers.
You can access the fast access display via the SmartGrid .
Note: The contents of the menus depend on the application you are running cur-
rently (spectrum, receiver, I/Q analyzer, analog demodulation or real-time).
2. To assign an additional function to the panel, select one of the parameters in the
left menu and move it to the right menu with the right arrow key ( ). Alternatively,
you can move items via drag & drop.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 139
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Using the user port panel
3. To remove a function from the panel, select one of the parameters in the right
menu and move it to the left menu with the left arrow key ( ).
4. Save the configuration to a file and restore it later on.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you
can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
9.3 Using the user port panel
Access: > "User Port"
The "User Port" panel is designed to configure the optional user port (AUX port) on the
rear of the R&S ESW. Using the user port, you can transmit bit patterns in two direc-
tions, depending on the actual selected signal direction.
When you add the user port panel to the user interface, you can configure the user
ports as required.
User port configuration................................................................................................140
User port configuration
You can configure the user port as an input or an output by selecting the signal "Direc-
tion".
● When you configure the user port as an output, you can select the required bit pat-
terns by changing the state of the indivdiual ports ("Port <x>").
An active port shows a green LED.
● When you configure the user port as an input, you can read out the user port con-
figuration. The value is displayed in the panel. Individual port selection becomes
unavailable.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 140
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
The notes display
For more information about the pin to bit assignment, refer to the description of the
remote command.
Remote command:
Output state: OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe on page 539
Set bit pattern: OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue] on page 539
Input state: INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe on page 538
Query bit pattern: INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue] on page 538
9.4 The notes display
Access: > "Notes"
The "Notes" display is designed to add comments or explanations to the current mea-
surement.
The content of the "Notes" display can also be included in test reports, see Chap-
ter 11.7.2, "Creating a test report", on page 329.
Remote commands:
Add notes display: LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564
Set and query content: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:TEXT
on page 656
Append content: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:APPend:
TEXT on page 655
Clear notes display: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:CLEar
on page 656
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 141
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Configuration overview
9.5 Configuration overview
Throughout the measurement channel configuration, an overview of the most important
currently defined settings is provided in the configuration "Overview". The configuration
overview is displayed when you select the "Overview" softkey, which is available at the
bottom of all softkey menus.
In addition to the main measurement settings, the configuration overview provides
quick access to the main settings dialog boxes. Thus, you can easily configure an
entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by
stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the "Overview".
To configure settings
► Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box.
● Input
● Amplitude
● Frequency
● Trigger
● Output
● Bandwidth
● Analysis
● Display Config
(For more information about the "Test Automation" button, see Chapter 8.3, "Test auto-
mation", on page 95.)
Preset Channel........................................................................................................... 143
Specific Settings for.................................................................................................... 143
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 142
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Preset Channel
Select the "Preset Channel" button in the lower left-hand corner of the "Overview" to
restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values.
Note: Do not confuse the "Preset Channel" button with the [Preset] key, which restores
the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all channels on the
R&S ESW (except for the default channel)!
See "Preset Mode" on page 376
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 644
Specific Settings for
The channel can contain several windows for different results. Thus, the settings indi-
cated in the "Overview" and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the
selected window.
Select an active window from the "Specific Settings for" selection list that is displayed
in the "Overview" and in all window-specific configuration dialog boxes.
The "Overview" and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected
window.
When you select the "Bargraph" item from the dropdown menu, changes are also
applied to the scan. If settings are not available for the Bargraph (for example trace
settings), changes only apply to the scan. The same applies to numerical result dis-
plays (for example the "Peak List").
9.6 Data input and output
The R&S ESW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various
types of output (such as video or trigger signals).
Functions to control in- and outputs described elsewhere:
● Chapter 8.3.6, "Configuring line impedance stabilization networks (LISN)",
on page 130
● Configuring the input.............................................................................................143
● Configuring the preselector................................................................................... 145
● Optional external mixers....................................................................................... 147
● External generator.................................................................................................169
● Configuring outputs (IF / video / demodulation).................................................... 182
● Configuring LISNs.................................................................................................186
● Configuring additional outputs...............................................................................186
9.6.1 Configuring the input
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 143
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
The default input source for the R&S ESW is "Radio Frequency", i.e. the signal at the
[RF Input] connector on the front panel of the R&S ESW. In the Receiver application,
this is the only available input source.
Functions in the "Input" dialog box described elsewhere:
● "Input Selection" on page 116
Input Coupling............................................................................................................. 144
Impedance.................................................................................................................. 144
Pulse Limiter............................................................................................................... 145
Input Coupling
The RF input of the R&S ESW can be coupled by alternating current (AC) or direct cur-
rent (DC).
Note that the "Input Coupling" feature is only available for input 2 when the pulse lim-
iter is turned off. When the pulse limiter is on, the input is always DC coupled.
AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal. AC coupling is activated by
default to prevent damage to the instrument. Very low frequencies in the input signal
can be distorted.
However, some specifications require DC coupling. In this case, you must protect the
instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually. For details, refer to the data
sheet.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:COUPling on page 514
Impedance
For some measurements, the reference impedance for the measured levels of the
R&S ESW can be set to 50 Ω or 75 Ω.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 144
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Select 75 Ω if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a
75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type. (That corresponds to 25Ω in series to the input impe-
dance of the instrument.) The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75Ω/
50Ω).
This value also affects the unit conversion.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:IMPedance on page 514
Pulse Limiter
The pulse limiter, available for the second RF input, is a protection mechanism against
high level pulses or signals (which can damage the input mixer).
When you turn on the pulse limiter, the attenuation is always at least 10 dB. Attenua-
tion smaller than 10 dB is only available when you turn off the pulse limiter.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:LIMiter[:STATe] on page 515
9.6.2 Configuring the preselector
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Preselector"
Preselector settings allow you to configure the signal path up to the input mixer, espe-
cially the preselector characteristics.
The orange arrow in the dialog box represents the current signal path. Grey arrows
represent other possible signal paths.
Note that the signal path through the YIG preselector is always orange. This is
because the YIG preselector is always used for measurements on frequencies greater
then 8 GHz. A bypass of the YIG preselector is not possible.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 145
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
(For measurements up to 8 GHz, you can use the optional preselector, see "Preselec-
tor Filter Settings" on page 146)
Functions of the "Preselector" dialog box described elsewhere:
● "Input Selection" on page 116
● "Input Coupling" on page 144
● "Attenuation" on page 115
● "Preamplifier" on page 115
● "Pulse Limiter" on page 145
Preselector State.........................................................................................................146
Preselector Filter Settings........................................................................................... 146
Preselector State
Turns the preselector on and off.
When you turn on the preselector, you can configure the characteristics of the prese-
lector and add the preamplifier into the signal path.
For more information, see Preselector Filter Settings.
When you turn off the preselector, the signal bypasses the preselector and the pream-
plifier, and is fed into the input mixer directly.
You can still use the optional low noise preamplifier, however.
Note that in the receiver application, the preselector is always turned on.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:PRESelection[:STATe] on page 517
Preselector Filter Settings
Selects the filter of the preselector.
Most preselector filters are applied automatically during the measurement. However,
you can control the following preselector filter characteristics. In addition, you can use
several notch filters to suppress signals from the corresponding frequency range com-
pletely.
● 150 kHz to 2 MHz to 30 MHz (preselector filter)
Preselection in the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz is split into two
stages.
– During the first stage, the filter allows signals to pass from 150 kHz to 2 MHz.
– During the second stage, another filter allows signals to pass from 2 MHz to
30 MHz.
● 150 kHz to 8 MHz to 30 MHz (preselector filter, available with Preselector 1,
Mat-Nr. 1345.0509.02)
Preselection in the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz is split into two
stages.
– During the first stage, the filter allows signals to pass from 150 kHz to 8 MHz.
– During the second stage, another filter allows signals to pass from 8 MHz to
30 MHz.
● 150 kHz to 2 MHz to 8 MHz to 30 MHz (preselector filter, available with Prese-
lector 1, Mat-Nr. 1345.0509.02)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 146
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Preselection in the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz is split into three
stages.
– During the first stage, the filter allows signals to pass from 150 kHz to 2 MHz.
– During the second stage, another filter allows signals to pass from 2 MHz to
8 MHz.
– During the third stage, another filter allows signals to pass from 8 MHz to
30 MHz.
● 150 kHz to 30 MHz (preselector filter)
Filters signals below 150 kHz and above 30 MHz.
● 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz (notch filter, available with Preselector 2 Unit, Mat-Nr.
1345.0450.02)
Notch filter that excludes the frequency range from 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz.
● 2.4 GHz to 2.5 GHz (notch filter, available with Preselector 2 Unit, Mat-Nr.
1328.4522.02)
Notch filter that excludes the frequency range from 2.4 GHz to 2.5 GHz.
● 5.725 GHz to 5.875 GHz (notch filter)
Notch filter that excludes the frequency range from 5.725 GHz to 5.875 GHz.
Note that when you apply one of the notch filters, measurement results for these
frequency ranges are not displayed. The result is a gap in the trace in these ranges
where markers do not work.
On both sides of the filter, an additional "Exclusion Band" is added. The width of
the exclusion band is 1 % of the lower and upper bandwidth of the notch filter (thus
it has a different width on both sides of the filter). The edges of the exclusion band
are indicated by two vertical lines in the diagram.
An orange arrow in the diagram represents the path you have selected.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit[:STATe] on page 516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit:TYPE on page 516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] on page 515
9.6.3 Optional external mixers
If the R&S ESW External Mixer option is installed, an external mixer can be connected
to the R&S ESW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to
measure is not taken from the RF input connector, but from the [Ext Mixer] connec-
tor(s).
● Basics on external mixers..................................................................................... 147
● External mixer settings..........................................................................................156
● How to work with external mixers..........................................................................165
● Measurement examples: using an external mixer.................................................168
9.6.3.1 Basics on external mixers
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used with external mixers
is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 147
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
● Frequency ranges................................................................................................. 148
● Bias current........................................................................................................... 149
● Conversion loss tables.......................................................................................... 149
● Automatic signal identification...............................................................................151
Frequency ranges
In a common spectrum analyzer, rather than providing one large (and thus inaccurate)
filter, or providing several filters to cover the required frequency range of the input sig-
nal (at a high cost), a single, very accurate filter is used. Therefore, the input signal
must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter. This is done
by a mixer, which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help
of the local oscillator (LO). The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency (IF).
The local oscillator can be tuned within the supported frequency range of the input sig-
nal.
In order to extend the supported frequency range of the input signal, an external mixer
can be used. In this case, the LO frequency is output to the external mixer, where it is
mixed with the RF input from the original input signal. In addition, the harmonics of the
LO are mixed with the input signal, and converted to new intermediate frequencies.
Thus, a wider range of frequencies can be obtained. The IF from the external mixer is
then returned to the spectrum analyzer.
The frequency of the input signal can be expressed as a function of the LO frequency
and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows:
fin = n * fLO + fIF
Where:
fin: Frequency of input signal
n: Order of harmonic used for conversion
fIF: Intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW and span)
Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic
must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined bands with the
appropriate harmonic order setting are provided. By default, the lowest harmonic order
is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band.
The frequency ranges for pre-defined bands are described in Table 14-4.
Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the [PRESET]
function. A "Preset band" function allows you to restore the original band settings.
Extending predefined ranges
In some cases, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre-
quency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. How-
ever, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the
defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values ("RF Overrange"
option).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 148
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Additional ranges
If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one
harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range
can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the har-
monic defined for the first range, and at a specified frequency in the overlapping range
("handover frequency"), switches to the harmonic for the second range.
Bias current
Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line.
This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such
a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS" function using the D/A converter of the
R&S ESW. The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short-circuit current. The
current is defined in the "Bias Settings" or set to the value of the conversion loss table.
See "Bias Value" on page 160 and "Bias" on page 163.
Figure 9-1: Bias circuit of the R&S ESW
The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range –2.0 V
to +2.0 V. An open-circuit voltage Ubias of –0.5 V to +0.5 V is obtained accordingly at
the output of the voltage divider. A short-circuit current of Ishort = U0 / 200 Ω = 10 mA to
+10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider. In order to use
biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the
conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency. Therefore, it makes no
difference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short-cir-
cuit current. A DC return path is ensured via the 66 Ω resistor, which is an advantage
in some mixers.
Conversion loss tables
Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for
conversion loss at certain frequencies. Correction values for frequencies between the
reference values are obtained by interpolation. Linear interpolation is performed if the
table contains only two values. If it contains more than two reference values, spline
interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency range covered by the table the con-
version loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value
(see Figure 9-2).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 149
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Figure 9-2: Conversion loss outside the band's frequency range
Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can
be imported to the R&S ESW.
Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
are configured and managed in the "Conversion loss Table Settings" tab of the "Exter-
nal Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
Importing CVL tables
The conversion loss table to be used for a particular measurement range is also
defined in the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
The frequency range that the cvl table must cover depends on the used IF, which var-
ies depending on the instrument and installed bandwidth extension options. Thus,
external mixers from Rohde & Schwarz provide multiple conversion loss table files.
When you select a storage path containing cvl files, or a particular cvl file from a
Rohde & Schwarz mixer for import, all available files are copied to the
C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory on the R&S ESW. Provided .acl files are
renamed according to the following syntax:
<serial_number>_<harmonic_order>_<IF>.acl,
e.g. 12345_2_1330M.acl
To select a conversion loss table for use in a measurement, you merely have to select
the serial number for the external mixer in use. The R&S ESW automatically selects
the correct cvl file for the current IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-
defined conversion loss table (.acl file).
Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory, the R&S ESW
firmware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use
a user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the
C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\backup directory.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 150
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies
with the settings. In particular, the following is checked:
● The assigned band name
● The harmonic order
● The mixer type
● The table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range
for the band
Reference level
The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss
value. Thus, the reference level can be adjusted for each range according to the used
conversion loss table or average conversion loss value. If a conversion loss value is
used which exceeds the maximum reference level, the reference level is adjusted to
the maximum value permitted by the firmware.
Automatic signal identification
Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results
of the mixer, thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per-
form frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
Signal ID function
Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the
upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured
on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 151
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Figure 9-3: Signal identification function (Signal ID) with optional external mixer
The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2*IF/
<Harmonic order>. Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the
specified harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency
axis. Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed at
different positions in both traces. The user identifies the signals visually by comparing
the two traces.
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep. Therefore the signal level should
only be measured in the test sweep (trace 1).
Auto ID function
The Auto ID function basically functions like Signal ID function. However, the test and
reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak
values of each sweep point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Sig-
nal ID" is active at the same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be dis-
played in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this cal-
culated trace.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 152
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Test sweep and reference sweep traces
Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the
traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the ref-
erence sweep (lower side-band sweep).
Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3
Signal ID Signal ID upper side- Signal ID lower side- -
band band
Auto ID Auto ID - -
Signal ID + Auto ID Signal ID upper side- Signal ID lower side- Auto ID
band band
Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep. This is due to the fact that
the LO output power of the R&S ESW varies with the frequency, and also due to the
non-ideal characteristics of the mixer. A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted
for the comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep. A user-
defined threshold is used to determine deviations.
Auto ID detection threshold
Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference
sweeps, i.e. theoretically, identical signal levels are expected at the frequency of the
real mixer product in both sweeps. If the level difference is lower than the user-defined
threshold, the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed. If a signal occurs only in
the test sweep or reference sweep, it is an unwanted mixer product. The level of this
signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep. If the S/N ratio is sufficiently
large, the threshold is exceeded. This means that the signal with the lower level, i.e.
noise in this case, is displayed.
Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail-safe principle, i.e. unwan-
ted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input
signals are not blanked out.
Time-constant spectrum
The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the Auto ID
function can only be applied usefully for signals with a time-constant spectrum since
the two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum.
Mixer products with low S/N ratio
If the S/N ratio of a mixer product is lower than the user-defined threshold, the level
difference between the test sweep and reference sweep at the frequency of this mixer
product is always within limits, even if the signal occurs in one of the sweeps only.
Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function. It is therefore recom-
mended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep
using the Signal ID function.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 153
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Examining unwanted mixer products with small span
With large spans in which non-modulated sine-wave signals are represented as single
lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out. However, if you
examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span,
e.g. an image-frequency response, part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed.
This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ-
ence which is smaller than the user-defined threshold when compared with the noise
floor. These components are therefore not blanked out.
An unwanted signal with an S/N ratio that corresponds approximately to the user-
defined threshold may not be blanked out permanently. Due to the fact that the noise
display varies from one sweep to another, the S/N ratio changes and thus the level dif-
ference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a frequency
changes as well. As a result, the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is not fulfilled.
To blank out unwanted signals permanently, an almost constant noise indication is
therefore required. This can be achieved by reducing the video bandwidth. Since the
average noise indication lies well below the generated noise peak values, the minimum
level diminishes. For identification using the Auto ID function, signals should have this
minimum noise level.
Display of mixer products at the same frequency
If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components, it will
become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be
displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 154
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Figure 9-4: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference
sweep (large span)
Example:
The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test
sweep is displayed by trace 1. The IF filter of the R&S ESW is represented at a 3 dB
bandwidth of 20 kHz, the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz. If, however, the 3 dB band-
width of the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined (trace 2), it will be
found to be larger exactly by a factor of 2. This shows that the two products were gen-
erated by mixing with LO harmonics of different orders. The signal recorded in the test
sweep was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic. Since the frequency axis
scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF
filter is compressed by a factor of 2/3. The signal recorded in the reference sweep was
generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal. Since the frequency axis
scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF
filter is expanded by a factor of 2.
Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products
are displayed at the same frequency. The diagram shown in Figure 9-5 is obtained
when examining products with a narrow span using the Auto ID function. You can
easily recognize unwanted mixer products in the diagram obtained using one of the
automatic detection functions.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 155
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Figure 9-5: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span
9.6.3.2 External mixer settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config"
● Mixer settings........................................................................................................ 156
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 160
● Managing conversion loss tables.......................................................................... 161
● Creating and editing conversion loss tables..........................................................162
Mixer settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Mixer Settings"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 156
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
External Mixer (State)................................................................................................. 157
RF Start / RF Stop.......................................................................................................157
Handover Freq............................................................................................................ 158
Band............................................................................................................................158
RF Overrange............................................................................................................. 158
Preset Band................................................................................................................ 158
Mixer Type...................................................................................................................158
Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration).................................................................. 159
└ Range 1/Range 2..........................................................................................159
└ Harmonic Type..............................................................................................159
└ Harmonic Order............................................................................................ 159
└ Conversion Loss........................................................................................... 159
External Mixer (State)
Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input. If activated, "ExtMix" is indicated
in the channel bar of the application, together with the used band (see "Band"
on page 158).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 518
RF Start / RF Stop
Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band (read-only).
The frequency range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configura-
tion (see "Range 1/Range 2" on page 159).
For details on available frequency ranges, see table 14-4 on page 521.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt on page 520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP on page 520
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 157
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Handover Freq
If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one
harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range
can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the har-
monic defined for the first range. At the specified "handover frequency" in the overlap-
ping range, it switches to the harmonic for the second range.
The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency
range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover on page 519
Band
Defines the waveguide frequency band or user-defined frequency band to be used by
the mixer.
The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the "RF Start" and
"RF Stop" fields.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 14-4 on
page 521.
The mixer settings for the user-defined band can be selected freely. The frequency
range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration (see "Range
1/Range 2" on page 159).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND on page 521
RF Overrange
Sometimes, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre-
quency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. How-
ever, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the
defined "RF Start" and "RF Stop" frequencies by the maximum values.
If "RF Overrange" is enabled, the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits
("RF Start" and "RF Stop"). In this case, the full frequency range that can be reached
using the selected harmonics is used.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe] on page 525
Preset Band
Restores the presettings for the selected band.
Note: changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the
[PRESET] function. This function allows you to restore the original band settings.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet on page 520
Mixer Type
The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types:
"2 Port" LO and IF data use the same port
"3 Port" LO and IF data use separate ports
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 158
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs on page 524
Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)
The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user-defined bands
(see "Band" on page 158).
Range 1/Range 2 ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)
Enables the use of one or two frequency ranges, where the second range is based on
another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band's frequency range.
For each range, you can define which harmonic to use and how the conversion loss is
handled.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe on page 521
Harmonic Type ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)
Defines if only even, only odd, or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion.
Depending on this selection, the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes
(see "Harmonic Order" on page 159). Which harmonics are supported depends on the
mixer type.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE on page 522
Harmonic Order ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)
Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre-
quency range.
By default, the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con-
version of input signals in the whole band. If due to the LO frequency the conversion is
not possible using one harmonic, the band is split.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW] on page 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] on page 522
Conversion Loss ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)
Defines how the conversion loss is handled. The following methods are available:
"Average" Defines the average conversion loss for the entire frequency range in
dB.
"Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre-
defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external
mixer and can be imported to the R&S ESW. Alternatively, you can
define your own conversion loss tables. Imported tables are checked
for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned.
For details on importing tables, see "Import Table" on page 162.
Remote command:
Average for range 1:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW] on page 524
Table for range 1:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 159
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] on page 524
Average for range 2:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH on page 523
Table for range 2:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH on page 523
Basic settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Basic Settings"
The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer. They are only available if
the External Mixer (State) is "On".
LO Level......................................................................................................................160
Bias Value................................................................................................................... 160
└ Write to CVL table.........................................................................................161
LO Level
Defines the LO level of the external mixer's LO port. Possible values are from
13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm in 0.1 dB steps. Default value is 15.5 dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower on page 519
Bias Value
Define the bias current for each range, which is required to set the mixer to its optimum
operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range
from -10 mA to 10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage
of the mixer diode(s).
Tip: The trace in the currently active result display (if applicable) is adapted to the set-
tings immediately so you can check the results.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 160
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table, select the Write
to CVL table button.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW] on page 518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH on page 518
Write to CVL table ← Bias Value
Stores the bias setting in the currently selected "Conversion Loss Table" for the range.
If no conversion loss table is selected yet, this function is not available ("CVL Table not
selected").
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 526
Managing conversion loss tables
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table"
In this tab, you configure and manage conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain
frequencies. The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are
obtained via interpolation.
The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box. All
conversion loss tables found in the instrument's C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ direc-
tory are listed in the "Modify Tables" list.
New Table................................................................................................................... 162
Edit Table.................................................................................................................... 162
Delete Table................................................................................................................ 162
Import Table................................................................................................................ 162
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 161
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
New Table
Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss
table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529
Edit Table
Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss
table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529
Delete Table
Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar on page 527
Import Table
Imports one or more stored conversion loss tables from any directory and copies them
to the instrument's C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory. They can then be assigned
for use for a specific frequency range (see "Conversion Loss" on page 159).
Note:
Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory, the R&S ESW
firmware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use
a user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the
C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\backup directory.
Remote command:
MMEM:COPY '<conversionlosstable>',C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\
Creating and editing conversion loss tables
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table" >
"New Table" / "Edit Table"
Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited.
A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as
described by the position/value entries.
File Name....................................................................................................................163
Comment.....................................................................................................................163
Band............................................................................................................................163
Harmonic Order...........................................................................................................163
Bias............................................................................................................................. 163
Mixer Name.................................................................................................................163
Mixer S/N.................................................................................................................... 164
Mixer Type...................................................................................................................164
Position/Value..............................................................................................................164
Insert Value................................................................................................................. 164
Delete Value................................................................................................................164
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 162
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Shift x.......................................................................................................................... 164
Shift y.......................................................................................................................... 165
Save............................................................................................................................ 165
File Name
Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\
directory on the instrument. The name of the table is identical to the name of the file
(without extension) in which the table is stored. This setting is mandatory. The .ACL
extension is automatically appended during storage.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529
Comment
An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment is user-
definable.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent on page 527
Band
The waveguide or user-defined band to which the table applies. This setting is checked
against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 14-4 on
page 521.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND on page 525
Harmonic Order
The harmonic order of the range to which the table applies. This setting is checked
against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic on page 528
Bias
The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It
corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to
10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer
diode(s).
Tip: You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the
changed setting is displayed, see "Bias Value" on page 160.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 526
Mixer Name
Specifies the name of the external mixer to which the table applies. This setting is
checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the
range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 163
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer on page 528
Mixer S/N
Specifies the serial number of the external mixer to which the table applies.
The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before
the table can be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber on page 529
Mixer Type
Specifies whether the external mixer to which the table applies is a two-port or three-
port type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can
be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs on page 528
Position/Value
Each position/value pair defines the conversion loss value in dB for a specific fre-
quency. Enter the reference values in order of increasing frequencies. You can define a
maximum of 500 reference values. To enter a new value pair, select an empty space in
the "Position"/"Value" table, or select the Insert Value button.
Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are interpolated. Lin-
ear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values. If it contains more
than two reference values, spline interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency
range covered by the table, the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as for the
first and last reference value.
The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position/
value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA on page 527
Insert Value
Inserts a new position/value entry in the table.
If the table is empty, a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted.
If entries already exist, a new entry is inserted above the selected entry. The position of
the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half.
Delete Value
Deletes the currently selected position/value entry.
Shift x
Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value. The value can be entered in the edit
dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x-axis.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 164
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Shift y
Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value. The value can be entered in the
edit dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y-
axis.
Save
The conversion loss table is stored under the specified file name in the
C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory of the instrument.
9.6.3.3 How to work with external mixers
The required tasks to work with external mixers are described step-by-step:
● "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 165
● "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 166
● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 166
● "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 167
● "To shift the conversion loss values" on page 167
For remote operation, see "Programming example: working with an external mixer"
on page 529.
To connect a three-port mixer
External mixers can be connected at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors (if
option is installed). Both two-port and three-port mixers can be used. Connect the
mixer as follows:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 165
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO signal. If no external mixers are con-
nected to the R&S ESW, cover the two front connectors [LO OUT / IF IN] and [IF IN]
with the SMA caps supplied.
1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S ESW to the LO port of the external
mixer.
2. Connect the IF IN input of the R&S ESW to the IF port of the external mixer.
3. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.
To connect a two-port mixer
1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S ESW to the LO/IF port of the
external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm.
Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S ESW, the IF signal can be tapped
from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
2. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.
To activate and configure the external mixer
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external
mixer for the current application.
2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.
3. From the "Band" selection list, select the required band.
4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define fre-
quency-dependent level correction.
5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No
further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 166
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in
"To define a new conversion loss table" on page 167).
6. Optionally, select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identifi-
cation.
7. If necessary, adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID
Threshold".
To define a new conversion loss table
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".
2. Select "New Table".
3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table.
4. Define the band and mixer settings for which the conversion loss table is to be
used. These settings will be compared to the current mixer settings during the vali-
dation check when the table is imported.
5. Define the reference values for the frequency-dependant conversion loss:
a) Select "Insert Value" to add a new row in the table.
b) Enter the first reference frequency.
c) Enter the corresponding conversion loss value.
The conversion loss function is updated and displayed in the preview diagram
in the dialog box.
d) Repeat these steps to define up to 500 reference values. Remember to define
the values in ascending order of frequencies.
6. Select "Save".
The table is stored and is then available for import and assignment to a specific fre-
quency range.
To shift the conversion loss values
In order to increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table a constant value
(a0), the values can be shifted either in x-directoin or in y-direction.
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".
2. Select the assigned conversion loss table.
3. Select "Edit Table".
4. Select "Shift y" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all y-values in the table by
this value.
Or:
Select "Shift x" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all x-values in the table by
this value.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 167
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
5. Select "Save".
9.6.3.4 Measurement examples: using an external mixer
Measurement example 1: two-port mixer
The following example demonstrates the basic operation of an external two-port mixer
as well as the required settings. A sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz is applied to the
input of a multiplier. The spectrum at the multiplier output is to be recorded in the range
of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 2-port mixer for the V band. The mixer used is a double-
diode mixer. The example of operation is described in the following steps:
● "To set up the measurement" on page 168
● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 169
● "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 169
To set up the measurement
IF IN
LO OUT/IF IN
LO/IF
External
Mixer
RF
Multiplier
RF
INPUT
Figure 9-6: External Mixer test setup
1. Connect the [LO OUT / IF IN] output of the R&S ESW to the [LO/IF] port of the
external mixer.
2. Connect the multiplier to the RF input of the external mixer.
3. Apply a sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz to the input of the multiplier.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 168
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
To activate and configure the external mixer
1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external
mixer for the current application.
2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.
3. From the "Band" selection list, select the band "V".
4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define fre-
quency-dependent level correction.
5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No
further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in
"To define a new conversion loss table" on page 167).
6. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 GHz to 75 GHz).
7. Reduce the video bandwidth by selecting "BW > Video Bandwidth Manual": 1
MHz. This allows for correct signal identification using the Auto ID function (see
also "Automatic signal identification" on page 151).
8. Select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identification.
9. Adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID Threshold". The tol-
erance limit is set to 5 dB in this example.
To take into account the cable loss in the IF path
On performing level correction, the conversion loss of the mixer and also the insertion
loss a0 of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account. This addi-
tional loss is frequency-dependent.
1. Determine the insertion of the cable at the used intermediate frequency.
2. Increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table by the insertion loss
(a0).
a) Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss
Table".
b) Select the assigned conversion loss table.
c) Select "Edit Table".
d) Select "Shift y" and enter the insertion loss value <a0> to shift all y-values in the
table by this value.
3. Select "Save".
9.6.4 External generator
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "External Generator"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 169
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
The optional external generator control allows you to control the signal output of vari-
ous signal generators, for example for bargraph measurements or stepped scans.
Note that the tracking generator settings have no effect for time domain scans.
● Basics on external generator control.....................................................................170
● External generator control settings....................................................................... 178
9.6.4.1 Basics on external generator control
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera-
tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set-
tings.
External generator control is only available in the following applications.
● Receiver
● Spectrum Analyzer
● I/Q Analyzer
● Analog Demodulation
● External generator connections............................................................................ 170
● Overview of supported generators........................................................................ 173
● Generator setup files.............................................................................................175
● Coupling the frequencies...................................................................................... 175
● Displayed information and errors.......................................................................... 177
External generator connections
The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT. GEN.
CONTROL GPIB interface of the R&S ESW supplied with the option.
TTL synchronization
In addition, TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde & Schwarz generators
connected via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the
External Generator Control option.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure
GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S ESW is directly coupled with
the frequency stepping of the generator. For details see "Coupling the frequencies"
on page 175.
In Figure 9-7 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R&S SMU generator, for exam-
ple.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 170
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
R&S SMU rear
Analyzer rear
BNC Blank
BNC Trigger
Figure 9-7: TTL connection for an R&S SMU generator
In Figure 9-8, the connection for an R&S SMW is shown.
Signal generator Signal analyzer
rear panel rear panel
BNC Trigger
BNC Blank
Figure 9-8: TTL connection for an R&S SMW generator
Signal generator Signal analyzer
rear panel rear panel
BNC Trigger
BNC Blank
Figure 9-9: TTL connection for an R&S SMA100B generator
The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either
transmission or reflection measurements.
Transmission Measurement
This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two-port network. The
external generator is used as a signal source. It is connected to the input connector of
the DUT. The input of the R&S ESW is fed from the output of the DUT. A calibration
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 171
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup (e.g. frequency
response of connecting cables).
Figure 9-10: Test setup for transmission measurement
Reflection Measurement
Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection-coefficient mea-
surement bridge.
Figure 9-11: Test setup for reflection measurement
Generated signal input
To use the functions of the external generator, an appropriate generator must be con-
nected and configured correctly. In particular, the generator output must be connected
to the RF input of the R&S ESW.
External reference frequency
To enhance measurement accuracy, use a common reference frequency for both the
R&S ESW and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is availa-
ble, connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the
R&S ESW. Enable usage of the external reference on the R&S ESW via "SETUP" >
"Reference" > "External Reference".
For more information on external references, see Chapter 12.5, "Reference frequency
settings", on page 367.
Connection errors
If no external generator is connected, if the connection address is not correct, or the
generator is not ready for operation, an error message is displayed (e.g."Ext. Genera-
tor TCPIP Handshake Error!", see "Displayed information and errors" on page 177).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 172
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Overview of supported generators
Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup-
type port port
SGS100A 6 GHz SGS100A6 - SMJ 3 GHz SMJ03 X
12 GHz SGS100A12 - 6 GHz SMJ06 X
SGT100A 3 GHz SGT100A3 - SML 1 GHz SML01 -
6 GHz SGT100A6 - 2 GHz SML02 -
SMA01A 3 GHz SMA01A 1) X 3 GHz SML03 -
SMA100A 3 GHz SMA100A3 X SMM100A 6 GHz SMM100A06 X
6 GHz SMA100A6 X 7 GHz SMM100A7 X
SMA100B 3 GHz SMA100B3 X 12 GHz SMM100A12 X
6 GHz SMA100B6 X 20 GHz SMM100A20 X
12 GHz SMA100B12 X 31 GHz SMM100A31 X
20 GHz SMA100B20 X 44 GHz SMM100A44 X
32 GHz SMA100B32 X SMP 2 GHz SMP02 X
40 GHz SMA100B40 X 3 GHz SMP03 X
50 GHz SMA100B50 X 4 GHz SMP04 X
67 GHz SMA100B67 X 22 GHz SMP22 X
SMB100A 1 GHz SMB100A1 X SMR 20 GHz SMR20 -
12 GHz SMB100A12 X 20 GHz SMR20B11 3) X
2 GHz SMB100A2 X 27 GHz SMR27 X
20 GHz SMB100A20 X 27 GHz SMR27B11 3) X
3 GHz SMB100A3 X 30 GHz SMR30 X
40 GHz SMB100A40 X 30 GHz SMR30B11 3) X
SMB100B 1 GHz SMB100B1 X 40 GHz SMR40 X
3 GHz SMB100B3 X 40 GHz SMR40B11 3) X
6 GHz SMB100B6 X 50 GHz SMR50 X
SMBV100A 3 GHz SMBV100A3 X 50 GHz SMR50B11 3) X
6 GHz SMBV100A6 X 60 GHz SMR60 X
SMBV100B 3 GHz SMBV100B3 X 60 GHz SMR60B11 3) X
6 GHz SMBV100B6 X SMT 2 GHz SMT02 -
1) Requires firmware version V2.10.x or later on the signal generator
2) Requires firmware version V1.10.x or later on the signal generator
3) Requires the option SMR-B11 on the signal generator
4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or later on the signal generator
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 173
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup-
type port port
SMC100A 1 GHz SMC100A1 - 3 GHz SMT03 -
3 GHz SMC100A3 - 6 GHz SMT06 -
SMCV100B 3 GHz SMCV100B3 - SMU 2 GHz SMU02 X
6 GHz SMCV100B6 - 2 GHz SMU02B31 2) X
7 GHz SMCV100B7 - 3 GHz SMU03 2) X
SME 2 GHz SME02 X 3 GHz SMU03B31 2) X
3 GHz SME03 X 4 GHz SMU04 2) X
6 GHz SME06 X 4 GHz SMU04B31 2) X
SMF100A 43.5 GHz SMF100A X 6 GHz SMU06 2) X
SMF 22 GHz SMF22 X 6 GHz SMU06B31 2) X
22 GHz SMF22B2 X SMV 3 GHz SMV03 -
43 GHz SMF43 X SMW 3 GHz SMW03 X4)
43 GHz SMF43B2 X 6 GHz SMW06 X4)
SMG all SMG - 12.75 GH SMW12 X4)
z
SMGL all SMGL - 20 GHz SMW20 X4)
SMGU all SMGU - 31.8 GHz SMW31 X4)
SMH all SMH - 40 GHz SMW40 X4)
SMHU SMHU - 44 GHz SMW44 X
SMIQ 2 GHz SMIQ02 X SMX all SMX -
2 GHz SMIQ02B X SMY 1 GHz SMY01 -
2 GHz SMIQ02E - 2 GHz SMY02 -
3 GHz SMIQ03 X
3 GHz SMIQ03B X
3 GHz SMIQ03E -
4 GHz SMIQ04B X
6 GHz SMIQ06B X
1) Requires firmware version V2.10.x or later on the signal generator
2) Requires firmware version V1.10.x or later on the signal generator
3) Requires the option SMR-B11 on the signal generator
4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or later on the signal generator
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 174
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Generator setup files
For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R&S ESW, configure a genera-
tor setup file and store it on the R&S ESW. The setup file defines the frequency and
power ranges supported by the generator, and information required for communication.
For the signal generators listed in "Overview of supported generators" on page 173,
default setup files are provided. If necessary, you can edit or duplicate these files for
varying measurement setups or other instruments.
You can display the existing setup files in an editor in read-only mode directly from the
"External Generator" configuration dialog box. From there, you can edit them and store
them under a different name. Then they are available on the R&S ESW.
Coupling the frequencies
Frequency coupling means that the generator frequency and the frequency of the
R&S ESW are the same.
● Manual coupling: a single frequency is defined
● Automatic coupling: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep
point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S ESW. The RF
frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R&S ESW (unless limited
by the range of the signal generator).
Automatic coupling
If automatic coupling is used, the output frequency of the generator (source frequency)
is calculated as follows:
Numerator
FGenerator FAnalyzer FOffset
Deno min ator
Equation 9-1: Output frequency of the generator
Where:
FGenerator = output frequency of the generator
FAnalyzer = current frequency at the RF input of the R&S ESW
Numerator = multiplication factor for FAnalyzer
Denominator = division factor for FAnalyzer
FOffset = frequency offset for FAnalyzer, for example for frequency-converting measure-
ments or harmonics measurements
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is
0 Hz. Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar (see
also "Displayed information and errors" on page 177).
Swept frequency range
The FAnalyzer values for a swept measurement start with the start frequency and end
with the stop frequency defined in the "Frequency" settings of the R&S ESW. The
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 175
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
resulting output frequencies (Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop) are
displayed in "External Generator" > "Measurement Configuration" for reference.
If the resulting frequency range exceeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator, an
error message is displayed (see "Displayed information and errors" on page 177). The
Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply
with the range limits.
TTL synchronization
Some Rohde & Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec-
ted via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the Exter-
nal Generator Control option.
When pure GPIB connections are used between the R&S ESW and the signal genera-
tor, the R&S ESW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually
via GPIB. Only when the setting procedure is finished, the R&S ESW can measure the
next sweep point.
For generators with a TTL interface, the R&S ESW sends a list of the frequencies to be
set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep. Then the R&S ESW starts
the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R&S ESW and the gen-
erator using the TTL handshake line "TRIGGER". The R&S ESW can only measure a
value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the "BLANK"
signal.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because
the frequency stepping of the R&S ESW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping
of the generator.
Reverse sweep
The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc-
tion. To do so, define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu-
ration. (Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation, thus a
negative frequency is not possible.)
Example: Example for reverse sweep
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -300 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 200 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 100 MHz
If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener-
ator frequency, a message is displayed in the status bar ("Reverse Sweep via min. Ext.
Generator Frequency!").
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 176
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Example: Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -150 MHz
Fmin = 20 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 50 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 50 MHz via Fmin
Displayed information and errors
Channel bar
If external generator control is active, some additional information is displayed in the
channel bar.
Label Description
EXT TG: <source power> External generator active; signal sent with <source power> level
LVL Power Offset (see "Source Offset" on page 181
FRQ Frequency Offset (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denomi-
nator/Offset)" on page 182
Error and status messages
The following status and error messages can occur during external generator control.
Message Description
"Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" / Connection to the generator is not possible, e.g. due to a
cable damage or loose connection or wrong address.
"Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!" /
"Ext. Generator TTL Handshake Error!"
"Ext. Generator Limits Exceeded!" The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator
were exceeded.
"Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Fre- Reverse sweep is performed; frequencies are reduced to
quency!" the minimum frequency, then increased again; see
"Reverse sweep" on page 176.
"Ext. Generator File Syntax Error!" Syntax error in the generator setup file (see "Generator
setup files" on page 175
"Ext. Generator Command Error!" Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file
(see "Generator setup files" on page 175
"Ext. Generator Visa Error!" Error with Visa driver provided with installation (very
unlikely)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 177
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Overloading
At a reference level of -10 dBm and at an external generator output level of the same
value, the R&S ESW operates without overrange reserve. That means the R&S ESW
is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than
the reference line. In this case, either the message "RF OVLD" for overload or "IF
OVLD" for exceeded display range (clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border =
overrange) is displayed in the status line.
Overloading can be avoided as follows:
● Reducing the output level of the external generator ("Source Power" on page 181
in "External Generator > Measurement Configuration")
● Increasing attenuation in the "Amplitude" menu ("Attenuation" on page 115).
9.6.4.2 External generator control settings
Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config"
The "External Generator" settings are available if the R&S ESW External Generator
Control option is installed. For each measurement channel, you can configure one
external generator. To switch between different configurations, define multiple mea-
surement channels.
For more information on external generator control, see Chapter 9.6.4.1, "Basics on
external generator control", on page 170.
● Interface configuration settings............................................................................. 178
● Measurement settings...........................................................................................180
Interface configuration settings
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "External Generator" > "Interface Configuration"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 178
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Generator Type........................................................................................................... 179
Interface...................................................................................................................... 179
TTL Handshake...........................................................................................................179
GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name...................................................... 179
Reference....................................................................................................................180
Edit Generator Setup File............................................................................................180
Frequency Min/ Frequency Max..................................................................................180
Level Min/ Level Max.................................................................................................. 180
Generator Type
Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use.
For an overview of supported generators, see "Overview of supported generators"
on page 173. For information on generator setup files, see "Generator setup files"
on page 175.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE on page 537
Interface
Type of interface connection used.
For details on which signal generators support which interfaces, see the documenta-
tion of the corresponding signal generator.
● GPIB
● TCP/IP
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface on page 536
TTL Handshake
If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization
via handshake.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because
the frequency stepping of the R&S ESW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping
of the generator.
For more information on TTL synchronization, see "TTL synchronization" on page 176.
For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see "Overview of
supported generators" on page 173.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK on page 536
GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name
For LAN connections: TCP/IP address of the signal generator
For GPIB connections: GPIB address of the signal generator.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess on page 536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess
on page 537
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 179
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Reference
Selects the internal R&S ESW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the
R&S ESW with the generator (default: internal).
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] on page 535
Edit Generator Setup File
Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read-only mode in
an editor.
Although the existing setup files are displayed in read-only mode in the editor, they can
be saved under a different name (using "File > SaveAs").
Be careful, however, to adhere to the required syntax and commands. Errors are only
detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also "Displayed
information and errors" on page 177).
For details, see "Generator setup files" on page 175.
Frequency Min/ Frequency Max
For reference only: Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator.
Level Min/ Level Max
For reference only: Lower and upper power limit for the generator.
Measurement settings
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "External Generator" > "Measurement Configuration"
Source State............................................................................................................... 181
Source Power..............................................................................................................181
Source Offset.............................................................................................................. 181
Source Frequency Coupling........................................................................................181
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 180
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
(Manual) Source Frequency........................................................................................181
(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)............................... 182
Result Frequency Start............................................................................................... 182
Result Frequency Stop................................................................................................182
Bargraph Frequency................................................................................................... 182
Source State
Activates or deactivates control of an external generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 535
Source Power
The output power of the external generator. The default output power is -20 dBm. The
range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel] on page 534
Source Offset
Constant level offset for the external generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1
dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the "LVL"
label in the channel bar (see also "Displayed information and errors" on page 177).
Using this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gen-
erator can be considered. This is useful, for example, for the displayed output power
values on screen or during data entry. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier, while nega-
tive offsets apply to an attenuator after the external generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 535
Source Frequency Coupling
Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R&S ESW and the generator.
For more information on coupling frequencies, see "Coupling the frequencies"
on page 175.
"Auto" Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each
sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the
R&S ESW (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denomi-
nator/Offset)" on page 182). The RF frequency range covers the cur-
rently defined span of the R&S ESW (unless limited by the range of
the signal generator).
"Manual" The generator uses a single fixed frequency, defined by (Manual)
Source Frequency which is displayed when you select "Manual" cou-
pling.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] on page 532
(Manual) Source Frequency
Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 181
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency on page 532
(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)
With automatic frequency coupling, a series of frequencies is defined (one for each
sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S ESW.
However, the frequency used by the generator can differ from the input from the
R&S ESW. The RF frequency can be multiplied by a specified factor, or a frequency
offset can be added, or both.
Note: The input for the generator frequency is not validated, i.e. you can enter any val-
ues. However, if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded, an error
message is displayed on the R&S ESW. The values for Result Frequency Start and
Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits.
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is
0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar. Negative
offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps.
For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps, see "Coupling the
frequencies" on page 175. For more information on error messages and the channel
bar, see "Displayed information and errors" on page 177.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator
on page 533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator on page 533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 534
Result Frequency Start
For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R&S ESW.
Result Frequency Stop
For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R&S ESW.
Bargraph Frequency
For reference only: The current receiver frequency that the R&S ESW is tuned to and
that the bargraph evaluates (zero span frequency).
9.6.5 Configuring outputs (IF / video / demodulation)
Access: "Overview" > "Output" > "Output Config"
The R&S ESW provides several outputs. The R&S ESW allows you to configure the
output as required.
For details on the connectors refer to the R&S ESW Getting Started manual, chapter
"Instrument Tour".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 182
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
The remote commands required to configure the outputs are described in Chap-
ter 14.6.2.1, "IF / video / demodulation", on page 540.
Further information
For more information about LISN control refer to Chapter 8.3.1.3, "Line impedance sta-
bilization network (LISN) control", on page 98.
For more information about the digital baseband output refer to the documentation of
the I/Q Analyzer.
Output Coupling.......................................................................................................... 183
Selecting the output type.............................................................................................184
└ Configuring the output of the IF signal.......................................................... 184
└ Configuring the output of the Video signal.................................................... 184
└ Configuring the output of an AM signal.........................................................184
└ Configuring the output of an FM signal......................................................... 184
Controlling and configuring the output........................................................................ 184
└ IF Output Frequency..................................................................................... 184
└ Coupling........................................................................................................185
└ Reference Level for Output...........................................................................185
└ Low Pass...................................................................................................... 185
└ Phones..........................................................................................................185
└ Squelch......................................................................................................... 185
└ Scale............................................................................................................. 186
Controlling the volume................................................................................................ 186
Output Coupling
Selects the scope of the output settings.
"Global" The output settings apply to all measurement channels / applications.
"Channel Spe- The output settings apply to the current measurement channel / appli-
cific" cation only. You can configure each channel separately.
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:LINK on page 543
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 183
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Selecting the output type
Selects the type of analog signal you want to output.
"IF Output" Outputs the IF signal (see "Configuring the output of the IF signal"
on page 184 for available settings).
(Unavailable for audio output.)
"Video" Outputs the video signal (see "Configuring the output of the Video
signal" on page 184 for available settings).
"AM" Outputs the AM demodulated signal (see "Configuring the output of
an AM signal" on page 184 for available settings).
"FM" Outputs the FM demodulated signal (see "Configuring the output of
an FM signal" on page 184 for available settings).
"Current Outputs the data of the currently selected measurement window
Focus" (highlighted with a blue frame).
Available in the Analog Modulation Analysis application.
"Off" Turns off the output.
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF[:SOURce] on page 542
Configuring the output of the IF signal ← Selecting the output type
For the output of the IF signal, you can adjust the following parameters.
● "IF Output Frequency" on page 184
● "Reference Level for Output" on page 185 (read only)
Configuring the output of the Video signal ← Selecting the output type
Additional settings for video signal output are not supported.
Configuring the output of an AM signal ← Selecting the output type
For the output of AM demodulated signals, you can adjust the following parameters.
● "Scale" on page 186
● "Low Pass" on page 185
● "Phones" on page 185
Configuring the output of an FM signal ← Selecting the output type
For the output of FM demodulated signals, you can adjust the following parameters.
● "Coupling" on page 185
● "Scale" on page 186
● "Low Pass" on page 185
● "Phones" on page 185
Controlling and configuring the output
Depending on the selected output type, you can configure one or more of the following
output characteristics.
IF Output Frequency ← Controlling and configuring the output
Defines the output frequency of the IF signal.
The range is: (RBW / 2) to (240 MHz - (RBW / 2))
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 184
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF:IFFRequency on page 541
Coupling ← Controlling and configuring the output
Selects the type of current that is transferred at the output.
Available for linear signal output.
"AC Coupling" Rejects the DC component of the signal.
This coupling protects the output from damage, but can distort very
low frequencies.
"DC Coupling" Transfers the complete signal (DC and AC components).
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF:COUPling on page 540
Reference Level for Output ← Controlling and configuring the output
Shows the reference level of the signal, if the level of the output signal depends on the
reference level of the current measurement.
Remote command:
not supported
Low Pass ← Controlling and configuring the output
Turns a low pass filter to control the frequencies that are output on and off.
When you turn on the filter, you can define its cutoff frequency. The available cutoff
frequencies depend on the type of output and the individual settings of the selected
output type.
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs[:STATe] on page 541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs:FREQuency:MANual on page 541
Phones ← Controlling and configuring the output
Turns additional output of the signal on the headphone jack on and off.
When you turn on this feature, you can listen to the signal with speakers or head-
phones. To control the volume of the output, use either the volume control knob on the
front panel or the volume slider available in the "Phones" dialog box.
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF:AUDio on page 540
Squelch ← Controlling and configuring the output
You can suppress noise during audio output over the headphone jack for demodulated
AM or FM signals with the "Squelch" feature.
When you turn on this feature, you can define a relative "Squelch Level" in %, below
which the signal is not demodulated (and thus not audible). The squelch level is indica-
ted by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 543
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 543
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 185
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
Scale ← Controlling and configuring the output
Defines the scale for the data you are transferring.
The unit depends on the signal type you are transferring.
● AM signals: a value in %.
● FM signals: a value in Hz
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:IF:SCALe[:VALue] on page 542
Controlling the volume
CAUTION! Risk of hearing damage. To protect your hearing, make sure that the vol-
ume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones.
When you output an audio signal and listen to it with headphones, for example, you
can control the volume of the output.
One way to control the volume is to use the volume control knob on the front panel of
the R&S ESW.
A similar functionality is available in the "Phones" tab of the "Output Config" dialog box.
The volume control slider has the same effect as the volume control knob. For the
slider, the volume is a percentage from 0 % to 100 % with 100 % being the loudest.
In addition to simply changing the volume, you can also define a maximum volume
level. The maximum volume level limits the audio output to a certain level.
The volume control knob and slider will not go further than this level.
Remote command:
Volume: SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume on page 544
Maximum volume: SYSTem:SPEaker:MAXVolume on page 544
Mute: SYSTem:SPEaker:MUTE on page 544
9.6.6 Configuring LISNs
For more information see Chapter 8.3.6, "Configuring line impedance stabilization net-
works (LISN)", on page 130.
9.6.7 Configuring additional outputs
Access: "Overview" > "Output" > "Additional Outputs"
The R&S ESW provides additional outputs that you can use for various tasks.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 186
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
The remote commands required to configure the outputs are described in Chap-
ter 14.6.2.2, "Additional output", on page 545.
Providing output for LISN control is described in Chapter 8.3.1.3, "Line impedance sta-
bilization network (LISN) control", on page 98.
Probe Power Supply................................................................................................... 187
Trigger 2/3................................................................................................................... 187
└ Output Type.................................................................................................. 188
└ Level................................................................................................... 188
└ Pulse Length.......................................................................................188
└ Send Trigger....................................................................................... 188
Probe Power Supply
Selects the probe connector that is supplied with power.
The probe power supply is a global setting - when you change it in one measurement
channel, it is also changed in the others.
"Probe 1" Supplies the 3-pin probe connector with power.
"Probe 2" Supplies the 5-pin probe connector with power.
"Off" Turns off the power supply for the probe connectors.
Remote command:
OUTPut<ou>:PROBe<pb>[:POWer] on page 545
Trigger 2/3
The trigger input and output functionality depends on how the variable "Trigger Input/
Output" connectors are used.
"Trigger 1" "Trigger 1" is input only.
"Trigger 2" Defines the usage of the variable "Trigger Input/Output" connector on
the front panel
"Trigger 3" Defines the usage of the variable "Trigger 3 Input/Output" connector
on the rear panel
"Input" The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by
the R&S ESW. Trigger input parameters are available in the "Trigger"
dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 187
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Data input and output
"Output" The R&S ESW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be
used by connected devices.
Further trigger parameters are available for the connector.
Remote command:
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection on page 545
Output Type ← Trigger 2/3
Type of signal to be sent to the output
"Device Trig- (Default) Sends a trigger when the R&S ESW triggers.
gered"
"Trigger Sends a (high level) trigger when the R&S ESW is in "Ready for trig-
Armed" ger" state.
This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus:OPERation reg-
ister (bit 5), as well as by a low-level signal at the "AUX" port (pin 9).
"User Defined" Sends a trigger when you select the "Send Trigger" button.
In this case, further parameters are available for the output signal.
Remote command:
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe on page 546
Level ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3
Defines whether a high (1) or low (0) constant signal is sent to the trigger output con-
nector (for "Output Type": "User Defined".
The trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined here. For
example, for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until you
select the Send Trigger function. Then, a low pulse is provided.
Remote command:
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel on page 546
Pulse Length ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3
Defines the duration of the pulse (pulse width) sent as a trigger to the output connector.
Remote command:
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth on page 547
Send Trigger ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3
Sends a user-defined trigger to the output connector immediately.
Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined
by the output Level setting. For example, for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is
output to the connector until you select the "Send Trigger" function. Then, a low pulse
is sent.
Which pulse level is sent is indicated by a graphic on the button.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 188
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
Remote command:
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate on page 547
9.7 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
In the Receiver application, measurement results usually consist of the measured sig-
nal levels (amplitudes) displayed on the vertical (y-)axis for the determined frequency
spectrum or for the measurement time (horizontal, x-axis). The settings for the vertical
axis, regarding amplitude and scaling, are described here.
● Increasing measurement sensitivity (or avoiding an input mixer overload).......... 189
● Amplitude settings.................................................................................................192
● Diagram scale....................................................................................................... 194
● Preselector............................................................................................................195
9.7.1 Increasing measurement sensitivity (or avoiding an input mixer
overload)
Measurements often confront you with unknown or unintentional signals with unknown
signal levels (and often with pulse characteristics). Such signals can either have very
weak signal levels, in which case you might miss them during the measurement. Or
they can have very strong signal levels, in which case they can damage the input
mixer.
Protecting the input mixer
Always consider how to protect the input mixer from damage when setting up a mea-
surement.
► NOTICE! EMC measurements often measure unknown signals that contain pulses
with possibly strong signal levels. Strong signal levels can damage the input mixer.
Read the following topics carefully before you apply a signal to learn more about
protecting the input mixer and avoid an overload.
Note that pulses have different level characteristics. Refer to the data sheet for more
information on the allowed maximum pulse energy.
The signal level at the input mixer is calculated as follows.
Mixer Level = Input Level - attenuation + gain
The R&S ESW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism. This mechanism
becomes active as soon as the signal level at the input mixer exceeds the specified
limit. It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off.
In this case, you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the
message box. Then measurements are possible again.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 189
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
● Using the RF attenuator........................................................................................ 190
● Using the preamplifier........................................................................................... 191
● Using the preselector............................................................................................ 191
9.7.1.1 Using the RF attenuator
The first tool provided by the R&S ESW to control measurement sensitivity is the RF
attenuator.
The RF attenuator is available in all hardware configurations of the R&S ESW.
Attenuation has the following effects on the measurement:
● High attenuation protects the input mixer: the main purpose of the attenuator is to
protect the input mixer.
● High attenuation makes sure that the measurement results are reliable (signals
that are stronger than allowed can distort the results)
● High attenuation helps you to avoid intermodulation
● High attenuation increases inherent noise (i.e. the noise floor) and thus decreases
measurement sensitivity: if you increase attenuation by 10 dB, the sensitivity is
reduced by 10 dB (in other words: the displayed noise increases by 10 dB)
Depending on the required test setup, you must find a compromise between a high
sensitivity, low intermodulation and input mixer protection. We recommend to let the
R&S ESW determine the ideal attenuation automatically.
You can determine the attenuation automatically with the auto ranging feature in the
receiver application and the auto attenuation feature in the other applications. Deter-
mining the attenuation automatically might not necessarily utilize the maximum
dynamic range, but still yields valid and reliable results.
When you select the attenuation manually and are measuring unknown signals, espe-
cially DUTs with a high RFI voltage, always select the highest possible attenuation
level before you apply the signal.
If you need a better sensitivity or signal-to-noise ratio, make sure that the applied sig-
nal does not exceed the specified limits, before you lower the attenuation.
For further protection of the input mixer, the R&S ESW does not allow you to select
attenuation levels of less than 10 dB unless you explicitly turn on this feature ("10 dB
Minimum Attenuation").
Protecting the input mixer
1. NOTICE! EMC measurements often measure unknown signals that contain pulses
with possibly strong signal levels. Strong signal levels can damage the input mixer.
Select an appropriate attenuation when you measure unknown signals or RFI volt-
age in combination with an artificial network (LISN). Do not apply a 0 dB attenua-
tion for such measurements.
During phase switching, such test setups generate very strong pulses which can
damage the input mixer.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 190
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
2. Make sure that the signal level at the RF input does not exceed the allowed limits
when you allow attenuation of less than 10 dB in combination with auto ranging
Exceeding the limits can damage the input mixer.
9.7.1.2 Using the preamplifier
The second tool that allows you to control measurement sensitivity is the preamplifier.
In addition to the standard preamplifier available in every R&S ESW, an additional low
noise amplifier is available as an optional component (R&S ESW-B24).
Signal gain has the following effects on the measurement:
● The preamplifier allows you to detect even weak signals.
● The preamplifier reduces the noise figure of the R&S ESW and thus increases its
sensitivity. Thus, it is recommended to use the preamplifier for measurements that
require maximum sensitivity.
● The preamplifier reduces the dynamic range. To perform a measurement using the
maximum dynamic range, turn off the preamplifier.
● The preamplifier is located after the preselection filters, reducing the risk of over-
loading the input mixer by strong out-of-band signals.
● The optional low noise amplifier is located in front of the preselection filters which
increases the measurement sensitivity.
The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. The disad-
vantage of a lower large-signal immunity (intermodulation) is reduced by the "preselec-
tor".
9.7.1.3 Using the preselector
The "preselector" is another tool to control measurement sensitivity.
Preselection has the following effects on the measurement:
● Preselection rejects most of the spectral energy which helps to protect the input
mixer and thus makes sure that the measurement results are valid and reliable.
● Preselection filters out signals that you do not want to be displayed (selectivity) and
thus allows you to analyze only the frequency range you are interested in.
The preselector of the R&S ESW consists of several filters which are automatically
applied during measurements. The filter that is used depends on the frequency that is
currently measured. You can see the list of filters and the progress in the "Preselector"
result display. The currently applied filter is indicated by a green LED, filters that are
outside the scan range are ignored.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 191
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
Figure 9-12: Preselector result display. The green LED indicates the currently applied filter.
In the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz, you can preselect in a single stage
(150 kHz to 30 MHz). Or, you can split the preselection into two stages, each of which
applies a separate filter: one from 150 kHz to 2 MHz, and another from 2 MHz to
30 MHz.
In addition, the R&S ESW provides several notch filters to suppress certain frequency
ranges completely.
Using the preselector
Switching the filters is a mechanical process. Avoid excessive filters switches, because
the hardware can wear out.
Note that results in a frequency band are only displayed if there is at least one valid
measurement point in the corresponding range. If a particular measurement point is
captured by more than one filter, the R&S ESW displays the combined results.
Notch filter
The R&S ESW provides additional notch filters that suppress signals in the frequency
bands from 2.4 GHz to 2.5 GHz and 5.725 GHz to 5.875 GHz.
9.7.2 Amplitude settings
Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Amplitude"
Amplitude settings determine how the R&S ESW processes or displays the input sig-
nals.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 192
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
Functions in the "Amplitude" dialog box described elsewhere:
● "Attenuation" on page 115
● "Auto Range" on page 114
● "Preamplifier" on page 115
● "Input Selection" on page 116
● "Input Coupling" on page 144
● "Impedance" on page 144
10 dB Minimum Attenuation........................................................................................ 193
Unit..............................................................................................................................194
└ dBx/MHz....................................................................................................... 194
10 dB Minimum Attenuation
Turns the availability of attenuation levels of less than 10 dB on and off.
When you turn on this feature, the attenuation is always at least 10 dB. This minimum
attenuation protects the input mixer and avoids accidental setting of 0 dB, especially if
you measure EUTs with high RFI voltage.
When you turn it off, you can also select attenuation levels of less than 10 dB.
The setting applies to a manual selection of the attenuation as well as the automatic
selection of the attenuation.
Notice: For more information, see Chapter 9.7.1, "Increasing measurement sensitivity
(or avoiding an input mixer overload)", on page 189.
Remote command:
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe] on page 553
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 193
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration
Unit
Selects the unit displayed on the vertical axis.
The unit on the vertical axis represents the unit the results are evaluated in. You can
select one of the following units: dBm, dBµV, dBpW, dBµA, dBmV, dBpT.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 551
dBx/MHz ← Unit
Turns the display of results in units relative to a 1 MHz bandwidth on and off.
You can normalize the following units to 1 MHz.
Unit Relative unit
dBµV dBµV/MHz
dBµV/m dBµV/mMHz
(Available for active transducers only.)
dBmV dBmV/MHz
dBµA dBµA/MHz
dBµA/m dBµA/mMHz
(Available for active transducers only.)
dBpW dBpW/MHz
dBpT dBpT/MHz
The conversion to 1 MHz bandwidth is realized via the pulse bandwidth of the selected
resolution bandwidth.
Example:
Conversion example for dbµV:
B imp [MHz]
P[dBµV/MHz] P[dBµV] 20 log
1MHz
P = Displayed level
Bimp = Pulse bandwidth of the selected RBW
If you are using another unit, replace "dBµV" with the corresponding unit.
The conversion is also possible when a transducer defines the used unit.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 551
9.7.3 Diagram scale
Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Scaling"
Scaling settings configure the vertical axis of diagrams.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 194
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
Grid Range / Minimum Level.......................................................................................195
Grid Range / Minimum Level
Defines the scale of the vertical diagram axis.
The display ranges go from 10 dB to 200 dB in 0.01 dB steps. Invalid entries or combi-
nations of range and minimum level are rounded off to the nearest valid value.
● "Range"
Defines the level display range for the scan diagram.
● "Minimum Level"
Defines the minimum level of the display range.
Remote command:
Range: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 555
Min. level: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom on page 555
9.7.4 Preselector
For more information see Chapter 9.6.2, "Configuring the preselector", on page 145.
9.8 Frequency and span configuration
The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum that you
want to analyze.
● Impact of the frequency and span settings........................................................... 195
● Frequency and span settings................................................................................ 198
9.8.1 Impact of the frequency and span settings
Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here
for a better understanding of the required configuration.
● Defining the scope of the measurement - frequency range.................................. 196
● Coping with large frequency ranges - logarithmic scaling.....................................196
● Keeping the center frequency stable - signal tracking.......................................... 197
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 195
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
9.8.1.1 Defining the scope of the measurement - frequency range
The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed.
In the receiver application, the R&S ESW supports several measurement concepts.
● Measurements over a specified frequency range
The frequency range is defined by start and stop frequency. This concept is usually
used by scans. If you are using a scan table, you can split the frequency range into
several smaller subranges.
● Measurements on a single frequency
The measurement is performed on a single frequency. This concept is used by bar-
graph measurements, for example.
● Measurements on a set of single frequencies
The measurement is performed on a set of single frequencies that are within a
specified frequency range. This concept is used by the final measurement, for
example.
● Measurements within a frequency span around the receiver frequency
The measurement shows the spectrum around the receiver frequency in greater
detail. This concept is used by the IF analysis.
In any way, make sure that the receiver frequency is at least twice as large as the reso-
lution bandwidth. If you use a frequency that is lower or equal to the measurement
bandwidth, the R&S ESW automatically reduces the measurement bandwidth.
9.8.1.2 Coping with large frequency ranges - logarithmic scaling
In a linear display, the frequencies are distributed linearly across the x-axis. That
means the entire frequency range is divided by the number of measurement points,
and the distance between measurement points is equal. Linear scaling is useful to
determine precise frequencies within a small range.
1 MHz 10 MHz
Figure 9-13: Linear x-axis scaling: the distance between the measurement points is equal, e.g.
200 kHz
However, if high and low frequencies appear in the same display, it is difficult to deter-
mine individual frequencies precisely or to distinguish frequencies that are close
together.
In a logarithmic display, lower frequencies are distributed among a much larger area of
the display, while high frequencies are condensed to a smaller area. Now it is much
easier to distinguish several lower frequencies, as they are spread over a wider area.
Logarithmic scaling is useful for overview measurements when a large frequency
range must be displayed in one diagram.
However, with logarithmic scaling, the frequency resolution between two measurement
points deteriorates with higher frequencies.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 196
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
1 Hz 1 MHz 1 GHz
Figure 9-14: Logarithmic x-axis scaling: the distance between measurement points is variable
In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and
1 GHz, the distance is several MHz.
Thus, for logarithmic x-axis scaling, the number of measurement points must be suffi-
ciently high in order to distinguish high frequencies precisely. The resolution bandwidth
should cover at least one measurement point (that means: the distance between two
measurement points should not exceed the RBW). If this condition is not met, signals
or interferers could be missed, especially narrowband interferers.
Insufficient measurement points - Resolution filter bandwidth Resolution filter bandwidth covers
Filter may miss a signal covers one measurement point several measurement points
9.8.1.3 Keeping the center frequency stable - signal tracking
Note: in the Receiver application, signal tracking is available for the IF analysis.
If the signal drifts on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the sig-
nal peak, the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking. In
this case, the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected
center frequency. After each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum signal
found within the searched bandwidth. If no maximum signal above a defined threshold
value is found in the searched bandwidth, the center frequency remains unchanged.
The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines
which are labeled as "TRK".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 197
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
Signal Tracking
Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" > "Signal Tracking" tab
Defines the settings for signal tracking. These settings are only available for spans > 0.
If activated, after each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum level of the
specified "Signal Track Trace" found within the searched "Tracking Bandwidth".
If the signal level does not pass the "Tracking Threshold", the center frequency is not
changed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth on page 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold on page 549
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 549
9.8.2 Frequency and span settings
Access (general frequency settings): "Overview" > "Frequency" > "Frequency"
Access (signal tracking): "Overview" > "Frequency" > "IF Signal Tracking"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 198
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
Receiver Frequency.................................................................................................... 199
└ Synchronizing the receiver frequency to the marker frequency....................200
Start / Stop Frequency................................................................................................ 200
Frequency Axis Scale................................................................................................. 200
Frequency Stepsize.................................................................................................... 200
Couple Bargraph Settings........................................................................................... 201
IF Analysis...................................................................................................................201
IF Signal Tracking....................................................................................................... 202
Receiver Frequency
Defines the receiver frequency.
For a scan, make sure to define a frequency that is at least twice as large as the reso-
lution bandwidth. If you use a frequency that is lower, the R&S ESW automatically
reduces the bandwidth.
Note that turning on the low noise preamplifier limits the lower frequency to 150 kHz.
Tip: In the scan diagram, you can add a vertical line that represents the frequency that
the R&S ESW is currently tuned to (Tuned Frequency, available in the "Lines" menu).
Tip: You can lock the frequency with the corresponding button in the toolbar. If you turn
on the frequency lock, the frequency does not change when you turn the rotary knob.
Changing the frequency with the cursor keys or the numeric keys still works.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 550
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 199
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
Synchronizing the receiver frequency to the marker frequency ← Receiver Fre-
quency
When you are using a marker in the "Scan" result display, you can synchronize the
receiver frequency with the current marker position by just moving the marker.
The R&S ESW provides two methods to synchronize marker and receiver frequency.
● "Marker Tracking"
Tracks the marker position when you move the marker and automatically synchro-
nizes the receiver frequency with the new marker position.
In that case, the bargraph always shows the level at the current marker position.
● "Tune to Marker"
Synchronizes the receiver frequency and the current marker position once.
(In fact, this function only has an effect when "Marker Tracking" is turned off,
because otherwise, the marker position and frequency are synchronized automati-
cally.)
The R&S ESW always synchronizes to the position of the currently selected marker,
even if it is a relative delta marker.
The "Marker Tracking" and "Tune to Marker" softkeys are available in the "Marker To"
softkey menu (accessible via the [MKR ➙] key).
Remote command:
Marker tracking: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe] on page 593
Tune to Marker: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 548
Start / Stop Frequency
Defines the start and stop frequencies for the scan.
The range for the start frequency is fmin to (fmax- 10 Hz).
The range for the stop frequency is (fmin + 10 Hz) to fmax.
fmin and fmax are defined in the datasheet.
Remote command:
Start frequency: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 482
Stop frequency: [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 483
Frequency Axis Scale
Selects the scale of the frequency axis.
Logarithmic scaling is only available for fstop ≥1.4* fstart.
More information
"Linear" Selects a linear scaling of the frequency axis.
"Logarithmic" Selects a logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 549
Frequency Stepsize
Defines the stepsize by which the receiver frequency is increased or decreased when
you change it with the arrow keys or the rotary knob.
Note that the rotary knob and the arrow keys apply different steps.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 200
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
When you turn on "Wheel = Up / Down", the rotary knob and cursor keys have the
same step size (that of the cursor keys).
"Coarse" The stepsize is coupled to the receiver frequency.
● When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the 4th digit of the receiver fre-
quency.
● When you change the frequency with the arrow keys, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the 2nd digit of the receiver
frequency.
"Fine" The stepsize is coupled to the receiver frequency.
● When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the 7th digit of the receiver fre-
quency.
● When you change the frequency with the arrow keys, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the 5th digit of the receiver fre-
quency.
"Manual" The stepsize is a fixed custom value.
● When you change the frequency with the rotary knob, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the frequency by 10 % of the
manual stepsize.
● When you change the frequency with the arrow keys, the
R&S ESW increases or decreases the frequency by the manual
stepsize.
"Frequency = The stepsize is equal to the current receiver frequency.
Stepsize" This option is useful for measurements of the harmonic content of a
signal. Each change of the frequency selects the next harmonic.
"<x> * Meas The stepsize is a percentage of the measurement bandwidth (10 %,
BW" 50 % or a custom percentage).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 550
Couple Bargraph Settings
Couples or decouples the bargraph settings to the scan settings (or scan range if you
are using a scan table).
"Off" Bargraph settings and scan settings are independent.
"Last Scan" Uses the configuration of the last scan.
"Scan Table" Uses the current configuration of the scan table, if you have changed
it since the last scan.
(If you have not changed anything, the configuration of the last scan
is still in effect.)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SCOupled on page 550
IF Analysis
Defines the span and resolution bandwidth for IF analysis.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 201
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration
The "Span" defines the spectrum that is analyzed around the receiver frequency.
When you change the span, the receiver frequency remains the same.
Tip: In the "IF Span" softkey menu, you can quickly set the "Full IF Span" and the
"Last IF Span" with the corresponding softkeys. The last span is the span that was
selected prior to the current span. You can access the "IF Span" menu via the [SPAN]
key.
The "Resolution Bandwidth" (RBW) selects the width of the resolution filter that is
used for IF spectrum analysis. Note that the available resolution bandwidths depend on
the currently selected span.
In addition, you can couple the IF span to the Measurement Bandwidth (used for the
bargraph).
When "IF Span Coupled" has been turned on, the IF span is a function of the measure-
ment bandwidth.
Remote command:
Span: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 551
Full span: [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL on page 551
RBW: [SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF on page 556
IF span coupled: [SENSe:]BANDwidth:SCPL on page 556
IF Signal Tracking
Defines the characteristics for signal tracking.
When you turn on signal tracking, the R&S ESW tracks the signal and updates the
receiver frequency accordingly. The signal is assumed to be at highest level that has
been found within the tracking bandwidth. The tracking bandwidth defines a search
are around the receiver frequency.
You can also define a tracking threshold. If the signal level does not pass the thresh-
old, the center frequency is not changed.
If you use more than one trace, you can select the trace signal tracking is applied to.
Signal tracking is available for IF spectrum analysis and for spans > 0.
More information.
Remote command:
State: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 548
Bandwidth: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth
on page 548
Threshold: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold
on page 549
Trace: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 549
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 202
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth and filter configuration
9.9 Bandwidth and filter configuration
The basic bandwidth, filter and sweep settings that apply to most measurements are
described here. These parameters define how the data is measured and which filters
are used.
● Impact of bandwidth and filter settings..................................................................203
● Bandwidth and filter settings................................................................................. 203
9.9.1 Impact of bandwidth and filter settings
For more background information about bandwidths and filters refer to the following
topics:
● Chapter 8.3.1.1, "Selecting the measurement bandwidth", on page 95
9.9.2 Bandwidth and filter settings
Access: "Overview" > "Bandwidth"
Functions in the "Bandwidth" dialog box described elsewhere:
● "IF Analysis" on page 201
● "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94
● "Filter Type" on page 94
CISPR RBW Uncoupled..............................................................................................203
CISPR RBW Uncoupled
Cancels the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range with the activated
quasipeak detector, CISPR average or RMS average detector.
See also Chapter 10.3.1.1, "Working with trace detectors", on page 221.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 557
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 203
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
9.10 Trigger configuration
Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal. Choosing the right trigger
type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents
in your signals.
● Basics on triggered measurements.......................................................................204
● Triggering measurements..................................................................................... 207
9.10.1 Basics on triggered measurements
● Trigger offset......................................................................................................... 204
● Gated measurements............................................................................................204
9.10.1.1 Trigger offset
An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event, or to include
data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements (pre-trigger offset).
Pre-trigger offsets are possible because the R&S ESW captures data continuously in
the time domain, even before the trigger occurs.
See "Trigger Offset" on page 209.
9.10.1.2 Gated measurements
Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the
input signal pass in defined areas only. The gate controls exactly when data is included
in the measurement results and when not. The gate is opened by the trigger source,
which is also the gate source.
Gates can be used in two different modes:
● Level: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the
gate source is exceeded and stops when the gate source drops below the "Gate
Level".
Using a pulsed gate signal in level mode, the following behavior can be achieved:
When the gate source signal is active, the input signal data is collected; when the
gate signal is inactive, the input signal is ignored.
● Edge: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the
gate source is exceeded and stops when the defined "Gate Length" is reached.
Additionally, a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after
the gate opening are ignored.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 204
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
Figure 9-15: Effects of Gate mode, Gate delay and Gate length
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 205
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
Example:
By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is
inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi-
tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can
also be analyzed for an inactive carrier. The sweep can be controlled by an external
gate or by the internal power trigger.
Figure 9-16: GSM signal with GATE OFF
Figure 9-17: GSM signal with GATE ON
Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements. This allows you
to display level variations of individual slots, for instance in burst signals, versus time.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 206
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in
the channel bar.
Gated measurements in receiver application
Gated measurements are also available in the receiver application. Basically, they
work like gated measurements in the spectrum application with some distinctive fea-
tures.
In the receiver application, a gated measurement affects the bargraph, scan and final
measurement. They are useful, for example, when you only want to collect measure-
ment data during times when a DUT is actually running and emits potential interfering
signals, or in case you already know that interferers occur regularly and want to collect
measurement data during the time when the interference is not present.
The following distinctive features apply.
● The scan is interrupted when the gate is closed. When it reopens, the scan is
resumed on the last measured frequency (just like if you have interrupted the scan
deliberately).
● Each measurement point is measured for a certain period of time (defined by the
measurement time). If the gate closes before the R&S ESW is done with any par-
ticular measurement point, the remaining time is measured when the gate opens
again. The actual results in that case are the sum of the partial measurements.
Example: The measurement time is 1 second. The gate closes after 0.6 seconds.
The data that has already been collected is kept. When the gate opens again, the
R&S ESW resumes the measurement for another 0.4 seconds, and combines the
two partial measurements.
9.10.2 Triggering measurements
Access (trigger source): "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger Source"
Access (gate settings): "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger Source"
Access (trigger input / output): "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger In / Out"
Additional trigger ports
The R&S ESW provides three trigger ports. One exclusively serves as a trigger input,
while you can configure the other two trigger ports to be a trigger output as well.
For more information about the trigger output see "Trigger 2/3" on page 187.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 207
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
Trigger Source.............................................................................................................208
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 208
└ Ext. Trigger 1/2............................................................................................. 208
Trigger Level............................................................................................................... 209
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 209
Trigger Slope...............................................................................................................209
Gated Trigger.............................................................................................................. 209
Gate Mode.................................................................................................................. 209
Gate Delay.................................................................................................................. 210
Gate Length................................................................................................................ 210
Continuous Gate......................................................................................................... 210
Gate Period Length..................................................................................................... 210
Gate Period Count...................................................................................................... 210
Trigger Source
Selects the trigger source.
If you select a trigger source other than "Free Run", "TRG" is displayed in the channel
bar and the trigger source is indicated.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 561
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 559
Free Run ← Trigger Source
No trigger source is considered. Data acquisition is started manually or automatically
and continues until stopped explicitly.
In its default state, the R&S ESW performs free run measurements.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 561
Ext. Trigger 1/2 ← Trigger Source
Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector
meets or exceeds the specified trigger level.
Note: The "External Trigger 1" softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the
"TRIGGER 1 INPUT" connector on the front panel.
For details, see the "Instrument Tour" chapter in the R&S ESW Getting Started manual.
"External Trigger 1"
Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 1 INPUT" connector.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 208
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
"External Trigger 2"
Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT" connector.
"External Trigger 3"
Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 3 INPUT / OUTPUT" connector on
the rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 561
Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level for the selected trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] on page 560
Trigger Offset
Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep.
For more information, see Chapter 9.10.1.1, "Trigger offset", on page 204.
"values > 0" Measurement starts after the trigger event has occurred.
"values < 0" Measurement starts before the trigger event occurs (pretrigger).
The maximum allowed range is limited by the measurement time.
Pretriggering is possible in the time domain.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 560
Trigger Slope
Selects the polarity of the trigger source.
The trigger slope is unavailable for the free run trigger.
"Rising" The measurement starts when the signal rises to the trigger level.
"Falling" The measurement starts when the signal falls down to the trigger
level.
Remote command:
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 561
Gated Trigger
Switches gated triggering on or off.
Note: Gating is not available for time domain scans and measurements on I/Q based
data.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 559
Gate Mode
Sets the gate mode.
For more information, see Chapter 9.10.1.2, "Gated measurements", on page 204
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 209
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
"Edge" The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal
edge.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until
the gate length is over.
"Level" The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until
the signal disappears.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 560
Gate Delay
Defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measure-
ment.
In the Spectrum application, the delay position on the time axis in relation to the mea-
surement is indicated by a line labeled "GD".
For more information, see Chapter 9.10.1.2, "Gated measurements", on page 204
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 558
Gate Length
Defines how long the gate is open when it is triggered.
The gate length can only be set in the edge-triggered gate mode. In the level-triggered
mode the gate length depends on the level of the gate signal.
The gate length in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL".
In the Spectrum application, the gate length in relation to the measurement is indicated
by a line labeled "GL".
For more information, see Chapter 9.10.1.2, "Gated measurements", on page 204
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth on page 558
Continuous Gate
Activates or deactivates continuous gating.
This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is "On".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe] on page 562
Gate Period Length
Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length
is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the
next one.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth on page 562
Gate Period Count
Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event in con-
tinuous gating.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 210
R&S®ESW Common measurement settings
Trigger configuration
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt on page 562
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 211
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration
10 Common analysis and display functions
General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless
of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measure-
ment task, using an application other than the Receiver application, be sure to check
the specific application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate
from these common settings.
The analysis settings and functions are available via the "Analysis" dialog box, which is
displayed when you select the "Analysis" button in the "Overview". Additional measure-
ment-specific analysis functions may be available in separate tabs in the "Analysis"
dialog box.
● Result display configuration.................................................................................. 212
● Zoomed displays................................................................................................... 217
● Trace configuration............................................................................................... 221
● Marker usage........................................................................................................ 250
● Display and limit lines............................................................................................264
10.1 Result display configuration
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as tables, statistical evaluations. Thus, the result display is highly configurable to suit
your specific requirements and optimize analysis. Here you can find out how to work
and lay out the result display.
General display settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup,
independently of the current measurement, for example which items or colors are dis-
played on the screen, are described in Chapter 12.2, "Display settings", on page 338.
● Basic evaluation methods..................................................................................... 212
● Laying out the result display with the smartgrid.................................................... 213
10.1.1 Basic evaluation methods
Measurement results can be displayed and evaluated using various different methods,
also at the same time. You can control the type and number of results displays and
evaluation methods with the SmartGrid functionality.
For more information about the features available through the SmartGrid, refer to the
following topics.
● Bargraph
– Chapter 8.2, "Bargraph configuration", on page 90
● Scan
– "Scan" on page 100
– Chapter 8.3.3, "Performing a scan", on page 107
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 212
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration
● IF analysis
– "IF analysis" on page 103
– "IF Analysis" on page 201
● Spectrogram (for scan and IF analysis)
– Chapter 10.3.1.3, "Working with spectrograms", on page 227
– Chapter 10.3.6, "Spectrogram settings", on page 239
● Marker table
– "Marker information in marker table" on page 252
● Peak list
– Chapter 8.3.4, "Performing a peak search", on page 116
● Final measurement
– "Final measurement" on page 103
– Chapter 8.3.5, "Performing final measurements", on page 124
● Preselector
– Chapter 9.6.2, "Configuring the preselector", on page 145
● Fast access
– Chapter 9.2, "Using the fast access panel", on page 138
● User port
– Chapter 9.3, "Using the user port panel", on page 140
● Notes
– Chapter 9.4, "The notes display", on page 141
For more information about the SmartGrid in general, see Chapter 6.6.2, "Laying out
the result display with the smartgrid", on page 71.
10.1.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid
Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a
separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per
channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde &
Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the
SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different
layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
● Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both.
● Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns.
● Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well.
● All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons
than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same
evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 213
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration
● New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to
the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval-
uation icon in relation to the existing windows.
● All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When Smart-
Grid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu dis-
play. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu
display is restored.
● Background information: the smartgrid principle...................................................214
● How to activate smartgrid mode............................................................................215
● How to add a new result window...........................................................................216
● How to close a result window................................................................................216
● How to arrange the result windows....................................................................... 217
10.1.2.1 Background information: the smartgrid principle
SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors
and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where
you drop the window determines its position on the screen.
Figure 10-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode
The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which
the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win-
dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate
the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows:
above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 6-6). If an existing win-
dow would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 214
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration
Positioning the window
The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four
columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows
always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A
single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can
be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if
the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).
1
A
B 2 3 2 3 2
C
1
Figure 10-2: SmartGrid window positions
1 = Insert row above or below the existing row
2 = Create a new column in the existing row
3 = Replace a window in the existing row
SmartGrid functions
Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and
move functions.
The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the
size and position of the other displayed windows.
The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remain-
ing windows.
10.1.2.2 How to activate smartgrid mode
All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid
mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the Smart-
Grid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.
► To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:
●
Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar.
● Select the "Display Config" button in the configuration "Overview".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 215
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration
● Select the "Display Config" softkey from the [Meas Config] menu.
The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.
To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the "Close"
icon in the right-hand corner of the toolbar, or press any key.
10.1.2.3 How to add a new result window
Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows
can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).
1. Activate SmartGrid mode.
All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar.
2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar.
If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the
screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons
and move it up or down until the required icon appears.
3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed
in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See Chapter 6.6.2.5,
"How to arrange the result windows", on page 75 for more information on position-
ing the window).
Remote command:
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 569
10.1.2.4 How to close a result window
► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the
window.
Remote command:
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 567 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
on page 570
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 216
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays
10.1.2.5 How to arrange the result windows
1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation
window.
2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid.
A blue area shows where the window will be placed.
3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue.
4. Drop the window in the target area.
The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons
are displayed in each window.
5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.
Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 567 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace
on page 570
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 566
10.2 Zoomed displays
You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail.
Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be
enlarged.
Zooming into the diagram actually changes the scale of the two diagram axes. New
start and stop frequencies are defined as well as a new range for the y-axis, depending
on the area you have zoomed into.
For more information see Chapter 10.2.2, "How to zoom into the diagram in receiver
mode", on page 220.
In the Receiver application, multiple zoom ( ) is not available.
● Zoom functions......................................................................................................218
● How to zoom into the diagram in receiver mode...................................................220
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 217
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays
10.2.1 Zoom functions
Access:
Single Zoom................................................................................................................ 218
Multi-Zoom.................................................................................................................. 218
Measurement Zoom.................................................................................................... 218
└ Level Lock.....................................................................................................219
└ X-Lock...........................................................................................................219
└ Y-Lock........................................................................................................... 219
└ Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram).........................................219
Restore Original Display............................................................................................. 219
Single Zoom
A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an
enlarged extract of the trace. This function can be used repetitively until the required
details are visible.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 574
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA on page 573
Multi-Zoom
In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane-
ously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace, while the
zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom area that corre-
sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the
scrollbars.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]
on page 575
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA
on page 575
Measurement Zoom
As opposed to the graphical zoom, which is merely a visual tool, the measurement
zoom adapts the measurement settings such that the data you are interested in is dis-
played in the required detail. In measurement zoom mode, you can change the display
using touch gestures. This is the default operating mode of the R&S ESW.
For details on touch gestures see "Operating Basics" in the R&S ESW Getting Started
manual.
Note: The measurement settings are adapted to practical values based on a suitable
grid for the current settings, rather than to unwieldy values that reflect precisely the
pixel you happen to tap.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 218
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays
If the measurement zoom leads to undesirable results, you can easily return to the
original measurement settings using the "UNDO" function.
When you select the "Measurement Zoom" icon, then tap in a diagram, a dotted rect-
angle is displayed which you can drag to define the zoom area. This allows you to
define the zoom area more precisely than by spreading two fingers in the display.
The measurement zoom function provides further options in a context-sensitive menu,
which is displayed when you tap the icon for a second or so (or right-click it). These
options concern the behavior of the firmware for subsequent touch gestures on the
screen. Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset.
Level Lock ← Measurement Zoom
If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is:
remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen.
X-Lock ← Measurement Zoom
If activated, the x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.
Y-Lock ← Measurement Zoom
If activated, the y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.
Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram) ← Measurement Zoom
If you already performed a graphical zoom using the "Single Zoom" on page 218 or
"Multi-Zoom" on page 218 functions, this function automatically adapts the measure-
ment settings to maintain the currently zoomed display.
Restore Original Display
Restores the original display, that is, the originally calculated displays for the entire
capture buffer, and closes all zoom windows.
Note: This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms,
for which measurement settings were adapted, are recalculated based on the adapted
measurement settings. In this case, the zoomed display is maintained.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 574
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 219
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays
10.2.2 How to zoom into the diagram in receiver mode
Basically, zooming into a diagram in Receiver mode works the same as in other appli-
cations. However, the zoom function in Receiver mode is not merely a visual tool, but
actually changes settings. Also, the multiple zoom is not available.
The remote commands required to zoom into a display are described in Chap-
ter 14.7.2, "Zoomed displays", on page 573.
To zoom into the diagram at one position
1.
Click on the "Single Zoom" icon in the toolbar.
Zoom mode is activated.
2. Select the area in the diagram to be enlarged on the touchscreen. The selected
area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.
When you leave the touchscreen, the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace
area.
When the zoom is done, the R&S ESW changes the start and stop frequencies,
based on the selected zoom area, and adjusts the range of the y-axis. Conse-
quently, future meeasurements will only span the frequency range of the zoom
area. Results yielded prior to the zoom may be lost.
Note that a zoom may also change other measurement settings (for example the
measurement bandwidth), depending on the characteristics of the zoom area com-
pared to the original one.
Scrolling in the zoomed display
Because zooming defines a new measurement range, scrolling in diagrams that have
been zoomed into is not possible.
Restoring the original display
To restore the original display, you have to restore the measurement configuration
manually by entering the recent start and stop frequencies, bandwidths etc.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 220
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
10.3 Trace configuration
A trace is a collection of measured data points. The trace settings determine how the
measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen.
● Basics on traces....................................................................................................221
● Trace configuration............................................................................................... 233
● Trace export.......................................................................................................... 234
● Copying traces...................................................................................................... 237
● Trace mathematics................................................................................................238
● Spectrogram settings............................................................................................ 239
● How to configure traces........................................................................................ 244
● References............................................................................................................248
10.3.1 Basics on traces
● Working with trace detectors.................................................................................221
● Analyzing several traces - trace mode.................................................................. 226
● Working with spectrograms...................................................................................227
10.3.1.1 Working with trace detectors
A trace displays the values measured at the measurement points (also known as
sweep points in some applications). Usually, however, the number of measurement
points considered during a measurement is much larger than the number of measure-
ment points that can be displayed simultaneously.
For more information on measurement points, see Chapter 8.3.1.2, "Calculating the
number of measurement points", on page 96.
Example:
Consider the following configuration:
● Start frequency: 150 kHz
● Stop frequency: 30 MHz
● Step size: 4 kHz
● Measurement time: 100 ms
With said settings, the R&S ESW measures with a dwell time of 100 ms every 4 kHz,
so the number of measurement points in that example would be about 7500.
The trace detector's task is to find a good way to combine the measurement points.
The result obtained from the selected detector for any measurement point is displayed
as the value at this frequency point in the trace.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 221
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Measurement point n Meas. point n+1
Video video
Signal signal
SAMPLE
AVG s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1
RMS
MAX PEAK
AUTO PEAK
MIN PEAK
The detectors of the R&S ESW are implemented as digital devices. All detectors work
in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement speed is independ-
ent of the detector combination used for different traces.
However, you should select a measurement time that is sufficient for the detector that
requires the longest measurement time.
You can use several detectors simultaneously. The simultaneous use of several detec-
tors (multiple detection) has advantages for EMC measurements, which often require
different weightings: you can test different weightings with a single measurement. In
the receiver application, you can even apply different detectors to the bargraph mea-
surement, the scan and the final measurement.
The currently active detector is indicated in the trace information (see the abbreviation
in brackets). Note that the detectors mentioned below may not be supported by all
applications available for the R&S ESW.
Combining trace detectors
Some detector combinations are not supported in the receiver application. Possible
combinations depend on the measurement type.
If you combine two or more detectors that are not compatible, the R&S ESW automati-
cally turns off one the traces.
Automatic selection of the detector
Available in the spectrum application.
The application automatically selects an appropriate detector, depending on the
selected trace mode.
Trace mode Detector
"Clear Write" "Auto Peak"
"Max Hold" "Positive Peak"
"Min Hold" "Negative Peak"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 222
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Trace mode Detector
"Average" "Sample Peak"
"View" –
"Blank" –
The auto peak detector
Available in the spectrum application (but not for the Spectrum Emission Mask).
Combines the peak detectors (Positive and Negative Peak).
The auto peak detector determines the maximum and the minimum value of the levels
measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point.
The positive peak (or max peak) and negative peak (or min peak) detector
The positive and negative peak detectors display the maximum or minimum level that
has been detected during the measurement.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● Unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible measurement
time.
● Pulsed signals require a measurement time that is longer than the expected pulse
length. At least one pulse needs to be covered by the measurement time.
The peak detectors are digital detectors. Therefore, discharging is irrelevant even with
long measurement times.
The average detector
The average detector displays the average level of the samples that have been cap-
tured during the measurement.
For average detection, the video voltage (envelope of IF signal) is averaged over the
measurement time. Averaging is digital, i.e. the digitized values of the video voltage
are summed up and divided by the number of samples at the end of the measurement
time. This corresponds to a filtering with a rectangular window in the time domain and
a filtering with sin x/x characteristic in the frequency domain.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● Unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible measurement
time.
● Modulated signals require a measurement time determined by the lowest modula-
tion frequency to be averaged.
● Pulsed signals require a measurement time that is long enough to capture a suffi-
cient number of pulses. For averaging, a sufficient number of pulses is a number
greater than 10.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 223
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
The RMS detector
The RMS detector evaluates the root mean square (RMS) value over the current mea-
surement time and displays the resulting value. The integration time corresponds to the
measurement time.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● Unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible measurement
time.
● Modulated signals require a measurement time determined by the lowest modula-
tion frequency to be averaged.
● Pulsed signals require a measurement time that is long enough to capture a suffi-
cient number of pulses. For averaging, a sufficient number of pulses is a number
greater than 10.
The RMS detector and the video bandwidth
When you are using the RMS detector in the spectrum application, the video band-
width (VBW) in the hardware is bypassed.
Duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and the RMS detector is therefore not pos-
sible. However, the VBW is still considered for calculating the measurement time. This
results in a longer measurement time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the
VBW to get more stable traces even when you are using the RMS detector. Normally, if
the RMS detector is used the measurement time should be increased to get more sta-
ble traces.
The sample detector
The sample detector displays the first level value that has been measured in a particu-
lar statistical bin. All other values that have been measured in such a bin are ignored.
The quasipeak detector
The quasipeak detector displays the maximum value weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that
was detected during the measurement.
Depending on the selected frequency, the R&S ESW automatically selects the detec-
tors and IF bandwidths defined for bands A, B and C/D listed in the following table:
Band A Band B Band C/D
Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz > 30 MHz
Resolution bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz
The coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the frequency range with activated quasi-
peak detector can be canceled using the "CISPR RBW uncoupled" softkey.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● The relatively long time constants of the quasipeak detector result in long measure-
ment times to yield valid results.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 224
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
● Unknown signals should be measured with a measurement time of at least 1 s.
This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● Known signals can be measured with a much shorter measurement time.
After internal switching, the R&S ESWwaits until the measurement result has stabilized
before it starts the actual measurement. Since the level does not change during a fre-
quency scan, known signals (e.g. broadband RFI) can be correctly measured with a
much shorter measurement time.
The CISPR average detector
The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to
CISPR 16-1-1. The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value of
the linear average that has been detected during the measurement.
The detector is used, for example, to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low
pulse frequency. It is calibrated with the rms value of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal.
Averaging is with lowpass filters of the 2nd order (simulation of a mechanical instru-
ment).
The lowpass time constants and the IF bandwidths are fixed depending on the fre-
quency. The main parameters are listed in the following table:
Band A Band B Band C/D Band E
Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz
Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz
width
The coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the frequency range with activated CISPR
average detector can be canceled using the "CISPR RBW uncoupled" softkey.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● The relatively long time constants of the quasipeak detector result in long measure-
ment times to yield valid results.
● Unknown signals should be measured with a measurement time of at least 1 s.
This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● Unmodulated sinusoidal signals and signals with a high modulation frequency can
be measured with a much shorter measurement time.
● Slowly fluctuating signals or pulsed signals require longer measurement times.
Measurement times shorter than 20 ms
With measurement times shorter than 20 ms the detector weighting changes to plain
average weighting.
When you change the receiver frequency or the attenuation, the R&S ESW waits until
the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement. The measurement time
in that case depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 225
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
The RMS average detector
The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies below the corner frequency). It thus achieves a pulse response curve with
the following characteristics: 10 dB/decade above the corner frequency and 20 dB/
decade below the corner frequency. The average value is determined by lowpass fil-
ters of the 2nd order (simulation of a mechanical instrument).
The detector is used, for example, to measure broadband emissions and may replace
the quasipeak detector in the future.
The filter bandwidth of the detector are coupled to the receiver frequency.
Table 10-1: RMS Average detector
Band A Band B Band C/D Band E
Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz
Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz
width
Corner frequency 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz
Regarding measurement time, see CISPR Average detector.
Measurement times shorter than 20 ms
With measurement times shorter than 20 ms the detector weighting changes to plain
RMS weighting.
10.3.1.2 Analyzing several traces - trace mode
If several measurements are performed one after the other, or continuous measure-
ments are performed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces
is processed. After each measurement, the trace mode determines whether:
● The data is frozen ("View")
● The data is hidden ("Blank")
● The data is replaced by new values ("Clear Write")
● The data is replaced selectively ("Max Hold", "Min Hold", "Average")
Each time you change the trace mode, the selected trace memory is cleared.
The R&S ESW supports the following trace modes:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 226
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Table 10-2: Overview of available trace modes
Trace Mode Description
Blank Hides the selected trace.
Clear Write Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each measurement. This is the default set-
ting.
All available detectors can be selected.
Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed. The
R&S ESW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is
greater than the previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each measurement until all signal components are detected in a kind
of envelope.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S ESW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is
lower than the previous one.
This mode is useful for example for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite
signal visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed,
whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Average The average is formed over several measurements and displayed.
Transducer Draws a trace that shows the correction values of all active transducer factors in the
currently selected frequency range.
View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
If a trace is frozen ("View" mode), you can change the measurement settings, apart
from scaling settings, without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that the displayed
trace no longer matches the current measurement settings is indicated by a yellow
asterisk on the tab label.
If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes, the
R&S ESW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. Thus, you
can zoom into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace.
10.3.1.3 Working with spectrograms
In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" traces, the
R&S ESW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data.
A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis
shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is
indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies
over time for different frequencies.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 227
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Example:
(Note that this example is based on data recorded in the Spectrum application. The
basic principle of a spectrogram in the Receiver application is the same.)
In this example, you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R&S ESW,
compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the signal does not change over
time, the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The
legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent.
Result display
The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements:
2
4
8 5 8
7
3
Figure 10-3: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 228
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
1 = Spectrum result display
2 = Spectrogram result display
3 = Marker list
4 = Marker
5 = Delta marker
6 = Color map
7 = Timestamp / frame number
8 = Current frame indicator
For more information about spectrogram configuration, see Chapter 10.3.6, "Spectro-
gram settings", on page 239.
Remote commands:
Activating and configuring spectrograms:
Chapter 14.7.3.5, "Spectrogram configuration", on page 580
Storing results:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 669
● Time frames.......................................................................................................... 229
● Markers in the spectrogram.................................................................................. 230
● Color maps............................................................................................................230
Time frames
The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically, along the y-axis. Each
line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one or more captured measurement and is
called a time frame or simply "frame". As with standard spectrum traces, several mea-
sured values are combined in one measurement point using the selected detector.
Frames are sorted in chronological order, beginning with the most recently recorded
frame at the top of the diagram (frame number 0). With the next measurement, the pre-
vious frame is moved further down in the diagram, until the maximum number of cap-
tured frames is reached. The display is updated continuously during the measurement,
and the measured trace data is stored. Spectrogram displays are continued even after
single measurements unless they are cleared manually.
The maximum number of frames that you can capture depends on the number of mea-
surement points that are analyzed during the measurement.
The scaling of the time axis (y-axis) is not configurable. However, you can enlarge the
spectrogram display by maximizing the window using the "Split/Maximize" key.
Tracking absolute time - timestamps
Alternatively to the frame count, the absolute time (that is: a timestamp) at which a
frame was captured can be displayed. While the measurement is running, the time-
stamp shows the system time. In single measurement mode or if the measurement is
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 229
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
stopped, the timestamp shows the time and date at the end of the measurement.Thus,
the individual frames can be identified by their timestamp or their frame count.
When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number in the diagram
footer (see Figure 10-3).
Displaying individual frames
The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared. Arrows
on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame.
The scan or spectrum diagrams always display the spectrum for the currently selected
frame.
The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer, or alternatively a time-
stamp, if activated. The current frame, displayed at the top of the diagram, is frame
number 0. Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index,
e.g."-10". You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the
current frame number.
Markers in the spectrogram
Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram. They are
only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the
spectrogram. If more than two markers are active, the marker values are displayed in a
separate marker table.
In the spectrum result display, the markers and their frequency and level values (1) are
displayed as usual. Additionally, the frame number is displayed to indicate the position
of the marker in time (2).
In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers
at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in
addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new
marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently
selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame. Special
search functions are provided for spectrogram markers.
In the spectrum result display, only the markers positioned on the currently selected
frame are visible. In "Continuous Sweep" mode, this means that only markers posi-
tioned on frame 0 are visible. To view markers that are positioned on a frame other
than frame 0 in the spectrum result display, you must stop the measurement and select
the corresponding frame.
Color maps
The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs. You
can define:
● Which colors to use (Color scheme)
● Which value range to apply the color scheme to
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 230
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
● How the colors are distributed within the value range, i.e where the focus of the vis-
ualization lies (shape of the color curve)
The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R&S ESW.
The Color Scheme
● Hot
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indi-
cate high ones.
● Cold
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors
indicate high ones.
The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme.
● Radar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in
between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light colors indicate high ones.
● Grayscale
Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low levels, light gray indi-
cates high ones.
The value range of the color map
If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram, you can optimize
the displayed value range. Then it becomes easier to distinguish between values that
are close together. Display only parts of interest.
The shape and focus of the color curve
The color-mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the
spectrogram display. By default, colors on the color map are distributed evenly. How-
ever, to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest, you
can set the focus of the color mapping to that area. Changing the focus is performed
by changing the shape of the color curve.
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear. If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution
becomes non-linear. The slope of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of
the color palette then covers a large range of results, while the other end distributes
several colors over a relatively small result range.
You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be
able to detect small variations of the signal.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 231
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Example:
In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm
is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to
-20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.
Figure 10-4: Spectrogram with (default) linear color curve shape = 0
The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors. After shifting the color
curve to the left (negative value), more colors cover the range from -100 dBm to
-60 dBm (blue, green and yellow). This range occurs more often in the example. The
range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm, on the other hand, is dominated by various shades of
red only.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 232
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Figure 10-5: Spectrogram with non-linear color curve (shape = -0.5)
10.3.2 Trace configuration
A trace is a collection of measured data points. The trace settings determine how the
measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen.
Trace configuration for the scan diagram
The contents of the "Traces" tab of the "Trace Configuration" are the same as the
Traces / Final Meas tab of the "Test Automation" dialog box.
Trace configuration for IF analysis
IF analysis supports a maximum of three traces. The "Traces" dialog box available for
IF analysis supports the following functions:
● "Trace Mode" on page 127
● "Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config" on page 233
Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config................................................................... 233
Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config
Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very
quickly by selecting the appropriate button.
Function Trace Settings
Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write
Blank
Set Trace Mode Trace 1: Max Hold
Max | Avg | Min
Trace 2: Average
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 233
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Function Trace Settings
Trace 3: Min Hold
Blank
Set Trace Mode Trace 1: Max Hold
Max | ClrWrite | Min
Trace 2: Clear Write
Trace 3: Min Hold
Blank
10.3.3 Trace export
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Trace Export"
The R&S ESW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed
measurements. If you want to evaluate the data with other, external applications, you
can export the measurement data to a standard ASCII format file (DAT or CSV).
You can also import existing trace data from a file, for example as a reference trace.
The trace import is available in the spectrum application.
The standard data management functions (for example saving or loading instrument
settings) that are available for all R&S ESW applications are not described here.
Refer to the R&S ESW user manual for a description of the standard functions.
The remote commands required to export traces are described in Chapter 14.7.3.2,
"Trace export", on page 576.
Export all Traces and all Table Results....................................................................... 235
Include Instrument & Measurement Settings.............................................................. 235
Trace to Export............................................................................................................235
Decimal Separator...................................................................................................... 235
Export Trace to ASCII File...........................................................................................235
└ File Type....................................................................................................... 236
└ Decimal Separator........................................................................................ 237
└ Column Separator.........................................................................................237
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................237
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 234
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Export all Traces and all Table Results
Selects all displayed traces and result tables (e.g. "Result Summary", marker table
etc.) in the current application for export to an ASCII file.
Alternatively, you can select one specific trace only for export (see Trace to Export).
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window
by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 577
Include Instrument & Measurement Settings
Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export
file for result data.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer on page 577
Trace to Export
Defines an individual trace to be exported to a file.
This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected.
Decimal Separator
Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import
files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 632
Export Trace to ASCII File
Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the speci-
fied file and directory in the selected ASCII format.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 235
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins
with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For
large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
For details on the file format in the Spectrum application, see Chapter 10.3.8.1, "Refer-
ence: ASCII file export format", on page 248.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 669
File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File
Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated,
a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat on page 578
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 236
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Decimal Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File
Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import
files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 632
Column Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File
Selects the character that separates columns in the exported ASCII file. The character
can be either a semicolon, a comma or a tabulator (tab).
Example for semicolon:
Type;ESW26;Version;1.00;Date;01.Jan 3000;
Example for comma:
Type,ESW26,
Version,1.00,
Date,01.Jan 3000,
Example for tabulator (tab after the last column is not visible):
Type ESW26
Version 1.00
Date 01.Jan 3000
The selected column separator setting remains the same, even after a preset.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator on page 577
File Explorer ← Export Trace to ASCII File
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
10.3.4 Copying traces
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Copy Trace"
The remote commands required to copy traces are described in Chapter 14.7.3.3,
"Traces copy", on page 578.
Copy Trace..................................................................................................................238
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 237
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Copy Trace
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Copy Trace"
Copies trace data to another trace.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:COPY on page 578
10.3.5 Trace mathematics
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Trace Math"
Trace mathematics allow you to combine the data of several traces and write the
results to a new trace.
Trace Math Function................................................................................................... 238
Trace Math Position.................................................................................................... 238
Trace Math Mode........................................................................................................ 238
Trace Math Function
Trace mathematics subtract the data of one trace from another trace and write the
results to a third trace.
When you turn on trace mathematics, you can select all parameters in the equation
arbitrarily from the corresponding dropdown menus (both operands and the result). For
example, you can subtract trace 1 from trace 3 and write the results to trace 5.
The result is a trace in dB that refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math
Position setting.
Note that all traces in the equation must have a trace mode other than "Blank" or
"View".
You can turn off all trace mathematics with the "Trace Math Off" feature.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:EXPRession[:DEFine] on page 578
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe on page 580
Trace Math Position
Defines the zero point on the y-axis of the resulting trace in % of the diagram height.
The range of values extends from -100 % to +200 %.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition on page 579
Trace Math Mode
Defines the mode for the trace math calculations.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 238
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
"Lin" Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values
are converted into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtrac-
tion, the data is converted back into its original unit.
This setting takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale. In this case,
subtraction is done in two ways (depending on the set unit):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W
prior to subtraction, i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the
data is converted into V prior to subtraction, i.e. subtraction is
done in V.
"Log" Activates logarithmic subtraction.
This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a loga-
rithmic scale, i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values
are subtracted in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling) the behav-
ior is the same as with linear subtraction.
"Power" Activates linear power subtraction.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtrac-
tion. After the subtraction, the data is converted back into its original
unit.
Unlike the linear mode, the subtraction is always done in W.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE on page 579
10.3.6 Spectrogram settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram"
Functions to configure spectrograms described elsewhere:
● Color mapping: Chapter 10.3.6.2, "Color map settings", on page 242
● Markers: Chapter 10.4.3.2, "Marker search (spectrogram)", on page 261
Spectrograms in the I/Q analyzer and analog demodulator
Basically, spectrograms in those applications work the same as in the Receiver or
Spectrum application.
However, in the I/Q Analyzer and Analog Demodulator, they have the following distinc-
tive features.
● Not all result displays support spectrograms.
● Compared to the Receiver or Spectrum application, a spectrogram can not be
added as an independent result display. Instead, spectrograms relate to a certain
measurement window (or result display). Result diagram and spectrogram are a
single entity in that case and can not be divided.
To view results in a spectrogram, select a window (indicated by a blue frame), then
select [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 239
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Spectrograms are either displayed in "Split" mode (spectrogram is displayed below the
trace diagram), in "Full" mode (trace diagram is not displayed), or not displayed at all
("Off)".
When the "Spectrogram Config"softkey is greyed out, spectrograms are not supported
by the selected result display.
● General spectrogram settings............................................................................... 240
● Color map settings................................................................................................ 242
10.3.6.1 General spectrogram settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram"
State............................................................................................................................240
3D Spectrogram State.................................................................................................241
Select Frame...............................................................................................................241
History Depth.............................................................................................................. 241
3-D Display Depth....................................................................................................... 241
Trace........................................................................................................................... 241
Time Stamp................................................................................................................. 241
Recording Interval....................................................................................................... 242
Color Mapping.............................................................................................................242
Clear Spectrogram...................................................................................................... 242
State
Activates and deactivates the spectrogram result display.
In the receiver application, the R&S ESW always records spectrogram data. The
"State" function simply controls the spectrogram visibility.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe] on page 584
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 240
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
3D Spectrogram State
Activates and deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram. As opposed to the common 2-
dimensional spectrogram, the power is not only indicated by a color mapping, but also
in a third dimension, the z-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe] on page 584
Select Frame
Selects a specific frame, loads the corresponding trace from the memory, and displays
it in the Spectrum window.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati-
cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and
only if a spectrogram is selected.
The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 581
History Depth
Sets the number of frames that the R&S ESW stores in its memory.
The maximum size of the spectrogram history depends on the available memory.
If the memory is full, the R&S ESW deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory
and replaces them with the new data.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth on page 582
3-D Display Depth
Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3-dimensional spectrogram.
Trace
Selects the trace the spectrogram is based on.
You can select any trace that is currently active, including the trace that shows the
results of trace mathematics.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe on page 582
Time Stamp
Activates and deactivates the timestamp. The timestamp shows the system time while
the measurement is running. In single sweep mode or if the measurement is stopped,
the timestamp shows the time and date of the end of the measurement.
When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] on page 583
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA? on page 582
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 241
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
Recording Interval
Defines a recording interval for the IF spectrogram result display. For example if the
recording interval is set to 5, only every fifth scan is taken from the IF analysis diagram
and displayed in the IF spectrogram. This prevents the IF spectrogram from getting fil-
led up too fast.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:RINTerval on page 584
Color Mapping
Opens the "Color Mapping" dialog.
For details see "Color maps" on page 230.
Clear Spectrogram
Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 581
10.3.6.2 Color map settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram" > "Color Mapping"
In addition to the available color settings, the dialog box displays the current color map
and provides a preview of the display with the current settings.
Figure 10-6: Color Mapping dialog box
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 242
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution
2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color
scheme
3 = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme
4/5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram
6 = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve
7 = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values
8 = Scale of the horizontal axis (value range)
The remote commands required to configure the color map are described in "Color
map configuration" on page 585.
Start / Stop.................................................................................................................. 243
Shape..........................................................................................................................243
Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale.......................................................................................... 243
Auto.............................................................................................................................243
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 243
Close........................................................................................................................... 243
Start / Stop
Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer on page 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer on page 586
Shape
Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display.
"-1 to <0" More colors are distributed among the lower values
"0" Colors are distributed linearly among the values
">0 to 1" More colors are distributed among the higher values
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe on page 585
Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale
Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe] on page 586
Auto
Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for
optimized display.
Set to Default
Sets the color mapping to the default settings.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault on page 585
Close
Saves the changes and closes the dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 243
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
10.3.7 How to configure traces
● How to export trace data and numerical results....................................................244
● How to display and configure a spectrogram........................................................ 244
10.3.7.1 How to export trace data and numerical results
The measured trace data and numerical measurement results in tables can be expor-
ted to an ASCII file. For each measurement point, the measured trace position and
value are output.
The file is stored with a .DAT or .CSV extension. For details on the storage format, see
Chapter 10.3.8.1, "Reference: ASCII file export format", on page 248.
To export trace data and table results
1. Select [TRACE] > "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export" tab.
2. Select "Export all Traces and all Table Results" to export all available measurement
result data for the current application, or select a specific "Trace to Export".
3. Optionally, select "Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" to insert additional
information in the export file header.
4. If necessary, change the decimal separator for the ASCII export file.
5. Select "Export Trace to ASCII File".
6. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file.
7. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the data to the file.
10.3.7.2 How to display and configure a spectrogram
Step-by-step instructions on how to display and configure a spectrogram are provided
here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 10.3.6, "Spectrogram
settings", on page 239.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap-
ter 14.7.3.5, "Spectrogram configuration", on page 580.
The following tasks are described here:
● "To display a spectrogram" on page 245
● "To remove the spectrogram display" on page 245
● "To set a marker in the spectrogram" on page 245
● "To configure a spectrogram" on page 245
● "To select a color scheme" on page 246
● "To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders" on page 246
● "To set the value range of the color map numerically" on page 247
● "To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider" on page 248
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 244
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
● "To set the color curve shape numerically" on page 248
To display a spectrogram
1. In the "Overview", select "Display", then drag the evaluation type "Spectrogram" to
the diagram area.
Alternatively:
a) Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey.
b) Toggle "Spectrogram" to "On".
2. To clear an existing spectrogram display, select "Clear Spectrogram".
3. Start a new measurement using [RUN SINGLE] or [RUN CONT].
The spectrogram is updated continuously with each new sweep.
4. To display the spectrum diagram for a specific time frame:
a) Stop the continuous measurement or wait until the single sweep is completed.
b) Select the frame number in the diagram footer.
c) Enter the required frame number in the edit dialog box.
Note that the most recent sweep is frame number 0, all previous frames have
negative numbers.
To remove the spectrogram display
1. Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey.
2. Toggle "Spectrogram" to "Off".
The standard spectrum display is restored.
To set a marker in the spectrogram
1. While a spectrogram is displayed, select the [MARKER] key.
2. Select a "Marker" softkey.
3. Enter the frequency or time (x-value) of the marker or delta marker.
4. Enter the frame number for which the marker is to be set, for example 0 for the cur-
rent frame, or -2 for the second to last frame. Note that the frame number is always
0 or a negative value!
The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently
selected frame. In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are
positioned on a visible frame.
To configure a spectrogram
1. Configure the spectrogram frames:
a) Select the [SWEEP] key.
b) Select the "Sweep Config" softkey.
c) In the This is "Sweep/Average Count" ok? field, define how many sweeps are
to be analyzed to create a single frame.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 245
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
d) In the "Frame Count" field, define how many frames are to be plotted during a
single sweep measurement.
e) To include frames from previous sweeps in the analysis of the new frame (for
"Max Hold", "Min Hold" and "Average" trace modes only), select "Continue
Frame" = "On".
2. Define how many frames are to be stored in total:
a) Select the [TRACE] key and then the "Spectrogram Config" softkey.
b) Select the "History Depth" softkey.
c) Enter the maximum number of frames to store.
3. Optionally, replace the frame number by a time stamp by toggling the "Time Stamp"
softkey to "On".
4. If necessary, adapt the color mapping for the spectrogram to a different value
range or color scheme as described in "How to configure the color mapping"
on page 246.
How to configure the color mapping
The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrogram to your needs.
The settings for color mapping are defined in the "Color Mapping" dialog box. To dis-
play this dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select the color map in the window title bar of the "Spectrogram" result display.
To select a color scheme
You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values.
► In the "Color Mapping" dialog box, select the option for the color scheme to be
used.
Editing the value range of the color map
The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the "Color Map-
ping" dialog box. To cover the entire measurement value range, make sure the first and
last bar of the histogram are included.
To ignore noise in a spectrogram, for example, exclude the lower power levels from the
histogram.
The value range of the color map must cover at least 10% of the value range on the
horizontal axis of the diagram, that means, the difference between the start and stop
values must be at least 10%.
The value range of the color map can be set numerically or graphically.
To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders
1. Select and drag the bottom color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the left of
the color curve pane) to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 246
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
2. Select and drag the top color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the right of
the color curve pane) to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping.
To set the value range of the color map numerically
1. In the "Start" field, enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that
marks the beginning of the value range.
2. In the "Stop" field, enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that
marks the end of the value range.
Example:
The color map starts at -110 dBm and ends at -10 dBm (that is: a range of 100 dB). In
order to suppress the noise, you only want the color map to start at -90 dBm. Thus,
you enter 10% in the "Start" field. The R&S ESW shifts the start point 10% to the right,
to -90 dBm.
Adjusting the reference level and level range
Since the color map is configured using percentages of the total value range, changing
the reference level and level range of the measurement (and thus the power value
range) also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram.
Editing the shape of the color curve
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear, i.e. the colors on the color map are distributed evenly.
If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution becomes non-linear. The slope
of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of the color palette then covers a
large number of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively
small result range.
The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 247
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider
► Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle
of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focused, i.e.
more colors are distributed there.
To set the color curve shape numerically
► In the "Shape" field, enter a value to change the shape of the curve:
● A negative value (-1 to <0) focuses the lower values
● 0 defines a linear distribution
● A positive value (>0 to 1) focuses the higher values
10.3.8 References
● Reference: ASCII file export format...................................................................... 248
10.3.8.1 Reference: ASCII file export format
Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other appli-
cations. This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data.
(For details see Chapter 10.3.7.1, "How to export trace data and numerical results",
on page 244).
The file consists of the header information (general configuration of the measurement)
and the measurement results. Optionally, the header can be excluded from the file.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 248
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace). The measured data follows in one or sev-
eral columns (depending on the measurement), which are also separated by a semico-
lon.
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window
by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Generally, the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation
programs, e.g. MS Excel. Different language versions of evaluation programs can
require a different handling of the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal sep-
arator to use (decimal point or comma).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you select the "ASCII Trace Export" soft-
key, the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corre-
sponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the
time that frame was recorded.
Header
Type; <instrument_model>; Instrument model
Version;1.00; Firmware version
Date;01. Jan 3000; Date of data set storage
Mode;Receiver; Application
Start;150000.000000;Hz; Scan start
Stop;1000000.000000;Hz; Scan stop
X-Axis;LIN; Scale of the x-axis
Scan Count;1; Scan count
Transducer Input1;;;;;;;; List of transducer on input 1
Transducer Input2;;;;;;;; List of transducer on input 2
Preselector;
State;On; Preselector configuration
Filter Split;On;
Notch Filter 1;On; State of the first notch filter
Notch Filter 2;Off; State of the second notch filter
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 249
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Data section (scan ranges)
Scan 1:
Start;150000.000000;Hz; Start frequency of the scan range
Stop;29998500.000000;Hz; Stop frequency of the scan range
Step;4500.000000;Hz; Frequency stepsize applied in the scan range
RBW;9000.000000;Hz; Measurement bandwidth applied in the scan range
Meas Time;0.001000;s; Measurement time in the scan range
Auto Ranging;OFF; State of the auto ranging feature
RF Att;10.000000;dB; Attenuation applied in the scan range
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamplifier information for the scan range
Preamp;0.000000;dB;
RF Input;1; RF input used in the scan range
Scan 2:
(…)
Data section (traces)
Trace 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Scan Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis
Values;1343; Number of measurement points
150000.000000;3.541122;
String of results
154500.000000;5.776306;[...]
Trace 2:
(…)
10.4 Marker usage
Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values
in the diagram. Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display both in
the time and frequency domain.
Markers in spectrogram displays
In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 17 markers or delta markers
at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in
addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new
marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently
selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame.
● Basics on markers.................................................................................................251
● Marker settings......................................................................................................255
● Marker search settings and positioning functions................................................. 259
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 250
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
10.4.1 Basics on markers
Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a
better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Markers are used to mark points on traces, to read out measurement results and to
select a display section quickly. The R&S ESW provides 16 markers per display win-
dow. In the Spectrum application, the same markers are displayed in all windows.
● The easiest way to work with markers is using the touch screen. Simply drag the
marker and drop it at the required position. When a marker label is selected, a ver-
tical line is displayed which indicates the marker's current x-value.
● Alternatively, change the position of the selected marker using the rotary knob. By
default, the marker is moved from one pixel to the next. If you need to position the
marker more precisely, change the step size to move from one measurement point
to the next (General Marker Setting).
● You can also set an active marker to a new position by defining its x-position
numerically. When you select the softkey for a marker, an edit dialog box is dis-
played.
● The most commonly required marker settings and functions are also available as
softkeys or via the context menu. Tap the marker on the touch screen and hold
your finger for about 2 seconds until the context menu is opened, then select the
required entry.
● Softkeys for active markers (displayed on the screen) are highlighted blue. The
softkey for the currently selected marker (for which functions are performed) is
highlighted orange.
● To set individual markers very quickly, use the softkeys in the "Marker" menu.
● To set up several markers at once, use the "Marker" dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 251
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
● To position the selected marker to a special value, use the softkeys in the "Marker
To" menu.
● Marker results....................................................................................................... 252
● Searching for signal peaks....................................................................................253
10.4.1.1 Marker results
Normal markers point to a trace point on the x-axis and display the associated numeric
value for that trace point. Delta markers indicate an offset between the level at the
delta marker position and the level at the position of the assigned reference marker, in
dB.
The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table. By
default, the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area. If more markers
are activated, the results are displayed in a marker table.
Marker information in diagram area
By default, the results of the last two markers or delta markers that were activated are
displayed in the diagram area.
The following information is displayed there:
● The marker type (M for normal, D for delta, or special function name)
● The marker number (1 to 16)
● The assigned trace number in square brackets [ ]
● The marker value on the y-axis, or the result of the marker function
● The marker position on the x-axis
Marker information in marker table
In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram area, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:
Table 10-3: Contents of the marker table in the Receiver application
Wnd Window type the marker is positioned in.
Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal) and number
Ref Reference marker for delta markers
Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned
X-value X-value of the marker
Y-value Y-value of the marker
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 252
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
10.4.1.2 Searching for signal peaks
A common measurement task is to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum
signal levels. The R&S ESW provides various peak search functions and applications:
● Setting a marker to a peak value once (Peak Search)
● Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area (Search Limits)
● Creating a marker table with all or a defined number of peak values for one mea-
surement (Marker Peak List)
● Updating the marker position to the current peak value automatically after each
measurement (Auto Peak Search)
● Creating a fixed reference marker at the current peak value of a trace (Fixed Refer-
ence)
Note that the marker peak search is independent of the peak search available for auto-
mated test sequences. For more information, see Chapter 8.3.4, "Performing a peak
search", on page 116.
Peak search limits
The peak search can be restricted to a search area. The search area is defined by limit
lines which are also indicated in the diagram. In addition, a minimum value (threshold)
can be defined as a further search condition.
When is a peak a peak? - Peak excursion
During a peak search, for example when a marker peak table is displayed, noise val-
ues may be detected as a peak if the signal is very flat or does not contain many
peaks. Therefore, you can define a relative threshold ("Peak excursion"). The signal
level must increase by the threshold value before falling again before a peak is detec-
ted. To avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima, enter a peak excursion
value that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value mea-
sured for the displayed inherent noise.
Effect of peak excursion settings (example)
The following figure shows a trace to be analyzed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 253
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Figure 10-7: Trace example
The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram
above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak:
Marker # Min. amplitude decrease to either side of the signal
1 30 dB
2 29.85 dB
3 20 dB
4 10 dB
5 18 dB
In order to eliminate the smaller peaks M3,M4 and M5 in the example above, a peak
excursion of at least 20 dB is required. In this case, the amplitude must rise at least 20
dB before falling again before a peak is detected.
Marker peak list
The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum. It
is updated automatically after each measurement. How many peaks are displayed can
be defined, as well as the sort order. In addition, the detected peaks can be indicated
in the diagram. The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external
application.
Automatic peak search
A peak search can be repeated automatically after each measurement in order to keep
the maximum value as the reference point for a phase noise measurement. This is
useful to track a drifting source. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise
measurement result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise mea-
surement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 254
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
In the Receiver application, the R&S ESW provides an automatic peak search. In that
case, the R&S ESW searches for peaks when a scan is over. The search results are
added to the marker peak list as usual and are the basis for the final measurement. For
more information, see Chapter 8.3.4, "Performing a peak search", on page 116.
Using a peak as a fixed reference marker
Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency
level. In this case, the maximum level can be determined by an initial peak search and
then be used as a reference point for further measurement results.
10.4.2 Marker settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap-
ter 14.7.4, "Markers", on page 587.
● Individual marker setup......................................................................................... 255
● General marker settings........................................................................................258
10.4.2.1 Individual marker setup
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Markers"
Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously.
Initial marker setup is performed using the "Marker" dialog box.
The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview. By default, the first
marker is defined as a normal marker, whereas all others are defined as delta markers
with reference to the first marker. All markers are assigned to trace 1, but only the first
marker is active.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 255
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Selected Marker.......................................................................................................... 256
Marker State................................................................................................................256
Marker Position X-value.............................................................................................. 256
Frame (Spectrogram only).......................................................................................... 256
Marker Type................................................................................................................ 256
Reference Marker....................................................................................................... 257
Assigning the Marker to a Trace................................................................................. 257
Select Marker.............................................................................................................. 257
All Markers Off.............................................................................................................257
Selected Marker
Marker name. The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange.
Remote command:
Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands.
Marker State
Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 590
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 589
Marker Position X-value
Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the
absolute position is indicated. For delta markers, the position relative to the reference
marker is provided.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 591
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 590
Frame (Spectrogram only)
Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 603
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 607
Marker Type
Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta".
These types cannot be changed.
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an
additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not
activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal" A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position
in the diagram.
"Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci-
fied reference marker (marker 1 by default).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 256
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 590
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 589
Reference Marker
Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis
results (delta marker values).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 588
Assigning the Marker to a Trace
The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace deter-
mines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previ-
ously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or
time, but indicates the value of the new trace.
If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva-
ted.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 591
Select Marker
The "Select Marker" function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate
one or more markers quickly.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 590
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 589
All Markers Off
Deactivates all markers in one step.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 257
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 590
10.4.2.2 General marker settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Marker Settings"
Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark-
ers.
Marker Table Display...................................................................................................258
Marker Info.................................................................................................................. 258
Settings Coupled.........................................................................................................259
Marker Table Display
Defines how the marker information is displayed.
"On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath
the diagram.
"Off" No separate marker table is displayed.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle on page 593
Marker Info
Turns the marker information displayed in the diagram on and off.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] on page 592
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 258
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Settings Coupled
Couples or decouples the receiver settings to the scan range settings when you use
Tune to Marker.
When you turn on this feature, the R&S ESW changes the receiver settings according
to the scan range the marker frequency is currently in.
In addition, you can select which settings the R&S ESW applies with the "Use Last
Scan" feature.
● When you turn it on, the R&S ESW uses the configuration of the last scan.
● When you turn it off, the R&S ESW uses the current configuration of the scan table,
if you have changed it since the last scan.
(If you have not changed anything, the configuration of the last scan is still in
effect.)
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe] on page 592
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled:LSCan on page 592
10.4.3 Marker search settings and positioning functions
Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and
easily, or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value. In
order to determine the required marker position, searches may be performed. The
search results can be influenced by special settings.
Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the [MKR ➙]
menu.
Search settings are also available via the [Marker] key or in the vertical "Marker Con-
fig" tab of the "Analysis" dialog box (horizontal "Search Settings" tab).
For more information on searching for signal peaks see Chapter 10.4.1.2, "Searching
for signal peaks", on page 253.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap-
ter 14.7.4, "Markers", on page 587.
● Marker search....................................................................................................... 259
● Marker search (spectrogram)................................................................................261
● Marker positioning.................................................................................................262
10.4.3.1 Marker search
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Search"
Markers are commonly used to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum val-
ues, in the measured signal. Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak
search results.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 259
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Search Mode for Next Peak........................................................................................ 260
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 260
Search Limits (Left / Right)..........................................................................................260
Search Threshold........................................................................................................260
Search Limits Off.........................................................................................................261
Search Mode for Next Peak
Selects the search mode for the next peak search.
"Left" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current
peak.
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current
peak.
"Right" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current
peak.
Remote command:
Find a list of remote commands in Chapter 14.7.4.4, "Marker positioning",
on page 596.
Peak Excursion
Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi-
fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for
the peak excursion is 6 dB.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 490
Search Limits (Left / Right)
If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the
limited search range are considered.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 595
Search Threshold
Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. If
enabled, only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 260
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 595
CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 595
Search Limits Off
Deactivates the search range limits.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 594
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 595
10.4.3.2 Marker search (spectrogram)
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Search"
These settings are only available for spectrogram displays.
Spectrograms show not only the current measurement results, but also the measure-
ment history. Thus, when searching for peaks, you must define the search settings
within a single time frame (x-direction) and within several time frames (y-direction).
Marker search functions for the spectrogram described elsewhere:
● Marker Track
● "Peak Excursion" on page 260
● "Search Limits (Left / Right)" on page 260
● "Search Threshold" on page 260
● "Search Limits Off" on page 261
Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction................................................................. 261
Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction..................................................................262
Marker Search Type....................................................................................................262
Marker Search Area.................................................................................................... 262
Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction
Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame.
"Left" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current
peak.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 261
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current
peak.
"Right" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current
peak.
Remote command:
Find a list of remote commands in Chapter 14.7.4.6, "Spectrogram markers",
on page 602.
Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction
Selects the search mode for the next peak search within all frames at the current
marker position.
"Up" Determines the next maximum/minimum above the current peak (in
more recent frames).
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum above or below the current
peak (in all frames).
"Down" Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in
older frames).
Remote command:
Find a list of remote commands in Chapter 14.7.4.6, "Spectrogram markers",
on page 602.
Marker Search Type
Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram.
"X-Search" Searches only within the currently selected frame.
"Y-Search" Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position.
"XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions.
Remote command:
Find a list of remote commands in Chapter 14.7.4.6, "Spectrogram markers",
on page 602.
Marker Search Area
Defines which frames the search is performed in.
"Visible" Only the visible frames are searched.
"Memory" All frames stored in the memory are searched.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 604
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 608
10.4.3.3 Marker positioning
The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search
or set other characteristic values to the current marker value. These functions are
available as softkeys in the "Marker To" menu, which is displayed when you press the
[MKR ➙] key.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 262
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage
Functions to position markers in the Spectrum application described elsewhere:
● "Settings Coupled" on page 259
Peak Search................................................................................................................263
Search Next Peak....................................................................................................... 263
Search Minimum......................................................................................................... 263
Search Next Minimum.................................................................................................263
Peak Search
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the maximum of the trace. If no marker is
active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 597
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 599
Search Next Peak
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (lower) maximum of the assigned
trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next peak is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 596
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 596
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 599
Search Minimum
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the minimum of the trace. If no marker is
active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 598
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 600
Search Next Minimum
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (higher) minimum of the selected
trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 598
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 601
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 263
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
10.5 Display and limit lines
Display and limit lines help you analyze a measurement trace.
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines"
For remote operation, see Chapter 14.7.5, "Display and limit line configuration",
on page 611 .
● Display lines.......................................................................................................... 264
● Limit lines.............................................................................................................. 266
10.5.1 Display lines
10.5.1.1 Basics on display lines
Display lines help you analyze a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is
comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute
values. They are used exclusively to visually mark relevant frequencies or points in
time (zero span), as well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automati-
cally whether the points are below or above the marked level values - use limit lines for
that task (see Chapter 10.5.2.1, "Basics on limit lines", on page 266).
Two different types of display lines are provided:
● Two horizontal lines: "Horizontal Line 1" and "Horizontal Line 2".
These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram
and can be shifted up and down.
● Four vertical lines: "Vertical Line 1" to "Vertical Line 4"
The receiver application only supports two vertical lines.
These lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram
and can be shifted left and right.
Lables
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the diagrams:
● H1: "Horizontal Line 1"
● H2: "Horizontal Line 2"
● V1: "Vertical Line 1"
● V2: "Vertical Line 2"
● V3: "Vertical Line 3"
● V4: "Vertical Line 4"
● Each label also shows the absolute position of the corresponding line, for example
"H1 70.000 dBµV".
If you turn on both horizontal lines or both vertical lines, the label of the first line
also shows the distance to the second line, for example "H1 70.000 dBµV, Δ 8.250
dB".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 264
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
10.5.1.2 Display line settings
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Display Lines"
Four vertical and two horizontal lines can be defined in the display.
Vertical Line <x>..........................................................................................................265
Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2............................................................................ 265
Tuned Frequency........................................................................................................ 266
Vertical Line <x>
Activates a vertical display line in the diagram at the specified point of the x-axis,
depending on the scale of the axis.
If you activate both vertical lines, the label of the first vertical line shows the distance to
second vertical line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl> on page 612
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl> on page 613
Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2
Activates a horizontal display line (H1 or H2) in the diagram at the specified point of the
y-axis.
If you activate both horizontal lines, the label of the first horizontal line shows the dis-
tance to second vertical line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 611
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 611
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 265
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Tuned Frequency
Turns a display line that represents the currently selected receiver frequency on and
off.
The tuned frequency line is labeled "TF" in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TFLine:STATe on page 613
10.5.1.3 Defining display lines
1. Display lines are configured in the "Lines Config" dialog box. To display this dialog
box, press the [Lines] key and then "Lines Config".
2. Select the "Display Lines" tab.
3. To define a vertical line:
a) Select "Vertical Line 1", 2, 3, or 4.
b) Enter the x-value at which the line is to be displayed.
4. To define a horizontal line:
a) Select "Horizontal Line 1" or 2.
b) Enter the y-value at which the line is to be displayed.
10.5.2 Limit lines
Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or
above specified values.
● Basics on limit lines...............................................................................................266
● Limit line settings and functions............................................................................ 270
● How to define limit lines........................................................................................ 277
● Reference: limit line file format..............................................................................281
10.5.2.1 Basics on limit lines
Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in
the result diagram which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper
limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device
under test (DUT). When transmitting information in TDMA systems (e.g. GSM), the
amplitude of the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified
tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then,
the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations
of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The R&S ESW supports limit lines with a maximum of 200 data points. Eight of the limit
lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of limit
lines stored in the <instrument> is only limited by the capacity of the storage device
used.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 266
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evalua-
tion in other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can
also be imported to the R&S ESW for other measurements.
Compatibility
Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings, if the following
applies:
● The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting.
● The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep-
tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other.
Validity
Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated:
● Each limit line must consist of a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points.
● The frequencies/times for each data point must be defined in ascending order;
however, for any single frequency or time, two data points may be entered (to
define a vertical segment of a limit line).
● Gaps in frequency or time are not allowed. If gaps are desired, two separate limit
lines must be defined and then both enabled.
● The entered frequencies or times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S ESW.
A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The minimum
frequency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For
the time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed
range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
Figure 10-8: Example for an upper limit line
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 267
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Limits and Margins
Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal. A
margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It
can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated
by a separate line in the display, but if it is violated, a warning is displayed. Margins are
defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line.
To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit, whereas to
check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit.
Limits can be defined relative to the reference level, the beginning of the time scale, or
the center frequency, or as absolute values.
Relative scaling is suitable, for example, if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero
span, or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain.
Thresholds
If the y-axis for the limit line data points uses relative scaling, an additional absolute
threshold can be defined for the limit check. In this case, both the threshold value and
the relative limit line must be exceeded before a violation occurs.
Offsets and Shifting
A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Two different
methods to do so are available:
● An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values
or positions of the individual data points. This option is only available if relative
scaling is used.
Thus, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line
which has been shifted horizontally or vertically.
● Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points
changes the line configuration, thus changing the position of the line in the dia-
gram.
Limit Check Results
A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated
("Visibility" setting). Only the specified "Traces to be Checked" are compared with the
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 268
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
active limit lines. The status of the limit check for each limit line is indicated in the dia-
gram. If a violation occurs, the limit check status is set to "MARG" for a margin viola-
tion, or to"Fail" for a limit violation.
Figure 10-9: Margin violation for limit check
Figure 10-10: Limit violation for limit check
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 269
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Storing and Recalling Limit Lines
Limit lines can be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for
other measurements at a later time (see Chapter 11.3, "Storing and recalling instru-
ment settings and measurement data", on page 285). Note, however, that any changes
made to the limit lines after storing the configuration file cannot be restored and will be
overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled. Always remem-
ber to store the settings again after changing the limit line values.
After recalling measurement settings, the limit line values applied to the measurement
may be different to those displayed in the "Limit Lines" dialog box; see "Saving and
recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 287.
10.5.2.2 Limit line settings and functions
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines"
Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R&S ESW. Many more can
be stored on the instrument.
Stored limit line settings
When storing and recalling limit line settings, consider the information provided in "Sav-
ing and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 287.
● Limit line management.......................................................................................... 270
● Limit line details.....................................................................................................273
Limit line management
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 270
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
For the limit line overview, the R&S ESW searches for all stored limit lines with the file
extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview
allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current
measurement.
For details on settings for individual lines see "Limit line details" on page 273.
For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 10.5.2.1, "Basics on limit lines",
on page 266.
Name...........................................................................................................................271
Unit..............................................................................................................................272
Compatibility................................................................................................................272
Visibility....................................................................................................................... 272
Traces to be Checked................................................................................................. 272
Comment.....................................................................................................................272
Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)..................................................................... 272
└ Show Lines for all Modes..............................................................................272
X-Offset....................................................................................................................... 272
Y-Offset....................................................................................................................... 273
Limit Check................................................................................................................. 273
Create New Line......................................................................................................... 273
Edit Line...................................................................................................................... 273
Copy Line.................................................................................................................... 273
Delete Line.................................................................................................................. 273
Disable All Lines..........................................................................................................273
Name
The name of the stored limit line.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 271
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Unit
The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the limit line are defined.
Compatibility
Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement
settings.
For more information on which conditions a limit line must fulfill to be compatible, see
"Compatibility" on page 267.
Visibility
Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram. Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the
same time. Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe on page 616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe on page 618
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive? on page 614
Traces to be Checked
Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines. As
soon as a trace to be checked is defined, the assigned limit line is active. One limit line
can be activated for several traces simultaneously. If any of the "Traces to be
Checked" violate any of the active limit lines, a message is indicated in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 617
Comment
An optional description of the limit line.
Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)
Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview.
"Show Com- Only compatible lines
patible" Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility
setting.
"Show All" All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits sub-
folder of the main installation folder.
(if not restricted by "Show Lines for all Modes" setting).
Show Lines for all Modes ← Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)
If activated (default), limit lines from all applications are displayed. Otherwise, only
lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed.
Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are
lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application. In this case a warning
is displayed when you try to store the limit line.
X-Offset
Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times (x-axis) hori-
zontally.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 272
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values
for the x-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet on page 615
Y-Offset
Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as
volt) vertically.
This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values
for the y-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet on page 616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet on page 618
Limit Check
Turns limit checks for pre-measurement on and off.
Create New Line
Creates a new limit line.
Edit Line
Edit an existing limit line configuration.
Copy Line
Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY on page 615
Delete Line
Delete the selected limit line configuration.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete on page 615
Disable All Lines
Disable all limit lines in one step.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 616
Limit line details
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines" > "New" / "Edit" / "Copy To"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 273
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Name...........................................................................................................................274
Comment.....................................................................................................................274
Threshold.................................................................................................................... 274
Margin......................................................................................................................... 275
X-Axis..........................................................................................................................275
Y-Axis.......................................................................................................................... 275
Data Points..................................................................................................................275
Insert Value................................................................................................................. 276
Delete Value................................................................................................................276
Shift x.......................................................................................................................... 276
Shift y.......................................................................................................................... 276
Save............................................................................................................................ 276
Import.......................................................................................................................... 276
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................276
Export..........................................................................................................................276
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................277
Name
Defines the limit line name. All names must be compatible with Windows conventions
for file names. The limit line data is stored under this name (with a .LIN extension).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME on page 624
Comment
Defines an optional comment for the limit line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent on page 620
Threshold
Defines an absolute threshold value (only for relative scaling of the y-axis).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 274
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold on page 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold on page 626
Margin
Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin on page 622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin on page 625
X-Axis
Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined.
Includes the following settings:
● Unit:
– "Hz": for frequency domain
– "s": for time domain
● Scaling mode: absolute or relative values
For relative values, the frequencies are referred to the currently set center fre-
quency. In the time domain, the left boundary of the diagram is used as the refer-
ence.
● Scaling: linear or logarithmic
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE on page 621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain on page 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing on page 621
Y-Axis
Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined.
Includes the following settings:
● Level unit
● Scaling mode: absolute or relative (dB/%) values
Relative limit values refer to the reference level.
● Limit type: upper or lower limit; values must stay above the lower limit and below
the upper limit to pass the limit check
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE on page 622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE on page 625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing on page 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing on page 626
Data Points
Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points. Each
data point is defined by its position (x-axis) and value (y-value). Data points must be
defined in ascending order. The same position can have two different values.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 275
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] on page 624
Insert Value
Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dia-
log box.
Delete Value
Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.
Shift x
Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width (as opposed
to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see "X-Offset" on page 272).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt on page 621
Shift y
Shifts the y-value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width (as opposed to
an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see "Y-Offset" on page 273).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt on page 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt on page 625
Save
Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the "Name" field.
Import
Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the selected file in .CSV
format.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the
R&S ESW.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit on page 618
File Explorer ← Import
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
Export
Opens a file selection dialog box and stores the currently displayed limit line to the
defined file in .CSV format.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 276
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
The limit line can be imported again later by the R&S ESW for use in other measure-
ments.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit on page 619
File Explorer ← Export
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
10.5.2.3 How to define limit lines
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines"
The following tasks are described here:
● "How to find compatible limit lines" on page 277
● "How to activate and deactivate a limit check" on page 277
● "How to edit existing limit lines" on page 278
● "How to copy an existing limit line" on page 278
● "How to delete an existing limit line" on page 278
● "How to configure a new limit line" on page 278
● "How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally" on page 279
How to find compatible limit lines
► In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible".
All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the
main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current mea-
surement settings are displayed in the overview.
How to activate and deactivate a limit check
A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated.
1. To activate a limit check:
Select the "Check Traces" setting for a limit line in the overview and select the
trace numbers to be included in the limit check. One limit line can be assigned to
several traces.
The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines. The
status of the limit check is indicated in the diagram.
2. To deactivate a limit line, deactivate all "Traces to be Checked" for it.
To deactivate all limit lines at once, select the "Disable All Lines" button.
The limit checks for the deactivated limit lines are stopped and the results are
removed form the display.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 277
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
How to edit existing limit lines
Existing limit line configurations can be edited.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the "Edit" button.
3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 278.
4. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
If the limit line is active, the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram.
How to copy an existing limit line
1. In the dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the"Line Config" "Copy To" button.
3. Define a new name to create a new limit with the same configuration as the source
line.
4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 278.
5. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to delete an existing limit line
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the "Delete" button.
3. Confirm the message.
The limit line and the results of the limit check are deleted.
How to configure a new limit line
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "New" button.
The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis-
played in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each
change to the configuration.
2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new limit line.
3. Define the x-axis configuration:
● Time domain or frequency domain
● Absolute or relative limits
● Linear or logarithmic scaling
4. Define the y-axis configuration:
● Level unit
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 278
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
● Absolute or relative limits
● Upper or lower limit line
5. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 200:
a) Select "Insert Value".
b) Define the x-value ("Position") and y-value ("Value") of the first data point.
c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point.
d) Repeat this to insert all other data points.
To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then
"Insert Value".
To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after
the last entry and then select "Insert Value".
To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value".
6. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If neces-
sary, correct individual data points or add or delete some.
If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the "Shift x" or
"Shift y" button and defining the shift width.
7. Optionally, define a "Margin" at a fixed distance to the limit line.
The margin must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the dia-
gram or preview area.
8. Optionally, if the y-axis uses relative scaling, define an absolute "Threshold" as an
additional criteria for a violation.
9. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally
A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new limit
line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted
horizontally.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select the "X-Off-
set" button and enter an offset value.
To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction, select the "Y-Offset"
button and enter an offset value.
3. To shift the individual data points of a limit line by a fixed value (all at once):
a) Select the "Edit" button.
b) In the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box, select the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and
define the shift width.
c) Save the shifted data points by selecting the "Save" button.
If activated, the limit line is shifted in the diagram.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 279
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
How to export a limit line
Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs
or to be imported later for other measurements.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Define the limit line as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 278.
4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file.
You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the
R&S ESW first.
5. Select a file name and location for the limit line.
6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file.
7. Select "Save".
The limit line is stored to a file with the specified name and the extension .CSV.
For details on the file format see Chapter 10.5.2.4, "Reference: limit line file for-
mat", on page 281.
How to import a limit line
Limit line configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum of
required data can be imported to the R&S ESW.
For details on the required file format see Chapter 10.5.2.4, "Reference: limit line file
format", on page 281.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Select "Import" to load a limit line from a file.
You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the
R&S ESW first.
4. Select the file name of the limit line.
5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.
6. Select "Select".
The limit line is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit Limit Line"
dialog box.
7. Activate the limit line as described in "How to activate and deactivate a limit check"
on page 277.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 280
R&S®ESW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines
10.5.2.4 Reference: limit line file format
Limit line data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in
other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be
imported to the R&S ESW for other measurements (see "How to import a limit line"
on page 280). This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for
limit lines. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of
the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see "Deci-
mal Separator" on page 235).
Table 10-4: ASCII file format for limit line files
File contents Description
Header data
sep=; Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for
example)
Type;RS_LimitLineDefinition; Type of data
FileFormatVersion;1.00; File format version
Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage
OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer Application the limit line was created for
Name;RELFREQ1 Limit line name
Comment;Defines the upper limit line Description of limit line
Mode;UPPER Type of limit line (upper, lower)
ThresholdUnit;LEVEL_DBM Unit of threshold value
ThresholdValue;-200 Threshold value
MarginValue;0 Margin value
XAxisScaling;LINEAR Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
XAxisUnit;FREQ_HZ Unit of x values
XAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of x-axis (absolute or relative)
YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values
YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)
NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by
Data section for individual data points
-4500000000;-50 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line
-2000000000;-30
-1000000000;0
0;-30
2500000000;-50
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 281
R&S®ESW Data management
Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset)
11 Data management
The R&S ESW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and
export measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store or print the measure-
ment results displayed on the screen.
General storage and import/export functions are available via the toolbar. Some special
storage functions are (also) available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding
menus, for example trace data export.
● Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset)........................................ 282
● Protecting data using the secure user mode.........................................................283
● Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data........................ 285
● Import/export functions..........................................................................................297
● I/Q data import and export.................................................................................... 299
● Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings..................... 309
● Working with test reports.......................................................................................324
11.1 Restoring the default instrument configuration (pre-
set)
When delivered, the R&S ESW has a default configuration. You can restore this
defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements. This is
often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement
results arise.
Factory default configuration
The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected
against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for
the instrument.
Alternatively to the factory default settings, you can define user-specific recall settings
to be restored after a preset or reboot, see "To recall settings automatically after preset
or reboot" on page 297.
To restore the default instrument configuration for all channels at once
► Press the [PRESET] key.
After you use the [PRESET] function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any
actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/REDO]
keys.
Remote command:
*RST or SYSTem:PRESet
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 282
R&S®ESW Data management
Protecting data using the secure user mode
To restore the default configuration for a single channel
The default measurement settings can also be reset for an individual channel only,
rather than resetting the entire instrument.
► In the "Overview", select the "Preset Channel" button.
The factory default settings are restored to the current channel. Note that a user-
defined recall settings file is NOT restored.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 644
11.2 Protecting data using the secure user mode
During normal operation, the R&S ESW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating
system, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data cre-
ated during operation.
Redirecting storage to volatile memory
Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the R&S ESW permanently, the
secure user mode was introduced (option R&S ESW-K33). In secure user mode, the
instrument’s solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to
memory permanently. Data that the R&S ESW normally stores on the solid-state drive
is redirected to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instru-
ment is switched off. This data includes:
● Windows operating system files
● Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state
● Self-alignment data
● General instrument settings such as the IP address
● Measurement settings
● User data created during operation
(see also Table 11-1)
● Any data created by other applications installed on the R&S ESW, for example, text
editors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation.
However, when the instrument’s power is switched off, all data in this memory is
cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed
state when switched on.
To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an exter-
nal storage device, such as a memory stick.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 283
R&S®ESW Data management
Protecting data using the secure user mode
Limited storage space
The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB.
Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage
space is still available.
Storing required data permanently
Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S ESW must be
stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This
includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.
Self-alignment data
Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature
changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new
self-alignment at the start of each new session on the R&S ESW.
Windows updates
In secure user mode, in rare cases, Windows updates trigger a reboot. We recommend
using secure user mode on R&S ESW-K33 only in private LAN without access to the
internet or disconnected to LAN to avoid unwanted Windows updates. In preparation
for Windows updates, disable secure user mode temporarily.
Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in
secure user mode:
● Firmware update
● Activating a new option key
Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have admin-
istrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general
instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument
setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
Activating and deactivating secure user mode
Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user
mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then log-
ged on to the R&S ESW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure
user mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 284
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Secure passwords
By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "Secure-
User" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after
installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to
improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the pass-
words, it is strongly recommended that you do so.
You can change the password in Microsoft Windows for any user at any time via:
"Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"
To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with
administrator rights must log on.
Switching users when using the auto-login function
In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account
name and password.
The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when
another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available.
For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the
general system configuration settings (see "SecureUser Mode" on page 377).
Remote control
Initially after installation of the R&S ESW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
(See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].)
Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.
11.3 Storing and recalling instrument settings and mea-
surement data
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar
Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a measurement you performed under spe-
cific conditions on the instrument. Or you want to evaluate imported data in another
application on the R&S ESW and would like to restore the measurement settings
applied during measurement. In these cases, you can store and recall instrument and
measurement settings, and possibly other related measurement data.
Two different methods are available for managing instrument settings:
● Quick Save/Quick Recall - a defined set of instrument settings or channels are
stored or recalled quickly in just one step
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 285
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
● Configurable Save/Recall - a user-defined set of instrument settings or channels
are stored to a definable storage location
Restrictions when recalling measurement settings
When recalling a saved configuration file, the following restrictions apply:
● The R&S ESW must support the frequency range defined in the configuration file.
● Configuration files created on a R&S ESW with certain options in use do not work
on an R&S ESW without these options.
● Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version.
● Files created on an instrument other than the R&S ESW do not work on the
R&S ESW.
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode
Be sure to store instrument settings that you require beyond the current session before
SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure
user mode", on page 36.
Settings that are saved via QuickSave in secure user mode are only available during
the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S ESW, the data is
cleared.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 286
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings
If a transducer factors or limit lines file was in use when the save set was stored (with
the save item "Current Settings" only) the R&S ESW assumes that these transducer
factors or limit lines values should remain valid after every recall of that save set. Thus,
even if the transducer factors or limit lines file is changed and the original save set file
is recalled later, the originally stored transducer factors or limit lines values are recalled
and applied to the measurement. In the "Edit" transducer factors or limit lines dialog
box, however, the changed transducer factors or limit lines file values are displayed, as
no updated transducer factors or limit lines file was loaded.
The same applies to limit line settings.
The same applies to integrated measurements' weighting filter.
If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set, you
must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box (see Chapter 12.4.2, "Working with transducers", on page 353)
and toggle the "X-Axis" option from "Lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the
transducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed transducer values are
applied to the current measurement. Now you can create a new save set with the
updated transducer values.
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set, you
must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box (see Chapter 10.5.2.2, "Limit line settings and functions",
on page 270) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that change, the limit line file is auto-
matically reloaded, and the changed limit values are applied to the current measure-
ment. Now a new save set with the updated limit values can be created.
● Quick save/quick recall......................................................................................... 287
● Configurable storage and recall............................................................................ 290
● How to save and load instrument settings............................................................ 295
11.3.1 Quick save/quick recall
The "Quick Save" and "Quick Recall" functions allow you to store instrument settings or
channels very easily and quickly in one step. Up to ten different sets of settings can be
stored to or recalled from "save sets". Each save set is identified by its storage date
and type (instrument or specific "Channel") in the display. The save sets are stored in
the C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave directory, in files named QuickSave1.dfl to
QuickSave10.dfl. Only the current measurement settings are stored, not any addi-
tional data such as traces, limit line or transducer files (see Chapter 11.3.2.1, "Stored
data types", on page 290).
Source calibration files for an optional external generator, if available, are included.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 287
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode
Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are stored to the SDRAM,
and are only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off
on the R&S ESW, the data is cleared (see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the
secure user mode", on page 36).
During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instru-
ment. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.
If a channel with the same name as the "Channel" to be restored is already active, the
name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number:
11.3.1.1 Quick save / quick recall settings
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Quick Save" / "Quick Recall"
Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 288
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10................................................................................ 289
└ Rename........................................................................................................ 289
└ Write Protection............................................................................................ 289
Storage Type (Save only)............................................................................................289
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 290
QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10
Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the
time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10" placeholder is replaced by a
label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type.
Right-click on one of the QuickSave buttons to display a context menu with additional
functions for the save set.
During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instru-
ment. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are only available during
the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S ESW, the data is
cleared (see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36).
Rename ← QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10
Displays an input field to rename the save set, if write protection is disabled.
Write Protection ← QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10
Enables or disables write protection for the save set. If enabled, the save set cannot be
renamed or overwritten.
Storage Type (Save only)
Defines which type of settings are stored in the save set.
"Instrument The instrument settings for all currently active "Channel"s are stored.
with all Chan-
nels"
"Current Chan- Only the instrument settings for the currently selected measurement
nel" "Channel"s are stored.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 289
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Recall
Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings
file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, a new channel with the stored set-
tings is activated, otherwise all "Channel"s and instrument settings are overwritten with
the stored settings.
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/
REDO] keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 641
11.3.2 Configurable storage and recall
The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings
are stored, and where the settings file is stored to. Any settings file can be selected for
recall.
● Stored data types..................................................................................................290
● Storage location and filename...............................................................................290
● Save and recall dialog boxes................................................................................ 291
● Startup recall settings............................................................................................294
11.3.2.1 Stored data types
The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog
box on the R&S ESW:
Table 11-1: Items that can be stored to files
Item Description
Current Settings Current instrument and measurement settings.
All Transducers All transducer factor files.
(Note: Restoring a saveset overwrites transducer factor files on the hard disk
that have the same name as those in the saveset. For more information, see
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 287.)
All Traces All active traces.
All Limit Lines All limit line files.
Spectrograms Spectrogram trace data (only available if spectrogram display is currently
active).
Peak List Information of the peak list.
11.3.2.2 Storage location and filename
The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net-
work drive. The operating system, firmware and stored instrument settings are located
on drive C.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 290
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Saving instrument settings in secure user mode
In secure user mode all data is stored to the SDRAM, and is only available during the
current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the R&S ESW, the data is
cleared (see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36).
Other storage locations cannot be selected in this mode.
The storage location and filename are selected in a file selection dialog box which is
displayed when you perform a storage function.
By default, the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under-
score and three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. In the example, the base name is
limit_lines. The base name can contain characters, numbers and underscores.
The file extension dfl is added automatically. The default folder for settings files is
C:\R_S\INSTR\Save.
File name restrictions
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
11.3.2.3 Save and recall dialog boxes
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Save" / "Recall"
Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 291
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................292
File Name....................................................................................................................293
Comment.....................................................................................................................293
File Explorer................................................................................................................ 293
File Type......................................................................................................................293
Items:.......................................................................................................................... 293
Save File..................................................................................................................... 293
Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel....................................................294
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files
Select the storage location of the file on the <instrument> or an external drive.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog on page 632
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 292
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
File Name
Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Chapter 11.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 290.
Comment
An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COMMent on page 633
File Explorer
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
File Type
Determines whether the global instrument settings with all "Channel"s are stored or
recalled, or the current "Channel" settings only.
Items:
Defines which data and settings are stored or are recalled. Depending on the "File
Type", either channels only, or global settings are available. Which items are available
also depends on the installed options (see also Chapter 11.3.2.1, "Stored data types",
on page 290).
Depending on the application, items may or may not be available. For example, saving
spectrogram data is only possible in applications that feature a spectrogram.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL on page 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault on page 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE on page 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] on page 640
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 640
Save File
Saves the settings file with the defined filename.
Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instru-
ment are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory
limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is
still available.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 293
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 642
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT on page 643
Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel
Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings
file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, select "Recall in New Channel" to
activate a new channel with the stored settings. Select "Recall in Current Channel" to
replace the current "Channel" settings.
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/
REDO] keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 641
11.3.2.4 Startup recall settings
Access: "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Startup Recall"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 294
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
Startup Recall..............................................................................................................295
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................295
File Name....................................................................................................................295
Comment.....................................................................................................................295
Startup Recall
Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in
the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset. If deactivated,
the default settings are loaded.
Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function,
not "Channel" files.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO on page 641
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files
Select the storage location of the file on the <instrument> or an external drive.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog on page 632
File Name
Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Chapter 11.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 290.
Comment
An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COMMent on page 633
11.3.3 How to save and load instrument settings
Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can
repeat the measurement with the same settings. Optionally, user-defined measurement
settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instrument.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 295
R&S®ESW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data
To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function
1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.
2. Select whether the instrument settings for all"Channel"s are stored, or only those
for the current"Channel".
3. Select one of the save sets in which the settings are stored ("QuickSaveX").
The selected settings are stored to the file
C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave\QuickSaveX.dfl.
Note: If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file,
remember to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored
and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
4. To restore the settings, select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.
5. Select the save set in which the settings were stored ("QuickSaveX").
The selected settings are restored to the instrument or channel.
To save configurable instrument settings
1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.
2. In the "Save" dialog box, switch to the "Save" tab.
3. In the file selection dialog box, select a filename and storage location for the set-
tings file.
4. Optionally, define a comment to describe the stored settings.
5. Select whether the instrument settings for all"Channel"s are stored, or only those
for the current"Channel".
6. Select the items to be saved with the settings. Either the settings for the currently
selected "Channel" only, or the settings for all "Channel"s can be stored. Various
other items, such as lines or traces etc., can be stored as well (see Chap-
ter 11.3.2.1, "Stored data types", on page 290).
7. Select "Save".
A file with the defined name and path and the extension .dfl is created.
If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file, remember
to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be
overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
To recall configurable instrument settings
1. Select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 296
R&S®ESW Data management
Import/export functions
2. In the "Recall" dialog box, switch to the "Recall" tab.
3. In the file selection dialog box, select the filename and storage location of the set-
tings file.
Note: The "File Type" indicates whether the file contains instrument settings for
all"Channel"s, or only those for the current "Channel".
4. If several items were saved, select which items are restored.
5. If a "Channel" was saved, select whether the settings will replace the settings in the
current "Channel", or whether a new channel with the saved settings will be
opened.
6. Select "Recall".
The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and
you can repeat the measurement with the same settings.
Note that any changes made to the settings after storing the configuration file will
be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot
You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument.
1. Configure the settings as required and save them as described in "To save configu-
rable instrument settings" on page 296.
2. In the "Save/Recall" menu, select "Startup Recall".
3. From the file selection dialog box, select the recall settings to restore.
4. Select "Select File".
5. Set "Startup Recall" to "On".
Now when you press the [PRESET] key or reboot the instrument, the defined set-
tings will be restored.
6. To restore the factory preset settings, set "Startup Recall" to "Off".
11.4 Import/export functions
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Import" / "Export"
The R&S ESW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed
measurements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external
applications. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format
file (ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported
to the R&S ESW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application):
● Trace data
● Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 297
R&S®ESW Data management
Import/export functions
● I/Q data
I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such
as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications.
See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.
These functions are only available if no measurement is running.
In particular, if a continuous measurement is running, the import/export functions are
not available.
Export..........................................................................................................................298
└ Export Configuration..................................................................................... 298
└ I/Q Export......................................................................................................298
└ File Explorer........................................................................................299
Export
Access: "Save/Recall" > Export
Opens a submenu to configure data export.
Export Configuration ← Export
Opens the "Traces" dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings.
Chapter 10.3.3, "Trace export", on page 234
I/Q Export ← Export
Opens a file selection dialog box to define an export file name to which the I/Q data is
stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
It is only available in applications that process I/Q data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or
other optional applications.
For details, see the description in the R&S ESW I/Q Analyzer User Manual ("Importing
and Exporting I/Q Data").
Note: Storing large amounts of I/Q data (several Gigabytes) can exceed the available
(internal) storage space on the R&S ESW. In this case, it can be necessary to use an
external storage medium.
Note: Secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 298
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
File Explorer ← I/Q Export ← Export
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
11.5 I/Q data import and export
Baseband signals mostly occur as so-called complex baseband signals, i.e. a signal
representation that consists of two channels; the in phase (I) and the quadrature (Q)
channel. Such signals are referred to as I/Q signals. I/Q signals are useful because the
specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed. The complete modulation information
and even distortion that originates from the RF, IF or baseband domains can be ana-
lyzed in the I/Q baseband.
Importing and exporting I/Q signals is useful for various applications:
● Generating and saving I/Q signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in
external software tools to analyze them with the R&S ESW later
● Capturing and saving I/Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana-
lyze them with the R&S ESW or an external software tool later
As opposed to storing trace data, which may be averaged or restricted to peak values,
I/Q data is stored as it was captured, without further processing. The data is stored as
complex values in 32-bit floating-point format. Multi-channel data is not supported. The
I/Q data is stored in a format with the file extension .iq.tar. For a detailed descrip-
tion see Chapter 11.5.2, "I/Q data file format (iq-tar)", on page 301.
An application note on converting Rohde & Schwarz I/Q data files is available from the
Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF85: Converting R&S I/Q data files
The import and export functions are available in the "Save/Recall" menu which is dis-
played when you select the "Save" or "Open" icon in the toolbar.
● Import/export functions..........................................................................................299
● I/Q data file format (iq-tar)..................................................................................... 301
11.5.1 Import/export functions
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Import" / "Export"
The R&S ESW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed
measurements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external
applications. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format
file (ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported
to the R&S ESW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 299
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application):
● Trace data
● Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc.
● I/Q data (in applications that process I/Q data)
The following data types can be imported (depending on the application):
● I/Q data (in applications that process I/Q data)
I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such
as the I/Q analyzer or other optional applications.
See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.
These functions are only available if no measurement is running.
In particular, if a continuous measurement is active, the import/export functions are not
available.
Import.......................................................................................................................... 300
Export..........................................................................................................................300
└ Export Configuration..................................................................................... 300
└ I/Q Export......................................................................................................300
└ File Explorer........................................................................................301
Import
Access: "Save/Recall" > Import
Provides functions to import data.
Export
Access: "Save/Recall" > Export
Opens a submenu to configure data export.
Export Configuration ← Export
Opens the "Traces" dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings.
Chapter 10.3.3, "Trace export", on page 234
I/Q Export ← Export
Opens a file selection dialog box to define an export file name to which the I/Q data is
stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
It is only available in applications that process I/Q data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or
other optional applications.
For details, see the description in the R&S ESW I/Q Analyzer User Manual ("Importing
and Exporting I/Q Data").
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 300
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
Note: Storing large amounts of I/Q data (several Gigabytes) can exceed the available
(internal) storage space on the R&S ESW. In this case, it can be necessary to use an
external storage medium.
Note: Secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
File Explorer ← I/Q Export ← Export
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported
11.5.2 I/Q data file format (iq-tar)
I/Q data is packed in a file with the extension .iq.tar. An iq-tar file contains I/Q
data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the
source of data, e.g. the sample rate. The objective of the iq-tar file format is to sepa-
rate I/Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file. In addi-
tion, the file format allows you to include user-specific data and to preview the I/Q data
in a web browser (not supported by all web browsers).
The iq-tar container packs several files into a single .tar archive file. Files in .tar
format can be unpacked using standard archive tools (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Comparison_of_file_archivers) available for most operating systems. The advantage
of .tar files is that the archived files inside the .tar file are not changed (not com-
pressed) and thus it is possible to read the I/Q data directly within the archive without
the need to unpack (untar) the .tar file first.
Sample iq-tar files
Some sample iq-tar files are provided in the C:\R_S\Instr\User\Demo\ direc-
tory on the R&S ESW.
An application note on converting Rohde & Schwarz I/Q data files is available from the
Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF85: Converting R&S I/Q data files
Contained files
An iq-tar file must contain the following files:
● I/Q parameter XML file, e.g. xyz.xml
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 301
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
Contains meta information about the I/Q data (e.g. sample rate). The filename can
be defined freely, but there must be only one single I/Q parameter XML file inside
an iq-tar file.
● I/Q data binary file, e.g. xyz.complex.float32
Contains the binary I/Q data of all channels. There must be only one single I/Q
data binary file inside an iq-tar file.
Optionally, an iq-tar file can contain the following file:
● I/Q preview XSLT file, e.g. open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt
Contains a stylesheet to display the I/Q parameter XML file and a preview of the
I/Q data in a web browser (not supported by all web browsers).
A sample stylesheet is available at http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/file/
open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt.
● I/Q parameter XML file specification..................................................................... 302
● I/Q data binary file................................................................................................. 306
11.5.2.1 I/Q parameter XML file specification
The content of the I/Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema
RsIqTar.xsd available at: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/file/RsIqTar.xsd.
In particular, the order of the XML elements must be respected, i.e. iq-tar uses an
"ordered XML schema". For your own implementation of the iq-tar file format make
sure to validate your XML file against the given schema.
The following example shows an I/Q parameter XML file. The XML elements and attrib-
utes are explained in the following sections.
Sample I/Q parameter XML file: xyz.xml
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl"
href="open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt"?>
<RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat fileFormatVersion="1"
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="RsIqTar.xsd"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<Name>R&S ESW</Name>
<Comment>Here is a comment</Comment>
<DateTime>2011-01-24T14:02:49</DateTime>
<Samples>68751</Samples>
<Clock unit="Hz">6.5e+006</Clock>
<Format>complex</Format>
<DataType>float32</DataType>
<ScalingFactor unit="V">1</ScalingFactor>
<NumberOfChannels>1</NumberOfChannels>
<DataFilename>xyz.complex.float32</DataFilename>
<UserData>
<UserDefinedElement>Example</UserDefinedElement>
</UserData>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 302
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
<PreviewData>...</PreviewData>
</RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat>
Minimum data elements
The following data elements are the minimum required for a valid iq-tar file. They
are always provided by an iq-tar file export from a Rohde & Schwarz product. If not
specified otherwise, it must be available in all iq-tar files used to import data to a
Rohde & Schwarz product.
Element Possible Values Description
<RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat> - The root element of the XML file. It must contain the attribute
fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format
definition.
<Name> string Optional: describes the device or application that created the file.
<Comment> string Optional: contains text that further describes the contents of the
file.
<DateTime> yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss Contains the date and time of the creation of the file. Its type is
xs:dateTime (see RsIqTar.xsd).
<Samples> integer Contains the number of samples of the I/Q data. For multi-chan-
nel signals all channels have the same number of samples. One
sample can be:
● A complex number represented as a pair of I and Q values
● A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and
phase values
● A real number represented as a single real value
See also <Format> element.
<Clock> double Contains the clock frequency in Hz, i.e. the sample rate of the I/Q
data. A signal generator typically outputs the I/Q data at a rate
that equals the clock frequency. If the I/Q data was captured with
a signal analyzer, the signal analyzer used the clock frequency as
the sample rate. The attribute unit must be set to "Hz".
<Format> complex | real | polar Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I/Q data binary file
(see <DataFilename> element). Every sample must be in the
same format. The format can be one of the following:
● complex: Complex number in cartesian format, i.e. I and Q
values interleaved. I and Q are unitless
● real: Real number (unitless)
● polar: Complex number in polar format, i.e. magnitude
(unitless) and phase (rad) values interleaved. Requires
DataType = float32 or float64
<DataType> int8 | int16 | int32 | float32 | Specifies the binary format used for samples in the I/Q data
float64 binary file (see <DataFilename> element and Chapter 11.5.2.2,
"I/Q data binary file", on page 306). The following data types are
allowed:
● int8: 8 bit signed integer data
● int16: 16 bit signed integer data
● int32: 32 bit signed integer data
● float32: 32 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)
● float64: 64 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 303
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
Element Possible Values Description
<ScalingFactor> double Optional: describes how the binary data can be transformed into
values in the unit Volt. The binary I/Q data itself has no unit. To
get an I/Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be
multiplied by the value of the <ScalingFactor>. For polar data
only the magnitude value has to be multiplied. For multi-channel
signals the <ScalingFactor> must be applied to all channels.
The attribute unit must be set to "V".
The <ScalingFactor> must be > 0. If the <ScalingFactor>
element is not defined, a value of 1 V is assumed.
<NumberOfChannels> integer Optional: specifies the number of channels, e.g. of a MIMO sig-
nal, contained in the I/Q data binary file. For multi-channels, the
I/Q samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within
the I/Q data file (see Chapter 11.5.2.2, "I/Q data binary file",
on page 306). If the <NumberOfChannels> element is not
defined, one channel is assumed.
<DataFilename> Contains the filename of the I/Q data binary file that is part of the
iq-tar file.
It is recommended that the filename uses the following conven-
tion:
<xyz>.<Format>.<Channels>ch.<Type>
● <xyz> = a valid Windows file name
● <Format> = complex, polar or real (see Format element)
● <Channels> = Number of channels (see
NumberOfChannels element)
● <Type> = float32, float64, int8, int16, int32 or int64 (see
DataType element)
Examples:
● xyz.complex.1ch.float32
● xyz.polar.1ch.float64
● xyz.real.1ch.int16
● xyz.complex.16ch.int8
<UserData> xml Optional: contains user, application or device-specific XML data
which is not part of the iq-tar specification. This element can
be used to store additional information, e.g. the hardware configu-
ration. User data must be valid XML content.
<PreviewData> xml Optional: contains further XML elements that provide a preview of
the I/Q data. The preview data is determined by the routine that
saves an iq-tar file (e.g. R&S ESW). For the definition of this
element refer to the RsIqTar.xsd schema. Note that the pre-
view can be only displayed by current web browsers that have
JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet
open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt is available.
Example
The following example demonstrates the XML description inside the iq-tar file. Note
that this preview is not supported by all web browsers.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 304
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
Open the xml file in a web browser. If the stylesheet
open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt is in the same directory, the web
browser displays the xml file in a readable format.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 305
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl" href="open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt"?>
<RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat fileFormatVersion="1" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=
"http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/file/RsIqTar.xsd" xmlns:xsi=
"http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<Name>VSE_1.10a 29 Beta</Name>
<Comment></Comment>
<DateTime>2015-02-19T15:24:58</DateTime>
<Samples>1301</Samples>
<Clock unit="Hz">32000000</Clock>
<Format>complex</Format>
<DataType>float32</DataType>
<ScalingFactor unit="V">1</ScalingFactor>
<NumberOfChannels>1</NumberOfChannels>
<DataFilename>File.complex.1ch.float32</DataFilename>
<UserData>
<RohdeSchwarz>
<DataImportExport_MandatoryData>
<ChannelNames>
<ChannelName>IQ Analyzer</ChannelName>
</ChannelNames>
<CenterFrequency unit="Hz">0</CenterFrequency>
</DataImportExport_MandatoryData>
<DataImportExport_OptionalData>
<Key name="Ch1_NumberOfPostSamples">150</Key>
<Key name="Ch1_NumberOfPreSamples">150</Key>
</DataImportExport_OptionalData>
</RohdeSchwarz>
</UserData>
</RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat>
Example: ScalingFactor
Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V
ScalingFactor = 1 V / maximum int16 value = 1 V / 215 = 3.0517578125e-5 V
Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac-
tor
Minimum (negative) int16 value - 215 = - 32768 -1 V
Maximum (positive) int16 value 215-1= 32767 0.999969482421875 V
11.5.2.2 I/Q data binary file
The I/Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified
in the XML file (see <Format> element and <DataType> element). To allow reading
and writing of streamed I/Q data, all data is interleaved, i.e. complex values are inter-
leaved pairs of I and Q values and multi-channel signals contain interleaved (complex)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 306
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
samples for channel 0, channel 1, channel 2 etc. If the <NumberOfChannels> ele-
ment is not defined, one channel is presumed.
Example: Element order for real data (1 channel)
I[0], // Real sample 0
I[1], // Real sample 1
I[2], // Real sample 2
...
Example: Element order for complex cartesian data (1 channel)
I[0], Q[0], // Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0
I[1], Q[1], // Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1
I[2], Q[2], // Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2
...
Example: Element order for complex polar data (1 channel)
Mag[0], Phi[0], // Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0
Mag[1], Phi[1], // Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1
Mag[2], Phi[2], // Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2
...
Example: Element order for complex cartesian data (3 channels)
Complex data: I[channel no][time index], Q[channel no][time index]
I[0][0], Q[0][0], // Channel 0, Complex sample 0
I[1][0], Q[1][0], // Channel 1, Complex sample 0
I[2][0], Q[2][0], // Channel 2, Complex sample 0
I[0][1], Q[0][1], // Channel 0, Complex sample 1
I[1][1], Q[1][1], // Channel 1, Complex sample 1
I[2][1], Q[2][1], // Channel 2, Complex sample 1
I[0][2], Q[0][2], // Channel 0, Complex sample 2
I[1][2], Q[1][2], // Channel 1, Complex sample 2
I[2][2], Q[2][2], // Channel 2, Complex sample 2
...
Example: Element order for complex cartesian data (1 channel)
This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format
using MATLAB®.
% Save vector of complex cartesian I/Q data, i.e. iqiqiq...
N = 100
iq = randn(1,N)+1j*randn(1,N)
fid = fopen('xyz.complex.float32','w');
for k=1:length(iq)
fwrite(fid,single(real(iq(k))),'float32');
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 307
R&S®ESW Data management
I/Q data import and export
fwrite(fid,single(imag(iq(k))),'float32');
end
fclose(fid)
Example: PreviewData in XML
<PreviewData>
<ArrayOfChannel length="1">
<Channel>
<PowerVsTime>
<Min>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-134</float>
<float>-142</float>
...
<float>-140</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Min>
<Max>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-70</float>
<float>-71</float>
...
<float>-69</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Max>
</PowerVsTime>
<Spectrum>
<Min>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-133</float>
<float>-111</float>
...
<float>-111</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Min>
<Max>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-67</float>
<float>-69</float>
...
<float>-70</float>
<float>-69</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Max>
</Spectrum>
<IQ>
<Histogram width="64" height="64">0123456789...0</Histogram>
</IQ>
</Channel>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 308
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
</ArrayOfChannel>
</PreviewData>
11.6 Creating screenshots of current measurement results
and settings
To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently per-
formed measurement, you can create a screenshot of the current display. Screenshots
can either be printed or stored to a file.
● Print and screenshot settings................................................................................309
● How to store or print screenshots of the display................................................... 319
● Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file.......................... 322
11.6.1 Print and screenshot settings
Access: "Print" icon in the toolbar
For step-by-step instructions, see Chapter 11.6.2, "How to store or print screenshots of
the display", on page 319.
Remote commands for these settings are described in Chapter 14.8.4, "Screenshots
and printouts", on page 644.
To print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately, with-
out switching to the "Print" menu, use the "Print immediately" icon in the toolbar.
● Print content settings.............................................................................................309
● Print preview functions.......................................................................................... 312
● Printer settings...................................................................................................... 314
● Page setup............................................................................................................317
● Print color settings.................................................................................................319
11.6.1.1 Print content settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Content" tab
The content settings determine which data is included in the printout.
Note that some content settings are independent of the selected printing device, others
are printing device-specific.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 309
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Print Screenshot..........................................................................................................310
Print Multiple Windows................................................................................................ 311
Comment.....................................................................................................................311
Print Logo.................................................................................................................... 311
Print Page Count......................................................................................................... 311
Select Device 1/2.........................................................................................................311
Print Dialog..................................................................................................................312
Print Date and Time.................................................................................................... 312
Print Screenshot
Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel (or
"MultiView"): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the
channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page. Displayed items belonging to
the software user interface (e.g. softkeys) are not included. The position and size of the
elements in the printout is identical to the display.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 310
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Remote command:
HCOPy:CONTent on page 647
Print Multiple Windows
Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the
current channel (or "MultiView") are available for selection. How many windows are
printed on a single page of the printout is user-definable (see "Windows Per Page"
on page 318).
This option is only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see "Destina-
tion" on page 316). If the Destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard for
the selected printing device, it is automatically changed to be a PDF file.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CONTent on page 647
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe on page 654
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:CHANnel:STATe on page 652
Comment
Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display. Maximum
120 characters are allowed. Up to 60 characters fit in one line. In the first line, a man-
ual line-feed can be forced at any point by entering "@".
The comment is printed in the top left corner of each printout page. If a comment
should not be printed, it must be deleted.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Tip: The current date and time can be inserted automatically, see "Print Date and
Time" on page 312.
Remote command:
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT on page 650
Print Logo
Activates/deactivates the printout of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper
right corner.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Remote command:
DISPlay:LOGO on page 645
Print Page Count
Includes the page number for printouts consisting of multiple windows ("Print Multiple
Windows" on page 311).
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe on page 651
Select Device 1/2
Selects the printing device to be configured.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 311
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected
printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S ESW.
Print Dialog
Includes any currently displayed dialog in the screenshot printout.
This setting is (printing) device-specific and only available if Print Screenshot is
selected.
Print Date and Time
Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout.
This setting is (printing) device-specific.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe on page 654
11.6.1.2 Print preview functions
Access: "Print"
The "Print Preview" of the printout according to the current configuration is available in
all "Print Settings" dialog tabs.
The preview display (not the functions) is device-specific (see "Select Device 1/2"
on page 311).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 312
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Zoom In / Zoom Out.................................................................................................... 313
Fit Page.......................................................................................................................314
Zoom 1:1..................................................................................................................... 314
Page Up / Page Down.................................................................................................314
Print.............................................................................................................................314
Zoom In / Zoom Out
Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the
zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 313
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Fit Page
Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large
as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the
preview, not the printout itself.
Zoom 1:1
Displays the printout in its original size, as it will be printed.
Page Up / Page Down
Depending on the selected contents (see Chapter 11.6.1.1, "Print content settings",
on page 309), the printout can consist of multiple pages. Use these functions to scroll
within the preview to see the individual pages.
Print
Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file (see Chapter 11.6.1.1,
"Print content settings", on page 309).
Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on
the selected printing device and the printing device settings (see Chapter 11.6.1.3,
"Printer settings", on page 314).
If the output is stored to a file, a file selection dialog box is opened to select the file-
name and location. The default path is C:\R_S\Instr\User.
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 650
HCOPy[:IMMediate]:NEXT on page 650
11.6.1.3 Printer settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Printer" tab
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 314
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Printer settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ-
ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura-
tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
Select Device 1/2........................................................................................................ 316
Destination.................................................................................................................. 316
└ Destination: File............................................................................................ 316
└ Destination: Clipboard...................................................................................316
└ Destination: Printer....................................................................................... 316
Suppress File Name Dialog........................................................................................ 316
Printer Name............................................................................................................... 316
Print to file................................................................................................................... 317
Install Printer............................................................................................................... 317
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 315
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Select Device 1/2
Selects the printing device to be configured.
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected
printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S ESW.
Destination
Defines the medium to which the printout is output.
Destination: File ← Destination
Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of
storage, or a default name is used (see Suppress File Name Dialog).
Multiple windows can only be printed to a file in PDF format. If you select an image file
format, the content setting is automatically set to Print Screenshot. Page settings are
not available for image files; however, you can configure the colors used for the
screenshot (see Chapter 11.6.1.5, "Print color settings", on page 319).
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 649
Destination: Clipboard ← Destination
Copies the printout to the clipboard. Since only single pages can be copied, only
screenshots can be copied to this destination, not multiple windows (see Chap-
ter 11.6.1.1, "Print content settings", on page 309). Page settings are not available;
however, you can configure the colors used for the screenshot (see Chapter 11.6.1.5,
"Print color settings", on page 319).
If you select the clipboard as the printing destination, the content setting is automati-
cally set to Print Screenshot.
Remote command:
HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:CLIPboard'
Destination: Printer ← Destination
Sends the printout to the printer selected from the Printer Name list.
Remote command:
HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
Suppress File Name Dialog
If the Destination is a file, the file selection dialog box is not displayed. Instead, the
default storage location and filename are used.
(C:\R_S\Instr\User\ESW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).
Printer Name
Defines the printer to print to if a printer is selected as the Destination.
Any printers detected in the network are listed for selection.
Tip: the printout can also be stored in a print file using the selected printer driver, see
"Print to file" on page 317.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 316
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 655
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 654
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di> on page 655
Print to file
If a printer is selected as the Destination, use this option to store the data in a .prn file
using the selected printer driver.
Remote command:
To enable: HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM'
To disable: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
Install Printer
This softkey opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer. All print-
ers that are already installed are displayed.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer.
For further information, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation.
11.6.1.4 Page setup
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Page Setup" tab
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 317
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Page settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ-
ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura-
tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
Page settings are only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see "Desti-
nation" on page 316).
Select Device 1/2........................................................................................................ 318
Orientation...................................................................................................................318
Windows Per Page......................................................................................................318
Scaling........................................................................................................................ 318
Margins....................................................................................................................... 318
Select Device 1/2
Selects the printing device to be configured.
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected
printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S ESW.
Orientation
Selects the page orientation of the printout: portrait or landscape.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation on page 652
Windows Per Page
Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout. This setting
is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active (see Chapter 11.6.1.1, "Print content
settings", on page 309).
If more than one window is printed on one page, each window is printed in equal size.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt on page 653
Scaling
Determines the scaling of the windows in the printout if Print Multiple Windows is active
(see Chapter 11.6.1.1, "Print content settings", on page 309).
If more than one window is printed on one page (see Windows Per Page), each win-
dow is printed in equal size.
"Maintain Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the
aspect ratio" aspect ratio of the original display.
"Size to fit" Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally, not regarding the
aspect ratio of the original display.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:SCALe on page 653
Margins
Defines margins for the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins
are defined according to the selected unit.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 318
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom on page 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT on page 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt on page 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP on page 652
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT on page 652
11.6.1.5 Print color settings
Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Color" tab
The settings provided here are identical to those in the "Print Colors" section of the
"Display" > "Theme + Color" dialog box.
See "Print Colors" on page 345.
11.6.2 How to store or print screenshots of the display
The measurement results displayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file
very easily.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 319
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
Two different scenarios can be configured in parallel, assigned to different printing
devices. You can then perform one or the other simply by selecting the corresponding
printing device and the "Print" function.
For a programming example, see Chapter 14.8.8, "Examples: managing data",
on page 670.
To start printing or storing results to a file
► If the R&S ESW has already been set up according to your current requirements,
simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar.
The current measurement display is printed or stored to a file, as configured.
To print a screenshot
This configuration assumes a printer has already been installed. To install a new
printer, use the Install Printer function (common Microsoft Windows procedure).
1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to config-
ure.
(Note: Some settings are independent of the printing-device.)
3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to
be included in the printout.
a) Select "Print Screenshot" to include all elements displayed on the screen in a
single-page printout.
b) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of the printout.
c) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the print-
out.
d) Optionally, activate "Print Dialog" to include any dialog boxes currently dis-
played on the screen in the printout. This is useful, for example, to document
the used settings for a particular result.
e) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.
4. In the "Printer" tab, select "Printer" as the "Destination".
5. Select the "Printer Name" to print to from the list of installed printers.
6. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page.
a) Select the page orientation.
b) Define the page margins.
c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.
7. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 320
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors.
The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
For a printout that reflects exactly what you see on the screen, select "Screen
Colors (Screenshot)".
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.
8. Select "Print" to execute the print function.
The screenshot is printed on the printer as configured.
9. To print another screenshot using the same configuration any other time, simply
press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar.
If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to
print another screenshot:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device.
c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.
To store a printout containing multiple windows
1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to config-
ure.
3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to
be included in the printout.
a) Select "Print Selected Windows" to include the selected windows in the print-
out, possibly on multiple pages.
b) Select the result displays in the currently selected channel to be included in the
printout.
Tip: Select the "MultiView" before configuring the printout to include result dis-
plays from any active channel.
c) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of each page of the printout.
d) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the print-
out pages.
4. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included.
a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page
Down".
b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are
visible.
5. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination".
6. Select the file format from the selection list.
7. By default, you define the filename individually for each print operation. To avoid
having the "File Selection" dialog box being displayed for each print operation,
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 321
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
select "Suppress File Name Dialog". In this case, the previously used or default
storage location and filename are used.
(C:\R_S\Instr\User\ESW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).
8. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page.
a) Select the page orientation.
b) Define the page margins.
c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.
9. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors.
The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
For a printout that reflects the colors you see on the screen, but with a white
background, select "Screen Colors (Print)".
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.
10. Select "Print" to execute the print function.
11. If you did not select the option to suppress the dialog, enter a filename in the file
selection dialog box.
The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.
12. To store another file using the same configuration any other time, simply press the
"Print immediate" icon
The "Print immediate" is at the far right end of the toolbar.
If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to
store another file:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device.
c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.
11.6.3 Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file
The following example describes the procedure to store results from measurements in
the Spectrum application and the I/Q Analyzer to a single PDF file.
1. Configure and perform the measurements in the Spectrum application and I/Q
Analyzer as required. Configure at least the following result displays:
● Frequency Sweep, Spectrogram (Spectrum)
● Magnitude, Spectrum (I/Q Analyzer)
2. Switch to the "MultiView" tab to display an overview of the result displays in all
active channels.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 322
R&S®ESW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings
3. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.
4. Select "Device 1" to configure the settings for this printing device.
5. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows".
6. Select the result displays listed in step 1.
7. Enter the comment Measurement Test Report to be inserted at the top of each
page.
8. Select "Print Page Count" and "Print Date and Time".
9. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows".
10. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination".
11. Select "PDF" from the file format selection list.
12. Select "Suppress File Name Dialog".
13. In the "Page Setup" tab, select "Landscape" as the "Orientation".
14. Select "Windows Per Page": 1 to print a single result display on each page.
15. Select the "Scaling" option "Size to fit" to maximize the result display on each page.
16. In the "Color" tab, select "Screen Colors (Print)" for a printout that reflects the col-
ors you see on the screen, but with a white background.
17. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included
and all relevant data elements are visible.
a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page
Down".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 323
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are
visible.
18. Select "Print" to execute the print function.
The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.
11.7 Working with test reports
Access: Toolbar:
The R&S ESW features a test report generator. A test report is a document that sum-
marizes the results and configuration of measurements.
A test report is made up out of one or more datasets. Each dataset contains the results
and configuration of one measurement.
● Designing a test report template........................................................................... 325
● Creating a test report............................................................................................ 329
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 324
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
11.7.1 Designing a test report template
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"
The R&S ESW allows you to create test report templates, for example if you handle
different measurement tasks that require different information or a different layout in
the test report. The following topics show you ways to customize your test reports and
save those settings in a template.
Test report content selection....................................................................................... 325
General properties of the test report document.......................................................... 326
Custom information about the measurement.............................................................. 327
Contents of the title page............................................................................................ 328
Template management................................................................................................329
Test report content selection
The properties available in the "Templates" tab define the information that each dataset
in the test report should contain. You can add or remove the items as required.
The contents of the dialog box depend on the application (Receiver, Spectrum etc.).
In all applications, you can add different graphical results ("Diagrams" category),
numerical results or information about the measurement setup or configuration
("Tables" category). Information that is to be included in the test report is represented
by a blue button. Information not included is represented by a gray button.
Refer the individual dialog boxes for a comprehensive list of information that you can
add to a test report.
For more information about the "General" tab of the dialog box, see "Custom informa-
tion about the measurement" on page 327 and "Contents of the title page"
on page 328.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 325
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect on page 661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault on page 658
General properties of the test report document
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "General"
The "General" category defines general properties of the report document.
The following document properties are supported.
● Format
Selects the format of the document (A4 or Letter format).
● File type
Selects the file type (.pdf or .doc)
● Use Screen Colors
Turns the use of printer friendly color schemes on and off.
● Date
Adds the current date to the report.
● Page Count
Adds page numbers to the report.
● Report Path
Defines the name of the report and the location where the report file is to be saved.
You can specify the directory with the "..." button or by entering a path and filename
into the input field.
When you omit the path, the report is saved in the default directory.
C:\R_S\Instr\user
Note: This is the location of the actual test report. Templates are stored in a differ-
ent location.
● Suppress Dialog
Turns a confirmation dialog box that is shown when you save the report on and off.
When the confirmation dialog is suppressed, reports are saved to the default direc-
tory with a generic name.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 326
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
● Raw Data Storage
Defines the location where the raw data used to create the report is stored.
You can specify the directory with the "..." button or by entering a path into the input
field.
Remote command:
Format: HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize on page 666
File type: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 649
Page numbers: HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe on page 666
Color: HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors:STATe on page 666
Date and time: HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp:STATe on page 667
Custom information about the measurement
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "Measurement Informa-
tion"
When you turn it on, the "Measurement Information" category allows you to add cus-
tom information about the measurement to the report. You can also define how often
that information is added to the report.
You can add up to six lines to the report, plus one picture (for example a company
logo). Each of the six lines consists of a title and a value (which is displayed next to
the title). In addition, you can select how each line in the header is treated (the visibil-
ity).
The title and value are arbitrary strings. The application, however, comes with several
predefined titles (except for the "Heading" title, you can change all others).
● Title
Defines a name for a variable that has different values depending on the measure-
ment (for example the name of the EUT). The firmware comes with some prede-
fined titles, but you can change and customize each title.
● Value
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 327
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
Defines the value of the variable defined by the title.
● Visibility
Selects if a line is displayed on every page in the header of the report ("Global"),
below a main chapter title ("Subreport") or not at all ("Never").
By default, the information is not displayed at all.
Adding a logo
The page header can also contain a picture or logo. You can upload a picture with the
"..." symbol. The "..." symbol opens a dialog box to select a file.
Reports support pictures in .bmp, .jpg, .png, .gif, .emf or .wmf format.
Similar to the alphanumeric lines in the header, you can select the visibility for the logo
as well. By default, the logo is not displayed in the report.
Remote command:
State: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe on page 660
Title: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe on page 659
Value: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT on page 658
Visibility: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol on page 658
Selection of logo: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO on page 661
Visibility of logo: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 661
Contents of the title page
Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "Title Page"
When you turn it on, the "Title" category defines the contents of the first page of the
test report (title page).
You can define a title for the test report, which is printed in big and bold letters on the
first page, and a short description of the contents of the test report (or the name of the
author or something similar). This description is also part of the first test report page,
but is printed in normal letters.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 328
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
Remote command:
State: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe on page 668
Title: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe on page 668
Description: HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription on page 657
Template management
The "Templates" category contains functions to manage test report templates.
Test report management functions are always visible (at the bottom).
● Load
Restores the selected test report configuration.
● Save
Saves the current test report configuration. Before you save the configuration as a
template, enter a name for the template in the corresponding field.
You can specify the directory with the "..." button or by entering a path and filename
into the input field.
When you omit the path, the report is saved in the default directory.
● Default
Restores the default template configuration.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
Remote command:
Query available templates: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?
on page 664
Save template: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE on page 665
Load template: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD on page 665
Default template: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault on page 658
11.7.2 Creating a test report
Access: > "Report menu" > "Preview"
Generating report data
● Create a new dataset of the selected measurement channel from scratch:
(Existing datasets will be deleted.)
● Append a new dataset of the selected measurement channel to an existing data-
set:
Test report limitations
The size of the test report is limited to 50.000 measurement points per trace.
If the number of measurement points is greater than that value, only the first 50.000
values are written to the report. The rest is dismissed.
Try to do an ASCII file export when you have more measurement points.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 329
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
Configuration and printout of the test report................................................................330
Adding and removing datasets....................................................................................330
Configuration and printout of the test report
You can save the test report either as a pdf document or an doc document in the cor-
responding dropdown menu in the "Report Content" dialog box.
The "Preview" feature, if it is turned on, opens a preview version of the test report in
the corresponding pane of the dialog box. Note that it can take a short time until the
preview has been created.
The "Save" button saves the test report. When you suppress the file dialog, the report
is saved to the directory you have specified in the Report Path input field.
Remote command:
Print mode: HCOPy:MODE on page 657
Print report: HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 650
Report name and directory: MMEMory:NAME on page 636
Adding and removing datasets
Before you can print a test report, you have to fill it with data.
Test report data is organized in datasets. Each dataset contains the results of one
measurement or the settings of one measurement (which can result in several sub-
sets):
You can generate datasets with the (generate new dataset) or (append data to
the existing dataset).
After you have created a dataset, you can view the details in the "Select Items to
Include in the Report" pane of the "Report Content" dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 330
R&S®ESW Data management
Working with test reports
All datasets in the list are exported to the report. To delete a dataset, use the cross
next to the dataset label.
The "Remove All" feature deletes all datasets.
Remote command:
New report: HCOPy:TREPort:NEW on page 665
Add dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:APPend on page 657
Remove dataset: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove on page 667
Remove all datasets: HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL on page 668
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 331
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
12 General instrument setup
Access: [SETUP]
Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected oper-
ating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially
when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or require-
ments and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when neces-
sary. Some special functions are provided for service and basic system configuration.
Network and remote settings, display settings
Settings for network and remote operation are described in Chapter 13, "Network oper-
ation and remote control", on page 395.
Display settings are described in Chapter 12.2.1, "Display settings", on page 338.
● Alignment.............................................................................................................. 332
● Display settings..................................................................................................... 338
● Toolbar configuration.............................................................................................351
● Transducers.......................................................................................................... 352
● Reference frequency settings............................................................................... 367
● System configuration settings............................................................................... 371
● Service functions...................................................................................................379
● Synchronizing measurement channel configuration............................................. 386
12.1 Alignment
12.1.1 Basics on alignment
When you put the instrument into operation for the first time or when strong tempera-
ture changes occur, align the data to a reference source (see "Temperature check"
on page 333).
The firmware determines the correction data and characteristics required for the align-
ment. It compares the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the
high-precision calibration signal source at 64 MHz.
Basic operation of the R&S ESW can be affected before or after a self-alignment in the
following ways:
● Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed
directly after installation, and a dialog is displayed indicating how much warm-up
time is still required before self-alignment can be performed.
● During instrument start, the firmware checks whether the installed hardware is sup-
ported. If not, an error message is displayed ("Wrong Firmware Version") and you
are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-align-
ment fails.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 332
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
● If you start a self-alignment remotely and then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
● During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running
a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measure-
ment results.
Alignment results
The alignment results are displayed and contain the following information:
● Date and time of last correction data record
● Overall results of correction data record
● List of performed alignment steps
The results are classified as follows:
PASSED Calibration successful without any restrictions
CHECK Deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction could however be per-
formed
FAILED Deviations of correction value too large, no correction was possible. The found cor-
rection data is not applicable.
The results are available until the next self-alignment process is started or the instru-
ment is switched off.
Temperature check
During self-alignment, the instrument's frontend temperature is measured (if activated,
only after the instrument has warmed up completely, see "Await Warm-Up Operation
before Self Alignment" on page 336). This temperature is used as a reference for a
continuous temperature check during operation. If the current temperature deviates
from the stored self-alignment temperature by a certain degree, a warning is displayed
in the status bar. The warning indicates the resulting deviation in the measured power
levels. A status bit in the STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register indicates a
possible deviation. The current temperature of the frontend can be queried using a
remote command (see SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend on page 684).
Touchscreen alignment
When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially calibrated. However, to ensure
that the touchscreen responds to the finger contact correctly, a touchscreen alignment
is required.
Alignment of the touchscreen is useful:
● At first use
● After an image update or after exchanging a hard disk
● If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor-
rect response
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 333
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
● If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on
the screen
● If another person operates the instrument
12.1.2 Alignment settings
Access: [Setup] > "Alignment"
Both the instrument and the touchscreen can be aligned when necessary (see Chap-
ter 12.1.1, "Basics on alignment", on page 332).
Automatic self-alignment
During installation of the R&S ESW firmware, you can configure an automatic self-
alignment to be performed directly after installation. In addition, you can activate a pre-
ceding warmup time before self-alignment, which is strongly recommended. If you do
not activate this option, make sure the instrument has reached its operating tempera-
ture before installing the firmware. Furthermore, you can force the instrument to shut
down after self-alignment. Note, however, that you cannot switch the instrument back
on remotely afterwards.
The additional settings for self-alignment can also be activated or deactivated during
operation in the "Alignment" settings dialog (see Await Warm-Up Operation before Self
Alignment and Shut down Device after Self Alignment.)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 334
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
Self-alignment results in secure user mode
Be sure to store self-alignment results before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap-
ter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
In secure user mode, the results are not stored permanently. Thus, if the currently
stored self-alignment results are not suitable, you must perform a self-alignment each
time you switch on the R&S ESW.
Start Self Alignment.................................................................................................... 335
Abort Self Alignment................................................................................................... 336
Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment....................................................... 336
Schedule..................................................................................................................... 336
Shut down Device after Self Alignment.......................................................................336
Starting Touch Screen Alignment................................................................................336
Alignment Results:...................................................................................................... 337
Start Self Alignment
Starts recording correction data for the instrument. If the correction data acquisition
fails or if the correction values are deactivated, a corresponding message is displayed
in the status field.
For details, see Chapter 12.1.1, "Basics on alignment", on page 332.
Note:
A running Sequencer operation is aborted when you start a self-alignment.
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a
self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement
results.
Remote command:
*CAL? on page 458, see also CALibration[:ALL]? on page 679
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 335
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
Abort Self Alignment
As long as the self-alignment data is being collected, the procedure can be canceled
using the "Abort Self Alignment" button.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed. In this case, you cannot abort a self-alignment man-
ually.
Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment
Displays a message indicating the remaining warmup time required before self-align-
ment is performed. After the warmup operation has completed, self-alignment is star-
ted automatically.
Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:WARMup on page 680
Schedule
If enabled, a self-alignment is performed regularly at specific days and time.
Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:SCHedule on page 680
CALibration:DUE:DAYS on page 681
CALibration:DUE:TIME on page 682
Shut down Device after Self Alignment
If activated, the R&S ESW is automatically shut down after self-alignment is comple-
ted. Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control.
Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown on page 682
Starting Touch Screen Alignment
Starts the touchscreen alignment.
Tap the 4 markers on the screen as you are asked to do. The touchscreen is aligned
according to the executed pointing operations.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 336
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Alignment
Alignment Results:
Information on whether the alignment was performed successfully and on the applied
correction data is displayed. The results are available until the next self-alignment
process is started or the instrument is switched off.
Remote command:
CALibration:RESult? on page 679
12.1.3 How to perform a self-test
You do not have to repeat the self-test every time you switch on the instrument. It is
only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.
Operating temperature
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
1. Select [SETUP].
2. Select "Service".
3. Select "Selftest".
Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully, a message is dis-
played.
12.1.4 How to align the instrument
Operating temperature
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
To perform a self-alignment
Make sure no signal is connected to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment
with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results.
1. Select [SETUP].
2. Select "Alignment".
3. Select "Start Self Alignment".
4. To abort the self-alignment process, select "Abort Self Alignment".
Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 337
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
To display the alignment results again later
► Select [SETUP] > "Alignment".
12.1.5 How to align the touchscreen
To align the touchscreen
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Select the "Alignment" softkey.
3. Select "Touch Screen Alignment".
A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen.
4. Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking.
Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners.
12.2 Display settings
12.2.1 Display settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display"
Some general display settings are available regardless of the current application or
operating mode. For information on optimizing your display for measurement results,
see Chapter 10.1, "Result display configuration", on page 212.
● General display settings........................................................................................338
● Displayed items.....................................................................................................340
● Display theme and colors......................................................................................344
● External monitor settings.......................................................................................348
12.2.1.1 General display settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "General"
This section includes general screen display behavior and date and time display.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 338
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen............................................................. 339
Display Update Rate................................................................................................... 339
Set Date and Time...................................................................................................... 339
Date and Time Format................................................................................................ 340
Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen
The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used
for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action.
To reactivate the touchscreen, simply press the [Setup] key on the front panel. The
"Display" dialog box is opened automatically and the "Touch Screen" option is set to
"On".
"Touch On" Touchscreen function is active for the entire screen.
"Touch Off" Touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen.
"Touch Diagram Off"
Touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen, but
active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe] on page 700
Display Update Rate
By default, a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis-
play. However, when performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during
remote control), it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen dis-
play is updated.
Set Date and Time
Sets the current date and time for the internal real-time clock on the instrument. This
function uses the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box. Setting
the clock requires administrator rights.
Select the "Set Date and Time" button in the "Display" dialog box, or select the date
and time display in the status bar to open the Windows dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 339
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Remote command:
SYSTem:DATE on page 674
SYSTem:TIME on page 674
Date and Time Format
Switches the time and date display on the screen between US, ISO and German (DE)
format.
"DE" dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
"US" mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss
12 hour format.
"ISO" yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat on page 700
12.2.1.2 Displayed items
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Displayed Items"
Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required, for exam-
ple to enlarge the display area for the measurement results.
Toolbar........................................................................................................................ 341
Status Bar................................................................................................................... 341
Softkey Bar..................................................................................................................341
Channel Bar................................................................................................................ 341
Diagram Footer (Annotation).......................................................................................341
Date and Time.............................................................................................................341
Front Panel..................................................................................................................342
Mini Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 342
Lock Frequency...........................................................................................................343
Disconnect RF.............................................................................................................344
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 340
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Toolbar
The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the
screen. Some functions, such as zooming, finding help, printing screenshots or storing
and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe] on page 699
Status Bar
The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global instrument settings, the instru-
ment status and any irregularities during measurement or display.
Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the status reg-
istry via remote commands.
We recommend displaying the status bar at all times. If you hide the status bar, you
can miss important error messages.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] on page 699
Softkey Bar
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device.
The functions provided by the softkeys are often also available via dialog boxes. How-
ever, some functions are not accessible at all without the softkey bar.
Note: The softkey bar is hidden while the SmartGrid is displayed and restored auto-
matically when the SmartGrid is closed.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] on page 699
Channel Bar
The channel bar provides information on firmware and measurement settings for a
specific channel.
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR on page 698
Diagram Footer (Annotation)
The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x-axis of the dia-
gram display, such as:
● The current center frequency and span settings
● The displayed span per division
● The number of sweep points
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 698
Date and Time
The date and time display can be switched off independently of the status bar.
You can set the current date and time and configure the display format in the "General"
tab of the "Display" dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 341
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 700
Front Panel
The "Front Panel" display simulates the entire front panel of the device (except for the
external connectors) on the screen. Thus, you can interact with the R&S ESW without
the keypad and keys on the front panel of the device. That is useful, for example, when
working with an external monitor or operating via remote control from a computer.
To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the [F6] key on the external
keyboard (if available) or the remote computer.
For more information, see Chapter 12.2.3, "How to work with the soft front panels",
on page 350.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 701
Mini Front Panel
If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in
the display area, a mini front panel is available. The mini version displays only the main
function keys in a separate window in the display area.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 342
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Note:
You can also activate the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be
aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when
you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 701
Lock Frequency
Turns the display of the "Lock Frequency" icon in the toolbar on and off.
When the icon is part of the toolbar, you can turn the frequency lock on and off. When
the lock is on, the frequency does not change when you turn the rotary knob.
Only applies to the frequency. You can still change other parameters with the rotary
knob.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 343
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Remote command:
not supported
Disconnect RF
Turns the display of the "Disconnect RF" icon in the toolbar on and off.
When the icon is part of the toolbar, you can cut off the (external) signal fed into the RF
input quickly and easily.
The disconnection applies to both RF inputs.
Remote command:
DISPlay:ITERm[:STATe] on page 699
INPut:TERMinator on page 701
12.2.1.3 Display theme and colors
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Theme + Color"
You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen.
For step-by-step instructions see Chapter 12.2.2, "How to configure the colors for dis-
play and printing", on page 349.
Theme......................................................................................................................... 345
Screen Colors............................................................................................................. 345
Print Colors................................................................................................................. 345
Showing Print Colors on Display.................................................................................346
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 344
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............................................................... 346
└ Selecting the Object......................................................................................346
└ Predefined Colors......................................................................................... 347
└ Preview......................................................................................................... 347
Defining User-specific Colors......................................................................................347
Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors............................................................ 348
Theme
The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen
objects.
The default theme is "IndustrialDark".
Remote command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 703
Screen Colors
Two different color sets are provided by the <instrument>, a third user-defined set can
be configured.
The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regard-
ing the screen from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1".
If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined (see
"Defining User-specific Colors" on page 347).
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 702
Print Colors
Defines the color settings used for printout.
In addition to the predefined settings, a user-defined color set can be configured (see
"Defining User-specific Colors" on page 347).
If "Show Print Colors on Display" is activated, the currently selected print colors are
displayed as a preview for your selection.
Gui setting Description Remote command
"Optimized Colors" Selects an optimized color setting for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
printout to improve the visibility of the colors
(default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2
black, trace 3 green, and the markers are
turquoise. The background is always printed
in white and the grid in black.
"Screen Colors (Print)" Selects the current screen colors for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
printout. The background is always printed in
white and the grid in black.
"Screen Colors Selects the current screen colors without any HCOP:CMAP:DEF4
(Screenshot)" changes for a screenshot.
"User Defined Colors" Selects the user-defined color setting. HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 645
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 345
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Showing Print Colors on Display
Temporarily shows the currently selected print colors on the screen display. This func-
tion can be used as a preview for printing.
Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments
You can configure the colors used to display and print individual screen objects accord-
ing to your specific requirements.
The colors are configured in the (identical) "Screen Color Setup"/"Printer Color Setup"
dialog boxes.
Selecting the Object ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments
Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the
following objects:
● Background
● Grid
● Individual traces
● Display lines
● Limit lines and check results
● Markers and marker information
Remote command:
Each object is assigned to a specific suffix of the CMAP commands, see Chap-
ter 14.9.6.3, "CMAP suffix assignment", on page 704.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 346
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Predefined Colors ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments
Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the
selected object.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 646
Preview ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments
Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object.
Defining User-specific Colors
In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user-specific
color to be used for the selected object.
When you select "Userdefined Colors...", the set of predefined colors is replaced by a
color palette and color configuration settings.
The color palette allows you to select the color directly. The color settings allow you to
define values for tint, saturation and brightness.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL on page 646
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 347
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors
In addition to the predefined color settings, a user-defined setting can be configured.
By default, the same settings as defined in "Default Colors 1" are used. They can then
be modified according to user-specific requirements (see "Modifying User-Defined
Color Assignments" on page 346).
The "Set to Default" function restores the original default settings for the user-defined
color set. You can select which of the three default settings are restored.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 703
12.2.1.4 External monitor settings
Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Configure Monitor"
You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "display port" con-
nector on the instrument's rear panel.
Screen resolution and format
The touchscreen of the R&S ESW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a
monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and
the screen does not react to your touch actions properly.
The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of
the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor.
If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows
configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the
monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the R&S ESW application window and
see even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the stan-
dard Windows configuration dialog box.
However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor
using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Res-
olution: Restore to default".
Setup...........................................................................................................................348
Screen Resolution: Restore to Default........................................................................349
Setup
Opens the standard Windows configuration dialog box to configure the used display
devices.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 348
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
Screen Resolution: Restore to Default
The default screen resolution (1280 x 800) is restored in the Windows configuration
settings. This is useful, for instance, if the instrument was connected to a display
device and was adapted to different requirements.
12.2.2 How to configure the colors for display and printing
You can configure the style and colors with which various screen objects are displayed
or printed.
To select a color set
1. Press the [Setup] key and select the "Display" softkey.
2. Select the "Theme + Color" tab.
3. In the "Screen Colors" area, do one of the following:
● Select a predefined set of colors for screen display.
● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.
4. In the "Print Colors" area, do one of the following:
● Select a predefined set of colors for printing screenshots.
● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.
5. Activate the "Show Print Colors on Display" option to see a preview of the print col-
ors.
To configure a user-defined color set
1. In the "Theme + Color" tab of the "Display" dialog box, select "User Defined Colors"
either for the screen or the print colors.
2. Select "Modify User Defined Colors".
The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is opened.
3. From the "Selected Object:" list, select the object to which you want to assign a
color.
4. Do one of the following:
● Select a color from the "Predefined Colors".
● Select the "Userdefined Colors ..." button to define a different color.
The "Preview" area indicates the currently selected color.
5. To assign a user-specific color to the selected object, do one of the following:
● Select the color from the palette.
● Enter values for the "Tint:", "Saturation:", and "Brightness:".
Note: In the continuous color spectrum ("Tint:"), 0 % represents red and 100 %
represents blue.
● Enter an "ARGB:" value in hexadecimal format.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 349
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Display settings
6. Select the next object to which you want to assign a color from the "Selected
Object:" list.
7. Repeat these steps until you have assigned a color to all objects you want to con-
figure.
8. Select "OK" to close the dialog box.
The colors are applied to the assigned objects.
12.2.3 How to work with the soft front panels
Basic operation with the soft front panels is identical to normal operation, except for the
following aspects:
To activate a key, select the key on the touchscreen.
To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the
keypad and the arrow keys:
Icon Function
Turn left
Enter
Turn right
Mini front panel
The mini front panel provides only the keys on the touchscreen, to operate the
R&S ESW via an external monitor or remote desktop.
By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the mini front panel window closes
automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the mini front
panel display occasionally to press a single function key.
If you want the window to remain open, deactivate the "Auto close" option. You can
close the window manually by selecting "Close planel" or the key combination [ALT +
M] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!).
To display the soft front panel or mini front panel
1. Press the [Setup] key and select the "Display" softkey.
2. Select the "Displayed Items" tab.
3. Select "Front Panel": "On" or "Mini Front Panel": "On".
To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the [F6] key on the external
keyboard (if available) or on the remote computer.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 350
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Toolbar configuration
12.3 Toolbar configuration
If the list of available icons becomes longer than the height of the screen, an arrow at
the bottom of the toolbar indicates that further icons are available.
However, you can configure which icons are displayed in the toolbar, and in which
order.
Toolbar configuration is saved when you shut down or preset the R&S ESW. It is not
included in save sets (see Chapter 11.3, "Storing and recalling instrument settings and
measurement data", on page 285).
To configure the toolbar
1. From the toolbar, select "More icons" > "Edit Toolbar".
The toolbar is highlighted red to indicate it is in edit mode.
2. Drag and drop the icons in the toolbar to the required position. A blue line indicates
the selected position.
Figure 12-1: Inserting the Windows icon in the toolbar
3. To add an icon that is currently not visible:
a) Select "More icons".
All hidden icons are displayed in a menu.
b) Drag the icon from the menu to the toolbar.
The added icon is displayed. If the toolbar contains too many icons to display,
the icons from the bottom move to the menu.
4. To hide an icon from the toolbar, drag and drop it outside the toolbar.
The icon is moved to the menu of hidden icons ("More icons"). Empty spaces are
indicated by a spacer.
5. To insert additional spaces between icons, for example to create groups of icons:
a) Select "More icons" > "Drag Spacer".
b) Drag and drop the "Drag Spacer" at the required position in the toolbar. Multiple
spaces can be inserted.
6. To restore the default R&S ESW toolbar, select "More icons" > "Set to Default".
7. To exit the toolbar edit mode, select "More icons" > "Stop Editing".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 351
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
The red highlighting is removed. Selecting an icon performs the assigned function
as usual.
12.4 Transducers
12.4.1 Transducer
Many EMC test setups contain a transducer (for example antennas, cables, probes or
current probes). A transducer is a device which generates a voltage signal that can be
measured by the receiver. Therefore the level value is transformed into dBµV. This is
done for all transducer units except dBm and dB. In the latter case, the receiver dis-
plays the transducer unit and the level value shows the corresponding level in dBµV.
For example, an input level of 0 dBm equates to 107 dBµV (in case of an input impe-
dance of 50 Ohms) if no transducer factor is active.
Because most transducers have a characteristic frequency response, it is necessary to
correct the measurement results by the frequency characteristics of the transducer.
These characteristics are defined in a transducer factor or transducer sets.
The visible effect of a transducer is therefore a vertical shift of the results by the
amount defined in the transducer factor for each frequency point.
Transducer factors
A transducer factor takes the frequency response of a single transfer element into
account. It consists of a series of reference values. Each reference value in turn con-
sists of a frequency and the corresponding level (correction) value. The transducer fac-
tor can consist of up to 1001 reference values. Measurement points between the refer-
ence values are interpolated either linearly or logarithmically.
Note that the unit of the transducer overrides the unit you have selected for the mea-
surement, because the R&S ESW is seen as the same device as the transducer itself.
Measurement results are automatically converted into the unit of the transducer factor.
Inputs are only possible in the unit of the transducer. If you want to have access to
other units as well, the correction values must be defined in dB. When you turn off the
transducer, the R&S ESW again uses the unit that was selected before.
Transducer factors are always applied to all active measurement windows.
Transducer sets
A transducer set consists of several transducer factors and thus takes the frequency
response of several transducers into account. Using transducer sets is recommended
if you are using different transducers in the measurement range or if cable attenuation
or an amplifier have to be considered.
If you are using a transducer set, you can divide the complete frequency range defined
for the transducer set into 10 smaller frequency ranges. Make sure, however, that the
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 352
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
ranges have no gaps in between each other. The stop frequency of one range must
always be the start frequency of the next one.
You can assign up to eight transducer factors to each subrange. Make sure that the
frequency range of a particular (sub)range is covered completely by the frequency
range defined for the transducer factor. In addition, the unit of all transducer factors
that are part of a set has to be the same (or, alternatively, "dB"). Transducer factors
that do not meet this condition will not be available for selection.
If necessary, you can configure the R&S ESW to interrupt the scan when it reaches a
range boundary. This interruption is called transducer break. While the scan is interrup-
ted, exchange the transducer and continue the scan with the transducer factor
assigned to the new range or turn off transducer use and continue the measurement
without a transducer factor.
If the scan reaches a frequency not covered by the currently active transducer factor,
the R&S ESW shows a message in status bar ("No valid transducer for current receiver
frequency").
Transducer management
The R&S ESW provides functionality to store and use the transducer factors during a
measurement.
For more information on creating and managing transducer factors, see Chap-
ter 12.4.2, "Working with transducers", on page 353.
Transducers in the receiver application
The transducer is calculated for a set scan. The transducer is uniquely calculated for
each frequency point and added to the result of the level measurement as the mea-
surement results are stored internally and can be zoomed later.
Transducers in the spectrum application
The R&S ESW calculates the correction values defined in the transducer factor for
every displayed measurement point before you start the measurement. During the
measurement, it adds the correction values to the measurement results. If you change
the frequency range of the measurement, the R&S ESW calculates the correction val-
ues again.
12.4.2 Working with transducers
The R&S ESW allows you to create or edit transducer factors and transducer sets. The
corresponding functions are combined in a dialog box.
For more information about transducer factors in general, see Chapter 12.4.1, "Trans-
ducer", on page 352.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 353
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
Transducer settings in secure user mode
Be sure to store transducer files before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap-
ter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
● Using transducers................................................................................................. 354
● Using an RF switch............................................................................................... 358
12.4.2.1 Using transducers
Access: [SETUP] > "Transducer"
The dialog box contains several tabs, including one to configure transducer factors and
one to configure transducer sets.
Basically, both tabs contain the following elements.
● A list of available transducer factors or transducer sets.
The list shows the name of the transducer factor or set, its unit, if it is compatible
with the current measurement configuration and its state.
● A button to filter the transducer factors that are displayed in the list (all factors or
just the compatible ones).
The filter is available for transducer factor selection.
● A line that shows the comment of a transducer factor or set.
A comment is displayed only if one has been defined.
● Functions to create, edit and manage transducer factors and sets.
For more information about "Switch Control", see Chapter 12.4.2.2, "Using an RF
switch", on page 358.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 354
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
Displaying transducer characteristics
In the Receiver application, you can use the "Transducer"trace mode. Selecting this
trace mode draws a trace that shows the correction values of all active transducers in
the displayed frequency range.
Applying a transducer factor....................................................................................... 355
Design and management of transducer factors.......................................................... 355
Design and management of transducer sets.............................................................. 357
Applying a transducer factor
The R&S ESW allows you to use either a transducer factor or a transducer set in a
measurement. A combination of transducer factors and transducer sets is not possible.
A transducer factor or set becomes active when you assign it to one or both RF inputs.
When you select one of the buttons in the "Input Selection" column of the transducer
list, the R&S ESW opens a dialog box that allows you to select the input(s) that you
want to apply the transducer to.
The R&S ESW shows if a transducer factor or set is active in a field at the top of the
dialog box.
When the transducer factor is active, all amplitude settings and outputs take on the unit
of the transducer factor. It is no longer possible to select another unit. An exception is
in case the transducer has the unit dB.
The name of the active transducer is displayed in the channel bar and in the "Trans-
ducer" dialog box.
Note that you can use up to eight transducer factors at the same time. If you want to
use more transducer factors in the same measurement, you have to combine them in a
transducer set.
Dynamic range with active transducers
The shift of the trace caused by the transducer factor by a certain amount deteriorates
the dynamic range of the measurement results.
To restore the original dynamic range, you have to compensate for the transducer fac-
tor. You can do this by adjusting the reference level accordingly. If you turn on the auto-
matic adjustment of the reference level (➙"Adjust Ref Level"), the R&S ESW restores
the original dynamic range as best as possible by changing the reference level by the
maximum level shift defined in the active transducer factor.
Remote command:
See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686.
Design and management of transducer factors
Before you define the characteristics of a transducer factor, make sure that you have
actually selected the tab to configure transducer factors.
You can configure a transducer factor in several ways:
● Edit a transducer factor that already exists (➙"Edit").
● Create a new transducer factor (➙"New").
● Create a new transducer factor based on an existing one (➙"Copy").
If necessary, you can delete the selected transducer factor at any time (➙"Delete")
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 355
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
Each of the options opens the dialog box that contains the functionality to characterize
a transducer factor.
● "Name" / "Comment"
Defines a name and / or comment of the transducer factor.
● "Unit"
Selects the unit of the transducer factor.
● "X-Axis"
Selects linear or logarithmic scaling of the x-axis.
● "Position" and "Value"
Define the data points of the transducer factor (including a graphical preview).
● "Insert Value"
Insert a transducer factor data point. Alternatively, you can click in the table itself to
add a new data point.
● "Delete Value"
Deletes the currently selected data point. The currently selected data point is high-
lighted blue.
● "Shift x" / "Shift y"
Shifts all data points of the transducer factor horizontally or vertically by a certain
amount.
● "Import" / "Export"
Imports or exports the information for a transducer factor to or from a csv file.
● "Save"
Saves and stores the transducer factor on the internal hard disk of the R&S ESW.
A transducer factor can consist of up to 1001 data points. Each data point is a pair of
values: the first value describes the frequency, the second value describes the level for
that frequency.
You have to enter frequencies in ascending order. They must not overlap.
When you save the transducer factor, the R&S ESW uses the name of the transducer
factor as the file name. The file type is *.tdf. If a transducer factor of the same name
already exists, the R&S ESW asks before it overwrites the existing file.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 356
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
The transducer factors and sets are stored in separate but fix directories on the internal
memory of the R&S ESW. You can create subdirectories for a more concise file struc-
ture and display their contents with the "Show Directories" softkey (you have to select
the directory first, though).
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Remote command:
See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686.
Design and management of transducer sets
Before you define the characteristics of a transducer set, make sure that you have
actually selected the tab to configure transducer sets.
You can configure transducer sets in several ways:
● Edit a transducer set that already exists (➙"Edit").
● Create a new transducer set (➙"New").
● Create a new transducer set based on an existing one (➙"Copy").
If necessary, you can delete the selected transducer set at any time (➙"Delete")
Each of the options opens the dialog box that contains the functionality to define a
transducer set.
● "Name" / "Comment"
Defines a name and / or comment of the transducer set.
● "Unit"
Selects the unit of the transducer set.
● "Break"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 357
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
Turns the transducer break on and off.
● "Insert Range"
Adds a new range to the transducer set. Each transducer set can consist of up to
10 ranges.
To select a range, select the corresponding range in the table, or select it with the
buttons on the bottom of the dialog box.
● "Delete Range"
Deletes the currently selected transducer set range. The currently selected range
is highlighted orange.
● "Start Frequency" / "Stop Frequency"
Defines the start and stop frequencies for the selected transducer set range.
● "Add Factor"
Opens a list of transducer factors that you can apply to the transducer set range.
You can assign up to eight transducer factors to each range, but only those whose
characteristics (frequency range, unit) are compatible to the characteristics of the
selected range.
● "Change Factor"
Replaces the selected transducer factor with another one. The selected transducer
factor is highlighted.
● "Remove Factor"
Removes the selected transducer factor from the transducer set range.
● "Save Sets"
Saves and stores the transducer set on the internal hard disk of the R&S ESW.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Remote command:
See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686.
12.4.2.2 Using an RF switch
An RF switch allows you to automatically route and condition RF signals as required
from a single device in the test setup.
In the context of EMC measurements, using an RF switch can be useful for measure-
ment scenarios in which you apply a transducer set (different transducers for different
frequency ranges).
Without an RF switch, you would have to change the test setup and resume the mea-
surement deliberately every time a new transducer has to be applied. With an RF
switch, however, you can prepare the complete setup in advance and program the RF
switch matrix to switch automatically to a different signal path when a transducer break
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 358
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
occurs (and the transducer properties change). Manual changes of the test setup dur-
ing a measurement are no longer necessary.
● Managing datasets................................................................................................359
● Programming a switch matrix................................................................................360
Managing datasets
Access: [SETUP] > "Transducer" > "Switch Control"
Information required to control an RF switch is stored in a dataset in the .xml file for-
mat.
This dataset is basically a program that remotely controls the RF switch to configure it
for each transducer range. The dialog box to manage datasets is made up out of a
table that shows all datasets available in the default directory of the R&S ESW or data-
sets that you have loaded from different file locations.
Creating a dataset
The "Add New" feature creates an empty dataset.
For more information about the corresponding dialog box, see "Programming a switch
matrix" on page 360.
Restoring a previously saved dataset
The "Load File" feature restores a dataset that you have previously created (the data-
set can also be on an external memory device).
After you have restored the dataset, it is added to the table.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 359
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
Working with the dataset table
The table showing all available datasets contains the most relevant information about a
dataset.
● Edit a dataset
The pencil icon in the first row opens a dialog box that allows you to change con-
tents of a dataset.
For more information, see "Programming a switch matrix" on page 360.
● Edit the name of a dataset
Changes the name of the dataset.
● Check the connection state
The "State" column shows if an RF switch could be found on the selected RF input
and on the network address defined in the corresponding dataset.
When the RF input = OFF, the LED is always red.
● Select the RF input
Selects the RF input the measurement is performed on.
● Define a network address
Selects the network address of the RF switch.
● Delete a dataset
The X icon in the last column deletes the corresponding dataset.
Remote commands:
Create a dataset: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect on page 691
Select a dataset: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect on page 691
Restore a dataset: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:LOAD on page 689
Delete a dataset: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DELete on page 689
Programming a switch matrix
Access: [SETUP] > "Transducer" > "Switch Control" > "Add New"
Access: [SETUP] > "Transducer" > "Switch Control" > "Edit" (pencil icon)
The RF switch is controlled by the R&S ESW with a set of remote commands that are
saved in a dataset.
Dataset name and file name....................................................................................... 360
Connection between R&S ESW to the RF switch....................................................... 361
RF input selection....................................................................................................... 361
RF switch control.........................................................................................................361
└ Command sequence synchronization...........................................................362
└ Delay time..................................................................................................... 362
└ Web Interface................................................................................................362
Dataset name and file name
The "Name" of the dataset is the name that is displayed in the dataset table.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 360
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
When you save the dataset with the "Save to File" feature, you can select the location
where the file is saved and a file name (which can be different to the dataset name).
When you close the dialog box with "Close", the dataset is still saved, but is available
only on the R&S ESW you have created it on (no file is created).
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
In addition, you can include a short "Comment" that contains additional information
about the dataset.
Remote command:
Name: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:NAME on page 690
Select a dataset: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect on page 691
Save to file: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:STORe on page 691
Comment: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:COMMent on page 688
Connection between R&S ESW to the RF switch
Using an RF switch in the measurement requires you to establish a connection
between the R&S ESW (as the controlling device) and the RF switch.
You can define the address of the RF switch in the "VISA string" input field. Depending
on the type of connection / protocol (VXI-11, HiSlip and GPIB), make sure that the
VISA string contains the correct prefix.
Example for VXI-11: TCPIP::192.0.2.0::INSTR
Example for HiSlip: TCPIP::192.0.2.0::HISLIP
Example for GPIB: GPIB::20::INSTR
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:ADDRess on page 688
RF input selection
Selects the RF input of the R&S ESW used for the RF switch measurement.
When you run a measurement based on a certain dataset, the application assumes
that the RF switch is connected to the selected input of the R&S ESW.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:INPut on page 689
RF switch control
The RF switch is controlled with a sequence of remote commands that you can define
for each transducer range you have in the setup (represented by the 10 input fields in
the dialog box).
You program the RF switch any way you want, with one or more commands per trans-
ducer range, as long as the command you are using is supported by the RF switch you
are using. For a comprehensive description of supported commands, refer to the docu-
mentation of the RF switch.
If you are using more than one command, add all commands in one line, separated by
a semicolon.
Each sequence of commands is sent to the RF switch when a transducer break
occurs. This is the case when the measurement is done for a certain transducer range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 361
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
If necessary, you can send each command sequence deliberately with the "Send" but-
tons.
In addition to the commands for each transducer range, you can send an initial com-
mand ("Default") that is sent under the following circumstances:
● When you establish a connection to the RF switch.
● When you load a dataset.
● When you change the contents of the dataset.
You can use this default command, for example, to preset the RF switch.
Command sets
Most devices that you can control support commands that comply to the SCPI stan-
dard.
If you are using a device that does not support commands conform to the SCPI stan-
dard, turn off the "SCPI" property.
Remote command:
Default command: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault[:COMMand]
on page 688
Send default command: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault:EXECute
on page 689
Command set: [SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SCPI on page 691
Command sequence synchronization ← RF switch control
Command synchronization makes sure that all commands in the sequence are finished
before the next commands are sent.
When you turn on the "*OPC?" property, the R&S ESW automatically synchronizes the
command sequence for each transducer range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:OPC on page 690
Delay time ← RF switch control
The "Delay" is a time period that the R&S ESW waits after each command sequence
has been sent.
The delay is a useful tool to make sure that the operation that the last command does
is done.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:WAIT on page 692
Web Interface ← RF switch control
This function is only available if an R&S OSP Open Switch and Control Platform is con-
nected to the R&S ESW. The web interface button opens a browser window to config-
ure the R&S OSP.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 362
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
12.4.3 Reference: transducer factor file format
Transducer factor data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further eval-
uation in other applications. Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) for-
mat can also be imported to the R&S ESW for other measurements.
For more information about transducer factors, see "Design and management of trans-
ducer factors" on page 355.
This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for transducer
factors. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of
the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see "Deci-
mal Separator" on page 235).
Table 12-1: ASCII file format for transducer factor files
File contents Description
Header data
sep=; Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for
example)
Type;RS_TransducerFactor; Type of data
FileFormatVersion;1.00; File format version
Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage
OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for
Name;TestTDF1 Transducer factor name
Comment;Transducer for device A Description of transducer factor
XAxisScaling;LINEAR Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values
YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)
NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by
Data section for individual data points
100000000;-50.000000 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line
500000000;-30.000000
1000000000;0.000000
1500000000;-30.000000
2500000000;-50.000000
12.4.4 How to configure the transducer
Configuring the transducer is very similar to configuring transducer factors.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 363
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
The transducer settings are defined in the "Transducer" dialog box which is displayed
when you press the [Setup] key and then select "Transducer".
Stored transducer settings
When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 287.
The following tasks are described:
● "How to find compatible transducer lines" on page 364
● "How to activate and deactivate a transducer" on page 364
● "How to edit existing transducer lines" on page 364
● "How to copy an existing transducer line" on page 365
● "How to delete an existing transducer line" on page 365
● "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 365
● "How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally" on page 366
How to find compatible transducer lines
► In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible".
All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current
measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
How to activate and deactivate a transducer
1. To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the
"Active" setting for it.
The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is
activated.
2. To deactivate a transducer line, deactivate the "Active" setting for it.
After the next sweep, the originally measured values are displayed.
How to edit existing transducer lines
Existing transducer line configurations can be edited.
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.
2. Select the "Edit" button.
3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line"
on page 365.
4. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep if the transducer line is
active.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 364
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
In order to store the changes to the transducer lines in a settings file, select the
"Save" icon in the toolbar.
How to copy an existing transducer line
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.
2. Select the "Copy" button.
The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is opened with the configuration of the selected
transducer.
3. Define a new name to create a new transducer with the same configuration as the
source line.
4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line"
on page 365.
5. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to delete an existing transducer line
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.
2. Select the "Delete" button.
3. Confirm the message.
The transducer line is deleted. After the next sweep, the originally measured val-
ues are displayed.
How to configure a new transducer line
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "New" button.
The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis-
played in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each
change to the configuration.
2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new transducer line.
3. Define the scaling for the x-axis.
4. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 1001:
a) Select "Insert Value".
b) Define the x-value ("Position") and y-value ("Value") of the first data point.
c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point.
d) Repeat this to insert all other data points.
To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then
"Insert Value".
To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after
the last entry and then select "Insert Value".
To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 365
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Transducers
5. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If neces-
sary, correct individual data points or add or delete some.
If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the "Shift x" or
"Shift y" button and defining the shift width.
6. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button.
The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.
How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally
A configured transducer line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new
transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which
has been shifted.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the transducer line.
2. Select the "Edit" button.
3. In the "Edit Transducer Line" dialog box, select the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button and
define the shift width.
4. Save the shifted data points by selecting the "Save" button.
If activated, the trace is recalculated after the next sweep.
How to export a transducer factor
Transducer factor configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other
programs or to be imported later for other measurements.
1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor.
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Define the transducer factor as described in "How to configure a new transducer
line" on page 365.
4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file.
You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the
R&S ESW first.
5. Select a file name and location for the transducer factor.
6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file.
7. Select "Save".
The transducer factor is stored to a file with the specified name and the exten-
sion .CSV.
For details on the file format see Chapter 12.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor file
format", on page 363.
How to import a transducer factor
Transducer factor configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum
of required data can be imported to the R&S ESW.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 366
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings
For details on the required file format see Chapter 12.4.3, "Reference: transducer fac-
tor file format", on page 363.
1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor.
2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button.
3. Select "Import" to load a transducer factor from a file.
You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the
R&S ESW first.
4. Select the file name of the transducer factor.
5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.
6. Select "Select".
The transducer factor is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box.
7. Activate the transducer factor as described in "How to activate and deactivate a
transducer" on page 364.
12.5 Reference frequency settings
Access: [Setup] > "Reference"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 367
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings
Reference Frequency Input.........................................................................................368
└ Behavior in case of missing external reference............................................ 369
└ Tuning Range............................................................................................... 370
└ Frequency..................................................................................................... 370
└ Loop Bandwidth............................................................................................ 370
Reference Frequency Output......................................................................................370
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 370
Reference Frequency Input
The R&S ESW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source
as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used
as the internal reference source. In the external reference setting, all internal oscillators
of the R&S ESW are synchronized to the external reference frequency.
External references are connected to one of the REF INPUT or the SYNC TRIGGER
connectors on the rear panel.
Note: The optional, and more precise OCXO signal can replace the internal reference
source.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 368
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings
The default setting is the internal reference. When an external reference is used, EXT
REF is displayed in the status bar.
The following reference inputs are available:
Table 12-2: Available Reference Frequency Input
Setting Source Connector Frequency Tuning Loop Band- Description
Range width
Internal (OCXO) 10 MHz - 1-100 Hz Internal reference signal
or optional OCXO
External Reference REF INPUT 10 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-100 Hz Fixed external 10 MHZ reference fre-
10 MHz 1..20 MHz quency
Good phase noise performance
External Reference REF INPUT 1..50 MHz +/- 0.5 ppm 0.1 Hz (fixed) Variable external reference frequency
1..50MHz 1..50 MHz in 1 Hz in 1 Hz steps
steps Good external phase noise suppres-
sion. Small tuning range.
+/- 6 ppm 1-30 Hz Variable external reference frequency
in 1 Hz steps
Wide tuning range.
External Reference REF INPUT 100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
100 MHz 100 MHz / 1 GHz Good phase noise performance
External Reference REF INPUT 1 GHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
1 GHz 100 MHz / 1 GHz
Sync Trigger SYNC TRIGGER 100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
INPUT
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 676
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency
on page 676
Behavior in case of missing external reference ← Reference Frequency Input
If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the
instrument can react.
"Show Error The error message "External reference missing" is displayed if no
Flag" valid external reference signal is available. Additionally, the flag "NO
REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization was performed
for the last measurement.
"Switch to The instrument automatically switches back to the internal reference
internal refer- if no external reference is available. Note that you must re-activate
ence" the external reference if it becomes available again at a later time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FALLback on page 678
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 369
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings
Tuning Range ← Reference Frequency Input
The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It
determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per mil-
lion (10-6).
"+/- 0.5 ppm" With this smaller deviation a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0.1
Hz is realized. With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an
external reference signal with a very precise frequency. Due to the
very narrow loop bandwidth, unwanted noise or spurious components
on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated. Fur-
thermore, the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state.
During this locking process, "NO REF" is displayed in the status bar.
"+/- 6 ppm" The larger deviation allows the instrument to synchronize to less pre-
cise external reference input signals.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge on page 677
Frequency ← Reference Frequency Input
Defines the external reference frequency to be used (for variable connectors only).
Loop Bandwidth ← Reference Frequency Input
Defines the speed of internal synchronization with the reference frequency. The setting
requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise.
For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range (+/- 0.5 ppm),
the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0.1 Hz and cannot be changed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth on page 675
Reference Frequency Output
A reference frequency can be provided by the R&S ESW to other devices that are con-
nected to this instrument. If activated, the reference signal is output to the correspond-
ing connector.
"Output 100 MHz"
Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHz
connector.
"Output 640 MHz"
Provides a 640 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHz
connector.
"Output Sync Trigger"
Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the SYNC TRIGGER OUT-
PUT connector.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640 on page 675
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc on page 676
Set to Default
The values for the "Tuning Range", "Frequency" and "Loop Bandwidth" are stored for
each source of "Reference Frequency Input".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 370
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
When you switch the input source, the previously defined settings are restored. You
can restore the default values for all input sources using the "Set to Default" function.
12.6 System configuration settings
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration"
● Hardware information............................................................................................371
● Information on versions and options..................................................................... 372
● System messages.................................................................................................373
● Firmware updates................................................................................................. 374
● General configuration settings.............................................................................. 376
● AC power loss behavior........................................................................................ 378
12.6.1 Hardware information
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Hardware Info"
An overview of the installed hardware in your R&S ESW is provided.
Every listed component is described by its serial number, part number, model informa-
tion, hardware code, and hardware revision.
This information can be useful when problems occur with the instrument and you
require support from Rohde & Schwarz.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? on page 733
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 371
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
12.6.2 Information on versions and options
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Versions + Options"
Information on the firmware version and options installed on your instrument is provi-
ded. The unique Rohde & Schwarz device ID is also indicated here, as it is required for
license and option administration.
You can also install new firmware options in this dialog box.
The table also contains:
● The open source acknowledgements (PDF file) for the firmware and other software
packages used by the R&S ESW
Installing options in secure user mode
Be sure to install any new options before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap-
ter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available!
Expired option licenses
If an option is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you. You can then
use the "Install Option" function to enter a new license key.
If an option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this
case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the
R&S ESW is rebooted. You must then use the "Install Option" function to enter the new
license key.
Remote commands:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 735
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 372
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? on page 732
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? on page 733
Open Source Acknowledgment: Open
Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code used by the R&S ESW
firmware.
Install Option
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.
Install Option by XML
Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R&S ESW using
an XML file. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key
and select "Select".
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you can
also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.
12.6.3 System messages
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "System Messages"
The system messages generated by the R&S ESW are displayed.
The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent mes-
sages are placed at the top of the list. Messages that have occurred since you last vis-
ited the system messages tab are marked with an asterisk '*'.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 373
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message
Buffer Overflow" is displayed. To clear the message buffer, use the "Clear All Mes-
sages" button.
The following information is available:
No device-specific error code
Message brief description of the message
Component hardware messages: name of the affected module
software messages: name of the affected software
Date/Time date and time of the occurrence of the message
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 734
12.6.4 Firmware updates
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Firmware Update"
During instrument start, the R&S ESW checks the installed hardware against the cur-
rent firmware version to ensure that the hardware is supported. If not, an error mes-
sage is displayed ("Wrong Firmware Version") and you are asked to update the firm-
ware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails. To see which compo-
nents are not supported, see the System messages.
Possibly, you also have to update the firmware on your R&S ESW to enable additional
new features or if reasons for improvement come up. Ask your sales representative or
check the Rohde & Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firmware
update package includes at least a setup file and release notes.
Before updating the firmware on your instrument, read the release notes delivered with
the firmware version.
Installing options in secure user mode
Be sure to perform any firmware updates before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see
Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 374
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
Enter the name or browse for the firmware installation file and press the "Install" but-
ton.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate on page 735
How to update the instrument firmware
1. Download the update package from the Rohde & Schwarz website and store it on
a memory stick, on the instrument, or on a server network drive that the instrument
can access.
2. NOTICE! Stop measurement. Do not update the firmware during a running mea-
surement.
If a measurement is running, stop it by pressing the highlighted [Run Cont] or [Run
Single] key.
3. Select the [Setup] key.
4. Select the "System Config" softkey.
5. Select the "Firmware Update" tab.
6. In the file selection dialog box, select the ESWSetup*.exe file.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ESW firmware, you
can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.
7. Select "Install" to start the update.
8. After the firmware update, the R&S ESW reboots automatically.
9. Depending on the previous firmware version, a reconfiguration of the hardware
might be required during the first startup of the firmware. The reconfiguration starts
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 375
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
automatically, and a message box informs you about the process. When the recon-
figuration has finished, the instrument again reboots automatically.
Note: Do not switch off the instrument during the reconfiguration process.
Now the firmware update is complete.
It is necessary that you perform a self-alignment after the update (see Chap-
ter 12.1.4, "How to align the instrument", on page 337).
12.6.5 General configuration settings
Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Config"
General system settings, for example concerning the initial behaviour of the R&S ESW
after booting, can also be configured.
Preset Mode................................................................................................................376
Default Filter Type for Spectrum Mode....................................................................... 377
Out-of-range value behavior....................................................................................... 377
SecureUser Mode....................................................................................................... 377
└ Changing the password................................................................................ 377
Number block behavior............................................................................................... 378
Preset Mode
The preset mode selects the application that is started after an instrument preset.
The presettings can be defined in the "Config" tab of the "System Configuration" dialog
box.
For details on operating modes see Chapter 7, "Applications", on page 79.
"SAN" Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode
"REC" Receiver application
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 376
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible on page 736
Default Filter Type for Spectrum Mode
Selects the type of resolution filter that is selected after a preset in the spectrum appli-
cation.
"Normal (3 Selects 3 dB filter.
dB)"
"Gauss (6 dB)" Selects 6 dB filter.
Note that in the receiver application, the default filter is always the 6
dB filter.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:FILTer on page 736
Out-of-range value behavior
By default, if you enter a value that is outside the valid range in an input field for a set-
ting, a warning is displayed and the value is not accepted. Alternatively, entries below
the minimum value can automatically be set to the minimum entry, and entries above
the maximum value set to the maximum entry. This behavior avoids errors and facili-
tates setting correct values.
SecureUser Mode
If activated, the R&S ESW requires a reboot and then automatically logs in using the
"SecureUser" account.
Data that the R&S ESW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile
memory instead. Data that is stored in volatile memory can be accessed by the user
during the current instrument session. However, when the instrument’s power is
removed, all data in volatile memory is erased.
The Secure User Mode can only be activated or deactivated by a user with administra-
tor rights.
Note: Storing instrument settings permanently. Before you activate secure user mode,
store any instrument settings that are required beyond the current session, such as
predefined instrument settings, transducer files, or self-alignment data.
For details on the secure user mode, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the
secure user mode", on page 36.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] on page 736
Note: Initially after installation of the R&S ESW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
Changing the password ← SecureUser Mode
When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are promp-
ted to change the passwords for all user accounts to improve system security.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 377
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
System configuration settings
To save the new password, select "Save". The password dialog for the next user is dis-
played, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts.
If you cancel the dialog without changing the password, the password dialog for the
next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password for all
user accounts. It is possible to continue in secure user mode without changing the
passwords, and you will not be prompted to do so again. However, we strongly recom-
mend that you do define a more secure password for all users.
By default, the password characters are not displayed to ensure confidentiality during
input. To display the characters, select "Show password".
To display the onscreen keyboard, select "Keyboard".
Number block behavior
Defines the default behavior of the keypad on the front panel of the R&S ESW for text
input. Depending on the type of values you most frequently enter using the keypad, a
different default is useful.
"123" Numeric values are entered when you press a key on the keypad.
To enter alphanumeric values, use an external or the on-screen key-
board, or switch this setting.
"ABC" (Default)
Every key on the keypad represents several characters and one num-
ber. If you press the key multiple times in quick succession, you tog-
gle through the symbols assigned to the key. For the assignment,
refer to Table 6-3.
12.6.6 AC power loss behavior
Access: BIOS
Using a specific configuration setting in the BIOS of the R&S ESW, you can define how
the instrument behaves after the AC power supply is interrupted. The setting applies
regardless whether the interruption occurs due to an irregular power outage in the
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 378
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
mains supply, by removing the power cable, or by switching the instrument power sup-
ply off.
The setting supports the following values:
● "Power Off": Instrument remains switched off.
● "Power On": Instrument automatically switches on as soon as power supply is
restored.
● "Last State": (Default) Instrument restores the state that it was in before the outage
occurred.
To change the instrument's power loss behavior
Prerequisite: the instrument is switched off and a keyboard is connected.
1. Switch on the power switch on the rear panel of the R&S ESW.
2. Watch for the prompt on the display, then press [DEL] on the keyboard to enter the
BIOS setup.
3. In the BIOS menu, select "Chipset" > "PCH-IO Configuration" > "Restore AC Power
Loss".
4. Select the required setting as described above.
5. In the BIOS menu, select "Save & Exit" > "Save Changes and Exit".
12.7 Service functions
Access: [Setup] > "Service"
When unexpected problems arise with the R&S ESW some service functions may help
you solve them.
For more helpful information for support, see also Chapter 16.6, "Collecting information
for support", on page 796
● R&S support information....................................................................................... 379
● Self-test settings and results................................................................................. 380
● Signal path check..................................................................................................381
● Calibration signal display...................................................................................... 382
● Service functions...................................................................................................383
● Hardware diagnostics............................................................................................385
12.7.1 R&S support information
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "R&S Support"
In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to
your Rohde & Schwarz support center.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 379
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
Create R&S Support Information................................................................................ 380
Save Device Footprint.................................................................................................380
Create R&S Support Information
Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the sys-
tem configuration information ("Device Footprint"), the current eeprom data and a
screenshot of the screen display.
This data is stored to the C:\R_S\Instr\User directory on the instrument.
The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file
creation.
If you contact the Rohde & Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send
these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? on page 738
Save Device Footprint
Creates an *.xml file with information on installed hardware, software, image and
FPGA versions. The *.xml file is stored under
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\devicedata\
xml\ on the instrument. It is also included in the service ZIP file (see "Create R&S
Support Information" on page 380).
12.7.2 Self-test settings and results
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Selftest"
If the R&S ESW fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defec-
tive modules.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 380
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result
is displayed. You can abort a running test.
In case of failure a short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associ-
ated value range and the corresponding test results are indicated.
A running Sequencer process is aborted when you start a self-test.
If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still run-
ning, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is comple-
ted. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Remote command:
*TST? on page 461
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult? on page 684
12.7.3 Signal path check
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Signal Path Check"
You can perform a quick self test of the signal path components. This self test automat-
ically checks if the components in the signal path (preselector filters, preamplifier etc.)
operate within their limits.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 381
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
► Select "Start Signal Path Check".
The R&S ESW starts the signal path check and shows the process in the panel
next to the buttons. If all components that are tested are alright, the test passes.
Otherwise, you get a list of the components that are not within their limits.
You can stop the self-test anytime with the "Abort Signal Path" feature.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:EXECute? on page 684
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:RESult? on page 685
12.7.4 Calibration signal display
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Calibration Signal"
As an alternative to the RF input signal from the front panel connector, you can use the
instrument's calibration signal as the input signal, for example to perform service func-
tions on.
NONE..........................................................................................................................382
Calibration Frequency RF........................................................................................... 382
└ Spectrum.......................................................................................................383
└ Frequency..................................................................................................... 383
Calibration Frequency MW..........................................................................................383
NONE
Uses the current RF signal at the input, i.e. no calibration signal (default).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 683
Calibration Frequency RF
Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 382
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency on page 683
Spectrum ← Calibration Frequency RF
Defines whether a broadband or narrowband calibration signal is sent to the RF input.
"Narrowband" Used to calibrate the absolute level of the frontend at 64 MHz.
"Broadband" Used to calibrate the IF filter.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] on page 683
Frequency ← Calibration Frequency RF
Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil-
ter calibration (max. 64 MHz).
For narrowband signals, 64 MHz is sent.
Calibration Frequency MW
Uses the microwave calibration signal as the RF input (for frequencies higher than 8
GHz). This function is used to calibrate the YIG-filter on the microwave converter. The
microwave calibration signal is pulsed.
You can define whether the distance between input pulses is small or wide.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 683
12.7.5 Service functions
Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Service Function"
Using service functions
The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect
use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S ESW.
Therefore, only user accounts with administrator rights can use service functions and
many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. These functions are
described in the instrument service manual.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 383
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
Service Function......................................................................................................... 384
Send............................................................................................................................384
Numeric Mode.............................................................................................................384
Clear History............................................................................................................... 384
Password.................................................................................................................... 385
Clear Results...............................................................................................................385
Save Results............................................................................................................... 385
Result List................................................................................................................... 385
Service Function
Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name.
The selection list includes all functions previously selected (since the last "Clear His-
tory" action).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 737
Send
Starts the selected service function.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 737
Numeric Mode
If activated, the service function is selected by its numeric code. Otherwise, the func-
tion is selected by its textual name.
Clear History
Deletes the list of previously selected service functions.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 384
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Service functions
Password
Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal opera-
tion of the R&S ESW. There are different levels of service functions, depending on how
restrictive their use is handled. Each service level has a different password.
"Reset Password" clears any previously entered password and returns to the most
restrictive service level.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 739
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet on page 739
Clear Results
Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete on page 738
Save Results
Saves the results of all previously performed service functions to a file stored as
C:\R_S\INSTR\results\Servicelog.txt.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE on page 738
Result List
The Results List indicates the status and results of the executed service functions.
12.7.6 Hardware diagnostics
In case problems occur with the instrument hardware, some diagnostic tools provide
information that may support troubleshooting.
The hardware diagnostics tools are available in the "Hardware Diagnostics" tab of the
"Service" dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 385
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Relays Cycle Counter................................................................................................. 386
Relays Cycle Counter
The hardware relays built into the R&S ESW may fail after a large number of switching
cycles (see data sheet). The counter indicates how many switching cycles the individ-
ual relays have performed since they were installed.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt? on page 732
12.8 Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling"
Each of the applications of the R&S ESW is usually treated as an independent entity
regarding their configuration: changing a setting in one measurement channel does not
automatically change the corresponding setting in another channel.
For example, changing the frequency in the receiver application does not, by default,
change the frequency in the spectrum application.
However, sharing settings can be convenient for certain measurement tasks. The
R&S ESW provides a tool to couple (or synchronize) selected parameters across appli-
cations - the coupling manager.
The coupling managers allows you not only to couple parameters, but also markers
and lines accross applications.
● General parameter coupling..................................................................................387
● Using the custom coupling manager.....................................................................389
● Example for a user-defined parameter coupling................................................... 392
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 386
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
12.8.1 General parameter coupling
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "General"
The "General" tab of the coupling manager contains several parameters that you can
couple across all (active) measurement channels - if the channel supports the corre-
sponding parameter.
When you couple a parameter across all active measurement channels, a change in
the currently selected application is passed on to all other active measurement chan-
nels.
Example:
You have opened one instance of the spectrum application, two instances of the
receiver application and one instance of the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod application.
The currently selected channel is the first receiver channel (as shown in the picture).
When you turn the coupling of the frequency on, changing the frequency in the
"Receiver" channel also changes the frequency in the "Spectrum", "Receiver 2" and
"Analog Demod" channels.
Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels....................................387
Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms.................................................................... 389
Restoring the default configuration............................................................................. 389
Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels
To synchronize a specific parameter, turn on the corresponding function.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 387
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Coupling Effect when turned on
"Center Frequency" Synchronizes the (center / receiver) frequency
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer on page 707
"Start / Stop Frequency" Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for measurements in the fre-
quency domain.
Note: The start and stop frequencies can automatically change when you
change another frequency parameter (like center frequency or span).
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN on page 709
"Marker ➙ Frequency" Synchronizes the receiver frequency in the receiver application with the
frequency of marker 1 in the spectrum application.
Note: Simultaneous synchronization of center frequency, start and stop
frequency and synchronization of marker and center frequency is not pos-
sible.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer on page 708
"Attenuation + Unit" Synchronizes the attenuation and the unit of the level axis.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen on page 706
"Minimum Attenuation" Synchronizes the 10 dB Minimum Attenuation feature.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:PROT on page 709
"Preamplifier" Synchronizes the gain of the optional preamplifier.
Note: If you have selected automatic selection of the ideal gain in a
receiver application, only the calculated gain value is synchronized.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN on page 707
"Resolution Bandwidth" Synchronizes the measurement bandwidth.
Note: Simultaneous synchronization of the video bandwidth and the reso-
lution bandwidth is not possible.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth on page 706
"Video Bandwidth" Synchronizes the video bandwidth.
Note: Simultaneous synchronization of the video bandwidth and the reso-
lution bandwidth is not possible.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:VBW on page 709
"Limit Lines" Activates the limit line over all channels.
Note: Limit lines are only synchronized over channels if the limit line is
compatible to the channel configuration (especially units of the x- and y-
axis).
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit on page 708
"AC DC Coupling" Synchronizes the input coupling.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC on page 706
"Output Configuration" Synchronizes the settings for signal output.
Note: Changing the state of the output coupling here adjusts the state of
the Output Coupling button in the "Output" dialog box.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod on page 707
"Preselector" Synchronizes the preselector configuration (state, mode and filter charac-
teristics).
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel on page 708
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 388
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Note that you cannot synchronize all parameters at the same time, because some
parameters are interdependent. For example, you cannot synchronize the resolution
and video bandwidth simultaneously, because the video bandwidth depends on the
resolution bandwidth and vice versa.
Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms
Select all items available in the general coupling manager using the "Enable All Items"
button.
Note that you cannot actually select all items, because some of them are mutually
exclusive.
Deselect all items available in the coupling manager using the "Disable All Items" but-
ton.
Remote command:
not supported
Restoring the default configuration
You can restore the default parameter coupling configuration any time with the "Default
Config" button.
Remote command:
not supported
12.8.2 Using the custom coupling manager
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "User Coupling"
The "User Coupling" tab of the coupling manager contains several features that allow
you to create new and highly customized synchronization mechanisms.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 389
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
The dialog contains a table that shows the custom couplings that you have already cre-
ated (if you have not yet created a custom coupling, the table is empty). In addition, it
provides access to another dialog box that allows you to define a custom coupling.
<Number> Index number of the corresponding coupling mechanism.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?
on page 715
Opens a dialog box to edit the selected coupling.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 710
Parameter 1 / 2 Shows the parameters that are coupled.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 713
State Turns the coupling on and off.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe on page 717
Direction Selects the direction(s) in which the coupling is applied.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation on page 716
Deletes the selected coupling.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove on page 716
Info Shows information (for example restrictions) for the selected coupling.
Note that in most cases, no information is displayed.
Remote command: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO on page 713
Creating and editing synchronization mechanisms
Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "User Coupling" > "Add New User Cou-
pling"
User couplings are a way to utilize coupling mechanisms other than those available in
the "General" tab of the coupling manager. Using those allows you to create highly
customized couplings between measurement channels.
Compared to the predefined couplings, user couplings do not necessarily have to syn-
chronize all active measurement channels. Instead you can define specific channels
that are synchronized with each other (in any combination you wish for), while other
channels remain independent.
Example:
You currently run two instances of the spectrum application, two instances of the
receiver application and one instance of the analog demodulator.
In this scenario, you could, for example, synchronize only the first instance of the spec-
trum application with the first instance of the receiver application, while the other three
channels remain independent.
Alternatively, you could, for example, synchronize all instances of the receiver applica-
tion, while the spectrum and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod applications remain independ-
ent.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 390
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Selecting the channels to synchronize........................................................................391
Selecting the measurement windows to synchronize................................................. 391
Selecting the parameter to synchronize......................................................................392
Applying the coupling mechanism...............................................................................392
Selecting the channels to synchronize
You can select the channels you would like to synchronize from the "Channel 1" and
"Channel 2" dropdown menu.
The contents of the dropdown menu depends on the number and type of measurement
channels that are currently active. In addition, the availability of the "Channel 2" drop-
down menu depends on the item you have selected from the "Channel 1" dropdown
menu.
● <channel name>
Synchronizes two specific channels of the same type or of different type.
The <channel name> of the currently active channels is displayed in the channel
bar. Because channel names are arbitrary, the labels of the items in the dropdown
menu are variable.
When you select a specific channel, the "Channel 2" dropdown menu is available
to select the second channel.
Note: If you want to synchronize another channel, you have to define an additional
user coupling.
● All <application type>
Synchronizes all active channels of the same application (receiver, spectrum, I/Q
analyzer or analog demodulation).
In that case, the "Channel 2" dropdown menu is not available.
● All channels
Synchronizes all active channels, regardless of their type and name.
This is basically the same as the coupling available in the "General" tab of the cou-
pling manager.
The "Channel 2" dropdown menu is not available for synchronization across all
channels.
Remote command:
Query channel: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST? on page 712
Select channel: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 713
Select channel: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 710
Selecting the measurement windows to synchronize
Available for synchronization of instances of the analog demodulation application.
When you are synchronizing an instance of the analog demodulation application, you
can also select the measurement window that should be synchronized. This feature is
available, because, in the analog demodulation application, the measurement windows
can have configurations that are independent from each other.
You can select the windows you would like to synchronize from the "Specifics for Win-
dow" dropdown menus.
Remote command:
Query windows: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST? on page 717
Select a window with INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 713
Select a window with INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 710
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 391
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
Selecting the parameter to synchronize
You can synchronize various parameters and settings from different categories across
measurement channels.
To synchronize a parameter, select one from the "Coupling Elements" list. The list con-
tains only parameters that are available in the application you have selected from the
"Channel <x>" dropdown menu. So, for example, synchronizing the reference level is
not possible if one the channels you would like to synchronize is an instance of the
receiver application.
Note that the "Coupling Elements 2" list is available only when you have selected syn-
chronization across two specific channels (and not all channels of the same kind or all
channels). In addition, the second list shows only parameters that are compatible to
the first channel. If there is no compatible parameter, the list remains empty.
Tip: The "Category" dropdown menu filters the available parameters by a certain cate-
gory.
Remote command:
Query parameters: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? on page 712
Select parameter: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 713
Select parameter: INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 710
Applying the coupling mechanism
When you are done configuring a new synchronization mechanism, save your settings
with the "Couple Selected Parameters" button.
The new coupling mechanism is now displayed in the custom coupling table and you
can apply it whenever you like.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 713
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 710
(Both commands also couple the parameters.)
12.8.3 Example for a user-defined parameter coupling
Currently two Spectrum application channels are active, one I/Q analyzer channel, and
two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels.
Synchronizing all Spectrum channels
The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all
Spectrum application channels, while the I/Q analyzer and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod
applications remain independent.
1. Select the [SETUP] key.
2. Select "Parameter Coupling".
3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.
4. Select "Add New User Coupling".
5. From the "Channel 1" list, select "All Spectrum".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 392
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
6. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Center Frequency".
7. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".
8. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
9. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Center Frequency" to 1 GHz.
10. Switch to the second Spectrum channel.
The center frequency in the second Spectrum channel is also set to 1 GHz.
Synchronizing specific channels
The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the attenuation only for the
first Spectrum channel and the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel, while the other
three channels remain independent.
1. Select "Add New User Coupling".
2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "Spectrum 1".
3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Attenuation".
4. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 1".
5. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Attenuation".
6. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".
7. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
8. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Attenuation" to 15 dB.
9. Switch to the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel.
The attenuation in the second AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel is also set to
15 dB.
Synchronizing markers in AM/FM/PM Analog Demod windows
Now you have two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels. AnaDemod1 has an FM
Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window. AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an
RF Time Domain window. Only when the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum win-
dow is moved, the marker in the RF Spectrum window is to move to the same position.
1. Select "Add New User Coupling".
2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "AnaDemod 1".
3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".
4. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the FM Spectrum
window).
5. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 2".
6. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 393
R&S®ESW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration
7. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the RF Spectrum
window).
8. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".
9. In the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box, for the coupling definition for the frequency
markers in the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels, select the "Direction": "->"
10. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.
11. In the first AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum to
900 MHz.
In the second AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum is
also at 900 MHz.
12. In the second AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum to
1100 MHz.
In the first AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum is still at
900 MHz.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 394
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols
13 Network operation and remote control
In addition to working with the R&S ESW interactively, located directly at the instru-
ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods
for remote operation are supported:
● Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network
● Using the web browser interface in a LAN network
● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network
● Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface
Basic information on operating the R&S ESW via remote control is provided here. This
information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R&S ESW.
For additional information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following
documents available from the Rohde & Schwarz website:
● Remote control via SCPI
● 1EF62: Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Network Analyzers
● 1MA171: How to use Rohde & Schwarz Instruments in MATLAB
● 1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 13.6, "How to
set up a network and remote control", on page 435.
● Remote control interfaces and protocols...............................................................395
● Status reporting system........................................................................................ 400
● GPIB languages....................................................................................................414
● The IECWIN tool................................................................................................... 415
● Network and remote control settings.....................................................................416
● How to set up a network and remote control.........................................................435
13.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols
The <instrument> supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control. The
following table gives an overview.
For a description of the protocols refer to Remote control via SCPI.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 395
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols
Table 13-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Inter- Protocols, VISA*) address string Port **) Remarks
face
Local HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) TCP port: 4880 A LAN connector is located
Area TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] on the rear panel of the
Net- instrument.
work VXI-11 TCP or UDP port: 111
(LAN)
TCPIP::host address::inst0[::INSTR] TCP port: well-known ports (600
- 1023) for Linux or registered
Library: VISA
ports (1024 - 49151) for Windows
socket communication (Raw Ethernet, simple Telnet) SCPI raw, TCP port: 5025, 5125
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name]:: SCPI telnet, TCP port: 5024,
<port>::SOCKET 5124
Library: VISA or socket controller
VNC via VNC client: 5800/5900
Device web: 5850
Device web / web control 80
GPIB VISA*) address string: A GPIB bus interface
(IEC/ GPIB::primary address[::INSTR] according to the IEC 625.1/
IEEE IEEE 488.1 standard is
Bus (no secondary address) located on the rear panel of
Inter- the instrument.
face)
USB VISA*) address string: USB connectors are loca-
USB::<vendor ID>::<product_ID>:: ted on the front and rear
<serial_number>[::INSTR] panel of the instrument.
*) VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA
installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces.
**) By default, R&S ESW use these ports for communication via LAN control interface. If necessary, adapt your firewall to allow for
use of these ports.
13.1.1 LAN interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting
of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. The network card can be oper-
ated with the following interfaces:
● 10 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3
● 100 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3u
● 1Gbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3ab
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the
LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected
using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5). The
TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the
instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be
installed on the controller.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 396
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols
IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify
and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where:
● TCPIP designates the network protocol used
● host address is the IP address or host name of the device
● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstru-
ment;
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default)
– hislip0 selects the HiSLIP protocol
● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
● port determines the used port number
● SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class
Example:
● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
● The DNS host name is ESW26-123456; the valid resource string using HiSLIP is:
TCPIP::ESW26-123456::hislip0
● A raw socket connection can be established using:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET
Identifying instruments in a network
If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
the resource string.
For details on configuring the LAN connection, see Chapter 13.6.1, "How to configure a
network", on page 435.
● LAN web browser interface................................................................................... 397
13.1.1.1 LAN web browser interface
The LAN web browser interface allows for easy configuration of the LAN and remote
control of the R&S ESW without additional installation requirements.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 397
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols
The instrument's LAN web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant
browsers.
Via the web browser interface to the R&S ESW you can control the instrument
remotely from another PC. Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel
simulation. File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is
also available. Using this feature, several users can access and operate the R&S ESW
simultaneously. This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes.
For details, see Chapter 13.6.1.4, "How to configure the LAN using the web browser
interface", on page 440 and Chapter 13.6.5, "How to control the R&S ESW via the web
browser interface", on page 445.
If you do not want other users in the LAN to be able to access and operate the
R&S ESW you can deactivate this function.
See Chapter 13.6.6, "How to deactivate the web browser interface", on page 447.
Restrictions
Only user accounts with administrator rights can use the LAN web browser functional-
ity.
To display the LAN web browser interface
► In the address field of the browser on your PC, type the host name or IP address of
the instrument, for example: http://10.113.10.203.
The instrument home page (welcome page) opens.
The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements:
● "LAN"
– "Home" opens the instrument home page.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 398
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols
The home page displays device information, including the VISA resource string
in read-only format.
The "Device Indicator" button allows you to physically identify the instrument.
This is useful if you have several instruments and want to know which instru-
ment the LAN home page belongs to. To identify the instrument, activate the
"Device Indicator". Then check the "LAN Status" indicator of the instruments.
– "LAN Configuration" allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a
ping.
(See "Ping client" on page 441.)
– "Utilities" provides access to an event log.
● "Instrument Control"
– "Web Control" provides remote access to the instrument via VNC (no installa-
tion required). Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel sim-
ulation.
– "File Download" downloads files from the instrument.
– "File Upload" uploads files to the instrument.
(See Chapter 13.6.5, "How to control the R&S ESW via the web browser interface",
on page 445.)
● "License Manager"
– "License Manager" allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to acti-
vate, register or unregister licenses.
● "Help"
"www.rohde-schwarz.com" opens the Rohde & Schwarz home page.
13.1.2 USB interface
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be con-
nected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be
installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the
USB connection is established. You do not have to enter an address string or install a
separate driver.
USB address
The used USB address string is:
USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR]
where:
● <vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz (0x0AAD)
● <product ID> is the product ID for the Rohde & Schwarz instrument
● <serial number> is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 399
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Table 13-2: Product IDs for R&S ESW
Instrument model Product ID
ESW8 16E
ESW26 16F
ESW44 170
Example:
USB::0x0AAD::0x0016E::100001::INSTR
0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz
0x0016E is the product ID for the R&S ESW44
100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument
13.2 Status reporting system
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface
using the STATus... commands.
(See Chapter 14.10, "Using the status register", on page 740).
For details on the status reporting system, see Remote control via SCPI.
● Hierarchy of status registers................................................................................. 400
● Contents of the status registers............................................................................ 401
● Reset values of the status reporting system......................................................... 413
13.2.1 Hierarchy of status registers
As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 400
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
15 not used 15 not used 15 not used 15 not used 15 not used
& logic AND
of all bits 14 14 Subrange limit reached 14 14 14
logic OR
13 Threshold signal active 13 13 13 13
*) one register for each channel
12 12 12 12 12
Red font: Spectrum application only
11 11 RF Input 2 11 11 11
Blue font: Receiver application only
10 Range completed 10 RF Input 1 10 10 10
I/Q Analyzer = Spectrum mode
9 SCAN results available 9 Subrange 10 9 9 9
8 HCOPy in progress 8 Subrange 9 8 8 8
7 7 Subrange 8 7 CACLR FAIL 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL 7 LIMit 8 FAIL
6 6 Subrange 7 6 ALT3...11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL 6 LIMit 7 FAIL
5 Waiting for TRIGger 5 Subrange 6 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL 5 LIMit 6 FAIL
4 MEASuring 4 Subrange 5 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL 4 LIMit 5 FAIL
3 SWEeping 3 Subrange 4 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL 3 LIMit 4 FAIL
2 2 Subrange 3 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL 2 LIMit 3 FAIL
1 1 Subrange 2 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL 1 LIMit 2 FAIL
SRQ
0 CALibrating 0 Subrange 1 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL 0 LIMit 1 FAIL
STATus:OPERation STAT:QUES:TRANsducer *) STAT:QUES:ACPLimit *) STAT:QUES:LMARgin<n> *) STAT:QUES:LIMit<n> *)
& 7
6 RQS/MSS
& 5 ESB
& 4 MAV
15 not used 15 not used 15 not used
& 3 15 not used
& 2 14 DIQ
9 9 9
1 13 TRANsducer break
8 External REFerence 8 8
0 12 ACPLimit
7 7 7
SRE STB 11
6 6 6
10 LMARGin
5 5 5
9 LIMit
4 4 4
8 CALibration (=UNCAL)
3 3 3 INPut_overload
& 7
2 2 2 IF_OVerload
& 6
1 LO UNLocked 1 1
& 5 FREQuency
0 OVEN COLD 0 Frontend temp. error 0 OVERload
& 4 TEMPerature
STAT:QUES:FREQuency *) STAT:QUES:TEMPerature *) STAT:QUES:POWer *)
& 3 POWer
& 2 TIME
1
0 EXTended 15 not used 15 not used
15 not used
PPE
STATus:QUEStionable
5 5 5
ISTflag 4 4 4 FATal
& 7 Power On 3
3 3 ERRor
& 6 User Request 2
2 2 WARNing
& 5 Command Error 1 INFO
1 Sweep time too low 1 INFO
& 4 Execution Error 0
0 0 MESSage
Device Dependent
& 3
Error STAT:QUES:TIME *) STAT:QUES:EXTended *) STAT:QUES:EXTended:INFO *)
& 2 Query Error
& 1
Error/ Event Output & 0 Operation Complete
Queue Buffer
ESE ESR
Figure 13-1: Graphical overview of the R&S ESW status registers hierarchy
All status registers have the same internal structure.
13.2.2 Contents of the status registers
In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more
detail.
● Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)..............................402
● IST flag and parallel poll enable register (PPE).................................................... 403
● Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)....................403
● STATus:OPERation register..................................................................................404
● STATus:QUEStionable register............................................................................. 405
● STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register............................................................. 406
● STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register........................................................... 407
● STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register..................................................408
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 401
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
● STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register........................................................ 408
● STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register.................................................................... 409
● STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register............................................................. 409
● STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register................................................................ 410
● STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register.......................................................411
● STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register.................................................................... 411
● STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register....................................................... 412
13.2.2.1 Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over-
view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis-
ters. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.
The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and
assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.
Table 13-3: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No. Meaning
0...1 Not used
2 Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error mes-
sage. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.
3 QUEStionable status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be speci-
fied in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
4 MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 402
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
6 MSS bit (main status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7 STATus:OPERation status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
13.2.2.2 IST flag and parallel poll enable register (PPE)
As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It
can be read by means of a parallel poll or using the command *IST?.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to
the IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE,
with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the
"ORing" of all results. The PPE can be set using commands *PRE and read using com-
mand *PRE?.
13.2.2.3 Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI
register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE
and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set.
The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command
*ESE?.
Table 13-4: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No. Meaning
0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1 Not used
2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between
-300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 403
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is
entered into the error queue.
6 User Request
This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.
7 Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
13.2.2.4 STATus:OPERation register
The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the
R&S ESW. It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the
last read out.
Table 13-5: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register
Bit No. Meaning
0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.
1-2 Not used
3 SWEeping
Sweep is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 4
Available in the Spectrum application.
4 MEASuring
Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3
Available in the Spectrum application.
5 Waiting for TRIgger
Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal.
Available in the Spectrum application.
6-7 Not used
8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
9 SCAN results available
This bit is set when a block of scan results is available. Must be enabled by TRAC:FEED:CONT
ALWays.
Available in the Receiver application.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 404
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
10 Range completed
In the Spectrum application, this bit is set when a range in the sweep list has been completed if
"Stop after Range" has been activated.
In the Receiver application, this bit is set when the end of a scan range has been reached. To
resume the scan, use INITiate:CONMeas.
11-12 Not used
13 Threshold signal active
Available for the Receiver application.
14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.5 STATus:QUEStionable register
The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do
not meet the specifications.
You can read out the register with STAT:QUES:COND or STAT:QUES:EVEN.
The STATus:QUEStionable register "sums up" the information from all subregisters
(e.g. bit 2 sums up the information for all STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe registers).
For some subregisters, there may be separate registers for each active channel. Thus,
if a status bit in the STATus:QUEStionable register indicates an error, the error may
have occurred in any of the channel-specific subregisters. In this case, you must check
the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error. By
default, querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently
selected channel.
Table 13-6: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No. Meaning
0-1 Unused
2 TIMe
This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register provides more information on the error type.
Available in the Spectrum application.
3 POWer
This bit is set if the measured power level in any of the active channels is questionable.
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register provides more information on the error type.
4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if the temperature is questionable.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 405
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
5 FREQuency
This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference
frequency in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register provides more information on the error type.
6-7 Unused
8 CALibration
This bit is set if the R&S ESW is unaligned ("UNCAL" display)
9 LIMit
This bit is set if a limit value is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register provides more information on the error type.
10 LMARgin
This bit is set if a margin is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register provides more information on the error type.
11 SYNC (device-specific)
This bit is set if the R&S ESW is not synchronized to the signal that is applied.
The R&S ESW is not synchronized if the results deviate too much from the expected value dur-
ing premeasurements
12 ACPLimit
This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register provides more information on the error type.
Available in the Spectrum application.
13 TRANsducer break
This bit is set if a transducer break occurs and indicates the next range.
The Chapter 13.2.2.15, "STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register", on page 412 provides
more information on the error type.
14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.6 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Available for the Spectrum application.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of
a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for
each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
or STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 406
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Table 13-7: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 ADJ UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel
1 ADJ LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
6 ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 … 11.
7 CACLR FAIL
This bit is set if the CACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.
8 GAP ACLR FAIL
This bit is set if the ACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.
9 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.7 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register
The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register contains further status information
not covered by the other status registers of the R&S ESW. A separate EXTended reg-
ister exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition?
or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]?
Table 13-8: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register
Bit No. Meaning
0 not used
1 INFO
This bit is set if a status message is available for the application.
Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO reg-
ister.
2 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 407
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
13.2.2.8 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register
The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register contains information on the
type of messages that occur during operation of the R&S ESW. A separate INFO regis-
ter exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]?. You can
query all messages that occur for a specific channel using the command SYSTem:
ERRor:EXTended? on page 734.
Table 13-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register
Bit No. Meaning
0 MESSage
This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation.
1 INFO
This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application.
2 WARNing
This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement, e.g. the settings no longer
match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily.
3 ERRor
This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement, e.g. due to missing data or wrong set-
tings, so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly.
4 FATal
This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possi-
ble.
5 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.9 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register contains information about the condi-
tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency. A separate frequency register
exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 13-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
Bit No. Meaning
0 OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO"
is displayed.
1 LO UNLocked
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. "LOUNL" is displayed.
2 to 7 Not used
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 408
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
8 EXTernalREFerence
This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable
external reference source.
In that case the synthesizer can not lock. The frequency in all probability is not accurate.
9 to 14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.10 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register contains information about the results of a
limit check when you are working with limit lines.
A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window.
Table 13-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.
1 LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.
2 LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.
3 LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.
4 LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.
5 LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.
6 LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.
7 LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.
8 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.11 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
This register contains information about the observance of limit margins.
A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 409
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.
Table 13-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
Bit No. Meaning
0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1 LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.
2 LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.
3 LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.
4 LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.
5 LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated.
6 LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.
7 LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.
8 to 14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.12 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register contains information about possible
overload situations that may occur during operation of the R&S ESW. A separate
power register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? or
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
Table 13-13: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register
Bit No. Meaning
0 OVERload
This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing
damage to the device.
The R&S ESW displays the keyword "RF OVLD".
1 Unused
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 410
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
2 IF_OVerload
This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path.
The R&S ESW displays the keyword "IF OVLD".
3 Input Overload
This bit is set if the signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum.
The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device. In order to re-enable
measurement, decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the
mixer input.
The R&S ESW displays the keyword "INPUT OVLD".
(Available in the Spectrum application.)
4 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.13 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register
The STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register contains information about possible
temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the R&S ESW. A separate
temperature register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?
Table 13-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register
Bit No. Meaning
0 This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self-
alignment temperature.
During warmup, this bit is always 1.
For details see "Temperature check" on page 333.
1 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.14 STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register
Available for the Spectrum application.
The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register contains information about possible time
errors that may occur during operation of the R&S ESW. A separate time register
exists for each active channel.
Table 13-15: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register
Bit No. Meaning
0 not used
1 Sweep time too low
This bit is set if the sweep time is too low.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 411
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
2 to 14 Unused
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.2.15 STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register
Available for the Receiver application.
The STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register contains information about the state
and condition of measurements with transducer sets. A separate TRANsducer register
exists for each active channel.
It indicates that a transducer break has been reached. It also indicates the next range
that is to be swept. You can continue the sweep with INITiate<n>:CONMeas
on page 467.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? on page 741.
Table 13-16: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 Range 1
This bit is set if subrange 1 has been reached.
1 Range 2
This bit is set if subrange 2 has been reached.
2 Range 3
This bit is set if subrange 3 has been reached.
3 Range 4
This bit is set if subrange 4 has been reached.
4 Range 5
This bit is set if subrange 5 has been reached.
5 Range 6
This bit is set if subrange 6 has been reached.
6 Range 7
This bit is set if subrange 7 has been reached.
7 Range 8
This bit is set if subrange 8 has been reached.
8 Range 9
This bit is set if subrange 9 has been reached.
9 Range 10
This bit is set if subrange 10 has been reached.
10 RF Input 1
This bit is set if the transducer has been assigned to RF input 1.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 412
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system
Bit No. Meaning
11 RF Input 2
This bit is set if the transducer has been assigned to RF input 2.
12 to 13 Unused
14 Subrange limit
This bit is set when the transducer is at the point of changeover from one subrange to another.
15 This bit is always 0.
13.2.3 Reset values of the status reporting system
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does
not change the instrument settings.
Table 13-17: Resetting the status reporting system
Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS
voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)
Clear STB, ESR - yes - - - yes
Clear SRE, ESE - yes - - - -
Clear PPE - yes - - - -
Clear EVENt parts of the regis- - yes - - - yes
ters
Clear ENABle parts of all - yes - - yes -
OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other
registers with "1".
Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; - yes - - yes -
Clear NTRansition parts
Clear error queue yes yes - - - yes
Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)
Clear command processing yes yes yes - - -
and input buffer
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA-
TOR> clears the output buffer.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 413
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
GPIB languages
13.3 GPIB languages
The R&S ESW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used by
other devices. Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote control
programs.
The device model to be emulated is selected manually using "SETUP > Network +
Remote > GPIB tab > Language". Via the GPIB interface using the SYSTem:
LANGuage on page 722 command.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB
"Language" setting, you can modify the identification string received in response to the
ID command ("Identification String" setting). Thus, any device model whose command
set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated.
Supported languages
Language Comment
SCPI
71100C Compatible to 8566A/B
71200C Compatible to 8566A/B
71209A Compatible to 8566A/B
8560E
8561E
8562E
8563E
8564E
8565E
8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.
8566B
8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.
8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.
8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8591E Compatible to 8594E
8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.
PSA89600
PSA
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 414
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
The IECWIN tool
Notes:
● If you select a language other than "SCPI", the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was
20 before.
● The Start/stop frequency, reference level and number of sweep points are adapted
to the selected instrument model.
● When you switch between remote control languages, the following settings or
changes are made:
SCPI:
The instrument performs a PRESET.
8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK:
– The instrument performs a PRESET.
– The following instrument settings are changed:
Table 13-18: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM;
FSEK instruments
Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points
8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC
8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC
8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC
8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC
8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC
8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC
Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding
frequency of the R&S ESW, if required.
13.4 The IECWIN tool
The R&S ESW is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free of
charge by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instru-
ment either interactively or from a command script.
The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a
future version without notice.
IECWIN offers the following features:
● Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe
(if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 415
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
● Interactive command entry
● Browsing available commands on the instrument
● Error checking following every command
● Execution of command scripts
● Storing binary data to a file
● Reading binary data from a file
● Generation of a log file
For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features:
● Synchronization with the instrument on every command
● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value)
● Checking for expected errors codes
● Optional pause on error
● Nested command scripts
● Single step mode
● Conditional execution, based on the *IDN and *OPT strings
You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the
R&S ESW User Manuals.
Starting IECWIN
IECWIN is available from the Windows "Start" menu on the R&S ESW, or by executing
the following file:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\iecwin32.exe
You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the
iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the
same folder on the target computer.
When the tool is started, a "Connection settings" dialog box is displayed. Define the
connection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the R&S ESW you
want to control. If you are using the tool directly on the R&S ESW, you can use an NT
Pipe (COM Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For help on
setting up other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the "Help"
button in the dialog box).
The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the
tool.
13.5 Network and remote control settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote"
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 416
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Network settings in secure user mode
Be sure to store all network settings beforeSecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap-
ter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each
time you switch on the R&S ESW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored
permanently in this case.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap-
ter 14.9.8, "Network and remote control configuration", on page 718.
Step-by-step instructions are provided in Chapter 13.6, "How to set up a network and
remote control", on page 435.
● General network settings...................................................................................... 417
● GPIB settings........................................................................................................ 419
● Compatibility settings............................................................................................ 422
● LAN settings..........................................................................................................425
● HUMS settings...................................................................................................... 427
● Remote errors....................................................................................................... 433
● Returning to manual mode ("local")...................................................................... 434
13.5.1 General network settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Network" tab
The R&S ESW can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control
the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer.
Network settings can only be edited in the firmware if a LAN cable is connected to the
R&S ESW.
Risk of network problems
All parameters can be edited here; however, beware that changing the computer name
has major effects in a network.
For details, see Chapter 13.6, "How to set up a network and remote control",
on page 435.
Network settings in secure user mode
Be sure to store all network settings before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap-
ter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 36.
If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each
time you switch on the R&S ESW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored
permanently in this case.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 417
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Computer Name..........................................................................................................418
IP Address...................................................................................................................419
Subnet Mask............................................................................................................... 419
DHCP.......................................................................................................................... 419
Network Configuration.................................................................................................419
Computer Name
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be
changed. The naming conventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or
numbers are entered, an error message is displayed in the status line.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example ESW26-123456
The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part
of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 418
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
IP Address
Defines the IP address. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address
10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), the setting is read-only.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).
Subnet Mask
Defines the subnet mask. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the subnet mask
255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), this setting is read-only.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con-
tains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).
DHCP
Switches between DHCP server available (On) or not available (Off). If a DHCP server
is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are
obtained automatically from the DHCP server.
Network Configuration
Opens the standard Windows "Network Configuration" dialog box for further configura-
tion.
13.5.2 GPIB settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "GPIB" tab
Alternatively to connecting the R&S ESW to a LAN, the GPIB interface can be used to
connect a remote PC. For details see Chapter 13.1, "Remote control interfaces and
protocols", on page 395).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 419
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
GPIB Address............................................................................................................. 420
Identification String......................................................................................................420
Reset to Factory String............................................................................................... 420
Remote Display Update.............................................................................................. 421
GPIB Terminator..........................................................................................................421
*IDN Format................................................................................................................ 421
I/O Logging..................................................................................................................421
Display Remote Errors................................................................................................ 422
GPIB Address
Defines the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed. The default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 719
Identification String
Defines the identification string for the R&S ESW which is provided as a response to
the *IDN? query. Maximum 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] on page 722
Reset to Factory String
Restores the default identification string. Each R&S ESW has a unique ID according to
the following syntax:
Rohde&Schwarz,ESW,<Unique number>,1.00
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory on page 722
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 420
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Remote Display Update
Defines whether the display of the R&S ESW is updated when changing from manual
operation to remote control.
Turning off the display update function improves performance during remote control.
Note: Usually, this function remains available on the display during remote operation.
However, it can be disabled remotely. In this case, the display is not updated during
remote operation, and cannot be turned on again locally until local operation is
resumed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 720
GPIB Terminator
Changes the GPIB receive terminator.
"LFEOI" According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or
<EOI>.
"EOI" For binary data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer
to the instrument, the binary code used for <LF> might be included in
the binary data block, and therefore should not be interpreted as a
terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by using only
the receive terminator EOI.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator on page 719
*IDN Format
Defines the response format to the remote command *IDN? (see *IDN?
on page 459). This function is intended for re-use of existing control programs together
with the R&S ESW.
"Leg" Legacy format, as in the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family.
"New" R&S ESW format.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 735
I/O Logging
Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function. All remote control commands
received by the R&S ESW are recorded in a log file. The files are named according to
the following syntax:
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<no.>
where <no.> is a sequential number
A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted.
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to
find misspelled keywords in control programs.
Remote command:
SYSTem:CLOGging on page 673
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 421
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Display Remote Errors
Activates and deactivates the display of errors that occur during remote operation of
the R&S ESW. If activated, the R&S ESW displays a message box at the bottom of the
screen that contains the type of error and the command that caused the error.
The error message remains in place when you switch to "Local" mode. To close the
message box, select the "Close" icon.
Only the most recent error is displayed in remote mode. However, in local mode, all
errors that occurred during remote operation are listed in a separate tab of the "Net-
work + Remote" dialog box (see Chapter 13.5.6, "Remote errors", on page 433).
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay on page 721
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 720
13.5.3 Compatibility settings
The R&S ESW can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum analyzers,
e.g. in order to use existing control applications.
Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers
As a rule, the R&S ESW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and
spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values,
in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore,
the R&S ESW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order
to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy
systems.
The required settings are configured in the "Compatibility" tab of the "Network
+Remote" dialog box.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 422
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Language.................................................................................................................... 423
IF Gain........................................................................................................................ 424
Sweep Repeat.............................................................................................................424
Coupling...................................................................................................................... 424
Wideband.................................................................................................................... 424
Revision String............................................................................................................ 425
Resetting the Factory Revision................................................................................... 425
Language
Defines the system language used to control the instrument.
For details on the available GPIB languages, see Chapter 14.12, "Reference: GPIB
commands of emulated HP models", on page 752.
Note: Emulating previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers. This function is also
used to emulate previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers.
As a rule, the R&S ESW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and
spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values,
in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore,
the R&S ESW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order
to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy
systems.
Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query
("B7J, 140" or "B7J, 122" if Wideband is activated, see SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband
on page 723).
Remote command:
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 722
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 423
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
IF Gain
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz.
NORM Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level.
PULS Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.
This setting is only available if an HP language is selected (see "Language"
on page 423).
Remote command:
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE on page 721
Sweep Repeat
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands (for details
on the commands refer to Chapter 14.12, "Reference: GPIB commands of emulated
HP models", on page 752). If the repeated sweep is OFF, the marker is set without
sweeping before.
Note: In single sweep mode, switch off this setting before you set the marker via the
E1 and MKPK HI commands in order to avoid sweeping again.
This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language"
on page 423).
Remote command:
SYSTem:RSWeep on page 725
Coupling
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW)
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSx, the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a result, in
most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP.
This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language"
on page 423).
Remote command:
SYSTem:HPCoupling on page 721
Wideband
This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
"Off" No wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J".
"40 MHz" The 40 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
"80 MHz" The 80 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 424
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Remote command:
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 723
Revision String
Defines the response to the REV? query for the revision number.
(HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 423).
Max. 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 724
Resetting the Factory Revision
Resets the response to the REV? query for the revision number to the factory default
(HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 423).
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 724
13.5.4 LAN settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "LAN" tab
In a LAN network, the R&S ESW can be accessed via any web browser (e.g. the
Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks:
● Modifying network configurations
● Modifying device configurations
● Monitoring connections from the device to other devices
The "LAN" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box provides basic LAN configuration
functions and information for the R&S ESW.
Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the web browser interface.
For details see Chapter 13.6.1.4, "How to configure the LAN using the web browser
interface", on page 440.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LAN configuration and
web browser functionality.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 425
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Current LAN Configuration..........................................................................................426
LAN Password............................................................................................................ 426
LAN Reset...................................................................................................................426
Current LAN Configuration
Displays the current LAN information from the R&S ESW (read-only).
"Computer Name of the R&S ESW as defined in the operating system (see also
name" "Computer Name" on page 418)
"MAC address" Media Access Control address (MAC address), a unique identifier for
the network card in the R&S ESW
"IP address" IP address of the R&S ESW as defined in the operating system (see
also "IP Address" on page 419).
LAN Password
Password for LAN configuration. The default password is LxiWebIfc.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword on page 723
LAN Reset
Resets the "LAN" configuration to its default settings (LCI function).
Parameter Value
TCP/IP Mode DHCP + Auto IP Address
Dynamic DNS Enabled
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 426
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Parameter Value
ICMP Ping Enabled
Password for "LAN" configuration LxiWebIfc
The LAN settings are configured in the "Network" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog
box or using the instrument's "LAN" web browser interface.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset on page 723
13.5.5 HUMS settings
Available with option R&S ESW-K980.
The R&S ESW comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) provid-
ing information about the R&S ESW. Aim is to increase the overall utilization, to avoid
downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments.
HUMS provides, for example, information about:
● Instrument identification, hardware components, software packages, licenses
● Usage of remote control, usage via keyboard / mouse, usage of test applications
● Hardware utilization and status, including S.M.A.R.T. data of the system drive
● User-defined static information, for example, an inventory code
Interfaces and protocols
The HUMS installation on the R&S ESW includes an SNMP agent and a REST service
with HTTP endpoints. So you can access the health and usage information via LAN,
using the SNMP protocol or the REST protocol. Accessing the data does not interfere
with remote control via SCPI commands or with measurement execution.
Reference information for both protocols is available on the R&S ESW at the address
http://<instrument>/api/hums/v1/documents?name=<interface>.
For <instrument>, enter the hostname (e.g. esw26-123456) or the IP address (e.g.
10.121.0.34) of your instrument, as for access to the GUI.
For <interface> = snmp, you get a .zip file containing the MIB files for SNMP. For
<interface> = rest, you get a .yaml file with the OpenAPI specification of the REST
API.
Address example: http://esw26-123456/api/hums/v1/documents?name=snmp.
The following table lists the REST endpoints and the SNMP MIB file names.
For further information about the HUMS service itself, see R&S HUMS user manual.
You can download or view the manual on the internet.
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 428
● Protocol settings....................................................................................................429
● Device tags........................................................................................................... 432
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 427
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
13.5.5.1 Basic settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" tab
The "HUMS" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog provides basic R&S HUMS configu-
ration functions.
To export the complete HUMS history, use the REST API with the endpoint:
http://<IP>/api/hums/v1/dump
The remote commands to configure HUMS are described in Chapter 14.9.9, "Configur-
ing HUMS", on page 725.
State............................................................................................................................428
Enhanced Settings...................................................................................................... 428
View Tracked Information............................................................................................428
Delete HUMS History.................................................................................................. 429
State
Turns HUMS on or off.
If you want to track HUMS data, turn on this function.
If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe on page 726
Enhanced Settings
Opens the dialog to configure the protocol settings and device tags.
View Tracked Information
Opens the R&S HUMS device web in the web browser of the R&S ESW.
For more information about the R&S HUMS device web, see its user manual.
You can also reach the device web from a remote PC by entering the following address
into a browser's address bar:
http://<instrumentaddress>/hums/
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 428
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
The <instrumentaddress> is either the IP address of the instrument or the instrument
name.
Delete HUMS History
Deletes complete HUMS data which includes the device history, device tags, SCPI
connections, utilization history, utilization (table values).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL on page 726
13.5.5.2 Protocol settings
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Config-
ure" > "Protocol"
The "Protocol" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialog provides protocol settings for
SNMP or REST protocol.
SNMP..........................................................................................................................429
REST...........................................................................................................................430
SNMPv2c Configuration..............................................................................................430
└ Access.......................................................................................................... 430
└ Community....................................................................................................430
SNMPv3 Configuration................................................................................................430
└ User Name....................................................................................................431
└ Access.......................................................................................................... 431
└ Security Level............................................................................................... 431
└ Passwords.................................................................................................... 431
SNMP Location........................................................................................................... 432
SNMP Contact............................................................................................................ 432
SNMP
Selects the SNMP version to communicate with the service.
"None" Do not use SNMP.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 429
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
"v2c" Select SNMP version v2c, which also activates v1.
Unlocks the settings available for SNMP v2c.
"v3" Select SNMP version v3.
Unlocks the settings available for SNMP v3.
"v2c + v3" Select both SNMP versions v2c and v3.
Unlocks the settings for both SNMP v2c and v3.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 731
REST
Turns communication via REST API on or off.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle on page 728
SNMPv2c Configuration
For SNMPv2c/v1 authentication, you can define the "Access" and "Community".
Access ← SNMPv2c Configuration
Defines the access an SNMP user can have for a specific SNMP community: read-
write = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW" Read-write access allows the user to read and change information.
By default, the user has read-write access rights.
"RO" Read-only access allows the user to only read information.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO on page 728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW on page 728
Community ← SNMPv2c Configuration
Defines the SNMP community string. An SNMP community represents a collection of
devices and agents grouped to monitor them. Authorized managers and the managed
devices belong to an SNMP community.
You can define an individual community for each read-write and read-only access.
The default community is the serial number of the instrument (same community for
read-only and for read-write).
Entering a community is mandatory.
SNMPv3 Configuration
For SNMPv3 authentication, you can define user profiles. You can manage them via a
table.
To add a new user, select the "Add" button and enter the data.
To delete all user profiles, select the "Delete All" button.
To delete a single user profile, select the "x" in the appropriate user line of the table.
Remote command:
Create user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER on page 729
Query all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL? on page 730
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 430
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Delete a single user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete
on page 730
Delete all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL
on page 731
User Name ← SNMPv3 Configuration
Defines the name of the user who should have specific user rights.
Entering a user name is mandatory.
Access ← SNMPv3 Configuration
Defines the access right a user can have: read-write = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW" Read-write access allows the user to read and change information.
"RO" Read-only access allows the user to only read information.
Security Level ← SNMPv3 Configuration
Defines the security level for access: noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv or authPriv.
For security reasons, we recommend that you only allow access via passwords.
"noAuthNo- Low security level: no authentication, no data transfer encryption,
Priv" user name query only.
No authentication password and no privacy password to be defined.
"authNoPriv" Medium security level: authentication, no data transfer encryption,
user name and password query.
Authentication password to be defined, privacy password is not avail-
able.
"authPriv" High security level: authentication, data transfer encryption, user
name, password and encryption password query.
Authentication password and privacy password to be defined.
If no privacy password is defined, the HUMS service uses the authen-
tication password as privacy password.
Passwords ← SNMPv3 Configuration
Depending on the selected Security Level, you have to define specific passwords:
authentication password (Auth. Password) and privacy password (Priv. Password).
"Auth. Pass- For authentication, you have to define an authentication password.
word" For authentication password, the R&S ESW supports the MD5 proto-
col.
Authentication passwords must have 8 to 12 characters with any
combination of ASCII characters.
"Priv. Pass- For stronger encryption, you have to define a second password, the
word" privacy password.
For privacy password, the R&S ESW supports the DES protocol.
Private passwords must have at least 8 characters with any combina-
tion of ASCII characters.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 431
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
SNMP Location
"SNMP Location" defines the SNMP location information. This information complies
with the server's physical location and is used for identification of the SNMP server. By
default, this input field is empty.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation on page 729
SNMP Contact
"SNMP Contact" defines the SNMP contact information. This information complies with
the person who manages the SNMP server and is used for identification of the SNMP
server. By default, this input field is empty.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact on page 729
13.5.5.3 Device tags
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Config-
ure" > "Device Tags"
The "Device Tags" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialogs displays the defined device
tags. You can also add or delete device tags here.
A device tag is a label to assign to your instrument. You can create any device tag for
your instrument and define it by a specific key and value.
Add..............................................................................................................................432
Index........................................................................................................................... 432
Key.............................................................................................................................. 432
Value........................................................................................................................... 433
Delete All.....................................................................................................................433
Add
Adds a new device tag.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] on page 727
Index
Index (ID) of the created device tag. You can change the ID if necessary.
Key
Defines a key for your device tag. A device tag key represents the type of tag.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 432
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
Value
Defines the actual value of the device tag or key.
Example:
● "Key" = Location
● "Value" = Building 1
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL? on page 727
Delete All
Deletes all defined device tags.
Remote command:
Delete all device tags:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL on page 727
Delete a single device tag:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete on page 727
13.5.6 Remote errors
Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Remote Errors" tab
The error messages generated by the R&S ESW during remote operation are dis-
played here.
The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent mes-
sages are placed at the top of the list.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 433
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings
The most recent error message during remote operation can be displayed on the
screen, see "Display Remote Errors" on page 422.
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the oldest
error message is removed before the newest one is inserted. To clear the message
buffer use the "Clear Error List" button. It is automatically cleared when the R&S ESW
is shut down.
The following information is available:
No Device-specific error code
Error Brief description of the error
Date/Time Time the message occurred
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 734
Clear Error List
Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation.
Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S ESW is shut down.
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 720
13.5.7 Returning to manual mode ("local")
When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and
can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com-
mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.
In remote control mode, all keys of the instrument except the [PRESET] key are dis-
abled. The "LOCAL" softkey and the Remote Display Update softkey are displayed.
Local
The instrument switches from remote to manual operation.
Note:
● If the local lockout function (LLO or SYST:KLOC ON) has been activated in the
remote control mode, manual operation is no longer available until GTL (or
SYST:KLOC OFF) is executed.
● Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must
be completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immedi-
ately.
● If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running
(which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation
state when the alignment or test is completed.
Furthermore, when you return to manual operation, the following happens:
● All front panel keys are enabled.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 434
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
● The main softkey menu of the current mode is displayed.
● The measurement diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed again.
● If, at the time of pressing the "LOCAL" softkey, the synchronization mechanism via
*OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running measurement procedure is
aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the
registers of the status reporting system.
● Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register is set.
If the status reporting system is configured accordingly, this bit immediately causes
the generation of a service request (SRQ) to inform the control software that the
user wishes to return to front panel control. For example, this can be used to inter-
rupt the control program and to correct instrument settings manually. This bit is set
each time the "LOCAL" softkey is pressed.
Remote command:
SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF, see SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal:REMote
on page 718
13.6 How to set up a network and remote control
Remote operation
You can operate the instrument remotely from a connected computer using SCPI com-
mands. Before you send remote commands, configure the instrument in a LAN net-
work or connect it to a PC via the GPIB interface as described in Chapter 13.6.1, "How
to configure a network", on page 435.
Remote Desktop
In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of
the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with
the Remote Desktop software of Windows, the R&S ESW ideally meets requirements
for use in production. The computer that is used for remote operation is called "control-
ler" here.
The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop:
● Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel (soft front panel)
● Printout of measurement results directly from the controller
● Storage of measured data on the controller's hard disk
This documentation provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for
the R&S ESW. For details refer to the Microsoft Windows operating system documen-
tation.
13.6.1 How to configure a network
A precondition for operating or monitoring the instrument remotely is that it is connec-
ted to a LAN network or a PC connected to the GPIB interface. Setup is described
here.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 435
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
Windows Firewall Settings
A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access
to it through a network. We highly recommend using the firewall on your instrument.
Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and pre-
configured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled.
For more details on firewall configuration, see the Microsoft Windows help system and
the Rohde & Schwarz white paper (available from the Rohde & Schwarz website):
1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
13.6.1.1 How to connect the instrument to the network
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:
● A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned
an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same
network.
● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru-
ment and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The
computer must be equipped with a network adapter and be directly connected to
the instrument. The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however,
data transfer is still performed using the TCP/IP protocol. You have to assign an IP
address to the instrument and the computer, see Chapter 13.6.1.2, "How to assign
the IP address", on page 437.
Note: As the R&S ESW uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not necessary
(due to Auto-MDI(X) functionality).
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
● Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45
cable to one of the LAN ports.
To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between
the instrument and a single PC.
If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network
connection and activates the required drivers.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 436
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.
13.6.1.2 How to assign the IP address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-
ment can be obtained in different ways.
● If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automati-
cally.
● If the network does not support DHCP, or if the instrument is set to use alternate
TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. Thus, it is safe to establish a physical con-
nection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address can be assigned each time the PC is
restarted. You have to determine this address on the PC itself. Thus, when using a
DHCP server, we recommend using the permanent computer name, which determines
the address via the DNS server (see "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address"
on page 438).
Assigning the IP address on the instrument
Risk of network errors
Connection errors can affect the entire network. Contact your network administrator to
obtain a valid IP address.
1. Press the [SETUP] key.
2. Press the "Network + Remote" softkey.
3. Select the "Network" tab.
4. In the "Network + Remote" dialog, toggle the "DHCP On/Off" setting to the required
mode.
If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol-
lowing steps.
Note: When you switch DHCP from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address
and subnet mask are retrieved.
If DHCP is "On", the instrument obtains the IP address of the DHCP server auto-
matically. The configuration is saved, and the R&S ESW prompts you to restart the
instrument. You can skip the remaining steps.
Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address can be assigned each time
you restart the instrument. You have to determine this address on the instrument
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 437
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, we recommend using the permanent com-
puter name. Then the address is determined via the DNS server.
(See "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 438 and Chap-
ter 13.6.1.3, "How to change the instrument name", on page 439).
5. Enter the "IP Address", for example 192.0.2.0. The IP address consists of four
number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers.
6. Enter the "Subnet Mask", for example 255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of
four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 num-
bers.
7. Close the dialog box.
If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of
range" is displayed in the status line. If the settings are correct, the configuration is
saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.
8. Confirm the displayed message to restart the instrument.
Using a DNS server to determine the IP address
If a DNS server is configured on the R&S ESW, the server can determine the current
IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name.
1. Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS
servers on your network (see Chapter 13.6.1.3, "How to change the instrument
name", on page 439).
2. Select [Setup] > "Network + Remote".
3. In the "Network" tab, select "Open Dialog 'Network Connections'".
4. Double-tap "Ethernet".
5. In the "Ethernet Status" dialog box, select "Properties".
The items used by the Ethernet connection are displayed.
6. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 438
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
7. Select "Properties".
8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses".
9. Enter your own DNS addresses.
For more information, refer to the Microsoft Windows operating system Help.
13.6.1.3 How to change the instrument name
In a LAN that uses a DNS server, each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be
accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address. The DNS
server translates the host name to the IP address. Using the computer name is espe-
cially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address can be assigned each
time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but you can change
this name.
To change the instrument's computer name
1. Press the [Setup] key and then the "Network + Remote" softkey.
The current "Computer Name" is displayed in the "Network" tab.
2. Enter the new computer name.
3. Close the dialog box.
The configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.
4. Confirm the displayed message to restart the instrument.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 439
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
13.6.1.4 How to configure the LAN using the web browser interface
The instrument's "LAN" web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant
browsers.
► In the web browser, open the http://<instrument-hostname> or http://
<instrument-ip-address> page, e.g. http://10.113.10.203.
The default password to change "LAN" configurations is LxiWebIfc.
The "Instrument Home Page" (welcome page) opens.
The instrument home page displays device information, including the VISA resource
string, in read-only format.
► On the "Instrument Home Page", select "Device Indicator" to activate or deactivate
the "LAN" status icon on the status bar of the R&S ESW. The "Device Indicator"
setting is not password-protected.
A green "LAN" status symbol indicates that a LAN connection is established.
A red symbol indicates an error, for example, that no LAN cable is connected.
When a device is connecting to the instrument, the "LAN" icon blinks.
The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface
are the following:
● "LAN Configuration" opens the menu with configuration pages.
● "Status" displays information about the "LAN" status of the instrument.
LAN configuration
The LAN configuration consists of three parts:
● "IP configuration" provides all mandatory LAN parameters.
● "Advanced LAN Configuration" provides further LAN settings.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 440
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
● "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru-
ment and other devices.
IP configuration
The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN
parameters and allows their modification.
For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway are used to configure the LAN. The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP
server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing (Automatic IP) to obtain the instrument IP
address.
Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The default password is Lxi-
WebIfc (notice upper and lower case characters).
You can change the LAN password in the "Network + Remote" dialog box, see Chap-
ter 13.5.4, "LAN settings", on page 425.
Advanced LAN configuration
The "LAN Configuration > Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as fol-
lows:
● "mDNS and DNS-SD" are two additional protocols: Multicast DNS and DNS Ser-
vice Discovery. They are used for device communication in zero configuration net-
works working without DNS and DHCP
● "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility.
● "VXI-11" is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN.
Ping client
Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the instrument and another device.
The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine
whether the LAN connection is functional. Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or
router failures. The ping utility is not password-protected.
To initiate a ping between the instrument and a second connected device:
To initiate a ping between the instrument and a second connected device
1. Enable "ICMP Ping" on the "Advanced LAN Configuration" page (enabled after an
LCI).
2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with-
out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g.
10.113.10.203).
3. Select "Submit".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 441
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
13.6.1.5 How to change the GPIB instrument address
To operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the GPIB
address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if it
does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30
are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
Setting the GPIB address
1. On the R&S ESW, press the [SETUP] key.
2. Press the "Network + Remote" softkey.
3. In the "Network + Remote" dialog box, select the "GPIB" tab.
4. In the "GPIB Address" field, enter a value between 0 and 30.
Remote command:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
13.6.2 How to operate the instrument without a network
To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma-
nently, no special measures are necessary. Microsoft Windows automatically detects
the interruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the
instrument is switched on.
If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password, proceed as described in
Chapter 13.6.3.3, "How to configure the automatic login mechanism", on page 444.
13.6.3 How to log on to the network
Microsoft Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name
and password in a login window. You can set up two types of user accounts, either an
administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/domain or a standard
user account with limited access.
The instrument provides an auto-login function for the administrator account, i.e. login
with unrestricted access is carried out automatically in the background. By default, the
user name for the administrator account is "Instrument", and the user name for the
standard user account is "NormalUser".
In both cases the initial password is "894129". You can change the password in Micro-
soft Windows for any user at any time. Some administrative tasks require administrator
rights (e.g. firmware updates or the configuration of a LAN network). If so, it is men-
tioned in the function descriptions.
At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on
to the network. As a prerequisite, the user name and the password must be identical
on the instrument and on the network.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 442
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
13.6.3.1 How to create users
After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error
message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument"
(= default user ID for Windows auto-login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must
be created in the R&S ESW and in the network, the password must be adapted to the
network password, and the auto-login mechanism must then be deactivated.
The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network.
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
2. Select "Start > Settings > Accounts > Other users".
3. Select "Add someone else to this PC".
4. In the "Microsoft account" dialog box, enter the new user name and password.
5. Select "OK".
6. Select "Finish".
The new user is created.
13.6.3.2 How to change the user password
After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted
to the network password.
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
2. Press [Ctrl + Alt + Delete], then select "Change a password".
3. Enter the user account name.
4. Enter the old password.
5. Enter the new password twice.
6. Press [Enter].
The new password is now active.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 443
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
13.6.3.3 How to configure the automatic login mechanism
Adapting the auto-login function to a new password
If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer
works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 32).
2. Open the C:\R_S\Instr\User\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.
Notepad).
3. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password
(894129) by the new password for automatic login.
4. Save the changes to the file.
5. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
6. Enter the command C:\R_S\Instr\User\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
7. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.
The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It is applied the
next time you switch on the instrument.
Switching users when using the auto-login function
Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login win-
dow is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when
the auto-login function is active.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
R&S ESW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 32).
2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.
Deactivating the auto-login function
When shipped, the instrument is already configured to log on the "instrument" user
automatically under Microsoft Windows. To deactivate the auto-login function, perform
the following steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the command C:\R_S\Instr\User\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.
3. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 444
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
The auto-login function is deactivated. The next time you switch on the instrument,
the R&S ESW prompts you to enter your user name and password before the firm-
ware is started.
Reactivating the auto-login function
To reactivate the auto-login function after manually deactivating it, perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the command C:\R_S\Instr\User\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
3. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.
The auto-login function is reactivated. It is applied the next time you switch on the
instrument.
13.6.4 How to share directories (only with Microsoft networks)
Sharing directories makes data available for other users. Sharing directories is only
possible in Microsoft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory.
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Programs" > "Accessories" > "Windows Explorer".
2. Right-click the desired folder.
3. In the context menu, select "Sharing with" > "Specific people".
The dialog box for sharing a directory is displayed.
4. Select a user from the list or add a new name.
5. Select "Add"
6. Select "Share".
7. Select "Done" to close the dialog box.
The drive is shared and the selected users can access it.
13.6.5 How to control the R&S ESW via the web browser interface
Via the LAN web browser interface to the R&S ESW, one or more users can control the
instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instrument
controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between
the instrument and the remote PC is also available.
To access the R&S ESW via the web browser interface
1. Start a web browser that supports html5 (W3C compliant).
2. Enter the IP address of the R&S ESW in the browser's address bar.
The R&S ESW's Welcome page is displayed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 445
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
3. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control > Web Control".
The instrument's display is shown in a new browser window, with a software front
panel displayed beside or below it.
4. Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in
the display as you would directly on the instrument's front panel.
To exchange files with the R&S ESW
You can download files, for example stored measurement data, from the R&S ESW to
the remote PC, or upload files, for example limit line definitions, from the PC to the
R&S ESW.
1. In the web browser, select the Welcome page window.
2. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control" > "File Upload" or "File Down-
load".
The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed. For example,
folders that contain user data. From the top-most folder, My Computer, you can
access all other folders on the instrument.
3. To download a file from the R&S ESW:
a) Select the file from the displayed folders.
b) Select "Download File".
4. To upload a file to the R&S ESW:
a) From the displayed folders in the web browser window, select the folder on the
R&S ESW to which you want to copy a file.
b) Under "File to Upload", select "Browse".
c) From the file selection dialog box, select the required file on the PC.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 446
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
d) Select "Upload" to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the
R&S ESW.
13.6.6 How to deactivate the web browser interface
If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the
R&S ESW via its LAN web browser interface, you must deactivate this function. Note
that after a firmware update the function is automatically active again until you
deactivate it manually.
To deactivate the LAN web browser interface
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
2. In the "Start" menu, select "Control Panel".
3. Select "System and Security" > "Administrative Tools".
4. From the list on the right, select "Services".
5. From the list of local services, select "R&S TightVNC Server".
6. Set "Startup type" to "Disabled".
7. Select "Stop".
8. Select "Apply".
The next time a user enters the IP address of the instrument in a web browser, an
error message is displayed:
Failed to connect to server (code. 1006)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 447
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
13.6.7 How to set up remote desktop
Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control
the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instru-
ment is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote com-
puter, and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and net-
work resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the R&S ESW is possible.
With Microsoft Windows, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system. For
other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on.
For details refer to the Microsoft Windows operating system documentation.
13.6.7.1 How to configure the R&S ESW for remote operation via remote desktop
1. Create a fixed IP address for the TCP/IP protocol as described in Chapter 13.6.1.2,
"How to assign the IP address", on page 437.
Note: To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address.
When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru-
ment is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself.
Thus, using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S ESW
via Remote Desktop.
2.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
3. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Settings > System".
4. Search for "remote access".
5. Select "Allow remote access to your computer".
6. Define which users can access the R&S ESW via Remote Desktop.
Note: The currently used user account is automatically enabled for Remote Desk-
top.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 448
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
a) Select "Select Users".
b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in Chapter 13.6.3.1,
"How to create users", on page 443.
c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings.
7. The R&S ESW is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop pro-
gram of the controller.
13.6.7.2 How to configure the controller
Remote Desktop Client
With Microsoft Windows, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and
can be accessed via "Start > Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection".
For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-
on.
1.
Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.
2. From the "Start" menu, select "All Programs" > "Accessories" > "Remote Desktop
Connection".
The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed.
3. Select "Options >>".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 449
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data.
4. Open the "Experience" tab.
The settings on this tab select and optimize the connection speed.
5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: "LAN (10 Mbps or
higher)").
Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are
activated or deactivated.
6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show
contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options.
7. Open the "Local Resources" tab to enable printers, local drives and serial interfa-
ces.
8. To access drives of the controller from the R&S ESW, e.g. to store settings or to
copy files from the controller to the R&S ESW:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 450
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
a) Select "More".
b) Enable the "Drives" option.
Windows maps drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives.
9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the
R&S ESW, activate the "Printers" option. Do not change the remaining settings.
10. Open the "Display" tab.
The options for configuring the R&S ESW screen display are displayed.
11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S ESW window on the
desktop of the controller.
12. Under "Colors", do not change the settings.
13. Set the "Display the connection bar when I use the full screen" option:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 451
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
● If activated, a bar showing the network address of the R&S ESW appears at
the top edge of the screen. You can use this bar to reduce, minimize or close
the window.
● If deactivated, the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the
R&S ESW screen in full screen mode is to select "Disconnect" from the "Start"
menu.
13.6.7.3 How to start and close the remote desktop
To set up a connection to the R&S ESW
1. In the "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box (see Chapter 13.6.7.2, "How to
configure the controller", on page 449), open the "General" tab.
2. In the "Computer" field, enter the IP address of the R&S ESW.
In the "User name" field, enter instrument to log in as an administrator, or Normal
User to log in as a standard user.
In the "Password" field, enter 894129.
3. To save the connection configuration for later use:
a) Select "Save As".
The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
b) Enter the name for the connection information (*.RDP).
4. To load an existing connection configuration:
a) Select "Open".
The "Open" dialog box is displayed.
b) Select the *.rdp file.
5. Select "Connect".
The connection is set up.
6. If the "Disk drives" option is enabled on the "Local Resources" tab, a warning is
displayed indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the R&S ESW.
Select "OK" to confirm the warning.
After a few moments, the R&S ESW screen is displayed.
7. If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of
the screen, restart the R&S ESW to see the modified screen resolution.
a) Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4].
The R&S ESW firmware is shut down, which can take a few seconds.
b)
On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 452
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Softfrontpanel", i.e. the
user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to
buttons.
For more information, see Chapter 12.2.3, "How to work with the soft front panels",
on page 350.
8. To deactivate or activate the "Softfrontpanel", press the [F6] key.
After the connection is established, the R&S ESW screen is displayed in the
"Remote Desktop" application window.
To access the Windows "Start" menu, expand the "Remote Desktop" window to full
size.
During the connection with the controller, the login dialog box is displayed on the
R&S ESW screen.
To terminate Remote Desktop control
The controller or a user at the R&S ESW can terminate the remote connection:
► ● On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window at any time.
The connection to the R&S ESW is terminated.
● On the R&S ESW, log on.
The connection to the controller is terminated. A message is displayed on the
controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the
instrument.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 453
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
Restoring the connection to the R&S ESW
Follow the instructions above to set up a connection to the R&S ESW. If the connection
is terminated and then restored, the R&S ESW remains in the same state.
13.6.7.4 How to shut down the R&S ESW via remote operation
1. Select the R&S ESW softfrontpanel.
2. Close the application with the key combination [ALT] + [F4].
3. Select the desktop.
4. Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4].
A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated
via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown
process.
5. Respond to the safety query with "Yes".
The connection with the controller is terminated and the R&S ESW is shut down.
13.6.8 How to start a remote control session from a PC
When you switch on the R&S ESW, it is always in manual operation state ("local" state)
and can be operated via the front panel.
To start remote control
1. Send an addressed command (GTR - Go to Remote) from a controller to the instru-
ment.
The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote" state). Operation via the
front panel is disabled. Only the "Local" softkey is displayed to return to manual
operation. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual
state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces. Switching from manual
operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument set-
tings.
2. During program execution, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON command to
activate the display of results (see SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 720).
The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis-
played on the instrument screen.
3. To obtain optimum performance during remote control, send the
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia-
grams again (default setting in remote control).
4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru-
ment using the universal command LLO.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 454
R&S®ESW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control
Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is
only available for the GPIB interface.
5. To enable the keys of the R&S ESW again, switch the instrument to local mode
(GTL - Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface.
If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control, it is recommended that you
switch off the display. For details see "Remote Display Update" on page 421.
13.6.9 How to return to manual operation
Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be
completed. Otherwise, the instrument switches back to remote control immediately.
► ● Manual operation: Select the "Local" softkey.
● Remote operation: Use the following GPIB command:
status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)
If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running
(which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
when the alignment or test is completed.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 455
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions
14 Remote commands in the receiver applica-
tion
● Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions............................................... 456
● Common suffixes.................................................................................................. 457
● Common commands............................................................................................. 457
● Application selection............................................................................................. 462
● Measurements and result displays........................................................................466
● Configuration.........................................................................................................513
● Analysis.................................................................................................................563
● Data management.................................................................................................630
● General instrument setup......................................................................................673
● Using the status register....................................................................................... 740
● Service request..................................................................................................... 744
● Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models.......................................... 752
● Reference: command set of emulated PSA models............................................. 780
● Reference: command set of emulated PXA models............................................. 784
14.1 Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions
The following conventions are used in the remote command descriptions:
● Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
● Parameter usage
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters.
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return
values.
● Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con-
firmed. All commands used by the R&S ESW follow the SCPI syntax rules.
● Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com-
mand starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous
command.
● Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
● Default unit
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 456
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Common commands
The default unit is used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the
parameter.
● Manual operation
If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link
to the description is inserted.
14.2 Common suffixes
In the Receiver application, the following common suffixes are used in remote com-
mands:
Table 14-1: Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Receiver application
Suffix Value range Description
<m> 1..16 Marker
<n> 1..16 Window (in the currently selected channel)
<t> 1..6 Trace
<li> 1 to 8 Limit line
<i> 1..3 Selects one of the analog output channels (1, 2 or Phones).
<k> 1..8 (Limit line) Selects a limit or display line.
1 | 2 (Display line)
<peak> 1..3000 Selects a peak.
Selecting windows in multiple channels
Note that the suffix <n> always refers to a window in the currently selected channel.
14.3 Common commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi-
ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?...........................................................................................................................458
*CLS.............................................................................................................................458
*ESE.............................................................................................................................458
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................458
*IDN?............................................................................................................................459
*IST?............................................................................................................................ 459
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 459
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................459
*PCB............................................................................................................................ 460
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 457
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Common commands
*PRE............................................................................................................................ 460
*PSC............................................................................................................................ 460
*RST.............................................................................................................................460
*SRE............................................................................................................................ 461
*STB?...........................................................................................................................461
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 461
*TST?........................................................................................................................... 461
*WAI............................................................................................................................. 462
*CAL?
Calibration query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and then queries the calibration status. Respon-
ses > 0 indicate errors.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Start Self Alignment" on page 335
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage: Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the con-
tents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255
*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg-
ister to zero.
Return values:
<Contents> Range: 0 to 255
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 458
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Common commands
Usage: Query only
*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values:
<ID> "Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial num-
ber>,<firmware version>"
Example: Rohde&Schwarz,ESW-26,1328.4100K26/100005,1.00
Usage: Query only
*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit
which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag> 0|1
Usage: Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu-
ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query writes a "1" into the
output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed, which is useful for
command synchronization.
*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description, refer to the data sheet.
Return values:
<Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options,
separated by commas, where:
B<number> describes hardware options.
K<number> describes software options.
Note that B3 (Audio demodulator), K9 (Power Meter) and K14
(Spectrograms) are displayed for compatibility reasons only; in
fact they are standard functionality of the R&S ESW base unit
and do not require additional ordering.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 459
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Common commands
Usage: Query only
*PCB <Address>
Pass control back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of
the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address> Range: 0 to 30
Usage: Setting only
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255
*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru-
ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action> 0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 460
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Common commands
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter-
mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage: Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
*TRG corresponds to the INITiate:IMMediate command.
Usage: Event
*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code.
Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is
completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Return values:
<ErrorCode> integer > 0 (in decimal format)
An error occurred.
(For details, see the Service Manual supplied with the instru-
ment).
0
No errors occurred.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 461
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Application selection
*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage: Event
14.4 Application selection
CALCulate:STATistics:CAPD[:STATe]............................................................................... 462
DISPlay:ATAB................................................................................................................462
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate...................................................................................... 463
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]............................................................................................ 463
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace........................................................................................ 463
INSTrument:DELete....................................................................................................... 464
INSTrument:LIST?......................................................................................................... 464
INSTrument:REName.....................................................................................................465
INSTrument[:SELect]......................................................................................................465
CALCulate:STATistics:CAPD[:STATe] <State>
This command creates a new measurement channel for the CISPR APD measure-
ment.
Note that this is only possible from within a selected spectrum channel.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
OFF returns to the spectrum application.
*RST: OFF
Example: INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum'
INST 'Spectrum'
Creates and selects the Spectrum channel.
CALC:STAT:CAPD ON
Opens a CISPR APD channel.
DISPlay:ATAB <State>
This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed
channel. If only one channel is active, this command has no effect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 462
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Application selection
ON | 1
Switches the function on
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate
This command duplicates the currently selected channel, i.e creates a new channel of
the same type and with the identical measurement settings. The name of the new
channel is the same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g.
"IQAnalyzer" -> "IQAnalyzer 2").
The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST:SEL command.
Example: INST:SEL 'Receiver'
INST:CRE:DUPL
Duplicates the channel named 'Receiver' and creates a new
channel named 'Receiver 2'.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Duplicate Current Channel" on page 83
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>
This command adds a measurement channel. You can configure up to 10 measure-
ment channels at the same time (depending on available memory).
See also
● INSTrument[:SELect] on page 465
● INSTrument:DELete on page 464
Parameters:
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types, see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 464.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new
channel. If you do, an error occurs.
Example: INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum 2'
Adds a spectrum display named "Spectrum 2".
Manual operation: See "New Channel" on page 83
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace <ChannelName1>,<ChannelType>,<ChannelName2>
This command replaces a channel with another one.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to replace.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 463
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Application selection
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types, see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 464.
<ChannelName2> String containing the name of the new channel.
Note: If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the
default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the
new channel (see INSTrument:LIST? on page 464).
Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file
names. In particular, they must not contain special characters
such as ":", "*", "?".
Example: INST:CRE:REPL 'Receiver',REC,'REC2'
Replaces the channel named "Receiver" by a new channel of
type "Receiver" named "REC2".
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Replace Current Channel" on page 83
INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName>
This command deletes a channel.
If you delete the last channel, the default "Receiver" channel is activated.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
A channel must exist to delete it.
Example: INST:DEL 'Receiver'
Deletes the channel with the name 'Receiver'.
Usage: Setting only
INSTrument:LIST?
This command queries all active channels. The query is useful to obtain the names of
the existing channels, which are required to replace or delete the channels.
Return values:
<ChannelType>, For each channel, the command returns the channel type and
<ChannelName> channel name (see tables below).
Tip: to change the channel name, use the INSTrument:
REName command.
Example: INST:LIST?
Result for 2 channels:
'REC','Receiver','REC','Receiver 2'
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 464
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Application selection
Table 14-2: Available channel types and default channel names
Application <ChannelType> Parameter Default Channel Name*)
Receiver RECeiver Receiver
CISPR APD n/a CISPR APD
Use CALCulate:
STATistics:CAPD[:STATe]
Use
CALCulate:STATistics:
CAPD[:STATe]
Real-Time Spectrogram RTSG Real-Time Spectrogram
Multi CISPR APD MAPD Multi CISPR APD
Spectrum SANalyzer Spectrum
I/Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer
Real-Time Spectrum RTIM Real-Time Spectrum
Analog Modulation Analy- ADEMod Analog Demod
sis
Note: the default channel name is also listed in the table. If the specified name for a new channel already
exists, the default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the new channel.
INSTrument:REName <ChannelName1>, <ChannelName2>
This command renames a channel.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to rename.
<ChannelName2> String containing the new channel name.
Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new
channel. If you do, an error occurs.
Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file
names. In particular, they must not contain special characters
such as ":", "*", "?".
Example: INST:REN 'Receiver','REC'
Renames the channel with the name 'Receiver' to 'REC'.
Usage: Setting only
INSTrument[:SELect] <ChannelType> | <ChannelName>
This command activates a new channel with the defined channel type, or selects an
existing channel with the specified name.
Also see
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 463
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 465
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Parameters:
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 464.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
Example: INST IQ
Activates a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application (evaluation
mode).
INST 'MyIQSpectrum'
Selects the channel named 'MyIQSpectrum' (for example before
executing further commands for that channel).
Manual operation: See "Receiver" on page 80
14.5 Measurements and result displays
● Measurement control............................................................................................ 466
● Measurement sequences......................................................................................470
● Result retrieval...................................................................................................... 472
● Bargraph configuration..........................................................................................477
● Scan configuration................................................................................................ 480
● Scan table configuration........................................................................................481
● Peak search.......................................................................................................... 489
● Peak list.................................................................................................................494
● Final measurement (and trace) configuration....................................................... 499
● Final results...........................................................................................................503
● LISN configuration.................................................................................................507
● CISPR APD measurement configuration.............................................................. 509
● Preventing overlapping execution.........................................................................510
● Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements.......................511
14.5.1 Measurement control
ABORt.......................................................................................................................... 466
HOLD........................................................................................................................... 467
INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 467
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous................................................................................................ 468
INITiate<n>:EMITest.......................................................................................................468
INITiate<n>:FMEasurement............................................................................................ 469
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................469
ABORt
This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and
resets the trigger system.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 466
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure-
ment has been aborted successfully, use the *OPC or *WAI command after ABORt and
before the next command.
To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer, use the INITiate:
SEQuencer:ABORt command.
Note on blocked remote control programs:
If a sequential command cannot be completed, for example because a triggered sweep
never receives a trigger, the remote control program will never finish. The remote chan-
nel to the R&S ESW is blocked for further commands. In this case, you must interrupt
processing on the remote channel first to abort the measurement.
To do so, send a "Device Clear" command from the control instrument to the
R&S ESW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels. Depend-
ing on the used interface and protocol, send the following commands:
● Visa: viClear()
● GPIB: ibclr()
● RSIB: RSDLLibclr()
Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel that runs the measure-
ment.
Example: ABOR;INIT:IMM
Aborts the measurement and restarts it.
Usage: Event
HOLD
This command interrupts (holds) a scan.
To resume the scan, use INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 469.
Example: HOLD
Interrupts the scan.
Usage: Event
INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command resumes a scan that was interrupted by a transducer stop at the current
receiver frequency.
If the scan was interrupted by the HOLD command, you have to resume it with
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate].
Suffix: .
<mt> INITiate1 is irrelevant.
INITiate2 resumes the scan.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 467
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Configure a single measurement that is averaged over 20 mea-
surements
INIT2:CONT OFF
SWE:COUN 20
//Start the measurement and wait for the end of the 20 scans
INIT2;*WAI
//Continue the measurement (next 20 sequences) and wait for
the end
INIT2:CONM;*WAI
Usage: Event
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
This command controls the measurement mode for an individual channel.
Note that in single measurement mode, you can synchronize to the end of the mea-
surement with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI. In continuous measurement mode, synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that
you use continuous measurement mode in remote control, as results like trace data or
markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization.
For details on synchronization see Remote control via SCPI.
If the measurement mode is changed for a channel while the Sequencer is active (see
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 470), the mode is only considered the
next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer.
Suffix: .
<n> 1|2
INITiate1 selects single or continuous bargraph measurements.
INITiate2 selects single or continuous scans.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
Continuous measurement
OFF | 0
Single measurement
*RST: 1 (some applications can differ)
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches the measurement mode to single measurement.
INIT:CONT ON
Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement.
Manual operation: See "Performing continuous measurements" on page 88
INITiate<n>:EMITest
This command initiates an automated test sequence.
The sequence consists of a scan, a peak search and a final measurement.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 468
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
When you are running a continuous measurement, you have to stop the scan deliber-
ately (with ABORt) before the peak search is performed. For a single measurement,
the R&S ESW automatically performs the peak search after number of scans defined
by the scan count has been performed.
Suffix: .
<mt> irrelevant
Example: //Start the test sequence
INIT2:EMIT
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Performing single measurements" on page 89
INITiate<n>:FMEasurement
This command initiates a final measurement based on the peak list.
Suffix: .
<mt> irrelevant
Example: //Start the final measurement
INIT2:FME
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Performing single measurements" on page 89
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new measurement.
For a single measurement, the R&S ESW stops measuring when it has reached the
end frequency. When you start a continuous measurement, it stops only if you abort it
deliberately.
If you are using trace modes MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, previous results are
reset when you restart the measurement.
● Single measurements
Synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible with *OPC, *OPC? or
*WAI.
● Continuous measurements
Synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible.
It is thus recommended to use a single measurement for remote controlled mea-
surements, because results like trace data or markers are only valid after synchro-
nization.
Suffix: .
<mt> INITiate1 initiates a bargraph measurement.
INITiate2 initiates a scan.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 469
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Start a single scan (with a scan count = 20), and wait until the
measurement is done
INIT2:CONT OFF
SWE:COUN 20
INIT2;*WAI
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Performing continuous measurements" on page 88
14.5.2 Measurement sequences
CONFigure:RECeiver:MEASurement[:DEFault].................................................................470
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt............................................................................................ 470
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate....................................................................................... 470
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE.............................................................................................471
SYSTem:SEQuencer...................................................................................................... 471
CONFigure:RECeiver:MEASurement[:DEFault] <Measurement>
This command selects the measurement performed in a receiver channel during mea-
surement sequences.
More information
Parameters:
<Measurement> BARGraph
Performs a bargraph measurement.
NONE
Performs no measurement.
SCAN
Performs a scan.
*RST: SCAN
Example: //Perform a bargraph measurement in a measurement sequence
CONF:REC:MEAS BARG
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt
This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements.
You can start a new sequence any time using INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate
on page 470.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 86
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate
This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 470
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Before this command can be executed, the Sequencer must be activated (see
SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 471).
Example: SYST:SEQ ON
Activates the Sequencer.
INIT:SEQ:MODE SING
Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement is per-
formed once.
INIT:SEQ:IMM
Starts the sequential measurements.
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 86
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE <Mode>
Defines the capture mode for the entire measurement sequence and all measurement
groups and channels it contains.
Note: To synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using *OPC, *OPC? or
*WAI, use SINGle Sequencer mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> SINGle
Each measurement group is started one after the other in the
order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are
started simultaneously and performed once. After all measure-
ments are completed, the next group is started. After the last
group, the measurement sequence is finished.
CONTinuous
Each measurement group is started one after the other in the
order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are
started simultaneously and performed once. After all measure-
ments are completed, the next group is started. After the last
group, the measurement sequence restarts with the first one and
continues until it is stopped explicitly.
*RST: CONTinuous
Manual operation: See "Sequencer Mode" on page 86
SYSTem:SEQuencer <State>
This command turns the Sequencer on and off. The Sequencer must be active before
any other Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are executed, otherwise an error
occurs.
A detailed programming example is provided in Chapter 14.5.14, "Programming exam-
ple: performing a sequence of measurements", on page 511.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 471
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
ON | 1
The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is
started immediately.
OFF | 0
The Sequencer is deactivated. Any running sequential measure-
ments are stopped. Further Sequencer commands
(INIT:SEQ...) are not available.
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:SEQ ON
Activates the Sequencer.
INIT:SEQ:MODE SING
Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement is
performed once.
INIT:SEQ:IMM
Starts the sequential measurements.
SYST:SEQ OFF
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 86
14.5.3 Result retrieval
● Trace data and result query.................................................................................. 472
14.5.3.1 Trace data and result query
This section contains information on the TRACe:DATA command and a detailed
description of the characteristics of that command. Basically, the command queries the
results of the current measurement. The command supports various SCPI parameters
in combination with the query. Each SCPI parameter returns a different aspect of the
measurement.
The format of the return values is either in ASCII or binary characters and depends on
the format you have set with FORMat[:DATA] on page 631.
Querying trace data
The SCPI parameters TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6 return the trace data for the correspond-
ing trace.
Example:
TRAC? TRACE1
The number of results depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. For
each sweep point, the command returns one level value. The unit depends on the
measurement and on the unit you have currently set.
The trace has to be active for the command to work.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 472
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
When you have selected trace modeTRD, only the TRACE1 parameter is available. It
returns the characteristics of the transducer's correction values over the currently
selected frequency range.
Querying bargraph results
The SCPI parameters SINGLE and PHOLD return the results of the bargraph measure-
ment.
SINGLE returns the current bargraph results for each active bargraph detector.
The order of detectors is as shown in the user interface. Inactive detectors are ignored.
Example:
TRAC? SINGLE
PHOLD returns the bargraph maxhold results for each active bargraph detector.
Each result is made up out of two values:
● Absolute level
● Frequency
The order of detectors is as shown in the user interface. Inactive detectors are ignored.
Example:
TRAC? PHOLD
Querying scan characteristics
The SCPI parameter SCAN returns the scan characteristics while the scan is running.
The number of returned results depends on the scan settings.
The type of returned data is as follows:
● 4 byte, trace status:
➙ bit 0 to 9 represent the number of the scan range
➙ bit 10 represents the last block of a scan range
➙ bit 11 represents the last block of the last scan range
➙ bit 12 represents the last of all blocks (for multiple scans after the last scan)
When number of scan ranges greater than 10:
➙ bit 16 to 31 represent a value that has to be added to the bit coded range num-
ber (bit 0 to bit 9) to get the number of scan ranges. Example: bit 16 to 31 repre-
sent the value "20", bit 0 to 9 represent the value "5"; in that case the complete
number of scan ranges is "25".
● 4 byte, number n of measurement results contained in one trace
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 1 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 2 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 3 (0/1)
● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 4 (0/1)
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 473
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Note:
If more than 4 traces are active, the state of trace 5 and 6 is indicated by an addi-
tional bit (bit 8) in the UINT32 field of trace 1 and 2.
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 1; only if trace 1 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 2; only if trace 2 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 3; only if trace 3 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 4; only if trace 4 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 5; only if trace 5 is active
● n*4 byte, measurement results for trace 6; only if trace 6 is active
● n*1 byte, status information for each measurement result
➙ bit 2 represents overrange for trace 1 to trace 6
The data is always returned in binary format (FORM REAL,32).
Note that the SCAN parameter only works while the scan is actually running.
Example:
TRAC? SCAN
Querying results for a peak search
The SCPI parameters PLIST1 | ... | PLIST6 returns the results of a peak search for a
particular trace or detector (1 to 6).
Each result is made up out of three values:
● 4 byte, frequency
● 4 byte, absolute level
● 4 byte, Delta between absolute level and limit line value at corresponding fre-
quency
If no limit line is active, the delta value is set to 0.0
The trace has to be active for the command to work.
Example:
TRAC? PLIST3
Querying results for the final measurement
The SCPI parameters FINAL1 | ... | FINAL6 return the results of the final measure-
ment for a particular trace or detector (1 to 6).
Each result is made up out of three values:
● 4 byte, frequency
● 4 byte, absolute level
● 4 byte, Delta between absolute level and limit line value at corresponding fre-
quency
If no limit line is active, the delta value is set to 0.0
The trace has to be active for the command to work.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 474
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Querying the status of the measurement results
The SCPI parameter STATUS returns the status information for each measurement
result. Thus, the number of returned values depends on the number of measurement
results n. For each measurement result, the parameter queries 1 byte of status infor-
mation.
➙ bit 2 represents overrange for trace 1 to trace 6
Note that the SCAN parameter only works while the scan is actually running.
Example:
TRAC? STATUS
Querying spectrogram data
The SCPI parameter SGRam returns the contents of the spectrogram.
For every frame (horizontal line) in the spectrogram, the command returns the power
levels that have been measured, one for each sweep or measurement point. The num-
ber of frames depends on the size of the history depth. The power level depends on
the unit you have currently set.
Querying LISN settings
The SCPI parameters PHASe1 to PHASe6 return the LISN settings for each phase.
If trace mode "Max Hold" is selected, the R&S ESW combines the maximum values for
the measurements run on each phase into a single trace containing all phases.
TRACe<n>[:DATA]? <ResultType>
This command queries current trace data and measurement results.
The data format depends on FORMat[:DATA].
Reading out trace data in IF analysis is possible with TRACe<n>:IF[:DATA].
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Query parameters:
<ResultType> TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6
See "Querying trace data" on page 472.
FINAL1 | ... | FINAL6
See "Querying results for the final measurement" on page 474.
PLIST1 | ... | PLIST6
See "Querying results for a peak search" on page 474.
PHASe1 | ... | PHASe6
See "Querying LISN settings" on page 475.
PHOLd
See "Querying bargraph results" on page 473.
SCAN
See "Querying scan characteristics" on page 473.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 475
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
SGRam | SPECtrogram
See "Querying spectrogram data" on page 475.
SINGle
See "Querying bargraph results" on page 473.
STATus
See "Querying scan characteristics" on page 473.
Return values:
<Result>
Example: //Query level for each trace point of trace 1.
TRAC? TRACE1
Usage: Query only
TRACe<n>:FEED:CONTrol <Occasion>
This command turns block data transmission during a scan on and off.
The availability of data is reported in the STATus:OPERation register.
The block size depends on scan time and the upper limit defined by TRACe<n>:
POINts on page 477.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Occasion> ALWays
Block data transmission is on.
NEVer
Block data transmission is off.
*RST: NEVer
Example: //Select block data transmission
TRAC:FEED:CONT ALW
TRACe<n>:IF[:DATA] <ResultType>
This command queries current trace data and measurement results for IF analysis.
The data format depends on FORMat[:DATA].
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<ResultType> TRACE1 | ... | TRACE3
Returns the level values displayed on the corresponding trace.
Example: //Query the level for each trace point of trace 1
TRAC:IF? TRACE1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 476
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
TRACe<n>:POINts <LIMit>, <Points>
This command defines the maximum number of measurement points that are transfer-
red in one block after using TRAC? SCAN.
The total number of bytes which is transferred depends on the number of active traces.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LIMit>
<Points> Range: 1 to 10000
*RST: 1000
Example: //Transfer a maximum of 8000 measurement values per trace
with a single query
TRAC:POIN LIM, 8000
14.5.4 Bargraph configuration
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?..................................................................................477
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?.................................................................................. 477
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet.................................................................................. 478
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe].................................................................................478
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe]............................................................................478
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:RECeiver[:FUNCtion]..................................................................... 478
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME................................................................................................... 479
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?
This command queries the level range of the bargraph.
Return values:
<Level> Lowest level displayed on the bargraph scale.
Default unit: depends on the selected unit
Example: //Query bargraph minimum level
DISP:BARG:LEV:LOW?
would return, e.g.
10
Usage: Query only
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?
This command queries the level range of the bargraph.
Return values:
<Level> Highest level displayed on the bargraph scale.
Default unit: depends on the selected unit
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 477
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Query bargraph peak level
DISP:BARG:LEV:UPP?
would return, e.g.
110
Usage: Query only
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet
This command resets the bargraph max hold.
Example: //Reset the max hold value
DISP:BARG:PHOL:RES
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Bargraph Max Hold" on page 93
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the bargraph max hold function on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on the bargraph max hold
DISP:BARG:PHOL ON
Manual operation: See "Bargraph Max Hold" on page 93
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the bargraph detector and trace detector used for
the scan.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Couple the type and color of bargraph and scan trace
DISP:BARG:TCO ON
Manual operation: See "Couple to Scan Trace" on page 93
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] <Detector>...
This command selects the detector for the bargraph measurement.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 478
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Suffix: .
<t> Trace
Parameters:
<Detector> You can select up to four detectors, one for each active bar-
graph:
<Detector>, [<Detector>, <Detector>, <Detector>]
AVERage
Selects the Average detector.
CAVerage
Selects the CISPR Average detector.
CRMS
Selects the CISPR RMS detector.
NEGative
Selects the Min Peak detector.
POSitive
Selects the Max Peak detector.
QPEak
Selects the Quasipeak detector.
RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
*RST: AVERage
Example: //Select bargraph detector
DET:REC POS,AVER,RMS
Manual operation: See "Detector" on page 127
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time>
This command defines the measurement or acquisition time for bargraph measure-
ments.
For scans not based on a scan table, the command also defines the measurement
time for the scan.
In the real-time spectrogram application, the command defines the measurement time
(min. value: 5 ms).
Parameters:
<Time> <numeric value>
Range: 5 µs to 100 s
*RST: 0.1
Default unit: s
Example: //Define measurement time
SWE:TIME 10s
Manual operation: See "Measurement Time" on page 93
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 479
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
14.5.5 Scan configuration
Commands to configure scans described elsewhere.
● See Chapter 14.5.6, "Scan table configuration", on page 481.
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE...........................................................................................480
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TDOMain.........................................................................................480
[SENSe:]FREQuency:TDOPtim....................................................................................... 481
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the scan mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> FIXed | CW
Selects fixed frequency scans.
Define the frequency with [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.
SCAN | SWEep
Selects stepped scans in the frequency domain.
Define the frequency range with:
•[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt
•[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP
•[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STARt
•[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STOP
TDOMain
Selects time domain scans in the frequency domain.
Define the frequency range with the commands for stepped
scans.
*RST: TDOMain
Example: //Select stepped scan
FREQ:MODE SCAN
Manual operation: See "Selecting the scan type" on page 106
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TDOMain <Time>
This command defines the measurement time for fixed frequency scans.
Suffix: .
<sr> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Time> <numeric value>
Measurement time in seconds.
The range indicated below is the maximum range. The actual
range depends on the measurement time defined with [SENSe:
]SWEep:TIME on page 479.
Range: 10 ms to 10000 s
Default unit: s
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 480
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Define measurement time
SCAN:TDOM 100 s
Manual operation: See "Measurement Time" on page 93
[SENSe:]FREQuency:TDOPtim <State>
This command selects the mode for time domain scans.
Parameters:
<State> AUTO
This mode ensures compliance with CISPR 16-1-1. The effects
of this mode depend on the detectors currently in use:
When you are using one of the CISPR detectors, the R&S ESW
optimizes the measurement for high measurement speed as well
as dynamic range. When you are using no CISPR detector, the
"Automatic" mode is identical to "Fast" mode.
DYNamic
This mode ensures compliance with CISPR 16-1-1.
The R&S ESW always applies a small analysis bandwidth in
favor of a high dynamic range, regardless of the detector you
are using.
FAST
The R&S ESW uses a large analysis bandwidth (FFT size) for
the data capture in favor of an increased measurement speed,
regardless of the detector you are using.
*RST: AUTO
Example: //Apply small FFT size
FREQ:TDOP DYN
Manual operation: See "Selecting the mode for time domain scans" on page 107
14.5.6 Scan table configuration
[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion].................................................................................... 482
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt........................................................................................... 482
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................483
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BANDwidth:RESolution.....................................................................483
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BARS..............................................................................................483
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO..................................................................484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation[:VALue]............................................................... 484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO............................................................................484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:AUTO.....................................................................485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:STATe.................................................................... 485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................................... 485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:TYPE..................................................................................... 486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:NAME............................................................................................. 486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:RANGes[:COUNt].............................................................................486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STARt............................................................................................. 487
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 481
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STEP.............................................................................................. 487
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STOP..............................................................................................488
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TIME...............................................................................................488
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt.................................................................................................488
[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing.............................................................................................. 489
[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector>
This command selects the detector for the scan.
In the Spectrum application, it selects the detector in general.
Suffix: .
<t> 1..n
Trace
Parameters:
<Detector> AVERage
Selects the Average detector.
CAVerage
Selects the CISPR Average detector.
CRMS
Selects the CISPR RMS detector.
NEGative
Selects the Min Peak detector.
POSitive
Selects the Max Peak detector.
QPEak
Selects the Quasipeak detector.
RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
*RST: POSitive
Example: //Select scan detector
DET RMS
Manual operation: See "Detector" on page 127
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency of a scan.
In the spectrum application, the command defines the start frequency of a measure-
ment.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Range: Refer to the datasheet
*RST: depends on application
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 482
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Define start frequency
FREQ:STAR 30 kHz
Manual operation: See "Defining a frequency range for the scan" on page 111
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency of a scan.
In the Spectrum application, the command defines the stop frequency of a measure-
ment.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Range: Refer to the datasheet
*RST: depends on application
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define stop frequency
FREQ:STOP 100MHz
Manual operation: See "Defining a frequency range for the scan" on page 111
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BANDwidth:RESolution <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth applied in the selected scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> <numeric value>
If you enter a resolution bandwidth that is not supported, the
R&S ESW uses the next available bandwidth instead.
Range: Refer to datasheet
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define a measurement bandwidth for the 4th scan range
SCAN4:BAND:RES 1MHz
Manual operation: See "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BARS <State>
This command turns the display of the bars indicating the size of a scan range on and
off.
Suffix: .
<sr> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 483
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Turn on range bars
SCAN:BARS ON
Manual operation: See "Displaying range bars" on page 112
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns auto ranging in a scan range on and off.
Suffix: .
<sr> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn off auto ranging in the 4th scan range
SCAN4:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Auto Range" on page 114
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation[:VALue] <Attenuation>
This command defines the attenuation level applied in the selected scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Attenuation> <numeric value> (integer only)
Range: 0 dB to 79 dB
Increment: 1 dB
*RST: 10 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: //Define attenuation for the 4th scan range.
SCAN4:INP:ATT 30dB
Manual operation: See "Attenuation" on page 115
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO <State>
This command includes and excludes the preamplifier from the auto ranging feature.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Automatically determine if the preamplifier is used or not
SCAN1:INP:GAIN:AUTO ON
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 484
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:AUTO <State>
This command includes and excludes the optional low noise amplifier from the auto
ranging feature.
This command is available with the optional low noise amplifier.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Automatic selection if amplifier is used or not
SCAN1:INP:GAIN:LNA:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:STATe <State>
This command turns the optional low noise amplifier on and off.
Note that it is not possible to use the low noise amplifier and the preamplifier at the
same time.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on low noise amplifier
SCAN:INP:GAIN:LNA:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the preamplifier in a scan range on and off.
The command is available with the optional preamplifier.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | 1
Turns on the preamplifier.
OFF | 0
Turns off the preamplifier.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 485
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on preamplifier for 4th scan range.
SCAN4:INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:TYPE <Input>
This command selects the RF input used for a scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Input> INPUT1
Selects RF input 1.
INPUT2
Selects RF input 2.
*RST: INPUT1
Example: //Select RF input path for the 4th scan range
SCAN4:INP:TYPE INPUT2
Manual operation: See "Input Selection" on page 116
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:NAME <Name>
This command changes the name of a scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the scan range.
Example: //Change name of scan range 4
SCAN4:NAME 'Fourth Range'
Manual operation: See "Configuring scan ranges" on page 112
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:RANGes[:COUNt] <Range>
This command defines the number of scan ranges.
Suffix: .
<sr> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 486
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Parameters:
<Range> <numeric value> (integer only)
Number of ranges in the scan table.
If you enter the value "0", the R&S ESW ignores the configura-
tion of the scan table. Instead, it performs the measurement
based on the current receiver configuration.
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 2
Example: //Define number of scan ranges
SCAN:RANG:COUN 4
Manual operation: See "Adding and removing scan ranges" on page 110
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency of a scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Range: Refer to the datasheet
*RST: Depends on the scan range.
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define start frequency for 4th scan range
SCAN4:STAR 30MHz
Manual operation: See "Range Start and Range Stop" on page 113
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STEP <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency stepsize applied in the selected scan range
Available for linear and logarithmic step mode ([SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing).
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Linear step mode: numeric value in %.
Logarithmic step mode: numeric value in Hz.
*RST: Depends on the scan and frequency range.
Default unit: HZ
Example: //Define step size for 4th scan range
SWE:SPAC LIN
SCAN4:STEP 100KHZ
Manual operation: See "Step Size" on page 113
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 487
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency of a scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Range: Refer to the datasheet
*RST: Depends on the scan range.
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define stop frequency for 4th scan range
SCAN4:STOP 500MHz
Manual operation: See "Range Start and Range Stop" on page 113
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TIME <Time>
This command defines the measurement time applied in the selected scan range.
Suffix: .
<sr> Selects the scan range.
Parameters:
<Time> <numeric value>
Range: 100 µs to 100 s
*RST: depends on the range
Default unit: s
Example: //Define measurement time for 4th scan range
SCAN4:TIME 1 ms
Manual operation: See "Measurement Time" on page 93
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <Measurements>
This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver-
age traces.
For continuous measurements, the application calculates the moving average over the
average count.
For single measurements, the application stops the measurement and calculates the
average after the average count has been reached.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 488
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Parameters:
<Measurements> <numeric value> (integer only)
Number of measurements considered in calculating an average
trace.
When you set a count of 1, the R&S ESW performs a single
measurement over the selected scan range.
Range: 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Example: //Define 10 measurements in single measurement mode
SWE:COUN 10
INIT:CONT OFF
//Start sweep and wait for its end
INIT;*WAI
Manual operation: See "Scan Count" on page 106
[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing <StepMode>
This command selects the frequency step mode.
Note that the command has no effect on the scale and display of the frequency axis.
Parameters:
<StepMode> LINear
Linear frequency steps with a fix stepsize.
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic frequency steps with the stepsize being a percent-
age of the current frequency.
AUTO
The stepsize is coupled to the resolution bandwidth to get the
best measurement results.
*RST: AUTO
Example: //Select logarithmic frequency steps
SWE:SPAC LIN
Manual operation: See "Selecting the frequency step mode" on page 111
14.5.7 Peak search
Commands to configure the peak search described elsewhere.
● FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 632
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion.........................................................................490
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:ADD..........................................................................................490
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:ADD.................................................................................... 490
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO....................................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO..................................................................................491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate]..................................................................... 491
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 489
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:CLEar[:IMMediate]................................................................491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate].......................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin.................................................................................... 492
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin...............................................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:METHod....................................................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:METHod.............................................................................. 492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt.................................................................. 492
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges:PCOunt.............................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges...............................................................................493
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:VALue].............................................................493
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol.......................................................................493
MMEMory:STORe:FINal................................................................................................. 494
MMEMory:STORe:PLISt................................................................................................. 494
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion <Excursion>
This command defines the peak excursion (for all markers in all windows).
The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak
search.
The unit depends on the measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Excursion> The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be
attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the distance to
a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is
recognized
*RST: 6 dB
Example: CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB
Defines peak excursion as 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "Defining peak characteristics" on page 120
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:ADD <Frequency>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:ADD <Frequency>
This command manually adds a particular frequency to the peak list, regardless if the
level threshold conditions have been fulfilled for that frequency.
Note that the frequency has to be in the displayed frequency range.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<Frequency>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 490
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Add a frequency to the peak list
CALC:PEAK:ADD 93MHz
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Editing a peak list" on page 122
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO <State>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic test sequence on and off.
An automated test sequence includes a scan and a peak search, but no final measure-
ment.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on the automated peak search
CALC:PEAK:AUTO ON
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate]
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the contents of a peak list.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: //Clear the peak list
CALC:PEAK:CLE
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Editing a peak list" on page 122
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch[:IMMediate]
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: //Initiate a peak search
CALC:PEAK
Usage: Event
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 491
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin <Margin>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines the limit line margin that is considered during a peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Margin> Default unit: dB
Example: //Define a limit line margin
CALC:PEAK:MARG 2
Manual operation: See "Defining peak characteristics" on page 120
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:METHod <Method>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:METHod <Method>
This command selects the way the R&S ESW creates a peak list.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Method> SUBRange
Divides the scan range into smaller subranges and looks for a
particular number of peaks in each subrange.
PEAK
Looks for a particular number of peaks over the complete scan
range.
*RST: PEAK
Example: //Divide the scan range into smaller subranges for the peak
search
CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR
Manual operation: See "Selecting the peak search method" on page 119
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt <Peaks>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges:PCOunt <Peaks>
This command defines the number of peaks to be found in each subrange.
Prerequisites for this command
● Select subrange peak search mode (CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:METHod).
● Define number of subranges (CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:
VALue]).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 492
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Parameters:
<Peaks> Number of peaks in one subrange.
Note that the maximum number of peaks is 500. Thus, the maxi-
mum number of peaks per subrange depends on the number of
subranges you have defined.
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR
CALC:PEAK:SUBR 20
CALC:PEAK:SUBR:PCO 5
Looks for 5 peaks in each of 20 subranges.
Manual operation: See "Controlling the size of the peak list" on page 119
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges <Peaks> | <Subranges>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:VALue] <Peaks | Subranges>
The effects of this command depend on the peak search mode that you have selected.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Peaks | Subranges> If you have selected the "Peaks" search mode, the command
defines the number of peaks to look for during the peak search.
Range: 1 to 500
*RST: 50
Example: //Select subrange search and define 25 subranges
CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR
CALC:PEAK:SUBR 25
Manual operation: See "Controlling the size of the peak list" on page 119
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol <Symbol>
This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Symbol> CROSs
Each peak is labeled by a symbol. The symbol and its color
depend on the trace the peak is on.
OFF
Peak labels are off.
*RST: CROSs
Example: //Turn on peak labels
DISP:TRAC:SYMB CROS
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 493
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Manual operation: See "Displaying peaks as symbols" on page 123
MMEMory:STORe:FINal <FileName>
This command exports the contents of the final measurement peak list to a file in ASCII
format.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name. The extension of the file is
*.dat.
Example: //Export the peak list
MMEM:STOR:FIN 'A:\TEST.DAT'
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Exporting a peak list" on page 123
MMEMory:STORe:PLISt <FileName>
This command exports the contents of the final measurement peak list to a file in ASCII
format.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name. The extension of the file is
*.dat.
Example: //Export the peak list
MMEM:STOR:PLIS 'A:\TEST.DAT'
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Exporting a peak list" on page 123
14.5.8 Peak list
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:ALL?..................................................................... 495
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:ALL?.................................................................... 495
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:COMMent.............................................................. 495
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:COMMent............................................................. 495
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELete.................................................................. 496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELete................................................................. 496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELTa?..................................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?................................................................ 496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DETector?..............................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DETector?.............................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:FREQuency?......................................................... 497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?........................................................ 497
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:LEVel?...................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:LEVel................................................................... 497
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:SIZE?....................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?...................................................................497
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 494
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:TRACe?................................................................ 498
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?............................................................... 498
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>[:DATA]?................................................................. 498
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?................................................................ 498
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:ALL?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:ALL?
This command queries the information for all peaks found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> irrelevant
Return values:
<Peaks> List of values representing all measured peaks. The size of the
list depends on the number of peaks found in the peak search.
For each peak, the command returns the following information.
<TraceNumber>,<Detector>,<Frequency>,<Level>,
<DeltaLimit>,<Comment>,...
<DeltaLimit> is '0' if you use no limit line.
<comment> is empty if you have not entered one for the corre-
sponding peak.
Example: //Query peak information
CALC:PEAK:PLIS:ALL?
would return, e.g.
'TRACE1,Quasi-Peak,
4.5e+07,53.99,0,yahoo,TRACE2,Average,
4.5e+07,53.07,0,,TRACE3,RMS,
4.5e+07,50.89,0,,TRACE4,Quasi-Peak,
4.5e+07,53.99,0,,[...]'
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:COMMent <Comment>
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:COMMent <Comment>
This command assigns a comment to a peak found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> 1..n
Peak
Parameters:
<Comment> String that contains the comment.
Example: //Define a comment for a peak
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:COMM 'Woohoo'
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 495
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELete
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELete
This command deletes a peak from the peak list.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Example: //Deletes a peak from the peak list
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:DEL
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELTa?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?
This command queries the distance of a peak to the nearest limit line in the peak
search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Level> If you are using no limit line, the return value is '0'.
Example: //Query distance to limit line
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:DELT?
//would return, e.g.
3.23
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DETector?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DETector?
This command queries the detector with which a peak was found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Detector> String that contains the name of the detector.
Example: //Query detector the peak was measured with
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:DET?
//would return, e.g.
'Average'
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 496
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:FREQuency?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequency of a peak found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Frequency>
Example: //Query frequency of a peak
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:FREQ?
//would return, e.g.
69420000
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:LEVel?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:LEVel <Level>
This command queries the level of a peak found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
The unit depends on your selection (CALCulate<n>:UNIT:
POWer).
Example: //Query level of the fourth peak
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:LEV?
//would return, e.g.
-53.99
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:SIZE?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?
This command queries the number of peaks found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> irrelevant
Return values:
<Peaks>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 497
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Query size of peak list
CALC:PEAK:PLIS:SIZE
//would return, e.g.
100
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:TRACe?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?
This command queries the trace that a peak found in the peak search is located on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Trace> String that contains the trace number.
Example: //Query trace the peak is on
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4:TRAC
//would return, e.g.
'TRACE1'
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>[:DATA]?
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?
This command queries the information for a peak found in the peak search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<PeakResults> String that contains a list of values for the selected peak.
The command returns the following information.
<TraceNumber>,<Detector>,<Frequency>,<Level>,
<DeltaLimit>,<Comment>,...
<DeltaLimit> is '0' if you use no limit line.
<comment> is empty if you have not entered one for the corre-
sponding peak.
Example: //Query the information for a peak
CALC:PEAK:PLIS4?
//would return, e.g.
'TRACE2,Average,4.5e+07,53.07,0,Woohoo'
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 498
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
14.5.9 Final measurement (and trace) configuration
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement[:AUTO]............................................................................ 499
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW........................................................................ 499
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement..............................................................................500
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO....................................................................................... 500
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME........................................................................................ 500
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE.........................................................................501
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]............................................ 502
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE.......................................................................................... 502
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement[:AUTO] <State>
This command turns a full automated test sequence on and off.
A full automated test sequence includes a scan, a peak search and a final measure-
ment.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on automated test sequence.
CALC:FME ON
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW <State>
This command turns the "Transducer" trace mode on and off.
Also possible with DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 501.
Parameters:
<State> ON | 1
Turns on the transducer trace.
The transducer trace represents the correction values of all
active transducers over the currently selected frequency range.
When you turn on the transducer trace, all other traces are tem-
porarily removed.
OFF | 0
Turns off the transducer trace, and restores the original scan
traces.
*RST: 0
Example: CORR:TRAN:VIEW ON
TRAC? TRACE1
Turns on the transducer trace and queries the correction values.
Manual operation: See "Trace Mode" on page 127
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 499
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement <Detector>
This command selects the detector for the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<t> Trace
Parameters:
<Detector> AVERage
Selects the Average detector.
CAVerage
Selects the CISPR Average detector.
CRMS
Selects the CISPR RMS detector.
NEGative
Selects the Min Peak detector.
NONE
Ignores the corresponding trace during the final measurement.
POSitive
Selects the Max Peak detector.
QPEak
Selects the Quasipeak detector.
RMS
Selects the RMS detector.
*RST: QPEak
Example: //Select final measurement detector
DET:FME POS
Manual operation: See "Detector" on page 127
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO <State>
This command turns a full automated test sequence on and off.
A full automated test sequence includes a scan, a peak search and a final measure-
ment.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Turn on automated test sequence.
FME:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See "Interactive" on page 128
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME <Time>
This command defines the time each frequency in the peak list is measured during the
final measurement.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 500
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Parameters:
<Time> <numeric value>
*RST: 1s
Default unit: s
Example: //Define final measurement time
FME:TIME 1us
Manual operation: See "Measurement Time" on page 93
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <DisplayMode>
This command selects the trace mode.
To turn on the transducer trace mode, use [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:
VIEW on page 499.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> Trace
Parameters:
<DisplayMode> AVERage
Draws a trace based on the average over several measure-
ments.
You can define the number of measurements considered in the
averaging process with [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt.
BLANk
Removes the trace from the display.
MAXHold
Draws a trace based on the highest values that have been mea-
sured over several measurements.
You can define the number of measurements with [SENSe:
]SWEep:COUNt.
MINHold
Draws a trace based on the lowest values that have been mea-
sured over several measurements.
You can define the number of measurements with [SENSe:
]SWEep:COUNt.
TRD
Draws a trace that shows the correction values of all active
transducer factors in the currently selected frequency range.
See also [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW
on page 499.
VIEW
Freezes the trace.
Even if you continue the measurement, the trace remains as it
is.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 501
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
WRITe
Overwrites the trace when a new measurement begins.
*RST: Depends on the trace number.
Example: //Select trace mode and display the highest value obtained over
5 measurements
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH
SENS:SWE:COUN 5
Manual operation: See "Trace Mode" on page 127
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a trace on and off.
The measurement continues in the background.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Irrelevant in the Receiver application.
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<t> Trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: DISP:TRAC3 ON
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE <Mode>
This command selects the trace averaging mode.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
Window
Parameters:
<Mode> LOGarithmic
The logarithmic power values are averaged.
LINear
The power values are averaged before they are converted to
logarithmic values.
POWer
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to
averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into
its original unit.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 502
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: AVER:TYPE LIN
Switches to linear average calculation.
Manual operation: See "Average Mode" on page 128
14.5.10 Final results
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:ALL?................................................................ 503
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:COMMent......................................................... 504
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?.............................................................504
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DETector...........................................................504
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?.................................................... 505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:LEVel............................................................... 505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?............................................................... 505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?............................................................506
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?............................................................ 506
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:ALL?
This command queries the information for all peaks measured in the final measure-
ment.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> irrelevant
Return values:
<FinalResults> List of values representing all measured peaks. The size of the
list depends on the number of peaks measured in the final mea-
surement.
For each peak, the command returns the following information.
<TraceNumber>,<Detector>,<Frequency>,<Level>,
<DeltaLimit>,<Comment>,...
<DeltaLimit> is '0' if you use no limit line.
<comment> is empty if you have not entered one for the corre-
sponding peak.
Example: //Query peak information
CALC:FME:PLIS?
would return, e.g.
'TRACE1,Quasi-Peak,
4.5e+07,53.99,0,yahoo,TRACE2,Average,
4.5e+07,53.07,0,,TRACE3,RMS,
4.5e+07,50.89,0,,TRACE4,Quasi-Peak,
4.5e+07,53.99,0,,[...]'
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 503
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a peak measured in the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Parameters:
<Comment> String that contains the comment.
Example: //Define a comment for the fourth peak in the peak list
CALC:FME:PLIS4:COMM 'Woohoo'
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?
This command queries the distance of a peak to the nearest limit line in the final mea-
surement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Level> <numeric value>
If you are using no limit line, the return value is '0'.
Default unit: dB
Example: //Query distance of a peak to a limit line
CALC:FME:PLIS4:DELT?
//would return, e.g.
3.23
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DETector <Detector>
This command queries the detector with which a peak was measured in the final mea-
surement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Parameters:
<Detector> String that contains the name of the detector.
Example: //Query detector the peak was measured with
CALC:FME:PLIS4:DET?
//would return, e.g.
'Average'
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 504
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequency of a peak measured in the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Query frequency of a peak
CALC:FME:PLIS4:FREQ?
//would return, e.g.
69420000
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:LEVel <Level>
This command queries the level of a peak measured in the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
The unit depends on your selection (CALCulate<n>:UNIT:
POWer).
Example: //Query level of the fourth peak
CALC:FME:PLIS4:LEV?
//Return value example:
-53.99
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?
This command queries the number of peaks measured in the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> irrelevant
Return values:
<Peaks>
Example: //Query size of peak list
CALC:FME:PLIS:SIZE
Return value example:
100
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 505
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?
This command queries the trace that a peak measured in the final measurement is
located on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<Trace> String that contains the trace number.
Example: //Query trace of the peak
CALC:FME:PLIS4:TRAC
//would return, e.g.
'TRACE1'
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?
This command queries the information for a peak measured in the final measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<pi> Peak
Return values:
<PeakResults> List of values for the selected peak.
The command returns the following information.
<TraceNumber>,<Detector>,<Frequency>,<Level>,
<DeltaLimit>,<Comment>,...
<DeltaLimit> is '0' if you use no limit line.
<comment> is empty if you have not entered one for the corre-
sponding peak.
Example: //Query peak information
CALC:FME:PLIS4?
//Return value example:
'TRACE2,Average,4.5e+07,53.07,0,Woohoo'
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 506
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
14.5.11 LISN configuration
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe............................................................................. 507
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:LISN:PHASe....................................................................................507
INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe].............................................................................508
INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe.................................................................................................. 508
INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE]...................................................................................................509
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe <Phase>...
This command selects the LISN phases to be measured in a final measurement.
Parameters:
<Phase> You can select several phases for the final measurement:
<Phase>,[<Phase>,<Phase>,<Phase>]
L1
L2
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST: L1
Example: //Select phases for the final measurement
FME:LISN:PHAS L1,N
Manual operation: See "Phase" on page 131
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:LISN:PHASe <Phase>...
This command selects the LISN phases to be measured in a scan.
Suffix: .
<sr> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Phase> You can select several phases for the scan:
<Phase>,[<Phase>,<Phase>,<Phase>]
L1
L2
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST: L1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 507
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Example: //Select phases to be measured in the scan
SCAN:LISN:PHAS L1,N
Manual operation: See "Phase" on page 131
INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter of the ENV216 network on and off.
Prerequisites for this command
● Select ENV216 network (INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE]).
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on high pass filter
INP:LISN:TYPE ENV216
INP:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON
Manual operation: See "High-Pass Filter 150 kHz" on page 132
INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe <Phase>
This command selects one LISN phase to be measured.
The command is available in all applications (spectrum, receiver, I/Q analyzer and ana-
log demodulator).
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Phase> L1
L2
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
L3
Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5,
R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432)
N
*RST: L1
Example: //Select phase L1
INP:LISN:PHAS L1
Manual operation: See "Phase" on page 131
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 508
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] <Type>
This command turns automatic control of a LISN on and off. It also selects the type of
network.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> ENV216
R&S ENV 216: two phases and highpass are controllable.
ENV432
R&S ENV 432: four phases are controllable.
ENV4200
R&S ENV 4200: four phases are controllable.
ESH2Z5
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla-
ble.
ESH3Z5
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla-
ble.
FOURphase
R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla-
ble.
OFF
Turns off control of the LISN.
TWOPhase
R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla-
ble.
*RST: OFF
Example: //Select LISN
INP:LISN:TYPE TWOP
Manual operation: See "LISN Type" on page 131
14.5.12 CISPR APD measurement configuration
The remote commands to configure CISPR APD measurements are similar to those
available for the APD measurement in the Spectrum application.
For a comprehensive description, refer to the user manual of the Spectrum application.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent.......................................................................... 509
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent <Probability>
This command sets a marker to a particular probability value. You can query the corre-
sponding level with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 509
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
Using the command turns delta markers into normal markers.
This command is available for CCDF measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Probability> Range: 0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example: CALC1:MARK:Y:PERC 95PCT
Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 %.
Manual operation: See "Percent Marker" on page 134
14.5.13 Preventing overlapping execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the
corresponding action to occur.
Table 14-3: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Com- Action Programming the controller
mand
*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the Stan- ● Setting bit 0 in the ESE
dard Event Status Register (ESR) after all ● Setting bit 5 in the SRE
previous commands have been executed. ● Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Send *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This occurs when all pending opera- whose processing must be terminated before
tions are completed. other commands can be executed.
*WAI Stops further command processing until all Send *WAI directly after the command whose
commands sent before Wait-to-Continue processing must be terminated before other
Command (WAI) have been executed. commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped
command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply
block overlapping execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to
the overlapped command, for example:
SINGle; *OPC?
For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instru-
ment to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the fol-
lowing methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Execute *ESE 1
Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 510
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
2. Execute *SRE 32
Sets the Event Status Bit (ESB - bit No. 5) of the Service Request Enable Register
(SRE) to 1 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC
Example: INIT; *OPC
4. Wait for an ESB service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request
1. Execute *SRE 16
Sets the Message Available bit (MAV - bit No. 4) of the Service Request Enable
Register (SRE) to 1 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?
Example: INIT; *OPC?
3. Wait for an MAV service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event status enable register (ESE)
1. Execute *ESE 1
Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
Example: INIT; *OPC?
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence:
*OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
14.5.14 Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements
This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a
remote environment.
//2xSpectrumanalyzer + 2xIQ, start Sequencer at the end, test OPC?
// ------------------------------------------------------------------------
//------Preparing the instrument and first and second channel -----------
*RST
//Activate new IQ channel
INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 1'
//Set sweep count for new IQ channel
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 511
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Measurements and result displays
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 6
//Change trace modes for IQ channel
DISP:TRAC1:MODE BLANK
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MINH
//Switch to single sweep mode
INIT:CONT OFF
//switch back to first (default) analyzer channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI
//Switch into SEM
SENSe:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum
//Load Sem standard file for W-CDMA
SENSe:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\3GPP_DL.xml'
//Set sweep count in Spectrum channel
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 5
//----------Creating a third measurement channel ----------------
//Create second IQ channel
INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 2'
//Set sweep count
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 2
//Change trace modes
DISP:TRAC1:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH
//Create new analyzer channel
INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2'
//Activate ACLR measurement in channel 'Spectrum 2'
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower
//Load W-CDMA Standard
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet FW3Gppcdma
//Change trace modes
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC1:MODE MINH
//--------Performing a sweep and retrieving results----------------
//Change sweep count
SENS:SWEep:COUNt 7
//Single Sweep mode
INIT:CONT OFF
//Switch back to first IQ channel
INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI
//Perform a measurement
INIT:IMM;*OPC?
//Retrieve results
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Activate Multiview
DISPlay:ATAB ON
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 512
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
//---------Performing a sequence of measurements with the Sequencer------------
//Activate Sequencer
SYSTem:SEQuencer ON
//Start sweep in Sequencer
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC?
//Switch into first IQ channel to get results
INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Change sweep time in IQ
SENS:SWE:TIME 300us
//Switch to single Sequencer mode
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE SINGle
//Sweep all channels once, taking the sweep count in each channel into account
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC?
//Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results
INST:SEL 'IQ 2';*WAI
CALCulate:MARKer:MIN
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Switch to first Spectrum channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI
//Query one of the SEM results
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer
//Switch to second Spectrum channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2';*WAI
//Query channel power result
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower
14.6 Configuration
● Input configuration.................................................................................................514
● Output configuration..............................................................................................539
● Frequency configuration........................................................................................547
● Amplitude configuration.........................................................................................551
● Diagram scale....................................................................................................... 555
● Bandwidth and filter configuration.........................................................................555
● Trigger configuration............................................................................................. 558
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 513
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
14.6.1 Input configuration
● RF input configuration........................................................................................... 514
● Preselector configuration...................................................................................... 515
● Using external mixers............................................................................................517
● External generator control (optional).....................................................................531
● User port configuration (AUX port)........................................................................538
14.6.1.1 RF input configuration
INPut<ip>:COUPling.......................................................................................................514
INPut<ip>:IMPedance.....................................................................................................514
INPut<ip>:TYPE............................................................................................................ 515
INPut<ip>:COUPling <CouplingType>
This command selects the coupling type of the RF input.
Suffix: .
<ip> 1|2
irrelevant
Parameters:
<CouplingType> AC | DC
AC
AC coupling
DC
DC coupling
*RST: AC
Example: INP:COUP DC
Manual operation: See "Input Coupling" on page 144
INPut<ip>:IMPedance <Impedance>
This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input. In some applica-
tions, only 50 Ω are supported.
Suffix: .
<ip> 1|2
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Impedance> 50 | 75
*RST: 50 Ω
Default unit: OHM
Example: INP:IMP 75
Manual operation: See "Impedance" on page 144
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 514
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
INPut<ip>:TYPE <Input>
The command selects the input path.
Suffix: .
<ip> 1|2
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Input> INPUT1
Selects RF input 1.
INPUT2
Selects RF input 2.
*RST: INPUT1
Example: //Select input path
INP:TYPE INPUT1
Manual operation: See "Input Selection" on page 116
14.6.1.2 Preselector configuration
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:LIMiter[:STATe]............................................................................ 515
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe]....................................................515
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit[:STATe]...................................................................516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit:TYPE..................................................................... 516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection[:STATe]..................................................................................... 517
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:LIMiter[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the pulse limiter on and off.
The pulse limiter is an additional protection mechanism for the second RF input that
attenuates high level pulses.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Turn on pulse limiter
INP:ATT:LIM ON
Manual operation: See "Pulse Limiter" on page 145
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a preselecting notch filter on and off.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 515
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
<notch> 1..2
Selects the filter.
• <1> Selects the notch filter suppressing signals from 2.4 GHz
to 2.483 GHz. Available with Preselector 2 Unit, Mat-Nr.
1345.0450.02
• <1> Selects the notch filter suppressing signals from 2.4 GHz
to 2.5 GHz. Available with Preselector 2 Unit, Mat-Nr.
1328.4522.02
• <2> Selects the notch filter suppressing signals from
5.725 GHz to 5.875 GHz.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on notch filter for frequencies from 5.725 GHz to
5.875 GHz.
INP:PRES:FILT:NOTC2 ON
Manual operation: See "Preselector Filter Settings" on page 146
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit[:STATe] <Filter>
This command turns multiple stage preselector filters on and off.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Filter> ON | 1
Multiple preselector filters can be selected using INPut<ip>:
PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit:TYPE on page 516.
OFF | 0
A single filter is applied, covering the frequency range from
150 kHz to 30 MHz.
*RST: OFF
Example: //Enable multiple filter stages
INP:PRES:FILT:SPL ON
Manual operation: See "Preselector Filter Settings" on page 146
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit:TYPE <TypeId>
Selects one of the multiple stage preselector filters.
To select multiple stage preselector filters, enable them first using INPut<ip>:
PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit[:STATe] on page 516.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 516
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<TypeId> <numeric value>
1
Two consecutive filters are applied in the frequency range from
150 kHz to 30 MHz: one from 150 kHz to 2 MHz, and one from
2 MHz to 30 MHz.
2
Two consecutive filters are applied in the frequency range from
150 kHz to 30 MHz: one from 150 kHz to 8 MHz, and one from
8 MHz to 30 MHz. Available with Preselector 1, Mat-Nr.
1345.0509.02
3
Three consecutive filters are applied in the frequency range from
150 kHz to 30 MHz: one from 150 kHz to 2 MHz, one from
2 MHz to 8 MHz, and one from 8 MHz to 30 MHz. Available with
Preselector 1, Mat-Nr. 1345.0509.02
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Preselector Filter Settings" on page 146
INPut<ip>:PRESelection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the preselector on and off.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: Depends on application.
Example: //Turn on preselector
INP:PRES ON
Manual operation: See "Preselector State" on page 146
14.6.1.3 Using external mixers
The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are
described here. Note that these commands require the R&S ESW to have an external
mixer option installed and an external mixer to be connected to the R&S ESW.
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 518
● Mixer settings........................................................................................................ 519
● Conversion loss table settings.............................................................................. 525
● Programming example: working with an external mixer........................................529
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 517
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Basic settings
The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer.
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe]............................................................................................. 518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH........................................................................................518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW].......................................................................................518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower.......................................................................................... 519
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea-
surement. This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and
an external mixer is connected.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: MIX ON
Manual operation: See "External Mixer (State)" on page 157
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the high (last) range.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe:
]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 518).
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<BiasSetting> *RST: 0.0 A
Default unit: A
Manual operation: See "Bias Value" on page 160
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW] <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the low (first) range.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe:
]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 518).
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 518
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<BiasSetting> *RST: 0.0 A
Default unit: A
Manual operation: See "Bias Value" on page 160
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower <Level>
This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer's LO port.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> Range: 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST: 15.5 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example: MIX:LOP 16.0dBm
Manual operation: See "LO Level" on page 160
Mixer settings
The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set-
tings.
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover...................................................................... 519
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt............................................................................ 520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP.............................................................................520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet.................................................................. 520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND...............................................................................521
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe..................................................................... 521
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue]................................................................... 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE............................................................................... 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW].............................................................................. 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:IF?................................................................................................... 523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH...................................................................................... 523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH............................................................................523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW]...........................................................................524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW]..................................................................................... 524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs..............................................................................................524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe]........................................................................ 525
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to
the next (if two different ranges are selected). The handover frequency for each band
can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 519
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe:
]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 518).
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> Default unit: HZ
Example: MIX ON
Activates the external mixer.
MIX:FREQ:HAND 78.0299GHz
Sets the handover frequency to 78.0299 GHz.
Manual operation: See "Handover Freq" on page 158
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt
This command sets or queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Example: MIX:FREQ:STAR?
Queries the start frequency of the band.
Manual operation: See "RF Start / RF Stop" on page 157
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP
This command sets or queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Example: MIX:FREQ:STOP?
Queries the stop frequency of the band.
Manual operation: See "RF Start / RF Stop" on page 157
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet
This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave-
guide band.
Note: Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the
[PRESET] function. Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 520
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Example: MIX:HARM:BAND:PRES
Presets the selected waveguide band.
Manual operation: See "Preset Band" on page 158
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND <Band>
This command selects the external mixer band. The query returns the currently
selected band.
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe:
]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 518).
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Band> KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER
Standard waveguide band or user-defined band.
Manual operation: See "Band" on page 158
Table 14-4: Frequency ranges for pre-defined bands
Band Frequency start [GHz] Frequency stop [GHz]
KA (A) *) 26.5 40.0
Q 33.0 50.0
U 40.0 60.0
V 50.0 75.0
E 60.0 90.0
W 75.0 110.0
F 90.0 140.0
D 110.0 170.0
G 140.0 220.0
J 220.0 325.0
Y 325.0 500.0
USER 32.18 68.22
(default) (default)
*) The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA".
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe <State>
This command specifies whether a second (high) harmonic is to be used to cover the
band's frequency range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 521
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Range 1/Range 2" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high (second) range.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<HarmOrder> Range: 2 to 128 (USER band); for other bands: see band
definition
Example: MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
MIX:HARM:HIGH 3
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Order" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE <OddEven>
This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd, even,
or both.
Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<OddEven> ODD | EVEN | EODD
ODD | EVEN | EODD
*RST: EVEN
Example: MIX:HARM:TYPE ODD
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Type" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low (first) range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 522
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<HarmOrder> Range: 2 to 128 (USER band); for other bands: see band
definition
*RST: 2 (for band F)
Example: MIX:HARM 3
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Order" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:IF?
Queries the intermediate frequency currently used by the external mixer.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Example: MIX:IF?
Example: See "Programming example: working with an external mixer"
on page 529.
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high (sec-
ond) range.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
Parameters:
<Average> Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 24.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: MIX:LOSS:HIGH 20dB
Manual operation: See "Conversion Loss" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH <FileName>
This command defines the conversion loss table to be used for the high (second)
range.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 523
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the file, or the serial
number of the external mixer whose file is required. The
R&S ESW automatically selects the correct cvl file for the cur-
rent IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-defined
conversion loss table (.acl file).
Manual operation: See "Conversion Loss" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] <FileName>
This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low
(first) range.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the file, or the serial
number of the external mixer whose file is required. The
R&S ESW automatically selects the correct cvl file for the cur-
rent IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-defined
conversion loss table (.acl file).
Example: MIX:LOSS:TABL '101567'
MIX:LOSS:TABL?
//Result:
'101567_MAG_6_B5000_3G5.B5G'
Manual operation: See "Conversion Loss" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW] <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low (first)
range.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
Parameters:
<Average> Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 24.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: MIX:LOSS 20dB
Manual operation: See "Conversion Loss" on page 159
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs <PortType>
This command selects the mixer type.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 524
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<PortType> 2|3
2
Two-port mixer.
3
Three-port mixer.
*RST: 2
Example: MIX:PORT 3
Manual operation: See "Mixer Type" on page 158
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe] <State>
If enabled, the band limits are extended beyond "RF Start" and "RF Stop" due to the
capabilities of the used harmonics.
Suffix: .
<x> 1..n
irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "RF Overrange" on page 158
Conversion loss table settings
The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables.
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND....................................................................................525
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS..................................................................................... 526
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?...............................................................................526
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar................................................................................... 527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent..............................................................................527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA.................................................................................... 527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic............................................................................. 528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer.................................................................................... 528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs.................................................................................. 528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect.................................................................................. 529
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber.............................................................................. 529
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND <Band>
This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be
used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be
assigned to the range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 525
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<Band> K | KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER
Standard waveguide band or user-defined band.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands,
see Table 14-4).
*RST: F (90 GHz - 140 GHz)
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:BAND KA
Sets the band to KA (26.5 GHz - 40 GHz).
Manual operation: See "Band" on page 163
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<BiasSetting> *RST: 0.0 A
Default unit: A
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:BIAS 3A
Manual operation: See "Write to CVL table" on page 161
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?
This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the
C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\ directory on the instrument.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Return values:
<Files> 'string'
Comma-separated list of strings containing the file names.
Example: CORR:CVL:CAT?
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 526
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
This command deletes the selected conversion loss table. Before this command can
be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:
]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:CLE
Manual operation: See "Delete Table" on page 162
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <Text>
This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table. Before this command
can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:
]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<Text>
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:COMM 'Conversion loss table for
FS_Z60'
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 163
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA {<Freq>, <Level>}...
This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables.
The values are entered as a set of frequency/level pairs. You can define a maximum of
500 frequency/level pairs. Before this command can be performed, you must select the
conversion loss table (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<Freq> The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order.
Default unit: HZ
<Level> Default unit: DB
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB
Manual operation: See "Position/Value" on page 164
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 527
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic <HarmOrder>
This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be
used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be
assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<HarmOrder> Range: 2 to 65
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:HARM 3
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Order" on page 163
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <Type>
This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table. This setting is
checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the
range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<Type> string
Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:MIX 'FS_Z60'
Manual operation: See "Mixer Name" on page 163
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs <PortType>
This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table. This setting is
checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the
range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<PortType> 2|3
*RST: 2
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 528
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:PORT 3
Manual operation: See "Mixer Type" on page 164
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <FileName>
This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name. If
<file_name> is not available, a new conversion loss table is created.
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the file.
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Manual operation: See "New Table" on page 162
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <SerialNo>
This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss
table is to be used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the
table can be assigned to the range.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 529).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.
Parameters:
<SerialNo> Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:MIX '123.4567'
Manual operation: See "Mixer S/N" on page 164
Programming example: working with an external mixer
This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ-
ment. It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration.
Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer, this measurement will not
return useful results.
//--------------Preparing the instrument -----------
//Reset the instrument
*RST
//Activate the use of the connected external mixer.
SENS:MIX ON
//----------- Configuring basic mixer behavior -------------
//Set the LO level of the mixer's LO port to 15 dBm.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 529
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
SENS:MIX:LOP 15dBm
//Set the bias current to -1 mA .
SENS:MIX:BIAS:LOW -1mA
//----------- Configuring the mixer and band settings -------------
//Use band "V" to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic (6).
SENS:MIX:HARM:BAND V
SENS:MIX:RFOV ON
//Query the possible range
SENS:MIX:FREQ:STAR?
//Result: 47480000000 (47.48 GHz)
SENS:MIX:FREQ:STOP?
//Result: 138020000000 (138.02 GHz)
//Use a 3-port mixer type
SENS:MIX:PORT 3
//Split the frequency range into two ranges;
//range 1 covers 47.48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz; harmonic 6, average conv. loss of 20 dB
//range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138.02 GHz; harmonic 8, average conv.loss of 30 dB
SENS:MIX:HARM:TYPE EVEN
SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
SENS:MIX:FREQ:HAND 80GHz
SENS:MIX:HARM:LOW 6
SENS:MIX:LOSS:LOW 20dB
SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH 8
SENS:MIX:LOSS:HIGH 30dB
//--------- Activating automatic signal identification functions -----------
//Activate both automatic signal identification functions.
SENS:MIX:SIGN ALL
//Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB.
SENS:MIX:THR 8dB
//--------------Performing the Measurement-----
//Select single sweep mode.
INIT:CONT OFF
//Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished.
INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results-------------
//Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions
//(default screen configuration)
TRAC:DATA? TRACE3
Configuring a conversion loss table for a user-defined band
//--------------Preparing the instrument -----------
//Reset the instrument
*RST
//Activate the use of the connected external mixer.
SENS:MIX ON
//--------------Configuring a new conversion loss table --------------
//Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 530
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
// (extended V band)
SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL 'UserTable'
SENS:CORR:CVL:COMM 'User-defined conversion loss table for USER band'
SENS:CORR:CVL:BAND USER
SENS:CORR:CVL:HARM 6
SENS:CORR:CVL:BIAS -1mA
SENS:CORR:CVL:MIX 'FS_Z60'
SENS:CORR:CVL:SNUM '123.4567'
SENS:CORR:CVL:PORT 3
//Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz
SENS:CORR:CVL:DATA 55GHZ,-20DB,75GHZ,-30DB
//----------- Configuring the mixer and band settings -------------
//Use user-defined band and assign new cvl table.
SENS:MIX:HARM:BAND USER
//Define band by two ranges;
//range 1 covers 47.48 GHz to 80 GHz; harmonic 6, cvl table 'UserTable'
//range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138.02 GHz; harmonic 8, average conv.loss of 30 dB
SENS:MIX:HARM:TYPE EVEN
SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
SENS:MIX:FREQ:HAND 80GHz
SENS:MIX:HARM:LOW 6
SENS:MIX:LOSS:TABL:LOW 'UserTable'
SENS:MIX:HARM:HIGH 8
SENS:MIX:LOSS:HIGH 30dB
//Query the possible range
SENS:MIX:FREQ:STAR?
//Result: 47480000000 (47.48 GHz)
SENS:MIX:FREQ:STOP?
//Result: 138020000000 (138.02 GHz)
//--------------Performing the Measurement-----
//Select single sweep mode.
INIT:CONT OFF
//Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished.
INIT;*WAI
//---------------Retrieving Results-------------
//Return the trace data (default screen configuration)
TRAC:DATA? TRACe1
14.6.1.4 External generator control (optional)
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency........................................................................532
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]............................................ 532
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator......................................533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator......................................... 533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet........................................................... 534
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel]................................................................... 534
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce].........................................................535
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 531
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe].............................................................................. 535
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet.............................................................535
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess...................................536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface............................................536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK.................................................. 536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE................................................. 537
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess................................. 537
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<Frequency> Source frequency of the external generator.
*RST: 1100050000
Default unit: HZ
Example: //Define frequency of the generator
SOUR:EXT:FREQ 10MHz
Manual operation: See "(Manual) Source Frequency" on page 181
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the
R&S ESW.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each
sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of
the R&S ESW. The RF frequency range covers the currently
defined span of the R&S ESW (unless limited by the range of
the signal generator).
OFF | 0
The generator uses a single fixed frequency, defined by
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency.
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:COUP ON
Manual operation: See "Source Frequency Coupling" on page 181
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 532
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Value>
This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency
is multiplied to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:
Numerator
FGenerator FAnalyzer FOffset
Deno min ator
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 1
Example: //Define multiplication factor of 4/3; the transmit frequency of the
generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3
Manual operation: See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/
Offset)" on page 182
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Value>
This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is
multiplied to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:
Numerator
FGenerator FAnalyzer FOffset
Deno min ator
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
*RST: 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 533
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Example: //Define multiplication factor of 4/3; the transmit frequency of the
generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3
Manual operation: See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/
Offset)" on page 182
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana-
lyzer frequency.
Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the
following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:
Numerator
FGenerator FAnalyzer FOffset
Deno min ator
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<Offset> <numeric value>, specified in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz, rounded to
the nearest Hz
*RST: 0 Hz
Default unit: HZ
Example: //Define an offset between generator output frequency and ana-
lyzer frequency
SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 10HZ
Manual operation: See "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/
Offset)" on page 182
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel] <Level>
This command sets the output power of the selected generator.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
*RST: -20 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example: //Define generator output level
SOUR:EXT:POW -30dBm
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 534
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Manual operation: See "Source Power" on page 181
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source>
This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
Uses the internal reference.
EXTernal
Uses the external reference; if none is available, an error flag is
displayed in the status bar.
*RST: INT
Example: //Select an external reference oscillator
SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Manual operation: See "Reference" on page 180
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
<gen>
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Manual operation: See "Source State" on page 181
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 535
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<Offset> Range: -200 dB to +200 dB
*RST: 0dB
Default unit: DB
Example: SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB
Manual operation: See "Source Offset" on page 181
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess <Number>
Changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the external generator.
Suffix: .
<gen> 1..n
Parameters:
<Number> Range: 0 to 30
*RST: 28
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 15
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name"
on page 179
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface <Type>
Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator.
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 535).
Suffix: .
<gen>
Parameters:
<Type> GPIB
TCPip
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:INT TCP
Manual operation: See "Interface" on page 179
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK <Type>
This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is
used.
The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. During
GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator separately. If
the TTL interface is also used, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go.
Frequencies can then be switched per TTL handshake, which speeds up the process
considerably.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 536
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
This command is only available if external generator control is active (see
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 535).
Suffix: .
<gen>
Parameters:
<Type> GPIB | TTL
GPIB
GPIB connection without TTL synchronization (for all generators
of other manufacturers and some Rohde & Schwarz devices)
TTL
GPIB connection with TTL synchronization (if available; for most
Rohde&Schwarz devices)
*RST: GPIB
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:LINK TTL
Selects GPIB + TTL interface for generator operation.
Manual operation: See "TTL Handshake" on page 179
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the type of external generator.
For a list of the available generator types, see "Overview of supported generators"
on page 173.
Suffix: .
<gen>
Parameters:
<Name> <Generator name as string value>
*RST: SMU02
Example: //Select an external generator
SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:TYPE 'SMW06'
Manual operation: See "Generator Type" on page 179
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess <Address>
Configures the TCP/IP address for the external generator.
Suffix: .
<gen>
Parameters:
<Address> TCP/IP address between 0.0.0.0 and 0.255.255.255
*RST: 0.0.0.0
Example: SYST:COMM:TCP:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 130.094.122.195
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 537
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name"
on page 179
14.6.1.5 User port configuration (AUX port)
INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe.................................................................................................538
INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]...............................................................................................538
OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue]..........................................................................................539
OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe............................................................................................539
INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector.
This 9-pole SUB-D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R&S ESW.
See the R&S ESW Getting Started manual for details.
Suffix: .
<ip> 1|2
irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | 1
User port is switched to INPut
OFF | 0
User port is switched to OUTPut
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "User port configuration" on page 140
INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
For details see OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue] on page 539.
Suffix: .
<ip> 1|2
irrelevant
Return values:
<Level> bit values in hexadecimal format
TTL type voltage levels (max. 5V)
Range: #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example: INP:UPOR?
//Result: #B00100100
Pins 5 and 7 are active.
Manual operation: See "User port configuration" on page 140
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 538
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue] <Value>
This command sets the control lines of the user ports.
The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Pin N/A N/A 5 3 4 7 6 2
Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0.
The user port is written to with the given binary pattern.
If the user port is programmed to input instead of output (see INPut<ip>:UPORt:
STATe on page 538), the output value is temporarily stored.
Suffix: .
<up> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> bit values in hexadecimal format
TTL type voltage levels (max. 5V)
Range: #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example: OUTP:UPOR #B00100100
Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V.
Manual operation: See "User port configuration" on page 140
OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector.
This 9-pole SUB-D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R&S ESW.
Suffix: .
<up> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
User port is switched to INPut
ON | 1
User port is switched to OUTPut
Example: OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "User port configuration" on page 140
14.6.2 Output configuration
● IF / video / demodulation.......................................................................................540
● Additional output................................................................................................... 545
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 539
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
14.6.2.1 IF / video / demodulation
OUTPut<ou>:IF:AUDio................................................................................................... 540
OUTPut<ou>:IF:COUPling.............................................................................................. 540
OUTPut<ou>:IF:IFFRequency......................................................................................... 541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs:FREQuency:MANual....................................................................541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs[:STATe].......................................................................................541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:SCALe[:VALue]...................................................................................... 542
OUTPut<ou>:IF[:SOURce]..............................................................................................542
OUTPut<ou>:LINK......................................................................................................... 543
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel.....................................................................................543
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe].................................................................................. 543
SYSTem:SPEaker:MAXVolume....................................................................................... 544
SYSTem:SPEaker:MUTE................................................................................................544
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume............................................................................................ 544
OUTPut<ou>:IF:AUDio <State>
This command turns additional signal output on the headphone jack on and off.
Available for output 1 and output 2.
Suffix: .
<ou> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Example: //Turn on audio output
OUTP:IF:AUD ON
Manual operation: See "Phones" on page 185
OUTPut<ou>:IF:COUPling <Coupling>
This command selects the output coupling type.
Available for the following output types:
● Video
● FM
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<Coupling> AC
AC coupling: rejects the DC component of the signal.
DC
DC coupling: transfers the complete signal.
Example: //Select AC coupling for output 2
OUTP2:IF:COUP AC
Manual operation: See "Coupling" on page 185
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 540
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
OUTPut<ou>:IF:IFFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the IF signal that is output.
Available for output of the IF signal.
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<Frequency> Default unit: Hz
Example: //Output IF signal with a frequency of 100 MHz
OUTP:IF IF
OUTP:IF:IFFR 100MHZ
Manual operation: See "IF Output Frequency" on page 184
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs:FREQuency:MANual <Frequency>
This command defines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter available for signal
output.
Available for the following output types:
● Video
● AM
● FM
● PM
This command is available after you have turned on the low pass filter with
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs[:STATe].
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<Frequency> Default unit: Hz
Example: //Turn on low pass filter with a cutoff frequency of 100 kHz
OUTP:IF:LPAS ON
OUTP:IF:LPAS:FREQ:MAN 100KHZ
Manual operation: See "Low Pass" on page 185
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a low pass filter to control the output on and off.
Available for the following output types:
● Video
● AM
● FM
● PM
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 541
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Example: //Turn on low pass filter with a cutoff frequency of 100 kHz
OUTP:IF:LPAS ON
OUTP:IF:LPAS:FREQ:MAN 100KHZ
Manual operation: See "Low Pass" on page 185
OUTPut<ou>:IF:SCALe[:VALue] <Scale>
This command defines the scale of the transferred signal.
Available for the following output types:
● AM
● FM
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<Scale> Numeric value whose unit depends on the output type:
• % for AM output
• Hz for FM output
Example: //Select a scale of 100 kHz for FM output on output 1
OUTP:IF FM
OUTP:IF:SCAL 100KHZ
Manual operation: See "Scale" on page 186
OUTPut<ou>:IF[:SOURce] <Type>
This command selects the type of signal data that is output.
Suffix: .
<ou> Output
Parameters:
<Type> AM
Outputs the AM signal.
FM
Outputs the FM signal.
FOCus
Outputs the data of the currently selected measurement window.
Available for Analog Modulation Analysis.
IF
Outputs the IF signal.
Unavailable for audio output.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 542
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
OFF
Turns off the output.
VIDeo
Outputs the video signal.
Unavailable for audio output.
Example: //Select output of AM signal data
OUTP:IF:SOUR AM
Manual operation: See "Selecting the output type" on page 184
OUTPut<ou>:LINK <Scope>
This command selects the scope of the output settings.
Suffix: .
<ou> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Scope> ON | 1
Output settings apply to the current measurement channel.
OFF | 0
Output settings apply to all measurement channels.
Example: //Apply output configuration to all measurement channels
OUTP:LINK OFF
Manual operation: See "Output Coupling" on page 183
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel <Level>
This command defines the relative squelch level for audio output, below which the out-
put is not demodulated.
If you are using the "Marker Demodulation" marker function in the spectrum applica-
tion, the command instead selects the level below which the signal at the marker posi-
tion is not demodulated.
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
Default unit: PCT
Example: //Configure squelch for audio output
DEM:SQU ON
DEM:SQU:LEV 10
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 185
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a squelch for the audio output on and off.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 543
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
The squelch is available for the following outputs.
● AM
● FM
If you are using the "Marker Demodulation" marker function in the spectrum applica-
tion, the command instead turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and
off. For selective demodulation, the R&S ESW turns on a video trigger whose level cor-
responds to the squelch level. Therefore it turns off other triggers or gates.
In both cases, you can define the squelch level with [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:
LEVel.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Configure squelch for audio output
DEM:SQU ON
DEM:SQU:LEV 10
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 185
SYSTem:SPEaker:MAXVolume <Volume>
This command defines the maximum volume level for audio output (for example over
headphones).
Parameters:
<Volume> Numeric value between 0 and 1, with 1 being the loudest.
Example: //Define a maximum volume of 60 %
SYST:SPE:MAXV 0.6
Manual operation: See "Controlling the volume" on page 186
SYSTem:SPEaker:MUTE
This command turns off audio output.
To turn the volume back on again, use SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume.
Example: //Turn off audio output
SYST:SPE:MUTE
//Turn audio output back on
SYST:SPE:VOL 25
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Controlling the volume" on page 186
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <Volume>
This command defines the volume with which audio signals are output.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 544
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<Volume> Numeric value between 0 and 1, with 1 being the loudest.
Note that if you have defined a maximum volume level with
SYSTem:SPEaker:MAXVolume, the value range is limited by
the maximum volume.
Example: //Define a volume of 25 %.
SYST:SPE:VOL 0.25
Manual operation: See "Controlling the volume" on page 186
14.6.2.2 Additional output
OUTPut<ou>:PROBe<pb>[:POWer].................................................................................545
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection.............................................................................. 545
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel.................................................................................... 546
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe..................................................................................546
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate.................................................................. 547
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth......................................................................547
OUTPut<ou>:PROBe<pb>[:POWer] <State>
This command selects the probe connector that is supplied with power.
Suffix: .
<ou> irrelevant
<pb> Selects the probe power connector.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Example: //Supply 5-pin probe connector with power
OUTP:PROB2 ON
Manual operation: See "Probe Power Supply" on page 187
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection <Direction>
This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as
well as an output.
Suffix: .
<up> irrelevant
<tp> Selects the used trigger port.
2 = trigger port 2 (front)
3 = trigger port 3 (rear panel)
Parameters:
<Direction> INPut | OUTPut
INPut
Port works as an input.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 545
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
OUTPut
Port works as an output.
*RST: INPut
Manual operation: See "Trigger 2/3" on page 187
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel <Level>
This command defines the level of the (TTL compatible) signal generated at the trigger
output.
This command works only if you have selected a user-defined output with
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe.
Suffix: .
<up> 1..n
<tp> Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent.
2 = trigger port 2 (front)
3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
Parameters:
<Level> HIGH
5V
LOW
0V
*RST: LOW
Example: OUTP:TRIG2:LEV HIGH
Manual operation: See "Level" on page 188
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe <OutputType>
This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output.
Suffix: .
<up> 1..n
<tp> Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent.
2 = trigger port 2 (front)
3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
Parameters:
<OutputType> DEVice
Sends a trigger signal when the R&S ESW has triggered inter-
nally.
TARMed
Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for
an external trigger event.
UDEFined
Sends a user-defined trigger signal. For more information, see
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 546
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
*RST: DEVice
Manual operation: See "Output Type" on page 188
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate
This command generates a pulse at the trigger output.
Suffix: .
<up> Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent.
2 = trigger port 2 (front)
3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
<tp> 1..n
Manual operation: See "Send Trigger" on page 188
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth <Length>
This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output.
Suffix: .
<up> 1..n
<tp> Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent.
2 = trigger port 2 (front)
3 = trigger port 3 (rear)
Parameters:
<Length> Pulse length in seconds.
Default unit: S
Example: OUTP:TRIG2:PULS:LENG 0.02
Manual operation: See "Pulse Length" on page 188
14.6.3 Frequency configuration
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer................................................................ 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe].................................................... 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth.............................................. 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold...............................................549
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe.................................................... 549
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing.................................................................. 549
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer......................................................................................... 550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP................................................................................550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SCOupled..................................................................................... 550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN............................................................................................551
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL................................................................................... 551
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 547
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command matches the receiver frequency to the frequency of a marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Example: CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT
Sets the receiver frequency to the frequency of marker 2.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing the receiver frequency to the marker fre-
quency" on page 200
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] <State>
This command turns signal tracking on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: //Activate signal tracking to keep the center frequency on the signal pea
//After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 2
//around the center frequency. It must have a minimum power of -90dBm.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BAND 20MHz
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:THR -90dBm
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:TRAC 1
Manual operation: See "Signal Tracking" on page 198
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in
the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 548
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Range: 10 Hz to Max span
*RST: (= span/10 on activating the function)
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Signal Tracking" on page 198
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level>
This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST: -120 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See "Signal Tracking" on page 198
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace on which the largest signal is searched for.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> 1 to 6
Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Signal Tracking" on page 198
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing <Scale>
This command selects the scale of the x-axis.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Scale> LINear
Linear scale of the frequency axis.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 549
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic scale of the frequency axis.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example: //Select a linear scale for the x-axis
DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LIN
Manual operation: See "Frequency Axis Scale" on page 200
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the measurement frequency for measurements in the frequency
or time domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
Numeric value in Hz.
Range: Refer to the datasheet
*RST: fmax / 2
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define receiver frequency
FREQ:CENT 100MHz
Manual operation: See "Receiver Frequency" on page 199
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>
This command defines the center frequency step size.
Parameters:
<StepSize> <numeric value>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example: //Define frequency step size
FREQ:CENT:STEP 4KHZ
Manual operation: See "Frequency Stepsize" on page 200
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SCOupled <State>
This command couples or decouples the bargraph settings to the scan settings.
Parameters:
<State> LSC
Couples the bargraph settings to the settings of the last scan
that has been performed.
OFF
Decouples the bargraph settings from the scan settings.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 550
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
SCAN
Couples the bargraph settings to the current scan settings or the
settings of the current scan range.
*RST: OFF
Example: //Couple bargraph settings to settings of last scan
FREQ:SCO LSC
Manual operation: See "Couple Bargraph Settings" on page 201
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
This command defines the frequency span.
Parameters:
<Span> Available for IF analysis in the receiver application.
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "IF Analysis" on page 201
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command restores the full span.
The full span depends on the current receiver frequency.
Manual operation: See "IF Analysis" on page 201
14.6.4 Amplitude configuration
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer........................................................................................... 551
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation[:VALue].......................................................................................552
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AMODe.......................................................................................552
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO......................................................................................... 553
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe].....................................................................553
INPut<ip>:GAIN:AUTO................................................................................................... 553
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:AUTO............................................................................................ 554
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:STATe............................................................................................554
INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe...................................................................................................554
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the unit for the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 551
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Parameters:
<Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | DBPW_MHZ | DBUV | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV | DBMV_MHZ | DBUA | DBUA_MHZ | DBPT |
DBPT_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_M |
DBUA_MMHZ
*RST: dBµV
Example: //Select unit
CALC:UNIT:POW DBM
Manual operation: See "Unit" on page 194
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation[:VALue] <Attenuation>
This command defines the attenuation at the RF input.
To protect the input mixer, attenuation levels of 10 dB or less are possible only if you
have turned off the input protection with INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection[:
STATe] on page 553.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Attenuation> Range: 0 dB to 79 dB
*RST: 10 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: //Define attenuation
INP:ATT 40dB
Manual operation: See "Attenuation" on page 115
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AMODe <State>
This command selects the auto ranging mode.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> LOWNoise
Selects the low noise mode.
NORMal
Selects the normal mode.
*RST: NORMal
Example: //Select low noise auto ranging mode
INP:ATT:AMOD LOWN
Manual operation: See "Auto Range" on page 114
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 552
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command turns automatic determination of the attenuation level on and off.
When you turn it on, the R&S ESW selects an attenuation that results in a good signal-
to-noise ratio without overloading the RF input.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Turns on the auto ranging feature.
OFF
Turns off the auto ranging feature.
*RST: ON
Example: //Turn on auto ranging
INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See "Auto Range" on page 114
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the availability of attenuation levels of 10 dB or less on and off.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 1
Example: //Turn on input protection
INP:ATT:PROT ON
Manual operation: See "10 dB Minimum Attenuation" on page 193
INPut<ip>:GAIN:AUTO <State>
This command includes and excludes the preamplifier from the auto ranging feature.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Consider preamplifier for auto ranging
INP:GAIN:AUTO ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 553
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:AUTO <State>
This command includes and excludes the optional low noise amplifier from the auto
ranging feature.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Allow to turn the amplifier on and off manually
INP:GAIN:LNA:STAT ON
INP:GAIN:LNA:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:STATe <State>
This command turns the optional low noise amplifier on and off.
Note that it is not possible to use the low noise amplifier and the preamplifier at the
same time.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on low noise preamplifier
INP:GAIN:LNA:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the preamplifier on and off.
Suffix: .
<ip> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on preamplifier
INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Preamplifier" on page 115
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 554
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
14.6.5 Diagram scale
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]........................................ 555
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom......................................................555
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <Range>
This command defines the display range of the y-axis (for all traces).
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Range> Range: 1 dB to 200 dB
*RST: 100 dB
Default unit: HZ
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
Manual operation: See "Grid Range / Minimum Level" on page 195
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <Level>
This command defines the minimum level displayed on the vertical diagram axis.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> Minimum displayed level. The unit and value range depend on
the unit you have selected.
*RST: 0 dBµV
Example: //Define a minimum grid level
DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT -20
Manual operation: See "Grid Range / Minimum Level" on page 195
14.6.6 Bandwidth and filter configuration
[SENSe:]BWIDth:IF........................................................................................................ 556
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF...................................................................................................556
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution].........................................................................................556
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue]....................................................................... 556
[SENSe:]BWIDth:SCPL.................................................................................................. 556
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:SCPL............................................................................................. 556
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO............................................................................... 557
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 555
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO..........................................................................557
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE................................................................................557
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE.......................................................................... 557
[SENSe:]BWIDth:IF <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth for IF analysis.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> <numeric value>
The available bandwidths depend on the span.
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Define resolution bandwidth for IF analysis
BAND:IF 10KHZ
Manual operation: See "IF Analysis" on page 201
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the measurement (or resolution) bandwidth.
The available bandwidths depend on the selected filter type.
A change of the resolution bandwidth automatically turns the coupling to the frequency
off.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> <numeric value>
Refer to the datasheet for available bandwidths.
Default unit: Hz
Example: //Select measurement bandwidth
BAND 3MHZ
Manual operation: See "Measurement Bandwidth" on page 94
[SENSe:]BWIDth:SCPL <State>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:SCPL <State>
This command couples or decouples the IF span to the measurement bandwidth used
for the bargraph.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Decouple span from the measurement bandwidth.
BAND:SCPL OFF
Manual operation: See "IF Analysis" on page 201
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 556
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
This command couples or decouples the resolution bandwidth to the selected fre-
quency.
The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the frequency only if you have selected the
Quasipeak, CISPR Average or CISPR RMS detector.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Decouple measurement bandwidth from frequency range
BAND:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "CISPR RBW Uncoupled" on page 203
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType>
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the resolution filter type.
When you change the filter type, the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if
the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter.
Parameters:
<FilterType> CFILter
Channel filters
Available in the spectrum application.
NORMal
Gaussian filters
P5
5-pole filters
Available for FFT sweeps in the spectrum application.
RRC
RRC filters
CISPr | PULSe
CISPR (6 dB)
Return value for query is always PULS.
MIL
MIL Std (6 dB)
*RST: NORMal
Example: BAND:TYPE NORM
Manual operation: See "Filter Type" on page 94
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 557
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
14.6.7 Trigger configuration
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff....................................................................................558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth.....................................................................................558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity....................................................................................558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce................................................................................... 559
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe................................................................................................. 559
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE........................................................................................560
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]....................................................................... 560
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]......................................................................560
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe....................................................................................561
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce................................................................................. 561
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe]..................................................................562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth................................................................562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt................................................................. 562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <DelayTime>
This command defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of
the measurement.
Parameters:
<DelayTime> Range: 0 s to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Default unit: S
Example: SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us
Manual operation: See "Gate Delay" on page 210
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>
This command defines the gate length.
Parameters:
<GateLength> Range: 125 ns to 30 s
*RST: 400μs
Default unit: S
Example: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms
Manual operation: See "Gate Length" on page 210
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity <Polarity>
This command selects the polarity of an external gate signal.
The setting applies both to the edge of an edge-triggered signal and the level of a
level-triggered signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 558
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Example: SWE:EGAT:POL POS
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce <TriggerSource>
This command selects a trigger source for gated measurements.
If an IF power signal is used, the gate is opened as soon as a signal at > -20 dBm is
detected within the IF path bandwidth (10 MHz).
Parameters:
<TriggerSource> EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3
Selects one of the external trigger connectors.
IMMediate
Free Run mode (= no trigger)
*RST: IMMediate
Example: //Turn on a gated measurement using the first trigger input
SWE:EGAT ON
SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT
Manual operation: See "Trigger Source" on page 208
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State>
This command turns gated measurements on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: SWE:EGAT ON
Switches on the gate mode.
SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Switches on the edge-triggered mode.
SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100US
Sets the gate delay to 100 µs.
SWE:EGAT:LEN 500US
Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Gated Trigger" on page 209
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 559
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the way gated measurements are triggered.
Parameters:
<Type> LEVel
The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open
until the signal disappears.
EDGE
The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the sig-
nal edge.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open
until the gate length is over.
*RST: EDGE
Example: SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Manual operation: See "Gate Mode" on page 209
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <Offset>
Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement
(data capturing).
A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements.
For the trigger sources "External" or "IF Power", a common input signal is used for both
trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay affect the trigger offset as well.
Suffix: .
<tp> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Offset> Range for measurements in the frequency domain:
0 s to 30 s
Range for measurements in the time domain:
negative sweep time to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Default unit: s
Example: //Define a trigger offset
TRIG:HOLD 500us
Manual operation: See "Trigger Offset" on page 209
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] <Level>
This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger
event.
Note that the variable [Input/Output] connectors must be set for use as input using the
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection command.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 560
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Suffix: .
<tp> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> Default unit: V
Example: //Define a trigger level of 2 V for an external trigger source
TRIG:SOUR EXT
TRIG:LEV 2V
Manual operation: See "Trigger Level" on page 209
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type>
This command selects the trigger slope.
Suffix: .
<tp> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> POSitive
Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level (rising edge).
NEGative
Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level (falling edge).
*RST: POSitive
Example: //Select trigger slope
TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation: See "Trigger Slope" on page 209
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the trigger source.
Note on external triggers:
If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control
program, remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can
continue. Make sure that this situation is avoided in your remote control programs.
For troubleshooting tips, see "Incompleted sequential commands - blocked remote
channels" on page 792.
Suffix: .
<tp> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Source> See table below.
*RST: IMMediate
Example: //Select external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
TRIG:SOUR EXT
Manual operation: See "Trigger Source" on page 208
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 561
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Configuration
Table 14-5: Available trigger sources
SCPI parameter Trigger source
EXTernal Trigger signal from the [Trigger Input] connector.
EXT2 | EXT3 Trigger signal from the [Trigger Input/Output] connector.
Note: Connector must be configured for "Input".
IMMediate Free Run trigger.
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates continuous gating.
This setting is only available if [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe is "On".
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: SWE:EGAT ON
Activate gating
SWE:EGAT:CONT:STAT ON
Activate continuous gating
Manual operation: See "Continuous Gate" on page 210
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth <Time>
Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length
is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the
next one.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 125 ns to 30 s
*RST: 5 ms
Default unit: S
Example: SWE:EGAT:CONT:PLEN 10
Manual operation: See "Gate Period Length" on page 210
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt <Amount>
Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 562
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<Amount> integer
Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
*RST: 100
Example: SWE:EGAT:CONT:PCO 50
Manual operation: See "Gate Period Count" on page 210
14.7 Analysis
● Result display configuration.................................................................................. 563
● Zoomed displays...................................................................................................573
● Trace configuration............................................................................................... 576
● Markers................................................................................................................. 587
● Display and limit line configuration........................................................................ 611
14.7.1 Result display configuration
● General window commands..................................................................................563
● Screen layout........................................................................................................ 564
● Examples: configuring the result display...............................................................571
14.7.1.1 General window commands
Note that the suffix <n> always refers to the window in the currently selected measure-
ment channel.
DISPlay:FORMat........................................................................................................... 563
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE........................................................................................... 564
DISPlay:FORMat <Format>
This command determines which tab is displayed.
Parameters:
<Format> SPLit
Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan-
nels
SINGle
Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused.
*RST: SING
Example: DISP:FORM SPL
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 563
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE <Size>
This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily.
To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently, use the LAY:SPL
command (see LAYout:SPLitter on page 567).
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<Size> LARGe
Maximizes the selected window to full screen.
Other windows are still active in the background.
SMALl
Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size.
If more than one measurement window was displayed originally,
these are visible again.
*RST: SMALl
Example: DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
14.7.1.2 Screen layout
The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the
screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual
operation. Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application,
some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure-
ment channel.
Note that the suffix <n> always refers to the window in the currently selected measure-
ment channel.
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?................................................................................................. 564
LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?............................................................................................ 565
LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]?............................................................................................ 566
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow]................................................................................................ 566
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow]............................................................................................. 567
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow]............................................................................................ 567
LAYout:SPLitter..............................................................................................................567
LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD?............................................................................................. 569
LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?........................................................................................ 569
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove..........................................................................................570
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace........................................................................................ 570
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? <WindowName>, <Direction>, <WindowType>
This command adds a window to the display in the active channel.
This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of
the new window as a result.
To replace an existing window, use the LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] command.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 564
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Query parameters:
<WindowName> String containing the name of the existing window the new win-
dow is inserted next to.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows, use the
LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<Direction> LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow
Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win-
dow.
<WindowType> text value
Type of result display (evaluation method) you want to add.
See the table below for available parameter values.
Return values:
<NewWindowName> When adding a new window, the command returns its name (by
default the same as its number) as a result.
Usage: Query only
Table 14-6: <WindowType> parameter values for the receiver application
Parameter value Window type
BGRaph Bargraph
DIAGram Scan diagram
FACCess Fast access panel
FMEas Final measurement
IFANalysis IF analysis diagram
IFSGram IF analysis spectrogram
MTABle Marker table
NOTes Notes display
PLISt Marker peak list
PRESelection "Preselector" configuration
SCAN Scan diagram
SCSGram Scan spectrogram
LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?
This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active channel
from top left to bottom right. The result is a comma-separated list of values for each
window, with the syntax:
<WindowName_1>,<WindowIndex_1>..<WindowName_n>,<WindowIndex_n>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 565
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Return values:
<WindowName> string
Name of the window.
In the default state, the name of the window is its index.
<WindowIndex> numeric value
Index of the window.
Example: LAY:CAT?
Result:
'2',2,'1',1
Two windows are displayed, named '2' (at the top or left), and '1'
(at the bottom or right).
Usage: Query only
LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]? <WindowName>
This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active channel.
Note: to query the name of a particular window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>:
IDENtify? query.
Query parameters:
<WindowName> String containing the name of a window.
Return values:
<WindowIndex> Index number of the window.
Example: LAY:IDEN:WIND? '2'
Queries the index of the result display named '2'.
Response:
2
Usage: Query only
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] <WindowName>, <WindowName>, <Direction>
Setting parameters:
<WindowName> String containing the name of an existing window that is to be
moved.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows in the active
channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<WindowName> String containing the name of an existing window the selected
window is placed next to or replaces.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows in the active
channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 566
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
<Direction> LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow | REPLace
Destination the selected window is moved to, relative to the ref-
erence window.
Example: LAY:MOVE '4','1',LEFT
Moves the window named '4' to the left of window 1.
Example: LAY:MOVE '1','3',REPL
Replaces the window named '3' by window 1. Window 3 is
deleted.
Usage: Setting only
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] <WindowName>
This command removes a window from the display in the active channel.
Setting parameters:
<WindowName> String containing the name of the window. In the default state,
the name of the window is its index.
Example: LAY:REM '2'
Removes the result display in the window named '2'.
Usage: Setting only
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] <WindowName>,<WindowType>
This command replaces the window type (for example from "Diagram" to "Result Sum-
mary") of an already existing window in the active channel while keeping its position,
index and window name.
To add a new window, use the LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? command.
Setting parameters:
<WindowName> String containing the name of the existing window.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index. To
determine the name and index of all active windows in the active
channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<WindowType> Type of result display you want to use in the existing window.
See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564 for a list of availa-
ble window types.
Example: LAY:REPL:WIND '1',MTAB
Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table.
Usage: Setting only
LAYout:SPLitter <Index1>, <Index2>, <Position>
This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win-
dows on each side of the splitter.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 567
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Note that windows must have a certain minimum size. If the position you define con-
flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows, the command does not
work, but does not return an error.
Figure 14-1: SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters
Setting parameters:
<Index1> The index of one window the splitter controls.
<Index2> The index of a window on the other side of the splitter.
<Position> New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of
the screen area (without channel and status bar and softkey
menu).
The point of origin (x = 0, y = 0) is in the lower left corner of the
screen. The end point (x = 100, y = 100) is in the upper right cor-
ner of the screen. (See Figure 14-1.)
The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the
screen layout. If the windows are positioned horizontally, the
splitter also moves horizontally. If the windows are positioned
vertically, the splitter also moves vertically.
Range: 0 to 100
Example: LAY:SPL 1,3,50
Moves the splitter between window 1 ('Frequency Sweep') and 3
('"Marker Table"') to the center (50%) of the screen, i.e. in the
figure above, to the left.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 568
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Example: LAY:SPL 1,4,70
Moves the splitter between window 1 ('Frequency Sweep') and 3
('"Marker Peak List"') towards the top (70%) of the screen.
The following commands have the exact same effect, as any
combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the
splitter vertically.
LAY:SPL 3,2,70
LAY:SPL 4,1,70
LAY:SPL 2,1,70
Usage: Setting only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? <Direction>,<WindowType>
This command adds a measurement window to the display. Note that with this com-
mand, the suffix <n> determines the existing window next to which the new window is
added. Unlike LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?, for which the existing window is defined by
a parameter.
To replace an existing window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace command.
This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of
the new window as a result.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Query parameters:
<Direction> LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow
<WindowType> Type of measurement window you want to add.
See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564 for a list of availa-
ble window types.
Return values:
<NewWindowName> When adding a new window, the command returns its name (by
default the same as its number) as a result.
Example: LAY:WIND1:ADD? LEFT,MTAB
Result:
'2'
Adds a new window named '2' with a marker table to the left of
window 1.
Usage: Query only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?
This command queries the name of a particular display window (indicated by the <n>
suffix) in the active channel.
Note: to query the index of a particular window, use the LAYout:IDENtify[:
WINDow]? command.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 569
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Return values:
<WindowName> String containing the name of a window.
In the default state, the name of the window is its index.
Example: LAY:WIND2:IDEN?
Queries the name of the result display in window 2.
Response:
'2'
Usage: Query only
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
This command removes the window specified by the suffix <n> from the display in the
active channel.
The result of this command is identical to the LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] command.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Example: LAY:WIND2:REM
Removes the result display in window 2.
Usage: Event
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace <WindowType>
This command changes the window type of an existing window (specified by the suffix
<n>) in the active channel.
The effect of this command is identical to the LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] com-
mand.
To add a new window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? command.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Setting parameters:
<WindowType> Type of measurement window you want to replace another one
with.
See LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 564 for a list of availa-
ble window types.
Example: LAY:WIND2:REPL MTAB
Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table.
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 570
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
14.7.1.3 Examples: configuring the result display
The following example demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote envi-
ronment.
Example 1: adding and arranging windows
Starting from the default initial display in the Spectrum application (Frequency Sweep),
we will configure the following result displays:
1 Frequency Sweep 3 "Marker Table"
2 Spectrogram 4 "Marker Peak List"
//--------------Resetting the instrument -----------
*RST
//--------------- Adding new windows --------------------
//Add a Spectrogram window beneath the Frequency Sweep window
LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR
//Result: window number: '2'
//Add a Marker Table window to the right of the Frequency Sweep window
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB
//Result: window number: '3'
//Add a Marker Peak List window to the right of the Spectrogram window
LAY:WIND2:ADD? RIGH,PEAK
//Result: window number: '4'
//--------------- Changing the size of individual windows -------------
//Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table
//window to enlarge the spectrum display to 60% of the entire width.
LAY:SPL 1,3,60
//Move the splitter between the Spectrogram window and the Marker Peak List
//window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60% of the entire width.
LAY:SPL 2,4,60
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 571
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
//--------------- Querying all displayed windows ------------------
//Query the name and number of all displayed windows
//(from top left to bottom right)
LAY:CAT?
//Result : '1',1,'2',2,'3',3,'4',4
//------------- Maximizing a Window ------------------
//Maximize the window "2 Spectrogram"
DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
//-------------Restore multiple window display -----------
DISP:WIND2:SIZE SMAL
Example 2: replacing and removing windows
Starting from the display configured in Example 1: adding and arranging windows, we
will remove and replace result displays to obtain the following configuration:
1 Frequency Sweep
4 "Marker Table"
//-------------- Preparing the configuration from example 1 -----------
*RST
LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB
LAY:WIND2:ADD? RIGH,PEAK
LAY:CAT?
//Result : '1',1,'2',2,'3',3,'4',4
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 572
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
//Remove Spectrogram
LAY:WIND2:REM //Remove Marker Table window
LAY:REM '3'
//Replace Marker Peak List window by Marker Table
LAY:REPL '4',MTAB
//--------------- Querying all displayed windows ------------------
//Query the name and number of all displayed windows (from top left to bottom right)
LAY:CAT?
//Result : '1',1,'4',4
//--------------- Changing the size of individual windows -------------
//Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window
//to enlarge the spectrum display to 80% of the entire height.
LAY:SPL 1,4,80
14.7.2 Zoomed displays
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA.................................................... 573
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe].................................................. 574
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]............................ 575
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA...............................575
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA <x1>,<y1>,<x2>,<y2>
This command defines the zoom area.
To define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
1 = origin of coordinate system (x1 = 0, y1 = 0)
2 = end point of system (x2 = 100, y2= 100)
3 = zoom area (e.g. x1 = 60, y1 = 30, x2 = 80, y2 = 75)
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 573
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<x1> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<y1> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<x2> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<y2> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
Manual operation: See "Single Zoom" on page 218
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the zoom on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: DISP:ZOOM ON
Activates the zoom mode.
Manual operation: See "Single Zoom" on page 218
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 574
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the multiple zoom on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<zn> Selects the zoom window.
If you turn off one of the zoom windows, all subsequent zoom
windows move up one position.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Manual operation: See "Multi-Zoom" on page 218
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA
<x1>,<y1>,<x2>,<y2>
This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom.
To define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
1 = origin of coordinate system (x1 = 0, y1 = 0)
2 = end point of system (x2 = 100, y2= 100)
3 = zoom area (e.g. x1 = 60, y1 = 30, x2 = 80, y2 = 75)
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Not supported by all applications
<zn> Selects the zoom window.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 575
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<x1> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<y1> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<x2> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
<y2> Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
Manual operation: See "Multi-Zoom" on page 218
14.7.3 Trace configuration
14.7.3.1 Trace control
For a full list of commands to control traces, see Chapter 14.5.9, "Final measurement
(and trace) configuration", on page 499.
14.7.3.2 Trace export
Commands to export traces described elsewhere.
● FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 632
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator........................................................................................ 577
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer..............................................................................................577
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes............................................................................................. 577
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat............................................................................................. 578
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 576
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator <Separator>
This command selects the column separator for exported trace data.
The selected value is not affected by a preset. The command therefore has no reset
value.
Parameters:
<Separator> COMMa
Selects a comma as a separator.
SEMicolon
Selects a semicolon as a separator.
TAB
Selects a tabulator as a separator.
*RST: n/a
Example: //Select column separator
FORM:DEXP:CSEP TAB
Manual operation: See "Column Separator" on page 237
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer <State>
If enabled, additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header
of the export file for result data. If disabled, only the pure result data from the selected
traces and tables is exported.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" on page 235
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes <Selection>
This command selects the data to be included in a data export file (see MMEMory:
STORe<n>:TRACe on page 669).
For details on exporting data, see Chapter 10.3.3, "Trace export", on page 234.
Parameters:
<Selection> SINGle | ALL
SINGle
Only a single trace is selected for export, namely the one speci-
fied by the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe command.
ALL
Selects all active traces and result tables (e.g. "Result Sum-
mary", marker peak list etc.) in the current application for export
to an ASCII file.
The <trace> parameter for the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe
command is ignored.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 577
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
*RST: SINGle
Manual operation: See "Export all Traces and all Table Results" on page 235
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat <FileFormat>
Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the
external program that creates the data file or evaluates it, a comma-separated list
(CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required.
Parameters:
<FileFormat> CSV | DAT
*RST: DAT
Example: FORM:DEXP:FORM CSV
Manual operation: See "File Type" on page 236
14.7.3.3 Traces copy
TRACe<n>:COPY.......................................................................................................... 578
TRACe<n>:COPY <TraceNumber>, <TraceNumber>
This command copies data from one trace to another.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
The first parameter is the destination trace, the second parame-
ter is the source.
(Note the 'e' in the parameter is required!)
Example: TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2
Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1.
Manual operation: See "Copy Trace" on page 238
14.7.3.4 Trace mathematics
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:EXPRession[:DEFine]................................................................578
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE......................................................................................579
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition...................................................................................579
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe...................................................................................... 580
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:EXPRession[:DEFine] <Expression>
This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 578
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Prerequisites for this command
● Turn on trace mathematics (CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe).
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<t> Trace that the result of the trace mathematics is written to.
Parameters:
<Expression> (TRACE<x> - TRACE<y>)
The expression selects the two traces that are subtracted from
each other. You can select any trace you like as the two oper-
ands.
The result is shown in the trace defined by the suffix <t> at the
MATH syntax element of the command.
Example: //Subtract trace 2 from trace 3 and write the result to trace 4
CALC:MATH:STAT ON
CALC:MATH4:EXPR (TRACE3-TRACE2)
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Function" on page 238
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S ESW calculates trace mathematics.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> For more information on the way each mode works see Trace
Math Mode.
LINear
Linear calculation.
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic calculation.
POWer
Linear power calculation.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example: CALC:MATH:MODE LIN
Selects linear calculation.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Mode" on page 238
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical opera-
tion.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 579
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Position> Vertical position of the trace in % of the height of the diagram
area.
100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border.
Range: -100 to 200
*RST: 50
Default unit: PCT
Example: CALC:MATH:POS 100
Moves the trace to the top of the diagram area.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Position" on page 238
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe <State>
This command turns the trace mathematics on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Turn on trace mathematics
CALC:MATH:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Function" on page 238
14.7.3.5 Spectrogram configuration
Commands to configure spectrograms described elsewhere.
● Chapter 14.7.4.6, "Spectrogram markers", on page 602
● Spectrogram settings............................................................................................ 580
● Color map configuration........................................................................................ 585
Spectrogram settings
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate].......................................................................581
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate].............................................................. 581
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect........................................................................... 581
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect...................................................................581
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth...................................................................................... 582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth..............................................................................582
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe....................................................................................... 582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe...............................................................................582
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 580
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?...........................................................................582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA?.................................................................. 582
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe]..........................................................................583
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe]................................................................. 583
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe].......................................................................................584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe].............................................................................. 584
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:RINTerval........................................................................584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:RINTerval............................................................... 584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe]..............................................................584
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Example: //Reset the result display and clear the memory
CALC:SGR:CLE
Manual operation: See "Clear Spectrogram" on page 242
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect <Frame> | <Time>
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect <Frame> | <Time>
This command selects a specific frame for further analysis.
The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has
ended.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<Frame> Selects a frame directly by the frame number. Valid if the time
stamp is off.
The range depends on the history depth.
Default unit: S
<Time> Selects a frame via its time stamp. Valid if the time stamp is on.
The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds. The range
depends on the history depth.
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Stop the continuous sweep.
CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL -25
Selects frame number -25.
Manual operation: See "Select Frame" on page 241
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 581
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth <History>
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth <History>
This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R&S ESW memory.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<History> The maximum number of frames depends on the number of
sweep points.
Range: 781 to 20000
Increment: 1
*RST: 3000
Example: //Set the history depth to 1500
CALC:SGR:SPEC 1500
Manual operation: See "History Depth" on page 241
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace the spectrogram is based on.
Suffix: .
<n> Receiver application: Window
I/Q Analyzer: Window
Spectrum application: irrelevant
Real-Time application: irrelevant
Parameters:
<Trace> Number of the trace. The range depends on the result display:
Scans support six traces, IF Analysis supports three traces.
Example: //Assign trace two to the spectrogram result display
CALC:SPEC:TRAC 2
Manual operation: See "Trace" on page 241
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA? <Frames>
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA? <Frames>
This command queries the starting time of the frames.
The return values consist of four values for each frame. If the "Spectrogram" is empty,
the command returns '0,0,0,0'. The times are given as delta values, which simplifies
evaluating relative results; however, you can also calculate the absolute date and time
as displayed on the screen.
The frame results themselves are returned with TRAC:DATA? SGR
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 582
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Query parameters:
<Frames> CURRent
Returns the starting time of the current frame.
ALL
Returns the starting time for all frames. The results are sorted in
descending order, beginning with the current frame.
Return values:
<Seconds> Number of seconds that have passed since 01.01.1970 until the
frame start
<Nanoseconds> Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the
<Seconds> since 01.01.1970 until the frame start.
<Reserved> The third value is reserved for future uses.
<Reserved> The fourth value is reserved for future uses.
Example: CALC:SGR:TST:DATA? ALL
Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending
order.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Time Stamp" on page 241
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] <State>
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] <State>
This command activates and deactivates the time stamp.
If the time stamp is active, some commands do not address frames as numbers, but as
(relative) time values:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 607
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 603
● CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 581
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
Window
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: //Activates the time stamp
CALC:SGR:TST ON
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 583
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Manual operation: See "Time Stamp" on page 241
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] <State>
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the spectrogram on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:SGR ON
Activates the Spectrogram result display.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 240
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:RINTerval
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:RINTerval <Interval>
Defines a recording interval for the IF spectrogram result display. For example if the
recording interval is set to 5, only every fifth scan is taken from the IF analysis diagram
and displayed in the IF spectrogram. This prevents the IF spectrogram from getting fil-
led up too fast.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Interval> Recording interval
Example: CALC:SGR:FRAM:RINT 5
Manual operation: See "Recording Interval" on page 242
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram for the selected result display.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:SPEC:THR:STAT ON
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 584
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Manual operation: See "3D Spectrogram State" on page 241
Color map configuration
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault................................................................ 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault........................................................585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer..................................................................585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer......................................................... 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe................................................................. 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe.........................................................585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer.................................................................. 586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer..........................................................586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]................................................................ 586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe]........................................................586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault
This command restores the original color map.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 243
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer <Percentage>
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer <Percentage>
This command defines the starting point of the color map.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 10
Sets the start of the color map to 10%.
Manual operation: See "Start / Stop" on page 243
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe <Shape>
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe <Shape>
This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram
result display.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 585
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<Shape> Shape of the color curve.
Range: -1 to 1
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Shape" on page 243
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer <Percentage>
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer <Percentage>
This command defines the end point of the color map.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:UPP 95
Sets the start of the color map to 95%.
Manual operation: See "Start / Stop" on page 243
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme>
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme>
This command selects the color scheme.
Parameters:
<ColorScheme> HOT
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low lev-
els, red colors indicate high ones.
COLD
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low lev-
els, blue colors indicate high ones.
RADar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with
shades of green in between.
GRAYscale
Shows the results in shades of gray.
*RST: HOT
Example: DISP:WIND:SPEC:COL GRAY
Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and
white.
Manual operation: See "Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale" on page 243
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 586
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
14.7.3.6 Formats for returned values: ASCII format and binary format
When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC:DATA or TRAC:IQ:DATA command, the
data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat[:DATA] on page 631. The
possible formats are described here.
● ASCII Format (FORMat ASCII):
The data is stored as a list of comma-separated values (CSV) of the measured val-
ues in floating point format.
● Binary Format (FORMat REAL,16/32/64):
The data is stored as binary data (definite length block data according to IEEE
488.2), each measurement value being formatted in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit IEEE 754
floating-point-format.
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#<Length of length><Length of data><value1><value2>…<value n>
with:
<Length of length> Number of digits of the following number of data bytes
<Length of data> Number of following data bytes
<Value> 2-byte/4-byte/8-byte floating point value
Example: #41024<Data>... contains 1024 data bytes
Data blocks larger than 999,999,999 bytes
According to SCPI, the header of the block data format allows for a maximum of 9
characters to describe the data length. Thus, the maximum REAL 32 data that can be
represented is 999,999,999 bytes. However, the R&S ESW is able to send larger data
blocks. In this case, the length of the data block is placed in brackets, e.g.
#(1234567890)<value1><value2>…
Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format. Thus, binary format
is recommended for large amounts of data.
14.7.4 Markers
● Individual marker configuration............................................................................. 588
● General marker configuration................................................................................591
● Marker search....................................................................................................... 593
● Marker positioning.................................................................................................596
● Marker results....................................................................................................... 601
● Spectrogram markers............................................................................................602
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 587
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
14.7.4.1 Individual marker configuration
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF...........................................................................588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE......................................................................... 588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence................................................................ 588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]........................................................................ 589
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe.........................................................................589
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X................................................................................. 590
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF..................................................................................590
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]............................................................................... 590
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe................................................................................591
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X........................................................................................ 591
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF
This command turns off all delta markers.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:DELT:AOFF
Turns off all delta markers.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE <Mode>
This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso-
lute value or relative to a reference marker. Note that this setting applies to all win-
dows.
Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried, the result is always an abso-
lute value (see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 590)!
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Delta marker position in absolute terms.
RELative
Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker.
*RST: RELative
Example: CALC:DELT:MODE ABS
Absolute delta marker position.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence <Reference>
This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 588
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Reference>
Example: CALC:DELT3:MREF 2
Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker
2.
Manual operation: See "Reference Marker" on page 257
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers on and off.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker first.
No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:DELT2 ON
Turns on delta marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker State" on page 256
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on.
Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the command activates the marker first.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Trace> Trace number the marker is assigned to.
Example: CALC:DELT2:TRAC 2
Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 589
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position>
This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference
marker to the peak power.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Example: CALC:DELT:X?
Outputs the absolute x-value of delta marker 1.
Manual operation: See "Marker Position X-value" on page 256
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
This command turns off all markers.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Example: CALC:MARK:AOFF
Switches off all markers.
Manual operation: See "All Markers Off" on page 257
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers on and off. If the corresponding marker number is cur-
rently active as a delta marker, it is turned into a normal marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:MARK3 ON
Switches on marker 3.
Manual operation: See "Marker State" on page 256
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 590
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on.
Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the command activates the marker first.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Trace>
Example: //Assign marker to trace 1
CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2
Manual operation: See "Assigning the Marker to a Trace" on page 257
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Position>
This command moves a marker to a specific coordinate on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the marker.
If the marker has been used as a delta marker, the command turns it into a normal
marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Position> Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis.
The unit depends on the result display.
Range: The range depends on the current x-axis range.
Default unit: Hz
Example: CALC:MARK2:X 1.7MHz
Positions marker 2 to frequency 1.7 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Marker Position X-value" on page 256
14.7.4.2 General marker configuration
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled:LSCan.................................................................592
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe]................................................................592
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe]............................................................................. 592
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle....................................................................................... 593
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 591
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled:LSCan <State>
This command selects the measurement configuration to be applied when you couple
receiver settings to scan range settings.
Prerequisites for this command
● Couple receiver settings to scan range settings (CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
COUPled[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | 1
Applies the configuration used during the last scan.
OFF | 0
Applies the current configuration.
This has an effect only if you have changed anything since the
last scan.
*RST: OFF
Example: //Couple receiver settings to the scan range settings
CALC:MARK:COUP ON
CALC:MARK:SCO:LSC ON
Manual operation: See "Settings Coupled" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the marker frequency to the scan range settings.
Suffix: .
<n> Marker
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Couple scan range settings to the marker frequency
CALC:MARK:SCO ON
Manual operation: See "Settings Coupled" on page 259
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the marker information in all diagrams on and off.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 592
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | 1
Displays the marker information in the diagrams.
OFF | 0
Hides the marker information in the diagrams.
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:MINF OFF
Hides the marker information.
Manual operation: See "Marker Info" on page 258
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle <DisplayMode>
This command turns the marker table on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<DisplayMode> ON | 1
Turns on the marker table.
OFF | 0
Turns off the marker table.
*RST: AUTO
Example: DISP:MTAB ON
Activates the marker table.
Manual operation: See "Marker Table Display" on page 258
14.7.4.3 Marker search
Commands to configure a marker search described elsewhere.
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 490
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe].................................................................593
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe].................................................................594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT....................................................................594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt...................................................................595
CALCulate<n>:THReshold..............................................................................................595
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe....................................................................................595
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the receiver frequency to the current marker fre-
quency.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 593
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Marker
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: OFF
Example: //Couples receiver frequency to marker frequency
CALC:MARK:COUP ON
Manual operation: See "Synchronizing the receiver frequency to the marker fre-
quency" on page 200
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>
This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches on search limitation.
Manual operation: See "Search Limits (Left / Right)" on page 260
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit>
This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all
windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<SearchLimit> The value range depends on the frequency range or measure-
ment time.
The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
time domain measurements.
*RST: left diagram border
Default unit: HZ
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 594
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz
Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Search Limits (Left / Right)" on page 260
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <SearchLimit>
This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for all markers in all
windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Search Limits (Left / Right)" on page 260
CALCulate<n>:THReshold <Level>
This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search (for all markers in
all windows).
Note that you must enable the use of the threshold using CALCulate<n>:
THReshold:STATe on page 595.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> Numeric value. The value range and unit are variable.
*RST: -120 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Example: CALC:THR:STAT ON
Example: CALC:THR -82DBM
Enables the search threshold and sets the threshold value to -82
dBm.
Manual operation: See "Search Threshold" on page 260
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe <State>
This command turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off (for all markers
in all windows).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 595
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:THR:STAT ON
Switches on the threshold line.
Manual operation: See "Search Threshold" on page 260
14.7.4.4 Marker positioning
● Markers................................................................................................................. 596
● Delta markers........................................................................................................598
Markers
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...................................................................596
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................................. 596
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt..................................................................597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT....................................................................597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT................................................................... 598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...................................................................598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command moves a marker to the next positive peak.
The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next positive peak.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 596
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the highest level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Peak Search" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command moves a marker to the next positive peak.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 597
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the minimum level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
Delta markers
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT........................................................... 599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT...........................................................599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK].........................................................599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt.......................................................... 600
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 598
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................ 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT............................................................600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK].......................................................... 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt........................................................... 601
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command moves a delta marker to the next positive peak value.
The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next positive peak value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
Window
<m> 1..n
Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the highest level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Peak Search" on page 263
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 599
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command moves a delta marker to the next positive peak value on the trace.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Peak" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command moves a delta marker to the next minimum peak value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
If the marker is not yet active, the command first activates the marker.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 600
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Minimum" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command moves a delta marker to the next minimum peak value.
The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi-
tion.
In the spectrogram, the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in
the currently selected frame. The vertical marker position remains the same.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Manual operation: See "Search Next Minimum" on page 263
14.7.4.5 Marker results
Commands to retrieve the marker position described elsewhere.
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 590
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 591
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?................................................................. 601
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?............................................................................... 602
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.......................................................................................602
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?
This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x-axis.
If necessary, the command activates the delta marker first.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Return values:
<Position> Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:X:REL?
Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or
relative to the reference position.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 601
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?
Queries the result at the position of the specified delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
<m> 1..n
Return values:
<Result> Result at the position of the delta marker.
The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently
set.
Default unit: DBM
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?
Queries the result at the position of the specified marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..n
<m> 1..n
Return values:
<Result> Default unit: DBM
Usage: Query only
14.7.4.6 Spectrogram markers
Marker configuration
Commands to configure markers in spectrograms described elsewhere.
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 596
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 596
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 597
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 597
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 597
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 598
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 598
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe................................................................... 603
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe...........................................................603
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea....................................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea........................................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...............................................604
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 602
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]....................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe........................................ 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................................. 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow.........................................605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...................................................605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT.......................................... 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................. 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................ 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe..................................................605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe......................................... 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow.................................................. 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow..........................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT....................................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT........................................... 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK].................................................. 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..........................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>
This command positions a marker on a particular frame.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Parameters:
<Frame> Selects a frame directly by the frame number. Valid if the time
stamp is off.
The range depends on the history depth.
Default unit: S
<Time> Selects a frame via its time stamp. Valid if the time stamp is on.
The number is the (negative) distance to frame 0 in seconds.
The range depends on the history depth.
Example: CALC:MARK:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:FRAM -2s
Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago.
Manual operation: See "Frame (Spectrogram only)" on page 256
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 603
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the
channel.
Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search within the visible frames.
Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not
visible for any reason (e.g. if the display update is off).
MEMory
Performs a search within all frames in the memory.
*RST: VISible
Manual operation: See "Marker Search Area" on page 262
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current
frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 604
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current
frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current
frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command looks for the peak level in the whole
spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 605
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre-
quency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command first looks for the peak level for all
frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
Delta marker configuration
Commands to configure delta markers in spectrograms described elsewhere.
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 599
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 599
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 599
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 606
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 600
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 600
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 600
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 600
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 601
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe............................................................607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe................................................... 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................ 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea.................................................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]....................................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................ 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................ 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe......................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow..........................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT........................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]..........................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe.......................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe.................................. 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow...........................................610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow.................................. 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................ 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT.................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................... 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK].................................. 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe <Frame>
This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame. The frame is relative to
the position of marker 1.
The command is available for the spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 607
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<Frame> Selects a frame either by its frame number or time stamp.
The frame number is available if the time stamp is off. The range
depends on the history depth.
The time stamp is available if the time stamp is on. The number
is the distance to frame 0 in seconds. The range depends on the
history depth.
Default unit: S
Example: CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1.
CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM 2 s
Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker
1.
Manual operation: See "Frame (Spectrogram only)" on page 256
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the
channel.
Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search within the visible frames.
Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not
visible for any reason (e.g. if the display update is off).
MEMory
Performs a search within all frames in the memory.
*RST: VISible
Manual operation: See "Marker Search Area" on page 262
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre-
quencies.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all
frequencies.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 608
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre-
quency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow
This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre-
quency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current
frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre-
quency.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 609
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command looks for the peak level in the whole
spectrogram.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change
the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur-
rent frequency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 610
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre-
quency.
The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the
marker.
If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command first looks for the peak level in the
whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
14.7.5 Display and limit line configuration
● Display lines.......................................................................................................... 611
● Limit lines.............................................................................................................. 614
14.7.5.1 Display lines
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>...............................................................................................611
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe.................................................................................... 612
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>............................................................................................... 612
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe.....................................................................................612
CALCulate<n>:TFLine:STATe..........................................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>............................................................................................... 613
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe.....................................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> <Position>
This command defines the (horizontal) position of a display line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<dl> 1|2
Parameters:
<Position> The value range is variable.
You can use any unit you want, the R&S ESW then converts the
unit to the currently selected unit. If you omit a unit, the
R&S ESW uses the currently selected unit.
*RST: (state is OFF)
Default unit: DBM
Example: CALC:DLIN2 -20dBm
Positions the second display line at -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2" on page 265
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 611
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a display line on and off
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<dl> 1|2
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:DLIN2:STAT ON
Turns on display line 2.
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl> <Frequency>
This command defines the position of a frequency line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<dl> 1 to 4
frequency line
Parameters:
<Frequency> Note that you can not set a frequency line to a position that is
outside the current span.
Range: 0 Hz to Fmax
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Default unit: HZ
Example: CALC:FLIN2 120MHz
Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Vertical Line <x>" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a frequency line on and off
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<dl> 1|2
frequency line
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 612
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON
Turns frequency line 2 on.
CALCulate<n>:TFLine:STATe <State>
This command turns the frequency line representing the current receiver frequency on
and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Turn on the frequency line
CALC:TFL:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Tuned Frequency" on page 266
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl> <Time>
This command defines the position of a time line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<dl> 1 to 4
time line
Parameters:
<Time> Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher
than the current sweep time.
Range: 0 s to 1600 s
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Default unit: S
Example: CALC:TLIN 10ms
Sets the first time line to 10 ms.
Manual operation: See "Vertical Line <x>" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe <State>
This command turns a time line on and off
Suffix: .
<n> Window
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 613
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
<dl> 1|2
time line
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:TLIN:STAT ON
Turns the first time line on.
14.7.5.2 Limit lines
● Limit line management.......................................................................................... 614
● Limit line design.................................................................................................... 619
● Limit check............................................................................................................ 626
● Programming example: using limit lines................................................................627
Limit line management
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?.....................................................................................614
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet........................................................................ 615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY........................................................................................615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete...................................................................................... 615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet...........................................................................616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe.............................................................................616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe........................................................................................616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>..................................................................................617
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk...................................................................... 617
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet........................................................................... 618
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe............................................................................. 618
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit.............................................................................................. 618
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit............................................................................................ 619
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?
This command queries the names of all active limit lines.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitLines> String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti-
cal order.
Example: CALC:LIM:ACT?
Queries the names of all active limit lines.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 614
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Manual operation: See "Visibility" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value.
The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
*RST: 0
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See "X-Offset" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY <Line>
This command copies a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Line> 1 to 8
number of the new limit line
<name>
String containing the name of the limit line.
Example: CALC:LIM1:COPY 2
Copies limit line 1 to line 2.
CALC:LIM1:COPY 'FM2'
Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2.
Manual operation: See "Copy Line" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete
This command deletes a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Manual operation: See "Delete Line" on page 273
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 615
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value.
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Y-Offset" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a limit line with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:NAME on page 624.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Manual operation: See "Visibility" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe <State>
This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?.
Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be
checked in one step (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk
on page 617).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 616
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:LIM:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for limit line 1.
Manual operation: See "Disable All Lines" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t> <TraceNumber>
This command links a limit line to one or more traces.
Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only. Limit lines no lon-
ger need to be assigned to a trace explicitly. The trace to be checked can be defined
directly (as a suffix) in the new command to activate the limit check (see
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 617).
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
<t> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM2:TRAC 3
Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk <State>
This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?.
Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spec-
trum analyzers (which are still supported, however):
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t> on page 617
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 616
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
<t> Trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 617
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Example: CALC:LIM3:TRAC2:CHEC ON
Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Traces to be Checked" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line.
Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value.
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Y-Offset" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe <State>
This command turns an upper limit line on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a limit line with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:NAME on page 624.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
Manual operation: See "Visibility" on page 272
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit <FileName>
Loads the limit line from the selected file in .CSV format.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 618
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the CSV import file.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:LIM 'C:\TEST.CSV'
Manual operation: See "Import" on page 276
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit <FileName>, <LimitLineName>
This command exports limit line data to an ASCII (CSV) file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
<LimitLineName> Name of the limit line to be exported.
Example: MMEM:STOR:LIM 'C:\TEST', 'UpperLimitLine'
Stores the limit line named "UpperLimitLine" in the file
TEST.CSV.
Manual operation: See "Export" on page 276
Limit line design
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent.................................................................................. 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]......................................................................... 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain........................................................................620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE..........................................................................621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt........................................................................... 621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing...................................................................... 621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA]............................................................................622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin..........................................................................622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE............................................................................ 622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt..............................................................................623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing......................................................................... 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold......................................................................623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME........................................................................................624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT......................................................................................... 624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA].............................................................................624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin.......................................................................... 625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE.............................................................................625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt.............................................................................. 625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing..........................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold...................................................................... 626
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 619
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the description of the limit line.
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values.
Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as
the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:
UPPer[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESW either adds missing val-
ues or ignores surplus values.
*RST: -
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See "Data Points" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain <SpanSetting>
This command selects the domain of the limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<SpanSetting> FREQuency | TIME
FREQuency
For limit lines that apply to a range of frequencies.
TIME
For limit lines that apply to a period of time.
*RST: FREQuency
Example: CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM FREQ
Select a limit line in the frequency domain.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 620
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Manual operation: See "X-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s).
RELative
Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre-
quency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time
domain).
*RST: ABSolute
Manual operation: See "X-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete limit line horizontally.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Distance> Numeric value.
The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
Default unit: HZ
Manual operation: See "Shift x" on page 276
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing <InterpolMode>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines
from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 621
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<InterpolMode> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN
Manual operation: See "X-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of level values.
Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as
the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESW either
adds missing values or ignores surplus values.
*RST: Limit line state is OFF
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See "Data Points" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Margin> numeric value
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Margin" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 622
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values.
The unit is variable.
RELative
Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference
level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Manual operation: See "Y-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Distance> Defines the distance that the limit line moves.
Default unit: DB
Manual operation: See "Shift y" on page 276
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower
limit line from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Manual operation: See "Y-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.
The R&S ESW uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh-
old.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 623
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Threshold> Numeric value.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT
on page 624.
*RST: -200 dBm
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME <Name>
This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit
line.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the limit line name.
*RST: REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8
Manual operation: See "Name" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the unit of a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Unit> If you select a dB-based unit for the limit line, the command
automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line.
*RST: DBM
Manual operation: See "Y-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 624
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of level values.
Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as
the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S ESW either
adds missing values or ignores surplus values.
*RST: Limit line state is OFF
Default unit: DBM
Manual operation: See "Data Points" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Margin> numeric value
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Margin" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values.
The unit is variable.
RELative
Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference
level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Manual operation: See "Y-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 625
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Distance> Defines the distance that the limit line moves.
Manual operation: See "Shift y" on page 276
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper
limit line from one horizontal point to the next.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Manual operation: See "Y-Axis" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold <Limit>
This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale.
The R&S ESW uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh-
old.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> Limit line
Parameters:
<Limit> Numeric value.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT
on page 624.
*RST: -200
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 274
Limit check
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate]...................................................................... 627
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?........................................................................................ 627
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 626
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check.
The command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM:CLE
Deletes the result of the limit check.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of a limit check in the specified window.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single measurement mode.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<li> Limit line
Return values:
<Result> 0
PASS
1
FAIL
Example: INIT;*WAI
Starts a new sweep and waits for its end.
CALC2:LIM3:FAIL?
Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 in window 2.
Usage: Query only
Programming example: using limit lines
The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environ-
ment.
● Example: configuring limit lines.............................................................................627
● Example: performing a limit check........................................................................ 629
Example: configuring limit lines
This example demonstrates how to configure 2 limit lines - an upper and a lower limit -
for a measurement in a remote environment.
//------------- Configuing the limit lines ---------------------
CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1'
//Names limit line 1 'FM1'.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 627
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
CALC:LIM1:CONT:MODE ABS
//Selects absolute scaling for the horizontal axis.
CALC:LIM1:CONT 1 MHz,50MHz,100 MHz,150MHz,200MHz
//Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:MODE ABS
//Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM1:UNIT DBM
//Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM1:UPP -10,-5,0,-5,-10
//Defines 5 definition points for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:MARG 5dB
//Defines an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations
//are still tolerated.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:SHIF -10DB
//Shifts the limit line 1 by -10 dB.
CALC:LIM1:UPP:OFFS -3dB
//Defines an additional -3 dB offset for limit line 1.
CALC:LIM3:NAME 'FM3'
//Names limit line 3 'FM3'.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MODE REL
//Selects a relative vertical scale for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:UNIT DB
CALC:LIM3:CONT 1 MHz,50MHz,100 MHz,150MHz,200MHz
//Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:LOW -90,-60,-40,-60,-90
//Defines 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 2
//Shifts the limit line 3 by 2dB.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:OFFS 3
//Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3.
CALC:LIM3:LOW:THR -200DBM
//Defines a power threshold of -200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked
CALC:LIM3:LOW:MARG 5dB
//Defines an area of 5dB around limit line 3 where limit check violations
//are still tolerated.
//-------------- Storing the limit lines -----------------------
MMEM:SEL:CHAN:LIN:ALL ON
MMEM:STOR:TYPE CHAN
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'LimitLines_FM1_FM3'
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 628
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Analysis
Example: performing a limit check
This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency
sweep measurement in a remote environment. The limit lines configured in "Example:
configuring limit lines" on page 627 are assumed to exist and be active.
//--------------Preparing the instrument ---------------------
*RST
//Resets the instrument
INIT:CONT OFF
//Selects single sweep mode.
//--------------Configuring the measurement -------------
FREQ:CENT 100MHz
//Defines the center frequency
FREQ:SPAN 200MHz
//Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency.
SENS:SWE:COUN 10
//Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement.
DISP:TRAC1:Y:RLEV 0dBm
//Sets the reference level to 0 dBm.
TRIG:SOUR IFP
TRIG:LEV:IFP -10dBm
//Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level
//of -10 dBm.
//--------------Configuring the Trace--------------------------
DISP:TRAC2 ON
DISP:TRAC2:MODE AVER
DISP:TRAC3 ON
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH
//Configures 3 traces: 1 (default): clear/write; 2: average; 3: max hold
//------------- Configuring the limit check -------------------
MMEM:LOAD:TYPE REPL
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'LimitLines_FM1_FM3'
//Loads the limit lines stored in 'LimitLines_FM1_FM3'
CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1'
CALC:LIM1:UPP:STAT ON
//Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1.
CALC:LIM3:NAME 'FM3'
CALC:LIM3:LOW:STAT ON
//Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3.
CALC:LIM:ACT?
//Queries the names of all active limit lines
//Result: 'FM1,FM3'
CALC:LIM1:TRAC3:CHEC ON
//Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace3 (maxhold trace)
CALC:LIM3:TRAC2:CHEC ON
//Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace2 (average trace)
CALC:LIM:CLE
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 629
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
//Clears the previous limit check results
//------------- Performing the measurement---------------------
INIT;*WAI
//Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished.
//-------------- Retrieving limit check results----------------------------
CALC:LIM1:FAIL?
//Queries the result of the upper limit line check
CALC:LIM3:FAIL?
//Queries the result of the lower limit line check
14.8 Data management
The commands required to store and load instrument settings and import and export
measurement results in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for man-
ual operation are described in Chapter 11, "Data management", on page 282.
Addressing drives
The various drives can be addressed via the "mass storage instrument specifier"
<msis> using the conventional Windows syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by
"C:". For details on storage locations refer to Chapter 11.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 290.
The file names (<FileName> parameter) are given as string parameters enclosed in
quotation marks. They also comply with Windows conventions. Windows file names do
not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation.
Wildcards
The two characters "*" and "?" can be used as "wildcards". Wildcards are variables for
a selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character, the
asterisk replaces any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all
files in a directory.
Path names
Storage locations can be specified either as absolute (including the entire path) or rela-
tive paths (including only subfolders of the current folder). Use the MMEM:CDIR? query
to determine the current folder.
Secure user mode
In secure user mode, settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol-
atile memory, which is restricted to 256 MHz. Thus, a "Memory full" error may occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 630
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
● File management.................................................................................................. 631
● Items to store........................................................................................................ 637
● Instrument setting management............................................................................640
● Screenshots and printouts.................................................................................... 644
● Notes display.........................................................................................................655
● Test reports........................................................................................................... 656
● Measurement result export................................................................................... 669
● Examples: managing data.....................................................................................670
14.8.1 File management
FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................. 631
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator........................................................................................ 632
MMEMory:CATalog.........................................................................................................632
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG...............................................................................................633
MMEMory:CDIRectory....................................................................................................633
MMEMory:COMMent......................................................................................................633
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................... 634
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................ 634
MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate..........................................................................................635
MMEMory:MDIRectory................................................................................................... 635
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................... 635
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................635
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................... 636
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect.................................................................................... 636
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP...............................................................................................636
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives................................................................................ 637
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives.................................................................................... 637
MMEMory:RDIRectory....................................................................................................637
FORMat[:DATA] <Format>[, <BitLength>]
This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from
the R&S ESW to the controlling computer.
Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R&S ESW. The
R&S ESW automatically recognizes the data it receives, regardless of the format.
For details on data formats, see Chapter 14.7.3.6, "Formats for returned values: ASCII
format and binary format", on page 587.
Parameters:
<Format> ASCii
ASCii format, separated by commas.
This format is almost always suitable, regardless of the actual
data format. However, the data is not as compact as other for-
mats can be.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 631
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
REAL
Floating-point numbers (according to IEEE 754) in the "definite
length block format".
The format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of
trace data.
<BitLength> Length in bits for floating-point results
16
16-bit floating-point numbers.
Compared to REAL,32 format, half as many numbers are
returned.
32
32-bit floating-point numbers
For I/Q data, 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set-
ting.
64
64-bit floating-point numbers
Compared to REAL,32 format, twice as many numbers are
returned.
Example: FORM REAL,32
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator <Separator>
This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format.
Parameters:
<Separator> POINt | COMMa
COMMa
Uses a comma as decimal separator, e.g. 4,05.
POINt
Uses a point as decimal separator, e.g. 4.05.
*RST: *RST has no effect on the decimal separator.
Default is POINt.
Example: FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
Sets the decimal point as separator.
Manual operation: See "Exporting a peak list" on page 123
MMEMory:CATalog <FileName>
This command returns the contents of a particular directory.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and directory
If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of
the directory selected with MMEMory:CDIRectory
on page 633.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 632
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
The path may be relative or absolute. Using wildcards ('*') is
possible to query a certain type of files only.
If you use a specific file as a parameter, the command returns
the name of the file if the file is found in the specified directory,
or an error if the file is not found ("-256,"File name not
found").
Example: MMEM:CAT? 'C:\Data\SPOOL?.PNG'
Returns all files in C:\Data\ whose names start with SPOOL,
have 6 characters and the extension .PNG, e.g.:
SPOOL1.PNG,SPOOL2.PNG,SPOOL3.PNG
Example: MMEM:CAT? 'C:\Data\SPOOL6.PNG'
Query whether the file 'SPOOL6.PNG' also exists in the directory;
Result:
-256,"File name not found;:MMEMory:CATalog?
'C:\Data\SPOOL6.PNG'
Manual operation: See "Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files"
on page 292
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG <Directory>
This command returns the contents of a particular directory with additional information
about the files.
Parameters:
<Directory> String containing the path and directory.
If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of
the directory selected with MMEMory:CDIRectory
on page 633.
The path may be relative or absolute. Using wildcards ('*') is
possible to query a certain type of files only.
MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameters:
<Directory> String containing the path to another directory.
The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the stored settings.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 633
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: MMEMory:COMMent "ACP measurement with Standard
Tetra from 23.05."
MMEMory::MMEMory:STORe1:STATe 1, "ACP_T"
As a result, in the selection list for recall settings, the comment
"ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from
23.05." is added to the ACP entry.
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 293
MMEMory:COPY <FileName>, <FileName>
This command copies one or more files to another directory.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and file name of the source file.
Special behavior if optional external mixer is active and the des-
tination is C:\R_S\Instr\User\cvl\: the contents of the
entire folder are copied. For details, see "Conversion loss
tables" on page 149.
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:DATA <FileName>[, <Data>]
MMEMory:DATA? <FileName>
This command writes block data into a file. The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain
error-free data transfer.
When you query the contents of a file, you can save them in a file on the remote con-
trol computer.
The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the <instru-
ment> or for transferring them to the <instrument>
Parameters:
<Data> <block_data>
Data block with the following structure.
#
Hash sign.
<number>
Length of the length information.
<number>
Length information of the binary data (number of bytes).
<data>
Binary data with the indicated <number> of bytes.
Parameters for setting and query:
<FileName>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 634
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: MMEM:NAME '\Public\User\Testfile.txt'
Creates a new file called 'testfile.txt'.
MMEM:DATA 'Testfile.txt',#220Contents of the
file
The parameter means:
#2: hash sign and length of the length information (20 bytes = 2
digits)
20: indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes.
Contents of the file: store 20 binary bytes (characters) to the file.
MMEM:DATA? 'Testfile.txt'
Returns the contents of the file.
MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate <FileName>
This command deletes a file.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and file name of the file to delete.
The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>
This command creates a new directory.
Parameters:
<Directory> String containing the path and new directory name
The path may be relative or absolute.
MMEMory:MOVE <FileName>, <FileName>
This command moves a file to another directory.
The command also renames the file if you define a new name in the target directory.
If you do not include a path for <NewFileName>, the command just renames the file.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and file name of the source file.
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG'
Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG in directory C:\.
MMEMory:MSIS <Drive>
This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands.
Parameters:
<Drive> 'A:' | 'C:' | … | 'Z:'
String containing the device drive name
*RST: n.a.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 635
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
MMEMory:NAME <FileName>
This command has several purposes, depending on the context it is used in.
● It creates a new and empty file.
● It defines the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy[:IMMediate]. Note
that you have to route the printer output to a file.
● It defines the name and directory of a test report.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:NAME 'C:\Data\PRINT1.BMP'
Selects the file name.
Manual operation: See "Configuration and printout of the test report" on page 330
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect <Drive>[, <State>]
This command disconnects a network drive.
Parameters:
<Drive> String containing the drive name.
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
Optional: determines whether disconnection is forced or not
1 | ON
Disconnection is forced.
0 | OFF
Disconnect only if not in use.
*RST: 0
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP <FilePath>, <IP>[, <UserName>, <Password>, <State>]
This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network.
Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first.
Parameters:
<FilePath> String containing the drive name or path of the directory you
want to map.
<IP> String containing the host name of the computer or the IP
address and the share name of the drive.
'<\host name or IP address\share name>'
<UserName> String containing a user name in the network.
The user name is optional.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 636
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
<Password> String containing the password corresponding to the <User-
Name>.
The password is optional.
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1
Reconnects at logon with the same user name.
OFF | 0
Does not reconnect at logon.
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives
This command returns a list of unused network drives.
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives [<State>]
This command returns a list of all network drives in use.
Parameters:
<State> You do not have to use the parameter. If you do not include the
parameter, the command returns a list of all drives in use.
This is the same behavior as if you were using the parameter
OFF.
ON | 1
Returns a list of all drives in use including the folder information.
OFF | 0
Returns a list of all drives in use.
MMEMory:RDIRectory <arg0>
This command deletes the indicated directory.
Parameters:
<arg0> String containing the path of the directory to delete.
Note that the directory you want to remove must be empty.
14.8.2 Items to store
The following commands select the items to be included in the configuration file.
Depending on the used command, either the items from the entire instrument
(MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]...), or only those from the currently selected channel
(MMEM:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]...) are stored.
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL...........................................................................638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL......................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault.....................................................................638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings............................................................... 638
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 637
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings..............................................................................638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL................................................................. 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL................................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE....................................................................... 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE..................................................................................... 639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam.....................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam................................................................................... 639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive].........................................................640
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]............................................................. 640
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL....................................................... 640
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL......................................................................640
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file.
The items are:
● Hardware configuration: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 638
● Limit lines: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 639
● Spectrogram data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 639
● Trace data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]
on page 640
● Transducers: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 640
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command selects the current settings as the only item to store to and load from a
configuration file.
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State>
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State>
This command includes or excludes measurement (hardware) settings when storing or
loading a configuration file.
Measurement settings include:
● general channel configuration
● measurement hardware configuration including markers
● limit lines
Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines. This number
includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 638
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use
with MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 641.
● color settings
● configuration for the hardcopy output
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Example: MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State>
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State>
This command includes or excludes all limit lines (active and inactive) when storing or
loading a configuration file.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command does not include any of the following items when storing or loading a
configuration file.
● Hardware configuration: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 638
● Limit lines: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 639
● Spectrogram data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 639
● Trace data: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]
on page 640
● Transducers: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 640
Example: MMEM:SEL:NONE
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam <State>
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam <State>
This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a con-
figuration file.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 639
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: MMEM:SEL:SGR ON
Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets.
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] <State>
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] <State>
This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration
file.
Suffix: .
<1...3> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0, i.e. no traces are stored
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State>
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State>
This command includes or excludes transducer factors when storing or loading a con-
figuration file.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON
Manual operation: See "Items:" on page 293
14.8.3 Instrument setting management
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL.....................................................................................................641
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe................................................................................................. 641
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO.................................................................................................. 641
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe..................................................................................................641
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe....................................................................................... 642
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT.............................................................................. 643
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE........................................................................................ 643
SYSTem:PRESet........................................................................................................... 644
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC]................................................................................. 644
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 640
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all <instrument> configuration files in the current directory.
You can select the directory with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 633.
Example: MMEM:CLE:ALL
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command deletes an instrument configuration file.
Parameters:
<1>
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the file to delete.
The string may or may not contain the file's extension.
Example: MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST'
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO <1>, <FileName>
This command restores an <instrument> configuration and defines that configuration
as the default state.
The default state is restored after a preset (*RST) or after you turn on the R&S ESW.
Parameters:
<1>
<FileName> 'Factory'
Restores the factory settings as the default state.
'<file_name>
String containing the path and name of the configuration file.
Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the
startup recall function; channel files cause an error.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\User\TEST'
Manual operation: See "Startup Recall" on page 295
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command restores and activates the <instrument> configuration stored in a *.dfl
file.
Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command.
The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made
either in the "Save/Recall" dialogs (manual operation) or through the
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] commands (remote operation; the settings are identical in
both cases).
By default, the selection is limited to the user settings ("User Settings" selection in the
dialogs, HWSettings in SCPI). The selection is not reset by [Preset] or *RST.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 641
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
As a consequence, the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe com-
mand without a previous MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] command may vary, depending
on previous actions in the GUI or in previous scripts, even if the script starts with the
*RST command.
It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]
command before using MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
Parameters:
<1>
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the file to load.
The string may or may not include the file's extension.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
//Save all items (User Settings, All Traces, All Limit Lines) from
the R&S ESW.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\User\TEST01'
//Reloads all items
In the "Recall" dialog, select only "User Settings" and "All Limit
Lines".
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\User\TEST01'
//Reloads user settings and all limit lines.
*RST
//Reset <instrument>.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\User\TEST01'
//Selected items are retained. Reloads user settings and all limit
lines.
Restart the <instrument>.
(Switch the [ON/OFF] key off and on).
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\User\TEST01'
// Selected items are set to default. Reloads only the user set-
tings.
Manual operation: See "Recall" on page 290
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe <1>, <FileName>
This command saves the current <instrument> configuration in a *.dfl file.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Suffix: .
<1|2> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 642
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Parameters:
<1>
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
The file extension is .dfl.
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'
Saves the current <instrument> settings in the file Save.dfl.
Manual operation: See "Save File" on page 293
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT
This command saves the current <instrument> configuration in a *.dfl file.
The file name depends on the one you have set with MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe
on page 642. This command adds a consecutive number to the file name.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Suffix: .
<1|2> irrelevant
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'
Saves the current <instrument> settings in the file Save.dfl.
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current <instrument> settings in the file
Save_001.dfl
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current <instrument> settings in the file
Save_002.dfl
Manual operation: See "Save File" on page 293
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE <Type>
This command defines whether the data from the entire <instrument> or only from the
current channel is stored with the subsequent MMEM:STOR... command.
Suffix: .
<1|2> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> INSTrument | CHANnel
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 643
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
INSTrument
Stores data from the entire <instrument>.
CHANnel
Stores data from an individual channel.
*RST: INST
Example: INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM2'
Selects channel'SPECTRUM2'.
MMEM:STOR:TYPE CHAN
Specifies that channel data is to be stored.
SYSTem:PRESet
This command presets the R&S ESW. It is identical to *RST.
Example: SYST:PRES
Usage: Event
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC]
This command restores the default <instrument> settings in the current channel.
Use INST:SEL to select the channel.
Example: INST:SEL 'Spectrum2'
Selects the channel for "Spectrum2".
SYST:PRES:CHAN:EXEC
Restores the factory default settings to the "Spectrum2"channel.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Preset Channel" on page 143
14.8.4 Screenshots and printouts
Commands to take and store screenshots described elsewhere.
● MMEMory:NAME on page 636
DISPlay:LOGO.............................................................................................................. 645
HCOPy:ABORt.............................................................................................................. 645
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>.......................................................................................645
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL.................................................................................................. 646
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined.......................................................................................... 646
HCOPy:CONTent........................................................................................................... 647
HCOPy:DESTination<di>................................................................................................ 648
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor................................................................................................... 649
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.............................................................................................649
HCOPy[:IMMediate]....................................................................................................... 650
HCOPy[:IMMediate]:NEXT..............................................................................................650
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT..........................................................................................650
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 644
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe.......................................................................................... 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom.....................................................................................651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT..........................................................................................651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt.........................................................................................651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP........................................................................................... 652
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT.......................................................................................... 652
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation............................................................................................. 652
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:CHANnel:STATe......................................................................... 652
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt.......................................................................................653
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:SCALe.......................................................................................653
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe........................................................................................654
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe................................................................................................654
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt...........................................................654
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]........................................................ 655
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di>.................................................................... 655
DISPlay:LOGO <State>
Activates/deactivates the printout of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo at the top of
each page.
Parameters:
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
Logo is printed.
0 | OFF
Logo is not printed.
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:LOGO OFF
Manual operation: See "Print Logo" on page 311
HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example: HCOP:ABOR
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>
This command defines the color scheme for print jobs.
For details see "Print Colors" on page 345.
Suffix: .
<it> Irrelevant.
<ci> See table below
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 645
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a print-
out.
Manual operation: See "Print Colors" on page 345
Gui setting Description Remote command
"Screen Colors (Print)" Selects the current screen colors for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
printout. The background is always printed in
white and the grid in black.
"Optimized Colors" Selects an optimized color setting for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
printout to improve the visibility of the colors
(default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2
black, trace 3 green, and the markers are
turquoise. The background is always printed
in white and the grid in black.
"User Defined Colors" Selects the user-defined color setting. HCOP:CMAP:DEF3
"Screen Colors Selects the current screen colors without any HCOP:CMAP:DEF4
(Screenshot)" changes for a screenshot.
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL <hue>, <sat>, <lum>
This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs.
Suffix: .
<it> Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined.
For more information see Chapter 14.9.6.3, "CMAP suffix
assignment", on page 704.
Parameters:
<hue> hue
tint
Range: 0 to 1
<sat> sat
saturation
Range: 0 to 1
<lum> lum
brightness
Range: 0 to 1
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color
Manual operation: See "Defining User-specific Colors" on page 347
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined <Color>
This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 646
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Suffix: .
<it> 1..n
Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined.
For more information see Chapter 14.9.6.3, "CMAP suffix
assignment", on page 704.
Parameters:
<Color> BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRay | LGRay | LBLue | LGReen | LCYan |
LRED | LMAGenta
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See "Predefined Colors" on page 347
HCOPy:CONTent <Content>
This command determines the type of content included in the printout.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Parameters:
<Content> WINDows | HCOPy
WINDows
Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently
active windows for the current channel (or "MultiView") are avail-
able for selection. How many windows are printed on a each
page of the printout is defined by HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt
on page 653.
This option is not available when copying to the clipboard
(HCOP:DEST 'SYST:COMM:CLIP' or an image file (see
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 649).
If the destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard,
it is automatically changed to be a PDF file for the currently
selected printing device.
HCOPy
Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the
current channel (or "MultiView"): diagrams, traces, markers,
marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the channel bar and status
bar, for printout on a single page. Displayed items belonging to
the software user interface (e.g. softkeys) are not included. The
size and position of the elements in the printout is identical to the
screen display.
*RST: HCOPy
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 647
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: HCOP:DEST1 'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
HCOP:CONT WIND
HCOP:DEST1?
//Result: 'MMEM'
HCOP:DEV:LANG1?
//Result: 'PDF'
"Print to clipboard" is automatically switched to "print to PDF file"
when the contents are switched to "multiple windows".
Manual operation: See "Print Screenshot" on page 310
HCOPy:DESTination<di> <Destination>
This command selects the destination of a print job.
Note: To print a screenshot to a file, see HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 649.
Suffix: .
<di> Printing device.
Parameters:
<Destination> 'MMEM'
Activates "Print to file". Thus, if the destination of the print func-
tion is set to "printer" (see HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMuni
cate:PRINter' or HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI), the output is redir-
ected to a .PRN file using the selected printer driver.
Select the file name with MMEMory:NAME.
Note: To save a screenshot to a file, see HCOPy:DEVice:
LANGuage on page 649.
'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
Sends the hardcopy to a printer and deactivates "print to file".
Select the printer with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:
SELect<di> .
'SYSTem:COMMunicate:CLIPboard'
Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard.
*RST: 'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
Example: To print on a printer:
//Destination: printer, deactivate "print to file"
HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'
//Define the printer name
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL 'myFavoritePrinter'
//Print
HCOP:IMM
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 648
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: To print to a *PRN file:
//Destination: printer
HCOP:DEV:LANG GDI
//Define the printer name
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL 'myFavoritePrinter'
//Redirect the printer output to a file
HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM'
//Define file name
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\MeasurementTestReport.png'
HCOP:IMM
Manual operation: See "Destination: Clipboard" on page 316
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <State>
This command turns color printing on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
Color printing
OFF | 0
Black and white printing
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:DEV:COL ON
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language>
This command selects the file format for a print job or to store a screenshot to a file.
Parameters:
<Language> GDI
Graphics Device Interface
Default format for output to a printer configured under Windows.
Must be selected for output to the printer interface.
Can be used for output to a file. The printer driver configured
under Windows is used to generate a printer-specific file format.
BMP | JPG | PNG | PDF | SVG
Data format for output to files
DOC | PDF
File type for test reports
Available for HCOP:MODE REPort
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 649
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: To print a screenshot to a PNG file:
//Destination: PNG file
HCOP:DEV:LANG PNG
//Define file name
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\MeasurementTestReport.png'
HCOP:IMM
Manual operation: See "Destination: File" on page 316
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME.
The command also generates a measurement report when you have selected
HCOPy:MODE REPort. Note that you have to add at least one dataset to the report
with HCOPy:TREPort:NEW or HCOPy:TREPort:APPend. Otherwise creating the
report results in an error. If no specific file name is defined using MMEMory:NAME, the
current date and time is used as file name of the report.
Example: HCOP:MODE REPort
MMEM:NAME 'C:\WooHoo.pdf'
HCOP:DEV:LANG PDF
HCOP:TREP:NEW
HCOP
Creates a measurement report (in pdf format).
Manual operation: See "Print" on page 314
HCOPy[:IMMediate]:NEXT
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME. This command
adds a consecutive number to the file name.
Manual operation: See "Print" on page 314
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT <Comment>
This command defines a comment to be added to the printout.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 311
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 650
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the page number for printouts consisting of multi-
ple pages (HCOPy:CONTent on page 647).
Parameters:
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
The page number is printed.
0 | OFF
The page number is not printed.
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:PAGE:COUN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Print Page Count" on page 311
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom <Bottom>
This command defines the margin at the bottom of the printout page on which no ele-
ments are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT
on page 652.
Parameters:
<Bottom> *RST: 4.23 mm
Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:BOTT 2
Manual operation: See "Margins" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT <Left>
This command defines the margin at the left side of the printout page on which no ele-
ments are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT
on page 652.
Parameters:
<Left> *RST: 4.23 mm
Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:LEFT 2
Manual operation: See "Margins" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt <Right>
This command defines the margin at the right side of the printout page on which no
elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:
UNIT on page 652.
Parameters:
<Right> *RST: 4.23 mm
Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:RIGH 2
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 651
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Manual operation: See "Margins" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP <Top>
This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on which no elements
are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT
on page 652.
Parameters:
<Top> *RST: 4.23 mm
Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:TOP 2
Manual operation: See "Margins" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the unit in which the margins for the printout page are config-
ured.
Parameters:
<Unit> MM | IN
MM
millimeters
IN
inches
*RST: MM
Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG2:BOTT 2
Manual operation: See "Margins" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation <Orientation>
The command selects the page orientation of the printout.
The command is only available if the output device is a printer or a PDF file.
Parameters:
<Orientation> LANDscape | PORTrait
*RST: PORTrait
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG1 PDF
HCOP:PAGE:ORI2 LAND
Manual operation: See "Orientation" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:CHANnel:STATe <Channel>, <State>
This command selects all windows of the specified channel to be included in the print-
out for HCOPy:CONTent on page 647.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 652
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Parameters:
<Channel> String containing the name of the channel.
For a list of available channel types use INSTrument:LIST?
on page 464.
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
The channel windows are included in the printout.
0 | OFF
The channel windows are not included in the printout.
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:CONT WIND
HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:CHAN 'IQ Analyzer',0
HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','1',1
Prints only window 1 in the IQ Analyzer channel.
Manual operation: See "Print Multiple Windows" on page 311
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt <Count>
This command defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the print-
out for HCOPy:CONTent on page 647.
Parameters:
<Count> integer
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:COUN 2
Manual operation: See "Windows Per Page" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:SCALe <Scale>
This command determines the scaling of the windows in the printout for HCOPy:
CONTent on page 647.
Parameters:
<Scale> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally, not regard-
ing the aspect ratio of the original display. If more than one win-
dow is printed on one page (see HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt
on page 653), each window is printed in equal size.
("Size to fit")
0 | OFF
Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining
the aspect ratio of the original display.
("Maintain aspect ratio")
*RST: 1
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 653
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:SCAL 0
Manual operation: See "Scaling" on page 318
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe <Channel>, <Window>, <State>
This command selects the windows to be included in the printout for HCOPy:CONTent
on page 647.
Parameters:
<Channel> String containing the name of the channel.
For a list of available channel types use INSTrument:LIST?
on page 464.
<Window> String containing the name of the existing window.
By default, the name of a window is the same as its index.
To determine the name and index of all active windows in the
active channel, use the LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? query.
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
The window is included in the printout.
0 | OFF
The window is not included in the printout.
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:STAT 'IQ Analyzer','1',1
Manual operation: See "Print Multiple Windows" on page 311
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout.
Parameters:
<State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF
1 | ON
The time and date are printed.
0 | OFF
The time and date are not printed.
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Print Date and Time" on page 312
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt
This command queries the name of the first available printer.
To query the name of other installed printers, use SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:
ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 655.
Manual operation: See "Printer Name" on page 316
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 654
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]
This command queries the name of available printers.
You have to use SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 654
for this command to work properly.
Manual operation: See "Printer Name" on page 316
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di> <Printer>
This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R&S ESW.
Use HCOPy:DESTination<di> to select another output destination.
Suffix: .
<di> 1..n
Printing device.
Parameters:
<Printer> String containing the printer name.
Use
•SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt
on page 654and
•SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]
on page 655
to query all available printers.
*RST: NONE
Manual operation: See "Printer Name" on page 316
14.8.5 Notes display
Commands to configure the "Notes" display described elsewhere:
● LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:APPend:TEXT........................................655
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:CLEar....................................................656
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:TEXT.....................................................656
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:APPend:TEXT <Text>
This command is used to append content to the notes display.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Setting parameters:
<Text>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 655
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: DISPlay:NOTes:APPend:TEXT 'Measurement
configuration'
'Measurement configuration' is added to the existing content of
the notes display.
Usage: Setting only
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:CLEar
This command is used to clear the notes display.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Example: DISPlay:NOTes:CLEar
The notes display is cleared.
Usage: Event
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:TEXT <Text>
This command is used to set and query the content of the notes display.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<w> subwindow
Parameters:
<Text>
Example: DISPlay:NOTes:TEXT 'Measurement configuration'
'Measurement configuration' is added to the notes display. The
existing content is replaced.
14.8.6 Test reports
Commands to create test reports described elsewhere.
● HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 649
● HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 650
● MMEMory:NAME on page 636
HCOPy:MODE...............................................................................................................657
HCOPy:TREPort:APPend............................................................................................... 657
HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription......................................................................................... 657
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault.......................................................................................658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol............................................................658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT................................................................ 658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe................................................................659
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe............................................................................ 660
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 656
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST............................................................................................660
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO......................................................................................... 661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol........................................................................... 661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect........................................................................................ 661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?..................................................................... 664
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete........................................................................ 664
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD.......................................................................... 665
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE...........................................................................665
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW................................................................................................... 665
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe.................................................................................666
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize.............................................................................................666
HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors:STATe....................................................................................666
HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp:STATe...................................................................................667
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove......................................................................................667
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL............................................................................... 668
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe...................................................................................................668
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe........................................................................................ 668
MMEMory:RAW............................................................................................................. 668
HCOPy:MODE <Mode>
Parameters:
<Mode> SCReen | REPort
Manual operation: See "Configuration and printout of the test report" on page 330
HCOPy:TREPort:APPend
This command adds the current measurement results to the test report.
The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy:TREPort:
ITEM:SELect on page 661.
Example: Perform a measurement, then:
HCOP:TREP:NEW
Creates a new test report with the results of the first measure-
ment.
Perform another measurement, then:
HCOP:TREP:APP
Adds the results of the second measurement to the test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and removing datasets" on page 330
HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription <Description>
This command defines the description of the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters:
<Description> String containing the description of the test report.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 657
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: HCOP:TREP:DESC 'A short summary of the test
report.'
Adds a description to the test report.
Manual operation: See "Contents of the title page" on page 328
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault
This command restores the default configuration of the test report regarding the infor-
mation that is part of the report.
It also restores the default names of the measurement information titles.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Test report content selection" on page 325
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol <Repetition>
This command selects how often the items in the report header are displayed in the
document.
Suffix: .
<li> 1..n
Selects the header line.
Parameters:
<Repetition> GLOBal
The selected header line is displayed at the top of every page of
the report.
NEVer
The selected header line is displayed on no page of the report.
Note that a line that does not contain anything is still displayed in
the report as a blank line. If you select NEVer, the line is not dis-
played at all.
SECTion
The selected header line is displayed after the title of every sub-
report.
*RST: NEVer
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TITL ''
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:TEXT ''
Defines an empty string for line 4 of the report header.
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE4:CONT NEV
Removes line 4 from the header of the test report.
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT <Description>
This command defines a descriptive text for one of the items part of the report header.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 658
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
You can define up to 6 items in the header.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe on page 659 to define
custom titles for each item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol to select the condition
under which each item is shown.
Suffix: .
<li> 1..n
Selects the header line.
Parameters:
<Description> String containing the description of one of the value fields.
By default, the value fields of the items are empty.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under
Test'
Renames the third title into "Device under Test".
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TEXT 'Some Device'
Labels the third title as "Some Device".
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe <Title>
This command defines a custom name for one of the items part of the report header.
You can define up to 6 items in the header.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT on page 658 to add a value
to each item.
Use HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol to select the condition
under which each item is shown.
Suffix: .
<li> 1..n
Selects the header line.
Parameters:
<Title> String containing the title of the item.
The default titles are as follows:
• Line 1: "Heading"
• Line 2: "Meas Type"
• Line 3: "Equipment under Test"
• Line 4: "Manufacturer"
• Line 5: "OP Condition"
• Line 6: "Test Spec"
Make sure that the title string is not too long, because strings
that are too long could mess up the layout of the report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:LINE3:TITL 'Device under
Test'
Renames the third title into "Device under Test".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 659
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the complete set of measurement information from
the test report.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 1
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:HEAD:STAT ON
Includes the measurement information in the test report.
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST [<ChannelType>]
This command queries the selected information to be included in the test report for a
specific channel type.
Parameters:
<ChannelType> <char_data>
Selects the channel type that you want to query the test report
configuration for.
When you omit the parameter, the command returns the configu-
ration of the currently selected channel.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LIST? SAN
Queries the items that are included in the test reports of the
Spectrum application.
Table 14-7: Available <ChannelTypes>
<ChannelType>
CAPD CISPR APD
IQ I/Q Analyzer
REC Receiver
RTIM Real-Time
SAN Spectrum
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 660
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO <FileName>
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the location and name of the picture.
You can use the following file types: bmp, jpg, png, gif, emf or
wmf format.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO 'C:\aPicture.jpg'
Includes a picture at the top of each page of the report.
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol <Repetition>
This command selects how often the logo is displayed in the document.
Parameters:
<Repetition> ALWays
The logo is displayed at the top of every page of the report.
NEVer
The logo is displayed on no page of the report.
ONCE
The logo is displayed on the first page of each dataset.
*RST: NEVer
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO 'c:\logo.png'
Selects a picture to be displayed in the report document.
HCOP:TREP:ITEM:LOGO:CONT GLOB
Displays the logo on each page.
Manual operation: See "Custom information about the measurement" on page 327
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect [<ChannelType>],'<Item>,<Item>,<Item>,...'
This command defines the type of information that a test report consists of.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelType> Optional parameter to define the channel type that the selection
applies to.
When you omit the <ChannelType> parameter, the selection
applies to the currently active channel.
<Item> String containing the information you want to include in the test
report.
Note that the items, separated by commas, have to be written
into one string (see example below).
The available items depend on the application you are using.
See the tables below for a short description of each item.
By default, some items are selected (see tables below).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 661
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:SEL 'SETT,MARK,SRES,DIAG'
Each dataset consists of the measurement settings, marker
information, the scan results and a screenshot of the scan trace
(for Receiver channels).
The selection is applied to the currently selected channel.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:SEL REC,'BARG,LISN'
A dataset in the Receiver application consists of the bargraph
and the LISN settings.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Test report content selection" on page 325
Table 14-8: Available <ChannelTypes>
<ChannelType> Description
ADEM Analog demodulator
CAPD CISPR APD
IQ I/Q analyzer
REC Receiver
RTIM Real-time
SAN Spectrum
Table 14-9: Available <items> in receiver application
<Item> Description Default
BARGraph Screenshot of the bargraph.
DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results. x
FRESults Numerical results for the final measurement.
IF Screenshot of the results for IF analysis. x
IFSPectrogram Screenshot of the IF spectrogram. x
LISN Information about LISNs.
MARKers Contents of the marker table. x
PRESults Contents of the peak list.
SCANtable Measurement configuration as defined in the scan table.
SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x
SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram. x
SRESults Numerical results for the scan.
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 662
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Table 14-10: Available <items> in CISPR APD application
<Item> Description Default
DIAGram Screenshot of the measurement results. x
MARKers Contents of the marker table. x
SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram. x
RSUMMary Contents of the result summary. x
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
Table 14-11: Available <items> in spectrum application
<Item> Description Default
DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results. x
MARKers Contents of the marker table. x
PEAKlist Contents of the peak list. x
RESultlist Numerical measurement results.
RSUMmary Contents of the result summary. x
SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x
SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram. x
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
Table 14-12: Available <items> in I/Q analyzer
<Item> Description Default
DIAGram Screenshot of the result diagram. x
FREQuency Screenshot of the Spectrum results. x
MAGNitude Screenshot of the Magnitude results. x
PEAKlist Contents of the peak list. x
RESultlist Numerical measurement results. x
RIMag Screenshot of the Real / Imaginary results. x
SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
VECTor Screenshot of the I/Q Vector results. x
Table 14-13: Available <items> in real-time application
<Item> Description Default
PSPectrum Screenshot of the persistence spectrum. x
RESultlist Numerical measurement results. x
SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. x
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 663
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
<Item> Description Default
SGRam Screenshot of the spectrogram. x
SPECtrum Screenshot of the real-time spectrum. x
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
Table 14-14: Available <items> in analog demodulation application
<Item> Description Default
AMSPectrum Screenshot of the AM Spectrum.
AMTDomain Screenshot of the AM Time Domain.
FMSPectrum Screenshot of the FM Spectrum.
FMTDomain Screenshot of the FM Time Domain.
MARKers Contents of the marker table.
PEAKlist Contents of the peak list.
PMSPectrum Screenshot of the PM Spectrum.
PMTDomain Screenshot of the PM Time Domain.
RFSPectrum Screenshot of the RF Spectrum.
RFTDomain Screenshot of the RF Time Domain.
RSUMmary Contents of the result summary.
SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement.
TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer.
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?
This command queries the test report templates available in the default report directory
(and its subdirectories).
Return values:
<Templates> String containing the name of the templates as a comma-sepa-
rated list.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:CAT?
Returns, e.g.:
'TemplateX, TemplateY, TemplateZ'
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Template management" on page 329
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete <Template>
This command deletes a test report template.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 664
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Setting parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:DEL 'myTemplate'
Deletes a test report template.
Usage: Setting only
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD <Template>
This command loads a test report template.
Setting parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:LOAD 'myTemplate'
Loads a test report template.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Template management" on page 329
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE <Template>
This command saves a test report template in XML format.
Setting parameters:
<Template> String containing the name of the template. The .xml file exten-
sion is added automatically.
Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:SAVE 'myTemplate'
Saves a test report template.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Template management" on page 329
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW
This command creates a new dataset for a new test report.
Creating a new test report deletes all previously saved datasets. The current measure-
ment results are added as the first dataset to the new report.
The R&S ESW saves the data selected with HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect
on page 661.
To save the report, use HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 650.
Example: HCOP:TREP:NEW
Creates a dataset for a new test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and removing datasets" on page 330
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 665
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes page number from the test report.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: HCOP:TREP:PAG:STAT OFF
Removes page numbers from the test report.
Manual operation: See "General properties of the test report document"
on page 326
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize <Size>
This command selects the size of the test report document.
Parameters:
<Size> A4 | US
A4
Document pages have an A4 size.
US
Document pages have a US letter size.
*RST: A4
Example: HCOP:TREP:PAG A4
Selects the A4 size for the document.
Manual operation: See "General properties of the test report document"
on page 326
HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors:STATe <State>
This command turns the use of printer friendly colors on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "General properties of the test report document"
on page 326
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 666
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes date and time from the test report.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: HCOP:TREP:TDST OFF
Does not show any time or date information in the test report.
Manual operation: See "General properties of the test report document"
on page 326
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove <Dataset>
This command deletes one of the datasets that are currently part of a test report.
Note that the command only deletes datasets as a whole (= complete chapters). Delet-
ing individual items of a dataset is not possible.
Set # 1
Set # 2
Subset
Subset
Set # 1 = Number of the dataset would be "1".
Set # 2 = Number of the dataset would be "2".
Subset = Cannot be removed.
Setting parameters:
<Dataset> Index number of the dataset as shown in the "Test Report Con-
tent Selection" dialog box.
If the index number is greater than the number of available data-
sets, the command returns an error.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM 2
Deletes the second dataset from the current test report.
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 667
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
Manual operation: See "Adding and removing datasets" on page 330
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL
This command removes all existing datasets from the test report.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM:ALL
Deletes all datasets that are currently in the test report.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adding and removing datasets" on page 330
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe <Title>
This command defines the title for the test report as shown on its title page.
Parameters:
<Title> String containing the title.
Example: HCOP:TREP:TITL 'My first test report'
Defines a title for a test report.
Manual operation: See "Contents of the title page" on page 328
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes the title page from the test report.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: HCOP:TREP:TITL:STAT OFF
Removes the title page from the test report.
Manual operation: See "Contents of the title page" on page 328
MMEMory:RAW <Path>
Defines the location where the measurement data sets for the report are stored until
the report is created.
Parameters:
<Path> String containing the path of the preliminary data
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 668
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
14.8.7 Measurement result export
Commands to export measurement results described elsewhere.
● FORMat[:DATA] on page 631
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam........................................................................................669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram............................................................................... 669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.........................................................................................669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam <FileName>
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram <FileName>
This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file.
The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer. The data corresponding
to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that
frame was recorded.
Note that, depending on the size of the history buffer, the process of exporting the data
can take a while.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:STOR:SGR 'Spectrogram'
Copies the spectrogram data to a file.
Manual operation: See "Export Trace to ASCII File" on page 235
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName>
This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file.
For details on the file format, see Chapter 10.3.8.1, "Reference: ASCII file export for-
mat", on page 248.
Secure User Mode
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 669
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 36.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<Trace> Number of the trace to be stored
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:STOR1:TRAC 1,'C:\TEST.ASC'
Stores trace 1 from window 1 in the file TEST.ASC.
Manual operation: See "Export Trace to ASCII File" on page 235
14.8.8 Examples: managing data
● Storing data...........................................................................................................670
● Loading data......................................................................................................... 671
● Storing instrument settings....................................................................................671
● Loading instrument settings.................................................................................. 671
● Printing to a file..................................................................................................... 672
● Printing on a printer...............................................................................................672
14.8.8.1 Storing data
MMEM:MSIS 'C:'
//Selects drive C: as the default storage device.
//-----Connecting a network drive--------
MMEM:NETW:USED?
//Returns a list of all drives in use in the network.
MMEM:NETW:UNUS?
//Returns a list of free drive names in the network.
MMEM:NETW:MAP 'Q:','Server\ACLRTest'
//Maps drive Q: to the directory 'Server\ACLRTest'
//-----Saving data on the instrument-----
MMEM:MDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'
//Creates a directory called 'Results' on drive C:
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt'
//Defines a file called 'Test001.txt'
MMEM:COMM 'ACLR test results'
//Creates a comment for the settings to be displayed in gui.
MMEM:DATA 'Test001.txt',#212FileContents
//Creates the file 'Test001.txt'and writes 12 characters to it
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 670
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
//-----Copying the data to another location---
MMEM:COPY 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt','Q:'
//Copies the specified file to network drive Q:.
MMEM:DEL 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.txt'
//Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk.
//or
//MMEM:MOVE 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\Test001.xml','Q:\TestResults.txt'//
//Moves the file 'Test001.txt' to drive Q:, renames it to 'Testresults.txt'
//and removes it from the instrument hard disk.
MMEM:RDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'
//Deletes the directory called 'Results' from drive C:, unless it still
//contains any content.
//-----Disconnecting the network drive---
MMEM:NETW:DISC 'Q:'
//Disconnect drive Q:.
14.8.8.2 Loading data
MMEM:CDIR?
//Returns the path of the current directory.
//e.g.
C:\R_S\Instr\user\
MMEM:CDIR 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'
//Changes the current directory.
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results\*.xml'
//or
MMEM:CAT? '*.xml'
//Returns a list of all xml files in the directory 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'.
MMEM:CAT:LONG? '*.xml'
//Returns additional information about the xml files in the directory
// 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Results'.
14.8.8.3 Storing instrument settings
In this example we will store the instrument settings for the "Spectrum" channel.
INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM'
//Selects measurement channel 'SPECTRUM'.
MEMM:STOR:TYPE CHAN
//Specifies that channel-specific data is to be stored.
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum'
//Stores the channel settings from the 'Spectrum' channel
// to the file 'Spectrum.dfl'.
14.8.8.4 Loading instrument settings
In this example we will load the hardware settings from the configuration file
Spectrum.dfl to a new "Spectrum2" channel.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 671
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Data management
MEMM:LOAD:TYPE NEW
//Specifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing
//'Spectrum' channel.
MMEM:SEL:CHAN:HWS ON
//Selects only hardware settings to be loaded.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum'
//Loads the channel-specific settings from the file 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Spectrum.dfl'
//to a new channel. The new channel is named 'Spectrum2' to avoid a naming conflict
//with the existing 'Spectrum' channel.
INST:REN 'Spectrum2','Spectrum3'
//Renames the loaded channel to 'Spectrum3'.
14.8.8.5 Printing to a file
//Select bmp as the file format.
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
//Select the file name for the printout.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Screenshot.bmp'
//Select all screen elements for printing
HCOP:ITEM:ALL
//Add a comment to the printout.
HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'ACLRResults'
//Store the printout in a file called 'Screenshot.bmp'.
HCOP
//Store another printout in a file called 'Screenshot_001.bmp'.
HCOP:NEXT
14.8.8.6 Printing on a printer
HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
//Prints the data on a printer.
SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?
SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM?
//Returns the available printers, e.g.
//'LASER on LPT1'
//''
//Means that one printer is available.
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1'
//Selects the printer for the print job on device 2.
HCOP:PAGE:ORI2 LAND
//Selects the landscape format for the printout.
HCOP:TDST:STAT2 ON
//Includes date and time on the printout.
HCOP:ITEM:ALL
//Prints all screen elements
HCOP
//Initiates the printout.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 672
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9 General instrument setup
● Basic instrument setup..........................................................................................673
● Reference frequency configuration....................................................................... 675
● Calibration and temperature check....................................................................... 678
● Signal path check..................................................................................................684
● Transducers.......................................................................................................... 686
● Display layout and elements................................................................................. 698
● Measurement channel synchronization.................................................................705
● Network and remote control configuration............................................................ 718
● Configuring HUMS................................................................................................ 725
● System configuration check.................................................................................. 731
● Service functions...................................................................................................737
14.9.1 Basic instrument setup
SYSTem:CLOGging....................................................................................................... 673
SYSTem:REBoot............................................................................................................673
SYSTem:SHUTdown...................................................................................................... 673
SYSTem:DATE.............................................................................................................. 674
SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................... 674
SYSTem:CLOGging <State>
This command turns logging of remote commands on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
ON | 1
Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file.
The destination is C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\
ScpiLog.<no.>.
where <no.> is a sequential number
A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is
restarted.
OFF | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "I/O Logging" on page 421
SYSTem:REBoot
This command reboots the instrument, including the operating system.
SYSTem:SHUTdown [<Unit>]
Performs a shutdown or restart of the FW or OS.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 673
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
If the optional parameter <Unit> is omitted, Windows is shutdown afer a time-out
period of 10 seconds.
Setting parameters:
<Unit> HALT | REBoot | ABORt | CLOSe | RESTart
HALT
Windows is shutdown afer a time-out period of 20 seconds
REBoot
Windows is restarted afer a time-out period of 20 seconds
ABORt
Abort a Windows shutdown/restart. This can only be used during
the time-out period.
CLOSe
Close the firmware.
RESTart
Restart the firmware.
Example: SYST:SHUT
Switch the analyzer to standby state.
Usage: Setting only
SYSTem:DATE <Year>, <Month>, <Day>
Configures the date on the instrument.
Parameters:
<Year>
<Month>
<Day>
Example: SYST:DATE 2020,04,23
Manual operation: See "Set Date and Time" on page 339
SYSTem:TIME <Year>, <Month>, <Day>
Configures the time on the internal real-time clock on the instrument.
Parameters:
<Hour> Range: 0 to 23
<Minutes> Range: 0 to 59
<Seconds> Range: 0 to 59
Example: SYST:TIME 10,52,33
Manual operation: See "Set Date and Time" on page 339
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 674
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9.2 Reference frequency configuration
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth.........................................................................................675
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640............................................................................................. 675
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.........................................676
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc.......................................................................................... 676
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce........................................................................................ 676
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?........................................................................... 677
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge.........................................................................................677
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FALLback........................................................................ 678
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth <Bandwidth>
Defines the loop bandwidth, that is, the speed of internal synchronization with the refer-
ence frequency. The setting requires a compromise between performance and increas-
ing phase noise.
For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range (+/- 0.5 ppm),
the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0.1 Hz and cannot be changed.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 0.1 Hz | 1 Hz | 3 Hz | 10 Hz | 30 Hz | 100 Hz | 300 Hz
The possible values depend on the reference source and tuning
range (see Table 12-2).
Default unit: Hz
Example: ROSC:LBW 3
Manual operation: See "Loop Bandwidth" on page 370
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640 <State>
This command turns the output of a reference signal on the corresponding connector
("Ref Output") on and off.
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O100: Provides a 100 MHz reference signal on correspond-
ing connector.
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640: Provides a 640 MHz reference signal on correspond-
ing connector.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
OFF | 0
Switches the reference off.
ON | 1
Switches the reference on
Example: //Output reference signal of 100 MHz.
ROSC:O100 ON
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Output" on page 370
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 675
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix: .
<si> 1..n
<ext> 1..n
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 1 MHz to 20 MHz
Default unit: HZ
Example: ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13MHZ
Sets the frequency to 13 MHz.
SOUR:EXT:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13MHZ
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Input" on page 368
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc <State>
If enabled, a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT"
connector.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: ROSC:OSYN ON
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Output" on page 370
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the reference oscillator.
If you want to select the external reference, it must be connected to the R&S ESW.
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
The internal reference is used (10 MHz).
EXTernal | EXTernal1 | EXT1
The external reference from the "REF INPUT 10 MHZ" connec-
tor is used; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the
status bar.
E10
The external reference from "REF INPUT 1..20 MHZ" connector
is used with a fixed 10 MHZ frequency; if none is available, an
error flag is displayed in the status bar
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 676
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
E100
The external reference from the "REF INPUT 100 MHZ" connec-
tor is used with a fixed 100 MHZ frequency; if none is available,
an error flag is displayed in the status bar.
EAUTo
The external reference is used as long as it is available, then the
instrument switches to the internal reference.
SYNC
The external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag
is displayed in the status bar.
Example: ROSC:SOUR EXT
Manual operation: See "Reference Frequency Input" on page 368
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?
This command queries the current reference type in case you have activated an auto-
matic switch to the internal reference if the external reference is missing.
Return values:
<Reference> INT | EXT
INT
internal reference
EXT
external reference
Example: SENS:ROSC:SOUR:EAUT?
Queries the currently available reference type.
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge <Range>
Defines the tuning range. The tuning range is only available for the variable external
reference frequency. It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined
level in parts per million (10-6).
Parameters:
<Range> WIDE | SMALl
The possible values depend on the reference source (see
Table 12-2).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 677
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
SMALl
With this smaller deviation (+/- 0.5 ppm) a very narrow fixed loop
bandwidth of 0.1 Hz is realized. With this setting the instrument
can synchronize to an external reference signal with a very pre-
cise frequency. Due to the very narrow loop bandwidth, unwan-
ted noise or spurious components on the external reference
input signal are strongly attenuated. Furthermore, the loop
requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state. During this
locking process, "NO REF" is displayed in the status bar.
WIDE
The larger deviation (+/- 6 ppm) allows the instrument to syn-
chronize to less precise external reference input signals.
Example: ROSC:TRAN WIDE
Manual operation: See "Tuning Range" on page 370
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FALLback <State>
Defines how the instrument reacts if an external reference is selected but none is avail-
able.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
If no valid external reference signal is available, the error mes-
sage "External reference missing" is displayed. Additionally, the
flag "NO REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization
was performed for the last measurement.
ON | 1
If no external reference is available, the instrument automatically
switches back to the internal reference. Note that you must re-
activate the external reference if it becomes available again at a
later time.
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Behavior in case of missing external reference"
on page 369
14.9.3 Calibration and temperature check
CALibration[:ALL]?......................................................................................................... 679
CALibration:RESult?.......................................................................................................679
CALibration:DUE:WARMup............................................................................................. 680
CALibration:DUE:SCHedule............................................................................................ 680
CALibration:DUE:DAYS.................................................................................................. 681
CALibration:DUE:TIME................................................................................................... 682
CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown.......................................................................................... 682
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance]...................................................................... 682
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 678
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency............................................................ 683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum]......................................................................683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect]................................................................................ 683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:SYNThtwo[:FREQuency]........................................................ 683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?............................................................................... 684
SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend.............................................................................684
CALibration[:ALL]?
This command initiates a calibration (self-alignment) routine and queries if calibration
was successful.
During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote
control commands.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed, the MAV bit
in the status byte can be used. If the associated bit is set in the Service Request
Enable (SRE) register, the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition
of correction data has been completed.
Return values:
<CalibrationFailed> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Calibration was successful.
ON | 1
Calibration was not successful.
Example: *CLS
Resets the status management.
*SRE 16
Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable register.
*CAL?
Starts the correction data recording, and then a service request
is generated.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Start Self Alignment" on page 335
CALibration:RESult?
This command returns the results collected during calibration.
Return values:
<CalibrationData> String containing the calibration data.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 679
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: CAL:RES?
would return, e.g.
[...]
Total Calibration Status:
PASSED, Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 12/07/2004,
Time: 16:24:54,Runtime: 00.06
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Alignment Results:" on page 337
CALibration:DUE:WARMup <State>
If enabled, self-alignment is started automatically after the warmup operation has com-
pleted.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Sunday at 2 AM after a
warmup period, then shut down instrument.
CAL:DUE:WARM
CAL:DUE:SCH ON
CAL:DUE:DAYS SUND
CAL:DUE:TIME '2:00'
CAL:DUE:SHUT
Manual operation: See "Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment"
on page 336
CALibration:DUE:SCHedule <State>
If enabled, a self-alignment is performed regularly at specific days and time. Specify
the date and time using the CALibration:DUE:DAYS and CALibration:DUE:
TIME commands.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 680
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Sunday at 2 AM after a
warmup period, then shut down instrument.
CAL:DUE:WARM
CAL:DUE:SCH ON
CAL:DUE:DAYS SUND
CAL:DUE:TIME '2:00'
CAL:DUE:SHUT
Manual operation: See "Schedule" on page 336
CALibration:DUE:DAYS <Day1>[, <Day2>, <Day3>, <Day4>, <Day5>, <Day6>,
<Day7>]
Defines the days on which a self-alignment is scheduled for CALibration:DUE:
SCHedule ON. Up to 7 different days can be scheduled.
Parameters:
<Day1> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day2> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day3> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day4> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day5> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day6> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
<Day7> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday |
FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Monday and Friday
CAL:DUE:DAYS MOND,FRID
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Sunday at 2 AM after a
warmup period, then shut down instrument.
CAL:DUE:WARM
CAL:DUE:SCH ON
CAL:DUE:DAYS SUND
CAL:DUE:TIME '2:00'
CAL:DUE:SHUT
Manual operation: See "Schedule" on page 336
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 681
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
CALibration:DUE:TIME <Time>
Defines the time at which a self-alignment is scheduled for the days specified by
CALibration:DUE:DAYS, if CALibration:DUE:SCHedule ON.
Parameters:
<Time> string with format 'hh:mm' (24 hours)
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Sunday at 2 AM after a
warmup period, then shut down instrument.
CAL:DUE:WARM
CAL:DUE:SCH ON
CAL:DUE:DAYS SUND
CAL:DUE:TIME '2:00'
CAL:DUE:SHUT
Manual operation: See "Schedule" on page 336
CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown <State>
If activated, the R&S ESW is automatically shut down after self-alignment is comple-
ted. Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: //Schedule a self-alignment every Sunday at 2 AM after a
warmup period, then shut down instrument.
CAL:DUE:WARM
CAL:DUE:SCH ON
CAL:DUE:DAYS SUND
CAL:DUE:TIME '2:00'
CAL:DUE:SHUT
Manual operation: See "Shut down Device after Self Alignment" on page 336
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance] <Bandwidth>
This command selects the distance of the peaks of the microwave calibration signal for
calibration of the YIG filter.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> WIDE | SMALl
SMALl
Small offset of combline frequencies.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 682
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
WIDE
Wide offset of combline frequencies.
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 683.
Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency RF" on page 382
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] <Bandwidth>
This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> NARRowband | BROadband
NARRowband
Narrowband signal for power calibration of the frontend.
BROadband
Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter.
Manual operation: See "Spectrum" on page 383
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] <Signal>
This command activates or deactivates the use of an internal calibration signal as input
for the R&S ESW.
Parameters:
<Signal> CALibration
Uses the calibration signal as RF input.
MCALibration
Uses the calibration signal for the microwave range as RF input.
RF
Uses the signal from the RF input.
*RST: RF
Example: //Select calibration signal source
DIAG:SERV:INP RF
Manual operation: See "NONE" on page 382
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:SYNThtwo[:FREQuency] <Frequency>
This command selects the frequency which the synthesizers are calibrated for.
The command is available when you select the synthesizer as the calibration source
with DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 683.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 683
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<Frequency> Default unit: Hz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:SEL SYNT
DIAG:SERV:INP:SYNT 10MHZ
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
This command queries the self-test results.
Return values:
<Results> String of data containing the results.
The rows of the self-test result table are separated by commas.
Example: DIAG:SERV:STES:RES?
would return, e.g.
"Total Selftest Status:
PASSED", "Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/2004 TIME:
16:24:54", "Runtime: 00:06", "...
Usage: Query only
SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend
This command queries the current frontend temperature of the R&S ESW.
During self-alignment, the instrument's (frontend) temperature is also measured (as
soon as the instrument has warmed up completely). This temperature is used as a ref-
erence for a continuous temperature check during operation. If the current temperature
deviates from the stored self-alignment temperature by a certain degree, a warning is
displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power lev-
els. A status bit in the STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register indicates a
possible deviation.
Suffix: .
<si> irrelevant
Return values:
<Temperature> Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Example: SOUR:TEMP:FRON?
Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor.
14.9.4 Signal path check
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:EXECute?....................................................................... 684
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:RESult?.......................................................................... 685
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:EXECute?
This command initiates a signal path check during which the R&S ESW checks if the
signal path components operate within their specified limits.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 684
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
When the signal path check is done, the command returns if the check has passed or
not.
Return values:
<Result> (To query detailed information about the signal path self test, use
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:RESult?.)
0
Signal path check has passed.
1
Signal path check has failed.
Example: DIAG:SERV:SPCH:EXEC?
Initiates the signal path check and would return, e.g.
0
Usage: Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:RESult?
This command queries detailed information about the signal path check.
Return values:
<Result> Results of the signal path check as displayed in the "Signal Path
Check" dialog box.
Example: DIAG:SERV:SPCH:RES?
would return, e.g.
"Signal path check state: PASSED","FW-Version:
1.81","Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 15/09/2021 Time:
09:25:04","Runtime: 00:09 ","CPU-Temp.: 53
","Signal Path Check","-----------------","
state","","Test HP Filter / Preamp 0dB
PASSED","Test HP Filter / Preamp 10dB
PASSED","Test HP Filter / Preamp 20dB
PASSED","Test HP Filter / Preamp 30dB
PASSED","","Test LP Filter / Preamp 0dB
PASSED","Test LP Filter / Preamp 10dB
PASSED","Test LP Filter / Preamp 20dB
PASSED","Test LP Filter / Preamp 30dB
PASSED","","Test BP Filter / Preamp 0dB
PASSED","Test BP Filter / Preamp 10dB
PASSED","Test BP Filter / Preamp 20dB
PASSED","Test BP Filter / Preamp 30dB
PASSED","","Test HpLp Attenuator
PASSED","","Test RF Attenuator
PASSED","","Signal Path Check Finalization ","
state"," PASSED",""," ",""
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 685
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9.5 Transducers
Before making any changes to a transducer factor or set, you have to select one by
name with [SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Compared to manual configuration of transducers, any changes made to a transducer
factor or set via remote control are saved after the corresponding command has been
sent.
Designing a transducer factor
//Select a transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:SEL 'Transducer1'
//Define a comment for the transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:COMM 'Correction values for device x'
//Define the transducer factor unit
CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'
//Select the scale of the frequency axis
CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG
//Define the data points of the transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:DATA 1MHZ,-10,10MHZ,-10,100MHZ,-15,1GHZ,-15
//Turn on the transducer
CORR:TRAN ON
//Automatically adjust the reference level
CORR:TRAN:ADJ:RLEV ON
Managing a transducer set
//Select or create a transducer set
CORR:TSET:SEL 'Transducer Set'
//Define a comment for the transducer set
CORR:TSET:COMM 'Transducer set example'
//Define a unit for the transducer set
CORR:TSET:UNIT 'DB'
//Turn the transducer break on
CORR:TSET:BRE ON
//Define the first transducer range
CORR:TSET:RANG1 150KHZ,1MHZ,'Transducer 1','Transducer 3'
CORR:TSET:RANG2 1MHZ,10MHZ,'Transducer 3','Transducer 4'
CORR:TSET:RANG3 10MHZ,30MHZ,'Transducer 3'
//Turn on the transducer set
CORR:TSET ON
Commands to configure transducers described elsewhere.
● MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 640
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor......................................................................................... 687
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor....................................................................................... 687
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:ADDRess..........................................................................688
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:COMMent......................................................................... 688
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 686
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault[:COMMand]..........................................................688
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault:EXECute..............................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DELete............................................................................. 689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:INPut................................................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:LOAD............................................................................... 689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:NAME.............................................................................. 690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:OPC.................................................................................690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>[:COMMand].............................................. 690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>:EXECute.................................................. 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SCPI................................................................................ 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect............................................................................. 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:STORe............................................................................. 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:WAIT................................................................................692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>:ACTive?..................................................... 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive...................................................................... 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe].............................................. 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?...................................................................692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent..................................................................693
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA........................................................................ 693
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete......................................................................694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing....................................................................694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect...................................................................... 694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>[:STATe].......................................................694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe]..................................................................... 694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT.........................................................................695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak................................................................................. 695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog............................................................................... 695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent............................................................................ 696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete................................................................................ 696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range>....................................................................696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect.................................................................................697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT................................................................................... 697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:INPut<rf>[:STATe]................................................................. 697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe]................................................................................697
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor <FileName>
Loads the transducer factor from the selected file in .CSV format.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the CSV import file.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:TFAC 'C:\TEST.CSV'
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor <FileName>, <TransdName>
This command exports transducer factor data to an ASCII (CSV) file.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 687
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
For details on the file format see Chapter 12.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor file for-
mat", on page 363.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> Name of the transducer factor to be exported.
<TransdName> Name of the transducer factor to be exported.
Example: MMEM:STOR:TFAC 'C:\TEST', 'Transducer1'
Stores the transducer factor named "Transducer1" in the file
TEST.CSV.
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:ADDRess <NetworkAddress>
This command defines the network address of the switch matrix.
Parameters:
<NetworkAddress> String containing the network address of the switch matrix.
Make sure to add the type of network protocol to the string.
Example: CORR:SWIT:ADDR 'TCPIP::192.0.2.0::INSTR'
CORR:SWIT:ADDR 'TCPIP::192.0.2.0::HISLIP'
CORR:SWIT:ADDR 'GPIB::20::INSTR'
Connects to a device with the corresponding network addresses.
Manual operation: See "Connection between R&S ESW to the RF switch"
on page 361
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a dataset that controls a switch matrix.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
Example: CORR:SWIT:COMM 'This is a comment.'
Defines a comment.
Manual operation: See "Dataset name and file name" on page 360
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault[:COMMand] <Command>
This command defines a remote command that is sent to the switch matrix before all
other commands.
This is useful, for example, to configure the switch matrix into a predefined state.
Parameters:
<Command> String containing the command.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 688
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: CORR:SWIT:DEF 'SYST:PRES'
Presets the switch matrix to its default state before the actual
measurement starts.
Manual operation: See "RF switch control" on page 361
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault:EXECute
This command deliberately sends the command defined by [SENSe:]CORRection:
SWITch:DEFault[:COMMand] to the switch matrix.
Example: CORR:SWIT:DEF 'SYST:PRES'
CORR:SWIT:DEF:EXEC
Sends SYSTem:PRESet to the switch matrix and restores its
default configuration.
Manual operation: See "RF switch control" on page 361
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DELete
This command deletes a dataset that controls a switch matrix.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name and path.
Example: CORR:SWIT:DEL 'aSwitchProgram'
Deletes the dataset called "aSwitchProgram.xml".
Usage: Event
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:INPut <Input>
This command selects the RF input of the R&S ESW used for the measurement with
the switch matrix.
Parameters:
<Input> INP1
Selects RF input 1.
INP1
Selects RF input 2.
OFF
No input is used.
Example: CORR:SWIT:INP INP1
Measurement takes place on RF input 1.
Manual operation: See "RF input selection" on page 361
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:LOAD <FileName>
This command restores a previously saved dataset that controls a switch matrix.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 689
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Setting parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name and path.
Example: CORR:SWIT:LOAD 'X:\Dataset.xml'
Restore a dataset on drive X:\.
Usage: Setting only
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:NAME <Name>
This command defines a name for a dataset that controls a switch matrix.
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the dataset.
The dataset name is not necessarily the file name (if you save
the dataset).
Example: CORR:SWIT:NAME 'SWITCH'
Defines a dataset name.
Manual operation: See "Dataset name and file name" on page 360
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:OPC <State>
This command turns synchronization (with *OPC) for commands transmitted in each
transducer range on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CORR:SWIT:OPC ON
Synchronizes the commands in each transducer range.
Manual operation: See "Command sequence synchronization" on page 362
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>[:COMMand] <Commands>
This command defines commands to be sent to the switch matrix in a certain trans-
ducer range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the transducer range.
Parameters:
<Commands> String of remote commands.
If you send more than one command, separate them with a sem-
icolon.
For a comprehensive description of commands supported by the
switch matrix, refer to its documentation.
Example: CORR:SWIT:RANG4 'ROUT:CLOS (@F01A11(0101))'
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 690
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>:EXECute
This command deliberately sends the commands defined for a certain transducer
range to the switch matrix.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the transducer range.
Example: CORR:SWIT:RANG4:EXEC
Sends the commands defined for transducer range 4.
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SCPI <State>
This command turns the use of remote commands that comply to the SCPI standard
on and off.
Required for switch matrixes that support a command set that does not comply to the
SCPI standard.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CORR:SWIT:SCPI ON
Command syntax has to comply to the SCPI standard.
Manual operation: See "RF switch control" on page 361
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect <FileName>
This command selects a dataset that controls a switch matrix.
Note that you have to select a dataset before you can edit it.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name and path.
Example: CORR:SWIT:SEL 'dataset'
Selects a dataset called "dataset".
Manual operation: See "Dataset name and file name" on page 360
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:STORe <FileName>
This command defines the file name of a dataset that controls a switch matrix.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name and path.
The file type is xml.
Example: CORR:SWIT:STOR 'NameOfTheFile'
Saves the dataset in the file "NameOfTheFile.xml".
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 691
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Manual operation: See "Dataset name and file name" on page 360
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:WAIT <Delay>
This command defines a delay time.
The delay time is the time the R&S ESW waits until it sends the first command used in
the subsequent transducer range.
Parameters:
<Delay> <numeric value>
*RST: 100 ms
Default unit: s
Example: CORR:SWIT:WAIT?
would return, e.g.:
0.01
Manual operation: See "Delay time" on page 362
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>:ACTive?
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive
This command queries the currently active transducer factor.
Return values:
<TransducerFactor> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
If no transducer factor is active, the string is empty.
Example: CORR:TRAN:ACT?
Queries the active transducer factor.
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] <State>
This command turns an automatic adjustment of the reference level to the transducer
on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?
This command queries all transducer factors stored on the R&S ESW.
After general data for the transducer storage directory, data for the individual files is lis-
ted.
The result is a comma-separated list of values with the following syntax:
<UsedMem>,<FreeMem>,<FileSize>,<FileName>[,<FileSize>,<FileName>]
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 692
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
More information
Return values:
<UsedDiskSpace> numeric value in bytes
Amount of storage space required by all transducers files in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\
trd directory (= sum of all individual <FileSize> values)
<FreeDiskSpace> numeric value in bytes
Amount of free storage space on the R&S ESW
<FileSize> numeric value in bytes
Size of a single transducer file
<FileName> string
Name of a single transducer file
Example: SENSE:CORR:TRAN:CAT?
//Result: 2743,2312620544,720,'FactorGSM.TDF',2023,'FactorBTS.TDF'
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters:
<Comment> *RST: (empty comment)
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA {<Frequency>, <Level>}...
This command configures transducer factors for specific trace points. A set of trans-
ducer factors defines an interpolated transducer line and can be stored on the instru-
ment. You can define up to 1001 points.
More information
Parameters:
<Frequency> The unit for <Frequency> is Hz, which may or may not be omit-
ted. Frequencies have to be sorted in ascending order.
Default unit: Hz
<Level> The unit for <Level> depends on [SENSe:]CORRection:
TRANsducer:UNIT.
Example: SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT 'DB'
// Frequency Span 0 Hz to 4 Ghz
SENSe1:CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA 0,8,2GHz,5,4GHz,3
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 693
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Table 14-15: Created transducer points in example
Frequency Level
0 Hz 8 dB
2 GHz 5 dB
4 GHz 3 dB
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes the currently selected transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer.
Example: CORR:TRAN:DEL
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing <ScalingType>
This command selects the frequency scaling of the transducer factor.
Parameters:
<ScalingType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LINear
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <Name>
This command selects a transducer factor.
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESW creates a trans-
ducer factor by that name.
Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'FACTOR1'
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>[:STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer.
To assign the transducer to one RF input only, add the INPut<rf> syntax element
and use the suffix <rf> to select the RF input:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>[:STATe]
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 694
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: Turn on transducer for Input1:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut1:STATe ON
Turn on transducer for Input1 and Input2:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:STATe ON
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of the transducer factor.
Before you can use the command, you have to select and turn on a transducer.
Parameters:
<Unit> string as defined in table below
*RST: DB
Example: CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DBUV'
String Unit
'DB' dB
'DBM' dBm
'DBMV' dBmV
'DBUV' dBμV
'DBUV/M' dBμV/m
'DBUA' dBμA
'DBUA/M' dBμA/m
'DBPW' dBpW
'DBPT' dBpT
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak <State>
This command turns a transducer break on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog
This command queries all transducer sets stored on the R&S ESW.
Return values:
<UsedDiskSpace> Size of all available files containing transducer factors in byte.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 695
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
<FreeDiskSpace> Remaining disk space in bytes.
<FileInfo> String containing the file information.
'<NameFileN>,<SizeFileN>'
<NameFileN>
Name of the file.
<SizeFileN>
Size of the file in bytes.
Example: CORR:TSET:CAT?
would return, e.g.
3298,34482896896,'SET1,1520','SET2,1756'
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a transducer set.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete
This command deletes a transducer set.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Example: CORR:TSET:SEL 'Transducer Set'
CORR:TSET:DEL
Deletes the transducer set.
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range> <Frequency>, <Frequency>,
<FileName>...
This command selects a set of transducer factors used for a particular frequency
range.
Ranges 1 to 10 must be sent in ascending order.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...10
Selects the range.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the start frequency of the frequency range.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 696
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
<Frequency> Defines the stop frequency of the frequency range.
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
Note that you can assign up to eight transducer factors to a par-
ticular frequency range. In that case, add additional strings con-
taining the file name after the first one separated by comma.
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <FileName>
This command creates or selects a transducer set.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer set.
If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESW creates a trans-
ducer set by that name.
Example: CORR:TSET:SEL 'TSET1'
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of a transducer set.
Note that the unit of all transducer factors in a transducer set must be the same or in
relative terms (dB).
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<Unit> String containing one of the following units:
DB | DBM | DBUV | DBUV_M | DBUA | DBUA_M | DBPW |
DBPT
*RST: DB
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:INPut<rf>[:STATe] <State>
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a transducer set on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe:
]CORRection:TSET:SELect.
To assign the transducer set to one RF input only, add the INPut<rf> syntax element
and use the suffix <rf> to select the RF input:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:INPut<rf>[:STATe]
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 697
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: Turn on transducer set for Input1:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:INPut1:STATe ON
Turn on transducer set for Input1 and Input2:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:STATe ON
Example: See Chapter 14.9.5, "Transducers", on page 686 .
14.9.6 Display layout and elements
● Screen element selection......................................................................................698
● Colors and schemes............................................................................................. 702
● CMAP suffix assignment....................................................................................... 704
14.9.6.1 Screen element selection
Commands to configure screen elements described elsewhere.
● DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle on page 593
● DISPlay:FORMat on page 563
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR............................................................................................. 698
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency.....................................................................................698
DISPlay:ITERm[:STATe]..................................................................................................699
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe]...................................................................................................699
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe]................................................................................................. 699
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe]................................................................................................... 699
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe]....................................................................................... 700
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME...........................................................................................700
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat..............................................................................700
INPut:TERMinator.......................................................................................................... 701
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe]................................................................................... 701
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR <State>
This command hides or displays the channel bar information.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:ANN:CBAR OFF
Manual operation: See "Channel Bar" on page 341
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
This command turns the label of the x-axis on and off.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 698
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF
Manual operation: See "Diagram Footer (Annotation)" on page 341
DISPlay:ITERm[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the display of the "Disconnect RF" icon on the toolbar on and off.
Note: This setting is maintained even after using the [PRESET] function.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:ITER ON
Displays the icon in the toolbar.
Manual operation: See "Disconnect RF" on page 344
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the status bar on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:SBAR:OFF
Manual operation: See "Status Bar" on page 341
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the softkey bar on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:SKEY:OFF
Manual operation: See "Softkey Bar" on page 341
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the toolbar on or off.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 699
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: DISP:TBAR ON
Manual operation: See "Toolbar" on page 341
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe] <State>
This command controls the touch screen functionality.
Parameters:
<State> ON | FRAMe | OFF | TCOFf
ON | 1
Touch screen is active for entire screen
OFF | 0
Touch screen is inactive for entire screen
FRAMe
Touch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen,
but active for softkeys, toolbars and menus.
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:TOUC:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen" on page 339
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME <State>
This command adds or removes the date and time from the display.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Manual operation: See "Date and Time" on page 341
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat <Format>
This command selects the time and date format.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> US | DE | ISO
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 700
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
DE
dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
US
mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss
12 hour format.
ISO
yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
*RST: ISO
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Switches the screen display of date and time on.
DISP:TIME:FORM US
Switches the date and time format to US.
Manual operation: See "Date and Time Format" on page 340
INPut:TERMinator <State>
This command turns the RF input on and off.
Note that the command works regardless of the state of DISPlay:ITERm[:STATe].
Only for usage via the user interface is it necessary to turn on the display of the toolbar
icon.
Note: This setting is maintained even after using the [PRESET] function.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON | 1
Cuts off the RF input.
OFF | 0
Turns on the RF input.
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:TERM ON
Manual operation: See "Disconnect RF" on page 344
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] <State>
This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote
desktop.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Front Panel" on page 342
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 701
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9.6.2 Colors and schemes
Commands to select colors and schemes described elsewhere.
● HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 645
● HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL on page 646
● HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 646
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>...................................................................................... 702
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL..................................................................................................702
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined......................................................................................... 703
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?.............................................................................................. 703
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect................................................................................................. 703
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>
This command selects the color scheme for the display. The query returns the default
color scheme.
Suffix: .
<it> Irrelevant.
<ci> 1
Default color set 1 with a black background and white grid.
2
Default color set 2 with a white background and a black grid.
3
User-defined colors.
Suffix irrelevant for query
Return values:
<DefScheme> 1|2|3
The default color scheme used for the screen, as specified by
the <ci> suffix.
Example: DISP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects default setting 2 (white background and a black grid) for
screen colors.
DISP:CMAP:DEF?
//Result: 2
Manual operation: See "Screen Colors" on page 345
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL <hue>, <sat>, <lum>
This command selects the color for various screen elements in the display.
Suffix: .
<it> 1..n
Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined.
For more information see Chapter 14.9.6.3, "CMAP suffix
assignment", on page 704.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 702
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<hue> tint
Range: 0 to 1
<sat> saturation
Range: 0 to 1
<lum> brightness
Range: 0 to 1
Example: DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color.
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined <Color>
This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements.
Suffix: .
<it> 1..n
Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined.
For more information see Chapter 14.9.6.3, "CMAP suffix
assignment", on page 704.
Parameters:
<Color> BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRay | LGRay | LBLue | LGReen | LCYan |
LRED | LMAGenta
Example: DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See "Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors" on page 348
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?
This command queries all available display themes.
Return values:
<Themes> String containing all available display themes.
Example: DISP:THEMe:CAT?
Usage: Query only
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect <Theme>
This command selects the display theme.
Parameters:
<Theme> String containing the name of the theme.
*RST: SPL
Example: DISP:THEM:SEL "BlueOcean"
Manual operation: See "Theme" on page 345
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 703
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9.6.3 CMAP suffix assignment
Several commands to change the color settings of individual items of the display or
printout are available. Which item is to be configured is defined using a <CMAP> suffix.
The following assignment applies:
Suffix Description
CMAP1 Background
CMAP2 Grid
CMAP3 *) Common Text
CMAP4 *) Check Status OK
CMAP5 *) Check Status Error
CMAP6 *) Text Special 1
CMAP7 *) Text Special 2
CMAP8 Trace 1
CMAP9 Trace 2
CMAP10 Trace 3
CMAP11 Marker Info Text
CMAP12 Limit Lines
CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check – "Pass"
CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check – "Fail"
CMAP15 *) Softkey Text
CMAP16 *) Softkey Background
CMAP17 *) Selected Field Text
CMAP18 *) Selected Field Background
CMAP19 *) Softkey 3D Bright Part
CMAP20 *) Softkey 3D Dark Part
CMAP21 *) Softkey State "On"
CMAP22 *) Softkey State "Dialog open"
CMAP23 *) Softkey Text Disabled
CMAP24 Logo
CMAP25 Trace 4
CMAP26 Grid – Minorlines
CMAP27 Marker
CMAP28 Display Lines
CMAP29 *) Sweepcount – Text
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 704
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Suffix Description
CMAP30 Limit and Margin Check – Text
CMAP31 Limit and Margin Check – \"Margin\"
CMAP32 *) Table Overall – Title Text
CMAP33 *) Table Overall – Title Background
CMAP34 *) Table Overall – Text
CMAP35 *) Table Overall – Background
CMAP36 *) Table Value – Title Text
CMAP37 *) Table Value – Title Background
CMAP38 *) Table Value – Text
CMAP39 *) Table Value – Background
CMAP40 Trace 5
CMAP41 Trace 6
*) these settings can only be defined via the theme (DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 703) and are thus
ignored in the SCPI command
14.9.7 Measurement channel synchronization
● General coupling manager....................................................................................705
● Custom coupling manager.................................................................................... 710
14.9.7.1 General coupling manager
Commands to configure parameter coupling described elsewhere.
● OUTPut<ou>:LINK on page 543
INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC............................................................................................ 706
INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen............................................................................................ 706
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth.......................................................................................... 706
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth.......................................................................................... 706
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer..........................................................................................707
INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod.......................................................................................... 707
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN............................................................................................. 707
INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes........................................................................................... 708
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit.............................................................................................. 708
INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer......................................................................................... 708
INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel..........................................................................................708
INSTrument:COUPle:PROT............................................................................................ 709
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN.............................................................................................709
INSTrument:COUPle:VBW..............................................................................................709
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 705
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC <State>
This command turns synchronization of the AC / DC Coupling state between measure-
ment channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:ACDC ALL
Synchronizes the "AC/DC Coupling" parameter.
INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen <State>
This command turns synchronization of the attenuation and unit between measure-
ment channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:ATT ALL
Synchronizes the attenuation.
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth <State>
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth <State>
This command turns synchronization of the resolution bandwidth (and filter type)
between measurement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns on synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:BWID ALL
Synchronizes the resolution bandwidth.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 706
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the frequency between measurement channels
on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:CENT ALL
Synchronizes the center frequency.
INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod <State>
This command turns synchronization of the audio demodulator configuration between
measurement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:DEM ALL
Synchronizes the audio demodulator configuration.
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preamplifier configuration between mea-
surement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:GAIN ALL
Synchronizes the preamplifier configuration.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 707
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes <State>
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit <State>
This command turns synchronization of limit results between measurement channels
on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
Limit lines have to be compatible to the x-axis and y-axis config-
uration for successful synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:LIM ALL
Synchronizes the limit values.
INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer <State>
This command turns synchronization of the marker frequency in the spectrum applica-
tion and the receiver frequency on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:MARK ALL
Synchronizes the receiver frequency and the marker frequency.
INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel <State>
This command turns synchronization of the preselector state between measurement
channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: ALL
Example: INST:COUP:PRES ALL
Synchronizes the preselector configuration.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 708
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
INSTrument:COUPle:PROT <State>
This command turns synchronization of the input protection between measurement
channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:PROT ALL
Synchronizes the "10 dB Min" parameter.
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN <State>
This command turns synchronization of the start and stop frequency between mea-
surement channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:SPAN ALL
Synchronizes the start and stop frequency.
INSTrument:COUPle:VBW <State>
This command turns synchronization of the video bandwidth between measurement
channels on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ALL | NONE
ALL
Turns on synchronization.
NONE
Turns off synchronization.
*RST: NONE
Example: INST:COUP:VBW ALL
Synchronizes the video bandwidth.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 709
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
14.9.7.2 Custom coupling manager
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>..................................................................................... 710
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?............................................................. 712
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST?............................................................. 712
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO............................................................................ 713
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW?...........................................................................713
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.............................................................715
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation.......................................................................716
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove........................................................................716
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe...........................................................................717
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST?..............................................................717
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>,
<ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <arg6>, <State>
This command edits an existing user-defined coupling definition.
The parameters for this command are identical to INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:
NEW?. Note, however, that for INSTrument:COUPling:USER<uc>, the last two
parameters (<Direction> and <State>) are not optional.
Note: Make sure to specify the right index number via the USER suffix.
Suffix: .
<uc> Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of
indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument:
COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of a measurement channel or chan-
nel type.
<Name>
To synchronize two specific measurement channels.
'All Receiver'
To synchronize all receiver channels.
'All Spectrum'
To synchronize all spectrum channels.
'All IQ Analyzer'
To synchronize all I/Q analyzer channels.
'All Analog Demod'
To synchronize all analog demodulation channels.
'All Channels'
To synchronize all channels, regardless of their type.
<Window> String containing the name of a measurement window.
<Name>
To synchronize a specific window (only possible in the Analog
Demodulation application).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 710
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
'All Windows'
To synchronize all measurement windows.
<Parameter> String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of a measurement channel or chan-
nel type.
The second channel name is only necessary for synchronization
between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels
of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<Window> String containing the name of a measurement window.
The second window name is only necessary for synchronization
between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels
of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<Parameter> String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
The second parameter name is only necessary for synchroniza-
tion between two specific channels. If you synchronize all chan-
nels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<arg6> LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
Selects the direction in which synchronization works.
BIDir
Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1
to channel 2 and vice versa).
LTOR
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel
2, but not the other way around.
RTOL
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel
1, but not the other way around.
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Enables or disables the coupling
OFF | 0
Switches the coupling off
ON | 1
Switches the coupling on
*RST: 1
Example: INST:COUP:USER3 'Spectrum1','All
Windows','Attenuation','Spectrum 2','All
Windows','Attenuation',BID,ON
Synchronizes the attenuation between the channels named
'Spectrum1' and 'Spectrum 2' in both directions and turns on the
coupling.
Manual operation: See "Selecting the channels to synchronize" on page 391
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 711
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?
This command queries the names of the measurement channels that can be synchron-
ized.
Suffix: .
<uc> irrelevant
Return values:
<SynchronizableChannel>
Comma-separated list of strings
All channels that can be synchronized.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:CHAN:LIST?
Result:
'SPEC1','AD1','All Spectrum','All
Channels','All Analog Demod'
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selecting the channels to synchronize" on page 391
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? [<ChannelName>, <Parameter>]
This command queries parameters that can be synchronized.
Suffix: .
<uc> irrelevant
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a measurement channel.
<Parameter> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a parameter that you can syn-
chronize.
Return values:
<SynchronizableParameter>
Comma-separated list of parameters.
No parameters provided
Parameters that can be synchronized for all channels
Channel name provided
Parameters that can be synchronized for the selected channel
Parameter and channel name provided
Parameters that can be synchronized with the specified parame-
ter for the selected channel.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST?
Result: all parameters that can be coupled:
'AC DC Coupling', 'Attenuation', 'Center
Frequency', 'Display Lines', 'Frequency Marker
1',...
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 712
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST? 'Spectrum'
Result: all parameters that can be coupled in the 'Spectrum'
channel:
'AC DC Coupling','Attenuation','Center
Frequency','Display Lines',...
Example: INST:COUP:USER:ELEM:LIST? 'Spectrum',
'Attenuation'
Result: all parameters that can be coupled to 'Attenuation' in the
'Spectrum' channel:
'Attenuation'
(Attenuation is the only parameter that can be coupled to attenu-
ation.)
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selecting the parameter to synchronize" on page 392
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO
This command queries additional information about the specified user-defined parame-
ter coupling.
Suffix: .
<uc> Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of
indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument:
COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Return values:
<Information> String containing the message as displayed in the coupling man-
ager.
If the coupling message contains no message, an empty string
is returned.
Example: INST:COUP:USER2:INFO?
Queries possible information about the user coupling with index
2.
Result:
'Only one limit line allowed'
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? <ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>,
<ChannelName>, <Window>, <Parameter>, <Direction>, <State>
This command creates a new user-defined parameter coupling.
After the new coupling has been created, the command returns the index number of
the new coupling. Therefore, the command is implemented as a query.
Suffix: .
<uc> irrelevant
Query parameters:
<ChannelName>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 713
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
String containing the name of a measurement channel or chan-
nel type.
<Name>
To synchronize two specific measurement channels.
'All Receiver'
To synchronize all receiver channels.
'All Spectrum'
To synchronize all spectrum channels.
'All IQ Analyzer'
To synchronize all I/Q analyzer channels.
'All Analog Demod'
To synchronize all analog demodulation channels.
'All Channels'
To synchronize all channels, regardless of their type.
<Window> String containing the name of a measurement window.
<Name>
To synchronize a specific window (only possible in the Analog
Demodulation application).
'All Windows'
To synchronize all measurement windows.
<Parameter> String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of a measurement channel or chan-
nel type.
The second channel name is only necessary for synchronization
between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels
of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<Window> String containing the name of a measurement window.
The second window name is only necessary for synchronization
between two specific channels. If you synchronize all channels
of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<Parameter> String containing the name of a synchronizable parameter.
The second parameter name is only necessary for synchroniza-
tion between two specific channels. If you synchronize all chan-
nels of the same type or all channels, the string has to be empty.
<Direction> LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
Optional: Selects the direction in which synchronization works.
BIDir
Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1
to channel 2 and vice versa).
LTOR
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel
2, but not the other way around.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 714
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
RTOL
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel
1, but not the other way around.
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Optional. Enables or disables coupling.
OFF | 0
Switches the coupling off
ON | 1
Switches the coupling on
*RST: 1
Return values:
<Index> Index number of the new user-defined coupling.
Note that the returned index numbers do not necessarily have to
be the same as those shown in the user interface.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:NEW? 'Spectrum1','All
Windows','Attenuation','Spectrum2','All
Windows','Attenuation',BID,ON
Result:
3
Synchronizes the attenuation between the channels named
'Spectrum1' and 'Spectrum2' in both directions and turns on the
coupling. Also returns the index number of the user-defined cou-
pling.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:NEW? 'All Spectrum','All
Windows','Attenuation','','','',BID,ON
Result:
3
Synchronizes the attenuation between all Spectrum channels in
both directions and turns on the coupling. Also returns the index
number of the user-defined coupling.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selecting the channels to synchronize" on page 391
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?
This command queries the index numbers of user-defined parameter couplings. The
index numbers are used to refer to the specific coupling in remote commands with a
USER<uc> suffix.
Suffix: .
<uc> irrelevant
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 715
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Return values:
<Index> Comma-separated list of strings
Index numbers of all available user-defined couplings
Note that the returned index numbers are not necessarily the
same as those shown in the user interface.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:NUMB:LIST?
Result:
'1','2','4'
Number '3' is not returned, because a coupling with that index
does not exist anymore.
Usage: Query only
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation <Direction>
This command selects the direction in which synchronization works.
Note that the command is not available if you synchronize over all channels or all
channels of the same application.
Suffix: .
<uc> Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of
indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument:
COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters:
<Direction> LTOR | RTOL | BIDir
BIDir
Changes of a parameter are applied both ways (from channel 1
to channel 2 and vice versa).
LTOR
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 1 to channel
2, but not the other way around.
RTOL
Changes of a parameter are applied from channel 2 to channel
1, but not the other way around.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:REL BID
Selects bidirectional changes for the user-defined coupling with
the index number 1.
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove [<Scope>]
This command deletes a user-defined coupling mechanism.
Suffix: .
<uc> Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of
indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument:
COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 716
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<Scope> ALL
Optional SCPI parameter, used instead of the <uc> suffix.
Deletes all user-defined couplings.
Example: INST:COUP:USER3:REM
Removes the user-defined coupling with the index number 3.
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe <State>
Enables or disables the specified user-defined parameter coupling.
Suffix: .
<uc> Index of a user-defined parameter coupling. To obtain the list of
indexes for currently defined coupling, see INSTrument:
COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: INST:COUP:USER2:STAT ON
Turns on the coupling with the index number 2.
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST? [<ChannelName>, <Parameter>]
This command queries the measurement windows that can be synchronized with
another channel (or measurement window).
Note that synchronizing with a specific measurement window is only possible in the
Analog Demodulation application.
Suffix: .
<uc> irrelevant
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a measurement channel.
<Parameter> Optional SCPI parameter.
String containing the name of a parameter that you can syn-
chronize.
Return values:
<SyncWindow> comma-separated list of strings
'All Windows'
All windows can be synchronized. This value is always returned
if no parameters are provided with the command.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 717
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Comma-separated list of strings
String containing the names of the measurement windows that
can be synchronized.
This value is only available for marker coupling, which can be
set independently of the measurement window.
Example: INST:COUP:USER:WIND:LIST?
Result:
'All Windows'
Example: INST:COUP:USER:WIND:LIST? 'Analog
Demod','Frequency Marker 1'
Result:
'All Windows','1','2','3','4','5','6'
The "Specifics for Window" list contains the entries "All Win-
dows" and each of the windows 1 to 6. The frequency marker 1
can be synchronized in any or all of the windows in the 'Analog
Demod' channel.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selecting the measurement windows to synchronize"
on page 391
14.9.8 Network and remote control configuration
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal:REMote........................................................................ 718
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess............................................................... 719
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator.......................................................... 719
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage[:TEXT].................................................................................720
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage:STATe................................................................................. 720
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate...............................................................................................720
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote...................................................................................... 720
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay................................................................................................ 721
SYSTem:HPCoupling..................................................................................................... 721
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE.................................................................................................. 721
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory..............................................................................................722
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]............................................................................................. 722
SYSTem:KLOCk............................................................................................................ 722
SYSTem:LANGuage.......................................................................................................722
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset.................................................................................................. 723
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription............................................................................................. 723
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword..................................................................................................723
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband................................................................................................ 723
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory............................................................................................ 724
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]............................................................................................ 724
SYSTem:RSWeep..........................................................................................................725
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal:REMote <State>
The instrument switches between manual and remote operation.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 718
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Note: If the local lockout function (LLO or SYST:KLOC ON) has been activated in the
remote control mode, manual operation is no longer available until GTL (or SYST:KLOC
OFF) is executed.
For details, see Chapter 13.5.7, "Returning to manual mode ("local")", on page 434.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
The instrument switches from remote to manual operation. You
can operate the instrument locally.
ON | 1
The instrument switches from manual to remote operation.
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF
The instrument switches from remote to manual operation (cor-
responds to @LOC or selecting the "Local" softkey).
Manual operation: See "Local" on page 434
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
This command sets the GPIB address of the R&S ESW.
Parameters:
<Address> Range: 0 to 30
*RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20)
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address" on page 420
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator <Terminator>
This command selects the GPIB receive terminator.
Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require
such a terminator change.
Parameters:
<Terminator> LFEOI | EOI
LFEOI
According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF>
and/or <EOI>.
EOI
For binary data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control com-
puter to the instrument, the binary code used for <LF> might be
included in the binary data block, and therefore should not be
interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be
avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI.
*RST: LFEOI
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 719
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Manual operation: See "GPIB Terminator" on page 421
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage[:TEXT] <Message>
Defines an additional text that is displayed during remote control operation.
To enable the text display, use SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage:STATe on page 720.
Parameters:
<Message> String that contains the text.
Example: SYST:DISP:MESS ON
SYST:DISP:MESS 'CONTROLLED BY DEVICE X'
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage:STATe <State>
Enables and disables the display of an additonal text in remote control.
To define the text, use SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage[:TEXT] on page 720.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches the function off
ON | 1
Switches the function on
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:DISP:MESS ON
SYST:DISP:MESS 'CONTROLLED BY DEVICE X'
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State>
This command turns the display during remote operation on and off.
If on, the R&S ESW updates the diagrams, traces and display fields only.
The best performance is obtained if the display is off during remote control operation.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:DISP:UPD ON
Manual operation: See "Remote Display Update" on page 421
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote
This command deletes all contents of the "Remote Errors" table.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 720
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S ESW is shut down.
Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:REM
Manual operation: See "Display Remote Errors" on page 422
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay <State>
This command switches the error display during remote operation on and off.
If activated, the R&S ESW displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that
contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the error.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:ERR:DISP ON
Manual operation: See "Display Remote Errors" on page 422
SYSTem:HPCoupling <CouplingType>
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
on page 722.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> HP | FSP
*RST: FSP
Example: SYSTem:HPC HP
Manual operation: See "Coupling" on page 424
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE <Mode>
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz and is
only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage on page 722.
Parameters:
<Mode> NORMal | PULSe
NORMal
Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to ref-
erence level.
PULSe
Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above
reference level.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 721
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
*RST: NORM
Example: SYST:IFG:MODE PULS
Manual operation: See "IF Gain" on page 424
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory
This command resets the query to *IDN? to its default value.
Manual operation: See "Reset to Factory String" on page 420
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] <String>
This command defines the response to *IDN?.
Parameters:
<String> String containing the description of the instrument.
Manual operation: See "Identification String" on page 420
SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
This command locks or unlocks manual operation.
Parameters:
<State> ON
LLO (local lockout). The instrument can only be operated
remotely, not locally.
OFF
Unlocks the manual operation mode. To operate the instrument
locally again, you must execute SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF or
select the "Local" softkey first.
*RST: state not affected by *RST
Example: SYST:KLOC ON
Activates LLO (remote control only)
Example: SYST:KLOC OFF
SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF
You can operate the instrument locally.
SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
This command selects the system language.
For details see Chapter 13.3, "GPIB languages", on page 414.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 722
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Parameters:
<Language> "SCPI" | "8560E" | "8561E" | "8562E" | "8563E" | "8564E" |
"8565E" | "8566A" | "8566B" | "8568A" | "8568A_DC" | "8568B" |
"8568B_DC" | "8591E" | "8594E" | "71100C" | "71200C" |
"71209A" | "PSA89600" | "PSA" | "PXA" | "FSP" | "FSU" |
"FSQ" | "FSV" | "FSEA" | "FSEB" | "FSEM" | "FSEK"
*RST: SCPI
Example: SYST:LANG 'PSA'
Emulates the PSA.
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 423
Note: If you use "PSA89600", you must switch to an HP language first before return-
ing to SCPI (in remote operation only). For the identical language "PSA", this inter-
mediate step is not necessary.
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset
This command resets the LAN configuration, as well as the "LAN" password and
instrument description.
Manual operation: See "LAN Reset" on page 426
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription <Description>
This command defines the "LAN" instrument description.
Parameters:
<Description> String containing the instrument description.
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword <Password>
This command defines the "LAN" password.
Parameters:
<Password> String containing the password.
Return values:
<Password>
Manual operation: See "LAN Password" on page 426
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband <State>
This command defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | HIGH
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 723
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
OFF
The option is indicated as "B7J"
ON
The 40 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
HIGH
The 80 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Wideband" on page 424
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory
Resets the response to the REV? query to the factory default value.
For example, after a user string was defined using the SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]
on page 724 command. (REV? query available for HP emulation only, see SYSTem:
LANGuage on page 722.)
Example: Define the system language:
SYST:LANG '8563E'
Set the response back to factory setting:
SYS:REV:FACT
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Resetting the Factory Revision" on page 425
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] <Name>
Sets the response to the REV? query to the defined string (HP emulation only, see
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 722).
Parameters:
<Name>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 724
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Example: Define the system language:
SYST:LANG '8563E'
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Set the response to 'NewRevision':
SYST:REV:STR 'NewRevision'
Query the response:
SYST:REV:STR?
Response:
NewRevision
Manual operation: See "Revision String" on page 425
SYSTem:RSWeep <State>
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands (for details
on the commands refer to Chapter 14.12, "Reference: GPIB commands of emulated
HP models", on page 752). If the repeated sweep is OFF, the marker is set without
sweeping before.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
on page 722
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Example: SYSTem:RSW ON
Manual operation: See "Sweep Repeat" on page 424
14.9.9 Configuring HUMS
This section includes all commands needed for R&S HUMS remote operations.
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL....................................................................................... 726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat............................................................................................ 726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe............................................................................................... 726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?....................................................................................... 727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL..............................................................................727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete.................................................................................... 727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]....................................................................................727
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle.............................................................................728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO................................................................ 728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW................................................................728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact..........................................................................729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation......................................................................... 729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER......................................................................729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?............................................................. 730
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 725
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete.......................................................... 730
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL................................................... 731
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion..........................................................................731
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL
Deletes the complete HUMS data. This includes device history, device tags, SCPI con-
nections, utilization history and utilizations.
Example: //Delete HUMS data
DIAG:HUMS:DEL:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete HUMS History" on page 429
DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat <DataFormat>
Selects the format for the queried HUMS data. You can query the HUMS data either in
JSON format or XML format.
The defined format affects all other commands that return block data.
Parameters:
<DataFormat> JSON | XML
JSON
Returns the HUMS data in JSON format.
XML
Returns the HUMS data in XML format.
*RST: JSON
Example: //Return data in JSON format
DIAG:HUMS:FORM JSON
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe <State>
Turns the HUMS service and data collection on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: ON
Example: //Turn on HUMS service
DIAG:HUMS:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "State" on page 428
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 726
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?
Queries all key-value tags that you have assigend to the instrument. Depending on the
set data format, the queried data is either displayed in XML or JSON format. For more
information about setting the data format, see DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat
on page 726.
Return values:
<ID> ID number of the defined tag.
<Key> String containing key name of the defined tag.
<Value> String containing value of the defined tag.
Example: //Return all tags
DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?
1,"location","building_11",2,"time zone","CET"
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Value" on page 433
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL
Deletes all key-value tags you have assigned to the instrument.
Example: //Delete all tags
DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:DEL:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete All" on page 433
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete <ID>
Deletes a certain tag you assigned to your instrument, including its key and value.
Setting parameters:
<ID> ID number of the tag you want to delete.
To identify the ID number, query all device tags from the system
first. For more information, see DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:
ALL? on page 727.
Example: //Delete tag
DIAG:HUMS:TAGS:DEL 0
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Delete All" on page 433
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] <ID>, <Key>, <Value>
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]? <ID>
Adds or modifies a key-value pair (device tag).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 727
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
The query returns the key-value pair for a given ID or an empty string if the ID is
unknown.
Parameters:
<Key> String containing key name of the queried tag.
<Value> String containing value of the queried tag.
Parameters for setting and query:
<ID> 0 - 31
ID number of the tag you want to modify or query.
To identify the ID number, query all device tags from the system
first. For more information, read here DIAGnostic:HUMS:
TAGS:ALL? on page 727.
Example: //Add or modify a tag (tag 1)
DIAG:HUMS:TAGS 1,'location','building_11'
Manual operation: See "Add" on page 432
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle <RestState>
Turns communication via the REST API on and off.
Parameters:
<RestState> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
Example: //Return REST state
SYST:COMM:REST:ENAB?
Manual operation: See "REST" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO <CommunityString>
Defines the SNMP community string for read-only access.
Prerequisites for this command:
● Select an SNMP version that supports communities (SYSTem:COMMunicate:
SNMP:VERSion on page 731).
Setting parameters:
<CommunityString> String containing the community name.
Example: //Set community name
SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12
SYST:COMM:SNMP:COMM:RO 'ABC'
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Access" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW <CommunityString>
Defines the SNMP community string for read-write access.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 728
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Prerequisites for this command:
● Select an SNMP version that supports communities (SYSTem:COMMunicate:
SNMP:VERSion on page 731).
Setting parameters:
<CommunityString> String containing the community name.
Example: //Set read-write access
SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12
SYST:COMM:SNMP:COMM:RW 'ABC'
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Access" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact <SnmpContact>
Defines the SNMP contact information for the administrator.
You can also set the contact information via SNMP if you do not set it via SCPI.
Parameters for setting and query:
<SnmpContact> String containing SNMP contact.
*RST: "" (empty string)
Example: //Set SNMP contact
SYST:COMM:SNMP:CONT 'ABC'
Manual operation: See "SNMP Contact" on page 432
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation <SnmpLocation>
Defines the SNMP location information for the administrator.
You can also set the location information via SNMP if you do not set it via SCPI.
Parameters for setting and query:
<SnmpLocation> String containing SNMP location.
*RST: "" (empty string)
Example: //Return SNMP location
SYST:COMM:SNMP:LOC?
Manual operation: See "SNMP Location" on page 432
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER <Name>, <Access>, <Level>[,
<Auth_pwd>[, <Priv_pwd>]]
Defines an SNMP user profile.
Prerequisites for this command:
● Select SNMPv3 (SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 731).
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 729
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Setting parameters:
<Name> String containing name of the user.
<Access> RO | RW
Defines the access right a user can have.
<Level> NOAuth | AUTH | PRIVacy
Defines the security level.
<Auth_pwd> String containing the authentication password.
<Priv_pwd> String containing the privacy password.
Example: //Create user profile
SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V123
SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER 'Peter','RO','PRIV',
'1234','XYZ'
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?
Queries the number of users and a list of all SNMP users for SNMPv3.
Prerequisites for this command:
● Select SNMPv3 (SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 731).
Return values:
<Count> Total number of registered SNMP users.
<Name> List of all user names as a comma-separated list.
Example: //Return all SNMP users
SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete <UserName>
Deletes a specific SNMP user profile.
Setting parameters:
<UserName> String containing name of SNMP user profile to be deleted.
Example: //Delete SNMP user profile
SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:DEL "Peter"
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 430
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 730
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL
Deletes all SNMP user profiles.
Example: //Delete all SNMP user profiles
SYST:COMM:SNMP:USM:USER:DEL:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "SNMPv3 Configuration" on page 430
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion <SnmpVersion>
Selects the SNMP version.
Parameters for setting and query:
<SnmpVersion> OFF | V12 | V123 | V3 | DEFault
OFF
SNMP communication is off.
V12
SNMP communication with SNMPv2 or lower.
V123
SNMP communication with SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.
V3
SNMP communication with SNMPv3.
*RST: V123
Example: //Select the SNMP version
SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12
Manual operation: See "SNMP" on page 429
14.9.10 System configuration check
Commands to check the system configuration described elsewhere.
● DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? on page 738
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt?.............................................................................................732
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?...................................................................................... 732
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?........................................................................................ 733
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?..................................................................................... 733
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL............................................................................................ 734
SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended?........................................................................................... 734
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?................................................................................................... 734
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?................................................................................................735
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate............................................................................................735
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt................................................................................................. 735
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible.........................................................................................736
SYSTem:PRESet:FILTer................................................................................................. 736
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].............................................................................................. 736
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 731
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt? <Relay>
This command queries how many switching cycles the individual relays have per-
formed since they were installed.
Query parameters:
<Relay> See table below for an overview of supported parameters.
Return values:
<Cycles> Number of switching cycles.
Example: DIAG:INFO:CCO? CAL
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Relays Cycle Counter" on page 386
SCPI parameter Hardware component
ACDC AC/DC coupling
ATT5 Mechanical attenuation 5 dB
ATT10 Mechanical attenuation 10 dB
ATT20 Mechanical attenuation 20 dB
ATT40 Mechanical attenuation 40 dB
ATTinput2 Preselector 1: ATTINPUT2
CAL Calibration source
EXT_relais Preselector 2: EXT_RELAIS
INPut2 Preselector 1: INPUT2
PREamp Preamplifier
PREamp30mhz Preselector 1: PREAMP30MHZ
PRES Preselector 1: PRESEL
RFAB Preselector 1: RFAB
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?
This command queries the BIOS version of the CPU board.
Return values:
<BiosInformation> String containing the BIOS version.
Example: DIAG:SERV:BIOS?
Returns the BIOS version.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 732
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?
This command queries hardware information.
Return values:
<Hardware> String containing the following information for every hardware
component.
<component>: name of the hardware component
<serial#>: serial number of the component
<order#>: order number of the component
<model>: model of the component
<code>: code of the component
<revision>: revision of the component
<subrevision>: subrevision of the component
Example: DIAG:SERV:HWIN?
Queries the hardware information.
"FRONTEND|100001/003|1300.3009|03|01|00|00",
"MOTHERBOARD|123456/002|1300.3080|02|00|00|00",
...
Usage: Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?
This command queries information about the hardware and software components.
Return values:
<Information> String containing the version of hardware and software compo-
nents including the types of licenses for installed options.
Example: DIAG:SERV:VERS?
Queries the version information.
Response:
Instrument Firmware |1.00,
BIOS |R&S ANALYZER BIOS V1.70-3-14-2 IPC11,
Image Version |1.6.0,
Device Installation Version |1.3.0,
PCIE-FPGA |8.03,
SA-FPGA |10.05,
MB-FPGA |2.1.3.0,
SYNTH-FPGA |3.12.1.0,
REF-FPGA |3.4.0.0,
MWC-FPGA |3.4.0.0,
Data Sheet Version |06.00,
Time Control Management ||active,
RF Preamplifier B24||,
Real-Time Analysis K55||permanent
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 733
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all contents of the "System Messages" table.
Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL
SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended? <MessageType>[, <ChannelName>]
This command queries all system messages, or all messages of a defined type, dis-
played in the status bar for a specific channel (application).
Note: This command queries the strings displayed for manual operation. For remote
programs, do not define processing steps depending on these results. Instead, query
the results of the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO status register, which
indicates whether messages of a certain type have occurred (see Chapter 13.2.2.8,
"STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register", on page 408).
Parameters:
<MessageType> ALL | INFO | WARNing | FATal | ERRor | MESSage
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
Return values:
<Messages> String containing all messages of the selected type for the speci-
fied channel. Each message is separated by a comma and
inserted in parentheses. If no messages are available, empty
parentheses are returned.
Example: SYST:ERR:EXT? ALL
Returns all messages for the currently active application, e.g.
"Message 1","Message 2".
Example: SYST:ERR:EXT? FAT,'Spectrum2'
Queries fatal errors in the 'Spectrum2' application. If none have
occurred, the result is: " ".
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? [<MessType>]
This command queries the error messages that occur during R&S ESW operation.
Query parameters:
<MessType> SMSG | REMote
SMSG
(default) Queries the system messages which occurred during
manual operation.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 734
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
REMote
Queries the error messages that occurred during remote opera-
tion.
Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the
R&S ESW is shut down.
Return values:
<SystemMessages> String containing all messages in the "System Messages" table.
<RemoteErrors> <Error_no> | <Description> | <Command> | <Date> | <Time>
Comma-separated list of errors from the "Remote Errors" table,
where:
<Error_no>: device-specific error code
<Description>: brief description of the error
<Command>: remote command causing the error
<Date>|<Time>: date and time the error occurred
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned.
For details on error queues see Chapter 13.2, "Status reporting system", on page 400.
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate <Directory>
This command starts a firmware update using the *.msi files in the selected directory.
The default path is D:\FW_UPDATE. The path is changed via the MMEMory:COMMent
command. To store the update files the MMEMory:DATA command is used.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Setting parameters:
<Directory>
Example: SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE'
Starts the firmware update from directory "D:\FW_UPDATE".
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt <IDNFormat>
This command selects the response format to the *IDN? query.
Parameters:
<IDNFormat> LEGacy
Format is compatible to R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ/FSG family.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 735
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
NEW | FSL
R&S ESW format
Format is also compatible to the R&S FSL and R&S FSV family
*RST: not reset!
Example: SYST:FORM:IDEN LEG
Adapts the return value of *IDN? to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ fam-
ily.
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format" on page 421
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible <OpMode>
This command defines the operating mode that is activated when you switch on the
R&S ESW or press the [PRESET] key.
Parameters:
<OpMode> SANalyzer
Defines Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode as the
presetting.
RECeiver
Selects the receiver application as the default application
(default value).
Manual operation: See "Preset Mode" on page 376
SYSTem:PRESet:FILTer <FilterType>
This command selects the resolution filter type that is selected after a preset in the
Spectrum application.
Parameters:
<FilterType> NORMal
Selects 3 dB filter.
NOISe
Selects 3 dB filter.
(NORMal and NOISe have the same effect.)
PULSe
Selects 6 dB filter.
*RST: NORMal
Example: //Select the 6 dB filters as the default filter type
SYST:PRES:FILT PULS
Manual operation: See "Default Filter Type for Spectrum Mode" on page 377
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] <State>
Activates or queries secure user mode.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 736
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
Note: Before you activate secure user mode, store any instrument settings that are
required beyond the current session, such as predefined instrument settings, trans-
ducer files, or self-alignment data.
Note: Initially after installation of the R&S ESW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible. This is necessary to prompt
for a change of passwords.
For details on the secure user mode see Chapter 4.15, "Protecting data using the
secure user mode", on page 36.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
The R&S ESW automatically reboots and starts in secure user
mode. In secure user mode, no data is written to the instru-
ment's internal solid-state drive. Data that the R&S ESW nor-
mally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to SDRAM.
OFF | 0
The R&S ESW is set to normal instrument mode. Data is stored
to the internal solid-state drive.
Note: this parameter is for query only. Secure user mode cannot
be deactivated via remote operation.
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "SecureUser Mode" on page 377
14.9.11 Service functions
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction......................................................................................737
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?................................................................... 738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete............................................................. 738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE................................................................738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?.......................................................................................... 738
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet............................................................................................. 739
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]........................................................................................739
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction <ServiceFunction>
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction? <ServiceFunction>
This command starts a service function.
The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system
password.
Parameters for setting and query:
<ServiceFunction> String containing the ID of the service function.
The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers,
separated by a point.
• function group number
• board number
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 737
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
• function number
• parameter 1 (see the Service Manual)
• parameter 2 (see the Service Manual)
Return values:
<Result>
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN 'Function1'
DIAG:SERV:SFUN? 'Function2'
Manual operation: See "Service Function" on page 384
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?
This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Return values:
<Result>
Usage: Query only
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete
This command deletes the results in the output buffer for service functions you have
used.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Clear Results" on page 385
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE [<FileName>]
This command saves the results in the output buffer for service functions you have
used to a file.
If no <FileName> parameter is provided, the results are stored to
C:\R_S\INSTR\results\Servicelog.txt.
Note that if the buffer is empty, the function returns an error.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and file name.
Manual operation: See "Save Results" on page 385
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?
This command creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file con-
tains the system configuration information ("device footprint"), the current eeprom data
and a screenshot of the screen display (if available).
This data is stored to the C:\R_S\Instr\User directory on the instrument.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 738
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
General instrument setup
As a result of this command, the created file name (including the drive and path) is
returned.
You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM:COPY
command to store the file on the controller PC.
(See MMEMory:COPY on page 634)
If you contact the Rohde & Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send this
file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
Return values:
<FileName> C:\R_S\Instr\User
\<R&S Device ID>_<CurrentDate>_<CurrentTime>
String containing the drive, path and file name of the created
support file, where the file name consists of the following ele-
ments:
<R&S Device ID>: The unique R&S device ID indicated in the
"Versions + Options" information
<CurrentDate>: The date on which the file is created
(<YYYYMMDD>)
<CurrentTime>: The time at which the file is created
(<HHMMSS>)
Example: DIAG:SERV:SINF?
Result:
"C:\Program Files
(x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\user\ESW-26_1328.4100K27-
MMEM:COPY "C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\user\ESW-26
"S:\Debug\C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\user\ESW-26_
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Create R&S Support Information" on page 380
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet
Clears any previously provided password and returns to the most restrictive service
level.
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 385
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <arg0>
Provides a password for subsequent service functions.
Parameters:
<arg0> string
Example: SYST:PASS:CEN '894129'
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 385
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 739
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Using the status register
14.10 Using the status register
For more information on the contents of the status registers see:
● Remote control via SCPI
● Chapter 13.2.2.4, "STATus:OPERation register", on page 404
● Chapter 13.2.2.6, "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register", on page 406
● Chapter 13.2.2.7, "STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register", on page 407
● Chapter 13.2.2.9, "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register", on page 408
● Chapter 13.2.2.10, "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register", on page 409
● Chapter 13.2.2.11, "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register", on page 409
● Chapter 13.2.2.12, "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register", on page 410
● Chapter 13.2.2.14, "STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register", on page 411
● General status register commands....................................................................... 740
● Reading out the CONDition part........................................................................... 741
● Reading out the EVENt part..................................................................................741
● Controlling the ENABle part.................................................................................. 742
● Controlling the negative transition part..................................................................742
● Controlling the positive transition part................................................................... 743
14.10.1 General status register commands
STATus:PRESet.............................................................................................................740
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?................................................................................................ 740
STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined
value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are
detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a
CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not
passed on.
Usage: Event
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned.
This command is identical to the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? command.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 740
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Using the status register
14.10.2 Reading out the CONDition part
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition? <ChannelName>
These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register.
The commands do not delete the contents of the CONDition section.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
Usage: Query only
14.10.3 Reading out the EVENt part
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
These commands read out the EVENt section of the status register.
At the same time, the commands delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 741
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Using the status register
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
Usage: Query only
14.10.4 Controlling the ENABle part
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle? <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the ENABle part of a register.
The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere-
ported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit
transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the
next higher level.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
14.10.5 Controlling the negative transition part
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 742
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Using the status register
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition? <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis-
ter. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt
register.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
14.10.6 Controlling the positive transition part
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition? <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis-
ter. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt
register.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
Parameters:
<SumBit> Range: 0 to 65535
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for
the currently active channel.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 743
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
14.11 Service request
The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in
which the relevant bits of the transition and enable registers are set. In addition the ser-
vice request event must be enabled in the VISA session.
14.11.1 Initiate service request
REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case
' of errors -------
PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for
'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR
'register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device-
'dependent and query error
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for
'all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation
'Ptransition bits
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")
'Set questionable enable bits
'for all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable
'Ptransition bits
CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service
'request
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
Private mbSession As MessageBasedSession
Sub Main()
Console.WriteLine("Example of initialization _
of the SRQ in the case of errors.")
Dim SRQWaitTimeout = 4000 ' Timeout As Integer for WaitOnEvent
'Opening session
Try
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 744
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
'Analyzer is alias, instead of using resource string.
'For example on TCP use TCPIP0::192.168.1.2::inst0::INSTR
mbSession = CType(ResourceManager.GetLocalManager().Open("Analyzer"), _
MessageBasedSession)
mbSession.TerminationCharacterEnabled = True
Try
mbSession.Write("*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system
mbSession.Write("*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for
'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR register
mbSession.Write("*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device-dependent and query error
mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for all events
mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits
mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")
'Set questionable enable bits for all events
mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits
Console.WriteLine("Wait on event - Blocking")
mbSession.EnableEvent(MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, _
EventMechanism.Queue)
'Enable the event for service request
'------------------------------------------------
' Your command plase use here
' mbSession.Write("Your command")
'------------------------------------------------
Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)
If (Status.EventType() = _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
Console.WriteLine("SRQ is recognized")
'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq()
End If
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
Catch exp As InvalidCastException
Console.WriteLine("Resource selected must be a message-based session")
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
' Close session
mbSession.Dispose()
' Wait for end
Console.WriteLine("Press any key to end")
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 745
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
Console.ReadKey()
End Sub
14.11.2 Waiting for the arrival of a service request
There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request:
Blocking (user inputs not possible):
This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ
is short (shorter than the selected timeout), if no response to user inputs is required
during the waiting time, and if – as the main criterion – the event is absolutely certain to
occur.
Reason:
From the time the viWaitOnEvent() function is called until the occurrence of the expec-
ted event, it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries dur-
ing the waiting time. Moreover, it returns an error if the SRQ event does not occur
within the predefined timeout period.
The method is, therefore, in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement
results, especially when using triggered measurements.
The following function calls are required:
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Wait for service request user
'inputs are not possible during
'the waiting time!
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker --------------------
Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)
'Wait for service request user inputs are not possible
'during the waiting time!
If (Status.EventType() = MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq()
End If
Non-blocking (user inputs possible):
This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an
SRQ is long (longer than the selected timeout), and user inputs should be possible dur-
ing the waiting time, or if the event is not certain to occur. This method is, therefore, the
preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements, i.e. the output of results,
especially in the case of triggered measurements.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 746
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regu-
lar intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected
event has not yet occurred. In this way, the system can respond to user inputs (mouse
clicks, key entries) during the waiting time.
It is advisable to employ the Hold() auxiliary function, which returns control to the oper-
ating system for a selectable waiting time (see section Waiting without blocking the
keyboard and mouse), so enabling user inputs during the waiting time.
result% = 0
For i = 1 To 10 'Abort after max. 10 loop
'iterations
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_TMO_IMMEDIATE, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Check event queue
If (status = VI_SUCCESS) Then
result% = 1
CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
Else
CALL Hold(20) 'Call hold function with
'20 ms 'waiting time. User inputs
'are possible.
Endif
Next i
If result% = 0 Then
Debug.Print "Timeout Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
Endif
14.11.3 Waiting without blocking the keyboard and mouse
A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting
times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse.
If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time, control over the
program events during this time must be returned to the operating system. In Visual
Basic, this is done by calling the DoEvents function. This function causes keyboard-or
mouse-triggered events to be executed by the associated elements. For example, it
allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument
setting to be completed.
The following programming example describes the Hold() function, which returns
control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in millisec-
onds.
Rem ***********************************************************************
Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired
Rem waiting time in milliseconds. The keyboard and the mouse remain
Rem operative during the waiting period, thus allowing desired elements
Rem to be controlled
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 747
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
Rem ***********************************************************************
Public Sub Hold(delayTime As Single)
Start = Timer 'Save timer count on calling the
'function
Do While Timer < Start + delayTime/1000 'Check timer count
DoEvents 'Return control to operating
'system to enable control of
'desired elements as long as
'timer has not elapsed
Loop
End Sub
Rem ***********************************************************************
The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold(<Waiting time in
milliseconds>).
14.11.4 Service request routine
A service request is processed in the service request routine.
The variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!
REM ------------ Service request routine ----------------------------------
Public SUB Srq()
ON ERROR GOTO noDevice 'No user existing
CALL viReadSTB(analyzer, STB%) 'Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THEN 'This instrument has bits set in
'the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler
IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN CALL Esrread
END IF
noDevice:
END SUB 'End of SRQ routine
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ---------- Subroutine for evaluation Service Request Routine ----------
Public Sub Srq()
Try
Dim mySTB As Short = mbSession.ReadStatusByte()
'Serial poll, read status byte
Console.WriteLine("Reading Service Request Routine:" + mySTB.ToString())
If mySTB > 0 Then 'This instrument has bits set in the STB
If (mySTB And 16) > 0 Then Call Outputqueue()
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 748
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
If (mySTB And 4) > 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler()
If (mySTB And 8) > 0 Then Call Questionablestatus()
If (mySTB And 128) > 0 Then Call Operationstatus()
If (mySTB And 32) > 0 Then Call Esrread()
End If
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub 'End of SRQ routine
Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is
effected in subroutines.
14.11.5 Reading out the output buffer
REM -------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits -----------------------
Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
result$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for response
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Debug.Print "Contents of Output Queue:"; result$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for the output queue -----------------------
Public Sub Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
Try
Dim result As String = mbSession.ReadString()
Console.WriteLine("Contents of Output Queue:" + result)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub
14.11.6 Reading error messages
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------
Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler()
ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for error variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$)
Debug.Print "Error Description:"; ERROR$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------
Sub ErrorQueueHandler()
Dim result As String
Dim hasErr As Boolean = True
Do
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 749
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
mbSession.Write("SYST:ERR?")
result = mbSession.ReadString()
Dim parts As String() = result.Split(",")
If parts(0) = 0 Then
hasErr = False
Console.WriteLine(result)
Else
Console.WriteLine(result)
End If
Loop While hasErr
End Sub
14.11.7 Evaluation of SCPI status registers
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------
Public SUB Questionablestatus()
Ques$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Ques$)
Debug.Print "Questionable Status:"; Ques$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------
Public SUB Operationstatus()
Oper$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Oper$)
Debug.Print "Operation Status:"; Oper$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------
Public Sub Questionablestatus()
Dim myQSR As String = Nothing
Try
myQSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") 'Read QSR
Console.WriteLine("Questionable Status:" + myQSR)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------
Public Sub Operationstatus()
Dim myOSR As String = Nothing
Try
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 750
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Service request
myOSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") 'Read OSR
Console.WriteLine("Operation Status:" + myOSR)
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub
14.11.8 Evaluation of event status register
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public SUB Esrread()
Esr$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESR?") 'Read ESR
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 2) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Request Control"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Query Error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Device dependent error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Execution Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Command Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Power on"END SUB
REM **********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public Sub Esrread()
Try
Dim myESR As Short = mbSession.Query("*ESR?") 'Read ESR
If (myESR And 1) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Operation complete")
If (myESR And 2) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Request Control")
If (myESR And 4) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Query Error")
If (myESR And 8) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Device dependent error")
If (myESR And 16) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Execution Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
If (myESR And 32) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Command Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 751
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
If (myESR And 64) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("User request")
If (myESR And 128) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Power on")
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
End Sub
14.12 Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
The R&S ESW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of HP mod-
els 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A, 8566B, 8568A, 8568B and
8594E.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
This includes the support of syntax rules for not only newer device families (B and E
models) but for the previous A family as well.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S ESW is sufficient to
run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
After the introduction, this section includes the following topics:
● Command set of models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A..................................... 752
● Special features of the syntax parsing algorithms for 8566A and 8568A models
.............................................................................................................................. 776
● Special behavior of commands............................................................................. 777
● Model-dependent default settings.........................................................................778
● Data output formats...............................................................................................779
● Trace data output formats..................................................................................... 779
● Trace data input formats....................................................................................... 779
● GPIB status reporting............................................................................................779
14.12.1 Command set of models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E,
8565E, 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and
71209A
As with the original units, the R&S ESW includes the command set of the A models in
the command set of the B models.
The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E, the HP models 71100C,
71200C, and 71209A are compatible to HP models 8566A/B.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 752
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
A1 A1 Clear/Write A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
A2 A2 Max Hold A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
A3 A3 View A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
A4 A4 Blank A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
ABORT 1) ABORT Stop previous function HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/HP
8568B/HP
8594E
ADD Add HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJALL ADJALL Adjust all HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJCRT 2) ADJCRT Adjust CRT HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJIF 2) ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AMB AMB ON|OFF Trace A – B -> Trace A HP 856xE/ available
AMB 1|0 HP 8594E
AMB?
AMBPL AMBPL ON|OFF HP 856xE/ available
AMBPL 1|0 HP 8566B/
AMBPL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ANNOT ANNOT ON|OFF Annotation HP 856xE/ available
ANNOT 1|0 HP 8566B/
ANNOT? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 753
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
APB APB Trace A + B -> Trace A HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AT AT <numeric_value> DB Attenuation HP 8566A/ available
| DM HP 8568A/
AT DN HP 856xE/
AT UP HP 8566B/
AT AUTO HP 8568B/
AT? HP 8594E
AUNITS AUNITS DBM | DBMV | Amplitude Units HP 856xE/ available
DBUV | HP 8566B/
AUNITS? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AUTOCPL AUTOCPL Coupling default HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AXB AXB Exchange trace A and B HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
B1 B1 Clear/Write B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
B2 B2 Max Hold B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
B3 B3 View B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
B4 B4 Blank B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
BL BL Trace B – Display Line - HP 8566A/ available
> Trace B HP 8568A
BML BML Trace B – Display Line - HP 856xE/ available
> Trace B HP8594E
BTC BTC Transfer Trace B -> C HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 754
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
BXC BXC Exchange Trace B and HP 856xE/ available
C HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
BLANK BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC Blank Trace HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
C1 C1 A-B off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
C2 C2 A-B -> A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
CAL 1) CAL ALL Start analyzer self align- HP 856xE/ available
ment
CAL ON HP 8566B/
CAL OFF HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CF CF <numeric_value> Center Frequency HP 8566A/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
CF UP HP 856xE/
CF DN HP 8566B/
CF? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CHANPWR CHANPWR TRA|TRB, Channel Power Mea- HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value>,? surement HP 8594E
CHPWRBW CHPWRBW Channel Power Band- HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HZ| width HP 8594E
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
CLRW CLRW TRA|TRB|TRC Clear/Write Trace HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CLS 1) CLS Clear all status bits HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 755
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
CONTS CONTS HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
COUPLE COUPLE AC|DC Input coupling HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CR CR Couple RBW HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
CS CS Couple Step Size HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
CT CT Couple SWT HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
CTA Convert to absolute units HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CV CV Couple VBW HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
D1 2) D1 Display Size normal HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
DA 2) DA Display address available
DEMOD 1) DEMOD ON|OFF|AM| AF Demodulator HP 856xE/ available
FM HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DEMODAGC 2) DEMODAGC ON|OFF|1| Demodulation AGC HP 856xE/ available
0 HP 8566B/
DEMODAGC? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DEMODT DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> S|MS| HP 8566B/
US|SC
HP 8568B/
DEMODT UP|DN
HP 8594E
DEMODT?
DET DET POS|SMP|NEG Detector HP 856xE/ available
DET? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 756
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
DISPOSE 2) ONEOS | TRMATH | available
ONSWP | ALL |
<numeric_value>
DIV Divide HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DL DL <numeric_value> Display Line HP 856xE/ available
DB|DM HP 8566B/
DL DN HP 8568B/
DL UP HP 8594E
DL ON
DL OFF
DL?
DLE DLE ON|OFF Display Line enable HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DONE DONE Done query HP 856xE/ available
DONE? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DW 2) DW Write to display and available
increment address
E1 E1 Peak Search HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E2 E2 Marker to Center Freq. HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E3 E3 Deltamarker Step Size HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
E4 E4 Marker to Ref. Level available available
EDITDONE limit line edit done HP 856xE available
EDITLIML edit limit line HP 856xE available
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 757
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
ERR ERR 250 cal level error Now some FSx errors HP8568A not yet availa-
are mapped to HP HP856xE ble
ERR 300 LO unlock
errors.
ERR 472 cal error digital
filter
ERR 473 cal error ana-
log filter
ERR 552 cal error log
amp
ERR 902 unscale track-
ing generator
ERR 906 oven cold
ERR 117 numeric unit
error
ERR 112 Unrecognized
Command
ERR? ERR? Error queue query HP 856xE/ not yet availa-
ble
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
EX EX Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
FA FA <numeric_value> HZ| Start Frequency HP 8566A/ available
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
FA UP HP 856xE/
FA DN HP 8566B/
FA? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FB FB <numeric_value> HZ| Stop Frequency HP 8566A/ available
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
FB UP HP 856xE/
FB DN HP 8566B/
FB? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FDSP Frequency display off 8560E available
8561E
8562E
8563E
8564E
8565E
FOFFSET 1) FOFFSET Frequency Offset HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HZ| HP 8566B/
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
HP 8568B/
FOFFSET?
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 758
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
FREF FREF INT|EXT Reference Frequency HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FS FS Full Span HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
FUNCDEF Define Function Function HP 8594E/ available
must be in one line HP 856xE/
between delimiters @
HP 8566B
GATE 1) GATE ON|OFF HP 856xE/ available
GATE 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GATECTL 1) GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL HP 856xE/ available
GATECTL? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GD 1) GD <numeric_value> HP 856xE/ available
US|MS|SC HP 8566B/
GD DN HP 8568B/
GD UP HP 8594E
GD?
GL 1) GL <numeric_value> HP 856xE/ available
US|MS|SC HP 8566B/
GL DN HP 8568B/
GL UP
HP 8594E
GL?
GP 1) GP POS|NEG HP 856xE/ available
GP? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GRAT 2) GRAT Graticule HP 856xE/ available
ON|OFF HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
I1 I1 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
I2 I2 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 759
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
ID ID Identify HP 8566A/ available
ID? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
INZ 1) INZ 75 Input Impedance HP 856xE/ available
INZ 50 HP 8566B/
INZ? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KEYDEF KEYDEF Key definition HP 8566B/ available
HP 856xE/
HP 859xE
KEYEXEC KEYEXEC Key execute HP 8566B available
KS= KS= <numeric_value> Marker Frequency Coun- HP 8566A/ available
ter Resolution
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A
KS= DN
KS= UP
KS=?
KS/ KS/ Manual Peaking HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KS( KS( Lock register HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KS) KS) Unlock register HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSB KSB Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSC KSC Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSD KSD Amplitude Units in V HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSE KSE <numeric_value>| Title mode HP 8566A/ available
<char data>@ HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 760
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
KSG KSG Video Averaging on HP 8566A/ available
KSG ON HP 8568A
KSG <numeric_value>
KSH KSH Video Averaging Off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSK Marker to Next Peak HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSL Marker Noise off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSM Marker Noise on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSO KSO Deltamarker to span HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSP KSP <numeric_value> HPIB address HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSQ 2) KSQ Band lock off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KST KST Fast Preset HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSV KSV <numeric_value> Frequency Offset HP 8566A/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A
KSV?
KSW KSW Error Correction Routine HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSX KSX Correction Values On HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSY KSY Correction Values Off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSZ KSZ <numeric_value> Reference Value Offset HP 8566A/ available
DB HP 8568A
KSZ?
KSa KSa Normal Detection HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSb KSb Pos Peak Detection HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 761
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSg CRT beam off available
KSh CRT beam on available
KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSk KSk Blank Trace C HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSl KSl Transfer B to C HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSm KSm Graticule off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSn2) KSn Grid on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSo KSn Character display off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSp KSp Character display on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSr KSr Create service request HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSt 2) KSt Band lock on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
KSv 2) KSv Signal ident on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
L0 L0 Display line off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
LB LB <numeric_value>| Label HP 8566A/ available
<char data>@ HP 8568A
LF LF Low frequency band pre- HP 8566A/ available
set HP 8568A
LIMD limit line delta HP 856xE available
LIMF limit line frequency HP 856xE available
LIMIFAIL limit fail query HP 856xE available
LIMIPURGE purge limit line HP 856xE available
LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available
LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 762
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available
LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available
LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available
LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available
LIMTFL flat limit line segment HP 856xE available
LIMTSL slope limit line segment HP 856xE available
LIMU upper limit line value HP 856xE available
LG LG <numeric_value> DB Amplitude Scale Log HP 856xE/ available
| DM HP 8566B/
LG? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
LL 2) LL Plot command HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
LN LN Amplitude Scale Lin HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
M1 M1 Marker Off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
M2 M2 Marker Normal HP 8566A/ available
M2 <numeric_value> HP 8568A
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
M2 DN
M2 UP
M2?
M3 M3 Delta Marker HP 8566A/ available
M3 <numeric_value> HP 8568A
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
M3 DN
M3 UP
M3?
M4 M4 <numeric_value> Marker Zoom HP 8566A/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A
MA MA Marker Amplitude HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
MC0 MC0 Marker Count off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 763
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available
MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available
MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A/ available
MF? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MINH1) MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKA MKA <numeric_value> Marker Amplitude HP 856xE/ available
MKA? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKACT MKACT 1 Select the active marker HP 856xE/ not available
MKACT? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKBW 1) MKBW <numeric_value> N dB Down HP 856xE/ available
MKBW ON HP 8566B/
MKBW OFF HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKD MKD Delta Marker HP 856xE/ available
MKD <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| HP 8568B/
MHZ|GHZ HP 8594E
MKD DN
MKD UP
MKD ON
MKD OFF
MKD?
MKDR MKDR <numeric_value> Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE/ available
HZ|KHZ| HP 8566B/
MHZ|GHZ| HP 8568B/
S|SC|MS|MSEC| HP 8594E
USMKDR?
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 764
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
MKDR? Delta Marker reverse available
query
MKF MKF <numeric_value> Set Marker Frequency HP 856xE/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
MKF? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKFC MKFC ON|OFF Frequency Counter HP 856xE/ available
on/off HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKFCR 1) MKFCR Frequency Counter Res- HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> olution HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ HP 8568B/
MKFCR DN HP 8594E
MKFCR UP
MKFCR?
MKMIN MKMIN Marker -> Min HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKN MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE/ available
MKN <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568B/
MKN DN HP 8594E
MKN UP
MKN ON
MKN OFF
MKN?
MKNOISE MKNOISE ON|OFF Noise Measurement HP 856xE/ available
MKNOISE 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKNOISE? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKOFF MKOFF Marker off HP 856xE/ available
MKOFF ALL HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKP MKP <numeric_value> Marker position HP 856xE/ available
MKP? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 765
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
MKPK MKPK Marker Search HP 856xE/ available
MKPK HI HP 8566B/
MKPK NH HP 8568B/
MKPK NR HP 8594E
MKPK NL
MKPT MKPT Marker Peak Threshold HP 856xE/ available
MKPT HI HP 8566B/
MKPT NH HP 8568B/
MKPT NR HP 8594E
MKPT NL
MKPX MKPX <numeric_value> Peak Excursion HP 856xE/ available
DB HP 8566B/
MKPX DN HP 8568B/
MKPX UP HP 8594E
MKPX?
MKRL MKRL Ref Level = Marker HP 856xE/ available
Level HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize = Marker HP 856xE/ available
Freq HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKT MKT <numeric_value> MKF = fstart + MKT/ HP 856xE/ available
SWT*Span
S|MS|US|SC HP 8594E
MKT?
MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA|TRB| Marker to Trace HP 856xE/ available
TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKTRACK MKTRACK ON|OFF Signal Track HP 856xE/ available
MKTRACK 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKTRACK? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 766
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP Marker type HP 856xE/ available
MK TYPE? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ML Mixer level HP 856xE available
MOV MOV TRA|TRB|TRC, Move Trace Contents HP 856xE/ available
TRA|TRB|T RC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MPY Multiply HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MT0 MT0 Marker Track Off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
MT1 MT1 Marker Track On HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
MXMH MXMH TRA|TRB Maximum Hold HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NORMALIZE NORMALIZE Normalize trace HP 856xE/ not available
HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NRL 1) NRL <numeric_value> Normalized Reference HP 856xE/ available
DB | DM Level HP 8566B/
NRL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NRPOS NRPOS Normalize position HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
NRL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
O1 O1 Format ASCII, Values 0 HP 8566A/ available
to 4095 HP 8568A
O2 O2 Format Binary, HP 8566A/ available
Values 0 to 4095 HP 8568A
O3 O3 Format ASCII HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 767
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
OA OA Output All HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
OL OL <80 characters> Output Learn String HP 8566A/ available
OL? HP 8568A
OT OT Output Trace Annota- HP 8566A/ available
tions HP 8568A
PA PA <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available
<numeric_value HP 8568A
PD PD <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available
<numeric_value HP 8568A
PH_MKF Spot frequency in Hz HP 856xE available
PH_FMIN Min offset frequency to HP 856xE available
be measured
PH_FMAX Max offset frequency to HP 856xE available
be measured
PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the HP 856xE available
spot frequency
PH_DRIFT 0: for stable signals, 1: HP 856xE available
for drifty
PH_RLVL Reference level for the HP 856xE available
log plot
PH_SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available
PH_VBR Filtering HP 856xE available
PH_RMSPT Amount of data points to HP 856xE available
skip when doing the inte-
gration
PH_RMSFL Lower integration fre- HP 856xE available
quency in Hz
PH_RMSFU Upper integration fre- HP 856xE available
quency in Hz
PH_EXIT Quits phase noise HP 856xE available
PH_F_UDT Updates internal fre- HP 856xE available
quency variables
PH_LMT_L Apply limits to PH_FMIN HP 856xE available
and PH_FMAX
PH_MEAS Generates log frequency HP 856xE available
plot
PH_MKF_D Updates the spot fre- HP 856xE available
quency
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 768
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
PH_RMS Requests the rms phase HP 856xE available
noise
PH_RMSFT Updates internal fre- HP 856xE available
quency variables
PH_RMSX Calculates the rms HP 856xE available
phase noise
PH_SPOTF Executes the spot fre- HP 856xE available
quency measurement
PLOTORG 2) PLOTORG DSP|GRT Plot command HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PLOTSRC 2) PLOTSRC ANNT|GRT| Plot command HP 856xE/ available
TRB| TRA|ALLDSP|GRT HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PP PP Preselector Peaking HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
PRINT 1) PRINT Hardcopy HP 856xE/ available
PRINT 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PSDAC 2) PSDAC Preselector DAC value HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
PSDAC UP|DN HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PSTATE 2) PSTATE ON|OFF|1|0 Protect State HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PU PU Pen Up HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
PWRBW PWRBW Power Bandwidth HP 8566B/ available
HP 859x/
HP 856xE
R1 R1 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
R2 R2 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 769
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
R3 R3 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
R4 R4 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
RB RB <numeric_value> Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
RB DN HP 8568B/
RB UP HP 8594E
RB AUTO
RB?
RBR RBR <numeric_value> Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available
Ratio
RBR DN HP 8566B/
RBR UP HP 8568B/
RBR? HP 8594E
RC1…6 RC1…6 Recall Last State HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
RCLS RCLS <numeric_value> Recall State Register HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
RCLT RCLT TRA|TRB, <num- Recall Trace HP856xE/ available
ber> HP8594E
RESET RESET Instrument preset HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
REV REV Firmware revision HP 856xE/ available
REV? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
RL RL <numeric_value> Reference Level HP 856xE/ available
DB|DM HP 8566B/
RL DN HP 8568B/
RL UP HP 8594E
RL?
RLCAL RLCAL Reference Level Calibra- HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> tion HP 8566B/
RL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 770
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
RCLOSCAL RCLOSCAL Recall Open/Short Aver- HP 856xE/ not available
age HP 8594E
RCLTHRU RCLTHRU Recall Thru HP 856xE/ not available
HP 8594E
RLPOS 1) RLPOS Reference Level Position HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
RLPOS DN HP 8568B/
RLPOS UP HP 8594E
RLPOS?
ROFFSET ROFFSET Reference Level Offset HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> DB | HP 8566B/
DM
HP 8568B/
ROFFSET?
HP 8594E
RQS RQS Service Request Bit HP 856xE/ available
mask HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
S1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available
SAVES SAVES Save State Register HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SAVET SAVET TRA|TRB,<num- Save Trace HP856xE/ available
ber> HP8594E
SDEL delete limit line segment HP 856xE available
SDON limit line segment done HP 856xE available
SEDI edit limit line segment HP 856xE available
SMOOTH SMOOTH TRA|TRB| Smooth Trace HP 856xE/ available
TRC, <number of HP 8566B/
points>
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SNGLS SNGLS Single Sweep HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 771
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
SQUELCH 2) SQUELCH Squelch HP 856xE/ available
<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
DM | DB HP 8568B/
SQUELCH UP|DN HP 8594E
SQUELCH ON|OFF
SP SP <numeric_value> Span HP 8566A/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
SP DN HP 856xE/
SP UP HP 8566B/
SP? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SRCNORM 1) SRCNORM ON|OFF Source Normalization HP 856xE/ not available
SRCNORM 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SRCPOFS 1) SRCPOFS Source Power Offset HP 856xE/ not available
<numeric_value> DB | HP 8566B/
DM
HP 8568B/
SRCPOFS DN
HP 8594E
SRCPOFS UP
SRCPOFS?
SRCPWR 1) SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE/ not available
<numeric_value> DB | HP 8566B/
DM
HP 8568B/
SRCPWR DN
HP 8594E
SRCPWR UP
SRCPWR ON
SRCPWR OFF
SRCPWR?
SS SS <numeric_value> CF Step Size HP 8566A/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
SS DN HP 856xE/
SS UP HP 8566B/
SS AUTO HP 8568B/
SS? HP 8594E
ST ST <numeric_value> Sweep Time HP 8566A/ available
US|MS|SC HP 8568A/
ST DN HP 856xE/
ST UP HP 8566B/
ST AUTO HP 8568B/
ST? HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 772
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
STB STB Status byte query HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
STOREOPEN STOREOPEN Store Open HP 856xE/ not available
HP 8594E
STORESHORT STORESHORT Store Short HP 856xE/ not available
HP 8594E
STORETHRU STORETHRU Store Thru HP 856xE/ not available
HP 8594E
SUB Subtract HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SUM sum of trace amplitudes HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SV1…6 SV1…6 Save State HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
SWPCPL 2) SWPCPL SA | SR Sweep Couple HP 856xE/ available
SWPCPL? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SWPOUT 2) SWPOUT FAV|FAVA| Sweep Output HP 856xE/ available
RAMP HP 8566B/
SWPOUT? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
T2 2) T2 Line Trigger HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 773
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
TACL TACL? Returns instantaneous not available
measurement results.
See TRACe<trace
#>:IMMediate:LEVel? for
full description.
TBCL TBCL?
TCCL TCCL?
TACR TACR? Returns instantaneous not available
measurement results.
See TRACe<trace
#>:IMMediate:LEVel? for
full description.
TBCR TBCR?
TCCR TCCR?
TB TB Transfer B HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
TDF TDF P Trace Data Format HP 856xE/ available
TDF M HP 8566B/
TDF B HP 8568B/
TDF A HP 8594E
TDF I
TH TH <numeric_value> Threshold HP 856xE/ available
DB|DM HP 8566B/
TH DN HP 8568B/
TH UP HP 8594E
TH ON
TH OFF
TH AUTO
TH?
THE THE ON| OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TIMEDSP 1) TIMEDSP ON|OFF Time Display HP 856xE/ available
TIMEDSP 1|0 HP 8566B/
TIMEDSP? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TM TM FREE|VID|EXT| Trigger Mode HP 856xE/ available
LINE2) HP 8566B/
TM? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TM LINE 2) TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 774
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
TRA TRA B Transfer A HP 856xE/ available
TRA A HP 8566B/
TRA I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TRB TRB B Transfer B HP 856xE/ available
TRB A HP 8566B/
TRB I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TRSTAT TRSTAT? Trace State Query HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TS TS Take Sweep HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
UR 2) UR Plot Command HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition, HP 8566B/ available
arrays are not supported HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
VAVG VAVG Video Averaging HP 856xE/ available
VAVG TRA|TRB|TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
VB VB <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
VB DN HP 8568B/
VB UP HP 8594E
VB AUTO
VB?
VBR 1) VBR <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE/ available
VBR DN HP 8566B/
VBR UP HP 8568B/
VBR? HP 8594E
VIEW VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC HP 856xE/ available
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 775
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status
Models
VTL VTL <numeric_value> Video Trigger Level HP 856xE/ not available
DB|DM HP 8594E
VTL DN
VTL UP
VTL?
1) HP 8594E only
2) Command is accepted without error message, but is ignored
14.12.2 Special features of the syntax parsing algorithms for 8566A and
8568A models
The command syntax is very different for models A and B. Different names are
assigned to identical instrument functions, and the command structure likewise differs
considerably between models A and models B.
The command structure for models A is as follows:
<command>::= <command
code>[<SPC>][<data>|<step>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<command
code>]…<delimiter>
<data>::= <Value>[<SPC>][<units
code>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<SPC>][<data>]…
<step>::= UP|DN
where
<command code> = see Table "Supported Commands"
<Value> = integer or floating-point numerical value
<units code> = DM | -DM | DB | HZ | KZ | MZ | GZ | MV | UV | SC | MS | US
<delimiter> = <CR> | <LF> | <,> | <;> | <ETX>
<SPC> = 3210
<ETX> = 310
Command sections given in [ ] are optional.
The R&S ESW GPIB hardware differs from that used in the HP analyzers. Therefore,
the following constraint exists:
<LF>| <EOI> are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify
them. The other delimiters are identified and evaluated during syntax analysis.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 776
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
14.12.3 Special behavior of commands
Command Known Differences
ABORT Does not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.
ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected.
AT AT DN/UP: Step size
CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the sta-
tus byte. An additional DONE command is required for that purpose.
CF Default value, range, step size
CR Default ratio Span/RBW
CT Formula for coupled sweep time
CV Default ratio RBW/VBW
DET DET? returns SAMP instead of SMP on the R&S ESW.
DET not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.
ERR? Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a '0' in response.
FA Default value, range, step size
FB Default value, range, step size
ID
M2 Default value, range, step size
M3 Default value, range, step size
MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker.
MKBW Default value
MKPT Step size
MKPX Step size
OL? Storage of instrument settings:
80 characters are returned as information on the instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters returned does not correspond to the original data con-
tents of the 8566A/8568A family.
OL Readout of instrument settings:
The 80 characters read by means of OL? are accepted as information on the correspond-
ing instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents
of the 8566A/8568A family.
RB Default value, range, step size
RL Default value, step size
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 777
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
Command Known Differences
RLPOS Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is
not active.
RQS Supported bits:
1 (Units key pressed)
2 (End of Sweep)
3 (Device error)
4 (Command complete)
5 (Illegal command)
14.12.4 Model-dependent default settings
If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model, the GPIB address is automati-
cally switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R&S ESW (20) is still
set. If a different value is set, this value is maintained. Upon return to SCPI, this
address remains unchanged.
The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan-
guage and for the commands IP, KST and RESET:
Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points
8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC
8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC
8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC
8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC
8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC
8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC
Stop frequency
The stop frequency given in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency
range of the R&S ESW.
Command LF sets the stop frequency for 8566A/B to a maximum value of 2 GHz.
Test points (trace points)
The number of trace points is switched over only upon transition to the REMOTE state.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 778
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models
14.12.5 Data output formats
In the case of the SCPI and IEEE488.2 standards, the output formats for numerical
data are flexible to a large extent. The output format for the HP units, by contrast, is
accurately defined with respect to the number of digits. The memory areas for reading
instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote-control pro-
grams for instruments of this series.
Therefore, in response to a query, the R&S ESW returns data of the same structure as
that used by the original instruments; this applies in particular to the number of charac-
ters returned.
Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output: Display Units (com-
mand O1) and physical values (command O2, O3 or TDF P). As to the "Display Units"
format, the level data of the R&S ESW is converted to match the value range and the
resolution of the 8566/8568 series. Upon transition to the REMOTE state, the
R&S ESW is reconfigured such that the number of test points (trace points) corre-
sponds to that of the 85xx families (1001 for 8566A/B and 8568A/B, 601 for 8560E to
8565E, 401 for 8594E).
14.12.6 Trace data output formats
All formats are supported for trace data output: display units (command O1), display
units in two byte binary data (command O2 or TDF B and MDS W), display units in one
byte binary data (command O4 or TDF B and MDS B) and physical values (commands
O3 or TDF P). With format "display units" the level data is converted into value range
and resolution of the 8566/8568 models. On transition to REMOTE state the number of
trace points are reconfigured in order to be conform to the selected instrument model
(1001 for 8566A/B and 8568 A/B, 601 for 8560E to 8565E, 401 for 8594E).
14.12.7 Trace data input formats
Trace data input is only supported for binary date (TDF B, TDF A, TDF I, MDS W, MDS
B).
14.12.8 GPIB status reporting
The assignment of status bits by commands R1, R2, R3, R4, RQS is supported.
The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8-bit value with the following
assignment:
Bit enabled by RQS Description
0 not used (value 0)
1 Units key pressed
2 End of Sweep
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 779
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PSA models
Bit enabled by RQS Description
3 Device Error
4 Command Complete
5 Illegal Command
6 Service Request
7 not used (value 0)
Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0.
Please note that the R&S ESW reports any key pressed on the front panel rather than
only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled.
Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB? query. On the HP ana-
lyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus. On the R&S ESW this is
not possible. Therefore this bit is set, as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set. It won't be
reset by performing a serial poll.
14.13 Reference: command set of emulated PSA models
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S ESW is sufficient to
run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
Supported 89600 commands
*CAL?
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*IDN?
*IST?
*OPC
*OPT?
*PCB
*PRE
*PSC
*RST
*SRE
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 780
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PSA models
Supported 89600 commands
*STB?
*TRG
*TST?
*WAI
:CALibration:AUTO OFF|ON|ALERt
:CALibration:TCORrections AUTO|ON|OFF
:CONFigure:WAVeform
:DIAGnostic:EABY ON|OFF
:DIAGnostic:LATCh:VALue <numeric>
:DIAGnostic:LATCh:SELect <string>
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string>
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF|ON
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel <numeric>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <numeric>
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii|REAL|UINT|MATLAB,<numeric>
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
:INSTrument:CATalog?
:INSTrument:NSELect <numeric>
:MMEMory:CATalog? <dir_name>
:MMEMory:COPY <‘file_name1’>,<‘file_name2’>
:MMEMory:DATA <‘file_name’>,<definite_length_block>
:MMEMory:DELete <‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <‘dir_name’>
:MMEMory:MOVE <‘file_name1’>,<‘file_name2’>
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <numeric>,<‘file_name’>
:READ:WAVform?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <numeric>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 781
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PSA models
Supported 89600 commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <numeric>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <numeric>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <numeric>
[:SENSe]:POWer:ATTenuation <numeric>
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <numeric>
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:OUTPut OFF|ON
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal|EAUTo
[:SENSe]:SPECtrum:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:ADC:RANGe P6
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:APER?
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TACount <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:ACTive?
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:TYPE FLAT|GAUSsian
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFGain <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFPath NARRow|WIDE
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:NCPTrace ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:PDIT ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:EOFFset?
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:INTerpolation ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 782
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PSA models
Supported 89600 commands
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>
:SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
:SYSTem:KLOCK?
:SYSTem:MESSage <string>
:SYSTem:PRESet
:SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>
:SYSTem:VERSion?
:TRACe:COPY <src_trace>,<dest_trace>
:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6, <definite_length_block> |
<comma_separated_ASCII_data>
:TRACe:MODE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold|VIEW|BLANk
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:LEVel <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel <numeric>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 783
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PXA models
Supported 89600 commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|VIDeo|EXTernal<1|2>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency <freq>
14.14 Reference: command set of emulated PXA models
The R&S ESW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PXA
instruments.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S ESW is sufficient to
run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
Table 14-16: Supported PXA commands
ABORt
CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:RIGHt
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MINimum
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE POSition | DELTa | FIXed | OFF
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE[?] SPAN | BAND
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:CENTer
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:RLEVel
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:STARt
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12[:SET]:STOP
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X[?] <freq | time>
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition[?] <real>
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:SPAN
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STARt
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 784
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PXA models
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STOP
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y[?] <real>
CALibration[:ALL][?]
CALibration:AUTO[?] ON | PARTial | OFF | ALERt
CALibration:AUTO:ALERt[?] TTEMperature | DAY | WEEK | NONE
CALibration:AUTO:MODE[?] ALL | NRF
CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF?
CONFigure? SAN
DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel[?] <real>
DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet[?] <rel_ampl>
INITiate:CONTinuous[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
INITiate[:IMMediate]
INPut:COUPling[?] AC | DC
MMEMory:CATalog? [<directory_name>]
MMEMory:CDIRectory[?] [<directory_name>]
MMEMory:COPY <string>, <string>[, <string>, <string>]
MMEMory:DATA[?] <file_name>, <data>
MMEMory:DELete <file_name>[, <directory_name>]
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, <filename>
MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
MMEMory:MOVE <string>, <string>[, <string>, <string>]
MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name>
MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, <filename>
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[?] <integer>
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][?] ON | OFF | 1 | 0
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE[?] RMS | LOG | SCALar[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution][?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo[?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[?] <real>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO[?] ON | OFF | 1 | 0
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[?] <freq>
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 785
R&S®ESW Remote commands in the receiver application
Reference: command set of emulated PXA models
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[?] <freq>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[?] <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts? <integer>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME? <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO? OFF | ON | 0 | 1
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:DELay[?] <time>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:DELay[?] <time>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:LEVel[?] <level>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:LEVel[?] <level>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal2:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel[?]
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe[?] NEGative | POSitive
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURCe EXTernal | IMMediate | VIDeo | LINE | EXTernal1 | EXT1 | EXTernal2 |
EXT2 | RFBurst | FRAMe
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay[?] <time>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe[?] OFF | ON | 0 | 1
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel[?] <ampl>
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe[?] POSitive | NEGative
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 786
R&S®ESW Maintenance, storage, transport and disposal
Transporting
15 Maintenance, storage, transport and dis-
posal
The product does not require regular maintenance. It only requires occasional clean-
ing. It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time.
15.1 Cleaning
How to clean the product is described in "Cleaning the product" on page 20.
Do not use any liquids for cleaning. Cleaning agents, solvents, acids and bases can
damage the front panel labeling, plastic parts and display.
15.2 Storage
Protect the product against dust. Ensure that the environmental conditions, e.g. tem-
perature range and climatic load, meet the values specified in the data sheet.
15.3 Transporting
Lifting and carrying
See:
● "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 19
● Chapter 4.1, "Lifting and carrying", on page 24.
Packing
Use the original packaging material. It consists of antistatic wrap for electrostatic pro-
tection and packing material designed for the product.
If you do not have the original packaging, use similar materials that provide the same
level of protection. You can also contact your local Rohde & Schwarz service center for
advice.
Securing
When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment, make sure that
the product is properly secured. Only use items intended for securing objects.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 787
R&S®ESW Maintenance, storage, transport and disposal
Disposal
Transport altitude
The maximum transport altitude without pressure compensation is 4600 m above sea
level.
15.4 Disposal
Rohde & Schwarz is committed to making careful, ecologically sound use of natural
resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products. Help us by dis-
posing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact.
Disposing electrical and electronic equipment
A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste
after it has come to the end of its service life. Even disposal via the municipal collection
points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.
Figure 15-1: Labeling in line with EU directive WEEE
Rohde & Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco-friendly disposal or
recycling of waste material. As a manufacturer, Rohde & Schwarz completely fulfills its
obligation to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste. Contact your
local service representative to dispose of the product.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 788
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Error information
16 Troubleshooting
If the results do not meet your expectations, the following sections may contain helpful
hints and information.
● Error information................................................................................................... 789
● Error messages in remote control mode............................................................... 791
● Troubleshooting remote operation........................................................................ 792
● Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints..................................................................... 794
● System recovery................................................................................................... 796
● Collecting information for support......................................................................... 796
● Contacting customer support................................................................................ 798
16.1 Error information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,
are displayed in the status bar.
Depending on the type of message, the status message is indicated in varying colors.
Table 16-1: Status bar information - color coding
Color Type Description
Red Error An error occurred at the start or during a measurement, e.g. due to missing
data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be started or com-
pleted correctly.
Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement, e.g. the settings no lon-
ger match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was
interrupted temporarily.
Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps.
No color No errors No message displayed - normal operation.
Green Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show-
successful ing a message.
If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed
next to the channel name ( ). This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is dis-
played, as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the
currently selected measurement only.
Furthermore, a status bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO reg-
ister for the application concerned. Messages of a specific type can be queried using
the SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended? command. Some errors also change particular sta-
tus bits in other registers, as indicated in Table 16-2. For more information, see the
R&S ESW User Manual.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 789
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Error information
When you select the error message bar or status message bar, the R&S ESW shows a
list of all current errors or status messages. In the error message bar, you can select
one of the error messages to open a dialog box that can help you to remedy the error.
Refer to the table below for information about which error message opens which dialog
box.
Table 16-2: List of keywords
Keyword Description Bit in status register
"AC CPL" This label is displayed when a measurement is con-
figured to be AC coupled, but information in the DC
range is detected. This situation can yield inaccu-
rate measurement results.
You can avoid this error message by changing the
input coupling type.
Selecting the "AC CPL" error message opens a dia-
log box to configure the RF input.
"INPUT OVLD" The signal level at the RF input connector exceeds STATus:QUEStionable:
the maximum. POWer, bit 3
The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to
protect the device. To re-enable measurement,
decrease the level at the RF input connector and
reconnect the RF input to the mixer input.
Selecting the "Input OVLD" error message opens a
dialog box to configure the amplitude.
"RF OVLD" Overload of the input mixer or of the analog IF path. STATus:QUEStionable:
● Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input). POWer, bit 0
● Reduce the input level (for digital input)
Selecting the "RF OVLD" error message opens a
dialog box to configure the amplitude.
"LO UNL" Error in the instrument's frequency processing hard- STAT:QUES:FREQuency, bit 1
ware was detected.
"NO REF" Instrument was set to an external reference but no STAT:QUES:FREQuency, bit 8
signal was detected on the reference input.
Selecting the "No Ref" error message opens a dia-
log box to configure the external reference.
"OVENCOLD" The optional OCXO reference frequency has not yet STAT:QUES:FREQuency, bit 0
reached its operating temperature. The message
usually disappears a few minutes after power has
been switched on.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 790
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Error messages in remote control mode
Keyword Description Bit in status register
"UNCAL" One of the following conditions applies: STATus:QUEStionable, bit 8
● Correction data has been switched off.
● No correction values are available, for example
after a firmware update.
● Record the correction data by performing a self
alignment
Selecting the "Uncal" error message opens the
"Self Alignment dialog box."
"WRONG_FW" The firmware version is out-of-date and does not
support the currently installed hardware. Until the
firmware version is updated, this error message is
displayed and self-alignment fails.
Selecting the "Wrong_FW" error message opens a
dialog box to manage firmware and options.
16.2 Error messages in remote control mode
In remote control mode error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the sta-
tus reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The
answer format of R&S ESW to the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>; <remote control
command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command TEST:COMMAND generates the following answer to the query
SYSTem:ERRor?
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"
There are two types of error messages:
● Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes. These mes-
sages are defined and described in the SCPI standard and not listed here.
● Device-specific error messages use positive error codes. These messages are
described below.
Table 16-3: Device-specific error messages
Error code Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked
This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF
front-end.
1060 Trigger-Block Gate Delay Error- gate length < Gate Delay
This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull-in delay
with a predefined gate delay.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 791
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting remote operation
Error code Error text in the case of queue poll
Error explanation
1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked
This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the
external generator module.
2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence
This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot
be interrupted. Such sequences are for example:
● Recording the system error correction data (alignment)
● Instrument self-test
In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior
to starting the printout.
2033 Printer Not Available
This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available
output devices. A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly
installed.
2034 CPU Temperature is too high
This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 °C.
16.3 Troubleshooting remote operation
If problems arise during measurement in remote operation, try the following methods to
solve them.
Incompleted sequential commands - blocked remote channels
If a sequential command cannot be completed, for example because a triggered sweep
never receives a trigger, the remote control program will never finish and the remote
channel to the R&S ESW is blocked for further commands. In this case, you must inter-
rupt processing on the remote channel in order to abort the measurement.
To regain control over a blocked remote channel
Usually, if you wait a minute for the VISA connection to detect the lost connection and
clear the control channel by itself, you can then re-establish the connection again. If
this fails, try the following:
1. Press "Local" on the front panel of the R&S ESW to return to manual operation (if
not disabled). Then re-establish the connection.
2. Send a "Device Clear" command from the control instrument to the R&S ESW to
clear all currently active remote channels. Depending on the used interface and
protocol, send the following commands:
● Visa: viClear()
● GPIB: ibclr()
● RSIB: RSDLLibclr()
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 792
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting remote operation
The remote channel currently processing the incompleted command is then ready
to receive further commands again.
3. On the remote channel performing the measurement, send the SCPI command
ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system.
4. If the R&S ESW still does not react to the remote commands, switch it off and back
on.
Ignored commands
When a remote command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is
ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not auto-
matically adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instru-
ment status (e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Detecting false commands - log file
If a remote program does not provide the expected results and you are using a GPIB
connection, you can log the commands and any errors that may occur. To activate the
SCPI error log function, in the "Network + Remote" dialog box, in the "GPIB" tab, select
"I/O Logging".
All remote control commands received by the R&S ESW are recorded in log files with
the following syntax:
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<xx>
where <xx> is a consecutive number, starting with 00;
A new file is created each time you stop and restart the logging function. The lowest
available number is used for the <xx> extension.
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to
find misspelled keywords in control programs. However, remember to turn off the log-
ging function after debugging to avoid unnecessary access to the hard drive and use of
storage space.
Interrupted VISA connection to R&S ESW
Sometimes, in combination with a certain LAN-switch (SMC Switch 210), the VISA
remote connection to the R&S ESW is interrupted. In this case, disable the power save
mode for the network controller on the R&S ESW.
1. On the R&S ESW, open the Windows "Start" menu.
2. Search for the network connection properties.
3. On the "Power Management" tab, disable the power save option.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 793
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints
16.4 Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints
Power levels for low frequency signals not correct..................................................... 794
Invalid trace display.....................................................................................................794
Data capturing takes too long..................................................................................... 794
Multiple user access to one instrument.......................................................................795
Web browser access to instrument fails......................................................................795
The transducer factors/limit lines applied to my measurement are different to those dis-
played in the Transducer/Lines dialog box..................................................................795
Power levels for low frequency signals not correct
By default, the R&S ESW uses AC coupling for RF input. For very low frequencies, the
input signal may be distorted with this setting. In this case, use DC coupling instead. To
change the setting, select "INPUT/OUPUT" > "Input Source Config > Radio Frequency
> Input Coupling > DC".
Invalid trace display
If output to the "IF 2 GHz OUT" connector is activated, the measured values are no
longer sent to the display; thus, the trace data currently displayed on the R&S ESW
becomes invalid. A message in the status bar indicates this situation.
Data capturing takes too long
Spectrum application only.
Particularly for FFT sweeps, the time required to process the data may be considerably
longer than the time required to capture the data. Thus, if you only consider the defined
sweep time, you may assume an error has occurred if the measurement takes longer
than expected.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 794
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints
However, while the sweep time only defines the time in which data is actually captured,
the total sweep duration includes the time required for capturing and processing the
data. Thus, for FFT sweeps in the Spectrum application, the sweep duration is now
also indicated in the channel bar, behind the sweep time. In remote operation, the esti-
mated sweep duration can be queried for all sweep modes (also zero span and fre-
quency sweeps).
Tip: To determine the necessary timeout for data capturing in a remote control pro-
gram, double the estimated time and add 1 second.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:DURation
Multiple user access to one instrument
Using the R&S ESW's web browser interface, several users can access and operate
the same instrument simultaneously. This is useful for troubleshooting or training pur-
poses.
Type the instrument's host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on
your PC, for example "http://10.113.10.203". The instrument home page (welcome
page) opens.
Note: This function can be deactivated for the instrument. After a firmware update, it is
automatically activated again.
Web browser access to instrument fails
If an error message ("Failed to connect to server (code. 1006)") is displayed in the web
browser instead of the instrument's user interface then the LAN web browser interface
was probably deactivated.
The transducer factors/limit lines applied to my measurement are different to
those displayed in the Transducer/Lines dialog box
If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Cur-
rent Settings" only) it is anticipated that these transducer values should remain valid
after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and the
original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are recal-
led and applied to the measurement. In the "Transducer" dialog box, however, the
changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated transducer file was loa-
ded.
The same applies to limit line settings.
If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box (see Chapter 12.4.2, "Working with transducers", on page 353)
and toggle the "X-Axis" option from "lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the
transducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed transducer values are
applied to the current measurement. Now you can create a new save set with the
updated transducer values.
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 795
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Collecting information for support
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box (see Chapter 10.5.2.2, "Limit line settings and functions",
on page 270) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that change, the limit line file is auto-
matically reloaded, and the changed limit values are applied to the current measure-
ment. Now a new save set with the updated limit values can be created.
16.5 System recovery
The system drive of the R&S ESW is delivered with a recovery partition that allows you
to restore the original operating system image and firmware.
To restore the original operating system image and firmware
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar, or press the "Windows" key or the [CTRL]
+ [ESC] key combination on the (external) keyboard.
2. Open the Windows "Settings".
3. Select "Update & Security" > "Recovery".
4. In the "Advanced Startup" section, select "Restart Now".
The "R&S Recovery Environment" starts.
5. In the "R&S Recovery Environment", select "Factory Default Restore".
The default image is restored.
6. Reboot the instrument.
After the default image is restored, upgrade to the desired firmware version (see Chap-
ter 12.6.4, "Firmware updates", on page 374).
16.6 Collecting information for support
If problems occur, the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will
be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy.
In addition, our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob-
lems that you may encounter with your R&S ESW. We will find solutions more quickly
and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below.
● Windows Event Log Files
Windows records important actions of applications and the operating system in
event logs. You can create event log files to summarize and save the existing event
logs (see "To create windows event log files" on page 797).
● System Configuration: The "System Configuration" dialog box (in the "Setup"
menu) provides information on:
– Hardware Info: hardware assemblies
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 796
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Collecting information for support
– Versions and Options: the status of all software and hardware options instal-
led on your instrument
– System Messages: messages on any errors that may have occurred
An .xml file with information on the system configuration ("Device Footprint") can
be created automatically (using the DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo command or
as described in "To collect the support information" on page 797).
● Error Log: The RSError.log file (in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\log directory)
contains a chronological record of errors.
● Support file: a *.zip file with important support information can be created auto-
matically (in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\user direc-
tory). The *.zip file contains the system configuration information ("Device Foot-
print"), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display.
To collect the support information
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Select "Service" > "R&S Support" and then "Create R&S Support Information".
The file is stored as
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\ESW\<version>\user\
ESW_*.zip.
To create windows event log files
1. Select the "Windows Start Button" in the bottom left corner.
2. Enter Event Viewer and select "Enter".
3. Select and expand "Windows Logs" in the "Console Tree".
4. Right-click on each subsection and select "Save All Events As...".
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 797
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Contacting customer support
Figure 16-1: Event Viewer
5. Enter a file name and select "Save"
Collect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the prob-
lem. Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed in Chap-
ter 16.7, "Contacting customer support", on page 798.
Packing and transporting the instrument
If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped, observe the notes described in
Chapter 15.3, "Transporting", on page 787.
16.7 Contacting customer support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz product, contact our customer sup-
port center. A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you
to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applica-
tions of Rohde & Schwarz products.
Contact information
Contact our customer support center at www.rohde-schwarz.com/support, or follow this
QR code:
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 798
R&S®ESW Troubleshooting
Contacting customer support
Figure 16-2: QR code to the Rohde & Schwarz support page
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 799
R&S®ESW List of commands
List of commands
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE........................................................................................................................ 502
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:IF..................................................................................................................................556
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:SCPL........................................................................................................................... 556
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO......................................................................................................557
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE...................................................................................................... 557
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue]................................................................................................... 556
[SENSe:]BWIDth:IF........................................................................................................................................556
[SENSe:]BWIDth:SCPL................................................................................................................................. 556
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution].......................................................................................................................556
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO............................................................................................................557
[SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE............................................................................................................ 557
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND................................................................................................................. 525
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS...................................................................................................................526
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?............................................................................................................526
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar.................................................................................................................527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent...........................................................................................................527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA..................................................................................................................527
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic..........................................................................................................528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer................................................................................................................. 528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs................................................................................................................528
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect............................................................................................................... 529
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber........................................................................................................... 529
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:ADDRess......................................................................................................688
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:COMMent..................................................................................................... 688
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault:EXECute.........................................................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DEFault[:COMMand].................................................................................... 688
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:DELete..........................................................................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:INPut.............................................................................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:LOAD............................................................................................................689
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:NAME........................................................................................................... 690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:OPC..............................................................................................................690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>:EXECute............................................................................ 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:RANGe<range>[:COMMand]....................................................................... 690
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SCPI............................................................................................................. 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:SELect.......................................................................................................... 691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:STORe..........................................................................................................691
[SENSe:]CORRection:SWITch:WAIT.............................................................................................................692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive..................................................................................................692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]....................................................................... 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?.............................................................................................. 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent............................................................................................. 693
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA.................................................................................................... 693
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete................................................................................................. 694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>:ACTive?............................................................................... 692
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:INPut<rf>[:STATe].................................................................................694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing............................................................................................... 694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect..................................................................................................694
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 800
R&S®ESW List of commands
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT..................................................................................................... 695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW.................................................................................................... 499
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe]................................................................................................. 694
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:BREak.............................................................................................................. 695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog............................................................................................................695
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent.........................................................................................................696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:DELete............................................................................................................. 696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:INPut<rf>[:STATe]............................................................................................ 697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<range>............................................................................................... 696
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect..............................................................................................................697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT.................................................................................................................697
[SENSe:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe]............................................................................................................ 697
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel.................................................................................................................. 543
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]............................................................................................................... 543
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement...........................................................................................................500
[SENSe:]DETector<t>:RECeiver[:FUNCtion]................................................................................................. 478
[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]................................................................................................................. 482
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO.....................................................................................................................500
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:LISN:PHASe..........................................................................................................507
[SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME...................................................................................................................... 500
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer....................................................................................................................... 550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP.............................................................................................................550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE.........................................................................................................................480
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SCOupled...................................................................................................................550
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN.......................................................................................................................... 551
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL................................................................................................................ 551
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt......................................................................................................................... 482
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP..........................................................................................................................483
[SENSe:]FREQuency:TDOPtim.....................................................................................................................481
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH..................................................................................................................... 518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW].................................................................................................................... 518
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover..................................................................................................519
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt.........................................................................................................520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP......................................................................................................... 520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND........................................................................................................... 521
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet..............................................................................................520
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe................................................................................................. 521
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue]...............................................................................................522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE............................................................................................................ 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW]........................................................................................................... 522
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:IF?.................................................................................................................................. 523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower.........................................................................................................................519
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH.................................................................................................................... 523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH........................................................................................................ 523
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW]....................................................................................................... 524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW]...................................................................................................................524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs............................................................................................................................ 524
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe].................................................................................................... 525
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe]........................................................................................................................... 518
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FALLback.....................................................................................................678
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 801
R&S®ESW List of commands
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth.......................................................................................................................675
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640........................................................................................................................... 675
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc........................................................................................................................ 676
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce...................................................................................................................... 676
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?........................................................................................................677
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge...................................................................................................................... 677
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BANDwidth:RESolution.................................................................................................483
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:BARS............................................................................................................................ 483
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO............................................................................................. 484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:ATTenuation[:VALue].......................................................................................... 484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO........................................................................................................ 484
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:AUTO................................................................................................ 485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:LNA:STATe................................................................................................485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................................................................485
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:INPut:TYPE...................................................................................................................486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:LISN:PHASe................................................................................................................. 507
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:NAME............................................................................................................................486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:RANGes[:COUNt]......................................................................................................... 486
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STARt............................................................................................................................487
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STEP.............................................................................................................................487
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:STOP............................................................................................................................ 488
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TDOMain.......................................................................................................................480
[SENSe:]SCAN<sr>:TIME............................................................................................................................. 488
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt............................................................................................................................... 488
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe................................................................................................................................559
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt............................................................................................ 562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth...........................................................................................562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe].............................................................................................562
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff.................................................................................................................558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth.................................................................................................................. 558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity.................................................................................................................558
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce.................................................................................................................559
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE..................................................................................................................... 560
[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing.............................................................................................................................489
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME.................................................................................................................................. 479
*CAL?.............................................................................................................................................................458
*CLS...............................................................................................................................................................458
*ESE.............................................................................................................................................................. 458
*ESR?............................................................................................................................................................ 458
*IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 459
*IST?..............................................................................................................................................................459
*OPC..............................................................................................................................................................459
*OPT?............................................................................................................................................................ 459
*PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 460
*PRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 460
*PSC.............................................................................................................................................................. 460
*RST.............................................................................................................................................................. 460
*SRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 461
*STB?.............................................................................................................................................................461
*TRG..............................................................................................................................................................461
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 802
R&S®ESW List of commands
*TST?.............................................................................................................................................................461
*WAI...............................................................................................................................................................462
ABORt............................................................................................................................................................466
CALCulate:STATistics:CAPD[:STATe]............................................................................................................462
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF.......................................................................................................588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...................................................................................... 599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT..................................................................................... 599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt.....................................................................................600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................................... 599
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT....................................................................................... 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT...................................................................................... 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...................................................................................... 601
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK].................................................................................... 600
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE......................................................................................................588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence........................................................................................... 588
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe...................................................................................... 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea....................................................................................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.................................................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow.................................................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].................................................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow....................................................................610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT..................................................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]....................................................................611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe............................................................................. 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea..............................................................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...................................................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.........................................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow......................................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...........................................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].........................................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe..........................................................610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow.......................................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................................ 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK].......................................................... 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe.....................................................................................................589
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X.............................................................................................................. 590
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?............................................................................................ 601
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?............................................................................................................ 602
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe].................................................................................................... 589
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>............................................................................................................................. 611
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl>:STATe..................................................................................................................612
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>..............................................................................................................................612
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl>:STATe.................................................................................................................. 612
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:ALL?............................................................................................503
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:COMMent....................................................................................504
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 803
R&S®ESW List of commands
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?....................................................................................... 504
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:DETector..................................................................................... 504
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?.............................................................................. 505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:LEVel...........................................................................................505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?.......................................................................................... 505
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?...................................................................................... 506
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?.......................................................................................506
CALCulate<n>:FMEasurement[:AUTO].........................................................................................................499
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive?.................................................................................................................. 614
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CLEar[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................627
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent............................................................................................................... 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain................................................................................................... 620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE......................................................................................................621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet.................................................................................................... 615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt....................................................................................................... 621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing.................................................................................................. 621
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA]......................................................................................................620
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY......................................................................................................................615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete....................................................................................................................615
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL?...................................................................................................................... 627
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin......................................................................................................622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE.........................................................................................................622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet.......................................................................................................616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt.......................................................................................................... 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing..................................................................................................... 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe......................................................................................................... 616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold................................................................................................. 623
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA]........................................................................................................ 622
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME..................................................................................................................... 624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe..................................................................................................................... 616
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>...............................................................................................................617
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk..................................................................................................617
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT....................................................................................................................... 624
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin.......................................................................................................625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE......................................................................................................... 625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet........................................................................................................618
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt........................................................................................................... 625
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing......................................................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe..........................................................................................................618
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold.................................................................................................. 626
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA]......................................................................................................... 624
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF............................................................................................................... 590
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe]............................................................................................ 593
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer........................................................................................... 548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth........................................................................548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold........................................................................ 549
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe.............................................................................. 549
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]..............................................................................548
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT.............................................................................................. 596
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT............................................................................................. 596
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 804
R&S®ESW List of commands
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt............................................................................................. 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................................................... 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................................................... 597
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT...............................................................................................598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt.............................................................................................. 598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK].............................................................................................598
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion..................................................................................................... 490
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled:LSCan............................................................................................ 592
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe]...........................................................................................592
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe...............................................................................................603
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................................ 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]......................................................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.......................................................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow...........................................................................605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT............................................................................ 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].......................................................................... 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe........................................................................... 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow............................................................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT..............................................................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]............................................................................606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe..................................................................................... 603
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea...................................................................................... 604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...............................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe.................................................................604
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................................................. 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT................................................................... 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe.................................................................. 605
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow.................................................................. 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT.................................................................... 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK].................................................................. 606
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.............................................................................................................591
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X...................................................................................................................... 591
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT............................................................................................... 594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt.............................................................................................. 595
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]............................................................................................594
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent...................................................................................................... 509
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.................................................................................................................... 602
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]............................................................................................................ 590
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:EXPRession[:DEFine]........................................................................................... 578
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE................................................................................................................... 579
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition................................................................................................................ 579
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe....................................................................................................................580
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:ADD................................................................................................................. 490
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO............................................................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:CLEar[:IMMediate]........................................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin........................................................................................................... 492
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:METHod...........................................................................................................492
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 805
R&S®ESW List of commands
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:ALL?................................................................................................495
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:COMMent........................................................................................495
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELete............................................................................................ 496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DELTa?............................................................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:DETector?....................................................................................... 496
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:FREQuency?...................................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:LEVel...............................................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:SIZE?.............................................................................................. 497
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>:TRACe?.......................................................................................... 498
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PLISt<pi>[:DATA]?........................................................................................... 498
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges:PCOunt....................................................................................... 492
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges[:VALue]........................................................................................493
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate]...................................................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:ADD........................................................................................................................490
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO..................................................................................................................... 491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate]................................................................................................. 491
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:MARGin..................................................................................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:METHod.................................................................................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:ALL?.................................................................................................495
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:COMMent......................................................................................... 495
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELete............................................................................................. 496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DELTa?.............................................................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:DETector?.........................................................................................496
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:FREQuency?....................................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:LEVel?..............................................................................................497
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:SIZE?............................................................................................... 497
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>:TRACe?............................................................................................498
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PLISt<peak>[:DATA]?............................................................................................ 498
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges........................................................................................................... 493
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt..............................................................................................492
CALCulate<n>:PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................................................................ 491
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]...................................................................................................581
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:RINTerval....................................................................................................584
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect........................................................................................................581
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth....................................................................................................................582
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TRACe.....................................................................................................................582
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?....................................................................................................... 582
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe]......................................................................................................583
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe].................................................................................................................... 584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate]......................................................................................... 581
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:RINTerval.......................................................................................... 584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect.............................................................................................. 581
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth.......................................................................................................... 582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe].........................................................................................584
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TRACe........................................................................................................... 582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA?..............................................................................................582
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe]............................................................................................ 583
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram[:STATe]...........................................................................................................584
CALCulate<n>:TFLine:STATe........................................................................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:THReshold............................................................................................................................ 595
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 806
R&S®ESW List of commands
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe................................................................................................................. 595
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>..............................................................................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl>:STATe.................................................................................................................. 613
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer..........................................................................................................................551
CALibration:DUE:DAYS................................................................................................................................. 681
CALibration:DUE:SCHedule.......................................................................................................................... 680
CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown........................................................................................................................ 682
CALibration:DUE:TIME..................................................................................................................................682
CALibration:DUE:WARMup........................................................................................................................... 680
CALibration:RESult?......................................................................................................................................679
CALibration[:ALL]?.........................................................................................................................................679
CONFigure:RECeiver:MEASurement[:DEFault]............................................................................................ 470
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL.....................................................................................................................726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:FORMat...........................................................................................................................726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe..............................................................................................................................726
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?..................................................................................................................... 727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete..................................................................................................................727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL.......................................................................................................... 727
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue]................................................................................................................. 727
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt?........................................................................................................................... 732
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo?.................................................................................................................... 732
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo?......................................................................................................................733
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance].................................................................................................. 682
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency....................................................................................... 683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum]..................................................................................................683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:SYNThtwo[:FREQuency]...................................................................................683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect].............................................................................................................683
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction................................................................................................................... 737
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?.............................................................................................. 738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete........................................................................................ 738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE...........................................................................................738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo?........................................................................................................................ 738
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:EXECute?................................................................................................... 684
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SPCHeck:RESult?.......................................................................................................685
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult?............................................................................................................684
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo?...................................................................................................................733
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR............................................................................................................................698
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency.................................................................................................................. 698
DISPlay:ATAB................................................................................................................................................ 462
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?...............................................................................................................477
DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?................................................................................................................477
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet............................................................................................................... 478
DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd[:STATe]............................................................................................................. 478
DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe]........................................................................................................ 478
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>....................................................................................................................702
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:HSL.................................................................................................................................702
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined....................................................................................................................... 703
DISPlay:FORMat........................................................................................................................................... 563
DISPlay:ITERm[:STATe]................................................................................................................................ 699
DISPlay:LOGO...............................................................................................................................................645
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 807
R&S®ESW List of commands
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe]..................................................................................................................................699
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe]................................................................................................................................ 699
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe].................................................................................................................................. 699
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?............................................................................................................................ 703
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect................................................................................................................................ 703
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe].....................................................................................................................700
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 592
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle..................................................................................................................... 593
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:DEFault........................................................................................... 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:LOWer.............................................................................................585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe............................................................................................ 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor:UPPer..............................................................................................586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]........................................................................................... 586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE..........................................................................................................................564
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault..................................................................................585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer................................................................................... 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe................................................................................... 585
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer.................................................................................... 586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe]..................................................................................586
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME......................................................................................................................... 700
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat.......................................................................................................... 700
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE.....................................................................................................501
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol...................................................................................................493
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing..............................................................................................549
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom................................................................................555
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:APPend:TEXT................................................................ 655
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:CLEar............................................................................. 656
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:NOTes:TEXT.............................................................................. 656
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe].................................................................555
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]..................................................................... 502
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA.............................................................................. 573
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA...................................................... 575
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]................................................... 575
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe]........................................................................... 574
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator...................................................................................................................... 577
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator...................................................................................................................... 632
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat............................................................................................................................578
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer............................................................................................................................ 577
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes............................................................................................................................577
FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................................................. 631
HCOPy:ABORt...............................................................................................................................................645
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci>.....................................................................................................................645
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL................................................................................................................................. 646
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined........................................................................................................................646
HCOPy:CONTent...........................................................................................................................................647
HCOPy:DESTination<di>...............................................................................................................................648
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor.................................................................................................................................. 649
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage........................................................................................................................... 649
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT........................................................................................................................650
HCOPy:MODE...............................................................................................................................................657
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 808
R&S®ESW List of commands
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe........................................................................................................................ 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom.................................................................................................................. 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT........................................................................................................................651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt...................................................................................................................... 651
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP......................................................................................................................... 652
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT........................................................................................................................ 652
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation............................................................................................................................652
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:CHANnel:STATe......................................................................................................652
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt.................................................................................................................... 653
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:SCALe.................................................................................................................... 653
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe......................................................................................................................654
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe.............................................................................................................................. 654
HCOPy:TREPort:APPend..............................................................................................................................657
HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription....................................................................................................................... 657
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault.................................................................................................................... 658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol...................................................................................... 658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT........................................................................................... 658
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe........................................................................................... 659
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe.........................................................................................................660
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LIST..........................................................................................................................660
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO....................................................................................................................... 661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol........................................................................................................661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect......................................................................................................................661
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?................................................................................................. 664
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:DELete.....................................................................................................664
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD.......................................................................................................665
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE....................................................................................................... 665
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW...................................................................................................................................665
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe..............................................................................................................666
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize........................................................................................................................... 666
HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors:STATe.................................................................................................................666
HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp:STATe................................................................................................................667
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove................................................................................................................... 667
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL............................................................................................................ 668
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe..................................................................................................................................668
HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe...................................................................................................................... 668
HCOPy[:IMMediate].......................................................................................................................................650
HCOPy[:IMMediate]:NEXT............................................................................................................................ 650
HOLD.............................................................................................................................................................467
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt...........................................................................................................................470
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate..................................................................................................................... 470
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE........................................................................................................................... 471
INITiate<n>:CONMeas.................................................................................................................................. 467
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous...............................................................................................................................468
INITiate<n>:EMITest...................................................................................................................................... 468
INITiate<n>:FMEasurement...........................................................................................................................469
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]................................................................................................................................ 469
INPut:TERMinator..........................................................................................................................................701
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AMODe.................................................................................................................... 552
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO....................................................................................................................... 553
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 809
R&S®ESW List of commands
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:LIMiter[:STATe].........................................................................................................515
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe].................................................................................................553
INPut<ip>:ATTenuation[:VALue].................................................................................................................... 552
INPut<ip>:COUPling......................................................................................................................................514
INPut<ip>:GAIN:AUTO.................................................................................................................................. 553
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:AUTO.......................................................................................................................... 554
INPut<ip>:GAIN:LNA:STATe..........................................................................................................................554
INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe..................................................................................................................................554
INPut<ip>:IMPedance....................................................................................................................................514
INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 508
INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe................................................................................................................................. 508
INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE]..................................................................................................................................509
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe]............................................................................. 515
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit:TYPE.................................................................................................516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection:FILTer:SPLit[:STATe].............................................................................................. 516
INPut<ip>:PRESelection[:STATe].................................................................................................................. 517
INPut<ip>:TYPE.............................................................................................................................................515
INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe............................................................................................................................... 538
INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue]............................................................................................................................. 538
INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC.......................................................................................................................... 706
INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen.......................................................................................................................... 706
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth........................................................................................................................ 706
INSTrument:COUPle:BWIDth........................................................................................................................ 706
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer........................................................................................................................707
INSTrument:COUPle:DEMod........................................................................................................................ 707
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN............................................................................................................................707
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit.............................................................................................................................708
INSTrument:COUPle:LLINes......................................................................................................................... 708
INSTrument:COUPle:MARKer.......................................................................................................................708
INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel........................................................................................................................708
INSTrument:COUPle:PROT.......................................................................................................................... 709
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN........................................................................................................................... 709
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>.................................................................................................................. 710
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST?........................................................................................712
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST?........................................................................................ 712
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO.........................................................................................................713
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW?....................................................................................................... 713
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST?....................................................................................... 715
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:RELation...................................................................................................716
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove....................................................................................................716
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe....................................................................................................... 717
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST?.........................................................................................717
INSTrument:COUPle:VBW............................................................................................................................ 709
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate....................................................................................................................463
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace......................................................................................................................463
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]...........................................................................................................................463
INSTrument:DELete.......................................................................................................................................464
INSTrument:LIST?......................................................................................................................................... 464
INSTrument:REName.................................................................................................................................... 465
INSTrument[:SELect]..................................................................................................................................... 465
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 810
R&S®ESW List of commands
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?................................................................................................................................564
LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]?.......................................................................................................................... 565
LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]?.......................................................................................................................... 566
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow]...............................................................................................................................566
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow]............................................................................................................................567
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow].......................................................................................................................... 567
LAYout:SPLitter..............................................................................................................................................567
LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD?............................................................................................................................569
LAYout:WINDow<n>:IDENtify?...................................................................................................................... 569
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove........................................................................................................................570
LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace...................................................................................................................... 570
MMEMory:CATalog........................................................................................................................................ 632
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG............................................................................................................................. 633
MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 633
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL....................................................................................................................................641
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe................................................................................................................................ 641
MMEMory:COMMent..................................................................................................................................... 633
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................................................... 634
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................................................ 634
MMEMory:DELete:IMMediate........................................................................................................................635
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO.................................................................................................................................641
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................................................ 641
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit.............................................................................................................................618
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor....................................................................................................................... 687
MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................................................635
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................................................... 635
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................................................635
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................................................... 636
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect..................................................................................................................636
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP............................................................................................................................. 636
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives............................................................................................................. 637
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives................................................................................................................. 637
MMEMory:RAW............................................................................................................................................. 668
MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 637
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL....................................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................................ 638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings.......................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL.............................................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................................... 639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam.................................................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive]...................................................................................640
MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL................................................................................. 640
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL....................................................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................................................ 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings.......................................................................................................... 638
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL.............................................................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................................................... 639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam.................................................................................................................639
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive]........................................................................................640
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL................................................................................................. 640
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 811
R&S®ESW List of commands
MMEMory:STORe:FINal................................................................................................................................ 494
MMEMory:STORe:PLISt................................................................................................................................494
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe..................................................................................................................... 642
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT...........................................................................................................643
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TYPE...................................................................................................................... 643
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit...........................................................................................................................619
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SGRam......................................................................................................................669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram............................................................................................................ 669
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor..................................................................................................................... 687
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.......................................................................................................................669
OUTPut<ou>:IF:AUDio.................................................................................................................................. 540
OUTPut<ou>:IF:COUPling.............................................................................................................................540
OUTPut<ou>:IF:IFFRequency.......................................................................................................................541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs:FREQuency:MANual............................................................................................... 541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:LPASs[:STATe].....................................................................................................................541
OUTPut<ou>:IF:SCALe[:VALue]....................................................................................................................542
OUTPut<ou>:IF[:SOURce]............................................................................................................................ 542
OUTPut<ou>:LINK.........................................................................................................................................543
OUTPut<ou>:PROBe<pb>[:POWer]..............................................................................................................545
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection........................................................................................................... 545
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel................................................................................................................. 546
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe............................................................................................................... 546
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate..............................................................................................547
OUTPut<up>:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth..................................................................................................547
OUTPut<up>:UPORt:STATe.......................................................................................................................... 539
OUTPut<up>:UPORt[:VALue]........................................................................................................................539
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency................................................................. 676
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency....................................................................................................532
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]..................................................................... 532
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet...................................................................................... 534
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator.............................................................. 533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator.................................................................. 533
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel]............................................................................................... 534
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]................................................................................... 535
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe]...........................................................................................................535
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet....................................................................................... 535
SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend......................................................................................................... 684
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?................................................................................................................... 741
STATus:OPERation:ENABle.......................................................................................................................... 742
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition...................................................................................................................742
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition................................................................................................................... 743
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?........................................................................................................................741
STATus:PRESet.............................................................................................................................................740
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?...............................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle..................................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition.............................................................................................. 742
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition.............................................................................................. 743
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?...............................................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle..................................................................................................................... 742
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 812
R&S®ESW List of commands
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition?............................................................................................. 741
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:ENABle....................................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:CONDition?................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:ENABle.......................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:NTRansition...................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:PTRansition................................................................................... 743
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]?........................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:NTRansition............................................................................................ 742
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:PTRansition.............................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]?................................................................................................. 741
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?.......................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle.................................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition......................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition..........................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.............................................................................................. 741
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition?................................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:ENABle...................................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:NTRansition............................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:PTRansition............................................................................................... 743
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition?.........................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:ENABle............................................................................................... 742
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:NTRansition........................................................................................ 742
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:PTRansition........................................................................................ 743
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>[:EVENt]?............................................................................................. 741
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition.............................................................................................................. 742
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?..................................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle........................................................................................................ 742
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition................................................................................................. 742
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition................................................................................................. 743
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?...................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition.............................................................................................................. 743
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition?........................................................................................ 741
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle...............................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition........................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition........................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?.............................................................................................741
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition?..................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:ENABle............................................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:NTRansition.................................................................................................... 743
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:PTRansition.....................................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]?......................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition?......................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle?..............................................................................................742
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition?...................................................................................... 743
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition?.......................................................................................743
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?............................................................................................. 741
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?................................................................................................................... 741
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?............................................................................................................................... 740
SYSTem:CLOGging.......................................................................................................................................673
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 813
R&S®ESW List of commands
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess...........................................................536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess...........................................................................................719
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator.....................................................................................719
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal:REMote.....................................................................................................718
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt..................................................................................... 654
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]...................................................................................655
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di>................................................................................................655
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface.....................................................................536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK............................................................................ 536
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE...........................................................................537
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle......................................................................................................... 728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO........................................................................................... 728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW...........................................................................................728
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact...................................................................................................... 729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation..................................................................................................... 729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER..................................................................................................729
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL?........................................................................................ 730
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete.....................................................................................730
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL............................................................................. 731
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion...................................................................................................... 731
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess......................................................... 537
SYSTem:DATE...............................................................................................................................................674
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe].................................................................................................................701
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage:STATe.............................................................................................................. 720
SYSTem:DISPlay:MESSage[:TEXT]..............................................................................................................720
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate............................................................................................................................. 720
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL...........................................................................................................................734
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote.................................................................................................................... 720
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay............................................................................................................................... 721
SYSTem:ERRor:EXTended?..........................................................................................................................734
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?...................................................................................................................................734
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?...............................................................................................................................735
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate..........................................................................................................................735
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt................................................................................................................................735
SYSTem:HPCoupling.....................................................................................................................................721
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory............................................................................................................................ 722
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]............................................................................................................................722
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE................................................................................................................................. 721
SYSTem:KLOCk............................................................................................................................................ 722
SYSTem:LANGuage...................................................................................................................................... 722
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset................................................................................................................................. 723
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription............................................................................................................................723
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword................................................................................................................................ 723
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet........................................................................................................................... 739
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]..................................................................................................................... 739
SYSTem:PRESet........................................................................................................................................... 644
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC].............................................................................................................. 644
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible.......................................................................................................................736
SYSTem:PRESet:FILTer................................................................................................................................ 736
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband...............................................................................................................................723
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 814
R&S®ESW List of commands
SYSTem:REBoot............................................................................................................................................673
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory.......................................................................................................................... 724
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing].......................................................................................................................... 724
SYSTem:RSWeep..........................................................................................................................................725
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe]............................................................................................................................ 736
SYSTem:SEQuencer..................................................................................................................................... 471
SYSTem:SHUTdown......................................................................................................................................673
SYSTem:SPEaker:MAXVolume.....................................................................................................................544
SYSTem:SPEaker:MUTE...............................................................................................................................544
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume...........................................................................................................................544
SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................................................... 674
TRACe<n>:COPY..........................................................................................................................................578
TRACe<n>:FEED:CONTrol........................................................................................................................... 476
TRACe<n>:IF[:DATA].....................................................................................................................................476
TRACe<n>:POINts........................................................................................................................................ 477
TRACe<n>[:DATA]?.......................................................................................................................................475
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]................................................................................................... 560
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]..................................................................................................560
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe.................................................................................................................561
TRIGger<tp>[:SEQuence]:SOURce.............................................................................................................. 561
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 815
R&S®ESW Index
Index
Symbols B
*IDN Band
Format ...................................................................... 421 Conversion loss table ............................................... 163
*OPC ............................................................................... 510 External Mixer ........................................................... 158
*OPC? ............................................................................. 510 External Mixer (remote) ............................................ 520
*WAI ................................................................................ 510 Bandwidth ............................................................ 94, 95, 113
75 Ω (channel bar) ............................................................ 56 Bargraph
Bandwidth ........................................................... 94, 113
A Detector .................................................................... 127
Measurement time .............................................. 93, 114
AC (trace information) ....................................................... 57 Bargraph frequency .........................................................182
AC/DC coupling ............................................................... 144 Bias
Alignment Conversion loss table ....................................... 161, 163
Basics ....................................................................... 332 External Mixer ................................................... 149, 160
Performing ........................................................ 337, 338 External Mixer (remote) ............................................ 518
Results ...................................................... 333, 334, 337 Brochures .......................................................................... 23
Settings ..................................................................... 334
touchscreen ...................................................... 333, 336 C
Touchscreen ............................................................. 334
Alphanumeric parameters ................................................. 65 Calibration
Analog Demodulation Frequency ................................................................. 382
Application .................................................................. 81 Frequency MW ......................................................... 383
Annotations Frequency RF ........................................................... 382
Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341 Remote ..................................................................... 458
AP (trace information) ....................................................... 57 Remote control ......................................................... 679
Application cards ............................................................... 23 Results (remote control) ........................................... 679
Application notes ............................................................... 23 RF ............................................................................. 382
Applications Settings ..................................................................... 382
Analog Demodulation ................................................. 81 Signal ........................................................................ 382
CISPR APD ................................................................ 81 Channel
I/Q Analyzer ................................................................ 81 Creating (remote) .............................................. 463, 465
Real-Time Spectrogram .............................................. 81 Deleting (remote) ...................................................... 464
Real-Time Spectrum ................................................... 81 Duplicating (remote) ................................................. 463
Receiver ...................................................................... 80 Querying (remote) ..................................................... 464
Spectrum .................................................................... 81 Renaming (remote) ................................................... 465
APX Replacing (remote) ................................................... 463
External generator .................................................... 177 Selecting (remote) .................................................... 465
Arranging Channel bar
Windows ............................................................. 75, 217 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341
Arrow keys ........................................................................ 44 Information .................................................................. 54
AS (trace information) ....................................................... 57 Information, external generator ................................. 177
ASCII trace export ........................................................... 248 channel settings
Attenuation ...............................................................114, 115 Presetting .................................................................. 283
Attenuation (channel bar) .................................................. 55 Channel settings
Auto ID Display ........................................................................ 54
External Mixer ........................................................... 151 Channels
Auto range ....................................................................... 114 Duplicating .................................................................. 83
Autologin mechanism New ............................................................................. 83
Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 444 Replacing .................................................................... 83
Automatic coupling see also Measurement channels ................................ 70
Frequencies, external generator ....................... 175, 181 Sequential operation ................................................... 84
AUX control Switching .................................................................... 54
TTL synchronization, external generator .................. 170 CISPR APD
Aux. Port Application .................................................................. 81
Connector ................................................................... 50 Clear status
AV (trace information) ........................................................57 Remote ..................................................................... 458
Average mode Closing
Traces ....................................................................... 128 Channels ..................................................................... 71
Averaging Channels (remote) .................................................... 464
Traces (remote control) .............................................502 Windows ............................................................. 74, 216
Windows (remote) ..................................................... 570
CLRW (trace information) ..................................................57
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 816
R&S®ESW Index
Color curve Conventions
Shape ............................................................... 231, 243 SCPI commands ....................................................... 456
Spectrograms ................................................... 231, 247 Conversion loss
Color mapping External Mixer (remote) .................................... 523, 524
Color curve ............................................................... 243 Conversion loss tables .................................................... 162
Color range ............................................................... 243 Available (remote) ..................................................... 526
Color scheme ............................................................ 243 Band (remote) ........................................................... 525
Softkey ...................................................................... 242 Bias (remote) ............................................................ 526
Spectrograms ........................................... 230, 242, 246 Configuring ............................................................... 162
Step by step .............................................................. 246 Creating .................................................................... 162
Value range ............................................................... 231 Deleting (remote) ...................................................... 527
Color scheme External Mixer ................................................... 149, 159
Spectrogram ..................................................... 231, 243 External Mixer (remote) .................................... 523, 524
Colors Harmonic order (remote) .......................................... 528
Assigning to object .................................................... 346 Importing (External Mixer) ........................................ 162
Configuring ....................................................... 346, 349 Managing .................................................................. 161
Display ...................................................................... 344 Mixer type (remote) ................................................... 528
Editing ....................................................................... 344 Saving (External Mixer) ............................................ 165
Predefined ................................................................ 347 Selecting (remote) .................................................... 529
Print .......................................................................... 345 Shifting values (External Mixer) ........................ 164, 165
Printing ...................................................................... 344 Values (External Mixer) ............................................. 164
Restoring .................................................................. 348 Copying
Screen ...................................................................... 345 Channel (remote) ...................................................... 463
User-defined ............................................................. 346 Traces ....................................................................... 238
User-specific ............................................................. 347 Coupling
Command sequence Automatic, external generator ........................... 175, 181
Remote ..................................................................... 462 Frequencies, external generator ............................... 175
Commands GPIB ......................................................................... 424
Tracking .................................................................... 421 GPIB (remote control) ............................................... 721
Comment Manual, external generator ....................................... 181
Limit lines .................................................................. 274 Customer support ............................................................ 798
Screenshots .............................................................. 311
Softkey ...................................................................... 311 D
Compatibility
FSQ, FSP, FSU, FSV ................................................ 423 Data format
GPIB ......................................................................... 422 ASCII ........................................................................ 587
Limit lines .......................................................... 267, 272 Binary ........................................................................ 587
Mode ......................................................................... 423 Remote ..................................................................... 577
Computer name .............................................................. 418 Data sheets ....................................................................... 23
Connector Date
AC power supply ......................................................... 48 Format ...................................................................... 340
Aux. Port ..................................................................... 50 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341
Display Port ................................................................ 48 Instrument setting ..................................................... 339
DVI .............................................................................. 48 Date and Time
External Mixer ........................................................... 165 Printing ...................................................................... 312
GPIB interface ............................................................ 49 Debugging
Headphones ............................................................... 42 Remote control programs ......................................... 793
IF/VIDEO/DEMOD ...................................................... 49 Decimal separator
LAN ............................................................................. 49 Trace export ...................................................... 235, 237
Probe power ............................................................... 42 Default
REF INPUT ................................................................. 50 Restoring settings ..................................................... 282
USB ............................................................................ 49 Default values
Connectors Remote ..................................................................... 460
AUX control, external generator ............................... 170 Deleting
EXT REF ................................................................... 368 Limit line values ........................................................ 276
External generator control ........................................ 170 Delta markers .................................................................. 257
GPIB ......................................................................... 170 Defining ..................................................................... 256
OCXO ......................................................................... 50 Demodulation
REF OUTPUT ........................................................... 370 Squelch ..................................................................... 185
SYNC TRIGGER ................................................ 49, 368 Denominator
Trigger Input ................................................................43 Frequencies, external generator ....................... 175, 182
Trigger Output ............................................................. 43 Device
USB ............................................................................ 41 Softkey ...................................................... 311, 316, 318
Context-sensitive menus ................................................... 63 Device ID ......................................................................... 380
Continuous Sequencer DHCP ...................................................................... 419, 437
Softkey ........................................................................ 86 Diagnostics
Hardware .................................................................. 385
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 817
R&S®ESW Index
Diagram area ESR (event status register) ............................................. 403
Status display ............................................................. 58 Evaluation
Trace information ........................................................ 57 Modes ....................................................................... 212
Diagram footer .................................................................. 58 Modes, adding .................................................... 74, 216
Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341 Evaluation bar
Dialog boxes Using ................................................................... 74, 216
Slider ........................................................................... 64 Evaluation methods
Transparency .............................................................. 64 Remote ..................................................................... 564
Dialogs Event status enable register (ESE) ................................. 403
Printing ...................................................................... 312 Remote ..................................................................... 458
Suppressing file selection ......................................... 316 Event status register (ESR) ..................................... 401, 403
Display Remote ..................................................................... 458
Colors ............................................................... 344, 349 Export format
Config (softkey) ......................................................... 212 Traces ....................................................................... 248
Evaluation bar ..................................................... 74, 216 Exporting
Evaluation methods .................................................. 212 Data .................................................................. 298, 300
Information .................................................................. 53 Functions .................................................................. 291
Settings ..................................................................... 338 I/Q data ............................................. 298, 299, 300, 306
SmartGrid ........................................................... 71, 213 Measurement settings .............................................. 235
Theme ....................................................................... 344 Softkey .............................................................. 298, 300
Update (remote) ........................................................ 421 Trace data ................................................................. 244
Update rate ............................................................... 339 Traces ....................................................... 235, 298, 300
Display lines .................................................................... 264 EXREF (status display) ................................................... 790
Defining ..................................................................... 266 EXT REF
Settings ..................................................................... 265 Status message .......................................................... 58
Display Port Ext.Gen (channel bar) ....................................................... 56
Connector ................................................................... 48 External generator ...........................................................169
Displayed items Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 181
Touchscreen ............................................................. 340 Basics ....................................................................... 170
Disposal .......................................................................... 787 Calibration measurement settings ............................ 180
DNS server Channel bar information ........................................... 177
IP Address ................................................................ 438 Connections .............................................................. 170
Duplicating Coupling frequencies ................................................ 175
Channel (remote) ...................................................... 463 Errors ........................................................................ 177
DVI Generators, supported .............................................. 173
Connector ................................................................... 48 Interface .................................................................... 179
Interface settings ...................................................... 178
E Overloading .............................................................. 178
Reflection measurement ........................................... 172
Enable registers Settings ..................................................................... 178
Remote ..................................................................... 460 Transmission measurement ......................................171
Entering data ..................................................................... 64 TTL synchronization ................................................. 170
ENV216 (LISN) ......................................................... 98, 130 External Mixer ......................................................... 147, 157
ENV432 (LISN) ................................................................. 98 Activating (remote) .................................................... 518
ENV4200 (LISN) ....................................................... 98, 130 Band ................................................................. 158, 520
EOI Basic settings ............................................................ 160
GPIB terminator ........................................................ 421 Bias current ............................................................... 149
Error log .......................................................................... 796 Configuration ............................................................ 156
Error messages Connector ................................................................. 165
Status bar ........................................................... 59, 789 Conversion loss ........................................................ 159
Error queue ..................................................................... 402 Conversion loss tables ...................................... 149, 162
Errors Frequency range ............................................... 148, 157
External generator .................................................... 177 General information .................................................. 147
IF OVLD ............................................................ 410, 790 Handover frequency ................................................. 158
INPUT OVLD .................................................... 410, 790 Harmonic Order ........................................................ 159
LO UNL ..................................................................... 790 Harmonic Type .......................................................... 159
Messages, device-specific ........................................ 791 Measurement example ............................................. 168
NO REF .................................................................... 790 Name ........................................................................ 163
OVEN ........................................................................ 790 Programming example .............................................. 529
OVENCOLD .............................................................. 790 Range ....................................................................... 159
RF OVLD .......................................................... 410, 790 Restoring bands ........................................................ 158
UNCAL .............................................................. 790, 791 RF overrange .................................................... 158, 525
UNLD ........................................................................ 410 RF Start/RF Stop ...................................................... 157
WRONG_FW .................................... 332, 374, 790, 791 Serial number ........................................................... 164
ESE (event status enable register ) ................................ 403 Type .......................................................... 158, 164, 524
ESH2-Z5 (LISN) ........................................................ 98, 130 External monitor
ESH3-Z5 (LISN) ........................................................ 98, 130 Connectors ................................................................. 48
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 818
R&S®ESW Index
External reference Frequency range ..............................................111, 196, 200
External generator .................................................... 172 Calibration sweep, external generator ...................... 175
External generator control ........................................ 180 Extending .................................................................. 148
Frequency ................................................................. 370 External Mixer ........................................................... 148
Input .......................................................................... 368 Frequency step size .......................................................... 96
Loop bandwidth ........................................................ 370 Frequency stepsize ......................................................... 200
Missing ...................................................................... 369 Frequency-converting measurements
Output ....................................................................... 370 External generator .................................................... 175
Settings ..................................................................... 367 Front panel
Status message .......................................................... 58 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 342
Tuning range ............................................................. 370 Frontend
External trigger ................................................................ 208 Temperature .............................................................. 333
EZ-27 (LISN adapter) ................................................ 98, 130 Temperature (remote) ............................................... 684
Temperature, status bit ..............................................411
F FRQ
External generator .................................................... 177
File format Full screen mode ............................................................... 41
Export Files ............................................................... 248 Function keys
Trace export .............................................................. 248 Details - see user manual ........................................... 45
File type Overview ..................................................................... 45
Storage settings ........................................................ 293
filename G
Data files ................................................................... 290
Settings ............................................................. 293, 295 Gain level .........................................................................115
Files Gate
Format, I/Q data ........................................................ 301 Delay ......................................................................... 210
I/Q data binary XML .................................................. 306 Length ....................................................................... 210
I/Q parameter XML ................................................... 302 Measurements .......................................................... 204
Filter .................................................................................. 94 Mode ......................................................................... 209
Final measurement ......................................................... 106 Gated trigger
Bandwidth ........................................................... 94, 113 Activating .................................................................. 209
Detector .................................................................... 127 Delay ......................................................................... 210
Measurement time .............................................. 93, 114 Length ....................................................................... 210
Firmware Mode ......................................................................... 209
Updating ................................................................... 374 Generator
Firmware Update Frequencies, external generator ....................... 175, 182
Remote control ......................................................... 735 Frequency coupling, external generator ................... 181
Focus Frequency offset, external generator ........................ 181
Changing .................................................................... 64 Output power, external generator ............................. 181
Format Generator type
Data .......................................................................... 587 External generator .................................................... 179
Data (remote) ............................................................ 577 Generators
Date and time ........................................................... 340 Frequency range, external generator ....................... 180
see also File format .................................................. 248 Power range, external generator .............................. 180
Frames Setup files, external generator .................. 175, 179, 180
Spectrogram marker ................................................. 256 Supported, external generator .................................. 173
Free Run Getting started ...................................................................22
Trigger .......................................................................208 GPIB
Frequency ....................................................................... 199 Address ............................................................. 420, 442
External generator .................................................... 181 Address, External generator ..................................... 179
External reference .................................................... 370 Coupling .................................................................... 424
Reference ................................................................. 367 External generator .................................................... 179
Step size ................................................................... 113 IF Gain (remote control) ............................................ 721
Frequency (channel bar) ................................................... 56 Language .................................................................. 423
Frequency axis Language (remote control) ....................................... 722
Scaling ...................................................................... 196 Settings ..................................................................... 419
Frequency coupling Terminator ................................................................. 421
Automatic, external generator ................................... 175 TTL synchronization, External generator .................. 179
External generator ............................................ 175, 181 GPIB bus control
Reverse sweep, external generator .......................... 176 Remote ..................................................................... 460
TTL synchronization, external generator .................. 176 GPIB interface
Frequency denominator Configuring - see user manual .................................... 49
External generator .................................................... 182 Connector ................................................................... 49
Frequency numerator Remote control ........................................................... 78
External generator .................................................... 182 GPIB Language ...............................................................414
Frequency offset Graphical zoom ................................................................. 69
External generator ............................................ 175, 182 Grid scale ........................................................................ 195
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 819
R&S®ESW Index
H Input .................................................................................116
Coupling .................................................................... 144
Handover frequency Input (channel bar) ............................................................ 55
External Mixer ................................................... 149, 158 INPUT OVLD
External Mixer (remote) ............................................ 519 Error .......................................................................... 790
Hard drive .......................................................................... 48 INPUT OVLD (status display) ......................................... 790
Hardware Inserting
Check ........................................................................ 374 Limit line values ........................................................ 276
Diagnostics ............................................................... 385 Installing
Information ................................................................ 371 Options ..................................................................... 373
Supported ................................................................. 374 Instrument name
Harmonics Changing .................................................................. 439
Conversion loss table ............................................... 163 Instrument settings
External Mixer (remote) ............................................ 522 Secure user mode .................................................... 286
LO ............................................................................. 148 Interfaces
Order (External Mixer) .............................................. 159 LAN ........................................................................... 396
Type (External Mixer) ................................................ 159 USB .......................................................................... 399
Headphones ...................................................................... 42 IP address ....................................................................... 397
Help ................................................................................... 77 Assigning .................................................................. 437
Hiding/restoring Network ..................................................................... 419
Display items ............................................................ 340 IP Address
HiSLIP DNS server ............................................................... 438
Resource string ......................................................... 397 IP configuration
History LAN ........................................................................... 441
Spectrograms ........................................................... 241 iq-tar
History Depth Example file .............................................................. 304
Softkey ...................................................................... 241 Mandatory data elements ......................................... 303
Horizontal Line 1/2 IST ...................................................................................401
Softkeys .................................................................... 265 IST flag ............................................................................ 403
HP emulation ................................................................... 752 Remote ..................................................................... 459
Items
I Saving ....................................................................... 290
Settings ..................................................................... 293
I/O Logging ......................................................................421
I/Q Analyzer K
Application .................................................................. 81
I/Q data Key
Export file binary data description ............................. 306 DOWN ........................................................................ 44
Export file parameter description .............................. 302 LEFT ........................................................................... 44
Exporting ........................................................... 298, 300 POWER ...................................................................... 41
Importing/Exporting ................................................... 299 Redo ........................................................................... 44
ID String User .................................................................. 414 RIGHT ......................................................................... 44
Identification Undo ........................................................................... 44
Remote ..................................................................... 459 UP ............................................................................... 44
String, R&S ESW ...................................................... 420 Keyboard
String, resetting (R&S ESW) ..................................... 420 On-screen ................................................................... 63
IECWIN ........................................................................... 415 Keypad .............................................................................. 65
IF analysis ............................................................... 103, 201 Key layout ................................................................... 66
IF Gain Overview ..................................................................... 45
GPIB ......................................................................... 424 Keys
GPIB (remote control) ............................................... 721 MKR .......................................................................... 255
IF OVLD MKR ➙ ......................................................................259
Error .......................................................................... 790 Peak Search ............................................................. 263
External generator .................................................... 177 PRESET ................................................................... 282
IF/VIDEO/DEMOD
Connector ................................................................... 49 L
Impedance
Setting ....................................................................... 144 LAN
Importing Configuration ............................................................ 426
Functions .................................................................. 291 Configuring ............................................................... 440
I/Q data ............................................................. 299, 302 Connector ................................................................... 49
Softkey ...................................................................... 300 Interface .................................................................... 396
Information IP address ................................................................. 397
Hardware .................................................................. 371 LAN configuration ..................................................... 441
Options ..................................................................... 372 Password .................................................................. 426
Version ...................................................................... 372 Ping ........................................................................... 441
Remote control interface ........................................... 395
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 820
R&S®ESW Index
Reset ........................................................................ 426 Logarithmic scaling
Settings ..................................................................... 425 Sweep points ............................................................ 196
Web browser interface .............................................. 440 X-axis ........................................................................ 196
Legacy format Logging
*IDN .......................................................................... 421 Remote control programs ......................................... 793
LFEOI Login
GPIB terminator ........................................................ 421 Network ..................................................................... 442
Limit check ...................................................................... 120 Logo
Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 277 Printing ...................................................................... 311
Results ...................................................................... 268 Loop bandwidth
Limit line .......................................................................... 120 External reference .................................................... 370
Limit lines ................................................................ 266, 270 LVL
Activating/Deactivating ............................................. 272 External generator .................................................... 177
Comment .................................................................. 274
Compatibility ..................................................... 267, 272 M
Compatible ................................................................ 277
Copying ............................................................. 273, 278 Maintenance ....................................................................787
Creating ............................................................ 273, 278 Margins
Data points ................................................................ 275 Limit lines .......................................................... 268, 275
Deactivating .............................................................. 273 Violation .................................................................... 268
Defining ..................................................................... 277 Marker
Deleting ............................................................. 273, 278 Information .................................................................. 57
Deleting values ......................................................... 276 Search area (softkey) ............................................... 262
Details ....................................................................... 273 Search type (softkey) ................................................ 262
Editing ............................................................... 273, 278 Marker table
Inserting values ......................................................... 276 Information .................................................................. 57
Managing .................................................................. 270 Marker to Trace ............................................................... 257
Margin ....................................................................... 275 Markers
Margins ..................................................................... 268 Assigned trace .......................................................... 257
Name ........................................................................ 274 Basic settings ............................................................ 255
Offsets .......................................................................268 Configuration (softkey) ...................................... 255, 258
Peak search .............................................................. 260 Deactivating .............................................................. 257
Recalling ................................................................... 287 Delta markers ........................................................... 256
Saving ....................................................... 276, 287, 290 Minimum ................................................................... 263
Selecting ................................................................... 272 Next minimum ........................................................... 263
Shifting ...................................................... 268, 276, 279 Next peak .................................................................. 263
Storing ...................................................................... 270 Peak .......................................................................... 263
Threshold .......................................................... 268, 274 Position ..................................................................... 256
Traces ....................................................................... 272 Spectrograms ................................................... 230, 245
View filter .................................................................. 272 State ......................................................................... 256
Violation .................................................................... 268 Table ......................................................................... 258
Visibility ..................................................................... 272 Tips ........................................................................... 251
X-axis ........................................................................ 275 Type .......................................................................... 256
X-Offset ..................................................................... 272 X-value ...................................................................... 256
Y-axis ........................................................................ 275 MAXH (trace information) .................................................. 57
Y-Offset ..................................................................... 273 Maximize
Limit margin ............................................................. 116, 120 Window ....................................................................... 76
Linear scaling Maximizing
X-axis ........................................................................ 196 Windows (remote) ..................................................... 564
Lines Meas BW (channel bar) .................................................... 55
Configuration ............................................................ 270 Meas Time (channel bar) .................................................. 55
Display ...................................................... 264, 265, 266 Measurement
Horizontal .................................................................. 265 Continuous ................................................................ 105
Limit, see Limit lines ................................................. 270 Single ........................................................................ 105
Vertical ...................................................................... 265 Measurement bandwidth ..................................... 94, 95, 113
LISN .................................................................. 98, 130, 186 Measurement channels
LISN (channel bar) ............................................................ 56 Activating .................................................................... 70
LO Closing ........................................................................ 71
Harmonics ................................................................. 148 Measurement examples
Level (External Mixer) ............................................... 160 External Mixer ........................................................... 168
LO UNL Measurement points .......................................................... 96
Error .......................................................................... 790 Measurement time ..................................................... 93, 114
LO UNL (status display) .................................................. 790 Measurement zoom .......................................................... 69
Loading Measurements
Functions .................................................................. 291 Evaluation methods .................................................. 212
Instrument settings ................................................... 295 Menus
Settings ............................................................. 285, 287 Context-sensitive ........................................................ 63
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 821
R&S®ESW Index
MI (trace information) ........................................................ 57 O
Microsoft Windows
Access ........................................................................ 31 OCXO ................................................................................ 50
MINH (trace information) ................................................... 57 Offset
Mini front panel Limit lines .................................................................. 268
Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 342 On-screen keyboard .................................................... 63, 65
Key combination ....................................................... 343 Online help
Using ......................................................................... 350 Working with ............................................................... 77
Minimum .......................................................................... 263 Online keyboard ................................................................ 41
Marker positioning .................................................... 263 Operating mode
Next .......................................................................... 263 Presetting .................................................................. 376
Minimum attenuation ....................................................... 193 Operating temperature .................................................... 336
Mixer Type Operation complete
External Mixer ........................................................... 158 Remote ..................................................................... 459
MKR Options
Key ............................................................................ 255 External mixer ........................................................... 147
MKR ➙ Identification (remote) ............................................... 459
Key ............................................................................ 259 Information ................................................................ 372
Monitor Installing ............................................................ 372, 373
External ..................................................................... 348 Secure user mode (K33) ..................................... 36, 283
Settings ..................................................................... 348 Orientation
Multiple zoom .................................................................. 218 Screenshot ................................................................ 318
MultiView Out (channel bar) .............................................................. 55
Status display ............................................................. 58 Output
Tab ........................................................................ 79, 84 Buffer ........................................................................ 401
Configuration (softkey) .............................................. 182
N External reference .................................................... 370
Probe power ............................................................. 186
Name Settings ..................................................................... 182
Limit lines .................................................................. 274 Trigger ...............................................................186, 187
Navigation OVEN
Controls ...................................................................... 43 Error .......................................................................... 790
in tables ...................................................................... 43 OVENCOLD
Navigation keys ................................................................. 44 Error .......................................................................... 790
NCor (enhancement label) ................................................ 56 OVENCOLD (status display) ........................................... 790
Network Overheating
Auto-login .................................................................. 444 Shutdown .................................................................... 28
Changing user passwords ........................................ 443 Overlapped commands
Configuration (dialog box) ......................................... 419 Preventing ................................................................. 510
Configuring ....................................................... 395, 435 Overloading
Connecting the instrument ........................................ 436 External generator .................................................... 178
Creating users .......................................................... 443
DNS server ............................................................... 438 P
Login ......................................................................... 442
Operating the instrument .......................................... 442 Parallel poll register enable
Setting up .................................................................. 435 Remote ..................................................................... 460
Settings ..................................................................... 417 Parameters
Sharing directories .................................................... 445 Entering ...................................................................... 65
Next Minimum ................................................................. 263 Password
Marker positioning .................................................... 263 Secure user mode .................................................... 377
Next Mode X Passwords
Softkey ...................................................................... 261 Changing .................................................................. 443
Next Mode Y Secure user mode .............................................. 37, 285
Softkey ...................................................................... 262 Service functions ...................................................... 385
Next Peak ........................................................................ 263 Peak excursion ........................................ 116, 120, 253, 260
Marker positioning .................................................... 263 Peak list ...........................................................................254
NO REF Peak excursion ......................................................... 260
Error .......................................................................... 790 Peak search .....................................................105, 116, 253
Noise Area (spectrograms) ................................................. 262
Saving settings ......................................................... 290 Automatic .................................................................. 254
NOR Deactivating limits ..................................................... 261
External generator .................................................... 177 Excursion .................................................................. 253
Notch (channel bar) ........................................................... 55 Key ............................................................................ 263
Notes ............................................................................... 141 Limits ................................................................ 253, 260
Numerator List ............................................................................ 254
Frequencies, external generator ....................... 175, 182 Mode ................................................................. 260, 261
Numeric parameters .......................................................... 65 Mode (spectrograms) ................................................ 262
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 822
R&S®ESW Index
Threshold .................................................................. 260 R
Type (spectrograms) ................................................. 262
Peaks R&S FSP
Marker positioning .................................................... 263 Emulating .................................................................. 423
Next .......................................................................... 263 Emulating (remote) ................................................... 722
Softkey ...................................................................... 263 R&S FSQ
Persistence spectrum Emulating .................................................................. 423
Spectrogram ............................................................. 231 Emulating (remote) ................................................... 722
Ping ................................................................................. 441 R&S FSU
PK (trace information) ....................................................... 57 Emulating .................................................................. 423
Ports Emulating (remote) ................................................... 722
External Mixer (remote) ............................................ 524 R&S FSV
User .......................................................................... 539 Emulating .................................................................. 423
Position Emulating (remote) ................................................... 722
Limit line values ........................................................ 275 R&S SMA
POWER External generator .................................................... 173
Key .............................................................................. 41 R&S SMW
Power supply External generator .................................................... 173
Connector ................................................................... 48 R&S Support ................................................................... 380
PPE register ............................................................ 401, 403 RBW .................................................................... 94, 95, 113
Preamp (channel bar) ....................................................... 55 IF analysis ................................................................. 201
Preamplifier ..................................................................... 115 Ready for trigger
Preselector ...................................................................... 146 Status register ........................................................... 404
Preset Real-Time Spectrogram
Bands (External Mixer, remote) ................................ 520 Application .................................................................. 81
channel settings ........................................................ 283 Real-Time spectrum
External Mixer ........................................................... 158 Application .................................................................. 81
Key ............................................................................ 282 Rebooting
Recalling settings ...................................................... 297 Remote control ......................................................... 673
Presetting Recalling
Channels ................................................................... 143 Settings ............................................. 285, 287, 291, 295
Pretrigger ........................................................................ 209 Settings for preset ..................................................... 297
Print Screen Softkey ...................................................................... 291
Softkey ...................................................................... 314 Receive frequency .......................................................... 196
Printer Receiver
Selecting ................................................................... 316 Application .................................................................. 80
Printers Receiver frequency ......................................................... 199
Installing .................................................................... 317 Redo
Printing Key .............................................................................. 44
Colors ....................................................... 344, 345, 349 REF INPUT
Medium ..................................................................... 316 Connector ................................................................... 50
Screenshots ...................................................... 314, 319 Reference
Probe power ...................................................................... 42 External ..................................................................... 367
Probe power supply ........................................................ 186 Frequency ................................................................. 367
Product IDs ..................................................................... 400 Internal ...................................................................... 367
Programming examples Softkey ...................................................................... 367
External Mixer ........................................................... 529 Reference frequency
Sequencer ................................................................. 511 Default ...................................................................... 370
Service request ......................................................... 744 External generator ............................................ 172, 180
Statistics ........................................................... 627, 629 Input .......................................................................... 368
PS (channel bar) ............................................................... 55 Output ....................................................................... 370
PSA emulation ................................................................ 780 Reference level
PSA89600 External Mixer ........................................................... 151
Wideband .................................................................. 424 Reference marker ........................................................... 257
PXA emulation ................................................................ 784 Reflection measurement
External generator .................................................... 172
Q Registers ......................................................................... 401
Relay Cycle Counter ....................................................... 386
Quick Config Release notes ................................................................... 23
Traces ....................................................................... 233 Remote control .................................................................. 78
Quick recall Blocked ..................................................................... 792
Settings ..................................................................... 287 Errors ........................................................................ 792
Quick save Interfaces .................................................................. 395
Secure user mode ............................................ 288, 289 LAN settings ............................................................. 425
Settings ..................................................................... 287 Protocols ................................................................... 395
Sequential commands .............................................. 792
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 823
R&S®ESW Index
Remote Desktop ..................................................... 435, 448 Instrument settings ................................................... 295
Client ......................................................................... 449 Limit lines .................................................................. 276
Ending session ......................................................... 452 Screenshots .............................................................. 319
Setting up a connection ............................................ 452 Settings ..................................................................... 291
Setting up controller .................................................. 449 Softkey ...................................................................... 291
Setting up instrument ................................................ 448 Scalar reflection measurement
Remote display External generator .................................................... 172
Update ...................................................................... 421 Scaling ............................................................................ 195
Remote operation Scan ................................................................................ 107
Configuring ............................................................... 395 Bandwidth ........................................................... 94, 113
Deactivating the instrument ...................................... 454 Detector .................................................................... 127
GPIB address ........................................................... 442 Measurement time .............................................. 93, 114
GPIB settings ............................................................ 419 Scan range ...................................................................... 110
see also Remote control ........................................... 395 Scan table ........................................................................112
Setting up .................................................................. 435 Screen
Settings ..................................................................... 416 See Touchscreen ...................................................... 345
Starting ..................................................................... 454 Screenshots
Stopping .................................................................... 455 Printing .............................................................. 314, 319
Removable hard drive ....................................................... 48 Saving ............................................................... 314, 319
Report ............................................................................. 324 Search limits
Reset values Deactivating .............................................................. 261
Remote ..................................................................... 460 Search Limits
Restoring Activating .................................................................. 260
Channel settings ....................................................... 143 Secure user mode
Restricted operation Activating .................................................................. 377
Secure user mode .............................................. 37, 284 Activating/deactivating ........................................ 37, 284
Restrictions Background information ...................................... 36, 283
Storage space ..................................................... 36, 284 Instrument settings ................................................... 286
Result displays Passwords .......................................................... 37, 285
Programming example .............................................. 571 Quick save ........................................................ 288, 289
Result frequency Redirecting storage ............................................. 36, 283
External generator .................................................... 182 Remote ..................................................................... 736
Results Restricted operation ............................................ 37, 284
Data format (remote) ................................................ 577 Self-alignment ................................... 335, 372, 374, 417
Displaying ................................................................... 70 Self-alignment data ............................................. 37, 284
Exporting ................................................................... 235 Storage location ........................................ 291, 292, 295
Managing .................................................................. 282 Transducer settings .................................................. 354
Reverse sweep SecureUser ............................................................... 37, 284
External generator ............................................ 176, 182 Select Frame
Revision string Softkey ...................................................................... 241
GPIB ................................................................. 425, 724 Select Marker .................................................................. 257
GPIB (remote control) ............................................... 724 Self-alignment ................................................................. 334
Resetting ................................................................... 425 Aborting .................................................................... 336
RF attenuation ................................................................. 115 Secure user mode .............. 37, 284, 335, 372, 374, 417
RF input ........................................................................... 116 Starting ..................................................................... 335
RF overrange Self-test
External Mixer ........................................... 148, 158, 525 Performing ........................................................ 337, 380
RF OVLD Remote ..................................................................... 461
Error .......................................................................... 790 Results .............................................................. 380, 684
External generator .................................................... 177 Settings ..................................................................... 380
RF OVLD (status display) ............................................... 790 Temperature .............................................................. 337
RF switch ........................................................................ 358 Sequencer ......................................................................... 55
RM (trace information) ...................................................... 57 Aborted ............................................................. 335, 381
Rotary knob ....................................................................... 44 Activating (remote) .................................................... 470
Channels ..................................................................... 84
S Example ...................................................................... 85
Mode ..................................................................... 84, 86
SA (trace information) ....................................................... 57 Programming example .............................................. 511
Safety instructions ....................................................... 18, 23 Remote ..................................................................... 468
Save/Recall Mode Run Single .................................................................. 85
Settings ..................................................................... 293 Setting up .................................................................... 86
Savesets Single Sweep .............................................................. 85
Settings ..................................................................... 289 Softkey ........................................................................ 86
Saving State ........................................................................... 86
Classified data .................................................... 36, 283 Sequences
Data types ................................................................. 290 Aborting (remote) ...................................................... 470
Functions .................................................................. 291 Mode (remote) .......................................................... 471
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 824
R&S®ESW Index
Sequential commands Install Printer ............................................................. 317
Errors ........................................................................ 792 Line Config ................................................................ 270
Service functions ............................................. 379, 383, 384 Marker Config ................................................... 255, 258
Numeric mode .......................................................... 384 Marker Search Area .................................................. 262
Passwords ................................................................ 385 Marker Search Type ................................................. 262
Results ...................................................................... 385 Marker to Trace .........................................................257
Service manual ................................................................. 22 Min ............................................................................ 263
Service request (SRQ) .................................... 395, 401, 402 Next Min .................................................................... 263
Service request enable register (SRE) .................... 401, 402 Next Mode X ............................................................. 261
Remote ..................................................................... 461 Next Mode Y ............................................................. 262
Settings Next Peak ................................................................. 263
filename ............................................................ 293, 295 Outputs Config .......................................................... 182
Loading ..................................................................... 295 Peak .......................................................................... 263
Managing .................................................................. 282 Print Screen .............................................................. 314
Recalling ........................................................... 285, 287 R&S Support ............................................................. 380
Recalling; restrictions ................................................ 286 Recall ........................................................................ 291
Saving ............................................................... 290, 295 Recall File ......................................................... 290, 294
Storage location ................................................ 292, 295 Reference ................................................................. 367
Storing .............................................................. 285, 287 Save .......................................................................... 291
Setup files Save File ................................................................... 293
External generator .................................... 175, 179, 180 Select Frame ............................................................ 241
SGL (channel bar) ............................................................. 56 Select Marker ............................................................ 257
Shift x Sequencer .................................................................. 86
Limit lines .................................................................. 276 Signal Track .............................................................. 198
Shift y Single Sequencer ....................................................... 86
Limit lines .................................................................. 276 Spectrogram ............................................................. 240
Shifting Startup Recall ........................................................... 294
Limit lines .................................................................. 268 Startup Recall (On/Off) ............................................. 295
Shutdown Status .......................................................................... 62
Automatic .................................................................. 336 System Messages (remote control) .......................... 735
Signal tracking ......................................................... 197, 202 Timestamp ................................................................ 241
Bandwidth ................................................................. 198 Trigger Config ........................................................... 207
Softkey ...................................................................... 198 Vertical Line 1/2 ........................................................ 265
State ......................................................................... 198 Source offset
Threshold .................................................................. 198 External generator .................................................... 181
Trace ......................................................................... 198 Source power
Single Sequencer External generator .................................................... 181
Softkey ........................................................................ 86 Span
Single zoom .................................................................... 218 IF analysis ................................................................. 201
SmartGrid Specifics for
Activating ............................................................ 73, 215 Configuration ............................................................ 143
Arranging windows ............................................. 75, 217 Spectrograms
Display ................................................................ 71, 213 3-dimensional ........................................................... 241
Evaluation bar ..................................................... 74, 216 Activating/Deactivating ..................................... 240, 241
Features .............................................................. 71, 213 Clearing .................................................................... 242
Mode ................................................................... 73, 215 Color curve ............................................... 231, 243, 247
Programming example .............................................. 571 Color mapping .......................................... 230, 242, 246
Soft front panels Color scheme .................................................... 231, 243
Using ......................................................................... 350 Configuring ............................................................... 245
Softkey bar Display ...................................................................... 227
Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341 Display depth (3-D) ................................................... 241
Softkeys Displaying ......................................................... 244, 245
Clear All Messages (remote control) ........................ 735 History depth ............................................................. 241
Clear Spectrogram .................................................... 242 Markers ............................................................. 230, 245
Color Mapping .......................................................... 242 Removing .................................................................. 245
Comment ...................................................................311 Scaling ...................................................................... 229
Continuous Sequencer ............................................... 86 Selecting frames ....................................................... 241
Device ....................................................... 311, 316, 318 Settings ..................................................................... 239
Display Config ........................................................... 212 Softkey ...................................................................... 240
Export ............................................................... 298, 300 Time frames .............................................................. 229
Export config ..................................................... 298, 300 Timestamps ...................................................... 229, 241
External ..................................................................... 208 Value range ....................................................... 231, 246
Free Run ................................................................... 208 Spectrum
History Depth ............................................................ 241 Application .................................................................. 81
Horizontal Line 1/2 .................................................... 265 Split
I/Q Export .......................................................... 298, 300 Window ....................................................................... 76
Import ........................................................................ 300 Split screen mode ............................................................. 41
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 825
R&S®ESW Index
Splitters Switch matrix ................................................................... 358
Window size ................................................................ 75 SYNC TRIGGER
Squelch ........................................................................... 185 Connector ................................................................... 49
SRE (service request enable register) ............................ 402 System
SRQ (service request) ..................................................... 402 Configuration ............................................................ 371
Start frequency ........................................................ 111, 200 Messages ................................................................. 373
Startup recall Preset operating mode ............................................. 376
Remote ..................................................................... 641 System keys ...................................................................... 41
Startup Recall
Softkey ...................................................................... 295 T
Statistics
Programming example ...................................... 627, 629 Tabs
Status bar All ................................................................................ 70
Color coding ........................................................ 59, 789 MultiTab ...................................................................... 54
Error messages .................................................. 59, 789 MultiView .....................................................................79
Error messages, external generator ......................... 177 Switching .................................................................... 54
Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341 TCP/IP
Secure user mode .............................................. 37, 284 Address, External generator ..................................... 179
Status byte External generator .................................................... 179
Remote ............................................................. 458, 461 TDF (channel bar) ............................................................. 56
Status byte (STB) ............................................................ 402 Technical support ............................................................ 796
Status byte register (STB) ............................................... 401 Temperature
Status display .................................................................... 58 Check ........................................................................ 333
Status registers ............................................................... 401 Check (remote) ......................................................... 684
STATus:OPERation ...................................................404 Excessive .................................................................... 28
STATus:QUEStionable .............................................. 405 Frontend ................................................................... 333
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit .............................. 406 Frontend (remote) ..................................................... 684
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended ............................ 407 Frontend, status bit ........................................... 333, 411
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO ...................408 Self-alignment ........................................................... 333
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency ......................... 408 Self-alignment (remote) ............................................ 684
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit ..................................... 409 Status register ........................................................... 411
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin .............................. 409 Template ..........................................................................325
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer ................................. 410 Test report ....................................................................... 324
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature ........................411 Theme
STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature ...............333, 684 Display .............................................................. 344, 345
STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe ..................................... 411 Threshold
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer ........................ 412 Limit lines .......................................................... 268, 274
Status reporting system .................................................. 400 Peak search .............................................................. 260
Common commands ................................................. 457 Signal tracking .......................................................... 198
Step (channel bar) ............................................................. 55 Time
Stepsize Format ...................................................................... 340
Frequency ................................................................. 200 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341
Stop frequency .........................................................111, 200 Instrument setting ..................................................... 339
Storage ............................................................................787 Time frames
Storage location Navigating ................................................................. 230
Data files ................................................................... 290 Selecting ................................................................... 241
Secure user mode .................................... 291, 292, 295 Spectrograms ........................................................... 229
Settings ............................................................. 292, 295 Timestamps
Storage settings Softkey (Spectrogram) .............................................. 241
File type .................................................................... 293 Spectrograms ................................................... 229, 241
Storing Toolbar
Settings ............................................................. 285, 287 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 341
Subnet Mask ................................................................... 419 Overview ..................................................................... 60
Suffixes touchscreen
Common ................................................................... 457 Alignment .......................................................... 333, 336
Support ............................................................................796 Touchscreen
Information ........................................................ 379, 380 Alignment .......................................................... 334, 338
Suppressing Colors ............................................................... 344, 345
File name dialog ....................................................... 316 De-/Activating ........................................................... 339
Sweep points Displayed items ........................................................ 340
Logarithmic x-axis scaling ......................................... 196 Overview ..................................................................... 40
Sweep Repeat Settings ..................................................................... 338
GPIB ......................................................................... 424 Theme ....................................................................... 345
Sweep status Trace information .............................................................. 57
Status register ........................................................... 404 Detector type .............................................................. 57
Sweeps Trace number ..............................................................57
Reverse, external generator ..................................... 176 Window title bar .......................................................... 56
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 826
R&S®ESW Index
Traces U
Average mode ...........................................................128
Averaging (remote control) ....................................... 502 UNCAL
Copying ..................................................................... 238 Error .................................................................. 790, 791
Copying (remote control) .......................................... 578 UNCAL (status display) ................................................... 791
Export format .................................................... 235, 237 Undo
Exporting ........................................................... 235, 244 Key .............................................................................. 44
Mode ......................................................................... 127 Unit .................................................................................. 194
Saving ....................................................................... 290 Update Path
Settings, predefined .................................................. 233 Remote control ......................................................... 735
Traces to be Checked Update rate
Limit lines .................................................................. 272 Display ...................................................................... 339
Tracking Updating
see External generator ............................................. 181 Firmware ................................................................... 374
Tracking bandwidth ......................................................... 198 USB
Tracking generator Address ..................................................................... 399
see External generator ............................................. 169 Connector ................................................................... 49
Tracking threshold ........................................................... 198 Interfaces .................................................................. 399
Transducer break ............................................................ 352 USB port ............................................................................41
Transducer factors .......................................................... 352 User ports
Transducer set ................................................................ 352 Remote control ......................................................... 539
Transducers .................................................................... 353 Users
Checking ................................................................... 364 Network ..................................................................... 443
Compatible ................................................................ 364 Password .................................................................. 443
Configuring ............................................................... 363
Copying ..................................................................... 365 V
Creating .................................................................... 365
Deleting ..................................................................... 365 Vendor ID
Editing ....................................................................... 364 Rohde & Schwarz ..................................................... 399
Recalling ................................................................... 287 Version information ......................................................... 372
Saving ............................................................... 287, 290 Vertical Line 1/2
Secure user mode .................................................... 354 Softkeys .................................................................... 265
Shifting ...................................................................... 366 View filter
Transmission measurement Limit lines .................................................................. 272
External generator .................................................... 171 VISA ................................................................................ 396
TRG (channel bar) ............................................................ 56 Resource string ......................................................... 397
Trigger Visible
Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 207 Limit lines .................................................................. 272
Event (remote) .......................................................... 461 Volatile memory
External, errors ......................................................... 792 Secure user mode .............................................. 36, 283
Input ............................................................................ 43 Volume control .................................................................. 42
Level ......................................................................... 209
offset ......................................................................... 209 W
Offset ........................................................................ 204
Output ................................................................. 43, 187 Wait
Slope ......................................................................... 209 Remote ..................................................................... 462
Source ...................................................................... 208 Waiting for trigger
Status register ........................................................... 404 Status register ........................................................... 404
Trigger output .................................................................. 186 Warmup time ................................................................... 336
Trigger source Web browser
External ..................................................................... 208 Configuration interface .............................................. 440
Free Run ................................................................... 208 White papers ..................................................................... 23
Troubleshooting Wideband
File name error ......................................................... 641 PSA89600 ................................................................. 424
Hardware .................................................................. 385 Window title bar ................................................................. 56
Low frequencies ........................................................ 794 Windows
Overload, external generator .................................... 178 Adding ................................................................. 74, 216
Remote control programs ................................. 421, 793 Adding (remote) ........................................................ 564
Timeout for data capture ........................................... 794 Arranging ............................................................ 75, 217
Trace display .............................................................794 Closing ................................................................ 74, 216
TTL handshake Closing (remote) ....................................................... 570
see TTL synchronization ........................................... 179 Configuring ............................................................... 143
TTL synchronization Dialog boxes ............................................................... 65
AUX control, external generator ............................... 170 Layout (remote) ........................................................ 567
External generator .................................... 170, 176, 179 Maximizing (remote) ................................................. 564
Tuning range Querying (remote) ............................................. 565, 566
External reference .................................................... 370 Replacing (remote) ................................................... 567
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 827
R&S®ESW Index
Size ............................................................................. 75
Splitting (remote) ...................................................... 564
Types (remote) .......................................................... 564
WRONG_FW
Error .................................................. 332, 374, 790, 791
X
X-axis
Limit lines .................................................................. 275
Scaling ...................................................................... 196
X-Offset
Limit lines .................................................................. 272
X-value
Marker ....................................................................... 256
Y
Y-axis
Limit lines .................................................................. 275
Y-Offset
Limit lines .................................................................. 273
Z
Zoom
Graphical .................................................................... 69
Measurement .............................................................. 69
Zooming
Activating (remote) .................................................... 574
Area (Multiple mode, remote) ................................... 575
Area (remote) ............................................................ 573
Multiple mode ........................................................... 218
Multiple mode (remote) ............................................. 575
Restoring original display .......................................... 219
Single mode .............................................................. 218
User Manual 1177.6298.02 ─ 16 828
You might also like
- The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First EditionFrom EverandThe Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First EditionNo ratings yet
- Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language ModelsFrom EverandSecuring ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language ModelsNo ratings yet
- 1 FSWP UserManual en 15 (1-400) (1-200)No ratings yet1 FSWP UserManual en 15 (1-400) (1-200)200 pages
- CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive NetworkingFrom EverandCAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive NetworkingNo ratings yet
- The Off-Grid Blueprint: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-Reliance: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-Reliance: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-RelianceFrom EverandThe Off-Grid Blueprint: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-Reliance: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-Reliance: DIY Survival Projects for Modern Self-RelianceNo ratings yet
- The IPhone 12 Pro Photography User Guide: Your Guide For Smartphone Photography For Taking Pictures Like A Pro Even As A BeginnerFrom EverandThe IPhone 12 Pro Photography User Guide: Your Guide For Smartphone Photography For Taking Pictures Like A Pro Even As A BeginnerNo ratings yet
- Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your BusinessFrom EverandCybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your BusinessNo ratings yet
- Profile Advantage Service Manual Draft ANo ratings yetProfile Advantage Service Manual Draft A195 pages
- Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ ScriptingFrom EverandAdvanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ ScriptingNo ratings yet
- Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your TrafficFrom EverandBlog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your TrafficNo ratings yet
- The Complete Baofeng Radio Guide Guerrilla Techniques to Survive Emergencies, Disaster Preparedness and Off-Grid Communication for PreppersFrom EverandThe Complete Baofeng Radio Guide Guerrilla Techniques to Survive Emergencies, Disaster Preparedness and Off-Grid Communication for PreppersNo ratings yet
- Manual DX PST Hart 7 Iom Topworx en 8194662No ratings yetManual DX PST Hart 7 Iom Topworx en 819466284 pages
- User Manual: R&S Tsme Ultra Compact Drive Test ScannerNo ratings yetUser Manual: R&S Tsme Ultra Compact Drive Test Scanner69 pages
- 02 THU9 THV9 SL1 Servicehandbuch-Ma0700 CDNo ratings yet02 THU9 THV9 SL1 Servicehandbuch-Ma0700 CD284 pages
- Intelivision 5.2, Intelivision 5.2 Marine 1.8.0 Global GuideNo ratings yetIntelivision 5.2, Intelivision 5.2 Marine 1.8.0 Global Guide69 pages
- Bramsit: A Database For Brain Tumor Diagnosis and Detection: A Project Report Submitted byNo ratings yetBramsit: A Database For Brain Tumor Diagnosis and Detection: A Project Report Submitted by10 pages
- Windows Operating System Tutorial - FinalNo ratings yetWindows Operating System Tutorial - Final29 pages
- Stmicroelectronics Sensortile Tutorial: Introduction To Stmicroelectronics Development Environment and Datalog Project Example For Windows PlatformsNo ratings yetStmicroelectronics Sensortile Tutorial: Introduction To Stmicroelectronics Development Environment and Datalog Project Example For Windows Platforms39 pages
- Wxpython Application Development Cookbook - Sample ChapterNo ratings yetWxpython Application Development Cookbook - Sample Chapter24 pages
- Netbackup-Media Manager Device Configuration Guide 5.0No ratings yetNetbackup-Media Manager Device Configuration Guide 5.0147 pages
- C# (Sharp) Tutorial - Create A Rock, Paper and Scissors Game100% (3)C# (Sharp) Tutorial - Create A Rock, Paper and Scissors Game20 pages
- Tools For Battle Management in The Tactical Air Operation CenterNo ratings yetTools For Battle Management in The Tactical Air Operation Center35 pages
- Cisco Wireless Controller Configuration Guide, Release 8.3: Americas HeadquartersNo ratings yetCisco Wireless Controller Configuration Guide, Release 8.3: Americas Headquarters1,122 pages
- Fingerprint Attendance System For Educational InstNo ratings yetFingerprint Attendance System For Educational Inst12 pages
- Software Requirement Specification For Bank Management System40% (5)Software Requirement Specification For Bank Management System10 pages